29 CFR

Title 29
Labor
Part 1926
Revised as of July 1, 2017
Containing a codification of documents

of general applicability and future effect
As of July 1, 2017
Published by the Office of the Federal Register

National Archives and Records Administration
as a Special Edition of the Federal Register
kpayne on DSK54DXVN1OFR with $$_JOB
VerDate Sep<11>2014 10:30 Aug 02, 2017 Jkt 241123 PO 00000 Frm 00001 Fmt 8091 Sfmt 8091 Q:\29\29V8.TXT 31
U.S. GOVERNMENT OFFICIAL EDITION NOTICE
Legal Status and Use of Seals and Logos

The seal of the National Archives and Records Administration
(NARA) authenticates the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) as
the official codification of Federal regulations established under
the Federal Register Act. Under the provisions of 44 U.S.C. 1507, the
contents of the CFR, a special edition of the Federal Register, shall
be judicially noticed. The CFR is prima facie evidence of the origi-
nal documents published in the Federal Register (44 U.S.C. 1510).
It is prohibited to use NARA’s official seal and the stylized Code
of Federal Regulations logo on any republication of this material
without the express, written permission of the Archivist of the
United States or the Archivist’s designee. Any person using
NARA’s official seals and logos in a manner inconsistent with the
provisions of 36 CFR part 1200 is subject to the penalties specified
in 18 U.S.C. 506, 701, and 1017.
Use of ISBN Prefix

This is the Official U.S. Government edition of this publication
and is herein identified to certify its authenticity. Use of the 0–16
ISBN prefix is for U.S. Government Publishing Office Official Edi-
tions only. The Superintendent of Documents of the U.S. Govern-
ment Publishing Office requests that any reprinted edition clearly
be labeled as a copy of the authentic work with a new ISBN.
U.S. GOVERNMENT PUBLISHING OFFICE
U.S. Superintendent of Documents • Washington, DC 20402–0001

http://bookstore.gpo.gov
gpologo2.eps</GPH>
Phone: toll-free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800

archives.ai</GPH>
Table of Contents
Page
Explanation ................................................................................................ v
Title 29:
SUBTITLE B—REGULATIONS RELATING TO LABOR (CONTINUED)
Chapter XVII—Occupational Safety and Health Administration,

Department of Labor (Continued) ............................................... 5
Finding Aids:
Table of CFR Titles and Chapters ....................................................... 791
Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR ......................... 811
List of CFR Sections Affected ............................................................. 821

iii
Cite this Code: CFR
To cite the regulations in

this volume use title,
part and section num-
ber. Thus, 29 CFR
1926.1 refers to title 29,
part 1926, section 1.
iv
Explanation
The Code of Federal Regulations is a codification of the general and permanent
rules published in the Federal Register by the Executive departments and agen-
cies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided into 50 titles which represent
broad areas subject to Federal regulation. Each title is divided into chapters
which usually bear the name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further sub-
divided into parts covering specific regulatory areas.
Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar year and issued
on a quarterly basis approximately as follows:
Title 1 through Title 16..............................................................as of January 1
Title 17 through Title 27 .................................................................as of April 1
Title 28 through Title 41 ..................................................................as of July 1
Title 42 through Title 50 .............................................................as of October 1
The appropriate revision date is printed on the cover of each volume.
LEGAL STATUS
The contents of the Federal Register are required to be judicially noticed (44
U.S.C. 1507). The Code of Federal Regulations is prima facie evidence of the text
of the original documents (44 U.S.C. 1510).
HOW TO USE THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS
The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual issues
of the Federal Register. These two publications must be used together to deter-
mine the latest version of any given rule.
To determine whether a Code volume has been amended since its revision date
(in this case, July 1, 2017), consult the ‘‘List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA),’’
which is issued monthly, and the ‘‘Cumulative List of Parts Affected,’’ which
appears in the Reader Aids section of the daily Federal Register. These two lists
will identify the Federal Register page number of the latest amendment of any
given rule.
EFFECTIVE AND EXPIRATION DATES
Each volume of the Code contains amendments published in the Federal Reg-
ister since the last revision of that volume of the Code. Source citations for
the regulations are referred to by volume number and page number of the Federal
Register and date of publication. Publication dates and effective dates are usu-
ally not the same and care must be exercised by the user in determining the
actual effective date. In instances where the effective date is beyond the cut-
off date for the Code a note has been inserted to reflect the future effective
date. In those instances where a regulation published in the Federal Register
states a date certain for expiration, an appropriate note will be inserted following
the text.
OMB CONTROL NUMBERS
The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (Pub. L. 96–511) requires Federal agencies
to display an OMB control number with their information collection request.
Many agencies have begun publishing numerous OMB control numbers as amend-
ments to existing regulations in the CFR. These OMB numbers are placed as
close as possible to the applicable recordkeeping or reporting requirements.
PAST PROVISIONS OF THE CODE
Provisions of the Code that are no longer in force and effect as of the revision
date stated on the cover of each volume are not carried. Code users may find
the text of provisions in effect on any given date in the past by using the appro-
priate List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA). For the convenience of the reader,
a ‘‘List of CFR Sections Affected’’ is published at the end of each CFR volume.
For changes to the Code prior to the LSA listings at the end of the volume,
consult previous annual editions of the LSA. For changes to the Code prior to
2001, consult the List of CFR Sections Affected compilations, published for 1949-
1963, 1964-1972, 1973-1985, and 1986-2000.
‘‘[RESERVED]’’ TERMINOLOGY
The term ‘‘[Reserved]’’ is used as a place holder within the Code of Federal
Regulations. An agency may add regulatory information at a ‘‘[Reserved]’’ loca-
tion at any time. Occasionally ‘‘[Reserved]’’ is used editorially to indicate that
a portion of the CFR was left vacant and not accidentally dropped due to a print-
ing or computer error.
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
What is incorporation by reference? Incorporation by reference was established
by statute and allows Federal agencies to meet the requirement to publish regu-
lations in the Federal Register by referring to materials already published else-
where. For an incorporation to be valid, the Director of the Federal Register
must approve it. The legal effect of incorporation by reference is that the mate-
rial is treated as if it were published in full in the Federal Register (5 U.S.C.
552(a)). This material, like any other properly issued regulation, has the force
of law.
What is a proper incorporation by reference? The Director of the Federal Register
will approve an incorporation by reference only when the requirements of 1 CFR
part 51 are met. Some of the elements on which approval is based are:
(a) The incorporation will substantially reduce the volume of material pub-
lished in the Federal Register.
(b) The matter incorporated is in fact available to the extent necessary to
afford fairness and uniformity in the administrative process.
(c) The incorporating document is drafted and submitted for publication in
accordance with 1 CFR part 51.
What if the material incorporated by reference cannot be found? If you have any
problem locating or obtaining a copy of material listed as an approved incorpora-
tion by reference, please contact the agency that issued the regulation containing
that incorporation. If, after contacting the agency, you find the material is not
available, please notify the Director of the Federal Register, National Archives
and Records Administration, 8601 Adelphi Road, College Park, MD 20740-6001, or
call 202-741-6010.
CFR INDEXES AND TABULAR GUIDES
A subject index to the Code of Federal Regulations is contained in a separate
volume, revised annually as of January 1, entitled CFR INDEX AND FINDING AIDS.
This volume contains the Parallel Table of Authorities and Rules. A list of CFR
titles, chapters, subchapters, and parts and an alphabetical list of agencies pub-
lishing in the CFR are also included in this volume.
vi
An index to the text of ‘‘Title 3—The President’’ is carried within that volume.
The Federal Register Index is issued monthly in cumulative form. This index
is based on a consolidation of the ‘‘Contents’’ entries in the daily Federal Reg-
ister.
A List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA) is published monthly, keyed to the
revision dates of the 50 CFR titles.
REPUBLICATION OF MATERIAL
There are no restrictions on the republication of material appearing in the
Code of Federal Regulations.
INQUIRIES
For a legal interpretation or explanation of any regulation in this volume,
contact the issuing agency. The issuing agency’s name appears at the top of
odd-numbered pages.
For inquiries concerning CFR reference assistance, call 202–741–6000 or write
to the Director, Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records
Administration, 8601 Adelphi Road, College Park, MD 20740-6001 or e-mail
fedreg.info@nara.gov.
SALES
The Government Publishing Office (GPO) processes all sales and distribution
of the CFR. For payment by credit card, call toll-free, 866-512-1800, or DC area,
202-512-1800, M-F 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. e.s.t. or fax your order to 202-512-2104, 24 hours
a day. For payment by check, write to: US Government Publishing Office – New
Orders, P.O. Box 979050, St. Louis, MO 63197-9000.
ELECTRONIC SERVICES
The full text of the Code of Federal Regulations, the LSA (List of CFR Sections
Affected), The United States Government Manual, the Federal Register, Public
Laws, Public Papers of the Presidents of the United States, Compilation of Presi-
dential Documents and the Privacy Act Compilation are available in electronic
format via www.ofr.gov. For more information, contact the GPO Customer Con-
tact Center, U.S. Government Publishing Office. Phone 202-512-1800, or 866-512-
1800 (toll-free). E-mail, ContactCenter@gpo.gov.
The Office of the Federal Register also offers a free service on the National
Archives and Records Administration’s (NARA) World Wide Web site for public
law numbers, Federal Register finding aids, and related information. Connect
to NARA’s web site at www.archives.gov/federal-register.
The e-CFR is a regularly updated, unofficial editorial compilation of CFR ma-
terial and Federal Register amendments, produced by the Office of the Federal
Register and the Government Publishing Office. It is available at www.ecfr.gov.
OLIVER A. POTTS,
Director,
Office of the Federal Register.
July 1, 2017.
vii
THIS TITLE
Title 29—LABOR is composed of nine volumes. The parts in these volumes are
arranged in the following order: Parts 0–99, parts 100–499, parts 500–899, parts 900–
1899, part 1900–§ 1910.999, part 1910.1000–end of part 1910, parts 1911–1925, part 1926,
and part 1927 to end. The contents of these volumes represent all current regula-
tions codified under this title as of July 1, 2017.
The OMB control numbers for title 29 CFR part 1910 appear in § 1910.8. For
the convenience of the user, § 1910.8 appears in the Finding Aids section of the
volume containing § 1910.1000 to the end.
Subject indexes appear following the occupational safety and health standards
(part 1910).
For this volume, Ann Worley was Chief Editor. The Code of Federal Regula-
tions publication program is under the direction of John Hyrum Martinez, as-
sisted by Stephen J. Frattini.
ix
Title 29—Labor
(This book contains part 1926)
SUBTITLE B—REGULATIONS RELATING TO LABOR (CONTINUED)

Part
CHAPTER XVII—Occupational Safety and Health Administra-

tion, Department of Labor (Continued) ............................. 1926
Subtitle B—Regulations
Relating to Labor
(Continued)
CHAPTER XVII—OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND
HEALTH ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT OF
LABOR (CONTINUED)
Part Page
1926 Safety and health regulations for construction ...... 7
PART 1926—SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.61 Retention of DOT markings, plac-
ards and labels.
REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 1926.62 Lead.
1926.64 Process safety management of high-
Subpart A—General ly hazardous chemicals.
1926.65 Hazardous waste operations and
Sec.
1926.1 Purpose and scope. emergency response.
1926.2 Variances from safety and health 1926.66 Criteria for design and construction
standards. of spray booths.
1926.3 Inspections—right of entry.
1926.4 Rules of practice for administrative Subpart E—Personal Protective and Life
adjudications for enforcement of safety Saving Equipment
and health standards.
1926.5 OMB control numbers under the Pa- 1926.95 Criteria for personal protective
perwork Reduction Act. equipment.
1926.6 Incorporation by reference. 1926.96 Occupational foot protection.
1926.97 Electrical protective equipment.
Subpart B—General Interpretations 1926.98 [Reserved]
1926.100 Head protection.
1926.10 Scope of subpart. 1926.101 Hearing protection.
1926.11 Coverage under section 103 of the act 1926.102 Eye and face protection.
distinguished. 1926.103 Respiratory protection.
1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950. 1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and lanyards.
1926.13 Interpretation of statutory terms. 1926.105 Safety nets.
1926.14 Federal contract for ‘‘mixed’’ types
1926.106 Working over or near water.
of performance.
1926.107 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.15 Relationship to the Service Contract
part.
Act; Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act.
1926.16 Rules of construction.
Subpart F—Fire Protection and Prevention
Subpart C—General Safety and Health 1926.150 Fire protection.
Provisions 1926.151 Fire prevention.
1926.20 General safety and health provi- 1926.152 Flammable liquids.
sions. 1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas (LP-Gas).
1926.21 Safety training and education. 1926.154 Temporary heating devices.
1926.22 Recording and reporting of injuries. 1926.155 Definitions applicable to this sub-
[Reserved] part.
1926.23 First aid and medical attention.
1926.24 Fire protection and prevention. Subpart G—Signs, Signals, and Barricades
1926.25 Housekeeping.
1926.26 Illumination. 1926.200 Accident prevention signs and tags.
1926.27 Sanitation. 1926.201 Signaling.
1926.28 Personal protective equipment. 1926.202 Barricades.
1926.29 Acceptable certifications. 1926.203 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repairing. part.
1926.32 Definitions.
1926.33 Access to employee exposure and Subpart H—Materials Handling, Storage,
medical records. Use, and Disposal
1926.34 Means of egress.
1926.35 Employee emergency action plans. 1926.250 General requirements for storage.
1926.251 Rigging equipment for material
Subpart D—Occupational Health and handling.
Environmental Controls 1926.252 Disposal of waste materials.
1926.50 Medical services and first aid. Subpart I—Tools—Hand and Power
1926.51 Sanitation.
1926.52 Occupational noise exposure. 1926.300 General requirements.
1926.53 Ionizing radiation. 1926.301 Hand tools.
1926.54 Nonionizing radiation. 1926.302 Power-operated hand tools.
1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, and 1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools.
mists. 1926.304 Woodworking tools.
1926.56 Illumination. 1926.305 Jacks—lever and ratchet, screw,
and hydraulic.
1926.57 Ventilation.
1926.58 [Reserved] 1926.306 Air receivers.
1926.59 Hazard communication. 1926.307 Mechanical power-transmission ap-
1926.60 Methylenedianiline. paratus.
Pt. 1926 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
Subpart J—Welding and Cutting APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926—

LIST OF NATIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS
1926.350 Gas welding and cutting. APPENDIX D TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926—
1926.351 Arc welding and cutting. LIST OF TRAINING TOPICS FOR SCAFFOLD
1926.352 Fire prevention. ERECTORS AND DISMANTLERS [RESERVED]
1926.353 Ventilation and protection in weld- APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926—
ing, cutting, and heating. DRAWINGS AND ILLUSTRATIONS
1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heating in
way of preservative coatings. Subpart M—Fall Protection
Subpart K—Electrical 1926.500 Scope, application, and definitions
applicable to this subpart.
GENERAL 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection.
1926.400 Introduction. 1926.502 Fall protection systems criteria
1926.401 [Reserved] and practices.
1926.503 Training requirements.
INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS APPENDIX A TO SUBPART M OF PART 1926—DE-
1926.402 Applicability. TERMINING ROOF WIDTHS
1926.403 General requirements. APPENDIX B TO SUBPART M OF PART 1926—
1926.404 Wiring design and protection. GUARDRAIL SYSTEMS
1926.405 Wiring methods, components, and APPENDIX C TO SUBPART M OF PART 1926—
equipment for general use. PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEMS
1926.406 Specific purpose equipment and in- APPENDIX D TO SUBPART M OF PART 1926—PO-
stallations. SITIONING DEVICE SYSTEMS
1926.407 Hazardous (classified) locations. APPENDIX E TO SUBPART M OF PART 1926—
1926.408 Special systems. SAMPLE FALL PROTECTION PLANS
1926.409–1926.415 [Reserved]
Subpart N—Helicopters, Hoists, Elevators,
SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES and Conveyors
1926.416 General requirements.
1926.417 Lockout and tagging of circuits. 1926.550 [Reserved]
1926.418–1926.430 [Reserved] 1926.551 Helicopters.
1926.552 Material hoists, personnel hoists,
SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE AND and elevators.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS 1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists.
1926.554 Overhead hoists.
1926.431 Maintenance of equipment. 1926.555 Conveyors.
1926.432 Environmental deterioration of
equipment. Subpart O—Motor Vehicles, Mechanized
1926.433–1926.440 [Reserved]
Equipment, and Marine Operations
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL
EQUIPMENT 1926.600 Equipment.
1926.601 Motor vehicles.
1926.441 Batteries and battery charging. 1926.602 Material handling equipment.
1926.442–1926.448 [Reserved] 1926.603 Pile driving equipment.
1926.604 Site clearing.
DEFINITIONS 1926.605 Marine operations and equipment.
1926.449 Definitions applicable to this sub- 1926.606 Definitions applicable to this sub-
part. part.
Subpart L—Scaffolds Subpart P—Excavations

1926.450 Scope, application and definitions 1926.650 Scope, application, and definitions
applicable to this subpart. applicable to this subpart.
1926.451 General requirements. 1926.651 Specific excavation requirements.
1926.452 Additional requirements applicable 1926.652 Requirements for protective sys-
to specific types of scaffolds. tems.
1926.453 Aerial lifts. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—
1926.454 Training requirements. SOIL CLASSIFICATION
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926— APPENDIX B TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—
SCAFFOLD SPECIFICATIONS SLOPING AND BENCHING
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926—CRI- APPENDIX C TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—
TERIA FOR DETERMINING THE FEASIBILITY TIMBER SHORING FOR TRENCHES

OF PROVIDING SAFE ACCESS AND FALL APPENDIX D TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—
PROTECTION FOR SCAFFOLD ERECTORS AND ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING FOR
DISMANTLERS [RESERVED] TRENCHES
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—AL- APPENDIX G TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926—
TERNATIVES TO TIMBER SHORING § 1926.502 (b)–(e) FALL PROTECTION SYS-
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—SE- TEMS CRITERIA AND PRACTICES
LECTION OF PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS APPENDIX H TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926—
DOUBLE CONNECTIONS: ILLUSTRATION OF A
Subpart Q—Concrete and Masonry CLIPPED END CONNECTION AND A STAG-
Construction GERED CONNECTION: NON-MANDATORY
GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH
1926.700 Scope, application, and definitions § 1926.756(c)(1)
applicable to this subpart.
1926.701 General requirements. Subpart S—Underground Construction,
1926.702 Requirements for equipment and Caissons, Cofferdams and Compressed Air
tools.
1926.703 Requirements for cast-in-place con- 1926.800 Underground construction.
crete. 1926.801 Caissons.
1926.704 Requirements for precast concrete. 1926.802 Cofferdams.
1926.705 Requirements for lift-slab construc- 1926.803 Compressed air.
tion operations. 1926.804 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.706 Requirements for masonry con- part.
struction.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S OF PART 1926—DE-
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Q OF PART 1926—
COMPRESSION TABLES
REFERENCES TO SUBPART Q OF PART 1926
Subpart R—Steel Erection Subpart T—Demolition
1926.750 Scope. 1926.850 Preparatory operations.

1926.751 Definitions. 1926.851 Stairs, passageways, and ladders.
1926.752 Site layout, site-specific erection 1926.852 Chutes.
plan and construction sequence. 1926.853 Removal of materials through floor
1926.753 Hoisting and rigging. openings.
1926.754 Structural steel assembly. 1926.854 Removal of walls, masonry sec-
1926.755 Column anchorage. tions, and chimneys.
1926.756 Beams and columns. 1926.855 Manual removal of floors.
1926.757 Open web steel joists. 1926.856 Removal of walls, floors, and mate-
1926.758 Systems-engineered metal build- rial with equipment.
ings. 1926.857 Storage.
1926.759 Falling object protection. 1926.858 Removal of steel construction.
1926.760 Fall protection. 1926.859 Mechanical demolition.
1926.761 Training. 1926.860 Selective demolition by explosives.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926—
GUIDELINES FOR ESTABLISHING THE COM- Subpart U—Blasting and the Use of
PONENTS OF A SITE-SPECIFIC ERECTION Explosives
PLAN: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR
COMPLYING WITH § 1926.752(e) 1926.900 General provisions.
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926 [RE- 1926.901 Blaster qualifications.
SERVED] 1926.902 Surface transportation of explo-
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926—IL- sives.
LUSTRATIONS OF BRIDGING TERMINUS 1926.903 Underground transportation of ex-
POINTS: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR plosives.
COMPLYING WITH §§ 1926.757(a)(10) AND 1926.904 Storage of explosives and blasting
§ 1926.757(c)(5) agents.
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926—IL- 1926.905 Loading of explosives or blasting
LUSTRATION OF THE USE OF CONTROL
agents.
LINES TO DEMARCATE CONTROLLED DECK-
1926.906 Initiation of explosive charges—
ING ZONES (CDZS): NON-MANDATORY
electric blasting.
1926.907 Use of safety fuse.
§ 1926.760(c)(3)
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926— 1926.908 Use of detonating cord.
TRAINING: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES 1926.909 Firing the blast.
FOR COMPLYING WITH § 1926.761 1926.910 Inspection after blasting.
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926—PE- 1926.911 Misfires.
RIMETER COLUMNS: NON-MANDATORY 1926.912 Underwater blasting.
1926.913 Blasting in excavation work under

§ 1926.756(e) TO PROTECT THE UNPRO- compressed air.
TECTED SIDE OR EDGE OF A WALKING/ 1926.914 Definitions applicable to this sub-
WORKING SURFACE part.
Pt. 1926 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
Subpart V—Electric Power Transmission Subpart X—Stairways and Ladders

and Distribution
1926.1050 Scope, application, and definitions
1926.950 General. applicable to this subpart.
1926.951 Medical services and first aid. 1926.1051 General requirements.
1926.952 Job briefing. 1926.1052 Stairways.
1926.953 Enclosed spaces. 1926.1053 Ladders.
1926.954 Personal protective equipment. 1926.1054–1926.1059 [Reserved]
1926.955 Portable ladders and platforms. 1926.1060 Training requirements.
1926.956 Hand and portable power equip- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART X OF PART 1926—
ment. LADDERS
1926.957 Live-line tools.
1926.958 Materials handling and storage. Subpart Y—Diving
1926.959 Mechanical equipment. GENERAL
1926.960 Working on or near exposed ener-
gized parts. 1926.1071 Scope and application.
1926.961 Deenergizing lines and equipment 1926.1072 Definitions.
for employee protection.
PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
1926.962 Grounding for the protection of em-
ployees. 1926.1076 Qualifications of dive team.
1926.963 Testing and test facilities.
1926.964 Overhead lines and live-line bare- GENERAL OPERATIONS PROCEDURES
hand work. 1926.1080 Safe practices manual.
1926.965 Underground electrical installa- 1926.1081 Pre-dive procedures.
tions. 1926.1082 Procedures during dive.
1926.966 Substations. 1926.1083 Post-dive procedures.
1926.967 Special conditions.
1926.968 Definitions. SPECIFIC OPERATIONS PROCEDURES
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926— 1926.1084 SCUBA diving.
[RESERVED] 1926.1085 Surface-supplied air diving.
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926— 1926.1086 Mixed-gas diving.
WORKING ON EXPOSED ENERGIZED PARTS 1926.1087 Liveboating.
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926—
PROTECTION FROM HAZARDOUS DIF- EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES AND REQUIREMENTS
FERENCES IN ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 1926.1090 Equipment.
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926—
METHODS OF INSPECTING AND TESTING RECORDKEEPING
WOOD POLES 1926.1091 Recordkeeping requirements.
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926—
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Y OF PART 1926—EX-
PROTECTION FROM FLAMES AND ELECTRIC
AMPLES OF CONDITIONS WHICH MAY RE-
ARCS
STRICT OR LIMIT EXPOSURE TO
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926—
HYPERBARIC CONDITIONS
WORK-POSITIONING EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART Y OF PART 1926—
GUIDELINES
GUIDELINES FOR SCIENTIFIC DIVING
APPENDIX G TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926—
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS Subpart Z—Toxic and Hazardous
Subpart W—Rollover Protective Structures; Substances
Overhead Protection 1926.1100 [Reserved]
1926.1101 Asbestos.
1926.1000 Rollover protective structures 1926.1102 Coal tar pitch volatiles; interpre-
(ROPS) for material handling equipment. tation of term.
1926.1001 Minimum performance criteria for 1926.1103 13 carcinogens (4-Nitrobiphenyl,
rollover protective structures for des- etc.).
ignated scrapers, loaders, dozers, graders, 1926.1104 alpha-Naphthylamine.
and crawler tractors. 1926.1105 [Reserved]
1926.1002 Protective frames (roll-over pro- 1926.1106 Methyl chloromethyl ether.
tective structures, known as ROPS) for 1926.1107 3,3′-Dichlorobenzidiene (and its
wheel-type agricultural and industrial salts).
tractors used in construction. 1926.1108 bis-Chloromethyl ether.
1926.1003 Overhead protection for operators 1926.1109 beta-Naphthylamine.
of agricultural and industrial tractors
1926.1110 Benzidine.
used in construction. 1926.1111 4-Aminodiphenyl.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART W OF PART 1926— 1926.1112 Ethyleneimine.
FIGURES W–14 THROUGH W–28 1926.1113 beta-Propiolactone.
10
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926
1926.1114 2-Acetylaminofluorene. 1926.1414 Wire rope—selection and installa-
1926.1115 4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene. tion criteria.
1926.1116 N-Nitrosodimethylamine. 1926.1415 Safety devices.
1926.1117 Vinyl chloride. 1926.1416 Operational aids.
1926.1118 Inorganic arsenic. 1926.1417 Operation.
1926.1124 Beryllium. 1926.1418 Authority to stop operation.
1926.1126 Chromium (VI). 1926.1419 Signals—general requirements.
1926.1127 Cadmium. 1926.1420 Signals—radio, telephone or other
1926.1128 Benzene. electronic transmission of signals.
1926.1129 Coke oven emissions. 1926.1421 Signals—voice signals—additional
1926.1144 1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane. requirements.
1926.1145 Acrylonitrile. 1926.1422 Signals—hand signal chart.
1926.1147 Ethylene oxide. 1926.1423 Fall protection.
1926.1148 Formaldehyde. 1926.1424 Work area control.
1926.1152 Methylene chloride. 1926.1425 Keeping clear of the load.
1926.1153 Respirable crystalline silica. 1926.1426 Free fall and controlled load low-
ering.
Subpart AA—Confined Spaces in 1926.1427 Operator qualification and certifi-
Construction cation.
1926.1428 Signal person qualifications.
1926.1200 [Reserved]
1926.1429 Qualifications of maintenance &
1926.1201 Scope.
repair employees.
1926.1202 Definitions.
1926.1430 Training.
1926.1203 General requirements.
1926.1431 Hoisting personnel.
1926.1204 Permit-required confined space
1926.1432 Multiple-crane/derrick lifts—sup-
program.
plemental requirements.
1926.1205 Permitting process.
1926.1433 Design, construction and testing.
1926.1206 Entry permit.
1926.1434 Equipment modifications.
1926.1207 Training.
1926.1208 Duties of authorized entrants. 1926.1435 Tower cranes.
1926.1209 Duties of attendants. 1926.1436 Derricks.
1926.1210 Duties of entry supervisors. 1926.1437 Floating cranes/derricks and land
1926.1211 Rescue and emergency services. cranes/derricks on barges.
1926.1212 Employee participation. 1926.1438 Overhead & gantry cranes.
1926.1213 Provision of documents to Sec- 1926.1439 Dedicated pile drivers.
retary. 1926.1440 Sideboom cranes.
1926.1441 Equipment with a rated hoisting/
Subpart BB [Reserved] lifting capacity of 2,000 pounds or less.
1926.1442 Severability.
Subpart CC—Cranes and Derricks in APPENDIX A TO SUBPART CC OF PART 1926—
Construction STANDARD HAND SIGNALS
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART CC OF PART 1926—
1926.1400 Scope. ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY—SAMPLE PROCE-
1926.1401 Definitions. DURES FOR MINIMIZING THE RISK OF UNIN-
1926.1402 Ground conditions. TENDED DANGEROUS BOOM MOVEMENT
1926.1403 Assembly/Disassembly—selection APPENDIX C TO SUBPART CC OF PART 1926—
of manufacturer or employer procedures. OPERATOR CERTIFICATION—WRITTEN EX-
1926.1404 Assembly/Disassembly—general re- AMINATION—TECHNICAL KNOWLEDGE CRI-
quirements (applies to all assembly and TERIA
disassembly operations). APPENDIX A TO PART 1926—DESIGNATIONS FOR
1926.1405 Disassembly—additional require- GENERAL INDUSTRY STANDARDS INCOR-
ments for dismantling of booms and jibs PORATED INTO BODY OF CONSTRUCTION
(applies to both the use of manufacturer STANDARDS
procedures and employer procedures).
SOURCE: 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR
1926.1406 Assembly/Disassembly—employer
20940, Apr. 6, 1979, unless otherwise noted.
procedures—general requirements.
1926.1407 Power line safety (up to 350 kV)— EDITORIAL NOTE: At 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979,
assembly and disassembly. and corrected at 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979,
1926.1408 Power line safety (up to 350 kV)— OSHA reprinted without change the entire
equipment operations. text of 29 CFR part 1926 together with cer-
1926.1409 Power line safety (over 350 kV). tain General Industry Occupational Safety
1926.1410 Power line safety (all voltages)— and Health Standards contained in 29 CFR
equipment operations closer than the part 1910, which have been identified as also
Table A zone. applicable to construction work. This repub-

1926.1411 Power line safety—while traveling. lication developed a single set of OSHA regu-
1926.1412 Inspections. lations for both labor and management
1926.1413 Wire rope—inspection. forces within the construction industry.
11
§ 1926.1 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
Subpart A—General § 1926.3 Inspections—right of entry.

(a) It shall be a condition of each
AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; 29 U.S.C. contract which is subject to section 107
653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 Standards Act that the Secretary of
FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), Labor or any authorized representative
3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), or 5– shall have a right of entry to any site
2007 (72 FR 31160), 5–2007 (72 FR 31160), 4–2010 of contract performance for the fol-
(75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as appli- lowing purposes:
cable; and 29 CFR Part 1911. (1) To inspect or investigate the mat-
ter of compliance with the safety and
§ 1926.1 Purpose and scope. health standards contained in subpart
(a) This part sets forth the safety and C of this part and following subparts;
health standards promulgated by the and
Secretary of Labor under section 107 of (2) To carry out the duties of the Sec-
the Contract Work Hours and Safety retary under section 107(b) of the Act.
Standards Act. The standards are pub- (b) For the purpose of carrying out
lished in subpart C of this part and fol- his investigative duties under the Act,
lowing subparts. the Secretary of Labor may, by agree-
(b) Subpart B of this part contains ment, use with or without reimburse-
statements of general policy and inter- ment the services, personnel, and fa-
pretations of section 107 of the Con- cilities of any State or Federal agency.
tract Work Hours and Safety Stand- Any agreements with States under this
section shall be similar to those pro-
ards Act having general applicability.
vided for under the Walsh-Healey Pub-
§ 1926.2 Variances from safety and lic Contracts Act under 41 CFR part 50–
health standards. 205.
(a) Variances from standards which § 1926.4 Rules of practice for adminis-
are, or may be, published in this part trative adjudications for enforce-
may be granted under the same cir- ment of safety and health stand-
cumstances whereunder variances may ards.
be granted under section 6(b)(A) or 6(d) (a) The rules of practice for adminis-
of the Williams-Steiger Occupational trative adjudications for the enforce-
Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. ment of the safety and health stand-
65). The procedures for the granting of ards contained in subpart C of this part
variances and for related relief under and the following subparts shall be the
this part are those published in part same as those published in part 6 of
1905 of this title. this title with respect to safety and
(b) Any requests for variances under health violations of the Service Con-
this section shall also be considered retract Act of 1965 (69 Stat. 1035), except
quests for variances under the Wil- as provided in paragraph (b) of this sec-
tion.
liams-Steiger Occupational Safety and
(b) In the case of debarment, the find-
Health Act of 1970, and any requests for
ings required by section 107(d) of the
variances under Williams-Steiger Occu- Act shall be made by the hearing exam-
pational Safety and Health Act with iner or the Assistant Secretary of
respect to construction safety or Labor for Occupational Safety and
health standards shall be considered to Health, as the case may be. Whenever,
be also variances under the Construc- as provided in section 107(d)(2), a con-
tion Safety Act. Any variance from a tractor requests termination of debar-
construction safety or health standard ment before the end of the 3-year pe-
which is contained in this part and riod prescribed in that section, the re-
which is incorporated by reference in quest shall be filed in writing with the
part 1910 of this title shall be deemed a Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occu-
variance from the standard under both pational Safety and Health who shall
the Construction Safety Act and the publish a notice in the FEDERAL REG-
Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety ISTER that the request has been re-
and Health Act of 1970. ceived and afford interested persons an
12
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.6
opportunity to be heard upon the re- 29 CFR citation OMB con-

quest, and thereafter the provisions of trol No.
part 6 of this title shall apply with re- 1926.1115 ............................................................ 1218–0044
spect to prehearing conferences, hear- 1926.1116 ............................................................ 1218–0081
ings and related matters, and decisions 1926.1117 ............................................................ 1218–0010
1926.1118 ............................................................ 1218–0104
and orders. 1926.1126 ............................................................ 1218–0252
1926.1127 ............................................................ 1218–0186
§ 1926.5 OMB control numbers under 1926.1128 ............................................................ 1218–0129
the Paperwork Reduction Act. 1926.1129 ............................................................ 1218–0128
1926.1144 ............................................................ 1218–0101
The following sections or paragraphs 1926.1145 ............................................................ 1218–0126
each contain a collection of informa- 1926.1147 ............................................................ 1218–0108
tion requirement which has been ap- 1926.1148 ............................................................ 1218–0145
1926.1153 ............................................................ 1218–0266
proved by the Office of Management 1926.1203 ............................................................ 1218–0258
and Budget under the control number 1926.1204 ............................................................ 1218–0258
listed. 1926.1205 ............................................................ 1218–0258
1926.1206 ............................................................ 1218–0258
OMB con- 1926.1207 ............................................................ 1218–0258
29 CFR citation trol No. 1926.1208 ............................................................ 1218–0258
1926.1209 ............................................................ 1218–0258
1926.33 ................................................................ 1218–0065 1926.1210 ............................................................ 1218–0258
1926.50 ................................................................ 1218–0093 1926.1211 ............................................................ 1218–0258
1926.52 ................................................................ 1218–0048 1926.1212 ............................................................ 1218–0258
1926.53 ................................................................ 1218–0103 1926.1213 ............................................................ 1218–0258
1926.59 ................................................................ 1218–0072
1926.1402 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.60 ................................................................ 1218–0183
1926.1403 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.62 ................................................................ 1218–0189
1926.1404 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.64 ................................................................ 1218–0200
1926.1406 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.65 ................................................................ 1218–0202
1926.103 .............................................................. 1218–0099 1926.1407 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.200 .............................................................. 1218–0132 1926.1408 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.250 .............................................................. 1218–0093 1926.1409 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.251 .............................................................. 1218–0233 1926.1410 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.403 .............................................................. 1218–0130 1926.1411 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.404 .............................................................. 1218–0130 1926.1412 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.405 .............................................................. 1218–0130 1926.1413 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.407 .............................................................. 1218–0130 1926.1414 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.408 .............................................................. 1218–0130 1926.1417 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.453(a)(2) ..................................................... 1218–0216 1926.1423 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.502 .............................................................. 1218–0197 1926.1424 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.503 .............................................................. 1218–0197 1926.1427 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.550(a)(1) ..................................................... 1218–0115 1926.1428 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.550(a)(2) ..................................................... 1218–0115 1926.1431 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.550(a)(4) ..................................................... 1218–0115 1926.1433 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.550(a)(6) ..................................................... 1218–0113 1926.1434 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.550(a)(11) ................................................... 1218–0054 1926.1435 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.550(a)(16) ................................................... 1218–0115 1926.1436 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.550(b)(2) ..................................................... 1218–0232 1926.1437 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.550(g) ......................................................... 1218–0151 1926.1441 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.552 .............................................................. 1218–0231
1926.652 .............................................................. 1218–0137
1926.703 .............................................................. 1218–0095 [61 FR 5509, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 63
1926.800 .............................................................. 1218–0067 FR 3814, Jan. 27, 1998; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19,
1926.803 .............................................................. 1218–0067 1998; 63 FR 17094, Apr. 8, 1998; 64 FR 18810,
1926.900 .............................................................. 1218–0217 Apr. 16, 1999; 71 FR 38086, July 5, 2006; 75 FR
1926.903 .............................................................. 1218–0227 68430, Nov. 8, 2010; 81 FR 48710, July 26, 2016;
1926.1080 ............................................................ 1218–0069
81 FR 53268, Aug. 12, 2016]
1926.1081 ............................................................ 1218–0069
1926.1083 ............................................................ 1218–0069
1926.1090 ............................................................ 1218–0069 § 1926.6 Incorporation by reference.
1926.1091 ............................................................ 1218–0069 (a) The standards of agencies of the
1926.1101 ............................................................ 1218–0134
1926.1103 ............................................................ 1218–0085 U.S. Government, and organizations
1926.1104 ............................................................ 1218–0084 which are not agencies of the U.S. Gov-
1926.1106 ............................................................ 1218–0086 ernment which are incorporated by ref-
1926.1107 ............................................................ 1218–0083
1926.1108 ............................................................ 1218–0087
erence in this part, have the same force
1926.1109 ............................................................ 1218–0089 and effect as other standards in this
1926.1110 ............................................................ 1218–0082 part. Only the mandatory provisions
1926.1111 ............................................................ 1218–0090 (i.e., provisions containing the word

1926.1112 ............................................................ 1218–0080
1926.1113 ............................................................ 1218–0079 ‘‘shall’’ or other mandatory language)
1926.1114 ............................................................ 1218–0088 of standards incorporated by reference
13
are adopted as standards under the Oc- approved for § 1926.55(a) and appendix A
cupational Safety and Health Act. The of § 1926.55.
locations where these standards may (h) The following material is avail-
be examined are as follows: able for purchase from the American
(1) Offices of the Occupational Safety National Standards Institute (ANSI),
and Health Administration, U.S. De- 25 West 43rd Street, Fourth Floor, New
partment of Labor, Frances Perkins York, NY 10036; telephone: 212–642–4900;
Building, Washington, DC 20210. fax: 212–302–1286; e-mail: info@ansi.org;
(2) The Regional and Field Offices of Web site: http://www.ansi.org/.
the Occupational Safety and Health (1) ANSI A10.3–1970, Safety Require-
Administration, which are listed in the ments for Explosive-Actuated Fas-
U.S. Government Manual. tening Tools, IBR approved for
(b) The materials listed in para- § 1926.302(e).
graphs (g) through (ff) of this section (2) ANSI A10.4–1963, Safety Require-
are incorporated by reference in the ments for Workmen’s Hoists, IBR ap-
corresponding sections noted as they proved for § 1926.552(c).
exist on the date of the approval, and a (3) ANSI A10.5–1969, Safety Require-
notice of any change in these materials ments for Material Hoists, IBR ap-
will be published in the FEDERAL REG- proved for § 1926.552(b).
(4) ANSI A11.1–1965 (R1970), Practice
ISTER. These incorporations by ref-
for Industrial Lighting, IBR approved
erence were approved by the Director
for § 1926.56(b).
of the Federal Register in accordance
(5) ANSI A17.1–1965, Elevators,
with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.
Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving
(c) Copies of standards listed in this Walks, IBR approved for § 1926.552(d).
section and issued by private standards (6) ANSI A17.1a–1967, Elevators,
organizations are available for pur- Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving
chase from the issuing organizations at Walks Supplement, IBR approved for
the addresses or through the other con- § 1926.552(d).
tact information listed below for these (7) ANSI A17.1b–1968, Elevators,
private standards organizations. In ad- Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving
dition, these standards are available Walks Supplement, IBR approved for
for inspection at the National Archives § 1926.552(d).
and Records Administration (NARA). (8) ANSI A17.1c–1969, Elevators,
For information on the availability of Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving
these standards at NARA, telephone: Walks Supplement, IBR approved for
202–741–6030, or go to http:// § 1926.552(d).
www.archives.gov/federallregister/ (9) ANSI A17.1d–1970, Elevators,
codeloflfederallregulations/ Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving
ibrllocations.html. Also, the standards Walks Supplement, IBR approved for
are available for inspection at any Re- § 1926.552(d).
gional Office of the Occupational Safe- (10) ANSI A17.2–1960, Practice for the
ty and Health Administration (OSHA), Inspection of Elevators (Inspector’s
or at the OSHA Docket Office, U.S. De- Manual), IBR approved for § 1926.552(d).
partment of Labor, 200 Constitution (11) ANSI A17.2a–1965, Practice for
Avenue, NW., Room N–2625, Wash- the Inspection of Elevators (Inspector’s
ington, DC 20210; telephone: 202–693–2350 Manual) Supplement, IBR approved for
(TTY number: 877–889–5627). § 1926.552(d).
(d)–(f) [Reserved] (12) ANSI A17.2b–1967, Practice for
(g) The following material is avail- the Inspection of Elevators (Inspector’s
able for purchase from the American Manual) Supplement, IBR approved for
Conference of Governmental Industrial § 1926.552(d).
Hygienists (ACGIH), 1330 Kemper (13) ANSI A92.2–1969, Vehicle Mount-
Meadow Drive, Cincinnati, OH 45240; ed Elevating and Rotating Work Plat-
telephone: 513–742–6163; fax: 513–742– forms, IBR approved for §§ 1926.453(a)
3355; e-mail: mail@acgih.org; Web site: and 1926.453(b).
http://www.acgih.org: (14) ANSI B7.1–1970, Safety Code for

(1) Threshold Limit Values of Air- the Use, Care, and Protection of Abra-
borne Contaminants for 1970, 1970, IBR sive Wheels, IBR approved for
14
§§ 1926.57(g), 1926.303(b), 1926.303(c), and (i) American National Standards In-

1926.303(d). stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd
(15) ANSI B20.1–1957, Safety Code for Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036;
Conveyors, Cableways, and Related telephone: 212–642–4980; Web site: http://
Equipment, IBR approved for webstore.ansi.org/;
§ 1926.555(a). (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness
(16) ANSI B56.1–1969, Safety Stand- Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele-
ards for Powered Industrial Trucks, phone: 877–413–5184; Web site:
IBR approved for § 1926.602(c). www.global.ihs.com; or
(17)–(22) [Reserved] (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero
(23) ANSI O1.1–1961, Safety Code for Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone:
Woodworking Machinery, IBR approved 877–699–9277; Web site:
for § 1926.304(f). www.techstreet.com.
(24) ANSI Z35.1–1968, Specifications (30) ANSI Z535.5–2011, Safety Tags
for Accident Prevention Signs; IBR ap- and Barricade Tapes (for Temporary
proved for § 1926.200(b), (c), and 1 (i). Hazards), published September 15, 2011,
Copies available for purchase from the including Errata, November 14, 2011;
IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way IBR approved for § 1926.200(h) and (i).
East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: Copies available for purchase from the:
1–877–413–5184; Web site: (i) American National Standards In-
www.global.ihs.com. stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd
Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036;
(25) ANSI Z35.2–1968, Specifications
telephone: 212–642–4980; Web site: http://
for Accident Prevention Tags, IBR ap-
webstore.ansi.org/;
proved for § 1926.200(i).
(ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness
(26) ANSI Z49.1–1967, Safety in Weld-
Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele-
ing and Cutting, IBR approved for
phone: 877–413–5184; Web site:
§ 1926.350(j).
www.global.ihs.com; or
(27) USA Z53.1–1967 (also referred to (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero
as ANSI Z53.1–1967), Safety Color Code Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone:
for Marking Physical Hazards, ANSI 877–699–9277; Web site:
approved October 9, 1967; IBR approved www.techstreet.com.
for § 1926.200(c). Copies available for (31) ANSI/ISEA Z87.1–2010, Occupa-
purchase from the IHS Standards tional and Educational Personal Eye
Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Engle- and Face Protection Devices, Approved
wood, CO 80112; telephone: 1–877–413– April 3, 2010; IBR approved for
5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com. § 1926.102(b). Copies are available for
(28) ANSI Z535.1–2006 (R2011), Safety purchase from:
Colors, reaffirmed July 19, 2011; IBR ap- (i) American National Standards In-
proved for § 1926.200(c). Copies available stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd
for purchase from the: Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036;
(i) American National Standards In- telephone: (212) 642–4980; Web site:
stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd http://webstore.ansi.org/;
Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness
telephone: 212–642–4980; Web site: http:// Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele-
webstore.ansi.org/; phone: (877) 413–5184; Web site: http://
(ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness global.ihs.com; or
Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele- (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero
phone: 877–413–5184; Web site: Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone:
www.global.ihs.com; or (877) 699–9277; Web site: http://
(iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero techstreet.com.
Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: (32) ANSI Z87.1–2003, Occupational
877–699–9277; Web site: and Educational Personal Eye and
www.techstreet.com. Face Protection Devices, Approved
(29) ANSI Z535.2–2011, Environmental June 19, 2003; IBR approved for
and Facility Safety Signs, published § 1926.102(b). Copies available for pur-
September 15, 2011; IBR approved for chase from the:

§ 1926.200(b), (c), and (i). Copies avail- (i) American National Standards In-
able for purchase from the: stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd
15
Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; ANSI Z89.1–1997 are available for pur-
telephone: (212) 642–4980; Web site: chase only from the International Safe-
http://webstore.ansi.org/; ty Equipment Association, 1901 North
(ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209–1762;
Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele- telephone: 703–525–1695; fax: 703–528–
phone: (877) 413–5184; Web site: http:// 2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org.
global.ihs.com; or (i) [Reserved]
(iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero (j) The following material is avail-
Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: able for purchase from the American
(877) 699–9277; Web site: http:// Society for Testing and Materials
techstreet.com. (ASTM), ASTM International, 100 Barr
(33) ANSI Z87.1–1989 (R–1998), Practice Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West
for Occupational and Educational Eye Conshohocken, PA, 19428–2959; tele-
and Face Protection, Reaffirmation ap- phone: 610–832–9585; fax: 610–832–9555; e-
proved January 4, 1999; IBR approved mail: service@astm.org; Web site: http://
for § 1926.102(b). Copies are available for www.astm.org/:
purchase from: (1) ASTM A370–1968, Methods and
(i) American National Standards In- Definitions for Mechanical Testing and
stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Steel Products, IBR approved for
Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; § 1926.1001(f).
telephone: (212) 642–4980; Web site: (2) [Reserved]
http://webstore.ansi.org/;
(3) ASTM D56–1969, Standard Method
(ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness
of Test for Flash Point by the Tag
Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele-
Closed Tester, IBR approved for
phone: (877) 413–5184; Web site: http://
§ 1926.155(i).
global.ihs.com; or
(iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero (4) ASTM D93–1969, Standard Method
Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: of Test for Flash Point by the Pensky
(877) 699–9277; Web site: http:// Martens Closed Tester, IBR approved
techstreet.com. for § 1926.155(i).
(34) American National Standards In- (5) ASTM D323–1958 (R1968), Standard
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2009, American Na- Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of
tional Standard for Industrial Head Petroleum Products (Reid Method),
Protection, approved January 26, 2009; IBR approved for § 1926.155(m).
IBR approved for § 1926.100(b)(1)(i). Cop- (k) The following material is avail-
ies of ANSI Z89.1–2009 are available for able for purchase from the American
purchase only from the International Society of Agricultural and Biological
Safety Equipment Association, 1901 Engineers (ASABE), 2950 Niles Road,
North Moore Street, Arlington, VA St. Joseph, MI 49085; telephone: 269–429–
22209–1762; telephone: 703–525–1695; fax: 0300; fax: 269–429–3852; e-mail:
703–528–2148; Web site: hq@asabe.org; Web site: http://
www.safetyequipment.org. www.asabe.org/:
(35) American National Standards In- (1) ASAE R313.1–1971, Soil Cone Pene-
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2003, American Na- trometer, reaffirmed 1975, IBR ap-
tional Standard for Industrial Head proved for § 1926.1002(e).
Protection; IBR approved for (l) The following material is avail-
§ 1926.100(b)(1)(ii). Copies of ANSI Z89.1– able for purchase from the American
2003 are available for purchase only Society of Mechanical Engineers
from the International Safety Equip- (ASME), Three Park Avenue, New
ment Association, 1901 North Moore York, NY 10016; telephone: 1–800–843–
Street, Arlington, VA 22209–1762; tele- 2763; fax: 973–882–1717; e-mail:
phone: 703–525–1695; fax: 703–528–2148; infocentral@asme.org; Web site: http://
Web site: www.safetyequipment.org. www.asme.org/:
(36) American National Standards In- (1) ASME B30.2–2005, Overhead and
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–1997, American Na- Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge,
tional Standard for Personnel Protec- Single or Multiple Girder, Top Running
tion—Protective Headwear for Indus- Trolley Hoist), issued Dec. 30, 2005
trial Workers—Requirements; IBR ap- (‘‘ASME B30.2–2005’’), IBR approved for
proved for § 1926.100(b)(1)(iii). Copies of § 1926.1438(b).
16
(2) ASME B30.5–2004, Mobile and Lo- (1) Safety and Health Regulations for
comotive Cranes, issued Sept. 27, 2004 Construction, Part II, Sept. 1971, IBR
(‘‘ASME B30.5–2004’’), IBR approved for approved for § 1926.1000(f).
§§ 1926.1414(b); 1926.1414(e); 1926.1433(b). (p) The following material is avail-
(3) ASME B30.7–2001, Base-Mounted able for purchase from the California
Drum Hoists, issued Jan. 21, 2002 Department of Industrial Relations, 455
(‘‘ASME B30.7–2001’’), IBR approved for Golden Gate Avenue, San Francisco CA
§ 1926.1436(e). 94102; telephone: (415) 703–5070; e-mail:
(4) ASME B30.14–2004, Side Boom info@dir.ca.gov; Web site: http://
Tractors, issued Sept. 20, 2004 (‘‘ASME www.dir.ca.gov/:
B30.14–2004’’), IBR approved for (1) Construction Safety Orders, IBR
§ 1926.1440(c). approved for § 1926.1000(f).
(q)–(t) [Reserved]
(5) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
(u) The following material is avail-
Code, Section VIII, 1968, IBR approved
able for purchase from the Federal
for §§ 1926.152(i), 1926.306(a), and
Highway Administration, United
1926.603(a). States Department of Transportation,
(6) ASME Power Boilers, Section I, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., Washington,
1968, IBR approved for § 1926.603(a). DC 20590; telephone: 202–366–4000; Web
(m) The following material is avail- site: http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/:
able for purchase from the American (1) Manual on Uniform Traffic Con-
Welding Society (AWS), 550 N.W. trol Devices (MUTCD), Part VI, Stand-
LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida 33126; ards and Guides for Traffic Controls for
telephone: 1–800–443–9353; Web site: Street and Highway Construction,
http://www.aws.org/: Maintenance, Utility, and Incident
(1) AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2002, Structural Management Operation, 1988 Edition,
Welding Code—Steel, 18th ed., ANSI ap- Revision 3, September 3, 1993; IBR ap-
proved Aug. 31, 2001 (‘‘AWS D1.1/ proved for §§ 1926.200(g), 1926.201(a), and
D1.1M:2002’’), IBR approved for 1926.202. Electronic copies of the
§ 1926.1436(c). MUTCD, 1988 Edition, Revision 3, are
(2) ANSI/AWS D14.3–94, Specification available for downloading at http://
for Welding Earthmoving and Con- www.osha.gov/doc/highwaylworkzones/
struction Equipment, ANSI approved mutcd/index.html.
Jun. 11, 1993 (‘‘ANSI/AWS D14.3–94’’), (2) Manual on Uniform Traffic Con-
IBR approved for § 1926.1436(c). trol Devices (MUTCD), Millennium
(n) The following material is avail- Edition, Dec. 2000; IBR approved for
able for purchase from the British §§ 1926.200(g)), 1926.201(a), and 1926.202.
Standards Institution (BSI), 389 Electronic copies of the MUTCD 2000
Chiswick High Road, London, W4 4AL, are available for downloading at http://
United Kingdom; telephone: + 44 20 8996 mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno-
9001; fax: + 44 20 8996 7001; e-mail: millenniuml12.18.00.htm.
(v) The following material is avail-
cservices@bsigroup.com; Web site: http://
able for purchase from the General
www.bsigroup.com/:
Services Administration (GSA), 1800 F
(1) BS EN 13000:2004, Cranes—Mobile Street, NW., Washington, DC 20405;
Cranes, published Jan. 4, 2006 (‘‘BS EN telephone: (202) 501–0800; Web site:
13000:2004’’), IBR approved for http://www.gsa.gov/:
§ 1926.1433(c). (1) QQ–P–416, Federal Specification
(2) BS EN 14439:2006, Cranes—Safety— Plating Cadmium (Electrodeposited),
Tower Cranes, published Jan. 31, 2007 IBR approved for § 1926.104(e).
(‘‘BS EN 14439:2006’’), IBR approved for (w) The following material is avail-
§ 1926.1433(c). able for purchase from the Institute of
(o) The following material is avail- Makers of Explosives (IME), 1120 19th
able for purchase from the Bureau of Street, NW., Suite 310, Washington, DC
Reclamation, United States Depart- 20036; telephone: 202–429–9280; fax: 202–
ment of the Interior, 1849 C Street, 429–9280; e-mail: info@ime.org; Web site:
NW., Washington DC 20240; telephone: http://www.ime.org/:

202–208–4501; Web site: http:// (1) IME Pub. No. 2, American Table of
www.usbr.gov/: Distances for Storage of Explosives,
17
Jun. 5, 1964, IBR approved for waukee, WI 53214; telephone: 1–800–369–

§ 1926.914(a). 2310; fax: 414–272–1170; Web site: http://
(2) IME Pub. No. 20, Radio Frequency www.aem.org/CBC/ProdSpec/PCSA/:
Energy—A Potential Hazard in the Use (1) PCSA Std. No. 1, Mobile Crane
of Electric Blasting Caps, Mar. 1968, and Excavator Standards, 1968, IBR ap-
IBR approved for § 1926.900(k). proved for § 1926.602(b).
(x) The following material is avail- (2) PCSA Std. No. 2, Mobile Hydraulic
able for purchase from the Inter- Crane Standards, 1968 (‘‘PCSA Std. No.
national Organization for Standardiza- 2 (1968)’’), IBR approved for
tion (ISO), 1, ch. de la Voie-Creuse, §§ 1926.602(b), 1926.1433(a), and
Case postale 56, CH–1211 Geneva 20, 1926.1501(a).
Switzerland; telephone: + 41 22 749 01 11; (3) PCSA Std. No. 3, Mobile Hydraulic
fax: + 41 22 733 34 30; Web site: http:// Excavator Standards, 1969, IBR ap-
www.iso.org/: proved for § 1926.602(b).
(1) ISO 11660–1:2008(E), Cranes—Ac- (bb)–(cc) [Reserved]
cess, guards and restraints—Part 1: (dd) The following material is avail-
General, 2d ed., Feb. 15, 2008 (‘‘ISO able for purchase from the Society of
11660–1:2008(E)’’), IBR approved for Automotive Engineers (SAE), 400 Com-
§ 1926.1423(c). monwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA
(2) ISO 11660–2:1994(E), Cranes—Ac- 15096; telephone: 1–877–606–7323; fax: 724–
cess, guards and restraints—Part 2: Mo- 776–0790; Web site: http://www.sae.org/:
bile cranes, 1994 (‘‘ISO 11660–2:1994(E)’’), (1) SAE 1970 Handbook, IBR approved
IBR approved for § 1926.1423(c). for § 1926.602(b).
(3) ISO 11660–3:2008(E), Cranes—Ac- (2) SAE 1971 Handbook, IBR approved
cess, guards and restraints—Part 3: for § 1926.1001(h).
Tower cranes, 2d ed., Feb. 15, 2008 (‘‘ISO
(3) SAE J166–1971, Trucks and Wag-
11660–3:2008(E)’’), IBR approved for
ons, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a).
§ 1926.1423(c).
(4) SAE J168–1970, Protective Enclo-
(y) The following material is avail-
sures—Test Procedures and Perform-
able for purchase from the National
ance Requirements, IBR approved for
Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1
§ 1926.1002(a).
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169;
telephone: 617–770–3000; fax: 617–770– (5) SAE J185 (reaf. May 2003), Access
0700; Web site: http://www.nfpa.org/: Systems for Off-Road Machines, re-
(1) NFPA 10A–1970, Maintenance and affirmed May 2003 (‘‘SAE J185 (May
Use of Portable Fire Extinguishers, 1993)’’), IBR approved for § 1926.1423(c).
IBR approved for § 1926.150(c). (6) SAE J236–1971, Self-Propelled
(2) NFPA 13–1969, Standard for the In- Graders, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a).
stallation of Sprinkler Systems, IBR (7) SAE J237–1971, Front End Loaders
approved for § 1926.152(d). and Dozers, IBR approved for
(3) NFPA 30–1969, The Flammable and § 126.602(a).
Combustible Liquids Code, IBR ap- (8) SAE J319b–1971, Self-Propelled
proved for § 1926.152(c). Scrapers, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a).
(4) NFPA 80–1970, Standard for Fire (9) SAE J320a–1971, Minimum Per-
Doors and Windows, Class E or F Open- formance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec-
ings, IBR approved for § 1926.152(b). tive Structure for Rubber-Tired, Self-
(5) NFPA 251–1969, Standard Methods Propelled Scrapers, IBR approved for
of Fire Test of Building Construction § 1926.1001(h).
and Material, IBR approved for (10) SAE J321a–1970, Fenders for
§§ 1926.152(b) and 1926.155(f). Pneumatic-Tired Earthmoving Haulage
(6) NFPA 385–1966, Standard for Tank Equipment, IBR approved for
Vehicles for Flammable and Combus- § 1926.602(a).
tible Liquids, IBR approved for (11) SAE J333a–1970, Operator Protec-
§ 1926.152(g). tion for Agricultural and Light Indus-
(z) [Reserved] trial Tractors, IBR approved for
(aa) The following material is avail- § 1926.602(a).
able for purchase from the Power Crane (11) SAE J386–1969, Seat Belts for
and Shovel Association (PCSA), 6737 W. Construction Equipment, IBR approved
Washington Street, Suite 2400, Mil- for § 1926.602(a).
18
(12) SAE J394–1971, Minimum Per- (2) ANSI B30.2.0–1967, Safety Code for
formance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec- Overhead and Gantry Cranes, approved
tive Structure for Rubber-Tired Front May 4, 1967, IBR approved for
End Loaders and Robber-Tired Dozers, § 1926.1501(d).
IBR approved for § 1926.1001(h). (3) ANSI B30.5–1968, Crawler, Loco-
(13) SAE J395–1971, Minimum Per- motive, and Truck Cranes, approved
formance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec- Dec. 16, 1968, IBR approved for
tive Structure for Crawler Tractors §§ 1926.1433(a), 1926.1501(a), and
and Crawler-Type Loaders, IBR ap- 1926.1501(b).
proved for § 1926.1001(h). (4) ANSI B30.6–1969, Safety Code for
(14) SAE J396–1971, Minimum Per- Derricks, approved Dec. 18, 1967, IBR
formance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec- approved for § 1926.1501(e).
tive Structure for Motor Graders, IBR [75 FR 48130, Aug. 9, 2010, as amended at 77
approved for § 1926.1001(h). FR 37600, June 22, 2012; 78 FR 35566, June 13,
(15) SAE J397–1969, Critical Zone 2013; 78 FR 66641, Nov. 6, 2013; 79 FR 20692,
Characteristics and Dimensions for Op- Apr. 11, 2014; 81 FR 16092, Mar. 25, 2016]
erators of Construction and Industrial
Machinery, IBR approved for Subpart B—General
§ 1926.1001(f). Interpretations
(16) SAE J743a–1964, Tractor Mounted
Side Boom, 1964 (‘‘SAE J743a–1964’’), AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours
IBR approved for § 1926.1501(a). and Safety Standards Act (Construction
(17) SAE J959–1966, Lifting Crane Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333).
Wire-Rope Strength Factors, 1966
§ 1926.10 Scope of subpart.
(‘‘SAE J959–1966’’), IBR approved for
§ 1926.1501(a). (a) This subpart contains the general
(18) SAE J987 (rev. Jun. 2003), Lattice rules of the Secretary of Labor inter-
Boom Cranes—Method of Test, revised preting and applying the construction
Jun. 2003 (‘‘SAE J987 (Jun. 2003)’’), IBR safety and health provisions of section
approved for § 1926.1433(c). 107 of the Contract Work Hours and
Safety Standards Act (83 Stat. 96). Sec-
(19) SAE J1063 (rev. Nov. 1993), Canti-
tion 107 requires as a condition of each
levered Boom Crane Structures—Meth-
contract which is entered into under
od of Test, revised Nov. 1993 (‘‘SAE
legislation subject to Reorganization
J1063 (Nov. 1993)’’), IBR approved for
Plan Number 14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267),
§ 1926.1433(c).
and which is for construction, alter-
(ee) The following material is avail- ation, and/or repair, including painting
able for purchase from the United and decorating, that no contractor or
States Army Corps of Engineers, 441 G subcontractor contracting for any part
Street, NW., Washington, DC 20314; of the contract work shall require any
telephone: 202–761–0011; e-mail: hq- laborer or mechanic employed in the
publicaffairs@usace.army.mil; Web site: performance of the contract to work in
http://www.usace.army.mil/: surroundings or under working condi-
(1) EM–385–1–1, General Safety Re- tions which are unsanitary, hazardous,
quirements, Mar. 1967, IBR approved or dangerous to his health or safety, as
for § 1926.1000(f). determined under construction safety
(ff) The following material is avail- and health standards promulgated by
able for purchase from standards re- the Secretary by regulation.
sellers such as the Document Center
Inc., 111 Industrial Road, Suite 9, Bel- § 1926.11 Coverage under section 103
mont, CA 94002; telephone: 650–591–7600; of the act distinguished.
fax: 650–591–7617; e-mail: info@document- (a) Coverage under section 103. It is im-
center.com; Web site: http:// portant to note that the coverage of
www.document-center.com/: section 107 differs from that for the
(1) ANSI B15.1–1953 (R1958), Safety overtime requirements of the Contract
Code for Mechanical Power-Trans- Work Hours and Safety Standards Act.
mission Apparatus, revised 1958, IBR The application of the overtime re-
approved for §§ 1926.300(b)(2) and quirements is governed by section 103,
1926.1501(a). which subject to specific exemptions,
19
includes: (1) Federal contracts requir- under each statute. The individual
ing or involving the employment of la- statutes should be resorted to for a
borers or mechanics (thus including, more detailed scope of the work.
but not limited to, contracts for con- (2) Federal-Aid Highway Acts. The pro-
struction), and (2) contracts assisted in visions codified in 23 U.S.C. 113 apply
whole or in part by Federal loans, to the initial construction, reconstruc-
grants, or guarantees under any stat- tion, or improvement work performed
ute ‘‘providing wage standards for such by contractors or subcontractors on
work.’’ The statutes ‘‘providing wage highway projects on the Federal-aid
standards for such work’’ include stat- systems, the primary and secondary, as
utes for construction which require the well as their extensions in urban areas,
payment of minimum wages in accord- and the Interstate System, authorized
ance with prevailing wage findings by under the highway laws providing for
the Secretary of Labor in accordance the expenditure of Federal funds upon
with the Davis-Bacon Act. A provision the Federal-aid system. As cited in 41
to section 103 excludes from the over- Op. A.G. 488, 496, the Attorney General
time requirements work where the ruled that the Federal-Aid Highway
Federal assistance is only in the form Acts are subject to Reorganization
of a loan guarantee or insurance. Plan No. 14 of 1950.
(b) Coverage under section 107. To be (3) National Housing Act (12 U.S.C.
covered by section 107 of the Contract 1713, 1715a, 1715e, 1715k, 1715l(d)(3) and
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, (4), 1715v, 1715w, 1715x, 1743, 1747, 1748,
a contract must be one which (1) is en- 1748h–2, 1750g, 1715l(h)(1), 1715z(j)(1),
tered into under a statute that is sub- 1715z–1, 1715y(d), Subchapter 1x-A and
ject to Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1x-B, 1715z–7). This act covers construc-
1950 (64 Stat. 1267); and (2) is for ‘‘con- tion which is financed with assistance
struction, alteration, and/or repair, in- by the Federal Government through
cluding painting and decorating.’’ programs of loan and mortgage insur-
ance for the following purposes:
§ 1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14
of 1950. (i) Rental Housing—Section 1713 pro-
vides mortgage and insurance on rental
(a) General provisions. Reorganization housing of eight or more units and on
Plan No. 14 of 1950 relates to the pre- mobile-home courts.
scribing by the Secretary of Labor of
(ii) Section 1715a—Repealed.
‘‘appropriate standards, regulations,
(iii) Cooperative Housing—Section
and procedures’’ with respect to the en-
1715e authorizes mortgage insurance on
forcement of labor standards under
cooperative housing of five or more
Federal and federally assisted con-
units as well as supplementary loans
tracts which are subject to various
for improvement of repair or resale of
statutes subject to the Plan. The rules
memberships.
of the Secretary of Labor imple-
menting the Plan are published in part (iv) Urban Renewal Housing—Section
5 of this title. Briefly, the statutes sub- 1715k provides mortgage insurance on
ject to the Plan include the Davis- single family or multifamily housing
Bacon Act, including its extension to in approved urban renewal areas.
Federal-aid highway legislation subject (v) Low or Moderate Income Hous-
to 23 U.S.C. 113, and other statutes sub- ing—Section 1715L(d) (3) and (4) insures
ject to the Plan by its original terms, mortgages on low-cost single family or
statutes by which the Plan is expressly multifamily housing.
applied, such as the Contract Work (vi) Housing for Elderly—Section
Hours Standards Act by virtue of sec- 1715v provides mortgage insurance on
tion 104(d) thereof. rental housing for elderly or handi-
(b) The Plan. (1) The statutes subject capped persons.
to Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950 (vii) Nursing Homes—Section 1715w
are cited and briefly described in the authorizes mortgage insurance on
remaining paragraphs of this section. nursing home facilities and major
These descriptions are general in na- equipment.

ture and not intended to convey the (viii) Experimental Housing—Section
full scope of the work to be performed 1715x provides mortgage insurance on
20
single family or multifamily housing roads, streets, curbs, gutters, side-

with experimental design of materials. walks, storm drainage facilities, and
(ix) War Housing Insurance—Section other installations or work.
1743 not active. (xviii) Group Medical Practice Facili-
(x) Yield Insurance—Section 1747 in- ties—Subchapter LX-B authorizes
sures investment returns on multi- mortgage insurance for the financing
family housing. of construction and equipment, of fa-
(xi) Armed Services Housing—Sec- cilities for group practice of medicine,
tion 1748b to assist in relieving acute optometry, or dentistry.
shortage and urgent need for family (xix) Nonprofit Hospitals—1715z–7 au-
housing at or in areas adjacent to mili- thorizes mortgage insurance to cover
tary installations.
new and rehabilitated hospitals, in-
(xii) Defense Housing for Impacted
cluding initial equipment.
Areas—Section 1748h–2 provides mort-
gage insurance on single family or (4) Hospital Survey and Construction
multifamily housing for sale or rent Act, as amended by the Hospital and
primarily to military or civilian per- Medical Facilities Amendments of 1964 (42
sonnel of the Armed Services, National U.S.C. 291e).The provisions of this Act
Aeronautics and Space Administration, cover construction contracts made by
or Atomic Energy Commission. State or local authorities or private in-
(xiii) Defense Rental Housing—Sec- stitutions under Federal grant-in-aid
tion 1750g provides for mortgage insur- programs for the construction of hos-
ance in critical defense housing areas. pitals and other medical facilities.
(xiv) Rehabilitation—Section 1715L (5) Federal Airport Act (49 U.S.C.
(h)(1) provides mortgage insurance for 1114(b)). The act provides grant-in-aid
nonprofit organizations to finance the funds for airport construction limited
purchase and rehabilitation of deterio- to general site preparation runways,
rating or substandard housing for sub- taxiways, aprons, lighting appurtenant
sequent resale to low-income home thereto, and fire, rescue, and mainte-
purchasers. There must be located on nance buildings. The act excludes con-
the property five or more single family struction intended for use as a public
dwellings of detached, semidetached, or parking facility for passenger auto-
row construction. mobiles and the cost of construction of
(xv) Homeowner Assistance—Section any part of an airport building except
1715Z(j)(1) authorizes mortgage insur- such of those buildings or parts of
ance to nonprofit organizations or pub- buildings to house facilities or activi-
lic bodies or agencies executed to fi- ties directly related to the safety of
nance sale of individual dwellings to persons at the airport.
lower income individuals or families.
(6) Housing Act of 1949 (42 U.S.C. 1459).
Also includes the rehabilitation of such
Construction contracts awarded by
housing if it is deteriorating or sub-
standard for subsequent resale to lower local authorities financed with the as-
income home purchasers. sistance of loans and grants from the
(xvi) Rental Housing Assistance— Federal Government. The construction
Section 1715Z–1 authorizes mortgage programs are for slum clearance and
insurance and interest reduction pay- urban renewal which includes rehabili-
ments on behalf of owners of rental tation grants, neighborhood develop-
housing projects designed for occu- ment programs, neighborhood renewal
pancy by lower income families. Pay- plans, community renewal, demolition
ments are also authorized for certain projects, and assistance for blighted
State or locally aided projects. areas. See the Housing Act of 1964,
(xvii) Condominium Housing—Sec- paragraph (b)(21) of this section, con-
tion 1715y(d) provides mortgage insur- cerning financial assistance for low-
ance on property purchased for the de- rent housing for domestic farm labor.
velopment of building sites. This in- (7) School Survey and Construction Act
cludes waterlines and water supply in- of 1950 (20 U.S.C. 636). This act provides
stallations, sewer lines and sewage dis- for a Federal grant-in-aid program to
posal installations, steam, gas, and assist in the construction of schools in
electrical lines and installations, federally affected areas.
21
(8) Defense Housing & Community Fa- 293a(c)(5)). The provisions of this act
cilities & Services Act of 1951 (42 U.S.C. provide for grants to assist public and
1592i). Inactive Program. nonprofit medical, dental, and similar
(9) United States Housing Act of 1937 schools for the construction, expan-
(42 U.S.C. 1416). This statute covers the sion, or renovation of teaching facili-
construction of low-rent public housing ties.
and slum clearance projects awarded (14) Mental Retardation Facilities Con-
by local authorities. These projects are struction Act (42 U.S.C. 295(a)(2)(D),
financed with the assistance of loans 2662(5), 2675(a)(5)). This act authorizes
and grants from the Federal Govern- Federal financial assistance in the con-
ment. The slum clearance is the demo- struction of centers for research on
lition and removal of buildings from mental retardation and related aspects
any slum area to be used for a low-rent of human development, of university-
housing project. affiliated facilities for the mentally re-
(10) Federal Civil Defense Act of 1950 (50 tarded and of facilities for the men-
U.S.C. App. 2281). This act provides for tally retarded.
Federal assistance to the several (15) Community Mental Health Centers
States and their political subdivisions Act (42 U.S.C. 2685(a)(5)). This act au-
in the field of civil defense which in- thorizes Federal grants for the con-
cludes procurement, construction, leas- struction of public and other nonprofit
ing, or renovating of materials and fa- community mental health centers.
cilities. (16) Higher Education Facilities Act of
(11) Delaware River Basin Compact 1963 (20 U.S.C. 753). This act authorizes
(sec. 15.1, 75 Stat. 714). This joint resolu- the grant or loan of Federal funds to
tion creates, by intergovernmental assist public and other nonprofit insti-
compact between the United States, tutions of higher education in financ-
Delaware, New Jersey, New York, and ing the construction, rehabilitation, or
Pennsylvania, a regional agency for improvement of academic and related
planning, conservation, utilization, de- facilities in undergraduate and grad-
velopment, management and control of uate schools.
the water and related sources of the (17) Vocational Educational Act of 1963
Delaware River. (20 U.S.C. 35f). This act provides for
(12) Cooperative Research Act (20 U.S.C. Federal grants to the various States
332a(c)). This act provides Federal for construction of area vocational
grants to a university, college, or other education school facilities.
appropriate public or nonprofit private (18) Library Services and Construction
agency or institution for part or all of Act (20 U.S.C. 355e(a)(4)). This act pro-
the cost of constructing a facility for vides for Federal assistance to the var-
research or for research and related ious States for the construction of pub-
purposes. Research and related pur- lic libraries.
poses means research, research train- (19) Urban Mass Transportation Act of
ing, surveys, or demonstrations in the 1954 (49 U.S.C. 1609). This act provides
field of education, or the dissemination for grants and loans to assist States
of information derived therefrom, or and local public bodies and agencies
all of such activities, including (but thereof in financing the acquisition,
without limitation) experimental construction, reconstruction, and im-
schools, except that such term does not provement of facilities and equipment
include research, research training, for use, by operation or lease or other-
surveys, or demonstrations in the field wise, in mass transportation service in
of sectarian instruction or the dissemi- urban areas and in coordinating such
nation of information derived there- service with highway and other trans-
from. Construction includes new build- portation in such areas.
ings, and the acquisition, expansion, (20) Economic Opportunity Act of 1964
remodeling, replacement, and alter- (42 U.S.C. 2947). This act covers con-
ation of existing buildings and the struction which is financed with assist-
equipping of new buildings and existing ance of the Federal Government for the
buildings. following purposes:

(13) Health Professions Educational As- (i) Authorizes Federal assistance for
sistance Act of 1963 (42 U.S.C. 292d (c)(4), construction of projects, buildings and
22
works which will provide young men search and development of the com-
and women in rural and urban residen- mercial fisheries resources of the Na-
tial centers with education, vocational tion.
training, and useful work experience (23) The Nurse Training Act of 1964 (42
(Title I). U.S.C. 296a(b)(5)). This act provides for
(ii) Authorizes financial assistance grants to assist in the construction of
for construction work planned and car- new facilities for collegiate, associate
ried out at the community level for degree, and diploma schools of nursing,
antipoverty programs (Title II): or replacement or rehabilitation of ex-
(a) Authorizes loans to low income isting facilities of such schools.
rural families by assisting them to ac- (24) Elementary and Secondary Edu-
quire or improve real estate or reduce cation Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. 241i, 848).
encumbrances or erect improvements The purpose of the act is to provide fi-
thereon, and to participate in coopera- nancial assistance to local educational
tive associations and/or to finance non- agencies serving areas with concentra-
agricultural enterprises which will en- tions of children from low-income fam-
able such families to supplement their ilies for construction in connection
income (Title III); with the expansion or improvement of
(b) Authorizes loans to local coopera- their educational programs.
tive associations furnishing essential (25) Federal Water Pollution Control
processing, purchasing, or marketing Act, as amended by the Water Quality Act
services, supplies, or facilities predomi- of 1965 (3 U.S.C. 466e(g)). Provides for fi-
nantly to low-income rural families nancial assistance to States or munici-
(Title III); palities for construction of facilities in
(c) Authorizes financial assistance to connection with the prevention and
States, political subdivisions of States, control of water pollution. This in-
public and nonprofit agencies, institu- cludes projects that will control the
tions, organizations, farm associations, discharge into any waters of untreated
or individuals in establishing housing, or inadequately treated sewage.
sanitation, education, and child day- (26) Appalachian Regional Development
care programs for migrants and other Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. App. 402). Author-
seasonally employed agricultural em- izes Federal assistance in the construc-
ployees and their families (Title III). tion of an Appalachian development
(iii) Authorizes loans or guarantees highway system; construction of multi-
loans to small businesses for construc- county demonstration health facilities,
tion work (Title IV). hospitals, regional health, diagnostic
(iv) Authorizes the payment of the and treatment centers, and other fa-
cost of experimental, pilot, or dem- cilities for health; seal and fill voids in
onstration projects to foster State pro- abandoned mines and to rehabilitate
grams providing construction work ex- strip mine areas; construction of
perience or training for unemployed fa- school facilities for vocational edu-
thers and needy people (Title V). cation; and to assist in construction of
(21) Housing Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. sewage treatment works.
1486(f); 42 U.S.C. 1452b(e)). Provides fi- (27) National Technical Institute for the
nancial assistance for low-rent housing Deaf Act (20 U.S.C. 684(b)(5)). Provides
for domestic farm labor. The Act fur- for financial assistance for institutions
ther provides for loans, through public of higher education for the establish-
or private agencies, where feasible, to ment, construction, including equip-
owners or tenants of property in urban ment and operation, of a National In-
renewal areas to finance rehabilitation stitution for the Deaf.
required to conform the property to ap- (28) Housing Act of 1959 (12 U.S.C.
plicable code requirements or carry out 1701(q)(c)(3)). This act authorizes loans
the objectives of the urban renewal to nonprofit corporations to be used for
plan for the area. the construction of housing and related
(22) The Commercial Fisheries Research facilities for elderly families. Also, the
and Development Act of 1964 (16 U.S.C. provisions of the act provide for reha-
779e(b)). This Act authorizes financial bilitation, alteration, conversion or

assistance to State agencies for con- improvement of existing structures
struction projects designed for the re- which are otherwise inadequate for
23
proposed dwellings used by such fami- thorizes loans to assist in financing the
lies. purchase or development of land for
(29) College Housing Act of 1950, as public works which will assist in the
amended (12 U.S.C. 1749a(f)). This act creation of long-term employment op-
provides for Federal loans to assist portunities in the area.
educational institutions in providing (ii) Loans for the purchase or devel-
housing and other educational facili- opment of land and facilities (including
ties for students and faculties. machinery and equipment) for indus-
(30) Housing and Urban Development trial or commercial usage within rede-
Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 1500c–3, 3107). This velopment areas; guarantee of loans for
act provides for Federal assistance for working capital made to private bor-
the following purposes: rowers by private lending institutions
(i) Grants to States and local public in connection with direct loan projects;
bodies to assist in any construction and to contract to pay to, or on behalf
work to be carried out under the open- of, business entities locating in rede-
space land and urban beautification velopment areas, a portion of the inter-
provisions contained therein. It pro- est costs which they incur in financing
vides for parks and recreation areas, their expansions from private sources.
conservation of land and other natural (iii) Loans and grants to create eco-
resources, and historical and scenic nomic development centers within des-
purposes. ignated county economic development
(ii) Grants to local public bodies and districts.
agencies to finance specific projects for (33) High-Speed Ground Transportation
basic public water facilities (including Study (40 U.S.C. 1636(b)). This act pro-
works for the storage, treatment, puri- vides for financial assistance for con-
fication, and distribution of water), struction activities in connection with
and for basic public sewer facilities research and development of different
(other than ‘‘treatment works’’ as de- forms of high-speed ground transpor-
fined in the Federal Water Pollution tation and demonstration projects re-
Control Act). lating to intercity rail passenger serv-
(iii) Grants to any local public body ice.
or agency to assist in financing neigh- (34) Heart Disease, Cancer and Stroke
borhood facilities. These facilities Amendments of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 299(b)(4)).
must be necessary for carrying out a This act provides for grants to public
program of health, recreational, social, or nonprofit private universities, med-
or similar community service and lo- ical schools, research, institutions,
cated so as to be available for the use hospitals, and other public and non-
of the area’s low or moderate income profit agencies and institutions, or as-
residents. sociations thereof to assist in construc-
(31) National Foundation on the Arts tion and equipment of facilities in con-
and the Humanities Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. nection with research, training, dem-
954(k)). The act establishes the ‘‘Na- onstration of patient care, diagnostic
tional Foundation on the Arts and the and treatment related to heart disease,
Humanities’’ which may provide cancer, stroke, and other major dis-
matching grants to groups (nonprofit eases.
organizations and State and other pub- (35) Mental Retardation Facilities and
lic organizations) and to individuals Community Mental Health Centers Con-
engaged in creative and performing struction Act Amendments of 1965 (20
arts for the entire range of artistic ac- U.S.C. 618(g)). These provisions provide
tivity, including construction of nec- for grants to institutions of higher edu-
essary facilities. cation for construction of facilities for
(32) Public Works and Economic Devel- research or for research and related
opment Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 3222). This purposes relating to education for men-
act provides for Federal assistance for tally retarded, hard of hearing, deaf,
the following purposes: speech impaired, visually handicapped,
(i) Grants for the acquisition or de- seriously emotionally disturbed, crip-
velopment of land or improvements for pled, or other health impaired children

public works or development facility who by reason thereof require special
usage in redevelopment areas. It au- education.
24
(36) Vocational Rehabilitation Act 1416). This act provides for Federal as-
Amendments of 1965 (29 U.S.C. 41a(b)(4)). sistance for the following purposes:
This act authorizes grants to assist in (i) Grants to assist in the construc-
meeting the costs of construction of tion, rehabilitation, alteration, or re-
public or other nonprofit workshops pair of residential property only if such
and rehabilitation facilities. residential property is designed for res-
(37) Clean Air and Solid Waste Disposal idential use for eight or more families
Acts (42 U.S.C. 3256). This act provides to enable city demonstration agencies
for financial assistance to public (Fed- to carry out comprehensive city dem-
eral, State, interstate, or local) au- onstration programs (42 U.S.C. 3310).
thorities, agencies, and institutions, (ii) Amends the National Housing Act
private agencies and institutions, and (12 U.S.C. 1715c) and the Housing Act of
individuals in the construction of fa- 1937 (42 U.S.C. 1416). See these acts for
cilities for solid-waste disposal. The coverage.
term construction includes the instal- (45) Air Quality Act of 1967 (42 U.S.C.
lation of initial equipment. 1857j–3). This act provides for Federal
(38) Medical Library Assistance Act of assistance to public or nonprofit agen-
1965 (42 U.S.C. 280b–3(b)(3)). This act cies, institutions, and organizations
provides for grants to public or private and to individuals, and contracts with
non-profit agencies or institutions for public or private agencies, institutions,
the cost of construction of medical li- or persons for construction of research
brary facilities. and development facilities and dem-
(39) Veterans Nursing Home Care Act onstration plants relating to the appli-
(38 U.S.C. 5035(a)(8)). The construction cation of preventing or controlling dis-
industry health and safety standards charges into the air of various types of
do not apply to this act since it is not pollutants.
subject to Reorganization Plan No. 14 (46) Elementary and Secondary Edu-
of 1950. cation Amendments of 1967 (Title VII—Bi-
(40) National Capital Transportation lingual Education Act) (20 U.S.C. 880b–6).
Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. 682(b)(4)). This act This act provides for Federal assist-
provides for Federal assistance to the ance to local educational agencies or
National Capital Transportation Agen- to an institution of higher education
cy for construction of a rail rapid tran- applying jointly with a local edu-
sit system and related facilities for the cational agency for minor remodeling
Nation’s Capital. projects in connection with bilingual
(41) Alaska Centennial—1967 (80 Stat. education programs to meet the special
82). The program under this legislation needs of children with limited English-
has expired. speaking ability in the United States.
(42) Model Secondary School for the (47) Vocational Rehabilitation Amend-
Deaf Act (80 Stat. 1028). This act pro- ments of 1967 (29 U.S.C. 42a(c)(3)). This
vides for funds to establish and oper- act authorizes Federal assistance to
ate, including construction and initial any public or nonprofit private agency
equipment of new buildings, expansion, or organization for the construction of
remodeling, and alteration of existing a center for vocational rehabilitation
buildings and equipment thereof, a of handicapped individuals who are
model secondary school for the deaf to both deaf and blind which shall be
serve the residents of the District of known as the National Center for Deaf-
Columbia and nearby States. Blind Youths and Adults. Construction
(43) Allied Health Professions Personnel includes new buildings and expansion,
Training Act of 1966 (42 U.S.C. remodeling, alteration and renovation
295h(b)(2)(E)). This act provides for of existing buildings, and initial equip-
grants to assist in the construction of ment of such new, newly acquired, ex-
new facilities for training centers for panded, remodeled, altered, or ren-
allied health professions, or replace- ovated buildings.
ment or rehabilitation of existing fa- (48) National Visitor Center Facilities
cilities for such centers. Act of 1968 (40 U.S.C. 808). This act au-
(44) Demonstration Cities and Metro- thorizes agreements and leases with
politan Development Act of 1966 (42 the owner of property in the District of
U.S.C. 3310; 12 U.S.C. 1715c; 42 U.S.C. Columbia known as Union Station for
25
the use of all or a part of such property bility and desirability of such schools.
for a national visitor center to be The act still further provides grants to
known as the National Visitor Center. State boards, to colleges and univer-
The agreements and leases shall pro- sities, to public educational agencies,
vide for such alterations of the Union organizations or institutions to reduce
Station Building as necessary to pro- the cost of borrowing funds for the con-
vide adequate facilities for visitors. struction of residential schools and
They also provide for the construction dormitories.
of a parking facility, including nec- (53) Postal Reorganization Act (39
essary approaches and ramps. U.S.C. 410(d)(2)). This Act provides for
(49) Juvenile Delinquency Prevention construction, modification, alteration,
and Control Act of 1968 (42 U.S.C. 3843). repair, and other improvements of
This act provides for Federal grants to postal facilities located in leased build-
State, county, municipal, or other pub- ings.
lic agency or combination thereof for (54) Airport and Airway Development
the construction of facilities to be used Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–258, section
in connection with rehabilitation serv- 52(b)(7)). This Act provides for Federal
ices for the diagnosis, treatment, and financial assistance to States and lo-
rehabilitation of delinquent youths and calities for the construction, improve-
youths in danger of becoming delin- ment, or repair of public airports.
quent.
(55) (i) Public Law 91–230. This Act
(50) Housing and Urban Development
provides for federal financial assist-
Act of 1968 (including New Communities
ance to institutions of higher learning
Act of 1968) (42 U.S.C. 3909). This act
for the construction of a National Cen-
provides for Federal assistance for the
ter on Educational Media and Mate-
following purposes:
rials for the Handicapped. The program
(i) Guarantees, and commitments to
under this statute expires on July 1,
guarantee, the bonds, debentures,
1971. Public Law 91–230, section 662(1).
notes, and other obligations issued by
new community developers to help fi- (ii) Education of the Handicapped Act
nance new community development (20 U.S.C. 12326, 1404(a)). This Act pro-
projects. vides for financial assistance to States
(ii) Amends section 212(a) of the Na- for construction, expansion, remod-
tional Housing Act, adding section 236 eling, or alteration of facilities for the
for ‘‘Rental Housing for Lower Income education of handicapped children at
Families’’ and section 242 ‘‘Mortgage the preschool, elementary school, and
Insurance for Nonprofit Hospitals’’ secondary school levels.
thereto. (56) Housing and Urban Development
(51) Public Health Service Act Amend- Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–609, section
ment (Alcoholic and Narcotic Addict Re- 707(b)). This Act provides for grants to
habilitation Amendments of 1968) (42 States and local public agencies to help
U.S.C. 2681, et seq.). This act provides finance the development of open-space
for grants to a public and nonprofit pri- or other land in urban areas for open-
vate agency or organization for con- space uses. This Act becomes effective
struction projects consisting of any fa- on July 1, 1971.
cilities (including post-hospitalization (57) Developmental Disabilities Services
treatment facilities for the prevention and Facilities Construction Amendments
and treatment of alcoholism or treat- of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–517, section 135(a)(5)).
ment of narcotic addicts.) This Act authorizes grants to States
(52) Vocational Education Amendments for construction of facilities for the
of 1968 (20 U.S.C. 1246). This act pro- provision of services to persons with
vides for grants to States for the con- developmental disabilities who are un-
struction of area vocational education able to pay for such services.
school facilities. The act further pro- (58) Rail Passenger Service Act of 1970
vides grants to public educational (Pub. L. 91–518, section 405(d)). This stat-
agencies, organizations, or institutions ute provides that the National Rail-
for construction of residential schools road Passenger Corporation may con-

to provide vocational education for the struct physical facilities necessary to
purpose of demonstrating the feasi- intercity rail passenger operations
26
within the basic national rail pas- or dangerous to his health or safety’’ as
senger system designated by the Sec- these health and safety standards are
retary of Transportation. applied in the rules of the Secretary of
(c) VA and FHA housing. In the course Labor.
of the legislative development of sec- (c) The term subcontractor under sec-
tion 107, it was recognized that section tion 107 is considered to mean a person
107 would not apply to housing con- who agrees to perform any part of the
struction for which insurance was labor or material requirements of a
issued by the Federal Housing Author- contract for construction, alteration or
ity and Veterans’ Administration for repair. Cf. MacEvoy Co. v. United
individual home ownership. Concerning States, 322 U.S. 102, 108–9 (1944). A per-
construction under the National Hous- son who undertakes to perform a por-
ing Act, Reorganization Plan No. 14 of tion of a contract involving the fur-
1950 applies to construction which is nishing of supplies or materials will be
subject to the minimum wage require- considered a ‘‘subcontractor’’ under
ments of section 212(a) thereof (12 this part and section 107 if the work in
U.S.C. 1715c). question involves the performance of
construction work and is to be per-
§ 1926.13 Interpretation of statutory formed: (1) Directly on or near the con-
terms. struction site, or (2) by the employer
(a) The terms construction, alteration, for the specific project on a customized
and repair used in section 107 of the Act basis. Thus, a supplier of materials
are also used in section 1 of the Davis- which will become an integral part of
Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a), providing the construction is a ‘‘subcontractor’’
minimum wage protection on Federal if the supplier fabricates or assembles
construction contracts, and section 1 of the goods or materials in question spe-
the Miller Act (40 U.S.C. 270a), pro- cifically for the construction project
viding performance and payment bond and the work involved may be said to
protection on Federal construction be construction activity. If the goods
contracts. Similarly, the terms con- or materials in question are ordinarily
tractor and subcontractor are used in sold to other customers from regular
those statutes, as well as in Copeland inventory, the supplier is not a ‘‘sub-
(Anti-Kickback) Act (40 U.S.C. 276c) contractor.’’ Generally, the furnishing
and the Contract Work Hours and Safe- of prestressed concrete beams and
ty Standards Act itself, which apply prestressed structural steel would be
concurrently with the Miller Act and considered manufacturing; therefore a
the Davis-Bacon Act on Federal con- supplier of such materials would not be
struction contracts and also apply to considered a ‘‘subcontractor.’’ An ex-
most federally assisted construction ample of material supplied ‘‘for the
contracts. The use of the same or iden- specific project on a customized basis’’
tical terms in these statutes which as that phrase is used in this section
apply concurrently with section 107 of would be ventilating ducts, fabricated
the Act have considerable precedential in a shop away from the construction
value in ascertaining the coverage of job site and specifically cut for the
section 107. project according to design specifica-
(b) It should be noted that section 1 tions. On the other hand, if a con-
of the Davis-Bacon Act limits min- tractor buys standard size nails from a
imum wage protection to laborers and foundry, the foundry would not be a
mechanics ‘‘employed directly’’ upon covered ‘‘subcontractor.’’ Ordinarily a
the ‘‘site of the work.’’ There is no contract for the supplying of construc-
comparable limitation in section 107 of tion equipment to a contractor would
the Act. Section 107 expressly requires not, in and of itself, be considered a
as a self-executing condition of each ‘‘subcontractor’’ for purposes of this
covered contract that no contractor or part.
subcontractor shall require ‘‘any la-
borer or mechanic employed in the per- § 1926.14 Federal contract for ‘‘mixed’’
formance of the contract to work in types of performance.

surroundings or under working condi- (a) It is the intent of the Congress to
tions which are unsanitary, hazardous, provide safety and health protection of
27
Federal, federally financed, or feder- tract will be performed nor will any of
ally assisted construction. See, for ex- the materials, supplies, articles or
ample, H. Report No. 91–241, 91st Cong., equipment to be manufactured or fur-
first session, p. 1 (1969). Thus, it is clear nished under said contract be manufac-
that when a Federal contract calls for tured or fabricated in any plants, fac-
mixed types of performance, such as tories, buildings, or surroundings or
both manufacturing and construction, under working conditions which are
section 107 would apply to the con- unsanitary or hazardous or dangerous
struction. By its express terms, section to the health and safety of employees
107 applies to a contract which is ‘‘for engaged in the performance of said
construction, alteration, and/or re- contract.’’ The rules of the Secretary
pair.’’ Such a contract is not required concerning these standards are pub-
to be exclusively for such services. The lished in 41 CFR part 50–204, and ex-
application of the section is not lim- press the Secretary of Labor’s interpre-
ited to contracts which permit an over- tation and application of section 1(e) of
all characterization as ‘‘construction the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act
contracts.’’ The text of section 107 is to certain particular working condi-
not so limited. tions. None of the described working
(b) When the mixed types of perform- conditions are intended to deal with
ances include both construction and construction activities, although such
manufacturing, see also § 1926.15(b) con- activities may conceivably be a part of
cerning the relationship between the a contract which is subject to the
Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act and Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act.
section 107. Nevertheless, such activities remain
subject to the general statutory duty
§ 1926.15 Relationship to the Service
Contract Act; Walsh-Healey Public prescribed by section 1(e). Section
Contracts Act. 103(b) of the Contract Work Hours and
Safety Standards Act provides, among
(a) A contract for ‘‘construction’’ is other things, that the Act shall not
one for nonpersonal service. See, e.g., apply to any work required to be done
41 CFR 1–1.208. Section 2(e) of the Serv- in accordance with the provisions of
ice Contract Act of 1965 requires as a the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts
condition of every Federal contract Act.
(and bid specification therefor) exceed-
ing $2,500, the ‘‘principal purpose’’ of § 1926.16 Rules of construction.
which is to furnish services to the
United States through the use of (a) The prime contractor and any
‘‘service employees,’’ that certain safe- subcontractors may make their own
ty and health standards be met. See 29 arrangements with respect to obliga-
CFR part 1925, which contains the De- tions which might be more appro-
partment rules concerning these stand- priately treated on a jobsite basis rath-
ards. Section 7 of the Service Contract er than individually. Thus, for exam-
Act provides that the Act shall not ple, the prime contractor and his sub-
apply to ‘‘any contract of the United contractors may wish to make an ex-
States or District of Columbia for con- press agreement that the prime con-
struction, alteration, and/or repair, in- tractor or one of the subcontractors
cluding painting and decorating of pub- will provide all required first-aid or
lic buildings or public works.’’ It is toilet facilities, thus relieving the sub-
clear from the legislative history of contractors from the actual, but not
section 107 that no gaps in coverage be- any legal, responsibility (or, as the
tween the two statutes are intended. case may be, relieving the other sub-
(b) The Walsh-Healey Public Con- contractors from this responsibility).
tracts Act requires that contracts en- In no case shall the prime contractor
tered into by any Federal agency for be relieved of overall responsibility for
the manufacture or furnishing of mate- compliance with the requirements of
rials, supplies, articles, and equipment this part for all work to be performed
in any amount exceeding $10,000 must under the contract.

contain, among other provisions, a re- (b) By contracting for full perform-
quirement that ‘‘no part of such con- ance of a contract subject to section
28
107 of the Act, the prime contractor as- (2) Such programs shall provide for
sumes all obligations prescribed as em- frequent and regular inspections of the
ployer obligations under the standards job sites, materials, and equipment to
contained in this part, whether or not be made by competent persons des-
he subcontracts any part of the work. ignated by the employers.
(c) To the extent that a subcon- (3) The use of any machinery, tool,
tractor of any tier agrees to perform material, or equipment which is not in
any part of the contract, he also as- compliance with any applicable re-
sumes responsibility for complying quirement of this part is prohibited.
with the standards in this part with re- Such machine, tool, material, or equip-
spect to that part. Thus, the prime ment shall either be identified as un-
contractor assumes the entire responsi- safe by tagging or locking the controls
bility under the contract and the sub- to render them inoperable or shall be
contractor assumes responsibility with physically removed from its place of
respect to his portion of the work. operation.
With respect to subcontracted work, (4) The employer shall permit only
the prime contractor and any subcon- those employees qualified by training
tractor or subcontractors shall be or experience to operate equipment and
deemed to have joint responsibility. machinery.
(d) Where joint responsibility exists, (c) The standards contained in this
both the prime contractor and his subpart shall apply with respect to em-
contractor or subcontractors, regard- ployments performed in a workplace in
less of tier, shall be considered subject a State, the District of Columbia, the
to the enforcement provisions of the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the
Act. Virgin Islands, American Samoa,
Guam, Trust Territory of the Pacific
Subpart C—General Safety and Islands, Wake Island, Outer Conti-
Health Provisions nental Shelf lands defined in the Outer
Continental Shelf Lands Act, Johnston
Island, and the Canal Zone.
AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; 29 U.S.C.
(d) (1) If a particular standard is spe-
653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No.
12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 cifically applicable to a condition,
FR 35736), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 5–2007 (72 FR practice, means, method, operation, or
31160), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912) as applicable; process, it shall prevail over any dif-
and 29 CFR part 1911. ferent general standard which might
otherwise be applicable to the same
§ 1926.20 General safety and health condition, practice, means, method, op-
provisions. eration, or process.
(a) Contractor requirements. (1) Sec- (2) On the other hand, any standard
tion 107 of the Act requires that it shall apply according to its terms to
shall be a condition of each contract any employment and place of employ-
which is entered into under legislation ment in any industry, even though par-
subject to Reorganization Plan Number ticular standards are also prescribed
14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267), as defined in for the industry to the extent that
§ 1926.12, and is for construction, alter- none of such particular standards ap-
ation, and/or repair, including painting plies.
and decorating, that no contractor or (e) In the event a standard protects
subcontractor for any part of the con- on its face a class of persons larger
tract work shall require any laborer or than employees, the standard shall be
mechanic employed in the performance applicable under this part only to em-
of the contract to work in sur- ployees and their employment and
roundings or under working conditions places of employment.
which are unsanitary, hazardous, or (f) Compliance duties owed to each em-
dangerous to his health or safety. ployee—(1) Personal protective equipment.
(b) Accident prevention responsibilities. Standards in this part requiring the
(1) It shall be the responsibility of the employer to provide personal protec-
employer to initiate and maintain such tive equipment (PPE), including res-
programs as may be necessary to com- pirators and other types of PPE, be-
ply with this part. cause of hazards to employees impose a
29
separate compliance duty with respect first aid procedures to be used in the
to each employee covered by the re- event of injury.
quirement. The employer must provide (5) Employees required to handle or
PPE to each employee required to use use flammable liquids, gases, or toxic
the PPE, and each failure to provide materials shall be instructed in the
PPE to an employee may be considered safe handling and use of these mate-
a separate violation. rials and made aware of the specific re-
(2) Training. Standards in this part quirements contained in subparts D, F,
requiring training on hazards and re- and other applicable subparts of this
lated matters, such as standards re- part.
quiring that employees receive train-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
ing or that the employer train employ- 1979, as amended at 80 FR 25518, May 4, 2015]
ees, provide training to employees, or
institute or implement a training pro- § 1926.22 Recording and reporting of
gram, impose a separate compliance injuries. [Reserved]
duty with respect to each employee
covered by the requirement. The em- § 1926.23 First aid and medical atten-
ployer must train each affected em- tion.
ployee in the manner required by the First aid services and provisions for
standard, and each failure to train an medical care shall be made available
employee may be considered a separate by the employer for every employee
violation. covered by these regulations. Regula-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
tions prescribing specific requirements
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35078, June 30, 1993; for first aid, medical attention, and
73 FR 75588, Dec. 12, 2008] emergency facilities are contained in
subpart D of this part.
§ 1926.21 Safety training and edu-
cation. § 1926.24 Fire protection and preven-
tion.
(a) General requirements. The Sec-
retary shall, pursuant to section 107(f) The employer shall be responsible for
of the Act, establish and supervise pro- the development and maintenance of
grams for the education and training of an effective fire protection and preven-
employers and employees in the rection program at the job site through-
ognition, avoidance and prevention of out all phases of the construction, re-
unsafe conditions in employments cov- pair, alteration, or demolition work.
ered by the act. The employer shall ensure the avail-
(b) Employer responsibility. (1) The em- ability of the fire protection and sup-
ployer should avail himself of the safe- pression equipment required by subpart
ty and health training programs the F of this part.
Secretary provides.
(2) The employer shall instruct each § 1926.25 Housekeeping.
employee in the recognition and avoid- (a) During the course of construction,
ance of unsafe conditions and the regu- alteration, or repairs, form and scrap
lations applicable to his work environ- lumber with protruding nails, and all
ment to control or eliminate any haz- other debris, shall be kept cleared from
ards or other exposure to illness or in- work areas, passageways, and stairs, in
jury. and around buildings or other struc-
(3) Employees required to handle or tures.
use poisons, caustics, and other harm- (b) Combustible scrap and debris
ful substances shall be instructed re- shall be removed at regular intervals
garding the safe handling and use, and during the course of construction. Safe
be made aware of the potential haz- means shall be provided to facilitate
ards, personal hygiene, and personal such removal.
protective measures required. (c) Containers shall be provided for
(4) In job site areas where harmful the collection and separation of waste,
plants or animals are present, employ- trash, oily and used rags, and other
ees who may be exposed shall be in- refuse. Containers used for garbage and
structed regarding the potential haz- other oily, flammable, or hazardous
ards, and how to avoid injury, and the wastes, such as caustics, acids, harmful
30
dusts, etc. shall be equipped with cov- § 1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repair-
ers. Garbage and other waste shall be ing.
disposed of at frequent and regular in- (a) General. Shipbuilding, ship repair-
tervals. ing, alterations, and maintenance per-
formed on ships under Government
§ 1926.26 Illumination.
contract, except naval ship construc-
Construction areas, aisles, stairs, tion, is work subject to the Act.
ramps, runways, corridors, offices, (b) Applicable safety and health stand-
shops, and storage areas where work is ards. For the purpose of work carried
in progress shall be lighted with either out under this section, the safety and
natural or artificial illumination. The health regulations in part 1915 of this
minimum illumination requirements title, Shipyard Employment, shall
for work areas are contained in subpart apply.
D of this part.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
§ 1926.27 Sanitation. 1979, as amended at 61 FR 9249, Mar. 7, 1996]
Health and sanitation requirements § 1926.32 Definitions.

for drinking water are contained in
The following definitions shall apply
subpart D of this part. in the application of the regulations in
§ 1926.28 Personal protective equip- this part:
ment. (a) Act means section 107 of the Con-
tract Work Hours and Safety Stand-
(a) The employer is responsible for ards Act, commonly known as the Con-
requiring the wearing of appropriate struction Safety Act (86 Stat. 96; 40
personal protective equipment in all U.S.C. 333).
operations where there is an exposure (b) ANSI means American National
to hazardous conditions or where this Standards Institute.
part indicates the need for using such (c) Approved means sanctioned, en-
equipment to reduce the hazards to the dorsed, accredited, certified, or accept-
employees. ed as satisfactory by a duly constituted
(b) Regulations governing the use, se- and nationally recognized authority or
lection, and maintenance of personal agency.
protective and lifesaving equipment (d) Authorized person means a person
are described under subpart E of this approved or assigned by the employer
part. to perform a specific type of duty or
duties or to be at a specific location or
§ 1926.29 Acceptable certifications. locations at the jobsite.
(a) Pressure vessels. Current and valid (e) Administration means the Occupa-
certification by an insurance company tional Safety and Health Administra-
or regulatory authority shall be tion.
deemed as acceptable evidence of safe (f) Competent person means one who is
installation, inspection, and testing of capable of identifying existing and pre-
pressure vessels provided by the em- dictable hazards in the surroundings or
ployer. working conditions which are unsani-
(b) Boilers. Boilers provided by the tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em-
employer shall be deemed to be in com- ployees, and who has authorization to
pliance with the requirements of this take prompt corrective measures to
part when evidence of current and valid eliminate them.
certification by an insurance company (g) Construction work. For purposes of
or regulatory authority attesting to this section, Construction work means
the safe installation, inspection, and work for construction, alteration, and/
testing is presented. or repair, including painting and deco-
(c) Other requirements. Regulations rating.
prescribing specific requirements for (h) Defect means any characteristic
other types of pressure vessels and or condition which tends to weaken or

similar equipment are contained in reduce the strength of the tool, object,
subparts F and O of this part. or structure of which it is a part.
31
(i) Designated person means ‘‘author- to meet a given purpose, occasion, con-
ized person’’ as defined in paragraph (d) dition, function, or circumstance.
of this section.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(j) Employee means every laborer or 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35078, June 30, 1993]
mechanic under the Act regardless of
the contractual relationship which § 1926.33 Access to employee exposure
may be alleged to exist between the la- and medical records.
borer and mechanic and the contractor NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
or subcontractor who engaged him. struction work under this section are iden-
‘‘Laborer and mechanic’’ are not de- tical to those set forth at § 1910.1020 of this
fined in the Act, but the identical chapter.
terms are used in the Davis-Bacon Act [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
(40 U.S.C. 276a), which provides for
minimum wage protection on Federal § 1926.34 Means of egress.
and federally assisted construction
(a) General. In every building or
contracts. The use of the same term in
structure exits shall be so arranged and
a statute which often applies concur-
maintained as to provide free and un-
rently with section 107 of the Act has
obstructed egress from all parts of the
considerable precedential value in building or structure at all times when
ascertaining the meaning of ‘‘laborer it is occupied. No lock or fastening to
and mechanic’’ as used in the Act. La- prevent free escape from the inside of
borer generally means one who per- any building shall be installed except
forms manual labor or who labors at an in mental, penal, or corrective institu-
occupation requiring physical strength; tions where supervisory personnel is
mechanic generally means a worker continually on duty and effective pro-
skilled with tools. See 18 Comp. Gen. visions are made to remove occupants
341. in case of fire or other emergency.
(k) Employer means contractor or (b) Exit marking. Exits shall be
subcontractor within the meaning of marked by a readily visible sign. Ac-
the Act and of this part. cess to exits shall be marked by readily
(l) Hazardous substance means a sub- visible signs in all cases where the exit
stance which, by reason of being explo- or way to reach it is not immediately
sive, flammable, poisonous, corrosive, visible to the occupants.
oxidizing, irritating, or otherwise (c) Maintenance and workmanship.
harmful, is likely to cause death or in- Means of egress shall be continually
jury. maintained free of all obstructions or
(m) Qualified means one who, by pos- impediments to full instant use in the
session of a recognized degree, certifi- case of fire or other emergency.
cate, or professional standing, or who
[58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993]
by extensive knowledge, training, and
experience, has successfully dem- § 1926.35 Employee emergency action
onstrated his ability to solve or resolve plans.
problems relating to the subject mat-
(a) Scope and application. This section
ter, the work, or the project.
applies to all emergency action plans
(n) Safety factor means the ratio of
required by a particular OSHA stand-
the ultimate breaking strength of a ard. The emergency action plan shall
member or piece of material or equip- be in writing (except as provided in the
ment to the actual working stress or last sentence of paragraph (e)(3) of this
safe load when in use. section) and shall cover those des-
(o) Secretary means the Secretary of ignated actions employers and employ-
Labor. ees must take to ensure employee safe-
(p) SAE means Society of Automotive ty from fire and other emergencies.
Engineers. (b) Elements. The following elements,
(q) Shall means mandatory. at a minimum, shall be included in the
(r) Should means recommended. plan:

(s) Suitable means that which fits, (1) Emergency escape procedures and
and has the qualities or qualifications emergency escape route assignments;
32
(2) Procedures to be followed by em- Subpart D—Occupational Health

ployees who remain to operate critical and Environmental Controls
plant operations before they evacuate;
(3) Procedures to account for all em- AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3704; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655,
ployees after emergency evacuation 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36
has been completed; FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736),
(4) Rescue and medical duties for 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65
those employees who are to perform FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR
31160), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR
them; 3912); 29 CFR part 1911; and 5 U.S.C. 553, as
(5) The preferred means of reporting applicable.
fires and other emergencies; and Section 1926.61 also issued under 49 U.S.C.
(6) Names or regular job titles of per- 5101 et seq.
sons or departments who can be con- Section 1926.62 also issued under 42 U.S.C.
4853.
tacted for further information or expla- Section 1926.65 also issued under 126 of Pub-
nation of duties under the plan. lic Law 99–499, 100 Stat. 1613.
(c) Alarm system. (1) The employer
shall establish an employee alarm sys- § 1926.50 Medical services and first
tem which complies with § 1926.159. aid.
(2) If the employee alarm system is (a) The employer shall insure the
used for alerting fire brigade members, availability of medical personnel for
or for other purposes, a distinctive sig- advice and consultation on matters of
nal for each purpose shall be used. occupational health.
(d) Evacuation. The employer shall (b) Provisions shall be made prior to
establish in the emergency action plan commencement of the project for
the types of evacuation to be used in prompt medical attention in case of se-
emergency circumstances. rious injury.
(c) In the absence of an infirmary,
(e) Training. (1) Before implementing
clinic, hospital, or physician, that is
the emergency action plan, the em-
reasonably accessible in terms of time
ployer shall designate and train a suffi- and distance to the worksite, which is
cient number of persons to assist in the available for the treatment of injured
safe and orderly emergency evacuation employees, a person who has a valid
of employees. certificate in first-aid training from
(2) The employer shall review the the U.S. Bureau of Mines, the Amer-
plan with each employee covered by ican Red Cross, or equivalent training
the plan at the following times: that can be verified by documentary
(i) Initially when the plan is devel- evidence, shall be available at the
oped, worksite to render first aid.
(ii) Whenever the employee’s respon- (d)(1) First aid supplies shall be eas-
sibilities or designated actions under ily accessible when required.
the plan change, and (2) The contents of the first aid kit
(iii) Whenever the plan is changed. shall be placed in a weatherproof con-
(3) The employer shall review with tainer with individual sealed packages
for each type of item, and shall be
each employee upon initial assignment
checked by the employer before being
those parts of the plan which the em-
sent out on each job and at least week-
ployee must know to protect the em-
ly on each job to ensure that the ex-
ployee in the event of an emergency. pended items are replaced.
The written plan shall be kept at the (e) Proper equipment for prompt
workplace and made available for em- transportation of the injured person to
ployee review. For those employers a physician or hospital, or a commu-
with 10 or fewer employees the plan nication system for contacting nec-
may be communicated orally to em- essary ambulance service, shall be pro-
ployees and the employer need not vided.
maintain a written plan. (f) In areas where 911 is not available,
[58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993]

the telephone numbers of the physi-
cians, hospitals, or ambulances shall be
conspicuously posted.
33
(g) Where the eyes or body of any with a tap. Water shall not be dipped
person may be exposed to injurious cor- from containers.
rosive materials, suitable facilities for (3) Any container used to distribute
quick drenching or flushing of the eyes drinking water shall be clearly marked
and body shall be provided within the as to the nature of its contents and not
work area for immediate emergency used for any other purpose.
use. (4) The common drinking cup is pro-
hibited.
APPENDIX A TO § 1926.50—FIRST AID KITS (5) Where single service cups (to be
(NON-MANDATORY)
used but once) are supplied, both a san-
First aid supplies are required to be easily itary container for the unused cups and
accessible under paragraph § 1926.50(d)(1). An a receptacle for disposing of the used
example of the minimal contents of a generic cups shall be provided.
first aid kit is described in American Na-
(6) Potable water means water that
tional Standard (ANSI) Z308.1–1978 ‘‘Min-
imum Requirements for Industrial Unit-Type meets the standards for drinking pur-
First-aid Kits’’. The contents of the kit list- poses of the State or local authority
ed in the ANSI standard should be adequate having jurisdiction, or water that
for small work sites. When larger operations meets the quality standards prescribed
or multiple operations are being conducted by the U.S. Environmental Protection
at the same location, employers should de- Agency’s National Primary Drinking
termine the need for additional first aid kits Water Regulations (40 CFR part 141).
at the worksite, additional types of first aid
(b) Nonpotable water. (1) Outlets for
equipment and supplies and additional quan-
tities and types of supplies and equipment in nonpotable water, such as water for in-
the first aid kits. dustrial or firefighting purposes only,
In a similar fashion, employers who have shall be identified by signs meeting the
unique or changing first-aid needs in their requirements of subpart G of this part,
workplace may need to enhance their first- to indicate clearly that the water is
aid kits. The employer can use the OSHA 300 unsafe and is not to be used for drink-
log, OSHA 301 log, or other reports to iden- ing, washing, or cooking purposes.
tify these unique problems. Consultation (2) There shall be no cross-connec-
from the local fire/rescue department, appro-
tion, open or potential, between a sys-
priate medical professional, or local emer-
gency room may be helpful to employers in tem furnishing potable water and a
these circumstances. By assessing the spe- system furnishing nonpotable water.
cific needs of their workplace, employers can (c) Toilets at construction jobsites. (1)
ensure that reasonably anticipated supplies Toilets shall be provided for employees
are available. Employers should assess the according to the following table:
specific needs of their worksite periodically
and augment the first aid kit appropriately. TABLE D–1
If it is reasonably anticipated employees
will be exposed to blood or other potentially Number of em- Minimum number of facilities
ployees
infectious materials while using first-aid
supplies, employers should provide personal 20 or less .......... 1.
protective equipment (PPE). Appropriate 20 or more ......... 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 40 workers.
PPE includes gloves, gowns, face shields, 200 or more ....... 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 50 workers.
masks and eye protection (see ‘‘Occupational
Exposure to Blood borne Pathogens’’, 29 CFR (2) Under temporary field conditions,
1910.1030(d)(3)) (56 FR 64175). provisions shall be made to assure not
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, less than one toilet facility is avail-
1979, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; able.
58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, (3) Job sites, not provided with a san-
1996; 63 FR 33469, June 18, 1998; 76 FR 80740, itary sewer, shall be provided with one
Dec. 27, 2011] of the following toilet facilities unless
prohibited by local codes:
§ 1926.51 Sanitation. (i) Privies (where their use will not
(a) Potable water. (1) An adequate sup- contaminate ground or surface water);
ply of potable water shall be provided (ii) Chemical toilets;
in all places of employment. (iii) Recirculating toilets;
(2) Portable containers used to dis- (iv) Combustion toilets.

pense drinking water shall be capable (4) The requirements of this para-
of being tightly closed, and equipped graph (c) for sanitation facilities shall
34
not apply to mobile crews having (ii) One shower shall be provided for
transportation readily available to each 10 employees of each sex, or nu-
nearby toilet facilities. merical fraction thereof, who are re-
(d) Food handling. (1) All employees’ quired to shower during the same shift.
food service facilities and operations (iii) Body soap or other appropriate
shall meet the applicable laws, ordi- cleansing agents convenient to the
nances, and regulations of the jurisdic- showers shall be provided as specified
tions in which they are located. in paragraph (f)(3)(iii) of this section.
(2) All employee food service facili- (iv) Showers shall be provided with
ties and operations shall be carried out hot and cold water feeding a common
in accordance with sound hygienic discharge line.
principles. In all places of employment (v) Employees who use showers shall
where all or part of the food service is be provided with individual clean tow-
provided, the food dispensed shall be els.
wholesome, free from spoilage, and (g) Eating and drinking areas. No em-
shall be processed, prepared, handled, ployee shall be allowed to consume
and stored in such a manner as to be food or beverages in a toilet room nor
protected against contamination. in any area exposed to a toxic mate-
(e) Temporary sleeping quarters. When rial.
temporary sleeping quarters are pro- (h) Vermin control. Every enclosed
vided, they shall be heated, ventilated, workplace shall be so constructed,
and lighted. equipped, and maintained, so far as
(f) Washing facilities. (1) The employer reasonably practicable, as to prevent
shall provide adequate washing facili- the entrance or harborage of rodents,
ties for employees engaged in the ap- insects, and other vermin. A con-
plication of paints, coating, herbicides, tinuing and effective extermination
or insecticides, or in other operations program shall be instituted where their
where contaminants may be harmful to presence is detected.
the employees. Such facilities shall be (i) Change rooms. Whenever employ-
in near proximity to the worksite and ees are required by a particular stand-
shall be so equipped as to enable em- ard to wear protective clothing because
ployees to remove such substances. of the possibility of contamination
(2) General. Washing facilities shall with toxic materials, change rooms
be maintained in a sanitary condition. equipped with storage facilities for
(3) Lavatories. (i) Lavatories shall be street clothes and separate storage fa-
made available in all places of employ- cilities for the protective clothing
ment. The requirements of this sub- shall be provided.
division do not apply to mobile crews
or to normally unattended work loca- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
tions if employees working at these lo- 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993;
cations have transportation readily 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011]
available to nearby washing facilities
§ 1926.52 Occupational noise exposure.
which meet the other requirements of
this paragraph. (a) Protection against the effects of
(ii) Each lavatory shall be provided noise exposure shall be provided when
with hot and cold running water, or the sound levels exceed those shown in
tepid running water. Table D–2 of this section when meas-
(iii) Hand soap or similar cleansing ured on the A-scale of a standard sound
agents shall be provided. level meter at slow response.
(iv) Individual hand towels or sec- (b) When employees are subjected to
tions thereof, of cloth or paper, air sound levels exceeding those listed in
blowers or clean individual sections of Table D–2 of this section, feasible ad-
continuous cloth toweling, convenient ministrative or engineering controls
to the lavatories, shall be provided. shall be utilized. If such controls fail to
(4) Showers. (i) Whenever showers are reduce sound levels within the levels of
required by a particular standard, the the table, personal protective equip-
showers shall be provided in accord- ment as required in subpart E, shall be

ance with paragraphs (f)(4) (ii) through provided and used to reduce sound lev-
(v) of this section. els within the levels of the table.
35
(c) If the variations in noise level in- (e) Exposure to impulsive or impact
volve maxima at intervals of 1 second noise should not exceed 140 dB peak
or less, it is to be considered contin- sound pressure level.
uous.
(d)(1) In all cases where the sound § 1926.53 Ionizing radiation.
levels exceed the values shown herein, (a) In construction and related ac-
a continuing, effective hearing con- tivities involving the use of sources of
servation program shall be adminis- ionizing radiation, the pertinent provi-
tered. sions of the Nuclear Regulatory Com-
mission’s Standards for Protection
TABLE D–2—PERMISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES Against Radiation (10 CFR part 20), re-
Sound level
lating to protection against occupa-
Duration per day, hours dBA slow tional radiation exposure, shall apply.
response (b) Any activity which involves the
8 ......................................................................... 90 use of radioactive materials or X-rays,
6 ......................................................................... 92 whether or not under license from the
4 ......................................................................... 95 Nuclear Regulatory Commission, shall
3 ......................................................................... 97
2 ......................................................................... 100 be performed by competent persons
11⁄2 ..................................................................... 102 specially trained in the proper and safe
1 .........................................................................
1⁄2 .......................................................................
105 operation of such equipment. In the
110
1⁄4 or less ........................................................... 115
case of materials used under Commis-
sion license, only persons actually li-
(2)(i) When the daily noise exposure censed, or competent persons under di-
is composed of two or more periods of rection and supervision of the licensee,
noise exposure of different levels, their shall perform such work.
combined effect should be considered, (c)–(r) [Reserved]
rather than the individual effect of NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
each. Exposure to different levels for struction work under paragraphs (c) through
various periods of time shall be com- (r) of this section are identical to those set
puted according to the formula set forth at paragraphs (a) through (p) of
forth in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this sec- § 1910.1096 of this chapter.
tion. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(ii) Fe = (T1/L1) + (T2/L2) + · · · + (Tn/ 1979, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996;
L n) 61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
Where: § 1926.54 Nonionizing radiation.

Fe = The equivalent noise exposure factor. (a) Only qualified and trained em-
T = The period of noise exposure at any es- ployees shall be assigned to install, ad-
sentially constant level.
L = The duration of the permissible noise ex-
just, and operate laser equipment.
posure at the constant level (from Table (b) Proof of qualification of the laser
D–2). equipment operator shall be available
and in possession of the operator at all
If the value of Fe exceeds unity (1) the times.
exposure exceeds permissible levels. (c) Employees, when working in areas
(iii) A sample computation showing in which a potential exposure to direct
an application of the formula in para- or reflected laser light greater than
graph (d)(2)(ii) of this section is as fol- 0.005 watts (5 milliwatts) exists, shall
lows. An employee is exposed at these be provided with antilaser eye protec-
levels for these periods: tion devices as specified in subpart E of
110 db A 1⁄4 hour. this part.
100 db A 1⁄2 hour. (d) Areas in which lasers are used
90 db A 11⁄2 hours. shall be posted with standard laser
warning placards.
Fe = (1⁄4/1⁄2) + (1⁄2/2) + (11⁄2/8)
Fe = 0.500 + 0.25 + 0.188
(e) Beam shutters or caps shall be
Fe = 0.938 utilized, or the laser turned off, when
laser transmission is not actually re-
Since the value of Fe does not exceed quired. When the laser is left unat-
unity, the exposure is within permis- tended for a substantial period of time,
sible limits. such as during lunch hour, overnight,
36
or at change of shifts, the laser shall be fied in the ‘‘Threshold Limit Values of
turned off. Airborne Contaminants for 1970’’ of the
(f) Only mechanical or electronic American Conference of Governmental
means shall be used as a detector for Industrial Hygienists, shall be avoided.
guiding the internal alignment of the See appendix A to this section.
laser. (b) To achieve compliance with para-
(g) The laser beam shall not be di- graph (a) of this section, administra-
rected at employees. tive or engineering controls must first
(h) When it is raining or snowing, or be implemented whenever feasible.
when there is dust or fog in the air, the When such controls are not feasible to
operation of laser systems shall be pro- achieve full compliance, protective
hibited where practicable; in any equipment or other protective meas-
event, employees shall be kept out of ures shall be used to keep the exposure
range of the area of source and target of employees to air contaminants with-
during such weather conditions. in the limits prescribed in this section.
(i) Laser equipment shall bear a label
Any equipment and technical measures
to indicate maximum output.
used for this purpose must first be ap-
(j) Employees shall not be exposed to
proved for each particular use by a
light intensities above:
competent industrial hygienist or
(1) Direct staring: 1 micro-watt per
square centimeter; other technically qualified person.
(2) Incidental observing: 1 milliwatt Whenever respirators are used, their
per square centimeter; use shall comply with § 1926.103.
(3) Diffused reflected light: 21⁄2 watts (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this sec-
per square centimeter. tion do not apply to the exposure of
(k) Laser unit in operation should be employees to airborne asbestos,
set up above the heads of the employ- tremolite, anthophyllite, or actinolite
ees, when possible. dust. Whenever any employee is ex-
(l) Employees shall not be exposed to posed to airborne asbestos, tremolite,
microwave power densities in excess of anthophyllite, or actinolite dust, the
10 milliwatts per square centimeter. requirements of § 1910.1101 or § 1926.58 of
this title shall apply.
§ 1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, (d) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this sec-
and mists. tion do not apply to the exposure of
(a) Exposure of employees to inhala- employees to formaldehyde. Whenever
tion, ingestion, skin absorption, or any employee is exposed to formalde-
contact with any material or substance hyde, the requirements of § 1910.1048 of
at a concentration above those speci- this title shall apply.
APPENDIX A TO § 1926.55—1970 AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL

HYGIENISTS’ THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS
THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Skin Designa-
Substance CAS No. d ppm a mg/m 3 b tion
Abate; see Temephos.

Acetaldehyde ......................................... 75–07–0 200 360 —
Acetic acid ............................................. 64–19–7 10 25 —
Acetic anhydride .................................... 108–24–7 5 20 —
Acetone ................................................. 67–64–1 1000 2400 —
Acetonitrile ............................................. 75–05–8 40 70 —
2-Acetylaminofluorine; see § 1926.1114 53–96–3
Acetylene ............................................... 74–86–2 E
Acetylene dichloride; see 1,2-
Dichloroethylene.
Acetylene tetrabromide ......................... 79–27–6 1 14 —
Acrolein ................................................. 107–02–8 0.1 0.25 —

Acrylamide ............................................. 79–06–1 — 0.3 X
Acrylonitrile; see § 1926.1145 ............... 107–13–1
37
THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued
Skin Designa-
Aldrin ..................................................... 309–00–2 — 0.25 X

Allyl alcohol ........................................... 107–18–6 2 5 X
Allyl chloride .......................................... 107–05–1 1 3 —
Allyl glycidyl ether (AGE) ...................... 106–92–3 (C)10 (C)45 —
Allyl propyl disulfide .............................. 2179–59–1 2 12 —
alpha-Alumina ....................................... 1344–28–1
Total dust ....................................... — —
Respirable fraction ......................... — —
Alundum; see alpha-Alumina.
4-Aminodiphenyl; see § 1926.1111 ....... 92–67–1
2-Aminoethanol; see Ethanolamine.
2-Aminopyridine .................................... 504–29–0 0.5 2 —
Ammonia ............................................... 7664–41–7 50 35 —
Ammonium sulfamate ........................... 7773–06–0
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Respirable fraction ......................... — 5 —
n-Amyl acetate ...................................... 628–63–7 100 525 —
sec-Amyl acetate ................................... 626–38–0 125 650 —
Aniline and homologs ............................ 62–53–3 5 19 X
Anisidine (o-, p-isomers) ....................... 29191–52–4 — 0.5 X
Antimony and compounds (as Sb) ....... 7440–36–0 — 0.5 —
ANTU (alpha Naphthylthiourea) ............ 86–88–4 — 0.3 —
Argon ..................................................... 7440–37–1 E
Arsenic, inorganic compounds (as As);
see § 1926.1118 ................................ 7440–38–2 — — —
Arsenic, organic compounds (as As) .... 7440–38–2 — 0.5 —
Arsine .................................................... 7784–42–1 0.05 0.2 —
Asbestos; see 1926.58.
Azinphos-methyl .................................... 86–50–0 — 0.2 X
Barium, soluble compounds (as Ba) ..... 7440–39–3 — 0.5 —
Benzene g; see § 1926.1128 ................. 71–43–2
Benzidine; see § 1926.1110 .................. 92–87–5
p-Benzoquinone; see Quinone.
Benzo(a)pyrene; see Coal tar pitch
volatiles.
Benzoyl peroxide ................................... 94–36–0 — 5 —
Benzyl chloride ...................................... 100–44–7 1 5 —
Beryllium and beryllium compounds (as
Be); see 1926.1124 (q) ....................... 7440–41–7 — 0.002 —
Biphenyl; see Diphenyl.
Bisphenol A; see Diglycidyl ether.
Boron oxide ........................................... 1303–86–2
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Boron tribromide .................................... 10294–33–4 1 10 —
Boron trifluoride ..................................... 7637–07–2 (C)1 (C)3 —
Bromine ................................................. 7726–95–6 0.1 0.7 —
Bromine pentafluoride ........................... 7789–30–2 0.1 0.7 —
Bromoform ............................................. 75–25–2 0.5 5 X
Butadiene (1,3-Butadiene); see 29 CFR
1910.1051; 29 CFR 1910.19(l) .......... 106–99–0 STEL
1 ppm/5 ppm —
Butanethiol; see Butyl mercaptan.

2-Butanone (Methyl ethyl ketone) ......... 78–93–3 200 590 —
2-Butoxyethanol .................................... 111–76–2 50 240 X
n-Butyl-acetate ...................................... 123–86–4 150 710 —
sec-Butyl acetate ................................... 105–46–4 200 950 —
tert-Butyl acetate ................................... 540–88–5 200 950 —
n-Butyl alcohol ....................................... 71–36–3 100 300 —

sec-Butyl alcohol ................................... 78–92–2 150 450 —
tert-Butyl alcohol ................................... 75–65–0 100 300 —
Butylamine ............................................. 109–73–9 (C)5 (C)15 X
38
Skin Designa-
tert-Butyl chromate (as CrO3); see

1926.1126 n ........................................ 1189–85–1
n-Butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) .................. 2426–08–6 50 270 —
Butyl mercaptan .................................... 109–79–5 0.5 1.5 —
p-tert-Butyltoluene ................................. 98–51–1 10 60 —
Cadmium (as Cd); see 1926.1127 ........ 7440–43–9
Calcium carbonate ................................ 1317–65–3
Total dust ....................................... — —
Calcium oxide ........................................ 1305–78–8 — 5 —
Calcium sulfate ...................................... 7778–18–9
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Camphor, synthetic ............................... 76–22–2 — 2 —
Carbaryl (Sevin) .................................... 63–25–2 — 5 —
Carbon black ......................................... 1333–86–4 — 3.5 —
Carbon dioxide ...................................... 124–38–9 5000 9000 —
Carbon disulfide .................................... 75–15–0 20 60 X
Carbon monoxide .................................. 630–08–0 50 55 —
Carbon tetrachloride .............................. 56–23–5 10 65 X
Cellulose ................................................ 9004–34–6
Total dust ....................................... — —
Chlordane .............................................. 57–74–9 — 0.5 X
Chlorinated camphene .......................... 8001–35–2 — 0.5 X
Chlorinated diphenyl oxide .................... 55720–99–5 — 0.5 —
Chlorine ................................................. 7782–50–5 1 3 —
Chlorine dioxide .................................... 10049–04–4 0.1 0.3
Chlorine trifluoride ................................. 7790–91–2 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 —
Chloroacetaldehyde .............................. 107–20–0 (C)1 (C)3 —
a-Chloroacetophenone (Phenacyl chlo-
ride) .................................................... 532–27–4 0.05 0.3 —
Chlorobenzene ...................................... 108–90–7 75 350 —
o-Chlorobenzylidene malononitrile ........ 2698–41–1 0.05 0.4 —
Chlorobromomethane ............................ 74–97–5 200 1050 —
2-Chloro-1,3-butadiene; see beta-Chlo-
roprene.
Chlorodiphenyl (42% Chlorine) (PCB) .. 53469–21–9 — 1 X
Chlorodiphenyl (54% Chlorine) (PCB) .. 11097–69–1 — 0.5 X
1-Chloro,2,3-epoxypropane; see
Epichlorohydrin.
2-Chloroethanol; see Ethylene
chlorohydrin.
Chloroethylene; see Vinyl chloride.
Chloroform (Trichloromethane) ............. 67–66–3 (C)50 (C)240 —
bis(Chloromethyl) ether; see
§ 1926.1108 ....................................... 542–88–1
Chloromethyl methyl ether; see
§ 1926.1106 ....................................... 107–30–2
1-Chloro-1-nitropropane ........................ 600–25–9 20 100 —
Chloropicrin ........................................... 76–06–2 0.1 0.7 —
beta-Chloroprene .................................. 126–99–8 25 90 X
Chromium (II) compounds.
(as Cr) ............................................ 7440–47–3 — 0.5 —
Chromium (III) compounds.
(as Cr) ............................................ 7440–47–3 — 0.5 —
Chromium (VI) compounds; See
1926.1126 o.
Chromium metal and insol. salts (as

Cr) ...................................................... 7440–47–3 — 1 —
Chrysene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles.
39
Skin Designa-
Coal tar pitch volatiles (benzene solu-

ble fraction), anthracene, BaP, phen-
anthrene, acridine, chrysene, pyrene 65996–93–2 — 0.2 —
Cobalt metal, dust, and fume (as Co) .. 7440–48–4 — 0.1 —
Coke oven emissions; see § 1926.1129.
Copper ................................................... 7440–50–8
Fume (as Cu) ................................. — 0.1 —
Dusts and mists (as Cu) ................ — 1 —
Corundum; see Emery.
Cotton dust (raw) .................................. — 1
Crag herbicide (Sesone) ....................... 136–78–7
Total dust ....................................... — —
Cresol, all isomers ................................ 1319–77–3 5 22 X
Crotonaldehyde ..................................... 123–73–9; 2 6
4170–30–3
Cumene ................................................. 98–82–8 50 245 X
Cyanides (as CN) .................................. Varies with — 5 X
Compound
Cyanogen .............................................. 460–19–5 10 — —
Cyclohexane .......................................... 110–82–7 300 1050 —
Cyclohexanol ......................................... 108–93–0 50 200 —
Cyclohexanone ...................................... 108–94–1 50 200 —
Cyclohexene .......................................... 110–83–8 300 1015 —
Cyclonite ................................................ 121–82–4 — 1.5 X
Cyclopentadiene .................................... 542–92–7 75 200 —
DDT, see
Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane.
DDVP, see Dichlorvos.
2,4-D (Dichlorophenoxyacetic acid) ...... 94–75–7 — 10 —
Decaborane ........................................... 17702–41–9 0.05 0.3 X
Demeton (Systox) ................................. 8065–48–3 — 0.1 X
Diacetone alcohol (4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-
2-pentanone) ..................................... 123–42–2 50 240 —
1,2-Diaminoethane; see Ethylene-
diamine.
Diazomethane ....................................... 334–88–3 0.2 0.4 —
Diborane ................................................ 19287–45–7 0.1 0.1 —
1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane (DBCP);
see § 1926.1144 ................................ 96–12–8 —
1,2-Dibromoethane; see Ethylene
dibromide.
Dibutyl phosphate ................................. 107–66–4 1 5 —
Dibutyl phthalate ................................... 84–74–2 — 5 —
Dichloroacetylene .................................. 7572–29–4 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 —
o-Dichlorobenzene ................................ 95–50–1 (C)50 (C)300 —
p-Dichlorobenzene ................................ 106–46–7 75 450 —
3,3′-Dichlorobenzidine; see
§ 1926.1107 ....................................... 91–94–1
Dichlorodifluoromethane ....................... 75–71–8 1000 4950 —
1,3-Dichloro-5,5-dimethyl hydantoin ..... 118–52–5 — 0.2 —
Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane (DDT) 50–29–3 — 1 X
1,1-Dichloroethane ................................ 75–34–3 100 400 —
1,2-Dichloroethane; see Ethylene di-
chloride.
1,2-Dichloroethylene ............................. 540–59–0 200 790 —
Dichloroethyl ether ................................ 111–44–4 (C)15 (C)90 X
Dichloromethane; see Methylene chlo-
ride.
Dichloromonofluoromethane ................. 75–43–4 1000 4200 —
1,1-Dichloro-1-nitroethane ..................... 594–72–9 (C)10 (C)60 —
40
Skin Designa-
1,2-Dichloropropane; see Propylene di-

chloride.
Dichlorotetrafluoroethane ...................... 76–14–2 1000 7000 —
Dichlorvos (DDVP) ................................ 62–73–7 — 1 X
Dieldrin .................................................. 60–57–1 — 0.25 X
Diethylamine .......................................... 109–89–7 25 75 —
2-Diethylaminoethanol ........................... 100–37–8 10 50 X
Diethylene triamine ............................... 111–40–0 (C)10 (C)42 X
Diethyl ether; see Ethyl ether.
Difluorodibromomethane ....................... 75–61–6 100 860 —
Diglycidyl ether (DGE) .......................... 2238–07–5 (C)0.5 (C)2.8 —
Dihydroxybenzene; see Hydroquinone.
Diisobutyl ketone ................................... 108–83–8 50 290 —
Diisopropylamine ................................... 108–18–9 5 20 X
4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene; see
§ 1926.1115 ....................................... 60–11–7
Dimethoxymethane; see Methylal.
Dimethyl acetamide ............................... 127–19–5 10 35 X
Dimethylamine ....................................... 124–40–3 10 18 —
Dimethylaminobenzene; see Xylidine.
Dimethylaniline (N,N-Dimethylaniline) ... 121–69–7 5 25 X
Dimethylbenzene; see Xylene.
Dimethyl-1,2-dibromo- 2,2-dichloroethyl
phosphate .......................................... 300–76–5 — 3 —
Dimethylformamide ............................... 68–12–2 10 30 X
2,6-Dimethyl-4-heptanone; see
Diisobutyl ketone.
1,1-Dimethylhydrazine ........................... 57–14–7 0.5 1 X
Dimethylphthalate .................................. 131–11–3 — 5 —
Dimethyl sulfate ..................................... 77–78–3 1 5 X
Dinitrobenzene (all isomers) ................. 1 X
(ortho) ............................................. 528–29–0
(meta) ............................................. 99–65–0
(para) .............................................. 100–25–4
Dinitro-o-cresol ...................................... 534–52–1 — 0.2 X
Dinitrotoluene ........................................ 25321–14–6 — 1.5 X
Dioxane (Diethylene dioxide) ................ 123–91–1 100 360 X
Diphenyl (Biphenyl) ............................... 92–52–4 0.2 1 —
Diphenylamine ....................................... 122–39–4 — 10 —
Diphenylmethane diisocyanate; see
Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate.
Dipropylene glycol methyl ether ............ 34590–94–8 100 600 X
Di-sec octyl phthalate (Di-(2-ethylhexyl)
phthalate) ........................................... 117–81–7 — 5 —
Emery .................................................... 12415–34–8
Total dust ....................................... — —
Endosulfan ............................................ 115–29–7 — 0.1 X
Endrin .................................................... 72–20–8 — 0.1 X
Epichlorohydrin ...................................... 106–89–8 5 19 X
EPN ....................................................... 2104–64–5 — 0.5 X
1,2-Epoxypropane; see Propylene
oxide.
2,3-Epoxy-1-propanol; see Glycidol.
Ethane ................................................... 74–84–0 E
Ethanethiol; see Ethyl mercaptan.
Ethanolamine ........................................ 141–43–5 3 6 —
2-Ethoxyethanol (Cellosolve) ................ 110–80–5 200 740 X
2-Ethoxyethyl acetate (Cellosolve ace-
tate) .................................................... 111–15–9 100 540 X

Ethyl acetate ......................................... 141–78–6 400 1400 —
Ethyl acrylate ......................................... 140–88–5 25 100 X
41
Skin Designa-
Ethyl alcohol (Ethanol) .......................... 64–17–5 1000 1900 —

Ethylamine ............................................. 75–04–7 10 18 —
Ethyl amyl ketone (5-Methyl-3-
heptanone) ......................................... 541–85–5 25 130 —
Ethyl benzene ....................................... 100–41–4 100 435 —
Ethyl bromide ........................................ 74–96–4 200 890 —
Ethyl butyl ketone (3-Heptanone) ......... 106–35–4 50 230 —
Ethyl chloride ......................................... 75–00–3 1000 2600 —
Ethyl ether ............................................. 60–29–7 400 1200 —
Ethyl formate ......................................... 109–94–4 100 300 —
Ethyl mercaptan .................................... 75–08–1 0.5 1 —
Ethyl silicate .......................................... 78–10–4 100 850 —
Ethylene ................................................ 74–85–1 E
Ethylene chlorohydrin ............................ 107–07–3 5 16 X
Ethylenediamine .................................... 107–15–3 10 25 —
Ethylene dibromide ............................... 106–93–4 (C)25 (C)190 X
Ethylene dichloride (1,2-
Dichloroethane) ................................. 107–06–2 50 200 —
Ethylene glycol dinitrate ........................ 628–96–6 (C)0.2 (C)1 X
Ethylene glycol methyl acetate; see
Methyl cellosolve acetate.
Ethyleneimine; see § 1926.1112 ........... 151–56–4
Ethylene oxide; see § 1926.1147 .......... 75–21–8
Ethylidene chloride; see 1,1-
Dichloroethane.
N-Ethylmorpholine ................................. 100–74–3 20 94 X
Ferbam .................................................. 14484–64–1
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Ferrovanadium dust .............................. 12604–58–9 — 1 —
Fibrous Glass.
Total dust ....................................... —
Fluorides (as F) ..................................... Varies with — 2.5 —
compound
Fluorine ................................................. 7782–41–4 0.1 0.2 —
Fluorotrichloromethane
(Trichlorofluoromethane) ................... 75–69–4 1000 5600 —
Formaldehyde; see § 1926.1148 ........... 50–00–0
Formic acid ............................................ 64–18–6 5 9 —
Furfural .................................................. 98–01–1 5 20 X
Furfuryl alcohol ...................................... 98–00–0 50 200 —
Gasoline ................................................ 8006–61–9 A3 —
Glycerin (mist) ....................................... 56–81–5
Total dust ....................................... — —
Glycidol .................................................. 556–52–5 50 150 —
Glycol monoethyl ether; see 2-
Ethoxyethanol.
Graphite, natural, respirable dust ......... 7782–42–5 ( 2) ( 2) (2)
Graphite, synthetic.
Total dust ....................................... — —
Guthion; see Azinphos methyl.
Gypsum ................................................. 13397–24–5
Total dust ....................................... — —
Hafnium ................................................. 7440–58–6 — 0.5 —
Helium ................................................... 7440–59–7 E
Heptachlor ............................................. 76–44–8 — 0.5 X
Heptane (n-Heptane) ............................ 142–82–5 500 2000 —

Hexachloroethane ................................. 67–72–1 1 10 X
Hexachloronaphthalene ........................ 1335–87–1 — 0.2 X
42
Skin Designa-
n-Hexane ............................................... 110–54–3 500 1800 —

2-Hexanone (Methyl n-butyl ketone) ..... 591–78–6 100 410 —
Hexone (Methyl isobutyl ketone) .......... 108–10–1 100 410 —
sec-Hexyl acetate .................................. 108–84–9 50 300 —
Hydrazine .............................................. 302–01–2 1 1.3 X
Hydrogen ............................................... 1333–74–0 E
Hydrogen bromide ................................. 10035–10–6 3 10 —
Hydrogen chloride ................................. 7647–01–0 (C)5 (C)7 —
Hydrogen cyanide ................................. 74–90–8 10 11 X
Hydrogen fluoride (as F) ....................... 7664–39–3 3 2 —
Hydrogen peroxide ................................ 7722–84–1 1 1.4 —
Hydrogen selenide (as Se) ................... 7783–07–5 0.05 .02 —
Hydrogen sulfide ................................... 7783–06–4 10 15 —
Hydroquinone ........................................ 123–31–9 — 2 —
Indene ................................................... 95–13–6 10 45 —
Indium and compounds (as In) ............. 7440–74–6 — 0.1 —
Iodine ..................................................... 7553–56–2 (C)0.1 (C)1 —
Iron oxide fume ..................................... 1309–37–1 — 10 —
Iron salts (soluble) (as Fe) .................... Varies with — 1 —
compound
Isoamyl acetate ..................................... 123–92–2 100 525 —
Isoamyl alcohol (primary and sec-
ondary) ............................................... 123–51–3 100 360 —
Isobutyl acetate ..................................... 110–19–0 150 700 —
Isobutyl alcohol ..................................... 78–83–1 100 300 —
Isophorone ............................................ 78–59–1 25 140 —
Isopropyl acetate ................................... 108–21–4 250 950 —
Isopropyl alcohol ................................... 67–63–0 400 980 —
Isopropylamine ...................................... 75–31–0 5 12 —
Isopropyl ether ...................................... 108–20–3 500 2100 —
Isopropyl glycidyl ether (IGE) ................ 4016–14–2 50 240 —
Kaolin .................................................... 1332–58–7
Total dust ....................................... — —
Ketene ................................................... 463–51–4 0.5 0.9 —
Lead, inorganic (as Pb); see 1926.62 .. 7439–92–1
Limestone .............................................. 1317–65–3
Total dust ....................................... — —
Lindane .................................................. 58–89–9 — 0.5 X
Lithium hydride ...................................... 7580–67–8 — 0.025 —
L.P.G. (Liquefied petroleum gas) .......... 68476–85–7 1000 1800
Magnesite .............................................. 546–93–0
Total dust ....................................... — —
Magnesium oxide fume ......................... 1309–48–4
Total particulate ............................. 15 — —
Malathion ............................................... 121–75–5
Total dust ....................................... — 15 X
Maleic anhydride ................................... 108–31–6 0.25
Manganese compounds (as Mn) .......... 7439–96–5 — (C)5 —
Manganese fume (as Mn) ..................... 7439–96–5 — (C)5 —
Marble ................................................... 1317–65–3
Total dust ....................................... — —
Mercury (aryl and inorganic)(as Hg) ..... 7439–97–6 0.1 X
Mercury (organo) alkyl compounds (as
Hg) ..................................................... 7439–97–6 — 0.01 X
Mercury (vapor) (as Hg) ........................ 7439–97–6 — 0.1 X
Mesityl oxide ......................................... 141–79–7 25 100 —

Methane ................................................ 74–82–8 E
Methanethiol; see Methyl mercaptan.
43
Skin Designa-
Methoxychlor ......................................... 72–43–5

Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
2-Methoxyethanol (Methyl cellosolve) ... 109–86–4 25 80 X
2-Methoxyethyl acetate (Methyl
cellosolve acetate) ............................. 110–49–6 25 120 X
Methyl acetate ....................................... 79–20–9 200 610 —
Methyl acetylene (Propyne) .................. 74–99–7 1000 1650 —
Methyl acetylene-propadiene mixture
(MAPP) .............................................. 1000 1800 —
Methyl acrylate ...................................... 96–33–3 10 35 X
Methylal (Dimethoxy-methane) ............. 109–87–5 1000 3100 —
Methyl alcohol ....................................... 67–56–1 200 260 —
Methylamine .......................................... 74–89–5 10 12 —
Methyl amyl alcohol; see Methyl iso-
butyl carbinol.
Methyl n-amyl ketone ............................ 110–43–0 100 465 —
Methyl bromide ...................................... 74–83–9 (C)20 (C)80 X
Methyl butyl ketone; see 2-Hexanone.
Methyl cellosolve; see 2-
Methoxyethanol.
Methyl cellosolve acetate; see 2-
Methoxyethyl acetate.
Methylene chloride; see § 1910.1052.
Methyl chloroform (1,1,1-Trichloro-
ethane) ............................................... 71–55–6 350 1900 —
Methylcyclohexane ................................ 108–87–2 500 2000 —
Methylcyclohexanol ............................... 25639–42–3 100 470 —
o-Methylcyclohexanone ......................... 583–60–8 100 460 X
Methylene chloride ................................ 75–09–2 500 1740 —
Methylenedianiline (MDA) ..................... 101–77–9
Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK); see 2-Buta-
none.
Methyl formate ...................................... 107–31–3 100 250 —
Methyl hydrazine (Monomethyl hydra-
zine) ................................................... 60–34–4 (C)0.2 (C)0.35 X
Methyl iodide ......................................... 74–88–4 5 28 X
Methyl isoamyl ketone .......................... 110–12–3 100 475 —
Methyl isobutyl carbinol ......................... 108–11–2 25 100 X
Methyl isobutyl ketone; see Hexone.
Methyl isocyanate ................................. 624–83–9 0.02 0.05 X
Methyl mercaptan .................................. 74–93–1 0.5 1 —
Methyl methacrylate .............................. 80–62–6 100 410 —
Methyl propyl ketone; see 2-Pentanone.
Methyl silicate ........................................ 681–84–5 (C)5 (C)30 —
alpha-Methyl styrene ............................. 98–83–9 (C)100 (C)480 —
Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate (MDI) 101–68–8 (C)0.02 (C)0.2 —
Mica; see Silicates.
Molybdenum (as Mo) ............................ 7439–98–7
Soluble compounds ....................... — 5 —
Insoluble compounds.
Total dust .................................... — 15 —
Monomethyl aniline ............................... 100–61–8 2 9 X
Monomethyl hydrazine; see Methyl hy-
drazine.
Morpholine ............................................. 110–91–8 20 70 X
Naphtha (Coal tar) ................................ 8030–30–6 100 400 —
Naphthalene .......................................... 91–20–3 10 50 —
alpha-Naphthylamine; see § 1926.1104 134–32–7
beta-Naphthylamine; see § 1926.1109 91–59–8 —

Neon ...................................................... 7440–01–9 E
Nickel carbonyl (as Ni) .......................... 13463–39–3 0.001 0.007 —
44
Skin Designa-
Nickel, metal and insoluble compounds

(as Ni) ................................................ 7440–02–0 — 1 —
Nickel, soluble compounds (as Ni) ....... 7440–02–0 — 1 —
Nicotine ................................................. 54–11–5 — 0.5 X
Nitric acid .............................................. 7697–37–2 2 5 —
Nitric oxide ............................................ 10102–43–9 25 30 —
p-Nitroaniline ......................................... 100–01–6 1 6 X
Nitrobenzene ......................................... 98–95–3 1 5 X
p-Nitrochlorobenzene ............................ 100–00–5 — 1 X
4-Nitrodiphenyl; see § 1926.1103 ......... 92–93–3
Nitroethane ............................................ 79–24–3 100 310 —
Nitrogen ................................................. 7727–37–9 E
Nitrogen dioxide .................................... 10102–44–0 (C)5 (C)9 —
Nitrogen trifluoride ................................. 7783–54–2 10 29 —
Nitroglycerin .......................................... 55–63–0 (C)0.2 (C)2 X
Nitromethane ......................................... 75–52–5 100 250 —
1-Nitropropane ...................................... 108–03–2 25 90 —
2-Nitropropane ...................................... 79–46–9 25 90 —
N-Nitrosodimethylamine; see
§ 1926.1116 ....................................... 62–79–9 —
Nitrotoluene (all isomers) ...................... 5 30 X
o-isomer ......................................... 88–72–2;
m-isomer ........................................ 99–08–1;
p-isomer ......................................... 99–99–0
Nitrotrichloromethane; see Chloropicrin.
Nitrous oxide ......................................... 10024–97–2 E
Octachloronaphthalene ......................... 2234–13–1 — 0.1 X
Octane ................................................... 111–65–9 400 1900 —
Oil mist, mineral .................................... 8012–95–1 — 5 —
Osmium tetroxide (as Os) ..................... 20816–12–0 — 0.002 —
Oxalic acid ............................................. 144–62–7 — 1 —
Oxygen difluoride .................................. 7783–41–7 0.05 0.1 —
Ozone .................................................... 10028–15–6 0.1 0.2 —
Paraquat, respirable dust ...................... 4685–14–7; — 0.5 X
1910–42–5;
2074–50–2
Parathion ............................................... 56–38–2 — 0.1 X
Particulates not otherwise regulated.
Total dust organic and inorganic ... — 15 —
PCB; see Chlorodiphenyl (42% and
54% chlorine).
Pentaborane .......................................... 19624–22–7 0.005 0.01 —
Pentachloronaphthalene ....................... 1321–64–8 — 0.5 X
Pentachlorophenol ................................ 87–86–5 — 0.5 X
Pentaerythritol ....................................... 115–77–5
Total dust ....................................... — —
Pentane ................................................. 109–66–0 500 1500 —
2-Pentanone (Methyl propyl ketone) ..... 107–87–9 200 700 —
Perchloroethylene
(Tetrachloroethylene) ......................... 127–18–4 100 670 —
Perchloromethyl mercaptan .................. 594–42–3 0.1 0.8 —
Perchloryl fluoride ................................. 7616–94–6 3 13.5 —
Petroleum distillates (Naphtha)(Rubber
Solvent) .............................................. A3 —
Phenol ................................................... 108–95–2 5 19 X
p-Phenylene diamine ............................ 106–50–3 — 0.1 X
Phenyl ether, vapor ............................... 101–84–8 1 7 —
Phenyl ether-biphenyl mixture, vapor ... 1 7 —
Phenylethylene; see Styrene.

Phenyl glycidyl ether (PGE) .................. 122–60–1 10 60 —
Phenylhydrazine .................................... 100–63–0 5 22 X
45
Skin Designa-
Phosdrin (Mevinphos) ........................... 7786–34–7 — 0.1 X

Phosgene (Carbonyl chloride) .............. 75–44–5 0.1 0.4 —
Phosphine ............................................. 7803–51–2 0.3 0.4 —
Phosphoric acid ..................................... 7664–38–2 — 1 —
Phosphorus (yellow) .............................. 7723–14–0 — 0.1 —
Phosphorus pentachloride .................... 10026–13–8 — 1 —
Phosphorus pentasulfide ....................... 1314–80–3 — 1 —
Phosphorus trichloride .......................... 7719–12–2 0.5 3 —
Phthalic anhydride ................................. 85–44–9 2 12 —
Picric acid .............................................. 88–89–1 — 0.1 X
Pindone (2-Pivalyl-1,3-indandione) ....... 83–26–1 — 0.1 —
Plaster of Paris ...................................... 26499–65–0
Total dust ....................................... — —
Platinum (as Pt) .................................... 7440–06–4
Metal .............................................. — — —
Soluble salts ................................... — 0.002 —
Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition
products ............................................. A2
Portland cement .................................... 65997–15–1
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Respirable fraction ......................... 5 —
Propane ................................................. 74–98–6 E
Propargyl alcohol .................................. 107–19–7 1 — X
beta-Propriolactone; see § 1926.1113 .. 57–57–8
n-Propyl acetate .................................... 109–60–4 200 840 —
n-Propyl alcohol .................................... 71–23–8 200 500 —
n-Propyl nitrate ...................................... 627–13–4 25 110 —
Propylene dichloride .............................. 78–87–5 75 350 —
Propylene imine .................................... 75–55–8 2 5 X
Propylene oxide .................................... 75–56–9 100 240 —
Propyne; see Methyl acetylene.
Pyrethrum .............................................. 8003–34–7 — 5 —
Pyridine ................................................. 110–86–1 5 15 —
Quinone ................................................. 106–51–4 0.1 0.4 —
RDX; see Cyclonite.
Rhodium (as Rh), metal fume and in-
soluble compounds ............................ 7440–16–6 — 0.1 —
Rhodium (as Rh), soluble compounds 7440–16–6 — 0.001 —
Ronnel ................................................... 299–84–3 — 10 —
Rotenone ............................................... 83–79–4 — 5 —
Rouge.
Total dust ....................................... — —
Selenium compounds (as Se) ............... 7782–49–2 — 0.2 —
Selenium hexafluoride (as Se) .............. 7783–79–1 0.05 0.4 —
Silica, amorphous, precipitated and gel 112926–00–8 ( 2) ( 2) (2)
Silica, amorphous, diatomaceous earth,
containing less than 1% crystalline
silica ................................................... 61790–53–2 ( 2) (2) ( 2)
Silica, crystalline, respirable dust
Cristobalite; see 1926.1153 ........... 14464–46–1
Quartz; see 1926.1153 5 ................ 14808–60–7
Tripoli (as quartz); see 1926.1153 5 1317–95–9
Tridymite; see 1926.1153 .............. 15468–32–3
Silica, fused, respirable dust ................. 60676–86–0 ( 2) (2) (2)
Silicates (less than 1% crystalline sili-
ca).
Mica (respirable dust) .................... 12001–26–2 ( 2) (2) ( 2)

Soapstone, total dust ..................... ( 2) ( 2) (2)
Soapstone, respirable dust ............ ( 2) ( 2) (2)
46
Skin Designa-
Talc (containing asbestos); use as-

bestos limit; see 1926.58.
Talc (containing no asbestos), res-
pirable dust ................................. 14807–96–6 ( 2) (2) ( 2)
Tremolite, asbestiform; see
1926.58.
Silicon carbide ....................................... 409–21–2
Total dust ....................................... — —
Silver, metal and soluble compounds
(as Ag) ............................................... 7440–22–4 — 0.01 —
Soapstone; see Silicates.
Sodium fluoroacetate ............................ 62–74–8 — 0.05 X
Sodium hydroxide ................................. 1310–73–2 — 2 —
Starch .................................................... 9005–25–8
Total dust ....................................... — —
Stibine ................................................... 7803–52–3 0.1 0.5 —
Stoddard solvent ................................... 8052–41–3 200 1150 —
Strychnine ............................................. 57–24–9 — 0.15 —
Styrene .................................................. 100–42–5 (C)100 (C)420 —
Sucrose ................................................. 57–50–1
Total dust ....................................... — —
Sulfur dioxide ........................................ 7446–09–5 5 13 —
Sulfur hexafluoride ................................ 2551–62–4 1000 6000 —
Sulfuric acid ........................................... 7664–93–9 — 1 —
Sulfur monochloride .............................. 10025–67–9 1 6 —
Sulfur pentafluoride ............................... 5714–22–7 0.025 0.25 —
Sulfuryl fluoride ..................................... 2699–79–8 5 20 —
Systox, see Demeton.
2,4,5-T (2,4,5-trichlorophenoxyacetic
acid) ................................................... 93–76–5 — 10 —
Talc; see Silicates—.
Tantalum, metal and oxide dust ........... 7440–25–7 — 5 —
TEDP (Sulfotep) .................................... 3689–24–5 — 0.2 X
Teflon decomposition products ............. A2
Tellurium and compounds (as Te) ........ 13494–80–9 — 0.1 —
Tellurium hexafluoride (as Te) .............. 7783–80–4 0.02 0.2 —
Temephos ............................................. 3383–96–8
Total dust ....................................... — —
TEPP (Tetraethyl pyrophosphate) ........ 107–49–3 — 0.05 X
Terphenyls ............................................. 26140–60–3 (C)1 (C)9 —
1,1,1,2-Tetrachloro-2,2-difluoroethane .. 76–11–9 500 4170 —
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloro-1,2-difluoroethane .. 76–12–0 500 4170 —
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane ..................... 79–34–5 5 35 X
Tetrachloroethylene; see
Perchloroethylene.
Tetrachloromethane; see Carbon tetra-
chloride.
Tetrachloronaphthalene ........................ 1335–88–2 — 2 X
Tetraethyl lead (as Pb) ......................... 78–00–2 — 0.1 X
Tetrahydrofuran ..................................... 109–99–9 200 590 —
Tetramethyl lead, (as Pb) ..................... 75–74–1 — 0.15 X
Tetramethyl succinonitrile ..................... 3333–52–6 0.5 3 X
Tetranitromethane ................................. 509–14–8 1 8 —
Tetryl (2,4,6-
Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine) .......... 479–45–8 — 1.5 X

Thallium, soluble compounds (as Tl) .... 7440–28–0 — 0.1 X
Thiram ................................................... 137–26–8 — 5 —
47
Skin Designa-
Tin, inorganic compounds (except ox-

ides) (as Sn) ...................................... 7440–31–5 — 2 —
Tin, organic compounds (as Sn) ........... 7440–31–5 — 0.1 —
Tin oxide (as Sn) ................................... 21651–19–4 — — —
Total dust ....................................... — —
Titanium dioxide .................................... 13463–67–7
Total dust ....................................... — —
Toluene ................................................. 108–88–3 200 750 —
Toluene-2,4-diisocyanate (TDI) ............. 584–84–9 (C)0.02 (C)0.14 —
o-Toluidine ............................................. 95–53–4 5 22 X
Toxaphene; see Chlorinated camphene.
Tremolite; see Silicates.
Tributyl phosphate ................................. 126–73–8 — 5 —
1,1,1-Trichloroethane; see Methyl chlo-
roform.
1,1,2-Trichloroethane ............................ 79–00–5 10 45 X
Trichloroethylene ................................... 79–01–6 100 535 —
Trichloromethane; see Chloroform.
Trichloronaphthalene ............................. 1321–65–9 — 5 X
1,2,3-Trichloropropane .......................... 96–18–4 50 300 —
1,1,2-Trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane ...... 76–13–1 1000 7600 —
Triethylamine ......................................... 121–44–8 25 100 —
Trifluorobromomethane ......................... 75–63–8 1000 6100 —
Trimethyl benzene ................................. 25551–13–7 25 120 —
2,4,6-Trinitrophenol; see Picric acid.
2,4,6-Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine;
see Tetryl.
2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (TNT) .................... 118–96–7 — 1.5 X
Triorthocresyl phosphate ....................... 78–30–8 — 0.1 —
Triphenyl phosphate .............................. 115–86–6 — 3 —
Tungsten (as W) ................................... 7440–33–7
Insoluble compounds ..................... — 5 —
Soluble compounds ....................... — 1 —
Turpentine ............................................. 8006–64–2 100 560 —
Uranium (as U) ...................................... 7440–61–1
Soluble compounds ....................... — 0.2 —
Insoluble compounds ..................... — 0.2 —
Vanadium .............................................. 1314–62–1
Respirable dust (as V2 O5) ............ — (C)0.5 —
Fume (as V2 O5) ............................ — (C)0.1 —
Vegetable oil mist.
Total dust ....................................... — —
Vinyl benzene; see Styrene.
Vinyl chloride; see § 1926.1117 ............ 75–01–4
Vinyl cyanide; see Acrylonitrile.
Vinyl toluene .......................................... 25013–15–4 100 480 —
Warfarin ................................................. 81–81–2 — 0.1 —
Xylenes (o-, m-, p-isomers) .................. 1330–20–7 100 435 —
Xylidine .................................................. 1300–73–8 5 25 X
Yttrium ................................................... 7440–65–5 — 1 —
Zinc chloride fume ................................. 7646–85–7 — 1 —
Zinc oxide fume ..................................... 1314–13–2 — 5 —
Zinc oxide .............................................. 1314–13–2
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —

Zirconium compounds (as Zr) ............... 7440–67–7 — 5
48
MINERAL DUSTS
SILICA:
Crystalline ..................................................................... 250(k)
Quartz. Threshold Limit calculated from the formula(p) % SiO2 + 5

Cristobalite.
Amorphous, including natural diatomaceous earth ...... 20
SILICATES (less than 1% crystalline silica)
Mica .............................................................................. 20
Portland cement ............................................................ 50
Soapstone ..................................................................... 20
Talc (non-asbestiform) .................................................. 20
Talc (fibrous), use asbestos limit .................................. --
Graphite (natural) ................................................................. 15
Inert or Nuisance Particulates: (m) 50 (or 15 mg/m3 whichever is the smaller) of total
dust <1% SiO2
[Inert or Nuisance Dusts includes all mineral, inorganic,
and organic dusts as indicated by examples in TLV’s
appendix D]
Conversion factors.
mppcf × 35.3 = million particles per cubic meter = particles
per c.c.
Footnotes
1 [Reserved]
2 See Mineral Dusts Table.
3 Use Asbestos Limit § 1926.58.
4 See 1926.58.
5 See Mineral Dusts table for the exposure limit for any operations or sectors where the exposure limit in § 1926.1153 is
stayed or is otherwise not in effect.
* The PELs are 8-hour TWAs unless otherwise noted; a (C) designation denotes a ceiling limit.
** As determined from breathing-zone air samples.
a Parts of vapor or gas per million parts of contaminated air by volume at 25 °C and 760 torr.
b Milligrams of substance per cubic meter of air. When entry is in this column only, the value is exact; when listed with a
ppm entry, it is approximate.
c [Reserved]
d The CAS number is for information only. Enforcement is based on the substance name. For an entry covering more than
one metal compound, measured as the metal, the CAS number for the metal is given—not CAS numbers for the individual
compounds.
e f [Reserved]
g For sectors excluded from § 1926.1128 the limit is 10 ppm TWA.
h i [Reserved]
j Millions of particles per cubic foot of air, based on impinger samples counted by light-field techniques.
k The percentage of crystalline silica in the formula is the amount determined from airborne samples, except in those in-
stances in which other methods have been shown to be applicable.
l [Reserved]
m Covers all organic and inorganic particulates not otherwise regulated. Same as Particulates Not Otherwise Regulated.
n If the exposure limit in § 1926.1126 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect, the exposure limit is a ceiling of 0.1 mg/m3.
o If the exposure limit in § 1926.1126 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect, the exposure limit is 0.1 mg/m3 (as CrO ) as an
3
8-hour TWA.
p This standard applies to any operations or sectors for which the respirable crystalline silica standard, 1926.1153, is stayed
or otherwise is not in effect.
q This standard applies to any operations or sectors for which the beryllium standard, 1926.1124, is stayed or otherwise is
not in effect.
The 1970 TLV uses letter designations instead of a numerical value as follows:
A 1 [Reserved]
A 2 Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition products. Because these products decompose in part by hydrolysis in alkaline solu-
tion, they can be quantitatively determined in air as fluoride to provide an index of exposure. No TLV is recommended pending
determination of the toxicity of the products, but air concentrations should be minimal.
A 3 Gasoline and/or Petroleum Distillates. The composition of these materials varies greatly and thus a single TLV for all
types of these materials is no longer applicable. The content of benzene, other aromatics and additives should be determined
to arrive at the appropriate TLV.
E Simple asphyxiants. The limiting factor is the available oxygen which shall be at least 19.5% and be within the require-
ments addressing explosion in part 1926.
[39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 51 FR 37007, Oct. 17, 1986; 52 FR 46312, Dec. 4, 1987;
58 FR 35089, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9249, 9250, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 56856, Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1619,
Jan. 10, 1997; 71 FR 10381, Feb. 28, 2006; 71 FR 36009, June 23, 2006; 81 FR 16875, Mar. 25, 2016;
81 FR 31168, May 18, 2016; 81 FR 60273, Sept. 1, 2016; 82 FR 2750, Jan. 9, 2017]
49
§ 1926.56 Illumination. or gases are not drawn through the

work area of employees.
(a) General. Construction areas,
(c) Design and operation. Exhaust
ramps, runways, corridors, offices,
fans, jets, ducts, hoods, separators, and
shops, and storage areas shall be light-
all necessary appurtenances, including
ed to not less than the minimum illu-
refuse receptacles, shall be so designed,
mination intensities listed in Table D–
constructed, maintained and operated
3 while any work is in progress:
as to ensure the required protection by
TABLE D–3—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION INTENSITIES maintaining a volume and velocity of
IN FOOT-CANDLES exhaust air sufficient to gather dusts,
fumes, vapors, or gases from said
Foot-candles Area or operation equipment or process, and to convey
them to suitable points of safe dis-
5 ........................ General construction area lighting.
3 ........................ General construction areas, concrete
posal, thereby preventing their disper-
placement, excavation and waste areas, sion in harmful quantities into the at-
accessways, active storage areas, load- mosphere where employees work.
ing platforms, refueling, and field main- (d) Duration of operations. (1) The ex-
tenance areas.
5 ........................ Indoors: warehouses, corridors, hallways, haust system shall be in operation con-
and exitways. tinually during all operations which it
5 ........................ Tunnels, shafts, and general underground is designed to serve. If the employee re-
work areas: (Exception: minimum of 10 mains in the contaminated zone, the
foot-candles is required at tunnel and
shaft heading during drilling, mucking, system shall continue to operate after
and scaling. Bureau of Mines approved the cessation of said operations, the
cap lights shall be acceptable for use in length of time to depend upon the indi-
the tunnel heading.)
10 ...................... General construction plant and shops
vidual circumstances and effectiveness
(e.g., batch plants, screening plants, of the general ventilation system.
mechanical and electrical equipment (2) Since dust capable of causing dis-
rooms, carpenter shops, rigging lofts ability is, according to the best med-
and active storerooms, barracks or liv-
ing quarters, locker or dressing rooms, ical opinion, of microscopic size, tend-
mess halls, and indoor toilets and working to remain for hours in suspension
rooms). in still air, it is essential that the ex-
30 ...................... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices. haust system be continued in operation
for a time after the work process or
(b) Other areas. For areas or oper- equipment served by the same shall
ations not covered above, refer to the have ceased, in order to ensure the re-
American National Standard A11.1– moval of the harmful elements to the
1965, R1970, Practice for Industrial required extent. For the same reason,
Lighting, for recommended values of il- employees wearing respiratory equip-
lumination. ment should not remove same imme-
diately until the atmosphere seems
§ 1926.57 Ventilation.
clear.
(a) General. Whenever hazardous sub- (e) Disposal of exhaust materials. The
stances such as dusts, fumes, mists, va- air outlet from every dust separator,
pors, or gases exist or are produced in and the dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, or
the course of construction work, their gases collected by an exhaust or ven-
concentrations shall not exceed the tilating system shall discharge to the
limits specified in § 1926.55(a). When outside atmosphere. Collecting sys-
ventilation is used as an engineering tems which return air to work area
control method, the system shall be in- may be used if concentrations which
stalled and operated according to the accumulate in the work area air do not
requirements of this section. result in harmful exposure to employ-
(b) Local exhaust ventilation. Local ex- ees. Dust and refuse discharged from an
haust ventilation when used as de- exhaust system shall be disposed of in
scribed in (a) shall be designed to pre- such a manner that it will not result in
vent dispersion into the air of dusts, harmful exposure to employees.
fumes, mists, vapors, and gases in con- (f) Abrasive blasting—(1) Definitions
centrations causing harmful exposure. applicable to this paragraph—(i) Abra-

Such exhaust systems shall be so de- sive. A solid substance used in an abra-
signed that dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, sive blasting operation.
50
(ii) Abrasive-blasting respirator. A res- ations and the dust formed will contain
pirator constructed so that it covers particles of respirable size. The com-
the wearer’s head, neck, and shoulders position and toxicity of the dust from
to protect the wearer from rebounding these sources shall be considered in
abrasive. making an evaluation of the potential
(iii) Blast cleaning barrel. A complete health hazards.
enclosure which rotates on an axis, or (ii) The concentration of respirable
which has an internal moving tread to dust or fume in the breathing zone of
tumble the parts, in order to expose the abrasive-blasting operator or any
various surfaces of the parts to the ac- other worker shall be kept below the
tion of an automatic blast spray.
levels specified in § 1926.55 or other per-
(iv) Blast cleaning room. A complete
tinent sections of this part.
enclosure in which blasting operations
are performed and where the operator (iii) Organic abrasives which are
works inside of the room to operate the combustible shall be used only in auto-
blasting nozzle and direct the flow of matic systems. Where flammable or ex-
the abrasive material. plosive dust mixtures may be present,
(v) Blasting cabinet. An enclosure the construction of the equipment, in-
where the operator stands outside and cluding the exhaust system and all
operates the blasting nozzle through an electric wiring, shall conform to the
opening or openings in the enclosure. requirements of American National
(vi) Clean air. Air of such purity that Standard Installation of Blower and
it will not cause harm or discomfort to Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and
an individual if it is inhaled for ex- Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1–
tended periods of time. 1961 (NFPA 91–1961), and subpart S of
(vii) Dust collector. A device or com- this part. The blast nozzle shall be
bination of devices for separating dust bonded and grounded to prevent the
from the air handled by an exhaust build up of static charges. Where flam-
ventilation system. mable or explosive dust mixtures may
(viii) Exhaust ventilation system. A be present, the abrasive blasting enclo-
system for removing contaminated air sure, the ducts, and the dust collector
from a space, comprising two or more shall be constructed with loose panels
of the following elements (A) enclosure
or explosion venting areas, located on
or hood, (B) duct work, (C) dust col-
sides away from any occupied area, to
lecting equipment, (D) exhauster, and
provide for pressure relief in case of ex-
(E) discharge stack.
(ix) Particulate-filter respirator. An air plosion, following the principles set
purifying respirator, commonly re- forth in the National Fire Protection
ferred to as a dust or a fume respirator, Association Explosion Venting Guide.
which removes most of the dust or NFPA 68–1954.
fume from the air passing through the (3) Blast-cleaning enclosures. (i) Blast-
device. cleaning enclosures shall be exhaust
(x) Respirable dust. Airborne dust in ventilated in such a way that a contin-
sizes capable of passing through the uous inward flow of air will be main-
upper respiratory system to reach the tained at all openings in the enclosure
lower lung passages. during the blasting operation.
(xi) Rotary blast cleaning table. An en- (A) All air inlets and access openings
closure where the pieces to be cleaned shall be baffled or so arranged that by
are positioned on a rotating table and the combination of inward air flow and
are passed automatically through a se- baffling the escape of abrasive or dust
ries of blast sprays. particles into an adjacent work area
(xii) Abrasive blasting. The forcible will be minimized and visible spurts of
application of an abrasive to a surface dust will not be observed.
by pneumatic pressure, hydraulic pres-
(B) The rate of exhaust shall be suffi-
sure, or centrifugal force.
cient to provide prompt clearance of
(2) Dust hazards from abrasive blasting.
(i) Abrasives and the surface coatings the dust-laden air within the enclosure
on the materials blasted are shattered after the cessation of blasting.
and pulverized during blasting oper-
51
(C) Before the enclosure is opened, (5) Personal protective equipment. (i)
the blast shall be turned off and the ex- Employers must use only respirators
haust system shall be run for a suffi- approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part
cient period of time to remove the 84 for protecting employees from dusts
dusty air within the enclosure. produced during abrasive-blasting op-
(D) Safety glass protected by screen- erations.
ing shall be used in observation win- (ii) Abrasive-blasting respirators
dows, where hard deep-cutting abra- shall be worn by all abrasive-blasting
sives are used. operators:
(E) Slit abrasive-resistant baffles (A) When working inside of blast-
shall be installed in multiple sets at all cleaning rooms, or
small access openings where dust (B) When using silica sand in manual
might escape, and shall be inspected blasting operations where the nozzle
regularly and replaced when needed. and blast are not physically separated
(1) Doors shall be flanged and tight from the operator in an exhaust venti-
when closed. lated enclosure, or
(2) Doors on blast-cleaning rooms (C) Where concentrations of toxic
shall be operable from both inside and dust dispersed by the abrasive blasting
outside, except that where there is a may exceed the limits set in § 1926.55 or
small operator access door, the large other pertinent sections of this part
work access door may be closed or and the nozzle and blast are not phys-
opened from the outside only. ically separated from the operator in
(4) Exhaust ventilation systems. (i) The an exhaust-ventilated enclosure.
construction, installation, inspection, (iii) Properly fitted particulate-filter
and maintenance of exhaust systems respirators, commonly referred to as
shall conform to the principles and re- dust-filter respirators, may be used for
quirements set forth in American Na- short, intermittent, or occasional dust
tional Standard Fundamentals Gov- exposures such as cleanup, dumping of
erning the Design and Operation of dust collectors, or unloading shipments
Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960, and of sand at a receiving point when it is
ANSI Z33.1–1961. not feasible to control the dust by en-
(a) When dust leaks are noted, re- closure, exhaust ventilation, or other
pairs shall be made as soon as possible. means. The respirators used must be
(b) The static pressure drop at the ex- approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part
haust ducts leading from the equip- 84 for protection against the specific
ment shall be checked when the instal- type of dust encountered.
lation is completed and periodically (iv) A respiratory protection program
thereafter to assure continued satisfac- as defined and described in § 1926.103,
tory operation. Whenever an appre- shall be established wherever it is nec-
ciable change in the pressure drop indi- essary to use respiratory protective
cates a partial blockage, the system equipment.
shall be cleaned and returned to nor- (v) Operators shall be equipped with
mal operating condition. heavy canvas or leather gloves and
(ii) In installations where the abra- aprons or equivalent protection to pro-
sive is recirculated, the exhaust ven- tect them from the impact of abra-
tilation system for the blasting enclo- sives. Safety shoes shall be worn to
sure shall not be relied upon for the re- protect against foot injury where
moval of fines from the spent abrasive heavy pieces of work are handled.
instead of an abrasive separator. An (A) Safety shoes shall conform to the
abrasive separator shall be provided for requirements of American National
the purpose. Standard for Men’s Safety-Toe Foot-
(iii) The air exhausted from blast- wear, Z41.1–1967.
cleaning equipment shall be discharged (B) Equipment for protection of the
through dust collecting equipment. eyes and face shall be supplied to the
Dust collectors shall be set up so that operator when the respirator design
the accumulated dust can be emptied does not provide such protection and to
and removed without contaminating any other personnel working in the vi-
other working areas. cinity of abrasive blasting operations.
52
This equipment shall conform to the (iv) Cradle. A movable fixture, upon
requirements of § 1926.102. which the part to be ground or polished
(6) Air supply and air compressors. Air is placed.
for abrasive-blasting respirators must (v) Disc wheels. All power-driven ro-
be free of harmful quantities of dusts, tatable discs faced with abrasive mate-
mists, or noxious gases, and must meet rials, artificial or natural, and used for
the requirements for supplied-air qual- grinding or polishing on the side of the
ity and use specified in 29 CFR assembled disc.
1910.134(i). (vi) Entry loss. The loss in static pres-
(7) Operational procedures and general sure caused by air flowing into a duct
safety. Dust shall not be permitted to or hood. It is usually expressed in
accumulate on the floor or on ledges inches of water gauge.
outside of an abrasive-blasting enclo- (vii) Exhaust system. A system con-
sure, and dust spills shall be cleaned up sisting of branch pipes connected to
promptly. Aisles and walkways shall be hoods or enclosures, one or more head-
kept clear of steel shot or similar abra- er pipes, an exhaust fan, means for sep-
sive which may create a slipping haz- arating solid contaminants from the
ard. air flowing in the system, and a dis-
(8) Scope. This paragraph applies to charge stack to outside.
all operations where an abrasive is (viii) Grinding wheels. All power-driv-
forcibly applied to a surface by pneu- en rotatable grinding or abrasive
matic or hydraulic pressure, or by cen- wheels, except disc wheels as defined in
trifugal force. It does not apply to this standard, consisting of abrasive
particles held together by artificial or
steam blasting, or steam cleaning, or
natural bonds and used for peripheral
hydraulic cleaning methods where
grinding.
work is done without the aid of abra-
(ix) Header pipe (main pipe). A pipe
sives.
into which one or more branch pipes
(g) Grinding, polishing, and buffing op- enter and which connects such branch
erations—(1) Definitions applicable to pipes to the remainder of the exhaust
this paragraph— system.
(i) Abrasive cutting-off wheels. Or- (x) Hoods and enclosures. The partial
ganic-bonded wheels, the thickness of or complete enclosure around the
which is not more than one forty- wheel or disc through which air enters
eighth of their diameter for those up an exhaust system during operation.
to, and including, 20 inches (50.8 cm) in (xi) Horizontal double-spindle disc
diameter, and not more than one-six- grinder. A grinding machine carrying
tieth of their diameter for those larger two power-driven, rotatable, coaxial,
than 20 inches (50.8 cm) in diameter, horizontal spindles upon the inside
used for a multitude of operations var- ends of which are mounted abrasive
iously known as cutting, cutting off, disc wheels used for grinding two sur-
grooving, slotting, coping, and joint- faces simultaneously.
ing, and the like. The wheels may be (xii) Horizontal single-spindle disc
‘‘solid’’ consisting of organic-bonded grinder. A grinding machine carrying
abrasive material throughout, ‘‘steel an abrasive disc wheel upon one or
centered’’ consisting of a steel disc both ends of a power-driven, rotatable
with a rim of organic-bonded material single horizontal spindle.
moulded around the periphery, or of (xiii) Polishing and buffing wheels. All
the ‘‘inserted tooth’’ type consisting of power-driven rotatable wheels com-
a steel disc with organic-bonded abra- posed all or in part of textile fabrics,
sive teeth or inserts mechanically se- wood, felt, leather, paper, and may be
cured around the periphery. coated with abrasives on the periphery
(ii) Belts. All power-driven, flexible, of the wheel for purposes of polishing,
coated bands used for grinding, buffing, and light grinding.
polishing, or buffing purposes. (xiv) Portable grinder. Any power-driv-
(iii) Branch pipe. The part of an ex- en rotatable grinding, polishing, or

haust system piping that is connected buffing wheel mounted in such manner
directly to the hood or enclosure. that it may be manually manipulated.
53
(xv) Scratch brush wheels. All power- TABLE D–57.1—GRINDING AND ABRASIVE
driven rotatable wheels made from CUTTING-OFF WHEELS
wire or bristles, and used for scratch
Wheel Minimum
cleaning and brushing purposes. width, exhaust
Wheel diameter, inches (cm)
(xvi) Swing-frame grinder. Any power- inches volume
(cm) (feet3/min.)
driven rotatable grinding, polishing, or
buffing wheel mounted in such a man- To 9 (22.86) ................................... 11⁄2 (3.81) 220
ner that the wheel with its supporting Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64) ....... 2 (5.08) 390
Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26) ..... 3 (7.62) 500
framework can be manipulated over Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96) ..... 4 (10.16) 610
stationary objects. Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2) ....... 5 (12.7) 880
(xvii) Velocity pressure (vp). The ki- Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ....... 6 (15.24) 1,200
netic pressure in the direction of flow
necessary to cause a fluid at rest to For any wheel wider than wheel diame-
flow at a given velocity. It is usually ters shown in Table D–57.1, increase the
expressed in inches of water gauge. exhaust volume by the ratio of the new
(xviii) Vertical spindle disc grinder. A width to the width shown.
grinding machine having a vertical, ro- Example: If wheel width = 41⁄2 inches (11.43
tatable power-driven spindle carrying a cm),
horizontal abrasive disc wheel. then 4.5 ÷ 4 × 610 = 686 (rounded to 690).
(2) Application. Wherever dry grind-
ing, dry polishing or buffing is per- (iii) Scratch-brush wheels and all
formed, and employee exposure, with- buffing and polishing wheels mounted
out regard to the use of respirators, ex- on floor stands, pedestals, benches, or
ceeds the permissible exposure limits special-purpose machines shall have
prescribed in § 1926.55 or other perti- not less than the minimum exhaust
nent sections of this part, a local ex- volume shown in Table D–57.2.
haust ventilation system shall be pro-
TABLE D–57.2—BUFFING AND POLISHING
vided and used to maintain employee
WHEELS
exposures within the prescribed limits.
(3) Hood and branch pipe requirements. Wheel Minimum
(i) Hoods connected to exhaust systems exhaust
Wheel diameter, inches (cm) width, volume
inches cm)
shall be used, and such hoods shall be (feet3/min.)
designed, located, and placed so that
To 9 (22.86) ................................... 2 (5.08) 300
the dust or dirt particles shall fall or Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64) ....... 3 (7.62) 500
be projected into the hoods in the di- Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26) ..... 4 (10.16) 610
rection of the air flow. No wheels, Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96) ..... 5 (12.7) 740
discs, straps, or belts shall be operated Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2) ....... 6 (15.24) 1,040
Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ....... 6 (15.24) 1,200
in such manner and in such direction
as to cause the dust and dirt particles (iv) Grinding wheels or discs for hori-
to be thrown into the operator’s zontal single-spindle disc grinders shall
breathing zone. be hooded to collect the dust or dirt
(ii) Grinding wheels on floor stands, generated by the grinding operation
pedestals, benches, and special-purpose and the hoods shall be connected to
grinding machines and abrasive cut- branch pipes having exhaust volumes
ting-off wheels shall have not less than as shown in Table D–57.3.
the minimum exhaust volumes shown
in Table D–57.1 with a recommended TABLE D–57.3—HORIZONTAL SINGLE-SPINDLE
minimum duct velocity of 4,500 feet per DISC GRINDER
minute in the branch and 3,500 feet per
Exhaust
minute in the main. The entry losses Disc diameter, inches (cm) volume
from all hoods except the vertical-spin- (ft.3/min.)
dle disc grinder hood, shall equal 0.65
Up to 12 (30.48) .................................................. 220
velocity pressure for a straight takeoff Over 12 to 19 (30.48 to 48.26) ........................... 390
and 0.45 velocity pressure for a tapered Over 19 to 30 (48.26 to 76.2) ............................. 610
takeoff. The entry loss for the vertical- Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ............................. 880
spindle disc grinder hood is shown in

figure D–57.1 (following paragraph (g) (v) Grinding wheels or discs for hori-
of this section). zontal double-spindle disc grinders
54
shall have a hood enclosing the grind- (viii) Cradles and swing-frame grind-
ing chamber and the hood shall be con- ers. Where cradles are used for han-
nected to one or more branch pipes dling the parts to be ground, polished,
having exhaust volumes as shown in or buffed, requiring large partial enclo-
Table D–57.4. sures to house the complete operation,
a minimum average air velocity of 150
TABLE D–57.4—HORIZONTAL DOUBLE-SPINDLE feet per minute shall be maintained
DISC GRINDER over the entire opening of the enclo-
Exhaust sure. Swing-frame grinders shall also
Disc diameter, inches (cm) volume be exhausted in the same manner as
(ft.3/min.)
provided for cradles. (See fig. D–57.3)
Up to 19 (48.26) .................................................. 610 (ix) Where the work is outside the
Over 19 to 25 (48.26 to 63.5) ............................. 880 hood, air volumes must be increased as
Over 25 to 30 (63.5 to 76.2) ............................... 1,200
Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to 134.62) ........................... 1,770
shown in American Standard Fun-
Over 53 to 72 (134.62 to 182.88) ....................... 6,280 damentals Governing the Design and
Operation of Local Exhaust Systems,
(vi) Grinding wheels or discs for Z9.2–1960 (section 4, exhaust hoods).
vertical single-spindle disc grinders (4) Exhaust systems. (i) Exhaust sys-
shall be encircled with hoods to remove tems for grinding, polishing, and buff-
the dust generated in the operation. ing operations should be designed in
The hoods shall be connected to one or accordance with American Standard
more branch pipes having exhaust vol- Fundamentals Governing the Design
umes as shown in Table D–57.5. and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys-
tems, Z9.2–1960.
TABLE D–57.5—VERTICAL SPINDLE DISC
(ii) Exhaust systems for grinding,
GRINDER
polishing, and buffing operations shall
One-half or more Disc not cov- be tested in the manner described in
of disc covered ered American Standard Fundamentals
Disc diameter, inches Governing the Design and Operation of
Ex- Ex-
(cm) Num- haust Num- haust
ber 1 foot 3/ ber 1 foot3/ Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960.
min. min. (iii) All exhaust systems shall be pro-
Up to 20 (50.8) .......... 1 500 2 780
vided with suitable dust collectors.
Over 20 to 30 (50.8 to (5) Hood and enclosure design. (i) (A) It
76.2) ....................... 2 780 2 1,480 is the dual function of grinding and ab-
Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to rasive cutting-off wheel hoods to pro-
134.62) ................... 2 1,770 4 3,530
Over 53 to 72 (134.62 tect the operator from the hazards of
to 182.88) ............... 2 3,140 5 6,010 bursting wheels as well as to provide a
1 Number of exhaust outlets around periphery of hood, or means for the removal of dust and dirt
equal distribution provided by other means. generated. All hoods shall be not less
(vii) Grinding and polishing belts in structural strength than specified in
shall be provided with hoods to remove the American National Standard Safe-
dust and dirt generated in the oper- ty Code for the Use, Care, and Protec-
ations and the hoods shall be connected tion of Abrasive Wheels, B7.1–1970.
to branch pipes having exhaust vol- (B) Due to the variety of work and
umes as shown in Table D–57.6. types of grinding machines employed,
it is necessary to develop hoods adapt-
TABLE D–57.6—GRINDING AND POLISHING able to the particular machine in ques-
BELTS tion, and such hoods shall be located as
close as possible to the operation.
Exhaust
Belts width, inches (cm) volume (ii) Exhaust hoods for floor stands,
(ft.3/min.) pedestals, and bench grinders shall be
Up to 3 (7.62) ...................................................... 220
designed in accordance with figure D–
Over 3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7) ................................... 300 57.2. The adjustable tongue shown in
Over 5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78) ................................. 390 the figure shall be kept in working
Over 7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86) ............................... 500 order and shall be adjusted within one-
Over 9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94) ............................. 610
fourth inch (0.635 cm) of the wheel pe-
Over 11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02) ........................... 740
riphery at all times.
55
(iii) Swing-frame grinders shall be back of the wheel and the hood, and a
provided with exhaust booths as indi- space around the periphery of the
cated in figure D–57.3. wheel of at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in
(iv) Portable grinding operations, order to permit the suction to act
whenever the nature of the work per- around the wheel periphery. The open-
mits, shall be conducted within a paring on the side of the disc shall be no
tial enclosure. The opening in the en- larger than is required for the grinding
closure shall be no larger than is actu- operation, but must never be less than
ally required in the operation and an twice the area of the branch outlet.
average face air velocity of not less (viii) Horizontal double-spindle disc
than 200 feet per minute shall be main- grinders shall have a hood encircling
tained. the wheels and grinding chamber simi-
(v) Hoods for polishing and buffing lar to that illustrated in figure D–57.7.
and scratch-brush wheels shall be con- The openings for passing the work into
structed to conform as closely to figure the grinding chamber should be kept as
D–57.4 as the nature of the work will
small as possible, but must never be
permit.
less than twice the area of the branch
(vi) Cradle grinding and polishing op-
outlets.
erations shall be performed within a
partial enclosure similar to figure D– (ix) Vertical-spindle disc grinders
57.5. The operator shall be positioned shall be encircled with a hood so con-
outside the working face of the opening structed that the heavy dust is drawn
of the enclosure. The face opening of off a surface of the disc and the lighter
the enclosure should not be any greater dust exhausted through a continuous
in area than that actually required for slot at the top of the hood as shown in
the performance of the operation and figure D–57.1.
the average air velocity into the work- (x) Grinding and polishing belt hoods
ing face of the enclosure shall not be shall be constructed as close to the op-
less than 150 feet per minute. eration as possible. The hood should
(vii) Hoods for horizontal single-spin- extend almost to the belt, and 1-inch
dle disc grinders shall be constructed (2.54 cm) wide openings should be pro-
to conform as closely as possible to the vided on either side. Figure D–57.8
hood shown in figure D–57.6. It is essen- shows a typical hood for a belt oper-
tial that there be a space between the ation.
56
Dia. D inches (cm) Exhaust E Volume Ex-

hausted at Note
4,500 ft/min
Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. ft3/min
.................................... 20 (50.8) 1 41⁄4 (10.795) 500 When one-half or more of the disc
can be hooded, use exhaust
ducts as shown at the left.
Over 20 (50.8) ........... 30 (76.2) 2 4 (10.16) 780
Over 30 (76.2) ........... 72 (182.88) 2 6 (15.24) 1,770
Over 53 (134.62) ....... 72 (182.88) 2 8 (20.32) 3,140
.................................... 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780 When no hood can be used over

disc, use exhaust ducts as
shown at left.
Over 20 (50.8) ........... 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780
Over 30 (76.2) ........... 30 (76.2) 2 51⁄2 (13.97) 1,480
Over 53 (134.62) ....... 53 (134.62) 4 6 (15.24) 3,530
72 (182.88) 5 7 (17.78) 6,010
Entry loss = 1.0 slot velocity pressure + 0.5 branch velocity pressure.
Minimum slot velocity = 2,000 ft/min—1⁄2-inch (1.27 cm) slot width.
57
EC30OC91.000
Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters) Volume of

Exhaust outlet, air at
Diameter inches (centi- 4,500 ft/
Width, Max meters) E min
Min= d Max= D
9 (22.86) 11⁄2 (3.81) 3 220

Over 9 (22.86) ............................................................................. 16 (40.64) 2 (5.08) 4 390
Over 16 (40.64) ........................................................................... 19 (48.26) 3 (7.62) 41⁄2 500
Over 19 (48.26) ........................................................................... 24 (60.96) 4 (10.16) 5 610
Over 24 (60.96) ........................................................................... 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 6 880
Over 30 (76.2) ............................................................................. 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1,200
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
58
EC30OC91.001
FIGURE D–57.3—A METHOD OF APPLYING AN EXHAUST ENCLOSURE TO SWING-FRAME GRINDERS
NOTE: Baffle to reduce front opening as

much as possible
59
EC30OC91.002
STANDARD BUFFING AND POLISHING HOOD

Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters) Volume of
Exhaust outlet, air at
Diameter inches E 4,500 ft/
Width, Max min
Min= d Max= D
9 (22.86) 2 (5.08) 31⁄2 (3.81) 300

Over 9 (22.86) ............................................................................. 16 (40.64) 3 (5.08) 4 500
Over 16 (40.64) ........................................................................... 19 (48.26) 4 (11.43) 5 610
Over 19 (48.26) ........................................................................... 24 (60.96) 5 (12.7) 51⁄2 740
Over 24 (60.96) ........................................................................... 30 (76.2) 6 (15.24) 61⁄2 1.040
Over 30 (76.2) ............................................................................. 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1.200
Entry loss = 0.15 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
60
EC30OC91.003
FIGURE D–57.5—CRADLE POLISHING OR GRINDING ENCLOSURE
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for

tapered takeoff
61
EC30OC91.004
Dia D, inches (centimeters) Volume ex-

Exhaust E, hausted at
dia. inches 4,500 ft/min
Min. Max. (cm) ft3/min
12 (30.48) 3 (7.6) 220

Over 12 (30.48) ........................................................................................................... 19 (48.26) 4 (10.16) 390
Over 19 (48.26) ........................................................................................................... 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 610
Over 30 (76.2) ............................................................................................................. 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 880
NOTE: If grinding wheels are used for disc grinding purposes, hoods must conform to structural strength and materials as de-
scribed in 9.1.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
62
EC30OC91.005
Disc dia. inches (centimeters) Exhaust E Volume

exhaust at
4,500 ft/ Note
Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. min. ft3/
min
19 (48.26) 1 5 610
Over 19 (48.26) ................. 25 (63.5) 1 6 880 When width ‘‘W’’ permits, exhaust
ducts should be as near heaviest
grinding as possible.
Over 25 (63.5) ................... 30 (76.2) 1 7 1,200
Over 30 (76.2) ................... 53 (134.62) 2 6 1,770
Over 53 (134.62) ............... 72 (182.88) 4 8 6,280
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
63
EC30OC91.006
FIGURE D–57.8—A TYPICAL HOOD FOR A BELT OPERATION
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for mable and Combustible Materials,
tapered takeoff NFPA No. 33–1969).
(iii) Spray room. A spray room is a
Exhaust room in which spray-finishing oper-
Belt width W. inches (centimeters) volume.
ft.1/min ations not conducted in a spray booth
are performed separately from other
Up to 3 (7.62) ...................................................... 220
3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7) ............................................ 300
areas.
5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78) .......................................... 390 (iv) Minimum maintained velocity. Min-
7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86) ........................................ 500 imum maintained velocity is the veloc-
9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94) ...................................... 610 ity of air movement which must be
11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02) .................................... 740 maintained in order to meet minimum
Minimum duct velocity = 4,500 ft/min branch, 3,500 ft/min specified requirements for health and
main. safety.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65
velocity pressure for straight takeoff. (2) Location and application. Spray
booths or spray rooms are to be used to
(6) Scope. This paragraph (g), pre- enclose or confine all operations.
scribes the use of exhaust hood enclo- Spray-finishing operations shall be lo-
sures and systems in removing dust, cated as provided in sections 201
dirt, fumes, and gases generated through 206 of the Standard for Spray
through the grinding, polishing, or Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
buffing of ferrous and nonferrous met- bustible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969.
als. (3) Design and construction of spray
(h) Spray finishing operations—(1) Defi- booths. (i) Spray booths shall be de-
nitions applicable to this paragraph—(i) signed and constructed in accordance
Spray-finishing operations. Spray-fin- with § 1926.66(b) (1) through (4) and (6)
ishing operations are employment of through (10) (see sections 301–304 and
methods wherein organic or inorganic 306–310 of the Standard for Spray Fin-
materials are utilized in dispersed form ishing Using Flammable and Combus-
for deposit on surfaces to be coated, tible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969), for
treated, or cleaned. Such methods of general construction specifications.
deposit may involve either automatic, For a more detailed discussion of fun-
manual, or electrostatic deposition but damentals relating to this subject, see
do not include metal spraying or met- ANSI Z9.2–1960
allizing, dipping, flow coating, roller (A) Lights, motors, electrical equip-
coating, tumbling, centrifuging, or ment, and other sources of ignition
spray washing and degreasing as con- shall conform to the requirements of
ducted in self-contained washing and § 1926.66(b)(10) and (c). (See section 310
degreasing machines or systems. and chapter 4 of the Standard for Spray
(ii) Spray booth. Spray booths are de- Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
fined and described in § 1926.66(a). (See bustible Materials NFPA No. 33–1969.)
sections 103, 104, and 105 of the Stand- (B) In no case shall combustible ma-
ard for Spray Finishing Using Flam- terial be used in the construction of a
64
EC30OC91.007
spray booth and supply or exhaust duct concrete, masonry, or other material
connected to it. having similar properties.
(ii) Unobstructed walkways shall not (A) Tanks shall be provided with
be less than 61⁄2 feet (1.976 m) high and weirs, skimmer plates, or screens to
shall be maintained clear of obstruc- prevent sludge and floating paint from
tion from any work location in the entering the pump suction box. Means
booth to a booth exit or open booth for automatically maintaining the
front. In booths where the open front is proper water level shall also be pro-
the only exit, such exits shall be not vided. Fresh water inlets shall not be
less than 3 feet (0.912 m) wide. In submerged. They shall terminate at
booths having multiple exits, such least one pipe diameter above the safe-
exits shall not be less than 2 feet (0.608 ty overflow level of the tank.
m) wide, provided that the maximum (B) Tanks shall be so constructed as
distance from the work location to the to discourage accumulation of haz-
exit is 25 feet (7.6 m) or less. Where ardous deposits.
booth exits are provided with doors, (vi) Pump manifolds, risers, and
such doors shall open outward from the headers shall be adequately sized to in-
booth. sure sufficient water flow to provide ef-
(iii) Baffles, distribution plates, and ficient operation of the water chamber.
dry-type overspray collectors shall (4) Design and construction of spray
conform to the requirements of rooms. (i) Spray rooms, including
§ 1926.66(b) (4) and (5). (See sections 304 floors, shall be constructed of masonry,
and 305 of the Standard for Spray Fin- concrete, or other noncombustible ma-
ishing Using Flammable and Combus- terial.
tible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969.) (ii) Spray rooms shall have non-
(A) Overspray filters shall be in- combustible fire doors and shutters.
stalled and maintained in accordance (iii) Spray rooms shall be adequately
with the requirements of § 1926.66(b)(5), ventilated so that the atmosphere in
(see section 305 of the Standard for the breathing zone of the operator
Spray Finishing Using Flammable and shall be maintained in accordance with
Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33– the requirements of paragraph (h)(6)(ii)
1969), and shall only be in a location of this section.
easily accessible for inspection, clean- (iv) Spray rooms used for production
ing, or replacement. spray-finishing operations shall con-
(B) Where effective means, inde- form to the requirements for spray
pendent of the overspray filters, are in- booths.
stalled which will result in design air (5) Ventilation. (i) Ventilation shall be
distribution across the booth cross sec- provided in accordance with provisions
tion, it is permissible to operate the of § 1926.66(d) (see chapter 5 of the
booth without the filters in place. Standard for Spray Finishing Using
(iv) (A) For wet or water-wash spray Flammable or Combustible Materials,
booths, the water-chamber enclosure, NFPA No. 33–1969), and in accordance
within which intimate contact of con- with the following:
taminated air and cleaning water or (A) Where a fan plenum is used to
other cleaning medium is maintained, equalize or control the distribution of
if made of steel, shall be 18 gage or exhaust air movement through the
heavier and adequately protected booth, it shall be of sufficient strength
against corrosion. or rigidity to withstand the differential
(B) Chambers may include scrubber air pressure or other superficially im-
spray nozzles, headers, troughs, or posed loads for which the equipment is
other devices. Chambers shall be pro- designed and also to facilitate clean-
vided with adequate means for creating ing. Construction specifications shall
and maintaining scrubbing action for be at least equivalent to those of para-
removal of particulate matter from the graph (h)(5)(iii) of this section.
exhaust air stream. (B) [Reserved]
(v) Collecting tanks shall be of weld- (ii) Inlet or supply ductwork used to
ed steel construction or other suitable transport makeup air to spray booths

non-combustible material. If pits are or surrounding areas shall be con-
used as collecting tanks, they shall be structed of noncombustible materials.
65
(A) If negative pressure exists within (E) Inspection or clean-out doors

inlet ductwork, all seams and joints shall be provided for every 9 to 12 feet
shall be sealed if there is a possibility (2.736 to 3.648 m) of running length for
of infiltration of harmful quantities of ducts up to 12 inches (0.304 m) in di-
noxious gases, fumes, or mists from ameter, but the distance between
areas through which ductwork passes. cleanout doors may be greater for larg-
(B) Inlet ductwork shall be sized in er pipes. (See 8.3.21 of American Na-
accordance with volume flow require- tional Standard Z9.1–1951.) A clean-out
ments and provide design air require- door or doors shall be provided for serv-
ments at the spray booth. icing the fan, and where necessary, a
(C) Inlet ductwork shall be ade- drain shall be provided.
quately supported throughout its (F) Where ductwork passes through a
length to sustain at least its own combustible roof or wall, the roof or
weight plus any negative pressure wall shall be protected at the point of
which is exerted upon it under normal penetration by open space or fire-resis-
operating conditions. tive material between the duct and the
(iii) [Reserved] roof or wall. When ducts pass through
(A) Exhaust ductwork shall be ade- firewalls, they shall be provided with
quately supported throughout its automatic fire dampers on both sides of
length to sustain its weight plus any the wall, except that three-eighth-inch
normal accumulation in interior dur- steel plates may be used in lieu of
ing normal operating conditions and automatic fire dampers for ducts not
any negative pressure exerted upon it. exceeding 18 inches (45.72 cm) in diame-
(B) Exhaust ductwork shall be sized ter.
in accordance with good design prac- (G) Ductwork used for ventilating
tice which shall include consideration any process covered in this standard
of fan capacity, length of duct, number shall not be connected to ducts ven-
of turns and elbows, variation in size, tilating any other process or any chim-
volume, and character of materials ney or flue used for conveying any
being exhausted. See American Na- products of combustion.
tional Standard Z9.2–1960 for further (6) Velocity and air flow requirements.
details and explanation concerning ele- (i) Except where a spray booth has an
ments of design. adequate air replacement system, the
(C) Longitudinal joints in sheet steel velocity of air into all openings of a
ductwork shall be either lock-seamed, spray booth shall be not less than that
riveted, or welded. For other than steel specified in Table D–57.7 for the oper-
construction, equivalent securing of ating conditions specified. An adequate
joints shall be provided. air replacement system is one which
(D) Circumferential joints in duct- introduces replacement air upstream
work shall be substantially fastened or above the object being sprayed and
together and lapped in the direction of is so designed that the velocity of air
airflow. At least every fourth joint in the booth cross section is not less
shall be provided with connecting than that specified in Table D–57.7
flanges, bolted together, or of equiva- when measured upstream or above the
lent fastening security. object being sprayed.
TABLE D–57.7—MINIMUM MAINTAINED VELOCITIES INTO SPRAY BOOTHS
Airflow velocities, f.p.m.
Crossdraft,
Operating conditions for objects completely inside booth f.p.m. Design Range
Electrostatic and automatic airless operation contained in booth Negligible .... 50 large booth ...................... 50–75
without operator.
................. 100 small booth .................... 75–125
Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ............................................ Up to 50 ...... 100 large booth .................... 75–125
................. 150 small booth .................... 125–175
Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ............................................ Up to 100 .... 150 large booth .................... 125–175
................. 200 small booth .................... 150–250
NOTES:
(1) Attention is invited to the fact that the effectiveness of the spray booth is dependent upon the relationship of the depth of
the booth to its height and width.
66
(2) Crossdrafts can be eliminated through proper design and such design should be sought. Crossdrafts in excess of
100fpm (feet per minute) should not be permitted.
(3) Excessive air pressures result in loss of both efficiency and material waste in addition to creating a backlash that may
carry overspray and fumes into adjacent work areas.
(4) Booths should be designed with velocities shown in the column headed ‘‘Design.’’ However, booths operating with veloci-
ties shown in the column headed ‘‘Range’’ are in compliance with this standard.
(ii) In addition to the requirements TABLE D–57.8—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF

in paragraph (h)(6)(i) of this section the SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS—Continued
total air volume exhausted through a
Lower ex-
spray booth shall be such as to dilute Cubic feet plosive
per gallon
solvent vapor to at least 25 percent of of vapor of limit in per-
Solvent cent by
the lower explosive limit of the solvent liquid at 70 volume of
°F (21.11
being sprayed. An example of the meth- air at 70 °F
°C). (21.11 °C)
od of calculating this volume is given
below. Butyl Cellosolve ............................. 24.8 1.1
Cellosolve ...................................... 33.6 1.8
Example: To determine the lower explosive Cellosolve Acetate ......................... 23.2 1.7
limits of the most common solvents used in Cyclohexanone .............................. 31.2 1 1.1
spray finishing, see Table D–57.8. Column 1 1,1 Dichloroethylene ...................... 42.4 5.9
gives the number of cubic feet of vapor per 1,2 Dichloroethylene ...................... 42.4 9.7
gallon of solvent and column 2 gives the Ethyl Acetate ................................. 32.8 2.5
lower explosive limit (LEL) in percentage by Ethyl Alcohol .................................. 55.2 4.3
Ethyl Lactate .................................. 28.0 1 1.5
volume of air. Note that the quantity of sol-
Methyl Acetate ............................... 40.0 3.1
vent will be diminished by the quantity of Methyl Alcohol ............................... 80.8 7.3
solids and nonflammables contained in the Methyl Cellosolve .......................... 40.8 2.5
finish. Methyl Ethyl Ketone ...................... 36.0 1.8
To determine the volume of air in cubic Methyl n-Propyl Ketone ................. 30.4 1.5
feet necessary to dilute the vapor from 1 gal- Naphtha (VM&P) (76°Naphtha) ..... 22.4 0.9
lon of solvent to 25 percent of the lower ex- Naphtha (100°Flash) Safety Sol-
plosive limit, apply the following formula: vent—Stoddard Solvent ............. 23.2 1.0
Propyl Acetate (n) ......................... 27.2 2.8
Dilution volume required per gallon of sol- Propyl Acetate (iso) ....................... 28.0 1.1
vent = 4 (100–LEL) (cubic feet of vapor Propyl Alcohol (n) .......................... 44.8 2.1
per gallon) ÷ LEL Propyl Alcohol (iso) ....................... 44.0 2.0
Toluene .......................................... 30.4 1.4
Using toluene as the solvent. Turpentine ..................................... 20.8 0.8
(1) LEL of toluene from Table D–57.8, col- Xylene (o) ...................................... 26.4 1.0
umn 2, is 1.4 percent. 1 At 212 °F (100 °C).
(2) Cubic feet of vapor per gallon from
Table D–57.8, column 1, is 30.4 cubic feet per (iii)(A) When an operator is in a
gallon. booth downstream of the object being
(3) Dilution volume required =
sprayed, an air-supplied respirator or
4 (100–1.4) 30.4 ÷ 1.4 = 8,564 cubic feet. other type of respirator approved by
(4) To convert to cubic feet per minute of NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 for the
required ventilation, multiply the dilution material being sprayed should be used
volume required per gallon of solvent by the by the operator.
number of gallons of solvent evaporated per (B) Where downdraft booths are pro-
minute.
vided with doors, such doors shall be
TABLE D–57.8—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF closed when spray painting.
SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS (7) Make-up air. (i) Clean fresh air,
free of contamination from adjacent
Cubic feet Lower ex- industrial exhaust systems, chimneys,
plosive
per gallon limit in per- stacks, or vents, shall be supplied to a
of vapor of
Solvent liquid at 70 cent by spray booth or room in quantities
volume of
°F (21.11 equal to the volume of air exhausted
air at 70 °F
°C). (21.11 °C) through the spray booth.
Column 1 Column 2 (ii) Where a spray booth or room re-
Acetone ......................................... 44.0 2.6 ceives make-up air through self-closing
Amyl Acetate (iso) ......................... 21.6 1 1.0 doors, dampers, or louvers, they shall
Amyl Alcohol (n) ............................ 29.6 1.2 be fully open at all times when the
Amyl Alcohol (iso) ......................... 29.6 1.2

1 1.4
booth or room is in use for spraying.
Benzene ........................................ 36.8
Butyl Acetate (n) ............................ 24.8 1.7 The velocity of air through such doors,
Butyl Alcohol (n) ............................ 35.2 1.4 dampers, or louvers shall not exceed
67
200 feet per minute. If the fan charac- (C) No means of heating make-up air
teristics are such that the required air shall be located in a spray booth.
flow through the booth will be pro- (D) Where make-up air is heated by
vided, higher velocities through the coal or oil, the products of combustion
doors, dampers, or louvers may be shall not be allowed to mix with the
used. make-up air, and the products of com-
(iii) (A) Where the air supply to a bustion shall be conducted outside the
spray booth or room is filtered, the fan building through a flue terminating at
static pressure shall be calculated on a point remote from all points where
the assumption that the filters are make-up air enters the building.
dirty to the extent that they require (E) Where make-up air is heated by
cleaning or replacement. gas, and the products of combustion
(B) The rating of filters shall be gov- are not mixed with the make-up air but
erned by test data supplied by the man- are conducted through an independent
ufacturer of the filter. A pressure gage flue to a point outside the building re-
shall be installed to show the pressure mote from all points where make-up
drop across the filters. This gage shall air enters the building, it is not nec-
be marked to show the pressure drop at essary to comply with paragraph
which the filters require cleaning or re- (h)(7)(iv)(F) of this section.
placement. Filters shall be replaced or (F) Where make-up air to any manu-
cleaned whenever the pressure drop ally operated spray booth or room is
across them becomes excessive or heated by gas and the products of com-
bustion are allowed to mix with the
whenever the air flow through the face
supply air, the following precautions
of the booth falls below that specified
must be taken:
in Table D–57.7.
(1) The gas must have a distinctive
(iv) (A) Means for heating make-up and strong enough odor to warn work-
air to any spray booth or room, before men in a spray booth or room of its
or at the time spraying is normally presence if in an unburned state in the
performed, shall be provided in all make-up air.
places where the outdoor temperature (2) The maximum rate of gas supply
may be expected to remain below 55 °F. to the make-up air heater burners
(12.77 °C.) for appreciable periods of must not exceed that which would
time during the operation of the booth yield in excess of 200 p.p.m. (parts per
except where adequate and safe means million) of carbon monoxide or 2,000
of radiant heating for all operating per- p.p.m. of total combustible gases in the
sonnel affected is provided. The re- mixture if the unburned gas upon the
placement air during the heating sea- occurrence of flame failure were mixed
sons shall be maintained at not less with all of the make-up air supplied.
than 65 °F. (18.33 °C.) at the point of (3) A fan must be provided to deliver
entry into the spray booth or spray the mixture of heated air and products
room. When otherwise unheated make- of combustion from the plenum cham-
up air would be at a temperature of ber housing the gas burners to the
more than 10 °F. below room tempera- spray booth or room.
ture, its temperature shall be regulated (8) Scope. Spray booths or spray
as provided in section 3.6.3 of ANSI rooms are to be used to enclose or con-
Z9.2–1960. fine all spray finishing operations cov-
(B) As an alternative to an air re- ered by this paragraph (h). This para-
placement system complying with the graph does not apply to the spraying of
preceding section, general heating of the exteriors of buildings, fixed tanks,
the building in which the spray room or similar structures, nor to small
or booth is located may be employed portable spraying apparatus not used
provided that all occupied parts of the repeatedly in the same location.
building are maintained at not less (i) Open surface tanks—(1) General. (i)
than 65 °F. (18.33 °C.) when the exhaust This paragraph applies to all oper-
system is in operation or the general ations involving the immersion of ma-
heating system supplemented by other terials in liquids, or in the vapors of

sources of heat may be employed to such liquids, for the purpose of clean-
meet this requirement. ing or altering the surface or adding to
68
or imparting a finish thereto or chang- tion. Where the tank contains a mix-
ing the character of the materials, and ture of liquids, other than organic sol-
their subsequent removal from the liq- vents, whose effects are additive, the
uid or vapor, draining, and drying. hygienic standard of the most toxic
These operations include washing, elec- component (for example, the one hav-
troplating, anodizing, pickling, ing the lowest p.p.m. or mg./m.3) shall
quenching, dying, dipping, tanning, be used, except where such substance
dressing, bleaching, degreasing, alka- constitutes an insignificantly small
line cleaning, stripping, rinsing, digest- fraction of the mixture. For mixtures
ing, and other similar operations. of organic solvents, their combined ef-
(ii) Except where specific construc- fect, rather than that of either individ-
tion specifications are prescribed in ually, shall determine the hazard po-
this section, hoods, ducts, elbows, fans, tential. In the absence of information
blowers, and all other exhaust system to the contrary, the effects shall be
parts, components, and supports there- considered as additive. If the sum of
of shall be so constructed as to meet the ratios of the airborne concentra-
conditions of service and to facilitate tion of each contaminant to the toxic
maintenance and shall conform in con- concentration of that contaminant ex-
struction to the specifications con- ceeds unity, the toxic concentration
tained in American National Standard shall be considered to have been ex-
Fundamentals Governing the Design ceeded. (See Note A to paragraph
and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys- (i)(2)(v) of this section.)
tems, Z9.2–1960. (v) Hazard potential shall be deter-
(2) Classification of open-surface tank mined from Table D–57.9, with the
operations. (i) Open-surface tank oper- value indicating greater hazard being
ations shall be classified into 16 class- used. When the hazardous material
es, numbered A–1 to D–4, inclusive. may be either a vapor with a threshold
(ii) Determination of class. Class is de- limit value (TLV) in p.p.m. or a mist
termined by two factors, hazard poten- with a TLV in mg./m.3, the TLV indi-
tial designated by a letter from A to D, cating the greater hazard shall be used
inclusive, and rate of gas, vapor, or (for example, A takes precedence over
mist evolution designated by a number B or C; B over C; C over D).
from 1 to 4, inclusive (for example, B.3).
NOTE A:
(iii) Hazard potential is an index, on
a scale of from A to D, inclusive, of the (c1 ÷ TLV1) + (c2 ÷ TLV2) + (c3 ÷ TLV3) +
severity of the hazard associated with ; . . .(cN ÷ TLVN)1
the substance contained in the tank be- Where:
cause of the toxic, flammable, or explo-
sive nature of the vapor, gas, or mist c = Concentration measured at the op-
produced therefrom. The toxic hazard eration in p.p.m.
is determined from the concentration, TABLE D–57.9—DETERMINATION OF HAZARD
measured in parts by volume of a gas POTENTIAL
or vapor, per million parts by volume
of contaminated air (p.p.m.), or in mil- Toxicity group
ligrams of mist per cubic meter of air Hazard potential Gas or
(mg./m.3), below which ill effects are Mist (mg./ Flash point in
vapor m3) degrees F. (C.)
unlikely to occur to the exposed work- (p.p.m.)
er. The concentrations shall be those in A .......................... 0–10 0–0.1 ..........................
§ 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of B .......................... 11–100 0.11–1.0 Under 100
this part. (37.77)
C .......................... 101–500 1.1–10 100 200
(iv) The relative fire or explosion (37.77–93.33)
hazard is measured in degrees Fahr- D .......................... Over 500 Over 10 Over 200
enheit in terms of the closed-cup flash (93.33)
point of the substance in the tank. De-
tailed information on the prevention of (vi) Rate of gas, vapor, or mist evo-
fire hazards in dip tanks may be found lution is a numerical index, on a scale
in Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or of from 1 to 4, inclusive, both of the

Combustible Liquids, NFPA No. 34– relative capacity of the tank to
1966, National Fire Protection Associa- produce gas, vapor, or mist and of the
69
relative energy with which it is pro- (D) The extent that the tank gases or
jected or carried upwards from the produces mist in an arbitrary scale—
tank. Rate is evaluated in terms of high, medium, low, and nil. (See Table
(A) The temperature of the liquid in D–57.10, Note 2.) Gassing depends upon
the tank in degrees Fahrenheit; electrochemical or mechanical proc-
(B) The number of degrees Fahr- esses, the effects of which have to be
enheit that this temperature is below individually evaluated for each instal-
the boiling point of the liquid in de- lation (see Table D–57.10, Note 3).
grees Fahrenheit; (vii) Rate of evolution shall be deter-
(C) The relative evaporation of the mined from Table D–57.10. When evapo-
liquid in still air at room temperature ration and gassing yield different rates,
in an arbitrary scale—fast, medium, the lowest numerical value shall be
slow, or nil; and used.
TABLE D–57.10—DETERMINATION OF RATE OF GAS, VAPOR, OR MIST EVOLUTION 1
Liquid temperature, Degrees below boil-
Rate Relative evaporation 2 Gassing 3
°F. (C.) ing point
1 ................................ Over 200 (93.33) 0–20 Fast ...................................... High.

2 ................................ 150–200 (65.55– 21–50 Medium ................................ Medium.
93.33)
3 ................................ 94–149 (34.44–65) 51–100 Slow ..................................... Low.
4 ................................ Under 94 (34.44) Over 100 Nil ........................................ Nil.
1 In certain classes of equipment, specifically vapor degreasers, an internal condenser or vapor level thermostat is used to pre-
vent the vapor from leaving the tank during normal operation. In such cases, rate of vapor evolution from the tank into the work-
room is not dependent upon the factors listed in the table, but rather upon abnormalities of operating procedure, such as carry-
out of vapors from excessively fast action, dragout of liquid by entrainment in parts, contamination of solvent by water and other
materials, or improper heat balance. When operating procedure is excellent, effective rate of evolution may be taken as 4. When
operating procedure is average, the effective rate of evolution may be taken as 3. When operation is poor, a rate of 2 or 1 is in-
dicated, depending upon observed conditions.
2 Relative evaporation rate is determined according to the methods described by A. K. Doolittle in Industrial and Engineering
Chemistry, vol. 27, p. 1169, (3) where time for 100-percent evaporation is as follows: Fast: 0–3 hours; Medium: 3–12 hours;
Slow: 12–50 hours; Nil: more than 50 hours.
3 Gassing means the formation by chemical or electrochemical action of minute bubbles of gas under the surface of the liquid
in the tank and is generally limited to aqueous solutions.
(3) Ventilation. Where ventilation is (ii) All tanks exhausted by means of

used to control potential exposures to hoods which
workers as defined in paragraph (A) Project over the entire tank;
(i)(2)(iii) of this section, it shall be ade- (B) Are fixed in position in such a lo-
quate to reduce the concentration of cation that the head of the workman,
the air contaminant to the degree that in all his normal operating positions
a hazard to the worker does not exist. while working at the tank, is in front
Methods of ventilation are discussed in
of all hood openings; and
American National Standard Fun-
damentals Governing the Design and (C) Are completely enclosed on at
Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, least two sides, shall be considered to
Z9.2–1960. be exhausted through an enclosing
(4) Control requirements. (i) Control hood.
velocities shall conform to Table D– (D) The quantity of air in cubic feet
57.11 in all cases where the flow of air per minute necessary to be exhausted
past the breathing or working zone of through an enclosing hood shall be not
the operator and into the hoods is unless than the product of the control ve-
disturbed by local environmental con- locity times the net area of all open-
ditions, such as open windows, wall ings in the enclosure through which air
fans, unit heaters, or moving machin- can flow into the hood.
ery.
70
TABLE D–57.11—CONTROL VELOCITIES IN FEET PER MINUTE (F.P.M.) FOR UNDISTURBED LOCATIONS
Enclosing hood Canopy hood 2
Lateral ex-
Class One open Two open haust 1 Three Four open
side sides open sides sides
B–1 and A–2 ........................................................................... 100 150 150 Do not use Do not use
A–3 2, B–1, B–2, and C–1 ....................................................... 75 100 100 125 175
A–3, C–2, and D–1 3 ............................................................... 65 90 75 100 150
B–4 2, C–3, and D–2 3 ............................................................. 50 75 50 75 125
A–4, C–4, D–3 3, and D–4 4 .................................................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ..................
1 See Table D–57.12 for computation of ventilation rate.
2 Do not use canopy hood for Hazard Potential A processes.
3 Where complete control of hot water is desired, design as next highest class.
4 General room ventilation required.
(iii) All tanks exhausted by means of (A) For lateral exhaust hoods over 42
hoods which do not project over the en- inches (1.06 m) wide, or where it is de-
tire tank, and in which the direction of sirable to reduce the amount of air re-
air movement into the hood or hoods is moved from the workroom, air supply
substantially horizontal, shall be con- slots or orifices shall be provided along
sidered to be laterally exhausted. The the side or the center of the tank oppo-
quantity of air in cubic feet per minute site from the exhaust slots. The design
necessary to be laterally exhausted per of such systems shall meet the fol-
square foot of tank area in order to
lowing criteria:
maintain the required control velocity
shall be determined from Table D–57.12 (1) The supply air volume plus the en-
for all variations in ratio of tank width trained air shall not exceed 50 percent
(W) to tank length $(L). The total of the exhaust volume.
quantity of air in cubic feet per minute (2) The velocity of the supply air-
required to be exhausted per tank shall stream as it reaches the effective con-
be not less than the product of the area trol area of the exhaust slot shall be
of tank surface times the cubic feet per less than the effective velocity over
minute per square foot of tank area, the exhaust slot area.
determined from Table D–57.12.
TABLE D–57.12—MINIMUM VENTILATION RATE IN CUBIC FEET OF AIR PER MINUTE PER SQUARE
FOOT OF TANK AREA FOR LATERAL EXHAUST
C.f.m. per sq. ft. to maintain required minimum velocities at fol-
Required minimum control velocity, f.p.m. (from Table D– lowing ratios (tank width (W)/tank length (L)). 1 2
57.11)
0.0–0.09 0.1–0.24 0.25–0.49 0.5–0.99 1.0–2.0
Hood along one side or two parallel sides of tank when one hood is against a wall or baffle. 2
Also for a manifold along tank centerline. 3
50 ............................................................................................ 50 60 75 90 100
75 ............................................................................................ 75 90 110 130 150
100 .......................................................................................... 100 125 150 175 200
150 .......................................................................................... 150 190 225 260 300
Hood along one side or two parallel sides of free standing tank not against wall or baffle.
50 ............................................................................................ 75 90 100 110 125

75 ............................................................................................ 110 130 150 170 190
100 .......................................................................................... 150 175 200 225 250
150 .......................................................................................... 225 260 300 340 375
1 Itis not practicable to ventilate across the long dimension of a tank whose ratio W/L exceeds 2.0.
It is undesirable to do so when W/L exceeds 1.0. For circular tanks with lateral exhaust along up to 1⁄2 the circumference, use
W/L = 1.0; for over one-half the circumference use W/L = 0.5.
2 Baffle is a vertical plate the same length as the tank, and with the top of the plate as high as the tank is wide. If the exhaust
hood is on the side of a tank against a building wall or close to it, it is perfectly baffled.
3 Use W/2 as tank width in computing when manifold is along centerline, or when hoods are used on two parallel sides of a
tank.
Tank Width (W) means the effective width over which the hood must pull air to operate (for example, where the hood face is
set back from the edge of the tank, this set back must be added in measuring tank width). The surface area of tanks can fre-
quently be reduced and better control obtained (particularly on conveyorized systems) by using covers extending from the upper
edges of the slots toward the center of the tank.
71
(3) The vertical height of the receiv- the liquid in the tank to minimize mist
ing exhaust hood, including any baffle, formation, or any combination thereof,
shall not be less than one-quarter the may all be used as gas, mist, or vapor
width of the tank. control means for open-surface tank
(4) The supply airstream shall not be operations, provided that they effec-
allowed to impinge on obstructions be- tively reduce the concentrations of
tween it and the exhaust slot in such a hazardous materials in the vicinity of
manner as to significantly interfere the worker below the limits set in ac-
with the performance of the exhaust cordance with paragraph (i)(2) of this
hood. section.
(5) Since most failure of push-pull (7) System design. (i) The equipment
systems result from excessive supply for exhausting air shall have sufficient
air volumes and pressures, methods of capacity to produce the flow of air re-
measuring and adjusting the supply air quired in each of the hoods and open-
shall be provided. When satisfactory ings of the system.
control has been achieved, the adjust- (ii) The capacity required in para-
able features of the hood shall be fixed graph (i)(7)(i) of this section shall be
so that they will not be altered. obtained when the airflow producing
(iv) All tanks exhausted by means of equipment is operating against the fol-
hoods which project over the entire lowing pressure losses, the sum of
tank, and which do not conform to the which is the static pressure:
definition of enclosing hoods, shall be (A) Entrance losses into the hood.
considered to be overhead canopy (B) Resistance to airflow in branch
hoods. The quantity of air in cubic feet pipe including bends and trans-
per minute necessary to be exhausted formations.
through a canopy hood shall be not less (C) Entrance loss into the main pipe.
than the product of the control veloc- (D) Resistance to airflow in main
ity times the net area of all openings pipe including bends and trans-
between the bottom edges of the hood formations.
and the top edges of the tank. (E) Resistance of mechanical equip-
(v) The rate of vapor evolution (in- ment; that is, filters, washers, con-
cluding steam or products of combus- densers, absorbers, etc., plus their en-
tion) from the process shall be esti- trance and exit losses.
mated. If the rate of vapor evolution is (F) Resistance in outlet duct and dis-
equal to or greater than 10 percent of charge stack.
the calculated exhaust volume re- (iii) Two or more operations shall not
quired, the exhaust volume shall be in- be connected to the same exhaust sys-
creased in equal amount. tem where either one or the combina-
(5) Spray cleaning and degreasing. tion of the substances removed may
Wherever spraying or other mechanical constitute a fire, explosion, or chem-
means are used to disperse a liquid ical reaction hazard in the duct sys-
above an open-surface tank, control tem. Traps or other devices shall be
must be provided for the airborne provided to insure that condensate in
spray. Such operations shall be en- ducts does not drain back into any
closed as completely as possible. The tank.
inward air velocity into the enclosure (iv) The exhaust system, consisting
shall be sufficient to prevent the dis- of hoods, ducts, air mover, and dis-
charge of spray into the workroom. charge outlet, shall be designed in ac-
Mechanical baffles may be used to help cordance with American National
prevent the discharge of spray. Spray Standard Fundamentals Governing the
painting operations are covered by Design and Operation of Local Exhaust
paragraph (h) of this section. Systems, Z9.2–1960, or the manual, In-
(6) Control means other than ventila- dustrial Ventilation, published by the
tion. Tank covers, foams, beads, chips, American Conference of Governmental
or other materials floating on the tank Industrial Hygienists 1970. Airflow and
surface so as to confine gases, mists, or pressure loss data provided by the man-
vapors to the area under the cover or ufacturer of any air cleaning device
to the foam, bead, or chip layer; or sur- shall be included in the design calcula-
face tension depressive agents added to tions.
72
(8) Operation. (i) The required airflow (ii) All persons required to work in
shall be maintained at all times during such a manner that their feet may be-
which gas, mist, or vapor is emitted come wet shall be provided with rubber
from the tank, and at all times the or other impervious boots or shoes,
tank, the draining, or the drying area rubbers, or wooden-soled shoes suffi-
is in operation or use. When the system cient to keep feet dry.
is first installed, the airflow from each (iii) All persons required to handle
hood shall be measured by means of a work wet with a liquid other than
pitot traverse in the exhaust duct and water shall be provided with gloves im-
corrective action taken if the flow is pervious to such a liquid and of a
less than that required. When the prop- length sufficient to prevent entrance of
er flow is obtained, the hood static liquid into the tops of the gloves. The
pressure shall be measured and re- interior of gloves shall be kept free
corded. At intervals of not more than 3 from corrosive or irritating contami-
months operation, or after a prolonged nants.
shutdown period, the hoods and duct (iv) All persons required to work in
system shall be inspected for evidence such a manner that their clothing may
of corrosion or damage. In any case become wet shall be provided with such
where the airflow is found to be less aprons, coats, jackets, sleeves, or other
than required, it shall be increased to garments made of rubber, or of other
the required value. (Information on air- materials impervious to liquids other
flow and static pressure measurement than water, as are required to keep
and calculations may be found in their clothing dry. Aprons shall extend
American National Standard Funda- well below the top of boots to prevent
mental Governing the Design and Oper- liquid splashing into the boots. Provi-
ation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2– sion of dry, clean, cotton clothing
1960, or in the manual, Industrial Ven- along with rubber shoes or short boots
tilation, published by the American and an apron impervious to liquids
Conference of Governmental Industrial other than water shall be considered a
satisfactory substitute where small
Hygienists.)
parts are cleaned, plated, or acid
(ii) The exhaust system shall dis-
dipped in open tanks and rapid work is
charge to the outer air in such a man-
required.
ner that the possibility of its effluent (v) Whenever there is a danger of
entering any building is at a minimum. splashing, for example, when additions
Recirculation shall only be through a are made manually to the tanks, or
device for contaminant removal which when acids and chemicals are removed
will prevent the creation of a health from the tanks, the employees so en-
hazard in the room or area to which gaged shall be required to wear either
the air is recirculated. tight-fitting chemical goggles or an ef-
(iii) A volume of outside air in the fective face shield. See § 1926.102.
range of 90 percent to 110 percent of the (vi) When, during the emergencies
exhaust volume shall be provided to specified in paragraph (i)(11)(v) of this
each room having exhaust hoods. The section, employees must be in areas
outside air supply shall enter the work- where concentrations of air contami-
room in such a manner as not to be nants are greater than the limits set
detrimental to any exhaust hood. The by paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section
airflow of the makeup air system shall or oxygen concentrations are less than
be measured on installation. Corrective 19.5 percent, they must use respirators
action shall be taken when the airflow that reduce their exposure to a level
is below that required. The makeup air below these limits or that provide ade-
shall be uncontaminated. quate oxygen. Such respirators must
(9) Personal protection. (i) All employ- also be provided in marked, quickly-ac-
ees working in and around open-surface cessible storage compartments built
tank operations must be instructed as for this purpose when the possibility
to the hazards of their respective jobs, exists of accidental release of haz-
and in the personal protection and first ardous concentrations of air contami-
aid procedures applicable to these haz- nants. Respirators must be approved by
ards. NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84, selected
73
by a competent industrial hygienist or type of construction and by frequent

other technically-qualified source, and flushing. They shall be firm, sound, and
used in accordance with 29 CFR of the design and construction to mini-
1926.103. mize the possibility of tripping.
(vii) Near each tank containing a liq- (ii) Before cleaning the interior of
uid which may burn, irritate, or other- any tank, the contents shall be drained
wise be harmful to the skin if splashed off, and the cleanout doors shall be
upon the worker’s body, there shall be opened where provided. All pockets in
a supply of clean cold water. The water tanks or pits, where it is possible for
pipe (carrying a pressure not exceeding hazardous vapors to collect, shall be
25 pounds (11.325 kg)) shall be provided ventilated and cleared of such vapors.
with a quick opening valve and at least (iii) Tanks which have been drained
48 inches (1.216 m) of hose not smaller to permit employees to enter for the
than three-fourths inch, so that no purposes of cleaning, inspection, or
time may be lost in washing off liquids maintenance may contain atmospheres
from the skin or clothing. Alter- which are hazardous to life or health,
natively, deluge showers and eye through the presence of flammable or
flushes shall be provided in cases where toxic air contaminants, or through the
harmful chemicals may be splashed on absence of sufficient oxygen. Before
parts of the body. employees shall be permitted to enter
(viii) Operators with sores, burns, or any such tank, appropriate tests of the
other skin lesions requiring medical atmosphere shall be made to determine
treatment shall not be allowed to work
if the limits set by paragraph (i)(2)(iii)
at their regular operations until so au-
of this section are exceeded, or if the
thorized by a physician. Any small
oxygen concentration is less than 19.5
skin abrasions, cuts, rash, or open
percent.
sores which are found or reported shall
be treated by a properly designated (iv) If the tests made in accordance
person so that chances of exposures to with paragraph (i)(11)(iii) of this sec-
the chemicals are removed. Workers tion indicate that the atmosphere in
exposed to chromic acids shall have a the tank is unsafe, before any em-
periodic examination made of the nos- ployee is permitted to enter the tank,
trils and other parts of the body, to de- the tank shall be ventilated until the
tect incipient ulceration. hazardous atmosphere is removed, and
(ix) Sufficient washing facilities, in- ventilation shall be continued so as to
cluding soap, individual towels, and prevent the occurrence of a hazardous
hot water, shall be provided for all per- atmosphere as long as an employee is
sons required to use or handle any liq- in the tank.
uids which may burn, irritate, or oth- (v) If, in emergencies, such as rescue
erwise be harmful to the skin, on the work, it is necessary to enter a tank
basis of at least one basin (or its equiv- which may contain a hazardous atmos-
alent) with a hot water faucet for every phere, suitable respirators, such as
10 employees. See § 1926.51(f). self-contained breathing apparatus;
(x) Locker space or equivalent cloth- hose mask with blower, if there is a
ing storage facilities shall be provided possibility of oxygen deficiency; or a
to prevent contamination of street gas mask, selected and operated in ac-
clothing. cordance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of
(xi) First aid facilities specific to the this section, shall be used. If a con-
hazards of the operations conducted taminant in the tank can cause derma-
shall be readily available. titis, or be absorbed through the skin,
(10) Special precautions for cyanide. the employee entering the tank shall
Dikes or other arrangements shall be also wear protective clothing. At least
provided to prevent the possibility of one trained standby employee, with
intermixing of cyanide and acid in the suitable respirator, shall be present in
event of tank rupture. the nearest uncontaminated area. The
(11) Inspection, maintenance, and in- standby employee must be able to com-
stallation. (i) Floors and platforms municate with the employee in the
around tanks shall be prevented from tank and be able to haul him out of the
becoming slippery both by original tank with a lifeline if necessary.
74
(vi) Maintenance work requiring the vapors of such liquids, for the pur-
welding or open flame, where toxic pose of cleaning or altering their sur-
metal fumes such as cadmium, chro- faces, or adding or imparting a finish
mium, or lead may be evolved, shall be thereto, or changing the character of
done only with sufficient local exhaust the materials, and their subsequent re-
ventilation to prevent the creation of a moval from the liquids or vapors,
health hazard, or be done with res- draining, and drying. Such operations
pirators selected and used in accord- include washing, electroplating, anod-
ance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of this izing, pickling, quenching, dyeing, dip-
section. Welding, or the use of open ping, tanning, dressing, bleaching,
flames near any solvent cleaning degreasing, alkaline cleaning, strip-
equipment shall be permitted only ping, rinsing, digesting, and other simi-
after such equipment has first been lar operations, but do not include mol-
thoroughly cleared of solvents and va- ten materials handling operations, or
pors. surface coating operations.
(12) Vapor degreasing tanks. (i) In any (ii) Molten materials handling oper-
vapor degreasing tank equipped with a ations means all operations, other than
condenser or vapor level thermostat, welding, burning, and soldering oper-
the condenser or thermostat shall keep ations, involving the use, melting,
the level of vapors below the top edge smelting, or pouring of metals, alloys,
of the tank by a distance at least equal salts, or other similar substances in
to one-half the tank width, or at least the molten state. Such operations also
36 inches (0.912 m), whichever is short- include heat treating baths, descaling
er. baths, die casting stereotyping, gal-
(ii) Where gas is used as a fuel for vanizing, tinning, and similar oper-
heating vapor degreasing tanks, the ations.
combustion chamber shall be of tight (iii) Surface coating operations means
construction, except for such openings all operations involving the applica-
as the exhaust flue, and those that are tion of protective, decorative, adhe-
necessary for supplying air for combus- sive, or strengthening coating or im-
tion. Flues shall be of corrosion-resist- pregnation to one or more surfaces, or
ant construction and shall extend to into the interstices of any object or
the outer air. If mechanical exhaust is material, by means of spraying, spread-
used on this flue, a draft diverter shall ing, flowing, brushing, roll coating,
be used. Special precautions must be pouring, cementing, or similar means;
taken to prevent solvent fumes from and any subsequent draining or drying
entering the combustion air of this or operations, excluding open-tank oper-
any other heater when chlorinated or ations.
fluorinated hydrocarbon solvents (for
example, trichloroethylene, Freon) are [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
used. 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35099, June 30, 1993;
61 FR 9250, Mar. 3, 1996; 63 FR 1295, Jan. 8,
(iii) Heating elements shall be so de-
1998]
signed and maintained that their sur-
face temperature will not cause the § 1926.58 [Reserved]
solvent or mixture to decompose, break
down, or be converted into an excessive § 1926.59 Hazard communication.
quantity of vapor.
(iv) Tanks or machines of more than NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
struction work under this section are iden-
4 square feet (0.368 m2) of vapor area, tical to those set forth at § 1910.1200 of this
used for solvent cleaning or vapor chapter.
degreasing, shall be equipped with suit-
able cleanout or sludge doors located [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
near the bottom of each tank or still.
These doors shall be so designed and § 1926.60 Methylenedianiline.
gasketed that there will be no leakage (a) Scope and application. (1) This sec-
of solvent when they are closed. tion applies to all construction work as
(13) Scope. (i) This paragraph (i) ap- defined in 29 CFR 1910.12(b), in which
plies to all operations involving the there is exposure to MDA, including
immersion of materials in liquids, or in but not limited to the following:
75
(i) Construction, alteration, repair, ployer shall maintain records of the

maintenance, or renovation of struc- initial monitoring results or objective
tures, substrates, or portions thereof, data supporting that exemption and
that contain MDA; the basis for the employer’s reliance on
(ii) Installation or the finishing of the data, as provided in the record-
surfaces with products containing keeping provision of paragraph (o) of
MDA; this section.
(iii) MDA spill/emergency cleanup at (b) Definitions. For the purpose of this
construction sites; and section, the following definitions shall
(iv) Transportation, disposal, stor- apply:
age, or containment of MDA or prod- Action level means a concentration of
ucts containing MDA on the site or lo- airborne MDA of 5 ppb as an eight (8)-
cation at which construction activities hour time-weighted average.
are performed. Assistant Secretary means the Assist-
(2) Except as provided in paragraphs ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
(a)(7) and (f)(5) of this section, this sectional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart-
tion does not apply to the processing, ment of Labor, or designee.
use, and handling of products con-
Authorized person means any person
taining MDA where initial monitoring
specifically authorized by the employer
indicates that the product is not capa-
whose duties require the person to
ble of releasing MDA in excess of the
enter a regulated area, or any person
action level under the expected condi-
entering such an area as a designated
tions of processing, use, and handling
representative of employees for the
which will cause the greatest possible
purpose of exercising the right to ob-
release; and where no ‘‘dermal exposure
serve monitoring and measuring proce-
to MDA’’ can occur.
dures under paragraph (p) of this sec-
(3) Except as provided in paragraph
tion, or any other person authorized by
(a)(7) of this section, this section does
the Act or regulations issued under the
not apply to the processing, use, and
Act.
handling of products containing MDA
Container means any barrel, bottle,
where objective data are reasonably re-
can, cylinder, drum, reaction vessel,
lied upon which demonstrate the prod-
storage tank, commercial packaging or
uct is not capable of releasing MDA
the like, but does not include piping
under the expected conditions of proc-
systems.
essing, use, and handling which will
cause the greatest possible release; and Decontamination area means an area
where no ‘‘dermal exposure to MDA’’ outside of but as near as practical to
can occur. the regulated area, consisting of an
(4) Except as provided in paragraph equipment storage area, wash area, and
(a)(7) of this section, this section does clean change area, which is used for
not apply to the storage, transpor- the decontamination of workers, mate-
tation, distribution or sale of MDA in rials, and equipment contaminated
intact containers sealed in such a man- with MDA.
ner as to contain the MDA dusts, va- Dermal exposure to MDA occurs where
pors, or liquids, except for the provi- employees are engaged in the handling,
sions of 29 CFR 1910.1200 and paragraph application or use of mixtures or mate-
(e) of this section. rials containing MDA, with any of the
(5) Except as provided in paragraph following non-airborne forms of MDA:
(a)(7) of this section, this section does (i) Liquid, powdered, granular, or
not apply to materials in any form flaked mixtures containing MDA in
which contain less than 0.1% MDA by concentrations greater than 0.1% by
weight or volume. weight or volume; and
(6) Except as provided in paragraph (ii) Materials other than ‘‘finished ar-
(a)(7) of this section, this section does ticles’’ containing MDA in concentra-
not apply to ‘‘finished articles con- tions greater than 0.1% by weight or
taining MDA.’’ volume.
(7) Where products containing MDA Director means the Director of the
are exempted under paragraphs (a)(2) National Institute for Occupational
through (a)(6) of this section, the em- Safety and Health, U.S. Department of
76
Health and Human Services, or des- diaminodiphenylmethane, Chemical

ignee. Abstract Service Registry number 101–
Emergency means any occurrence 77–9, in the form of a vapor, liquid, or
such as, but not limited to, equipment solid. The definition also includes the
failure, rupture of containers, or fail- salts of MDA.
ure of control equipment which results Regulated Areas means areas where
in an unexpected and potentially haz- airborne concentrations of MDA exceed
ardous release of MDA. or can reasonably be expected to ex-
Employee exposure means exposure to ceed, the permissible exposure limits,
MDA which would occur if the em- or where ‘‘dermal exposure to MDA’’
ployee were not using respirators or can occur.
protective work clothing and equip- STEL means short term exposure
ment. limit as determined by any 15-minute
Finished article containing MDA is de- sample period.
fined as a manufactured item: (c) Permissible exposure limits. The em-
(i) Which is formed to a specific ployer shall assure that no employee is
shape or design during manufacture; exposed to an airborne concentration
(ii) Which has end use function(s) de- of MDA in excess of ten parts per bil-
pendent in whole or part upon its shape lion (10 ppb) as an 8-hour time-weight-
or design during end use; and ed average and a STEL of one hundred
(iii) Where applicable, is an item
parts per billion (100 ppb).
which is fully cured by virtue of having
(d) Communication among employers.
been subjected to the conditions (tem-
On multi-employer worksites, an em-
perature, time) necessary to complete
the desired chemical reaction. ployer performing work involving the
Historical monitoring data means mon- application of MDA or materials con-
itoring data for construction jobs that taining MDA for which establishment
meet the following conditions: of one or more regulated areas is re-
(i) The data upon which judgments quired shall inform other employers on
are based are scientifically sound and the site of the nature of the employer’s
were collected using methods that are work with MDA and of the existence of,
sufficiently accurate and precise; and requirements pertaining to, regu-
(ii) The processes and work practices lated areas.
that were in use when the historical (e) Emergency situations—(1) Written
monitoring data were obtained are es- plan. (i) A written plan for emergency
sentially the same as those to be used situations shall be developed for each
during the job for which initial moni- construction operation where there is a
toring will not be performed; possibility of an emergency. The plan
(iii) The characteristics of the MDA- shall include procedures where the em-
containing material being handled ployer identifies emergency escape
when the historical monitoring data routes for his employees at each con-
were obtained are the same as those on struction site before the construction
the job for which initial monitoring operation begins. Appropriate portions
will not be performed; of the plan shall be implemented in the
(iv) Environmental conditions pre- event of an emergency.
vailing when the historical monitoring (ii) The plan shall specifically pro-
data were obtained are the same as vide that employees engaged in cor-
those on the job for which initial moni- recting emergency conditions shall be
toring will not be performed; and equipped with the appropriate personal
(v) Other data relevant to the oper- protective equipment and clothing as
ations, materials, processing, or em- required in paragraphs (i) and (j) of this
ployee exposures covered by the excep- section until the emergency is abated.
tion are substantially similar. The (iii) The plan shall specifically in-
data must be scientifically sound, the clude provisions for alerting and evacu-
characteristics of the MDA containing ating affected employees as well as the
material must be similar and the envi- applicable elements prescribed in 29
ronmental conditions comparable. CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR 1910.39, ‘‘Emer-

4,4′Methylenedianiline or MDA means gency action plans’’ and ‘‘Fire preven-
the chemical; 4,4′- tion plans,’’ respectively.
77
(2) Alerting employees. Where there is monitoring for each such employee at
the possibility of employee exposure to least every six (6) months.
MDA due to an emergency, means shall (ii) If the monitoring required by
be developed to promptly alert employ- paragraph (f)(2) of this section reveals
ees who have the potential to be di- employee exposure above the PELs, the
rectly exposed. Affected employees not employer shall repeat such monitoring
engaged in correcting emergency con- for each such employee at least every
ditions shall be evacuated immediately three (3) months.
in the event that an emergency occurs. (iii) Employers who are conducting
Means shall also be developed for alert- MDA operations within a regulated
ing other employees who may be ex- area can forego periodic monitoring if
posed as a result of the emergency. the employees are all wearing supplied-
(f) Exposure monitoring—(1) General. air respirators while working in the
(i) Determinations of employee expo- regulated area.
sure shall be made from breathing zone (iv) The employer may alter the mon-
air samples that are representative of itoring schedule from every three
each employee’s exposure to airborne months to every six months for any
MDA over an eight (8) hour period. De- employee for whom two consecutive
termination of employee exposure to measurements taken at least 7 days
the STEL shall be made from breathing apart indicate that the employee expo-
zone air samples collected over a 15 sure has decreased to below the PELs
minute sampling period. but above the action level.
(ii) Representative employee expo- (4) Termination of monitoring. (i) If the
sure shall be determined on the basis of initial monitoring required by para-
one or more samples representing full graph (f)(2) of this section reveals em-
shift exposure for each shift for each ployee exposure to be below the action
job classification in each work area level, the employer may discontinue
the monitoring for that employee, ex-
where exposure to MDA may occur.
cept as otherwise required by para-
(iii) Where the employer can docu-
graph (f)(5) of this section.
ment that exposure levels are equiva-
(ii) If the periodic monitoring re-
lent for similar operations in different quired by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec-
work shifts, the employer shall only be tion reveals that employee exposures,
required to determine representative as indicated by at least two consecu-
employee exposure for that operation tive measurements taken at least 7
during one shift. days apart, are below the action level
(2) Initial monitoring. Each employer the employer may discontinue the
who has a workplace or work operation monitoring for that employee, except
covered by this standard shall perform as otherwise required by paragraph
initial monitoring to determine accu- (f)(5) of this section.
rately the airborne concentrations of (5) Additional monitoring. The em-
MDA to which employees may be ex- ployer shall institute the exposure
posed unless: monitoring required under paragraphs
(i) The employer can demonstrate, on (f)(2) and (f)(3) of this section when
the basis of objective data, that the there has been a change in production
MDA-containing product or material process, chemicals present, control
being handled cannot cause exposures equipment, personnel, or work prac-
above the standard’s action level, even tices which may result in new or addi-
under worst-case release conditions; or tional exposures to MDA, or when the
(ii) The employer has historical mon- employer has any reason to suspect a
itoring or other data demonstrating change which may result in new or ad-
that exposures on a particular job will ditional exposures.
be below the action level. (6) Accuracy of monitoring. Monitoring
(3) Periodic monitoring and monitoring shall be accurate, to a confidence level
frequency. (i) If the monitoring required of 95 percent, to within plus or minus
by paragraph (f)(2) of this section re- 25 percent for airborne concentrations
veals employee exposure at or above of MDA.

the action level, but at or below the (7) Employee notification of monitoring
PELs, the employer shall repeat such results. (i) The employer must, as soon
78
as possible but no later than 5 working drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or
days after the receipt of the results of apply cosmetics in regulated areas.
any monitoring performed under this (h) Methods of compliance—(1) Engi-
section, notify each affected employee neering controls and work practices and
of these results either individually in respirators. (i) The employer shall use
writing or by posting the results in an one or any combination of the fol-
appropriate location that is accessible lowing control methods to achieve
to employees. compliance with the permissible expo-
(ii) The written notification required sure limits prescribed by paragraph (c)
by paragraph (f)(7)(i) of this section of this section:
shall contain the corrective action
(A) Local exhaust ventilation
being taken by the employer or any
other protective measures which have equipped with HEPA filter dust collec-
been implemented to reduce the em- tion systems;
ployee exposure to or below the PELs, (B) General ventilation systems;
wherever the PELs are exceeded. (C) Use of workpractices; or
(8) Visual monitoring. The employer (D) Other engineering controls such
shall make routine inspections of em- as isolation and enclosure that the As-
ployee hands, face and forearms poten- sistant Secretary can show to be fea-
tially exposed to MDA. Other potential sible.
dermal exposures reported by the em- (ii) Wherever the feasible engineering
ployee must be referred to the appro- controls and work practices ‘‘which
priate medical personnel for observa- can be instituted are not sufficient to
tion. If the employer determines that reduce employee exposure to or below
the employee has been exposed to MDA the PELs, the employer shall use them
the employer shall: to reduce employee exposure to the
(i) Determine the source of exposure; lowest levels achievable by these con-
(ii) Implement protective measures trols and shall supplement them by the
to correct the hazard; and
use of respiratory protective devices
(iii) Maintain records of the correc-
which comply with the requirements of
tive actions in accordance with para-
graph (o) of this section. paragraph (i) of this section.
(g) Regulated areas—(1) Establish- (2) Special Provisions. For workers en-
ment—(i) Airborne exposures. The em- gaged in spray application methods,
ployer shall establish regulated areas respiratory protection must be used in
where airborne concentrations of MDA addition to feasible engineering con-
exceed or can reasonably be expected trols and work practices to reduce em-
to exceed, the permissible exposure ployee exposure to or below the PELs.
limits. (3) Prohibitions. Compressed air shall
(ii) Dermal exposures. Where employ- not be used to remove MDA, unless the
ees are subject to ‘‘dermal exposure to compressed air is used in conjunction
MDA’’ the employer shall establish with an enclosed ventilation system
those work areas as regulated areas. designed to capture the dust cloud cre-
(2) Demarcation. Regulated areas shall ated by the compressed air.
be demarcated from the rest of the (4) Employee rotation. The employer
workplace in a manner that minimizes shall not use employee rotation as a
the number of persons potentially ex- means of compliance with the exposure
posed. limits prescribed in paragraph (c) of
(3) Access. Access to regulated areas this section.
shall be limited to authorized persons.
(5) Compliance program. (i) The em-
(4) Personal protective equipment and
clothing. Each person entering a regu- ployer shall establish and implement a
lated area shall be supplied with, and written program to reduce employee
required to use, the appropriate per- exposure to or below the PELs by
sonal protective clothing and equip- means of engineering and work prac-
ment in accordance with paragraphs (i) tice controls, as required by paragraph
and (j) of this section. (h)(1) of this section, and by use of res-
(5) Prohibited activities. The employer piratory protection where permitted
shall ensure that employees do not eat, under this section.
79
(ii) Upon request this written pro- (ii) An employee who cannot use a
gram shall be furnished for examina- negative-pressure respirator must be
tion and copying to the Assistant Sec- given the option of using a positive-
retary, the Director, affected employ- pressure respirator, or a supplied-air
ees and designated employee represent- respirator operated in the continuous-
atives. The employer shall review and, flow or pressure-demand mode.
as necessary, update such plans at (j) Protective work clothing and equip-
least once every 12 months to make ment—(1) Provision and use. Where em-
certain they reflect the current status ployees are subject to dermal exposure
of the program. to MDA, where liquids containing MDA
(i) Respiratory protection—(1) General. can be splashed into the eyes, or where
For employees who use respirators re- airborne concentrations of MDA are in
quired by this section, the employer excess of the PEL, the employer shall
must provide each employee an appro- provide, at no cost to the employee,
priate respirator that complies with and ensure that the employee uses, ap-
the requirements of this paragraph. propriate protective work clothing and
Respirators must be used during: equipment which prevent contact with
(i) Periods necessary to install or im- MDA such as, but not limited to:
plement feasible engineering and work- (i) Aprons, coveralls or other full-
practice controls. body work clothing;
(ii) Work operations, such as mainte- (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and foot
nance and repair activities and spray- coverings; and
application processes, for which engi-
(iii) Face shields, chemical goggles;
neering and work-practice controls are
or
not feasible.
(iv) Other appropriate protective
(iii) Work operations for which fea-
equipment which comply with 29 CFR
sible engineering and work-practice
1910.133.
controls are not yet sufficient to re-
duce employee exposure to or below the (2) Removal and storage. (i) The em-
PELs. ployer shall ensure that, at the end of
(iv) Emergencies. their work shift, employees remove
(2) Respirator program. The employer MDA-contaminated protective work
must implement a respiratory protec- clothing and equipment that is not
tion program in accordance with routinely removed throughout the day
§ 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except in change areas provided in accordance
(d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m), which with the provisions in paragraph (k) of
covers each employee required by this this section.
section to use a respirator. (ii) The employer shall ensure that,
(3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers during their work shift, employees re-
must: move all other MDA-contaminated pro-
(A) Select, and provide to employees, tective work clothing or equipment be-
the appropriate respirators specified in fore leaving a regulated area.
paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR (iii) The employer shall ensure that
1910.134. no employee takes MDA-contaminated
(B) Provide HEPA filters for powered work clothing or equipment out of the
and non-powered air-purifying res- decontamination areas, except those
pirators. employees authorized to do so for the
(C) For escape, provide employees purpose of laundering, maintenance, or
with one of the following respirator op- disposal.
tions: Any self-contained breathing ap- (iv) MDA-contaminated work cloth-
paratus with a full facepiece or hood ing or equipment shall be placed and
operated in the positive-pressure or stored and transported in sealed, im-
continuous-flow mode; or a full face- permeable bags, or other closed imper-
piece air-purifying respirator. meable containers.
(D) Provide a combination HEPA fil- (v) Containers of MDA-contaminated
ter and organic vapor canister or car- protective work clothing or equipment
tridge with air-purifying respirators which are to be taken out of decon-

when MDA is in liquid form or used as tamination areas or the workplace for
part of a process requiring heat. cleaning, maintenance, or disposal,
80
shall bear labels warning of the hazards (iii) Equipment area. The equipment
of MDA. area shall be supplied with imper-
(3) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The meable, labeled bags and containers for
employer shall provide the employee the containment and disposal of con-
with clean protective clothing and taminated protective clothing and
equipment. The employer shall ensure equipment.
that protective work clothing or equip- (2) Shower area. (i) Where feasible,
ment required by this paragraph is shower facilities shall be provided
cleaned, laundered, repaired, or re- which comply with 29 CFR 1910.141(d)(3)
placed at intervals appropriate to wherever the possibility of employee
maintain its effectiveness. exposure to airborne levels of MDA in
(ii) The employer shall prohibit the excess of the permissible exposure
removal of MDA from protective work limit exists.
clothing or equipment by blowing, (ii) Where dermal exposure to MDA
shaking, or any methods which allow occurs, the employer shall ensure that
MDA to re-enter the workplace. materials spilled or deposited on the
(iii) The employer shall ensure that skin are removed as soon as possible by
laundering of MDA-contaminated methods which do not facilitate the
clothing shall be done so as to prevent dermal absorption of MDA.
the release of MDA in the workplace. (3) Lunch Areas. (i) Whenever food or
(iv) Any employer who gives MDA- beverages are consumed at the work-
contaminated clothing to another per- site and employees are exposed to MDA
son for laundering shall inform such the employer shall provide clean lunch
person of the requirement to prevent areas were MDA levels are below the
the release of MDA. action level and where no dermal expo-
(v) The employer shall inform any sure to MDA can occur.
person who launders or cleans protec- (ii) The employer shall ensure that
tive clothing or equipment contami- employees wash their hands and faces
nated with MDA of the potentially with soap and water prior to eating,
harmful effects of exposure. drinking, smoking, or applying cos-
(4) Visual Examination. (i) The em- metics.
ployer shall ensure that employees’ (iii) The employer shall ensure that
work clothing is examined periodically employees do not enter lunch facilities
for rips or tears that may occur during with contaminated protective work
performance of work. clothing or equipment.
(ii) When rips or tears are detected, (l) Communication of hazards to em-
the protective equipment or clothing ployees—(1) Hazard communication. The
shall be repaired and replaced imme- employer shall include
diately. Methylenedianiline (MDA) in the pro-
(k) Hygiene facilities and practices—(1) gram established to comply with the
General. (i) The employer shall provide Hazard Communication Standard
decontamination areas for employees (HCS) (§ 1910.1200). The employer shall
required to work in regulated areas or ensure that each employee has access
required by paragraph (j)(1) of this sec- to labels on containers of MDA and
tion to wear protective clothing. Excep- safety data sheets, and is trained in ac-
tion: In lieu of the decontamination cordance with the provisions of HCS
area requirement specified in para- and paragraph (l)(3) of this section. The
graph (k)(1)(i) of this section, the em- employer shall ensure that at least the
ployer may permit employees engaged following hazards are addressed: Can-
in small scale, short duration oper- cer; liver effects; and skin sensitiza-
ations, to clean their protective cloth- tion.
ing or dispose of the protective cloth- (2) Signs and labels—(i) Signs. (A) The
ing before such employees leave the employer shall post and maintain leg-
area where the work was performed. ible signs demarcating regulated areas
(ii) Change areas. The employer shall and entrances or access-ways to regu-
ensure that change areas are equipped lated areas that bear the following leg-
with separate storage facilities for pro- end:

tective clothing and street clothing, in DANGER
accordance with 29 CFR 1910.141(e). MDA
81
MAY CAUSE CANCER pendices A and B of this section, and
CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE LIVER indicate to employees where a copy of
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND PRO- the standard is available;
TECTIVE CLOTHING MAY BE REQUIRED
IN THIS AREA
(B) Describe the medical surveillance
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY program required under paragraph (n)
of this section, and explain the infor-
(B) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers mation contained in appendix C of this
may use the following legend in lieu of section; and
that specified in paragraph (l)(2)(i)(A) (C) Describe the medical removal
of this section: provision required under paragraph (n)
DANGER of this section.
MDA (4) Access to training materials. (i) The
MAY CAUSE CANCER employer shall make readily available
LIVER TOXIN to all affected employees, without cost,
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
all written materials relating to the
RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTH-
ING MAY BE REQUIRED TO BE WORN IN employee training program, including
THIS AREA a copy of this regulation.
(ii) The employer shall provide to the
(ii) Labels. (A) The employer shall en- Assistant Secretary and the Director,
sure that labels or other appropriate upon request, all information and
forms of warning are provided for con- training materials relating to the em-
tainers of MDA within the workplace. ployee information and training pro-
The labels shall comply with the re- gram.
quirements of § 1910.1200(f) and shall in- (m) Housekeeping. (1) All surfaces
clude at least the following informa- shall be maintained as free as prac-
tion for pure MDA and mixtures con- ticable of visible accumulations of
taining MDA: MDA.
DANGER (2) The employer shall institute a
CONTAINS MDA program for detecting MDA leaks,
MAY CAUSE CANCER spills, and discharges, including reg-
CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE LIVER ular visual inspections of operations
(B) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers involving liquid or solid MDA.
may include the following information (3) All leaks shall be repaired and liq-
workplace labels in lieu of the labeling uid or dust spills cleaned up promptly.
requirements in paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(A) (4) Surfaces contaminated with MDA
of this section: may not be cleaned by the use of com-
(1) For Pure MDA: pressed air.
(5) Shoveling, dry sweeping, and
DANGER
other methods of dry clean-up of MDA
CONTAINS MDA
MAY CAUSE CANCER may be used where HEPA filtered
LIVER TOXIN vacuuming and/or wet cleaning are not
feasible or practical.
(2) For mixtures containing MDA: (6) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, con-
DANGER tainers, equipment, and clothing con-
CONTAINS MDA taminated with MDA shall be collected
CONTAINS MATERIALS WHICH MAY and disposed of in a manner to prevent
CAUSE CANCER the re-entry of MDA into the work-
LIVER TOXIN
place.
(3) Information and training. (i) The (n) Medical surveillance—(1) General.
employer shall provide employees with (i) The employer shall make available
information and training on MDA, in a medical surveillance program for em-
accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200(h), at ployees exposed to MDA under the fol-
the time of initial assignment and at lowing circumstances:
least annually thereafter. (A) Employees exposed at or above
(ii) In addition to the information re- the action level for 30 or more days per
quired under 29 CFR 1910.1200, the em- year;
ployer shall: (B) Employees who are subject to

(A) Provide an explanation of the dermal exposure to MDA for 15 or more
contents of this section, including ap- days per year;
82
(C) Employees who have been exposed intake, and the appearance of physical
in an emergency situation; signs relating to the liver, and the
(D) Employees whom the employer, skin;
based on results from compliance with (B) The appropriate tests and exami-
paragraph (f)(8) of this section, has rea- nations including liver function tests
son to believe are being dermally ex- and skin examinations; and
posed; and (C) Appropriate additional tests or
(E) Employees who show signs or examinations as deemed necessary by
symptoms of MDA exposure. the physician.
(ii) The employer shall ensure that (ii) If in the physician’s opinion the
all medical examinations and proce- results of liver function tests indicate
dures are performed by or under the su- an abnormality, the employee shall be
pervision of a licensed physician at a removed from further MDA exposure in
reasonable time and place, and pro- accordance with paragraph (n)(9) of
vided without cost to the employee. this section. Repeat liver function
(2) Initial examinations. (i) Within 150 tests shall be conducted on advice of
days of the effective date of this stand- the physician.
ard, or before the time of initial assign- (4) Emergency examinations. If the em-
ment, the employer shall provide each ployer determines that the employee
employee covered by paragraph (n)(1)(i) has been exposed to a potentially haz-
of this section with a medical examina- ardous amount of MDA in an emer-
tion including the following elements: gency situation under paragraph (e) of
(A) A detailed history which in- this section, the employer shall provide
cludes: medical examinations in accordance
(1) Past work exposure to MDA or with paragraphs (n)(3) (i) and (ii) of
any other toxic substances; this section. If the results of liver func-
(2) A history of drugs, alcohol, to- tion testing indicate an abnormality,
bacco, and medication routinely taken the employee shall be removed in ac-
(duration and quantity); and cordance with paragraph (n)(9) of this
(3) A history of dermatitis, chemical section. Repeat liver function tests
skin sensitization, or previous hepatic shall be conducted on the advice of the
disease. physician. If the results of the tests are
(B) A physical examination which in- normal, tests must be repeated two to
cludes all routine physical examina- three weeks from the initial testing. If
tion parameters, skin examination, and the results of the second set of tests
examination for signs of liver disease. are normal and on the advice of the
(C) Laboratory tests including: physician, no additional testing is re-
(1) Liver function tests and quired.
(2) Urinalysis. (5) Additional examinations. Where the
(D) Additional tests as necessary in employee develops signs and symptoms
the opinion of the physician. associated with exposure to MDA, the
(ii) No initial medical examination is employer shall provide the employee
required if adequate records show that with an additional medical examina-
the employee has been examined in action including liver function tests. Re-
cordance with the requirements of this peat liver function tests shall be con-
section within the previous six months ducted on the advice of the physician.
prior to the effective date of this stand- If the results of the tests are normal,
ard or prior to the date of initial as- tests must be repeated two to three
signment. weeks from the initial testing. If the
(3) Periodic examinations. (i) The em- results of the second set of tests are
ployer shall provide each employee normal and on the advice of the physi-
covered by this section with a medical cian, no additional testing is required.
examination at least annually fol- (6) Multiple physician review mecha-
lowing the initial examination. These nism. (i) If the employer selects the ini-
periodic examinations shall include at tial physician who conducts any med-
least the following elements: ical examination or consultation pro-
(A) A brief history regarding any new vided to an employee under this sec-
exposure to potential liver toxins, tion, and the employee has signs or
changes in drug, tobacco, and alcohol symptoms of occupational exposure to
83
MDA (which could include an abnormal recommendations of the second physi-

liver function test), and the employee cian, unless the employer and the em-
disagrees with the opinion of the exam- ployee reach a mutually acceptable
ining physician, and this opinion could agreement.
affect the employee’s job status, the (7) Information provided to the exam-
employee may designate an appro- ining physician. (i) The employer shall
priate and mutually acceptable second provide the following information to
physician: the examining physician:
(A) To review any findings, deter- (A) A copy of this regulation and its
minations or recommendations of the appendices;
initial physician; and (B) A description of the affected em-
(B) To conduct such examinations, ployee’s duties as they relate to the
consultations, and laboratory tests as employee’s potential exposure to MDA;
the second physician deems necessary (C) The employee’s current actual or
to facilitate this review. representative MDA exposure level;
(ii) The employer shall promptly no- (D) A description of any personal pro-
tify an employee of the right to seek a tective equipment used or to be used;
second medical opinion after each oc- and
casion that an initial physician con- (E) Information from previous em-
ducts a medical examination or con- ployment related medical examina-
sultation pursuant to this section. The tions of the affected employee.
employer may condition its participa- (ii) The employer shall provide the
tion in, and payment for, the multiple foregoing information to a second phy-
physician review mechanism upon the sician under this section upon request
employee doing the following within either by the second physician, or by
fifteen (15) days after receipt of the the employee.
foregoing notification, or receipt of the (8) Physician’s written opinion. (i) For
initial physician’s written opinion, each examination under this section,
whichever is later: the employer shall obtain, and provide
(A) The employee informing the em- the employee with a copy of, the exam-
ployer that he or she intends to seek a ining physician’s written opinion with-
second medical opinion, and in 15 days of its receipt. The written
(B) The employee initiating steps to opinion shall include the following:
make an appointment with a second (A) The occupationally pertinent re-
physician. sults of the medical examination and
(iii) If the findings, determinations, tests;
or recommendations of the second phy- (B) The physician’s opinion con-
sician differ from those of the initial cerning whether the employee has any
physician, then the employer and the detected medical conditions which
employee shall assure that efforts are would place the employee at increased
made for the two physicians to resolve risk of material impairment of health
any disagreement. from exposure to MDA;
(iv) If the two physicians have been (C) The physician’s recommended
unable to quickly resolve their dis- limitations upon the employee’s expo-
agreement, then the employer and the sure to MDA or upon the employee’s
employee through their respective phy- use of protective clothing or equipment
sicians shall designate a third physi- and respirators; and
cian: (D) A statement that the employee
(A) To review any findings, deter- has been informed by the physician of
minations, or recommendations of the the results of the medical examination
prior physicians; and and any medical conditions resulting
(B) To conduct such examinations, from MDA exposure which require fur-
consultations, laboratory tests, and ther explanation or treatment.
discussions with the prior physicians (ii) The written opinion obtained by
as the third physician deems necessary the employer shall not reveal specific
to resolve the disagreement of the findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc-
prior physicians. cupational exposures.

(v) The employer shall act consistent (9) Medical removal—(i) Temporary
with the findings, determinations, and medical removal of an employee—(A)
84
Temporary removal resulting from occupa- the employee no longer has a detected
tional exposure. The employee shall be medical condition which places the em-
removed from work environments in ployee at increased risk of material
which exposure to MDA is at or above impairment to health from exposure to
the action level or where dermal expo- MDA.
sure to MDA may occur, following an (B) For the purposes of this section,
initial examination (paragraph (n)(2) of the requirement that an employer re-
this section), periodic examinations turn an employee to his or her former
(paragraph (n)(3) of this section), an job status is not intended to expand
emergency situation (paragraph (n)(4) upon or restrict any rights an em-
of this section), or an additional exam- ployee has or would have had, absent
ination (paragraph (n)(5) of this sec- temporary medical removal, to a spe-
tion) in the following circumstances: cific job classification or position
(1) When the employee exhibits signs under the terms of a collective bar-
and/or symptoms indicative of acute gaining agreement.
exposure to MDA; or (iii) Removal of other employee special
(2) When the examining physician de- protective measure or limitations. The
termines that an employee’s abnormal employer shall remove any limitations
liver function tests are not associated placed on an employee or end any spe-
with MDA exposure but that the abnor- cial protective measures provided to an
malities may be exacerbated as a re- employee pursuant to a final medical
sult of occupational exposure to MDA. determination when a subsequent final
(B) Temporary removal due to a final medical determination indicates that
medical determination. (1) The employer the limitations or special protective
shall remove an employee from work measures are no longer necessary.
having an exposure to MDA at or above (iv) Employer options pending a final
the action level or where the potential medical determination. Where the physi-
for dermal exposure exists on each oc- cian review mechanism used pursuant
casion that a final medical determina- to the medical surveillance provisions
tion results in a medical finding, deter- of this section, has not yet resulted in
mination, or opinion that the employee a final medical determination with re-
has a detected medical condition which spect to an employee, the employer
places the employee at increased risk shall act as follows:
of material impairment to health from (A) Removal. The employer may re-
exposure to MDA. move the employee from exposure to
(2) For the purposes of this section, MDA, provide special protective meas-
the phrase ‘‘final medical determina- ures to the employee, or place limita-
tion’’ shall mean the outcome of the tions upon the employee, consistent
physician review mechanism used pur- with the medical findings, determina-
suant to the medical surveillance pro- tions, or recommendations of the phy-
visions of this section. sician who has reviewed the employee’s
(3) Where a final medical determina- health status.
tion results in any recommended spe- (B) Return. The employer may return
cial protective measures for an em- the employee to his or her former job
ployee, or limitations on an employee’s status, and end any special protective
exposure to MDA, the employer shall measures provided to the employee,
implement and act consistent with the consistent with the medical findings,
recommendation. determinations, or recommendations of
(ii) Return of the employee to former job any of the physicians who have re-
status. (A) The employer shall return viewed the employee’s health status,
an employee to his or her former job with two exceptions:
status: (1) If the initial removal, special pro-
(1) When the employee no longer tection, or limitation of the employee
shows signs or symptoms of exposure resulted from a final medical deter-
to MDA, or upon the advice of the phy- mination which differed from the find-
sician. ings, determinations, or recommenda-
(2) When a subsequent final medical tions of the initial physician; or

determination results in a medical (2) The employee has been on re-
finding, determination, or opinion that moval status for the preceding six
85
months as a result of exposure to MDA, with any employer made possible by

then the employer shall await a final virtue of the employee’s removal.
medical determination. (F) Employees who do not recover with-
(v) Medical removal protection bene- in the 6 months of removal. The em-
fits—(A) Provisions of medical removal ployer shall take the following meas-
protection benefits. The employer shall ures with respect to any employee re-
provide to an employee up to six (6) moved from exposure to MDA:
months of medical removal protection (1) The employer shall make avail-
benefits on each occasion that an em- able to the employee a medical exam-
ployee is removed from exposure to ination pursuant to this section to ob-
MDA or otherwise limited pursuant to tain a final medical determination
this section. with respect to the employee;
(B) Definition of medical removal pro- (2) The employer shall assure that
tection benefits. For the purposes of this the final medical determination ob-
section, the requirement that an em- tained indicates whether or not the
ployer provide medical removal protec- employee may be returned to his or her
tion benefits means that the employer former job status, and, if not, what
shall maintain the earnings, seniority, steps should be taken to protect the
and other employment rights and bene- employee’s health;
fits of an employee as though the em- (3) Where the final medical deter-
ployee had not been removed from nor- mination has not yet been obtained, or
mal exposure to MDA or otherwise lim- once obtained indicates that the em-
ited. ployee may not yet be returned to his
(C) Follow-up medical surveillance dur- or her former job status, the employer
ing the period of employee removal or lim- shall continue to provide medical re-
itations. During the period of time that moval protection benefits to the em-
an employee is removed from normal ployee until either the employee is re-
exposure to MDA or otherwise limited, turned to former job status, or a final
the employer may condition the provi- medical determination is made that
sion of medical removal protection the employee is incapable of ever safe-
benefits upon the employee’s participa- ly returning to his or her former job
tion in follow-up medical surveillance status; and
made available pursuant to this sec- (4) Where the employer acts pursuant
tion. to a final medical determination which
(D) Workers’ compensation claims. If a permits the return of the employee to
removed employee files a claim for his or her former job status despite
workers’ compensation payments for a what would otherwise be an unaccept-
MDA-related disability, then the em- able liver function test, later questions
ployer shall continue to provide med- concerning removing the employee
ical removal protection benefits pend- again shall be decided by a final med-
ing disposition of the claim. To the ex- ical determination. The employer need
tent that an award is made to the em- not automatically remove such an em-
ployee for earnings lost during the pe- ployee pursuant to the MDA removal
riod of removal, the employer’s med- criteria provided by this section.
ical removal protection obligation (vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of
shall be reduced by such amount. The an employee. Where an employer, al-
employer shall receive no credit for though not required by this section to
workers’ compensation payments re- do so, removes an employee from expo-
ceived by the employee for treatment- sure to MDA or otherwise places limi-
related expenses. tations on an employee due to the ef-
(E) Other credits. The employer’s obli- fects of MDA exposure on the employ-
gation to provide medical removal pro- ee’s medical condition, the employer
tection benefits to a removed employee shall provide medical removal protec-
shall be reduced to the extent that the tion benefits to the employee equal to
employee receives compensation for that required by paragraph (n)(9)(v) of
earnings lost during the period of re- this section.
moval either from a publicly or em- (o) Recordkeeping—(1) Objective data

ployer-funded compensation program, for exempted operations. (i) Where the
or receives income from employment employer has relied on objective data
86
that demonstrate that products made were obtained are the same as those on
from or containing MDA are not capa- the job for which initial monitoring
ble of releasing MDA or do not present will not be performed;
a dermal exposure problem under the (D) Environmental conditions pre-
expected conditions of processing, use, vailing when the historical monitoring
or handling to exempt such operations data were obtained are the same as
from the initial monitoring require- those on the job for which initial moni-
ments under paragraph (f)(2) of this toring will not be performed; and
section, the employer shall establish (E) Other data relevant to the oper-
and maintain an accurate record of ob- ations, materials, processing, or em-
jective data reasonably relied upon in ployee exposures covered by the excep-
support of the exemption. tion.
(ii) The record shall include at least (iii) The employer shall maintain
the following information: this record for the duration of the em-
(A) The product qualifying for ex- ployer’s reliance upon such historical
emption; monitoring data.
(B) The source of the objective data; (3) The employer may utilize the
(C) The testing protocol, results of services of competent organizations
testing, and/or analysis of the material such as industry trade associations and
for the release of MDA; employee associations to maintain the
(D) A description of the operation ex- records required by this section.
empted and how the data support the (4) Exposure measurements. (i) The em-
exemption; and ployer shall keep an accurate record of
(E) Other data relevant to the oper- all measurements taken to monitor
ations, materials, processing, or em- employee exposure to MDA.
ployee exposures covered by the ex- (ii) This record shall include at least
emption. the following information:
(iii) The employer shall maintain (A) The date of measurement;
this record for the duration of the em- (B) The operation involving exposure
ployer’s reliance upon such objective to MDA;
data. (C) Sampling and analytical methods
(2) Historical monitoring data. (i) used and evidence of their accuracy;
Where the employer has relied on his- (D) Number, duration, and results of
torical monitoring data that dem- samples taken;
onstrate that exposures on a particular (E) Type of protective devices worn,
job will be below the action level to ex- if any; and
empt such operations from the initial (F) Name, social security number,
monitoring requirements under para- and exposure of the employees whose
graph (f)(2) of this section, the em- exposures are represented.
ployer shall establish and maintain an (iii) The employer shall maintain
accurate record of historical moni- this record for at least thirty (30)
toring data reasonably relied upon in years, in accordance with 29 CFR
support of the exception. 1910.33.
(ii) The record shall include informa- (5) Medical surveillance. (i) The em-
tion that reflect the following condi- ployer shall establish and maintain an
tions: accurate record for each employee sub-
(A) The data upon which judgments ject to medical surveillance by para-
are based are scientifically sound and graph (n) of this section, in accordance
were collected using methods that are with 29 CFR 1910.33.
sufficiently accurate and precise; (ii) The record shall include at least
(B) The processes and work practices the following information:
that were in use when the historical (A) The name and social security
monitoring data were obtained are es- number of the employee;
sentially the same as those to be used (B) A copy of the employee’s medical
during the job for which initial moni- examination results, including the
toring will not be performed; medical history, questionnaire re-
(C) The characteristics of the MDA- sponses, results of any tests, and physi-
containing material being handled cian’s recommendations.
when the historical monitoring data (C) Physician’s written opinions;
87
(D) Any employee medical com- MDA conducted pursuant to paragraph

plaints related to exposure to MDA; (f) of this section.
and (2) Observation procedures. When ob-
(E) A copy of the information pro- servation of the measuring or moni-
vided to the physician as required by toring of employee exposure to MDA
paragraph (n) of this section. requires entry into areas where the use
(iii) The employer shall ensure that of protective clothing and equipment
this record is maintained for the dura- or respirators is required, the employer
tion of employment plus thirty (30) shall provide the observer with per-
years, in accordance with 29 CFR sonal protective clothing and equip-
1910.33. ment or respirators required to be worn
(iv) A copy of the employee’s medical by employees working in the area, as-
removal and return to work status. sure the use of such clothing and equip-
(6) Training records. The employer ment or respirators, and require the
shall maintain all employee training observer to comply with all other ap-
records for one (1) year beyond the last plicable safety and health procedures.
date of employment. (q) Appendices. The information con-
(7) Availability. (i) The employer, tained in appendices A, B, C, and D of
upon written request, shall make all this section is not intended, by itself,
records required to be maintained by to create any additional obligations
this section available to the Assistant not otherwise imposed by this standard
Secretary and the Director for exam- nor detract from any existing obliga-
ination and copying. tion.
(ii) The employer, upon request, shall
make any exposure records required by APPENDIX A TO § 1926.60—SUBSTANCE DATA
SHEET, FOR 4–4′ METHYLENEDIANILINE
paragraphs (f) and (n) of this section
available for examination and copying NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
to affected employees, former employ- struction work under this appendix A are
ees, designated representatives, and identical to those set forth in appendix A to
the Assistant Secretary, in accordance § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
with 29 CFR 1910.33(a)–(e) and (g)–(i). APPENDIX B TO § 1926.60—SUBSTANCE
(iii) The employer, upon request, TECHNICAL GUIDELINES, MDA
shall make employee medical records
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
required by paragraphs (n) and (o) of
struction work under this appendix B are
this section available for examination identical to those set forth in appendix B to
and copying to the subject employee, § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
anyone having the specific written con-
sent of the subject employee, and the APPENDIX C TO § 1926.60—MEDICAL
Assistant Secretary, in accordance SURVEILLANCE GUIDELINES FOR MDA
with 29 CFR 1910.33. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
(8) Transfer of records. The employer struction work under this appendix C are
shall comply with the requirements identical to those set forth in appendix C to
concerning transfer of records set forth § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h).
APPENDIX D TO § 1926.60—SAMPLING AND ANA-
(ii) Whenever the employer ceases to LYTICAL METHODS FOR MDA MONITORING
do business and there is no successor AND MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES
employer to receive and retain the
records for the prescribed period, the NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
struction work under this appendix D are
employer shall notify the Director at
identical to those set forth in appendix D to
least 90 days prior to disposal and, § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
upon request, transmit them to the Di-
rector. [57 FR 35681, Aug. 10, 1992, as amended at 57
FR 49649, Nov. 3, 1992; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
(p) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em-
1996; 61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996; 63 FR 1296,
ployee observation. The employer shall Jan. 8, 1998; 69 FR 70373, Dec. 6, 2004; 70 FR
provide affected employees, or their 1143, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71
designated representatives, an oppor- FR 50191, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75588, Dec. 12,
tunity to observe the measuring or 2008; 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17889,
monitoring of employee exposure to Mar. 26, 2012]
88
§ 1926.61 Retention of DOT markings, Director means the Director, National

placards and labels. Institute for Occupational Safety and
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- Health (NIOSH), U.S. Department of
struction work under this section are iden- Health and Human Services, or des-
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1201 of this ignee.
chapter. Lead means metallic lead, all inor-
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] ganic lead compounds, and organic lead
soaps. Excluded from this definition
§ 1926.62 Lead. are all other organic lead compounds.
(a) Scope. This section applies to all This section means this standard.
construction work where an employee (c) Permissible exposure limit. (1) The
may be occupationally exposed to lead. employer shall assure that no em-
All construction work excluded from ployee is exposed to lead at concentra-
coverage in the general industry stand- tions greater than fifty micrograms per
ard for lead by 29 CFR 1910.1025(a)(2) is cubic meter of air (50 μg/m3) averaged
covered by this standard. Construction over an 8-hour period.
work is defined as work for construc- (2) If an employee is exposed to lead
tion, alteration and/or repair, including for more than 8 hours in any work day
painting and decorating. It includes the employees’ allowable exposure, as a
but is not limited to the following: time weighted average (TWA) for that
(1) Demolition or salvage of struc- day, shall be reduced according to the
tures where lead or materials con- following formula:
taining lead are present; Allowable employee exposure (in μg/m3)
(2) Removal or encapsulation of ma- = 400 divided by hours worked in
terials containing lead; the day.
(3) New construction, alteration, re-
pair, or renovation of structures, sub- (3) When respirators are used to limit
strates, or portions thereof, that con- employee exposure as required under
tain lead, or materials containing lead; paragraph (c) of this section and all the
(4) Installation of products con- requirements of paragraphs (e)(1) and
taining lead; (f) of this section have been met, em-
(5) Lead contamination/emergency ployee exposure may be considered to
cleanup; be at the level provided by the protec-
(6) Transportation, disposal, storage, tion factor of the respirator for those
or containment of lead or materials periods the respirator is worn. Those
containing lead on the site or location periods may be averaged with exposure
at which construction activities are levels during periods when respirators
performed, and are not worn to determine the employ-
(7) Maintenance operations associ- ee’s daily TWA exposure.
ated with the construction activities (d) Exposure assessment—(1) General.
described in this paragraph. (i) Each employer who has a workplace
(b) Definitions. or operation covered by this standard
Action level means employee expo- shall initially determine if any em-
sure, without regard to the use of res- ployee may be exposed to lead at or
pirators, to an airborne concentration above the action level.
of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic (ii) For the purposes of paragraph (d)
meter of air (30 μg/m3) calculated as an of this section, employee exposure is
8-hour time-weighted average (TWA). that exposure which would occur if the
Assistant Secretary means the Assist- employee were not using a respirator.
ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- (iii) With the exception of moni-
tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- toring under paragraph (d)(3), where
ment of Labor, or designee. monitoring is required under this sec-
Competent person means one who is tion, the employer shall collect per-
capable of identifying existing and pre- sonal samples representative of a full
dictable lead hazards in the sur- shift including at least one sample for
roundings or working conditions and each job classification in each work

who has authorization to take prompt area either for each shift or for the
corrective measures to eliminate them. shift with the highest exposure level.
89
(iv) Full shift personal samples shall posed to levels of lead below 500 μg/m3,
be representative of the monitored em- the employer may provide the exposed
ployee’s regular, daily exposure to employee with the appropriate res-
lead. pirator prescribed for such use at such
(2) Protection of employees during as- lower exposures, in accordance with
sessment of exposure. (i) With respect to Table 1 of this section. The tasks cov-
the lead related tasks listed in para- ered by this requirement are:
graph (d)(2)(i) of this section, where (A) Using lead containing mortar;
lead is present, until the employer per- lead burning
forms an employee exposure assess- (B) Where lead containing coatings or
ment as required in paragraph (d) of paint are present: rivet busting; power
this section and documents that the tool cleaning without dust collection
employee performing any of the listed systems; cleanup activities where dry
tasks is not exposed above the PEL, expendable abrasives are used; and ab-
the employer shall treat the employee rasive blasting enclosure movement
as if the employee were exposed above and removal.
the PEL, and not in excess of ten (10) (iv) With respect to the tasks listed
times the PEL, and shall implement in paragraph (d)(2)(iv) of this section,
employee protective measures pre- where lead is present, until the em-
scribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this ployer performs an employee exposure
section. The tasks covered by this re-
assessment as required in paragraph (d)
quirement are:
of this section and documents that the
(A) Where lead containing coatings
employee performing any of the listed
or paint are present: Manual demoli-
tasks is not exposed to lead in excess of
tion of structures (e.g, dry wall), man-
2,500 μg/m3 (50 × PEL), the employer
ual scraping, manual sanding, heat gun
shall treat the employee as if the em-
applications, and power tool cleaning
ployee were exposed to lead in excess of
with dust collection systems;
2,500 μg/m3 and shall implement em-
(B) Spray painting with lead paint.
ployee protective measures as pre-
(ii) In addition, with regard to tasks
scribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this
not listed in paragraph (d)(2)(i), where
section. Where the employer does es-
the employee has any reason to believe
tablish that the employee is exposed to
that an employee performing the task
levels of lead below 2,500 μg/m3, the em-
may be exposed to lead in excess of the
ployer may provide the exposed em-
PEL, until the employer performs an
ployee with the appropriate respirator
employee exposure assessment as re-
prescribed for use at such lower expo-
quired by paragraph (d) of this section
sures, in accordance with Table I of
and documents that the employee’s
this section. Interim protection as de-
lead exposure is not above the PEL the
scribed in this paragaraph is required
employer shall treat the employee as if
where lead containing coatings or
the employee were exposed above the
paint are present on structures when
PEL and shall implememt employee
performing:
protective measures as prescribed in
(A) Abrasive blasting,
paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section.
(iii) With respect to the tasks listed (B) Welding,
in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this section, (C) Cutting, and
where lead is present, until the em- (D) Torch burning.
ployer performs an employee exposure (v) Until the employer performs an
assessment as required in paragraph (d) employee exposure assessment as re-
of this section, and documents that the quired under paragraph (d) of this sec-
employee performing any of the listed tion and determines actual employee
tasks is not exposed in excess of 500 μg/ exposure, the employer shall provide to
m3, the employer shall treat the em- employees performing the tasks de-
ployee as if the employee were exposed scribed in paragraphs (d)(2)(i), (d)(2)(ii),
to lead in excess of 500 μg/m3 and shall (d)(2)(iii), and (d)(2)(iv) of this section
implement employee protective meas- with interim protection as follows:
ures as prescribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) (A) Appropriate respiratory protec-

of this section. Where the employer tion in accordance with paragraph (f)
does establish that the employee is ex- of this section.
90
(B) Appropriate personal protective confidence levels of paragraph (d)(10) of

clothing and equipment in accordance this section.
with paragraph (g) of this section. (iv) Where the employer has objec-
(C) Change areas in accordance with tive data, demonstrating that a par-
paragraph (i)(2) of this section. ticular product or material containing
(D) Hand washing facilities in accord- lead or a specific process, operation or
ance with paragraph (i)(5) of this sec- activity involving lead cannot result in
tion. employee exposure to lead at or above
(E) Biological monitoring in accord- the action level during processing, use,
ance with paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this sec- or handling, the employer may rely
tion, to consist of blood sampling and upon such data instead of imple-
analysis for lead and zinc menting initial monitoring.
protoporphyrin levels, and (A) The employer shall establish and
(F) Training as required under para- maintain an accurate record docu-
graph (l)(1)(i) of this section regarding menting the nature and relevancy of
29 CFR 1926.59, Hazard Communication; objective data as specified in paragraph
training as required under paragraph (n)(4) of this section, where used in as-
(1)(2)(iii) of this section, regarding use sessing employee exposure in lieu of
of respirators; and training in accord- exposure monitoring.
ance with 29 CFR 1926.21, Safety train- (B) Objective data, as described in
ing and education. paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of this section, is
(3) Basis of initial determination. (i) not permitted to be used for exposure
Except as provided under paragraphs assessment in connection with para-
(d)(3)(iii) and (d)(3)(iv) of this section graph (d)(2) of this section.
the employer shall monitor employee (4) Positive initial determination and
exposures and shall base initial deter- initial monitoring. (i) Where a deter-
minations on the employee exposure mination conducted under paragraphs
monitoring results and any of the fol- (d) (1), (2) and (3) of this section shows
lowing, relevant considerations: the possibility of any employee expo-
(A) Any information, observations, or sure at or above the action level the
calculations which would indicate em- employer shall conduct monitoring
ployee exposure to lead; which is representative of the exposure
(B) Any previous measurements of for each employee in the workplace
airborne lead; and who is exposed to lead.
(C) Any employee complaints of (ii) Where the employer has pre-
symptoms which may be attributable viously monitored for lead exposure,
to exposure to lead. and the data were obtained within the
(ii) Monitoring for the initial deter- past 12 months during work operations
mination where performed may be lim- conducted under workplace conditions
ited to a representative sample of the closely resembling the processes, type
exposed employees who the employer of material, control methods, work
reasonably believes are exposed to the practices, and environmental condi-
greatest airborne concentrations of tions used and prevailing in the em-
lead in the workplace. ployer’s current operations, the em-
(iii) Where the employer has pre- ployer may rely on such earlier moni-
viously monitored for lead exposures, toring results to satisfy the require-
and the data were obtained within the ments of paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this sec-
past 12 months during work operations tion if the sampling and analytical
conducted under workplace conditions methods meet the accuracy and con-
closely resembling the processes, type fidence levels of paragraph (d)(10) of
of material, control methods, work this section.
practices, and environmental condi- (5) Negative initial determination.
tions used and prevailing in the em- Where a determination, conducted
ployer’s current operations, the em- under paragraphs (d) (1), (2), and (3) of
ployer may rely on such earlier moni- this section is made that no employee
toring results to satisfy the require- is exposed to airborne concentrations
ments of paragraphs (d)(3)(i) and (d)(6) of lead at or above the action level the
of this section if the sampling and ana- employer shall make a written record
lytical methods meet the accuracy and of such determination. The record shall
91
include at least the information speci- level being exposed above the PEL, the
fied in paragraph (d)(3)(i) of this sec- employer shall conduct additional
tion and shall also include the date of monitoring in accordance with this
determination, location within the paragraph.
worksite, and the name and social se- (8) Employee notification. (i) The em-
curity number of each employee mon- ployer must, as soon as possible but no
itored. later than 5 working days after the re-
(6) Frequency. (i) If the initial deter- ceipt of the results of any monitoring
mination reveals employee exposure to performed under this section, notify
be below the action level further expo- each affected employee of these results
sure determination need not be re- either individually in writing or by
peated except as otherwise provided in posting the results in an appropriate
paragraph (d)(7) of this section. location that is accessible to employ-
(ii) If the initial determination or ees.
subsequent determination reveals em- (ii) Whenever the results indicate
ployee exposure to be at or above the that the representative employee expo-
action level but at or below the PEL sure, without regard to respirators, is
the employer shall perform monitoring at or above the PEL the employer shall
in accordance with this paragraph at include in the written notice a state-
least every 6 months. The employer ment that the employees exposure was
shall continue monitoring at the re- at or above that level and a description
quired frequency until at least two of the corrective action taken or to be
consecutive measurements, taken at taken to reduce exposure to below that
least 7 days apart, are below the action level.
level at which time the employer may
(9) Accuracy of measurement. The em-
discontinue monitoring for that em-
ployer shall use a method of moni-
ployee except as otherwise provided in
toring and analysis which has an accu-
paragraph (d)(7) of this section.
racy (to a confidence level of 95%) of
(iii) If the initial determination re-
not less than plus or minus 25 percent
veals that employee exposure is above
for airborne concentrations of lead
the PEL the employer shall perform
monitoring quarterly. The employer equal to or greater than 30 μg/m3.
shall continue monitoring at the re- (e) Methods of compliance—(1) Engi-
quired frequency until at least two neering and work practice controls. The
consecutive measurements, taken at employer shall implement engineering
least 7 days apart, are at or below the and work practice controls, including
PEL but at or above the action level at administrative controls, to reduce and
which time the employer shall repeat maintain employee exposure to lead to
monitoring for that employee at the or below the permissible exposure limit
frequency specified in paragraph to the extent that such controls are
(d)(6)(ii) of this section, except as oth- feasible. Wherever all feasible engi-
erwise provided in paragraph (d)(7) of neering and work practices controls
this section. The employer shall con- that can be instituted are not suffi-
tinue monitoring at the required fre- cient to reduce employee exposure to
quency until at least two consecutive or below the permissible exposure limit
measurements, taken at least 7 days prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec-
apart, are below the action level at tion, the employer shall nonetheless
which time the employer may dis- use them to reduce employee exposure
continue monitoring for that employee to the lowest feasible level and shall
except as otherwise provided in para- supplement them by the use of res-
graph (d)(7) of this section. piratory protection that complies with
(7) Additional exposure assessments. the requirements of paragraph (f) of
Whenever there has been a change of this section.
equipment, process, control, personnel (2) Compliance program. (i) Prior to
or a new task has been initiated that commencement of the job each em-
may result in additional employees ployer shall establish and implement a
being exposed to lead at or above the written compliance program to achieve

action level or may result in employees compliance with paragraph (c) of this
already exposed at or above the action section.
92
(ii) Written plans for these compli- (3) Mechanical ventilation. When ven-
ance programs shall include at least tilation is used to control lead expo-
the following: sure, the employer shall evaluate the
(A) A description of each activity in mechanical performance of the system
which lead is emitted; e.g. equipment in controlling exposure as necessary to
used, material involved, controls in maintain its effectiveness.
place, crew size, employee job respon- (4) Administrative controls. If adminis-
sibilities, operating procedures and trative controls are used as a means of
maintenance practices; reducing employees TWA exposure to
(B) A description of the specific lead, the employer shall establish and
means that will be employed to achieve implement a job rotation schedule
compliance and, where engineering which includes:
controls are required engineering plans (i) Name or identification number of
and studies used to determine methods each affected employee;
selected for controlling exposure to (ii) Duration and exposure levels at
lead; each job or work station where each af-
(C) A report of the technology consid- fected employee is located; and
ered in meeting the PEL; (iii) Any other information which
(D) Air monitoring data which docu- may be useful in assessing the reli-
ments the source of lead emissions; ability of administrative controls to
(E) A detailed schedule for implemen- reduce exposure to lead.
tation of the program, including docu- (5) The employer shall ensure that, to
mentation such as copies of purchase the extent relevant, employees follow
orders for equipment, construction good work practices such as described
contracts, etc.; in appendix B of this section.
(F) A work practice program which (f) Respiratory protection—(1) General.
includes items required under para- For employees who use respirators re-
graphs (g), (h) and (i) of this section quired by this section, the employer
and incorporates other relevant work must provide each employee an appro-
practices such as those specified in priate respirator that complies with
paragraph (e)(5) of this section; the requirements of this paragraph.
(G) An administrative control sched- Respirators must be used during:
ule required by paragraph (e)(4) of this (i) Periods when an employee’s expo-
section, if applicable; sure to lead exceeds the PEL.
(H) A description of arrangements (ii) Work operations for which engi-
made among contractors on multi-con- neering and work-practice controls are
tractor sites with respect to informing not sufficient to reduce employee expo-
affected employees of potential exposures to or below the PEL.
sure to lead and with respect to respon- (iii) Periods when an employee re-
sibility for compliance with this sec- quests a respirator.
tion as set-forth in § 1926.16. (iv) Periods when respirators are re-
(I) Other relevant information. quired to provide interim protection of
(iii) The compliance program shall employees while they perform the op-
provide for frequent and regular inspec- erations specified in paragraph (d)(2) of
tions of job sites, materials, and equip- this section.
ment to be made by a competent per- (2) Respirator program. (i) The em-
son. ployer must implement a respiratory
(iv) Written programs shall be sub- protection program in accordance with
mitted upon request to any affected § 1910.134(b) through (d) (except
employee or authorized employee rep- (d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m), which
resentatives, to the Assistant Sec- covers each employee required by this
retary and the Director, and shall be section to use a respirator.
available at the worksite for examina- (ii) If an employee has breathing dif-
tion and copying by the Assistant Sec- ficulty during fit testing or respirator
retary and the Director. use, the employer must provide the em-
(v) Written programs must be revised ployee with a medical examination in

and updated at least annually to re- accordance with paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B)
flect the current status of the program. of this section to determine whether or
93
not the employee can use a respirator required by paragraph (g)(1) of this sec-
while performing the required duty. tion.
(3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers (iii) The employer shall repair or re-
must: place required protective clothing and
(A) Select, and provide to employees, equipment as needed to maintain their
the appropriate respirators specified in effectiveness.
paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR (iv) The employer shall assure that
1910.134. all protective clothing is removed at
(B) Provide employees with a full the completion of a work shift only in
facepiece respirator instead of a half change areas provided for that purpose
mask respirator for protection against as prescribed in paragraph (i)(2) of this
lead aerosols that may cause eye or section.
skin irritation at the use concentra- (v) The employer shall assure that
tions. contaminated protective clothing
(C) Provide HEPA filters for powered which is to be cleaned, laundered, or
and non-powered air-purifying res- disposed of, is placed in a closed con-
pirators. tainer in the change area which pre-
(ii) The employer must provide a vents dispersion of lead outside the
powered air-purifying respirator when container.
an employee chooses to use such a res- (vi) The employer shall inform in
pirator and it will provide adequate writing any person who cleans or laun-
protection to the employee. ders protective clothing or equipment
(g) Protective work clothing and equip- of the potentially harmful effects of ex-
ment—(1) Provision and use. Where an posure to lead.
employee is exposed to lead above the (vii)(A) The employer shall ensure
PEL without regard to the use of res- that the containers of contaminated
pirators, where employees are exposed protective clothing and equipment re-
to lead compounds which may cause quired by paragraph (g)(2)(v) of this
skin or eye irritation (e.g. lead arse- section are labeled as follows:
nate, lead azide), and as interim pro-
tection for employees performing tasks DANGER: CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT
as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this CONTAMINATED WITH LEAD. MAY
section, the employer shall provide at DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UNBORN
no cost to the employee and assure CHILD. CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CEN-
TRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM. DO NOT EAT,
that the employee uses appropriate
DRINK OR SMOKE WHEN HANDLING. DO
protective work clothing and equip- NOT REMOVE DUST BY BLOWING OR
ment that prevents contamination of SHAKING. DISPOSE OF LEAD CONTAMI-
the employee and the employee’s gar- NATED WASH WATER IN ACCORDANCE
ments such as, but not limited to: WITH APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, OR
(i) Coveralls or similar full-body FEDERAL REGULATIONS.
work clothing;
(B) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers
(ii) Gloves, hats, and shoes or dispos- may include the following information
able shoe coverlets; and on bags or containers of contaminated
(iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or protective clothing and equipment re-
other appropriate protective equip- quired by paragraph (g)(2)(v) in lieu of
ment which complies with § 1910.133 of the labeling requirements in paragraph
this chapter. (g)(2)(vii)(A) of this section:
(2) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The
employer shall provide the protective Caution: Clothing contaminated with lead.
clothing required in paragraph (g)(1) of Do not remove dust by blowing or shaking.
this section in a clean and dry condi- Dispose of lead contaminated wash water in
accordance with applicable local, state, or
tion at least weekly, and daily to em-
federal regulations.
ployees whose exposure levels without
regard to a respirator are over 200 μg/ (viii) The employer shall prohibit the
m3 of lead as an 8-hour TWA. removal of lead from protective cloth-
(ii) The employer shall provide for ing or equipment by blowing, shaking,
the cleaning, laundering, and disposal or any other means which disperses
of protective clothing and equipment lead into the air.
94
(h) Housekeeping—(1) All surfaces employees shower at the end of the

shall be maintained as free as prac- work shift and shall provide an ade-
ticable of accumulations of lead. quate supply of cleansing agents and
(2) Clean-up of floors and other sur- towels for use by affected employees.
faces where lead accumulates shall (4) Eating facilities. (i) The employer
wherever possible, be cleaned by shall provide lunchroom facilities or
vacuuming or other methods that min- eating areas for employees whose air-
imize the likelihood of lead becoming borne exposure to lead is above the
airborne. PEL, without regard to the use of res-
(3) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, pirators.
and brushing may be used only where (ii) The employer shall assure that
vacuuming or other equally effective lunchroom facilities or eating areas
methods have been tried and found not are as free as practicable from lead
to be effective. contamination and are readily acces-
(4) Where vacuuming methods are se- sible to employees.
lected, the vacuums shall be equipped (iii) The employer shall assure that
with HEPA filters and used and employees whose airborne exposure to
emptied in a manner which minimizes lead is above the PEL, without regard
the reentry of lead into the workplace. to the use of a respirator, wash their
(5) Compressed air shall not be used hands and face prior to eating, drink-
to remove lead from any surface unless ing, smoking or applying cosmetics.
the compressed air is used in conjunc- (iv) The employer shall assure that
tion with a ventilation system de- employees do not enter lunchroom fa-
signed to capture the airborne dust cre- cilities or eating areas with protective
ated by the compressed air. work clothing or equipment unless sur-
(i) Hygiene facilities and practices. (1) face lead dust has been removed by
The employer shall assure that in areas vacuuming, downdraft booth, or other
where employees are exposed to lead cleaning method that limits dispersion
above the PEL without regard to the of lead dust.
use of respirators, food or beverage is (5) Hand washing facilities. (i) The em-
not present or consumed, tobacco prod- ployer shall provide adequate
ucts are not present or used, and cos- handwashing facilities for use by em-
metics are not applied. ployees exposed to lead in accordance
(2) Change areas. (i) The employer with 29 CFR 1926.51(f).
shall provide clean change areas for (ii) Where showers are not provided
employees whose airborne exposure to the employer shall assure that employ-
lead is above the PEL, and as interim ees wash their hands and face at the
protection for employees performing end of the work-shift.
tasks as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of (j) Medical surveillance—(1) General. (i)
this section, without regard to the use The employer shall make available ini-
of respirators. tial medical surveillance to employees
(ii) The employer shall assure that occupationally exposed on any day to
change areas are equipped with sepa- lead at or above the action level. Ini-
rate storage facilities for protective tial medical surveillance consists of bi-
work clothing and equipment and for ological monitoring in the form of
street clothes which prevent cross-con- blood sampling and analysis for lead
tamination. and zinc protoporphyrin levels.
(iii) The employer shall assure that (ii) The employer shall institute a
employees do not leave the workplace medical surveillance program in ac-
wearing any protective clothing or cordance with paragraphs (j)(2) and
equipment that is required to be worn (j)(3) of this section for all employees
during the work shift. who are or may be exposed by the em-
(3) Showers. (i) The employer shall ployer at or above the action level for
provide shower facilities, where fea- more than 30 days in any consecutive
sible, for use by employees whose air- 12 months;
borne exposure to lead is above the (iii) The employer shall assure that
PEL. all medical examinations and proce-

(ii) The employer shall assure, where dures are performed by or under the su-
shower facilities are available, that pervision of a licensed physician.
95
(iv) The employer shall make avail- (B) The employer shall notify each
able the required medical surveillance employee whose blood lead level is at
including multiple physician review or above 40 μg/dl that the standard re-
under paragraph (j)(3)(iii) without cost quires temporary medical removal
to employees and at a reasonable time with Medical Removal Protection ben-
and place. efits when an employee’s blood lead
(2) Biological monitoring—(i) Blood lead level is at or above the numerical cri-
and ZPP level sampling and analysis. terion for medical removal under para-
The employer shall make available bio- graph (k)(1)(i) of this section.
logical monitoring in the form of blood (3) Medical examinations and consulta-
sampling and analysis for lead and zinc tions—(i) Frequency. The employer shall
protoporphyrin levels to each employee make available medical examinations
covered under paragraphs (j)(1)(i) and and consultations to each employee
(ii) of this section on the following covered under paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of
schedule: this section on the following schedule:
(A) For each employee covered under (A) At least annually for each em-
paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of this section, at ployee for whom a blood sampling test
least every 2 months for the first 6 conducted at any time during the pre-
months and every 6 months thereafter; ceding 12 months indicated a blood lead
(B) For each employee covered under level at or above 40 μg/dl;
paragraphs (j)(1) (i) or (ii) of this sec- (B) As soon as possible, upon notifi-
tion whose last blood sampling and cation by an employee either that the
analysis indicated a blood lead level at employee has developed signs or symp-
or above 40 μg/dl, at least every two toms commonly associated with lead
months. This frequency shall continue intoxication, that the employee desires
until two consecutive blood samples medical advice concerning the effects
and analyses indicate a blood lead level of current or past exposure to lead on
below 40 μg/dl; and the employee’s ability to procreate a
(C) For each employee who is re- healthy child, that the employee is
moved from exposure to lead due to an pregnant, or that the employee has
elevated blood lead level at least demonstrated difficulty in breathing
monthly during the removal period. during a respirator fitting test or dur-
(ii) Follow-up blood sampling tests. ing use; and
Whenever the results of a blood lead (C) As medically appropriate for each
level test indicate that an employee’s employee either removed from expo-
blood lead level is at or above the nu- sure to lead due to a risk of sustaining
merical criterion for medical removal material impairment to health, or oth-
under paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this sec- erwise limited pursuant to a final med-
tion, the employer shall provide a sec- ical determination.
ond (follow-up) blood sampling test (ii) Content. The content of medical
within two weeks after the employer examinations made available pursuant
receives the results of the first blood to paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B)–(C) of this sec-
sampling test. tion shall be determined by an exam-
(iii) Accuracy of blood lead level sam- ining physician and, if requested by an
pling and analysis. Blood lead level employee, shall include pregnancy
sampling and analysis provided pursu- testing or laboratory evaluation of
ant to this section shall have an accu- male fertility. Medical examinations
racy (to a confidence level of 95 per- made available pursuant to paragraph
cent) within plus or minus 15 percent (j)(3)(i)(A) of this section shall include
or 6 μg/dl, whichever is greater, and the following elements:
shall be conducted by a laboratory ap- (A) A detailed work history and a
proved by OSHA. medical history, with particular atten-
(iv) Employee notification. (A) Within tion to past lead exposure (occupa-
five working days after the receipt of tional and non-occupational), personal
biological monitoring results, the em- habits (smoking, hygiene), and past
ployer shall notify each employee in gastrointestinal, hematologic, renal,

writing of his or her blood lead level; cardiovascular, reproductive and neu-
and rological problems;
96
(B) A thorough physical examination, (C) If the findings, determinations or

with particular attention to teeth, recommendations of the second physi-
gums, hematologic, gastrointestinal, cian differ from those of the initial
renal, cardiovascular, and neurological physician, then the employer and the
systems. Pulmonary status should be employee shall assure that efforts are
evaluated if respiratory protection will made for the two physicians to resolve
be used; any disagreement.
(C) A blood pressure measurement; (D) If the two physicians have been
(D) A blood sample and analysis unable to quickly resolve their dis-
which determines: agreement, then the employer and the
(1) Blood lead level; employee through their respective phy-
(2) Hemoglobin and hematocrit deter- sicians shall designate a third physi-
minations, red cell indices, and exam- cian:
ination of peripheral smear mor- (1) To review any findings, deter-
phology; minations or recommendations of the
(3) Zinc protoporphyrin; prior physicians; and
(4) Blood urea nitrogen; and, (2) To conduct such examinations,
consultations, laboratory tests and dis-
(5) Serum creatinine;
cussions with the prior physicians as
(E) A routine urinalysis with micro-
the third physician deems necessary to
scopic examination; and
resolve the disagreement of the prior
(F) Any laboratory or other test rel- physicians.
evant to lead exposure which the exam- (E) The employer shall act consistent
ining physician deems necessary by with the findings, determinations and
sound medical practice. recommendations of the third physi-
(iii) Multiple physician review mecha- cian, unless the employer and the em-
nism. (A) If the employer selects the ployee reach an agreement which is
initial physician who conducts any otherwise consistent with the rec-
medical examination or consultation ommendations of at least one of the
provided to an employee under this sec- three physicians.
tion, the employee may designate a (iv) Information provided to examining
second physician: and consulting physicians. (A) The em-
(1) To review any findings, deter- ployer shall provide an initial physi-
minations or recommendations of the cian conducting a medical examination
initial physician; and or consultation under this section with
(2) To conduct such examinations, the following information:
consultations, and laboratory tests as (1) A copy of this regulation for lead
the second physician deems necessary including all Appendices;
to facilitate this review. (2) A description of the affected em-
(B) The employer shall promptly no- ployee’s duties as they relate to the
tify an employee of the right to seek a employee’s exposure;
second medical opinion after each oc- (3) The employee’s exposure level or
casion that an initial physician con- anticipated exposure level to lead and
ducts a medical examination or con- to any other toxic substance (if appli-
sultation pursuant to this section. The cable);
employer may condition its participa- (4) A description of any personal pro-
tion in, and payment for, the multiple tective equipment used or to be used;
physician review mechanism upon the (5) Prior blood lead determinations;
employee doing the following within and
fifteen (15) days after receipt of the (6) All prior written medical opinions
foregoing notification, or receipt of the concerning the employee in the em-
initial physician’s written opinion, ployer’s possession or control.
whichever is later: (B) The employer shall provide the
(1) The employee informing the em- foregoing information to a second or
ployer that he or she intends to seek a third physician conducting a medical
second medical opinion, and examination or consultation under this
(2) The employee initiating steps to section upon request either by the sec-
make an appointment with a second ond or third physician, or by the em-
physician. ployee.
97
(v) Written medical opinions. (A) The the employer shall assure that it be
employer shall obtain and furnish the done under the supervision of a li-
employee with a copy of a written med- censed physician in a clinical setting
ical opinion from each examining or with thorough and appropriate medical
consulting physician which contains monitoring and that the employee is
only the following information: notified in writing prior to its occur-
(1) The physician’s opinion as to rence.
whether the employee has any detected (k) Medical removal protection—(1)
medical condition which would place Temporary medical removal and return of
the employee at increased risk of ma- an employee—(i) Temporary removal due
terial impairment of the employee’s to elevated blood lead level. The em-
health from exposure to lead; ployer shall remove an employee from
(2) Any recommended special protec- work having an exposure to lead at or
tive measures to be provided to the em- above the action level on each occasion
ployee, or limitations to be placed that a periodic and a follow-up blood
upon the employee’s exposure to lead; sampling test conducted pursuant to
(3) Any recommended limitation this section indicate that the employ-
upon the employee’s use of respirators, ee’s blood lead level is at or above 50
including a determination of whether μg/dl; and,
the employee can wear a powered air (ii) Temporary removal due to a final
purifying respirator if a physician de- medical determination. (A) The employer
termines that the employee cannot shall remove an employee from work
wear a negative pressure respirator; having an exposure to lead at or above
and the action level on each occasion that
(4) The results of the blood lead de- a final medical determination results
terminations. in a medical finding, determination, or
(B) The employer shall instruct each opinion that the employee has a de-
examining and consulting physician to: tected medical condition which places
(1) Not reveal either in the written the employee at increased risk of ma-
opinion or orally, or in any other terial impairment to health from expo-
means of communication with the em- sure to lead.
ployer, findings, including laboratory (B) For the purposes of this section,
results, or diagnoses unrelated to an the phrase final medical determination
employee’s occupational exposure to means the written medical opinion on
lead; and the employees’ health status by the ex-
(2) Advise the employee of any med- amining physician or, where relevant,
ical condition, occupational or non- the outcome of the multiple physician
occupational, which dictates further review mechanism or alternate medical
medical examination or treatment. determination mechanism used pursu-
(vi) Alternate physician determination ant to the medical surveillance provi-
mechanisms. The employer and an em- sions of this section.
ployee or authorized employee rep- (C) Where a final medical determina-
resentative may agree upon the use of tion results in any recommended spe-
any alternate physician determination cial protective measures for an em-
mechanism in lieu of the multiple phy- ployee, or limitations on an employee’s
sician review mechanism provided by exposure to lead, the employer shall
paragraph (j)(3)(iii) of this section so implement and act consistent with the
long as the alternate mechanism is as recommendation.
expeditious and protective as the re- (iii) Return of the employee to former
quirements contained in this para- job status. (A) The employer shall re-
graph. turn an employee to his or her former
(4) Chelation. (i) The employer shall job status:
assure that any person whom he re- (1) For an employee removed due to a
tains, employs, supervises or controls blood lead level at or above 50 μg/dl
does not engage in prophylactic chela- when two consecutive blood sampling
tion of any employee at any time. tests indicate that the employee’s
(ii) If therapeutic or diagnostic che- blood lead level is below 40 μg/dl;

lation is to be performed by any person (2) For an employee removed due to a
in paragraph (j)(4)(i) of this section, final medical determination, when a
98
subsequent final medical determina- mination which differed from the find-
tion results in a medical finding, deter- ings, determinations, or recommenda-
mination, or opinion that the employee tions of the initial physician or;
no longer has a detected medical condi- (2) If the employee has been on re-
tion which places the employee at in- moval status for the preceding eight-
creased risk of material impairment to een months due to an elevated blood
health from exposure to lead. lead level, then the employer shall
(B) For the purposes of this section, await a final medical determination.
the requirement that an employer re- (2) Medical removal protection bene-
turn an employee to his or her former fits—(i) Provision of medical removal pro-
job status is not intended to expand tection benefits. The employer shall pro-
upon or restrict any rights an em- vide an employee up to eighteen (18)
ployee has or would have had, absent months of medical removal protection
temporary medical removal, to a spe- benefits on each occasion that an em-
cific job classification or position ployee is removed from exposure to
under the terms of a collective bar- lead or otherwise limited pursuant to
gaining agreement. this section.
(iv) Removal of other employee special (ii) Definition of medical removal pro-
protective measure or limitations. The tection benefits. For the purposes of this
employer shall remove any limitations section, the requirement that an em-
placed on an employee or end any spe- ployer provide medical removal protec-
cial protective measures provided to an tion benefits means that, as long as the
employee pursuant to a final medical job the employee was removed from
determination when a subsequent final continues, the employer shall maintain
medical determination indicates that the total normal earnings, seniority
the limitations or special protective and other employment rights and bene-
measures are no longer necessary. fits of an employee, including the em-
(v) Employer options pending a final ployee’s right to his or her former job
medical determination. Where the mul- status as though the employee had not
tiple physician review mechanism, or been medically removed from the em-
alternate medical determination mech- ployee’s job or otherwise medically
anism used pursuant to the medical limited.
surveillance provisions of this section, (iii) Follow-up medical surveillance
has not yet resulted in a final medical during the period of employee removal or
determination with respect to an em- limitation. During the period of time
ployee, the employer shall act as fol- that an employee is medically removed
lows: from his or her job or otherwise medi-
(A) Removal. The employer may re- cally limited, the employer may condi-
move the employee from exposure to tion the provision of medical removal
lead, provide special protective meas- protection benefits upon the employ-
ures to the employee, or place limita- ee’s participation in follow-up medical
tions upon the employee, consistent surveillance made available pursuant
with the medical findings, determina- to this section.
tions, or recommendations of any of (iv) Workers’ compensation claims. If a
the physicians who have reviewed the removed employee files a claim for
employee’s health status. workers’ compensation payments for a
(B) Return. The employer may return lead-related disability, then the em-
the employee to his or her former job ployer shall continue to provide med-
status, end any special protective ical removal protection benefits pend-
measures provided to the employee, ing disposition of the claim. To the ex-
and remove any limitations placed tent that an award is made to the em-
upon the employee, consistent with the ployee for earnings lost during the pe-
medical findings, determinations, or riod of removal, the employer’s med-
recommendations of any of the physi- ical removal protection obligation
cians who have reviewed the employ- shall be reduced by such amount. The
ee’s health status, with two exceptions. employer shall receive no credit for
(1) If the initial removal, special pro- workers’ compensation payments re-
tection, or limitation of the employee ceived by the employee for treatment-
resulted from a final medical deter- related expenses.
99
(v) Other credits. The employer’s obli- (iv) The employer shall also provide
gation to provide medical removal pro- the training program at least annually
tection benefits to a removed employee for each employee who is subject to
shall be reduced to the extent that the lead exposure at or above the action
employee receives compensation for level on any day.
earnings lost during the period of re- (2) Training program. The employer
moval either from a publicly or em- shall assure that each employee is
ployer-funded compensation program, trained in the following:
or receives income from employment (i) The content of this standard and
with another employer made possible its appendices;
by virtue of the employee’s removal. (ii) The specific nature of the oper-
(vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of ations which could result in exposure
an employee. Where an employer, al- to lead above the action level;
though not required by this section to (iii) The purpose, proper selection,
do so, removes an employee from expo- fitting, use, and limitations of res-
sure to lead or otherwise places limita- pirators;
tions on an employee due to the effects (iv) The purpose and a description of
of lead exposure on the employee’s the medical surveillance program, and
medical condition, the employer shall
the medical removal protection pro-
provide medical removal protection
gram including information concerning
benefits to the employee equal to that
the adverse health effects associated
required by paragraph (k)(2) (i) and (ii)
with excessive exposure to lead (with
of this section.
particular attention to the adverse re-
(l) Communication of hazards—(1) Gen-
productive effects on both males and
eral—(i) Hazard communication. The em-
females and hazards to the fetus and
ployer shall include lead in the pro-
additional precautions for employees
gram established to comply with the
who are pregnant);
Hazard Communication Standard
(HCS) (§ 1910.1200). The employer shall (v) The engineering controls and
ensure that each employee has access work practices associated with the em-
to labels on containers of lead and safe- ployee’s job assignment including
ty data sheets, and is trained in ac- training of employees to follow rel-
cordance with the provisions of HCS evant good work practices described in
and paragraph (l) of this section. The appendix B of this section;
employer shall ensure that at least the (vi) The contents of any compliance
following hazards are addressed: plan in effect;
(A) Reproductive/developmental tox- (vii) Instructions to employees that
icity; chelating agents should not routinely
(B) Central nervous system effects; be used to remove lead from their bod-
(C) Kidney effects; ies and should not be used at all except
(D) Blood effects; and under the direction of a licensed physi-
(E) Acute toxicity effects. cian; and
(ii) The employer shall train each (viii) The employee’s right of access
employee who is subject to exposure to to records under 29 CFR 1910.20.
lead at or above the action level on any (3) Access to information and training
day, or who is subject to exposure to materials. (i) The employer shall make
lead compounds which may cause skin readily available to all affected em-
or eye irritation (e.g., lead arsenate, ployees a copy of this standard and its
lead azide), in accordance with the re- appendices.
quirements of this section. The em- (ii) The employer shall provide, upon
ployer shall institute a training pro- request, all materials relating to the
gram and ensure employee participa- employee information and training
tion in the program. program to affected employees and
(iii) The employer shall provide the their designated representatives, and
training program as initial training to the Assistant Secretary and the Di-
prior to the time of job assignment or rector.

prior to the start up date for this re- (m) Signs—(1) General. (i) The em-
quirement, whichever comes last. ployer shall post the following warning
100
signs in each work area where an em- (E) The environmental variables that
ployee’s exposure to lead is above the could affect the measurement of em-
PEL. ployee exposure.
DANGER
(iii) The employer shall maintain
LEAD WORK AREA monitoring and other exposure assess-
MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UN- ment records in accordance with the
BORN CHILD provisions of 29 CFR 1910.33.
CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL (2) Medical surveillance. (i) The em-
NERVOUS SYSTEM ployer shall establish and maintain an
DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE IN THIS accurate record for each employee sub-
AREA
ject to medical surveillance as required
(ii) The employer shall ensure that by paragraph (j) of this section.
no statement appears on or near any (ii) This record shall include:
sign required by this paragraph (m) (A) The name, social security num-
that contradicts or detracts from the ber, and description of the duties of the
meaning of the required sign. employee;
(iii) The employer shall ensure that (B) A copy of the physician’s written
signs required by this paragraph (m) opinions;
are illuminated and cleaned as nec- (C) Results of any airborne exposure
essary so that the legend is readily monitoring done on or for that em-
visible. ployee and provided to the physician;
(iv) The employer may use signs re- and
quired by other statutes, regulations or (D) Any employee medical com-
ordinances in addition to, or in complaints related to exposure to lead.
bination with, signs required by this (iii) The employer shall keep, or as-
paragraph (m). sure that the examining physician
(v) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers keeps, the following medical records:
may use the following legend in lieu of (A) A copy of the medical examina-
that specified in paragraph (m)(1)(i) of tion results including medical and
this section: work history required under paragraph
WARNING (j) of this section;
LEAD WORK AREA (B) A description of the laboratory
POISON procedures and a copy of any standards
NO SMOKING OR EATING or guidelines used to interpret the test
(n) Recordkeeping—(1) Exposure assess- results or references to that informa-
ment. (i) The employer shall establish tion;
and maintain an accurate record of all (C) A copy of the results of biological
monitoring and other data used in con- monitoring.
ducting employee exposure assess- (iv) The employer shall maintain or
ments as required in paragraph (d) of assure that the physician maintains
this section. medical records in accordance with the
(ii) Exposure monitoring records provisions of 29 CFR 1910.33.
shall include: (3) Medical removals. (i) The employer
(A) The date(s), number, duration, lo- shall establish and maintain an accu-
cation and results of each of the sam- rate record for each employee removed
ples taken if any, including a descrip- from current exposure to lead pursuant
tion of the sampling procedure used to to paragraph (k) of this section.
determine representative employee ex- (ii) Each record shall include:
posure where applicable; (A) The name and social security
(B) A description of the sampling and number of the employee;
analytical methods used and evidence (B) The date of each occasion that
of their accuracy; the employee was removed from cur-
(C) The type of respiratory protective rent exposure to lead as well as the
devices worn, if any; corresponding date on which the em-
(D) Name, social security number, ployee was returned to his or her
and job classification of the employee former job status;
monitored and of all other employees (C) A brief explanation of how each
whose exposure the measurement is in- removal was or is being accomplished;
tended to represent; and and
101
(D) A statement with respect to each employee exposure to lead requires

removal indicating whether or not the entry into an area where the use of res-
reason for the removal was an elevated pirators, protective clothing or equip-
blood lead level. ment is required, the employer shall
(iii) The employer shall maintain provide the observer with and assure
each medical removal record for at the use of such respirators, clothing
least the duration of an employee’s em- and equipment, and shall require the
ployment. observer to comply with all other ap-
(4) Objective data for exemption from re- plicable safety and health procedures.
quirement for initial monitoring. (i) For (ii) Without interfering with the
purposes of this section, objective data monitoring, observers shall be entitled
are information demonstrating that a to:
particular product or material con- (A) Receive an explanation of the
taining lead or a specific process, oper- measurement procedures;
ation, or activity involving lead cannot (B) Observe all steps related to the
release dust or fumes in concentrations monitoring of lead performed at the
at or above the action level under any place of exposure; and
expected conditions of use. Objective (C) Record the results obtained or re-
data can be obtained from an industry- ceive copies of the results when re-
wide study or from laboratory product turned by the laboratory.
test results from manufacturers of lead (p) Appendices. The information con-
containing products or materials. The tained in the appendices to this section
data the employer uses from an indus- is not intended by itself, to create any
try-wide survey must be obtained additional obligations not otherwise
under workplace conditions closely re- imposed by this standard nor detract
sembling the processes, types of mate- from any existing obligation.
rial, control methods, work practices
and environmental conditions in the APPENDIX A TO § 1926.62—SUBSTANCE DATA
SHEET FOR OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE TO LEAD
employer’s current operations.
(ii) The employer shall maintain the I. Substance Identification
record of the objective data relied upon A. Substance: Pure lead (Pb) is a heavy
for at least 30 years. metal at room temperature and pressure and
(5) Availability. The employer shall is a basic chemical element. It can combine
make available upon request all with various other substances to form nu-
records required to be maintained by merous lead compounds.
paragraph (n) of this section to affected B. Compounds covered by the standard: The
employees, former employees, and word lead when used in this interim final
their designated representatives, and standard means elemental lead, all inorganic
lead compounds and a class of organic lead
to the Assistant Secretary and the Di- compounds called lead soaps. This standard
rector for examination and copying. does not apply to other organic lead com-
(6) Transfer of records. (i) Whenever pounds.
the employer ceases to do business, the C. Uses: Exposure to lead occurs in several
successor employer shall receive and different occupations in the construction in-
retain all records required to be main- dustry, including demolition or salvage of
tained by paragraph (n) of this section. structures where lead or lead-containing ma-
(ii) The employer shall also comply terials are present; removal or encapsulation
of lead-containing materials, new construc-
with any additional requirements in-
tion, alteration, repair, or renovation of
volving the transfer of records set forth structures that contain lead or materials
in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). containing lead; installation of products con-
(o) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em- taining lead. In addition, there are construc-
ployee observation. The employer shall tion related activities where exposure to
provide affected employees or their lead may occur, including transportation,
designated representatives an oppor- disposal, storage, or containment of lead or
tunity to observe any monitoring of materials containing lead on construction
sites, and maintenance operations associated
employee exposure to lead conducted
with construction activities.
pursuant to paragraph (d) of this sec-
D. Permissible exposure: The permissible ex-

tion. posure limit (PEL) set by the standard is 50
(2) Observation procedures. (i) When- micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air (50
ever observation of the monitoring of μg/m3), averaged over an 8-hour workday.
102
E. Action level: The interim final standard rapidly developing acute effects of lead, and
establishes an action level of 30 micrograms chronic effects which take longer to acquire.
of lead per cubic meter of air (30 μg/m3), aver- Lead adversely affects numerous body sys-
aged over an 8-hour workday. The action tems, and causes forms of health impairment
level triggers several ancillary provisions of and disease which arise after periods of expo-
the standard such as exposure monitoring, sure as short as days or as long as several
medical surveillance, and training. years.
(2) Long-term (chronic) overexposure. Chron-
II. Health Hazard Data ic overexposure to lead may result in severe
damage to your blood-forming, nervous, uri-
A. Ways in which lead enters your body.
nary and reproductive systems. Some com-
When absorbed into your body in certain
mon symptoms of chronic overexposure in-
doses, lead is a toxic substance. The object of
clude loss of appetite, metallic taste in the
the lead standard is to prevent absorption of
mouth, anxiety, constipation, nausea, pallor,
harmful quantities of lead. The standard is
excessive tiredness, weakness, insomnia,
intended to protect you not only from the
headache, nervous irritability, muscle and
immediate toxic effects of lead, but also
joint pain or soreness, fine tremors, numb-
from the serious toxic effects that may not
ness, dizziness, hyperactivity and colic. In
become apparent until years of exposure lead colic there may be severe abdominal
have passed. Lead can be absorbed into your pain. Damage to the central nervous system
body by inhalation (breathing) and ingestion in general and the brain (encephalopathy) in
(eating). Lead (except for certain organic particular is one of the most severe forms of
lead compounds not covered by the standard, lead poisoning. The most severe, often fatal,
such as tetraethyl lead) is not absorbed form of encephalopathy may be preceded by
through your skin. When lead is scattered in vomiting, a feeling of dullness progressing to
the air as a dust, fume respiratory tract. In- drowsiness and stupor, poor memory, rest-
halation of airborne lead is generally the lessness, irritability, tremor, and convul-
most important source of occupational lead sions. It may arise suddenly with the onset
absorption. You can also absorb lead through of seizures, followed by coma, and death.
your digestive system if lead gets into your There is a tendency for muscular weakness
mouth and is swallowed. If you handle food, to develop at the same time. This weakness
cigarettes, chewing tobacco, or make-up may progress to paralysis often observed as
which have lead on them or handle them a characteristic ‘‘wrist drop’’ or ‘‘foot drop’’
with hands contaminated with lead, this will and is a manifestation of a disease to the
contribute to ingestion. A significant por- nervous system called peripheral neurop-
tion of the lead that you inhale or ingest athy. Chronic overexposure to lead also re-
gets into your blood stream. Once in your sults in kidney disease with few, if any,
blood stream, lead is circulated throughout symptoms appearing until extensive and
your body and stored in various organs and most likely permanent kidney damage has
body tissues. Some of this lead is quickly fil- occurred. Routine laboratory tests reveal the
tered out of your body and excreted, but presence of this kidney disease only after
some remains in the blood and other tissues. about two-thirds of kidney function is lost.
As exposure to lead continues, the amount When overt symptoms of urinary dysfunc-
stored in your body will increase if you are tion arise, it is often too late to correct or
absorbing more lead than your body is ex- prevent worsening conditions, and progres-
creting. Even though you may not be aware sion to kidney dialysis or death is possible.
of any immediate symptoms of disease, this Chronic overexposure to lead impairs the re-
lead stored in your tissues can be slowly productive systems of both men and women.
causing irreversible damage, first to indi- Overexposure to lead may result in decreased
vidual cells, then to your organs and whole sex drive, impotence and sterility in men.
body systems. Lead can alter the structure of sperm cells
B. Effects of overexposure to lead—(1) Short raising the risk of birth defects. There is evi-
term (acute) overexposure. Lead is a potent, dence of miscarriage and stillbirth in women
systemic poison that serves no known useful whose husbands were exposed to lead or who
function once absorbed by your body. Taken were exposed to lead themselves. Lead expo-
in large enough doses, lead can kill you in a sure also may result in decreased fertility,
matter of days. A condition affecting the and abnormal menstrual cycles in women.
brain called acute encephalopathy may arise The course of pregnancy may be adversely
which develops quickly to seizures, coma, affected by exposure to lead since lead
and death from cardiorespiratory arrest. A crosses the placental barrier and poses risks
short term dose of lead can lead to acute to developing fetuses. Children born of par-
encephalopathy. Short term occupational ex- ents either one of whom were exposed to ex-
posures of this magnitude are highly un- cess lead levels are more likely to have birth
usual, but not impossible. Similar forms of defects, mental retardation, behavioral dis-
encephalopathy may, however, arise from ex- orders or die during the first year of child-
tended, chronic exposure to lower doses of hood. Overexposure to lead also disrupts the
lead. There is no sharp dividing line between blood-forming system resulting in decreased
103
hemoglobin (the substance in the blood that maintain your BLL below 40 μg/dl. The provi-
carries oxygen to the cells) and ultimately sions of the standard are designed with this
anemia. Anemia is characterized by weak- end in mind.
ness, pallor and fatigability as a result of de- Your employer has prime responsibility to
creased oxygen carrying capacity in the assure that the provisions of the standard
blood. are complied with both by the company and
(3) Health protection goals of the standard. by individual workers. You, as a worker,
Prevention of adverse health effects for most however, also have a responsibility to assist
workers from exposure to lead throughout a your employer in complying with the stand-
working lifetime requires that a worker’s ard. You can play a key role in protecting
blood lead level (BLL, also expressed as PbB) your own health by learning about the lead
be maintained at or below forty micrograms hazards and their control, learning what the
per deciliter of whole blood (40 μg/dl). The standard requires, following the standard
blood lead levels of workers (both male and where it governs your own actions, and see-
female workers) who intend to have children ing that your employer complies with provi-
should be maintained below 30 μg/dl to mini- sions governing his or her actions.
mize adverse reproductive health effects to (4) Reporting signs and symptoms of health
the parents and to the developing fetus. The problems. You should immediately notify
measurement of your blood lead level (BLL) your employer if you develop signs or symp-
is the most useful indicator of the amount of toms associated with lead poisoning or if you
lead being absorbed by your body. Blood lead desire medical advice concerning the effects
levels are most often reported in units of of current or past exposure to lead or your
milligrams (mg) or micrograms (μg) of lead ability to have a healthy child. You should
(1 mg = 1000 μg) per 100 grams (100g), 100 mil- also notify your employer if you have dif-
liliters (100 ml) or deciliter (dl) of blood. ficulty breathing during a respirator fit test
These three units are essentially the same. or while wearing a respirator. In each of
Sometime BLLs are expressed in the form of these cases, your employer must make avail-
mg% or μg%. This is a shorthand notation able to you appropriate medical examina-
for 100g, 100 ml, or dl. (References to BLL tions or consultations. These must be pro-
measurements in this standard are expressed vided at no cost to you and at a reasonable
in the form of μg/dl.) time and place. The standard contains a pro-
BLL measurements show the amount of cedure whereby you can obtain a second
lead circulating in your blood stream, but do opinion by a physician of your choice if your
not give any information about the amount employer selected the initial physician.
of lead stored in your various tissues. BLL
measurements merely show current absorp- APPENDIX B TO § 1926.62—EMPLOYEE
tion of lead, not the effect that lead is hav- STANDARD SUMMARY
ing on your body or the effects that past lead
exposure may have already caused. Past re- This appendix summarizes key provisions
search into lead-related diseases, however, of the interim final standard for lead in con-
has focused heavily on associations between struction that you as a worker should be-
BLLs and various diseases. As a result, your come familiar with.
BLL is an important indicator of the likeli- I. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)—
hood that you will gradually acquire a lead-
Paragraph (C)
related health impairment or disease.
Once your blood lead level climbs above 40 The standard sets a permissible exposure
μg/dl, your risk of disease increases. There is limit (PEL) of 50 micrograms of lead per
a wide variability of individual response to cubic meter of air (50 μg/m3), averaged over
lead, thus it is difficult to say that a par- an 8-hour workday which is referred to as a
ticular BLL in a given person will cause a time-weighted average (TWA). This is the
particular effect. Studies have associated highest level of lead in air to which you may
fatal encephalopathy with BLLs as low as 150 be permissibly exposed over an 8-hour work-
μg/dl. Other studies have shown other forms day. However, since this is an 8-hour aver-
of diseases in some workers with BLLs well age, short exposures above the PEL are per-
below 80 μg/dl. Your BLL is a crucial indi- mitted so long as for each 8-hour work day
cator of the risks to your health, but one your average exposure does not exceed this
other factor is also extremely important. level. This interim final standard, however,
This factor is the length of time you have takes into account the fact that your daily
had elevated BLLs. The longer you have an exposure to lead can extend beyond a typical
elevated BLL, the greater the risk that large 8-hour workday as the result of overtime or
quantities of lead are being gradually stored other alterations in your work schedule. To
in your organs and tissues (body burden). deal with this situation, the standard con-
The greater your overall body burden, the tains a formula which reduces your permis-
greater the chances of substantial perma- sible exposure when you are exposed more
nent damage. The best way to prevent all than 8 hours. For example, if you are exposed
forms of lead-related impairments and dis- to lead for 10 hours a day, the maximum per-
eases—both short term and long term—is to mitted average exposure would be 40 μg/m3.
104
II. Exposure Assessment—Paragraph (D) required to monitor the exposure of every
employee, but he or she must monitor a rep-
If lead is present in your workplace in any
resentative number of employees and job
quantity, your employer is required to make
types. Enough sampling must be done to en-
an initial determination of whether any em-
able each employee’s exposure level to be
ployee’s exposure to lead exceeds the action
reasonably represent full shift exposure. In
level (30 μg/m3 averaged over an 8-hour day).
addition, these air samples must be taken
Employee exposure is that exposure which
under conditions which represent each em-
would occur if the employee were not using
ployee’s regular, daily exposure to lead.
a respirator. This initial determination re-
Sampling performed in the past 12 months
quires your employer to monitor workers’ may be used to determine exposures above
exposures unless he or she has objective data the action level if such sampling was con-
which can demonstrate conclusively that no ducted during work activities essentially
employee will be exposed to lead in excess of similar to present work conditions.
the action level. Where objective data is used The standard lists certain tasks which may
in lieu of actual monitoring the employer likely result in exposures to lead in excess of
must establish and maintain an accurate the PEL and, in some cases, exposures in ex-
record, documenting its relevancy in assess- cess of 50 times the PEL. If you are per-
ing exposure levels for current job condi- forming any of these tasks, your employer
tions. If such objective data is available, the must provide you with appropriate res-
employer need proceed no further on em- piratory protection, protective clothing and
ployee exposure assessment until such time equipment, change areas, hand washing fa-
that conditions have changed and the deter- cilities, biological monitoring, and training
mination is no longer valid. until such time that an exposure assessment
Objective data may be compiled from var- is conducted which demonstrates that your
ious sources, e.g., insurance companies and exposure level is below the PEL.
trade associations and information from sup- If you are exposed to lead and air sampling
pliers or exposure data collected from simi- is performed, your employer is required to
lar operations. Objective data may also com- notify you in writing within 5 working days
prise previously-collected sampling data in- of the air monitoring results which represent
cluding area monitoring. If it cannot be de- your exposure. If the results indicate that
termined through using objective data that your exposure exceeds the PEL (without re-
worker exposure is less than the action level, gard to your use of a respirator), then your
your employer must conduct monitoring or employer must also notify you of this in
must rely on relevant previous personal sam- writing, and provide you with a description
pling, if available. Where monitoring is re- of the corrective action that has been taken
quired for the initial determination, it may or will be taken to reduce your exposure.
be limited to a representative number of em- Your exposure must be rechecked by moni-
ployees who are reasonably expected to have toring, at least every six months if your ex-
the highest exposure levels. If your employer posure is at or over the action level but
has conducted appropriate air sampling for below the PEL. Your employer may dis-
lead in the past 12 months, he or she may use continue monitoring for you if 2 consecutive
these results, provided they are applicable to measurements, taken at least 7 days apart,
the same employee tasks and exposure condi- are at or below the action level. Air moni-
tions and meet the requirements for accu- toring must be repeated every 3 months if
racy as specified in the standard. As with ob- you are exposed over the PEL. Your em-
jective data, if such results are relied upon ployer must continue monitoring for you at
for the initial determination, your employer this frequency until 2 consecutive measure-
must establish and maintain a record as to ments, taken at least 7 days apart, are below
the relevancy of such data to current job the PEL but above the action level, at which
conditions. time your employer must repeat monitoring
If there have been any employee com- of your exposure every six months and may
plaints of symptoms which may be attrib- discontinue monitoring only after your expo-
utable to exposure to lead or if there is any sure drops to or below the action level. How-
other information or observations which ever, whenever there is a change of equip-
would indicate employee exposure to lead, ment, process, control, or personnel or a new
this must also be considered as part of the type of job is added at your workplace which
initial determination. may result in new or additional exposure to
If this initial determination shows that a lead, your employer must perform additional
reasonable possibility exists that any em- monitoring.
ployee may be exposed, without regard to
respirators, over the action level, your em- III. Methods of Compliance—Paragraph (E)
ployer must set up an air monitoring pro- Your employer is required to assure that
gram to determine the exposure level rep- no employee is exposed to lead in excess of
resentative of each employee exposed to lead the PEL as an 8-hour TWA. The interim final
at your workplace. In carrying out this air standard for lead in construction requires
monitoring program, your employer is not employers to institute engineering and work
105
practice controls including administrative Your employer is required to select res-
controls to the extent feasible to reduce em- pirators from the types listed in Table I of
ployee exposure to lead. Where such controls the Respiratory Protection section of the
are feasible but not adequate to reduce expo- standard (§ 1926.62 (f)). Any respirator chosen
sures below the PEL they must be used none- must be approved by the National Institute
theless to reduce exposures to the lowest for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)
level that can be accomplished by these under the provisions of 42 CFR part 84. This
means and then supplemented with appro- respirator selection table will enable your
priate respiratory protection. employer to choose a type of respirator that
Your employer is required to develop and will give you a proper amount of protection
implement a written compliance program based on your airborne lead exposure. Your
prior to the commencement of any job where employer may select a type of respirator
employee exposures may reach the PEL as that provides greater protection than that
an 8-hour TWA. The interim final standard required by the standard; that is, one rec-
identifies the various elements that must be ommended for a higher concentration of lead
included in the plan. For example, employers than is present in your workplace. For exam-
are required to include a description of oper- ple, a powered air-purifying respirator
ations in which lead is emitted, detailing (PAPR) is much more protective than a typ-
other relevant information about the oper- ical negative pressure respirator, and may
ation such as the type of equipment used, also be more comfortable to wear. A PAPR
the type of material involved, employee job has a filter, cartridge, or canister to clean
responsibilities, operating procedures and the air, and a power source that continu-
maintenance practices. In addition, your em- ously blows filtered air into your breathing
ployer’s compliance plan must specify the zone. Your employer might make a PAPR
means that will be used to achieve compli- available to you to ease the burden of having
ance and, where engineering controls are re- to wear a respirator for long periods of time.
quired, include any engineering plans or The standard provides that you can obtain a
studies that have been used to select the PAPR upon request.
control methods. If administrative controls
Your employer must also start a Res-
involving job rotation are used to reduce em-
piratory Protection Program. This program
ployee exposure to lead, the job rotation
must include written procedures for the
schedule must be included in the compliance
proper selection, use, cleaning, storage, and
plan. The plan must also detail the type of
maintenance of respirators.
protective clothing and equipment, including
respirators, housekeeping and hygiene prac- Your employer must ensure that your res-
tices that will be used to protect you from pirator facepiece fits properly. Proper fit of
the adverse effects of exposure to lead. a respirator facepiece is critical to your pro-
The written compliance program must be tection from airborne lead. Obtaining a prop-
made available, upon request, to affected er fit on each employee may require your
employees and their designated representa- employer to make available several different
tives, the Assistant Secretary and the Direc- types of respirator masks. To ensure that
tor. your respirator fits properly and that face-
Finally, the plan must be reviewed and up- piece leakage is minimal, your employer
dated at least every 6 months to assure it re- must give you either a qualitative or quan-
flects the current status in exposure control. titative fit test as specified in appendix A of
the Respiratory Protection standard located
IV. Respiratory Protection—Paragraph (F) at 29 CFR 1910.134.
Your employer is required to provide and You must also receive from your employer
assure your use of respirators when your ex- proper training in the use of respirators.
posure to lead is not controlled below the Your employer is required to teach you how
PEL by other means. The employer must pay to wear a respirator, to know why it is need-
the cost of the respirator. Whenever you re- ed, and to understand its limitations.
quest one, your employer is also required to The standard provides that if your res-
provide you a respirator even if your air ex- pirator uses filter elements, you must be
posure level is not above the PEL. You given an opportunity to change the filter ele-
might desire a respirator when, for example, ments whenever an increase in breathing re-
you have received medical advice that your sistance is detected. You also must be per-
lead absorption should be decreased. Or, you mitted to periodically leave your work area
may intend to have children in the near fu- to wash your face and respirator facepiece
ture, and want to reduce the level of lead in whenever necessary to prevent skin irrita-
your body to minimize adverse reproductive tion. If you ever have difficulty in breathing
effects. While respirators are the least satis- during a fit test or while using a respirator,
factory means of controlling your exposure, your employer must make a medical exam-
they are capable of providing significant pro- ination available to you to determine wheth-
tection if properly chosen, fitted, worn, er you can safely wear a respirator. The re-
cleaned, maintained, and replaced when they sult of this examination may be to give you
stop providing adequate protection. a positive pressure respirator (which reduces
106
breathing resistance) or to provide alter- 1. Where applicable, place disposal cover-
native means of protection. alls and shoe covers with the abatement
waste;
V. Protective Work Clothing and Equipment— 2. Contaminated clothing which is to be
Paragraph (G) cleaned, laundered or disposed of must be
placed in closed containers in the change
If you are exposed to lead above the PEL
room.
as an 8-hour TWA, without regard to your
3. Clean protective gear, including res-
use of a respirator, or if you are exposed to
pirators, according to standard procedures;
lead compounds such as lead arsenate or lead
4. Wash hands and face again. If showers
azide which can cause skin and eye irrita-
are available, take a shower and wash hair.
tion, your employer must provide you with
If shower facilities are not available at the
protective work clothing and equipment ap-
work site, shower immediately at home and
propriate for the hazard. If work clothing is
wash hair.
provided, it must be provided in a clean and
dry condition at least weekly, and daily if VI. Housekeeping—Paragraph (H)
your airborne exposure to lead is greater
than 200 μg/m3. Appropriate protective work Your employer must establish a house-
clothing and equipment can include cover- keeping program sufficient to maintain all
alls or similar full-body work clothing, surfaces as free as practicable of accumula-
gloves, hats, shoes or disposable shoe cover- tions of lead dust. Vacuuming is the pre-
lets, and face shields or vented goggles. Your ferred method of meeting this requirement,
employer is required to provide all such and the use of compressed air to clean floors
equipment at no cost to you. In addition, and other surfaces is generally prohibited
your employer is responsible for providing unless removal with compressed air is done
repairs and replacement as necessary, and in conjunction with ventilation systems de-
also is responsible for the cleaning, laun- signed to contain dispersal of the lead dust.
dering or disposal of protective clothing and Dry or wet sweeping, shoveling, or brushing
equipment. may not be used except where vacuuming or
The interim final standard requires that other equally effective methods have been
your employer assure that you follow good tried and do not work. Vacuums must be
work practices when you are working in used equipped with a special filter called a
areas where your exposure to lead may ex- high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter
ceed the PEL. With respect to protective and emptied in a manner which minimizes
clothing and equipment, where appropriate, the reentry of lead into the workplace.
the following procedures should be observed VII. Hygiene Facilities and Practices—
prior to beginning work: Paragraph (I)
1. Change into work clothing and shoe cov-
ers in the clean section of the designated The standard requires that hand washing
changing areas; facilities be provided where occupational ex-
2. Use work garments of appropriate pro- posure to lead occurs. In addition, change
tective gear, including respirators before en- areas, showers (where feasible), and
tering the work area; and lunchrooms or eating areas are to be made
3. Store any clothing not worn under pro- available to workers exposed to lead above
tective clothing in the designated changing the PEL. Your employer must assure that
area. except in these facilities, food and beverage
is not present or consumed, tobacco products
Workers should follow these procedures
are not present or used, and cosmetics are
upon leaving the work area:
not applied, where airborne exposures are
1. HEPA vacuum heavily contaminated
above the PEL. Change rooms provided by
protective work clothing while it is still
your employer must be equipped with sepa-
being worn. At no time may lead be removed
rate storage facilities for your protective
from protective clothing by any means
clothing and equipment and street clothes to
which result in uncontrolled dispersal of lead
avoid cross-contamination. After showering,
into the air;
no required protective clothing or equipment
2. Remove shoe covers and leave them in worn during the shift may be worn home. It
the work area; is important that contaminated clothing or
3. Remove protective clothing and gear in equipment be removed in change areas and
the dirty area of the designated changing not be worn home or you will extend your
area. Remove protective coveralls by care- exposure and expose your family since lead
fully rolling down the garment to reduce ex- from your clothing can accumulate in your
posure to dust. house, car, etc.
4. Remove respirators last; and Lunchrooms or eating areas may not be
5. Wash hands and face.
entered with protective clothing or equip-

Workers should follow these procedures ment unless surface dust has been removed
upon finishing work for the day (in addition by vacuuming, downdraft booth, or other
to procedures described above): cleaning method. Finally, workers exposed
107
above the PEL must wash both their hands μg/dl. A zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP) test is a
and faces prior to eating, drinking, smoking very useful blood test which measures an ad-
or applying cosmetics. verse metabolic effect of lead on your body
All of the facilities and hygiene practices and is therefore an indicator of lead toxicity.
just discussed are essential to minimize ad- If your BLL exceeds 40 μg/dl the moni-
ditional sources of lead absorption from in- toring frequency must be increased from
halation or ingestion of lead that may accu- every 6 months to at least every 2 months
mulate on you, your clothes, or your posses- and not reduced until two consecutive BLLs
sions. Strict compliance with these provi- indicate a blood lead level below 40 μg/dl.
sions can virtually eliminate several sources Each time your BLL is determined to be over
of lead exposure which significantly con- 40 μg/dl, your employer must notify you of
tribute to excessive lead absorption. this in writing within five working days of
his or her receipt of the test results. The em-
VIII. Medical Surveillance—Paragraph (J)
ployer must also inform you that the stand-
The medical surveillance program is part ard requires temporary medical removal
of the standard’s comprehensive approach to with economic protection when your BLL ex-
the prevention of lead-related disease. Its ceeds 50 μg/dl. (See Discussion of Medical Re-
purpose is to supplement the main thrust of moval Protection-Paragraph (k).) Anytime
the standard which is aimed at minimizing your BLL exceeds 50 μg/dl your employer
airborne concentrations of lead and sources must make available to you within two
of ingestion. Only medical surveillance can weeks of receipt of these test results a sec-
determine if the other provisions of the ond follow-up BLL test to confirm your BLL.
standard have affectively protected you as If the two tests both exceed 50 μg/dl, and you
an individual. Compliance with the stand- are temporarily removed, then your em-
ard’s provision will protect most workers ployer must make successive BLL tests
from the adverse effects of lead exposure, but available to you on a monthly basis during
may not be satisfactory to protect individual the period of your removal.
workers (1) who have high body burdens of Medical examinations beyond the initial
lead acquired over past years, (2) who have one must be made available on an annual
additional uncontrolled sources of non-occu- basis if your blood lead level exceeds 40 μg/dl
pational lead exposure, (3) who exhibit unat any time during the preceding year and
usual variations in lead absorption rates, or you are being exposed above the airborne ac-
(4) who have specific non-work related med- tion level of 30 μg/m3 for 30 or more days per
ical conditions which could be aggravated by year. The initial examination will provide
lead exposure (e.g., renal disease, anemia). In information to establish a baseline to which
addition, control systems may fail, or hy- subsequent data can be compared.
giene and respirator programs may be inad-
An initial medical examination to consist
equate. Periodic medical surveillance of indi-
of blood sampling and analysis for lead and
vidual workers will help detect those fail-
zinc protoporphyrin must also be made avail-
ures. Medical surveillance will also be impor-
able (prior to assignment) for each employee
tant to protect your reproductive ability-re-
being assigned for the first time to an area
gardless of whether you are a man or woman.
where the airborne concentration of lead
All medical surveillance required by the
equals or exceeds the action level at any
interim final standard must be performed by
time. In addition, a medical examination or
or under the supervision of a licensed physi-
cian. The employer must provide required consultation must be made available as soon
medical surveillance without cost to employ- as possible if you notify your employer that
ees and at a reasonable time and place. The you are experiencing signs or symptoms
standard’s medical surveillance program has commonly associated with lead poisoning or
two parts—periodic biological monitoring that you have difficulty breathing while
and medical examinations. Your employer’s wearing a respirator or during a respirator
obligation to offer you medical surveillance fit test. You must also be provided a medical
is triggered by the results of the air moni- examination or consultation if you notify
toring program. Full medical surveillance your employer that you desire medical ad-
must be made available to all employees who vice concerning the effects of current or past
are or may be exposed to lead in excess of exposure to lead on your ability to procreate
the action level for more than 30 days a year a healthy child.
and whose blood lead level exceeds 40 μg/dl. Finally, appropriate follow-up medical ex-
Initial medical surveillance consisting of aminations or consultations may also be pro-
blood sampling and analysis for lead and zinc vided for employees who have been tempo-
protoporphyrin must be provided to all em- rarily removed from exposure under the
ployees exposed at any time (1 day) above medical removal protection provisions of the
the action level. standard. (See Part IX, below.)
Biological monitoring under the standard The standard specifies the minimum con-
must be provided at least every 2 months for tent of pre-assignment and annual medical
the first 6 months and every 6 months there- examinations. The content of other types of
after until your blood lead level is below 40 medical examinations and consultations is
108
left up to the sound discretion of the exam- whether you can wear a powered air puri-
ining physician. Pre-assignment and annual fying respirator (PAPR) if you are found un-
medical examinations must include (1) a de- able to wear a negative pressure respirator.
tailed work history and medical history; (2) The medical surveillance program of the
a thorough physical examination, including interim lead standard may at some point in
an evaluation of your pulmonary status if time serve to notify certain workers that
you will be required to use a respirator; (3) a they have acquired a disease or other adverse
blood pressure measurement; and (4) a series medical condition as a result of occupational
of laboratory tests designed to check your lead exposure. If this is true, these workers
blood chemistry and your kidney function. might have legal rights to compensation
In addition, at any time upon your request, from public agencies, their employers, firms
a laboratory evaluation of male fertility will that supply hazardous products to their em-
be made (microscopic examination of a ployers, or other persons. Some states have
sperm sample), or a pregnancy test will be laws, including worker compensation laws,
given. that disallow a worker who learns of a job-
The standard does not require that you related health impairment to sue, unless the
participate in any of the medical procedures, worker sues within a short period of time
tests, etc. which your employer is required after learning of the impairment. (This pe-
to make available to you. Medical surveil- riod of time may be a matter of months or
lance can, however, play a very important years.) An attorney can be consulted about
role in protecting your health. You are these possibilities. It should be stressed that
strongly encouraged, therefore, to partici- OSHA is in no way trying to either encour-
pate in a meaningful fashion. The standard age or discourage claims or lawsuits. How-
contains a multiple physician review mecha- ever, since results of the standard’s medical
nism which will give you a chance to have a surveillance program can significantly affect
physician of your choice directly participate the legal remedies of a worker who has ac-
in the medical surveillance program. If you quired a job-related disease or impairment,
are dissatisfied with an examination by a it is proper for OSHA to make you aware of
physician chosen by your employer, you can this.
select a second physician to conduct an inde- The medical surveillance section of the
pendent analysis. The two doctors would at- standard also contains provisions dealing
tempt to resolve any differences of opinion, with chelation. Chelation is the use of cer-
and select a third physician to resolve any tain drugs (administered in pill form or in-
firm dispute. Generally your employer will jected into the body) to reduce the amount
choose the physician who conducts medical of lead absorbed in body tissues. Experience
surveillance under the lead standard-unless accumulated by the medical and scientific
you and your employer can agree on the communities has largely confirmed the effec-
choice of a physician or physicians. Some tiveness of this type of therapy for the treat-
companies and unions have agreed in ad- ment of very severe lead poisoning. On the
vance, for example, to use certain inde- other hand, it has also been established that
pendent medical laboratories or panels of there can be a long list of extremely harmful
physicians. Any of these arrangements are side effects associated with the use of
acceptable so long as required medical sur- chelating agents. The medical community
veillance is made available to workers. has balanced the advantages and disadvan-
The standard requires your employer to tages resulting from the use of chelating
provide certain information to a physician to agents in various circumstances and has es-
aid in his or her examination of you. This in- tablished when the use of these agents is ac-
formation includes (1) the standard and its ceptable. The standard includes these ac-
appendices, (2) a description of your duties as cepted limitations due to a history of abuse
they relate to occupational lead exposure, (3) of chelation therapy by some lead compa-
your exposure level or anticipated exposure nies. The most widely used chelating agents
level, (4) a description of any personal pro- are calcium disodium EDTA, (Ca Na2 EDTA),
tective equipment you wear, (5) prior blood Calcium Disodium Versenate (Versenate),
lead level results, and (6) prior written med- and d-penicillamine (pencillamine or
ical opinions concerning you that the em- Cupramine).
ployer has. After a medical examination or The standard prohibits ‘‘prophylactic che-
consultation the physician must prepare a lation’’ of any employee by any person the
written report which must contain (1) the employer retains, supervises or controls. Pro-
physician’s opinion as to whether you have phylactic chelation is the routine use of
any medical condition which places you at chelating or similarly acting drugs to pre-
increased risk of material impairment to vent elevated blood levels in workers who
health from exposure to lead, (2) any rec- are occupationally exposed to lead, or the
ommended special protective measures to be use of these drugs to routinely lower blood
provided to you, (3) any blood lead level de- lead levels to predesignated concentrations
terminations, and (4) any recommended limi- believed to be ‘‘safe’’. It should be empha-
tation on your use of respirators. This last sized that where an employer takes a worker
element must include a determination of who has no symptoms of lead poisoning and
109
has chelation carried out by a physician (ei- The standard does not give specific in-
ther inside or outside of a hospital) solely to structions dealing with what an employer
reduce the worker’s blood lead level, that must do with a removed worker. Your job as-
will generally be considered prophylactic signment upon removal is a matter for you,
chelation. The use of a hospital and a physi- your employer and your union (if any) to
cian does not mean that prophylactic chela- work out consistent with existing procedures
tion is not being performed. Routine chela- for job assignments. Each removal must be
tion to prevent increased or reduce current accomplished in a manner consistent with
blood lead levels is unacceptable whatever existing collective bargaining relationships.
the setting. Your employer is given broad discretion to
The standard allows the use of ‘‘thera- implement temporary removals so long as no
peutic’’ or ‘‘diagnostic’’ chelation if adminis- attempt is made to override existing agree-
tered under the supervision of a licensed ments. Similarly, a removed worker is pro-
physician in a clinical setting with thorough vided no right to veto an employer’s choice
and appropriate medical monitoring. Thera- which satisfies the standard.
peutic chelation responds to severe lead poi- In most cases, employers will likely trans-
soning where there are marked symptoms. fer removed employees to other jobs with
Diagnostic chelation involved giving a pa- sufficiently low lead exposure. Alternatively,
tient a dose of the drug then collecting all a worker’s hours may be reduced so that the
urine excreted for some period of time as an time weighted average exposure is reduced,
aid to the diagnosis of lead poisoning. or he or she may be temporarily laid off if no
In cases where the examining physician de- other alternative is feasible.
termines that chelation is appropriate, you In all of these situation, MRP benefits
must be notified in writing of this fact before must be provided during the period of re-
such treatment. This will inform you of a po- moval—i.e., you continue to receive the
tentially harmful treatment, and allow you same earnings, seniority, and other rights
to obtain a second opinion. and benefits you would have had if you had
not been removed. Earnings includes more
IX. Medical Removal Protection—Paragraph than just your base wage; it includes over-
(K) time, shift differentials, incentives, and
Excessive lead absorption subjects you to other compensation you would have earned if
increased risk of disease. Medical removal you had not been removed. During the period
protection (MRP) is a means of protecting of removal you must also be provided with
you when, for whatever reasons, other meth- appropriate follow-up medical surveillance.
ods, such as engineering controls, work prac- If you were removed because your blood lead
tices, and respirators, have failed to provide level was too high, you must be provided
the protection you need. MRP involves the with a monthly blood test. If a medical opin-
temporary removal of a worker from his or ion caused your removal, you must be pro-
her regular job to a place of significantly vided medical tests or examinations that the
lower exposure without any loss of earnings, doctor believes to be appropriate. If you do
seniority, or other employment rights or not participate in this follow up medical sur-
benefits. The purpose of this program is to veillance, you may lose your eligibility for
cease further lead absorption and allow your MRP benefits.
body to naturally excrete lead which has pre- When you are medically eligible to return
viously been absorbed. Temporary medical to your former job, your employer must re-
removal can result from an elevated blood turn you to your ‘‘former job status.’’ This
lead level, or a medical opinion. For up to 18 means that you are entitled to the position,
months, or for as long as the job the em- wages, benefits, etc., you would have had if
ployee was removed from lasts, protection is you had not been removed. If you would still
provided as a result of either form of re- be in your old job if no removal had occurred
moval. The vast majority of removed work- that is where you go back. If not, you are re-
ers, however, will return to their former jobs turned consistent with whatever job assign-
long before this eighteen month period ex- ment discretion your employer would have
pires. had if no removal had occurred. MRP only
You may also be removed from exposure seeks to maintain your rights, not expand
even if your blood lead level is below 50 μg/ them or diminish them.
dl if a final medical determination indicates If you are removed under MRP and you are
that you temporarily need reduced lead ex- also eligible for worker compensation or
posure for medical reasons. If the physician other compensation for lost wages, your em-
who is implementing your employers med- ployer’s MRP benefits obligation is reduced
ical program makes a final written opinion by the amount that you actually receive
recommending your removal or other special from these other sources. This is also true if
protective measures, your employer must you obtain other employment during the
implement the physician’s recommendation. time you are laid off with MRP benefits.
If you are removed in this manner, you may The standard also covers situations where
only be returned when the doctor indicates an employer voluntarily removes a worker
that it is safe for you to do so. from exposure to lead due to the effects of
110
lead on the employee’s medical condition, employer is also required to keep all records
even though the standard does not require of biological monitoring and medical exam-
removal. In these situations MRP benefits ination results. These records must include
must still be provided as though the stand- the names of the employees, the physician’s
ard required removal. Finally, it is impor- written opinion, and a copy of the results of
tant to note that in all cases where removal the examination. Medical records must be
is required, respirators cannot be used as a preserved and maintained for the duration of
substitute. Respirators may be used before employment plus 30 years. However, if the
removal becomes necessary, but not as an al- employee’s duration of employment is less
ternative to a transfer to a low exposure job, than one year, the employer need not retain
or to a lay-off with MRP benefits. that employee’s medical records beyond the
period of employment if they are provided to
X. Employee Information and Training— the employee upon termination of employ-
Paragraph (L) ment.
Your employer is required to provide an in- Recordkeeping is also required if you are
formation and training program for all em- temporarily removed from your job under
ployees exposed to lead above the action the medical removal protection program.
level or who may suffer skin or eye irritation This record must include your name and so-
from lead compounds such as lead arsenate cial security number, the date of your re-
or lead azide. The program must train these moval and return, how the removal was or is
employees regarding the specific hazards as- being accomplished, and whether or not the
sociated with their work environment, pro- reason for the removal was an elevated blood
tective measures which can be taken, includ- lead level. Your employer is required to keep
ing the contents of any compliance plan in each medical removal record only for as long
effect, the danger of lead to their bodies (in- as the duration of an employee’s employ-
cluding their reproductive systems), and ment.
their rights under the standard. All employ- The standard requires that if you request
ees must be trained prior to initial assign- to see or copy environmental monitoring,
ment to areas where there is a possibility of blood lead level monitoring, or medical re-
exposure over the action level. moval records, they must be made available
This training program must also be pro- to you or to a representative that you au-
vided at least annually thereafter unless fur- thorize. Your union also has access to these
ther exposure above the action level will not records. Medical records other than BLL’s
occur. must also be provided upon request to you,
to your physician or to any other person
XI. Signs—Paragraph (M) whom you may specifically designate. Your
The standard requires that the following union does not have access to your personal
warning sign be posted in work areas when medical records unless you authorize their
the exposure to lead is above the PEL: access.
DANGER XIII. Observation of Monitoring—Paragraph
LEAD WORK AREA (O)
MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UN-
When air monitoring for lead is performed
BORN CHILD
CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL at your workplace as required by this stand-
NERVOUS SYSTEM ard, your employer must allow you or some-
DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE IN THIS one you designate to act as an observer of
AREA the monitoring. Observers are entitled to an
explanation of the measurement procedure,
Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use and to record the results obtained. Since re-
the following legend in lieu of that specified sults will not normally be available at the
above: time of the monitoring, observers are enti-
WARNING tled to record or receive the results of the
LEAD WORK AREA monitoring when returned by the laboratory.
POISON Your employer is required to provide the ob-
NO SMOKING OR EATING server with any personal protective devices
required to be worn by employees working in
XII. Recordkeeping—Paragraph (N) the area that is being monitored. The em-
Your employer is required to keep all ployer must require the observer to wear all
records of exposure monitoring for airborne such equipment and to comply with all other
lead. These records must include the name applicable safety and health procedures.
and job classification of employees meas-
XIV. For Additional Information
ured, details of the sampling and analytical
techniques, the results of this sampling, and A. A copy of the interim standard for lead
the type of respiratory protection being in construction can be obtained free of
worn by the person sampled. Such records charge by calling or writing the OSHA Office
are to be retained for at least 30 years. Your of Publications, room N–3101, United States
111
Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210: fects on both male and female reproductive
Telephone (202) 219–4667. capacity and on the fetus are also discussed.
B. Additional information about the stand- Section 3 outlines the recommended med-
ard, its enforcement, and your employer’s ical evaluation of the worker exposed to in-
compliance can be obtained from the nearest organic lead, including details of the medical
OSHA Area Office listed in your telephone history, physical examination, and rec-
directory under United States Government/ ommended laboratory tests, which are based
Department of Labor. on the toxic effects of lead as discussed in
Section 2.
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.62—MEDICAL Section 4 provides detailed information
SURVEILLANCE GUIDELINES concerning the laboratory tests available for
the monitoring of exposed workers. Included
Introduction
also is a discussion of the relative value of
The primary purpose of the Occupational each test and the limitations and pre-
Safety and Health Act of 1970 is to assure, so cautions which are necessary in the interpre-
far as possible, safe and healthful working tation of the laboratory results.
conditions for every working man and
woman. The interim final occupational I. Medical Surveillance and Monitoring Re-
health standard for lead in construction is quirements for Workers Exposed to Inorganic
designed to protect workers exposed to inor- Lead
ganic lead including metallic lead, all inor- Under the interim final standard for inor-
ganic lead compounds and organic lead ganic lead in the construction industry, ini-
soaps. tial medical surveillance consisting of bio-
Under this interim final standard occupa- logical monitoring to include blood lead and
tional exposure to inorganic lead is to be ZPP level determination shall be provided to
limited to 50 μg/m3 (micrograms per cubic employees exposed to lead at or above the
meter) based on an 8 hour time-weighted av- action level on any one day. In addition, a
erage (TWA). This permissible exposure limit program of biological monitoring is to be
(PEL) must be achieved through a combina- made available to all employees exposed
tion of engineering, work practice and ad- above the action level at any time and addi-
ministrative controls to the extent feasible. tional medical surveillance is to be made
Where these controls are in place but are available to all employees exposed to lead
found not to reduce employee exposures to or above 30 μg/m3 TWA for more than 30 days
below the PEL, they must be used nonethe- each year and whose BLL exceeds 40 μg/dl.
less, and supplemented with respirators to This program consists of periodic blood sam-
meet the 50 μg/m3 exposure limit. pling and medical evaluation to be per-
The standard also provides for a program formed on a schedule which is defined by pre-
of biological monitoring for employees ex- vious laboratory results, worker complaints
posed to lead above the action level at any or concerns, and the clinical assessment of
time, and additional medical surveillance for the examining physician.
all employees exposed to levels of inorganic Under this program, the blood lead level
lead above 30 μg/m3 (TWA) for more than 30 (BLL) of all employees who are exposed to
days per year and whose BLL exceeds 40 μg/ lead above 30 μg/m3 for more than 30 days per
dl. year or whose blood lead is above 40 μg/dl but
The purpose of this document is to outline exposed for no more than 30 days per year is
the medical surveillance provisions of the in- to be determined at least every two months
terim standard for inorganic lead in con- for the first six months of exposure and
struction, and to provide further information every six months thereafter. The frequency
to the physician regarding the examination is increased to every two months for employ-
and evaluation of workers exposed to inor- ees whose last blood lead level was 40 μg/dl or
ganic lead. above. For employees who are removed from
Section 1 provides a detailed description of exposure to lead due to an elevated blood
the monitoring procedure including the re- lead, a new blood lead level must be meas-
quired frequency of blood testing for exposed ured monthly. A zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP)
workers, provisions for medical removal pro- measurement is strongly recommended on
tection (MRP), the recommended right of the each occasion that a blood lead level meas-
employee to a second medical opinion, and urement is made.
notification and recordkeeping requirements An annual medical examination and con-
of the employer. A discussion of the require- sultation performed under the guidelines dis-
ments for respirator use and respirator mon- cussed in Section 3 is to be made available to
itoring and OSHA’s position on prophylactic each employee exposed above 30 μg/m3 for
chelation therapy are also included in this more than 30 days per year for whom a blood
section. test conducted at any time during the pre-
Section 2 discusses the toxic effects and ceding 12 months indicated a blood lead level
clinical manifestations of lead poisoning and at or above 40 μg/dl. Also, an examination is
effects of lead intoxication on enzymatic to be given to all employees prior to their as-
pathways in heme synthesis. The adverse ef- signment to an area in which airborne lead
112
concentrations reach or exceed the 30 μg/m3 employer must implement these rec-
for more than 30 days per year. In addition, ommendations.
a medical examination must be provided as Recommendations may be more stringent
soon as possible after notification by an em- than the specific provisions of the standard.
ployee that the employee has developed The examining physician, therefore, is given
signs or symptoms commonly associated broad flexibility to tailor special protective
with lead intoxication, that the employee procedures to the needs of individual em-
desires medical advice regarding lead expo- ployees. This flexibility extends to the eval-
sure and the ability to procreate a healthy uation and management of pregnant workers
child, or that the employee has dem- and male and female workers who are plan-
onstrated difficulty in breathing during a ning to raise children. Based on the history,
respirator fitting test or during respirator physical examination, and laboratory stud-
use. An examination is also to be made avail- ies, the physician might recommend special
able to each employee removed from expo- protective measures or medical removal for
sure to lead due to a risk of sustaining mate- an employee who is pregnant or who is plan-
rial impairment to health, or otherwise lim- ning to conceive a child when, in the physi-
ited or specially protected pursuant to med- cian’s judgment, continued exposure to lead
ical recommendations. at the current job would pose a significant
Results of biological monitoring or the rec- risk. The return of the employee to his or
ommendations of an examining physician her former job status, or the removal of spe-
may necessitate removal of an employee cial protections or limitations, depends upon
from further lead exposure pursuant to the the examining physician determining that
standard’s medical removal protection the employee is no longer at increased risk
(MRP) program. The object of the MRP proof material impairment or that special meas-
gram is to provide temporary medical re- ures are no longer needed.
moval to workers either with substantially During the period of any form of special
elevated blood lead levels or otherwise at protection or removal, the employer must
risk of sustaining material health impair- maintain the worker’s earnings, seniority,
ment from continued substantial exposure to and other employment rights and benefits
lead. (as though the worker had not been removed)
Under the standard’s ultimate worker re- for a period of up to 18 months or for as long
moval criteria, a worker is to be removed as the job the employee was removed from
from any work having an eight hour TWA lasts if less than 18 months. This economic
exposure to lead of 30 μg/m3 when his or her protection will maximize meaningful worker
blood lead level reaches 50 μg/dl and is con- participation in the medical surveillance
firmed by a second follow-up blood lead level program, and is appropriate as part of the
performed within two weeks after the em- employer’s overall obligation to provide a
ployer receives the results of the first blood safe and healthful workplace. The provisions
sampling test. Return of the employee to his of MRP benefits during the employee’s re-
or her job status depends on a worker’s blood moval period may, however, be conditioned
lead level declining to 40 μg/dl. upon participation in medical surveillance.
As part of the interim standard, the em- The lead standard provides for a multiple
ployer is required to notify in writing each physician review in cases where the em-
employee whose blood lead level exceeds 40 ployee wishes a second opinion concerning
μg/dl. In addition each such employee is to be potential lead poisoning or toxicity. If an
informed that the standard requires medical employee wishes a second opinion, he or she
removal with MRP benefits, discussed below, can make an appointment with a physician
when an employee’s blood lead level exceeds of his or her choice. This second physician
the above defined limit. will review the findings, recommendations or
In addition to the above blood lead level determinations of the first physician and
criterion, temporary worker removal may conduct any examinations, consultations or
also take place as a result of medical deter- tests deemed necessary in an attempt to
minations and recommendations. Written make a final medical determination. If the
medical opinions must be prepared after first and second physicians do not agree in
each examination pursuant to the standard. their assessment they must try to resolve
If the examining physician includes a med- their differences. If they cannot reach an
ical finding, determination or opinion that agreement then they must designate a third
the employee has a medical condition which physician to resolve the dispute.
places the employee at increased risk of ma- The employer must provide examining and
terial health impairment from exposure to consulting physicians with the following spe-
lead, then the employee must be removed cific information: A copy of the lead regula-
from exposure to lead at or above 30 μg/m3. tions and all appendices, a description of the
Alternatively, if the examining physician employee’s duties as related to exposure, the
recommends special protective measures for exposure level or anticipated level to lead
an employee (e.g., use of a powered air puri- and any other toxic substances (if applica-
fying respirator) or recommends limitations ble), a description of personal protective
on an employee’s exposure to lead, then the equipment used, blood lead levels, and all
113
prior written medical opinions regarding the use must be justified on the basis of expected
employee in the employer’s possession or benefits to the worker. Unless frank and se-
control. The employer must also obtain from vere symptoms are present, therapeutic che-
the physician and provide the employee with lation is not recommended, given the oppor-
a written medical opinion containing blood tunity to remove a worker from exposure
lead levels, the physicians’s opinion as to and allow the body to naturally excrete ac-
whether the employee is at risk of material cumulated lead. As a diagnostic aid, the che-
impairment to health, any recommended lation mobilization test using CA-EDTA has
protective measures for the employee if fur- limited applicability. According to some in-
ther exposure is permitted, as well as any vestigators, the test can differentiate be-
recommended limitations upon an employ- tween lead-induced and other nephropathies.
ee’s use of respirators. The test may also provide an estimation of
Employers must instruct each physician the mobile fraction of the total body lead
not to reveal to the employer in writing or burden.
in any other way his or her findings, labora- Employers are required to assure that ac-
tory results, or diagnoses which are felt to curate records are maintained on exposure
be unrelated to occupational lead exposure. assessment, including environmental moni-
They must also instruct each physician to toring, medical surveillance, and medical re-
advise the employee of any occupationally or moval for each employee. Exposure assess-
non-occupationally related medical condi- ment records must be kept for at least 30
tion requiring further treatment or evalua- years. Medical surveillance records must be
tion. kept for the duration of employment plus 30
The standard provides for the use of res- years except in cases where the employment
pirators where engineering and other pri- was less than one year. If duration of em-
mary controls are not effective. However, ployment is less than one year, the employer
the use of respirator protection shall not be need not retain this record beyond the term
used in lieu of temporary medical removal of employment if the record is provided to
due to elevated blood lead levels or findings the employee upon termination of employ-
that an employee is at risk of material ment. Medical removal records also must be
health impairment. This is based on the nu- maintained for the duration of employment.
merous inadequacies of respirators including
All records required under the standard must
skin rash where the facepiece makes contact
be made available upon request to the As-
with the skin, unacceptable stress to breath-
sistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational
ing in some workers with underlying
Safety and Health and the Director of the
cardiopulmonary impairment, difficulty in
National Institute for Occupational Safety
providing adequate fit, the tendency for res-
and Health. Employers must also make envi-
pirators to create additional hazards by
ronmental and biological monitoring and
interfering with vision, hearing, and mobil-
medical removal records available to af-
ity, and the difficulties of assuring the max-
fected employees and to former employees or
imum effectiveness of a complicated work
practice program involving respirators. Res- their authorized employee representatives.
pirators do, however, serve a useful function Employees or their specifically designated
where engineering and work practice con- representatives have access to their entire
trols are inadequate by providing supple- medical surveillance records.
mentary, interim, or short-term protection, In addition, the standard requires that the
provided they are properly selected for the employer inform all workers exposed to lead
environment in which the employee will be at or above 30 μg/m3 of the provisions of the
working, properly fitted to the employee, standard and all its appendices, the purpose
maintained and cleaned periodically, and and description of medical surveillance and
worn by the employee when required. provisions for medical removal protection if
In its interim final standard on occupa- temporary removal is required. An under-
tional exposure to inorganic lead in the con- standing of the potential health effects of
struction industry, OSHA has prohibited pro- lead exposure by all exposed employees along
phylactic chelation. Diagnostic and thera- with full understanding of their rights under
peutic chelation are permitted only under the lead standard is essential for an effective
the supervision of a licensed physician with monitoring program.
appropriate medical monitoring in an ac-
II. Adverse Health Effects of Inorganic Lead
ceptable clinical setting. The decision to ini-
tiate chelation therapy must be made on an Although the toxicity of lead has been
individual basis and take into account the known for 2,000 years, the knowledge of the
severity of symptoms felt to be a result of complex relationship between lead exposure
lead toxicity along with blood lead levels, and human response is still being refined.
ZPP levels, and other laboratory tests as ap- Significant research into the toxic prop-
propriate. EDTA and penicillamine which erties of lead continues throughout the
are the primary chelating agents used in the world, and it should be anticipated that our
therapy of occupational lead poisoning have understanding of thresholds of effects and
significant potential side effects and their margins of safety will be improved in future
114
years. The provisions of the lead standard over a working lifetime is considered to be a
are founded on two prime medical judg- material impairment of health.
ments: First, the prevention of adverse One of the eventual results of lead-induced
health effects from exposure to lead through- inhibition of enzymes in the heme synthesis
out a working lifetime requires that worker pathway is anemia which can be asymp-
blood lead levels be maintained at or below tomatic if mild but associated with a wide
40 μg/dl and second, the blood lead levels of array of symptoms including dizziness, fa-
workers, male or female, who intend to par- tigue, and tachycardia when more severe.
ent in the near future should be maintained Studies have indicated that lead levels as
below 30 μg/dl to minimize adverse reproduc- low as 50 μg/dl can be associated with a defi-
tive health effects to the parents and devel- nite decreased hemoglobin, although most
oping fetus. The adverse effects of lead on re- cases of lead-induced anemia, as well as
production are being actively researched and shortened red-cell survival times, occur at
OSHA encourages the physician to remain lead levels exceeding 80 μg/dl. Inhibited he-
abreast of recent developments in the area to moglobin synthesis is more common in
best advise pregnant workers or workers chronic cases whereas shortened erythrocyte
planning to conceive children. life span is more common in acute cases.
The spectrum of health effects caused by In lead-induced anemias, there is usually a
lead exposure can be subdivided into five de- reticulocytosis along with the presence of
velopmental stages: Normal, physiological basophilic stippling, and ringed sideroblasts,
changes of uncertain significance, although none of the above are
pathophysiological changes, overt symptoms pathognomonic for lead-induced anemia.
(morbidity), and mortality. Within this proc- 2. Neurological Effects. Inorganic lead has
ess there are no sharp distinctions, but rath- been found to have toxic effects on both the
er a continuum of effects. Boundaries be- central and peripheral nervous systems. The
earliest stages of lead-induced central nerv-
tween categories overlap due to the wide var-
ous system effects first manifest themselves
iation of individual responses and exposures
in the form of behavioral disturbances and
in the working population. OSHA’s develop-
central nervous system symptoms including
ment of the lead standard focused on
irritability, restlessness, insomnia and other
pathophysiological changes as well as later
sleep disturbances, fatigue, vertigo, head-
stages of disease.
ache, poor memory, tremor, depression, and
1. Heme Synthesis Inhibition. The earliest apathy. With more severe exposure, symp-
demonstrated effect of lead involves its abil- toms can progress to drowsiness, stupor, hal-
ity to inhibit at least two enzymes of the lucinations, delirium, convulsions and coma.
heme synthesis pathway at very low blood The most severe and acute form of lead
levels. Inhibition of delta aminolevulinic poisoning which usually follows ingestion or
acid dehydrase (ALA-D) which catalyzes the inhalation of large amounts of lead is acute
conversion of delta-aminolevulinic acid encephalopathy which may arise precipi-
(ALA) to protoporphyrin is observed at a tously with the onset of intractable seizures,
blood lead level below 20 μg/dl. At a blood coma, cardiorespiratory arrest, and death
lead level of 40 μg/dl, more than 20% of the within 48 hours.
population would have 70% inhibition of While there is disagreement about what ex-
ALA-D. There is an exponential increase in posure levels are needed to produce the ear-
ALA excretion at blood lead levels greater liest symptoms, most experts agree that
than 40 μg/dl. symptoms definitely can occur at blood lead
Another enzyme, ferrochelatase, is also in- levels of 60 μg/dl whole blood and therefore
hibited at low blood lead levels. Inhibition of recommend a 40 μg/dl maximum. The central
ferrochelatase leads to increased free eryth- nervous system effects frequently are not re-
rocyte protoporphyrin (FEP) in the blood versible following discontinued exposure or
which can then bind to zinc to yield zinc chelation therapy and when improvement
protoporphyrin. At a blood lead level of 50 does occur, it is almost always only partial.
μg/dl or greater, nearly 100% of the popu- The peripheral neuropathy resulting from
lation will have an increase in FEP. There is lead exposure characteristically involves
also an exponential relationship between only motor function with minimal sensory
blood lead levels greater than 40 μg/dl and damage and has a marked predilection for
the associated ZPP level, which has led to the extensor muscles of the most active ex-
the development of the ZPP screening test tremity. The peripheral neuropathy can
for lead exposure. occur with varying degrees of severity. The
While the significance of these effects is earliest and mildest form which can be de-
subject to debate, it is OSHA’s position that tected in workers with blood lead levels as
these enzyme disturbances are early stages low as 50 μg/dl is manifested by slowing of
of a disease process which may eventually motor nerve conduction velocity often with-
result in the clinical symptoms of lead poi- out clinical symptoms. With progression of
soning. Whether or not the effects do the neuropathy there is development of pain-
progress to the later stages of clinical dis- less extensor muscle weakness usually in-
ease, disruption of these enzyme processes volving the extensor muscles of the fingers
115
and hand in the most active upper extrem- sperm with decreased motility
ity, followed in severe cases by wrist drop or, (asthenospermia) can all occur.
much less commonly, foot drop. Teratospermia has been noted at mean blood
In addition to slowing of nerve conduction, lead levels of 53 μg/dl and hypospermia and
electromyographical studies in patients with asthenospermia at 41 μg/dl. Furthermore,
blood lead levels greater than 50 μg/dl have there appears to be a dose-response relation-
demonstrated a decrease in the number of ship for teratospermia in lead exposed work-
acting motor unit potentials, an increase in ers.
the duration of motor unit potentials, and Women exposed to lead may experience
spontaneous pathological activity including menstrual disturbances including
fibrillations and fasciculations. Whether dysmenorrhea, menorrhagia and amenor-
these effects occur at levels of 40 μg/dl is un- rhea. Following exposure to lead, women
determined. have a higher frequency of sterility, pre-
While the peripheral neuropathies can oc-
mature births, spontaneous miscarriages,
casionally be reversed with therapy, again
and stillbirths.
such recovery is not assured particularly in
the more severe neuropathies and often im- Germ cells can be affected by lead and
provement is only partial. The lack of re- cause genetic damage in the egg or sperm
versibility is felt to be due in part to seg- cells before conception and result in failure
mental demyelination. to implant, miscarriage, stillbirth, or birth
3. Gastrointestinal. Lead may also affect defects.
the gastrointestinal system producing ab- Infants of mothers with lead poisoning
dominal colic or diffuse abdominal pain, con- have a higher mortality during the first year
stipation, obstipation, diarrhea, anorexia, and suffer from lowered birth weights, slower
nausea and vomiting. Lead colic rarely de- growth, and nervous system disorders.
velops at blood lead levels below 80 μg/dl. Lead can pass through the placental bar-
4. Renal. Renal toxicity represents one of rier and lead levels in the mother’s blood are
the most serious health effects of lead poi- comparable to concentrations of lead in the
soning. In the early stages of disease nuclear umbilical cord at birth. Transplacental pas-
inclusion bodies can frequently be identified sage becomes detectable at 12–14 weeks of
in proximal renal tubular cells. Renal func- gestation and increases until birth.
tion remains normal and the changes in this There is little direct data on damage to the
stage are probably reversible. With more ad- fetus from exposure to lead but it is gen-
vanced disease there is progressive intersti- erally assumed that the fetus and newborn
tial fibrosis and impaired renal function. would be at least as susceptible to neuro-
Eventually extensive interstitial fibrosis en- logical damage as young children. Blood lead
sues with sclerotic glomeruli and dilated and levels of 50–60 μg/dl in children can cause sig-
atrophied proximal tubules; all represent end nificant neurobehavioral impairments and
stage kidney disease. Azotemia can be pro- there is evidence of hyperactivity at blood
gressive, eventually resulting in frank ure-
levels as low as 25 μg/dl. Given the overall
mia necessitating dialysis. There is occa-
body of literature concerning the adverse
sionally associated hypertension and
health effects of lead in children, OSHA feels
hyperuricemia with or without gout.
that the blood lead level in children should
Early kidney disease is difficult to detect.
The urinalysis is normal in early lead be maintained below 30 μg/dl with a popu-
nephropathy and the blood urea nitrogen and lation mean of 15 μg/dl. Blood lead levels in
serum creatinine increase only when two- the fetus and newborn likewise should not
thirds of kidney function is lost. Measure- exceed 30 μg/dl.
ment of creatinine clearance can often de- Because of lead’s ability to pass through
tect earlier disease as can other methods of the placental barrier and also because of the
measurement of glomerular filtration rate. demonstrated adverse effects of lead on re-
An abnormal Ca-EDTA mobilization test has productive function in both the male and fe-
been used to differentiate between lead-in- male as well as the risk of genetic damage of
duced and other nephropathies, but this pro- lead on both the ovum and sperm, OSHA rec-
cedure is not widely accepted. A form of ommends a 30 μg/dl maximum permissible
Fanconi syndrome with aminoaciduria, blood lead level in both males and females
glycosuria, and hyperphosphaturia indi- who wish to bear children.
cating severe injury to the proximal renal 6. Other toxic effects. Debate and research
tubules is occasionally seen in children. continue on the effects of lead on the human
5. Reproductive effects. Exposure to lead body. Hypertension has frequently been
can have serious effects on reproductive noted in occupationally exposed individuals
function in both males and females. In male although it is difficult to assess whether this
workers exposed to lead there can be a de- is due to lead’s adverse effects on the kidney
crease in sexual drive, impotence, decreased or if some other mechanism is involved. Vas-
ability to produce healthy sperm, and ste- cular and electrocardiographic changes have
rility. Malformed sperm (teratospermia), de- been detected but have not been well charac-
creased number of sperm (hypospermia), and terized. Lead is thought to impair thyroid
116
function and interfere with the pituitary-ad- rent medications including proprietary drug
renal axis, but again these effects have not intake, previous surgeries and hospitaliza-
been well defined. tions, allergies, smoking history, alcohol
consumption, and also non-occupational lead
III. Medical Evaluation exposures such as hobbies (hunting, riflery).
The most important principle in evalu- Also known childhood exposures should be
ating a worker for any occupational disease elicited. Any previous history of
including lead poisoning is a high index of hematological, neurological, gastro-
suspicion on the part of the examining physi- intestinal, renal, psychological, gyneco-
cian. As discussed in Section 2, lead can af- logical, genetic, or reproductive problems
fect numerous organ systems and produce a should be specifically noted.
wide array of signs and symptoms, most of A careful and complete review of systems
which are non-specific and subtle in nature must be performed to assess both recognized
at least in the early stages of disease. Unless complaints and subtle or slowly acquired
serious concern for lead toxicity is present, symptoms which the worker might not ap-
many of the early clues to diagnosis may preciate as being significant. The review of
easily be overlooked. symptoms should include the following:
The crucial initial step in the medical 1. General—weight loss, fatigue, decreased
evaluation is recognizing that a worker’s appetite.
employment can result in exposure to lead. 2. Head, Eyes, Ears, Nose, Throat
The worker will frequently be able to define (HEENT)—headaches, visual disturbances or
exposures to lead and lead containing mate- decreased visual acuity, hearing deficits or
rials but often will not volunteer this infor- tinnitus, pigmentation of the oral mucosa,
mation unless specifically asked. In other or metallic taste in mouth.
situations the worker may not know of any 3. Cardio-pulmonary—shortness of breath,
exposures to lead but the suspicion might be cough, chest pains, palpitations, or orthop-
raised on the part of the physician because of nea.
the industry or occupation of the worker. 4. Gastrointestinal—nausea, vomiting,
Potential occupational exposure to lead and heartburn, abdominal pain, constipation or
its compounds occur in many occupations in diarrhea.
the construction industry, including demoli- 5. Neurologic—irritability, insomnia,
tion and salvaging operations, removal or weakness (fatigue), dizziness, loss of mem-
encapsulation of materials containing lead, ory, confusion, hallucinations,
construction, alteration, repair or renova- incoordination, ataxia, decreased strength in
tion of structures containing lead, transpor- hands or feet, disturbances in gait, difficulty
tation, disposal, storage or containment of in climbing stairs, or seizures.
lead or lead-containing materials on con- 6. Hematologic—pallor, easy fatigability,
struction sites, and maintenance operations abnormal blood loss, melena.
associated with construction activities. 7. Reproductive (male and female and
Once the possibility for lead exposure is spouse where relevant)—history of infer-
raised, the focus can then be directed toward tility, impotence, loss of libido, abnormal
eliciting information from the medical his- menstrual periods, history of miscarriages,
tory, physical exam, and finally from labora- stillbirths, or children with birth defects.
tory data to evaluate the worker for poten- 8. Musculo-skeletal—muscle and joint
tial lead toxicity. pains.
A complete and detailed work history is The physical examination should empha-
important in the initial evaluation. A listing size the neurological, gastrointestinal, and
of all previous employment with information cardiovascular systems. The worker’s weight
on job description, exposure to fumes or and blood pressure should be recorded and
dust, known exposures to lead or other toxic the oral mucosa checked for pigmentation
substances, a description of any personal characteristic of a possible Burtonian or lead
protective equipment used, and previous line on the gingiva. It should be noted, how-
medical surveillance should all be included ever, that the lead line may not be present
in the worker’s record. Where exposure to even in severe lead poisoning if good oral hy-
lead is suspected, information concerning giene is practiced.
on-the-job personal hygiene, smoking or eat- The presence of pallor on skin examination
ing habits in work areas, laundry procedures, may indicate an anemia which, if severe,
and use of any protective clothing or res- might also be associated with a tachycardia.
piratory protection equipment should be If an anemia is suspected, an active search
noted. A complete work history is essential for blood loss should be undertaken includ-
in the medical evaluation of a worker with ing potential blood loss through the gastro-
suspected lead toxicity, especially when long intestinal tract.
term effects such as neurotoxicity and A complete neurological examination
nephrotoxicity are considered. should include an adequate mental status

The medical history is also of fundamental evaluation including a search for behavioral
importance and should include a listing of and psychological disturbances, memory
all past and current medical conditions, cur- testing, evaluation for irritability, insomnia,
117
hallucinations, and mental clouding. Gait An electrocardiogram and chest x-ray may
and coordination should be examined along be obtained as deemed appropriate.
with close observation for tremor. A detailed Sophisticated and highly specialized test-
evaluation of peripheral nerve function ining should not be done routinely and where
cluding careful sensory and motor function indicated should be under the direction of a
testing is warranted. Strength testing par- specialist.
ticularly of extensor muscle groups of all ex-
tremities is of fundamental importance. IV. Laboratory Evaluation
Cranial nerve evaluation should also be in- The blood lead level at present remains the
cluded in the routine examination. single most important test to monitor lead
The abdominal examination should include exposure and is the test used in the medical
auscultation for bowel sounds and abdominal surveillance program under the lead stand-
bruits and palpation for organomegaly, ard to guide employee medical removal. The
masses, and diffuse abdominal tenderness. ZPP has several advantages over the blood
Cardiovascular examination should evalu- lead level. Because of its relatively recent
ate possible early signs of congestive heart development and the lack of extensive data
failure. Pulmonary status should be ad- concerning its interpretation, the ZPP cur-
dressed particularly if respirator protection rently remains an ancillary test.
is contemplated. This section will discuss the blood lead
As part of the medical evaluation, the in- level and ZPP in detail and will outline their
terim lead standard requires the following relative advantages and disadvantages.
laboratory studies: Other blood tests currently available to
1. Blood lead level evaluate lead exposure will also be reviewed.
2. Hemoglobin and hematocrit determina- The blood lead level is a good index of cur-
tions, red cell indices, and examination of rent or recent lead absorption when there is
the peripheral blood smear to evaluate red no anemia present and when the worker has
blood cell morphology not taken any chelating agents. However,
3. Blood urea nitrogen blood lead levels along with urinary lead lev-
4. Serum creatinine els do not necessarily indicate the total body
burden of lead and are not adequate meas-
5. Routine urinalysis with microscopic ex-
ures of past exposure. One reason for this is
amination.
that lead has a high affinity for bone and up
6. A zinc protoporphyrin level.
to 90% of the body’s total lead is deposited
In addition to the above, the physician is there. A very important component of the
authorized to order any further laboratory total lead body burden is lead in soft tissue
or other tests which he or she deems nec- (liver, kidney, and brain). This fraction of
essary in accordance with sound medical the lead body burden, the biologically active
practice. The evaluation must also include lead, is not entirely reflected by blood lead
pregnancy testing or laboratory evaluation levels since it is a function of the dynamics
of male fertility if requested by the em- of lead absorption, distribution, deposition
ployee. Additional tests which are probably in bone and excretion. Following discontinu-
not warranted on a routine basis but may be ation of exposure to lead, the excess body
appropriate when blood lead and ZPP levels burden is only slowly mobilized from bone
are equivocal include delta aminolevulinic and other relatively stable body stores and
acid and coproporphyrin concentrations in excreted. Consequently, a high blood lead
the urine, and dark-field illumination for de- level may only represent recent heavy expo-
tection of basophilic stippling in red blood sure to lead without a significant total body
cells. excess and likewise a low blood lead level
If an anemia is detected further studies in- does not exclude an elevated total body bur-
cluding a careful examination of the periph- den of lead.
eral smear, reticulocyte count, stool for oc- Also due to its correlation with recent ex-
cult blood, serum iron, total iron binding ca- posures, the blood lead level may vary con-
pacity, bilirubin, and, if appropriate, vita- siderably over short time intervals.
min B12 and folate may be of value in at- To minimize laboratory error and erro-
tempting to identify the cause of the ane- neous results due to contamination, blood
mia. specimens must be carefully collected after
If a peripheral neuropathy is suspected, thorough cleaning of the skin with appro-
nerve conduction studies are warranted both priate methods using lead-free blood con-
for diagnosis and as a basis to monitor any tainers and analyzed by a reliable labora-
therapy. tory. Under the standard, samples must be
If renal disease is questioned, a 24 hour analyzed in laboratories which are approved
urine collection for creatinine clearance, by OSHA. Analysis is to be made using atom-
protein, and electrolytes may be indicated. ic absorption spectrophotometry, anodic

Elevated uric acid levels may result from stripping voltammetry or any method which
lead-induced renal disease and a serum uric meets the accuracy requirements set forth
acid level might be performed. by the standard.
118
The determination of lead in urine is gen- by the standard by an OSHA approved lab-
erally considered a less reliable monitoring oratory which is experienced in lead level de-
technique than analysis of whole blood pri- terminations. Repeat periodic blood lead
marily due to individual variability in uri- studies should be obtained in all individuals
nary excretion capacity as well as the tech- with elevated ZPP levels to be certain that
nical difficulty of obtaining accurate 24 hour an associated elevated blood lead level has
urine collections. In addition, workers with not been missed due to transient fluctua-
renal insufficiency, whether due to lead or tions in blood leads.
some other cause, may have decreased lead ZPP has a characteristic fluorescence spec-
clearance and consequently urine lead levels trum with a peak at 594 nm which is detect-
may underestimate the true lead burden. able with a hematofluorimeter. The
Therefore, urine lead levels should not be hematofluorimeter is accurate and portable
used as a routine test. and can provide on-site, instantaneous re-
The zinc protoporphyrin test, unlike the sults for workers who can be frequently test-
blood lead determination, measures an ad- ed via a finger prick.
verse metabolic effect of lead and as such is However, careful attention must be given
a better indicator of lead toxicity than the to calibration and quality control proce-
level of blood lead itself. The level of ZPP re- dures. Limited data on blood lead-ZPP cor-
flects lead absorption over the preceding 3 to relations and the ZPP levels which are asso-
4 months, and therefore is a better indicator ciated with the adverse health effects dis-
of lead body burden. The ZPP requires more cussed in Section 2 are the major limitations
time than the blood lead to read signifi- of the test. Also it is difficult to correlate
cantly elevated levels; the return to normal
ZPP levels with environmental exposure and
after discontinuing lead exposure is also
there is some variation of response with age
slower. Furthermore, the ZPP test is sim-
and sex. Nevertheless, the ZPP promises to
pler, faster, and less expensive to perform
be an important diagnostic test for the early
and no contamination is possible. Many in-
detection of lead toxicity and its value will
vestigators believe it is the most reliable
increase as more data is collected regarding
means of monitoring chronic lead absorp-
its relationship to other manifestations of
tion.
lead poisoning.
Zinc protoporphyrin results from the inhi-
bition of the enzyme ferrochelatase which Levels of delta-aminolevulinic acid (ALA)
catalyzes the insertion of an iron molecule in the urine are also used as a measure of
into the protoporphyrin molecule, which lead exposure. Increasing concentrations of
then becomes heme. If iron is not inserted ALA are believed to result from the inhibi-
into the molecule then zinc, having a greater tion of the enzyme delta-aminolevulinic acid
affinity for protoporphyrin, takes the place dehydrase (ALA-D). Although the test is rel-
of the iron, forming ZPP. atively easy to perform, inexpensive, and
An elevation in the level of circulating rapid, the disadvantages include variability
ZPP may occur at blood lead levels as low as in results, the necessity to collect a com-
20–30 μg/dl in some workers. Once the blood plete 24 hour urine sample which has a spe-
lead level has reached 40 μg/dl there is more cific gravity greater than 1.010, and also the
marked rise in the ZPP value from its nor- fact that ALA decomposes in the presence of
mal range of less than 100 μg/dl100 ml. In- light.
creases in blood lead levels beyond 40 μg/100 The pattern of porphyrin excretion in the
g are associated with exponential increases urine can also be helpful in identifying lead
in ZPP. intoxication. With lead poisoning, the urine
Whereas blood lead levels fluctuate over concentrations of coproporphyrins I and II,
short time spans, ZPP levels remain rel- porphobilinogen and uroporphyrin I rise. The
atively stable. ZPP is measured directly in most important increase, however, is that of
red blood cells and is present for the cell’s coproporphyrin III; levels may exceed 5,000
entire 120 day life-span. Therefore, the ZPP μg/l in the urine in lead poisoned individuals,
level in blood reflects the average ZPP pro- but its correlation with blood lead levels and
duction over the previous 3–4 months and ZPP are not as good as those of ALA. In-
consequently the average lead exposure dur- creases in urinary porphyrins are not diag-
ing that time interval. nostic of lead toxicity and may be seen in
It is recommended that a hematocrit be de- porphyria, some liver diseases, and in pa-
termined whenever a confirmed ZPP of 50 μg/ tients with high reticulocyte counts.
100 ml whole blood is obtained to rule out a Summary. The Occupational Safety and
significant underlying anemia. If the ZPP is Health Administration’s interim standard
in excess of 100 μg/100 ml and not associated for inorganic lead in the construction indus-
with abnormal elevations in blood lead lev- try places significant emphasis on the med-
els, the laboratory should be checked to be ical surveillance of all workers exposed to
levels of inorganic lead above 30 μg/m3 TWA.
sure that blood leads were determined using

atomic absorption spectrophotometry anodic The physician has a fundamental role in this
stripping voltammetry, or any method which surveillance program, and in the operation of
meets the accuracy requirements set forth the medical removal protection program.
119
Even with adequate worker education on line for vehicle refueling), if such fuels
the adverse health effects of lead and appro- are not a part of a process containing
priate training in work practices, personal another highly hazardous chemical
hygiene and other control measures, the
physician has a primary responsibility for
covered by this standard;
evaluating potential lead toxicity in the (B) Flammable liquids with a
worker. It is only through a careful and de- flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) stored
tailed medical and work history, a complete in atmospheric tanks or transferred
physical examination and appropriate lab- that are kept below their normal boil-
oratory testing that an accurate assessment ing point without benefit of chilling or
can be made. Many of the adverse health ef- refrigeration.
fects of lead toxicity are either irreversible
or only partially reversible and therefore
(2) This section does not apply to:
early detection of disease is very important. (i) Retail facilities;
This document outlines the medical moni- (ii) Oil or gas well drilling or serv-
toring program as defined by the occupa- icing operations; or,
tional safety and health standard for inor- (iii) Normally unoccupied remote fa-
ganic lead. It reviews the adverse health ef- cilities.
fects of lead poisoning and describes the im- (b) Definitions. Atmospheric tank
portant elements of the history and physical means a storage tank which has been
examinations as they relate to these adverse
effects. Finally, the appropriate laboratory
designed to operate at pressures from
testing for evaluating lead exposure and tox- atmospheric through 0.5 p.s.i.g. (pounds
icity is presented. per square inch gauge, 3.45 Kpa).
It is hoped that this review and discussion Boiling point means the boiling point
will give the physician a better under- of a liquid at a pressure of 14.7 pounds
standing of the OSHA standard with the ulti- per square inch absolute (p.s.i.a.) (760
mate goal of protecting the health and well- mm.). For the purposes of this section,
being of the worker exposed to lead under his
where an accurate boiling point is un-
or her care.
available for the material in question,
[58 FR 26627, May 4, 1993, as amended at 58 or for mixtures which do not have a
FR 34218, June 24, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, constant boiling point, the 10 percent
1996; 63 FR 1296, Jan. 8, 1998; 70 FR 1143, Jan.
point of a distillation performed in ac-
5, 2005; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50191,
Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75588, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR cordance with the Standard Method of
33611, June 8, 2011; 76 FR 80741, Dec. 27, 2011; Test for Distillation of Petroleum
77 FR 17890, Mar. 26, 2012] Products, ASTM D-86-62, may be used
as the boiling point of the liquid.
§ 1926.64 Process safety management Catastrophic release means a major
of highly hazardous chemicals. uncontrolled emission, fire, or explo-
Purpose. This section contains re- sion, involving one or more highly haz-
quirements for preventing or mini- ardous chemicals, that presents serious
mizing the consequences of cata- danger to employees in the workplace.
strophic releases of toxic, reactive, Facility means the buildings, con-
flammable, or explosive chemicals. tainers or equipment which contain a
These releases may result in toxic, fire process.
or explosion hazards. Highly hazardous chemical means a
(a) Application. (1) This section ap- substance possessing toxic, reactive,
plies to the following: flammable, or explosive properties and
(i) A process which involves a chem- specified by paragraph (a)(1) of this
ical at or above the specified threshold section.
quantities listed in appendix A to this Hot work means work involving elec-
section; tric or gas welding, cutting, brazing, or
(ii) A process which involves a Cat- similar flame or spark-producing oper-
egory 1 flammable gas (as defined in ations.
§ 1910.1200(c)) or flammable liquid with Normally unoccupied remote facility
a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) on means a facility which is operated,
site in one location, in a quantity of maintained or serviced by employees
10,000 pounds (4535.9 kg) or more except who visit the facility only periodically
for: to check its operation and to perform
(A) Hydrocarbon fuels used solely for necessary operating or maintenance

workplace consumption as a fuel (e.g., tasks. No employees are permanently
propane used for comfort heating, gaso- stationed at the facility. Facilities
120
meeting this definition are not contig- chemicals. This process safety informa-
uous with, and must be geographically tion shall include information per-
remote from all other buildings, proc- taining to the hazards of the highly
esses or persons. hazardous chemicals used or produced
Process means any activity involving by the process, information pertaining
a highly hazardous chemical including to the technology of the process, and
any use, storage, manufacturing, han- information pertaining to the equip-
dling, or the on-site movement of such ment in the process.
chemicals, or combination of these ac- (1) Information pertaining to the haz-
tivities. For purposes of this definition, ards of the highly hazardous chemicals in
any group of vessels which are inter- the process. This information shall con-
connected and separate vessels which sist of at least the following:
are located such that a highly haz- (i) Toxicity information;
ardous chemical could be involved in a (ii) Permissible exposure limits;
potential release shall be considered a (iii) Physical data;
single process. (iv) Reactivity data:
Replacement in kind means a replace- (v) Corrosivity data;
ment which satisfies the design speci- (vi) Thermal and chemical stability
fication. data; and
Trade secret means any confidential (vii) Hazardous effects of inadvertent
formula, pattern, process, device, infor- mixing of different materials that
mation or compilation of information could foreseeably occur.
that is used in an employer’s business,
and that gives the employer an oppor- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d)(1): Safety data
tunity to obtain an advantage over sheets meeting the requirements of
§ 1910.1200(g) may be used to comply with this
competitors who do not know or use it. requirement to the extent they contain the
Appendix D contained in § 1926.59 sets information required by this paragraph
out the criteria to be used in evalu- (d)(1).
ating trade secrets.
(c) Employee participation. (1) Employ- (2) Information pertaining to the tech-
ers shall develop a written plan of ac- nology of the process. (i) Information
tion regarding the implementation of concerning the technology of the proc-
the employee participation required by ess shall include at least the following:
this paragraph. (A) A block flow diagram or sim-
(2) Employers shall consult with em- plified process flow diagram (see appen-
ployees and their representatives on dix B to this section);
the conduct and development of proc- (B) Process chemistry;
ess hazards analyses and on the devel- (C) Maximum intended inventory;
opment of the other elements of proc- (D) Safe upper and lower limits for
ess safety management in this stand- such items as temperatures, pressures,
ard. flows or compositions; and,
(3) Employers shall provide to em- (E) An evaluation of the con-
ployees and their representatives ac- sequences of deviations, including
cess to process hazard analyses and to those affecting the safety and health of
all other information required to be de- employees.
veloped under this standard. (ii) Where the original technical in-
(d) Process safety information. In ac- formation no longer exists, such infor-
cordance with the schedule set forth in mation may be developed in conjunc-
paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the em- tion with the process hazard analysis
ployer shall complete a compilation of in sufficient detail to support the anal-
written process safety information be- ysis.
fore conducting any process hazard (3) Information pertaining to the equip-
analysis required by the standard. The ment in the process. (i) Information per-
compilation of written process safety taining to the equipment in the process
information is to enable the employer shall include:
and the employees involved in oper- (A) Materials of construction;
ating the process to identify and under- (B) Piping and instrument diagrams
stand the hazards posed by those proc- (P&ID’s);
esses involving highly hazardous (C) Electrical classification;
121
(D) Relief system design and design cordance with paragraph (e)(6) of this
basis; standard.
(E) Ventilation system design; (2) The employer shall use one or
(F) Design codes and standards em- more of the following methodologies
ployed; that are appropriate to determine and
(G) Material and energy balances for evaluate the hazards of the process
processes built after May 26, 1992; and, being analyzed.
(H) Safety systems (e.g. interlocks, (i) What-If;
detection or suppression systems). (ii) Checklist;
(ii) The employer shall document (iii) What-If/Checklist;
that equipment complies with recog- (iv) Hazard and Operability Study
nized and generally accepted good engi- (HAZOP);
neering practices. (v) Failure Mode and Effects Analysis
(iii) For existing equipment designed (FMEA);
and constructed in accordance with (vi) Fault-Tree Analysis; or
codes, standards, or practices that are (vii) An appropriate equivalent meth-
no longer in general use, the employer odology.
shall determine and document that the (3) The process hazard analysis shall
equipment is designed, maintained, in- address:
spected, tested, and operating in a safe (i) The hazards of the process;
manner. (ii) The identification of any previous
(e) Process hazard analysis. (1) The incident which had a likely potential
employer shall perform an initial proc- for catastrophic consequences in the
ess hazard analysis (hazard evaluation) workplace;
on processes covered by this standard. (iii) Engineering and administrative
The process hazard analysis shall be controls applicable to the hazards and
appropriate to the complexity of the their interrelationships such as appro-
process and shall identify, evaluate, priate application of detection meth-
and control the hazards involved in the odologies to provide early warning of
process. Employers shall determine and releases. (Acceptable detection meth-
document the priority order for con- ods might include process monitoring
ducting process hazard analyses based and control instrumentation with
on a rationale which includes such con- alarms, and detection hardware such as
siderations as extent of the process hydrocarbon sensors.);
hazards, number of potentially affected (iv) Consequences of failure of engi-
employees, age of the process, and op- neering and administrative controls;
erating history of the process. The (v) Facility siting;
process hazard analysis shall be con- (vi) Human factors; and
ducted as soon as possible, but not (vii) A qualitative evaluation of a
later than the following schedule: range of the possible safety and health
(i) No less than 25 percent of the ini- effects of failure of controls on employ-
tial process hazards analyses shall be ees in the workplace.
completed by May 26, 1994; (4) The process hazard analysis shall
(ii) No less than 50 percent of the ini- be performed by a team with expertise
tial process hazards analyses shall be in engineering and process operations,
completed by May 26, 1995; and the team shall include at least one
(iii) No less than 75 percent of the employee who has experience and
initial process hazards analyses shall knowledge specific to the process being
be completed by May 26, 1996; evaluated. Also, one member of the
(iv) All initial process hazards anal- team must be knowledgeable in the
yses shall be completed by May 26, 1997. specific process hazard analysis meth-
(v) Process hazards analyses com- odology being used.
pleted after May 26, 1987 which meet (5) The employer shall establish a
the requirements of this paragraph are system to promptly address the team’s
acceptable as initial process hazards findings and recommendations; assure
analyses. These process hazard anal- that the recommendations are resolved
yses shall be updated and revalidated, in a timely manner and that the reso-
based on their completion date, in ac- lution is documented; document what
122
actions are to be taken; complete ac- trols, administrative controls, and per-
tions as soon as possible; develop a sonal protective equipment;
written schedule of when these actions (C) Control measures to be taken if
are to be completed; communicate the physical contact or airborne exposure
actions to operating, maintenance and occurs;
other employees whose work assign- (D) Quality control for raw materials
ments are in the process and who may and control of hazardous chemical in-
be affected by the recommendations or ventory levels; and,
actions. (E) Any special or unique hazards.
(6) At least every five (5) years after (iv) Safety systems and their func-
the completion of the initial process tions.
hazard analysis, the process hazard (2) Operating procedures shall be
analysis shall be updated and revali- readily accessible to employees who
dated by a team meeting the require- work in or maintain a process.
ments in paragraph (e)(4) of this sec- (3) The operating procedures shall be
tion, to assure that the process hazard reviewed as often as necessary to as-
analysis is consistent with the current sure that they reflect current oper-
process. ating practice, including changes that
(7) Employers shall retain process result from changes in process chemi-
hazards analyses and updates or re- cals, technology, and equipment, and
validations for each process covered by changes to facilities. The employer
this section, as well as the documented shall certify annually that these oper-
resolution of recommendations de- ating procedures are current and accu-
scribed in paragraph (e)(5) of this sec- rate.
tion for the life of the process. (4) The employer shall develop and
(f) Operating procedures. (1) The em- implement safe work practices to pro-
ployer shall develop and implement vide for the control of hazards during
written operating procedures that pro- operations such as lockout/tagout; con-
vide clear instructions for safely confined space entry; opening process
ducting activities involved in each cov- equipment or piping; and control over
ered process consistent with the proc- entrance into a facility by mainte-
ess safety information and shall ad- nance, contractor, laboratory, or other
dress at least the following elements. support personnel. These safe work
(i) Steps for each operating phase: practices shall apply to employees and
(A) Initial startup; contractor employees.
(B) Normal operations; (g) Training—(1) Initial training. (i)
(C) Temporary operations; Each employee presently involved in
(D) Emergency shutdown including operating a process, and each employee
the conditions under which emergency before being involved in operating a
shutdown is required, and the assign- newly assigned process, shall be
ment of shutdown responsibility to trained in an overview of the process
qualified operators to ensure that and in the operating procedures as
emergency shutdown is executed in a specified in paragraph (f) of this sec-
safe and timely manner. tion. The training shall include empha-
(E) Emergency operations; sis on the specific safety and health
(F) Normal shutdown; and, hazards, emergency operations includ-
(G) Startup following a turnaround, ing shutdown, and safe work practices
or after an emergency shutdown. applicable to the employee’s job tasks.
(ii) Operating limits: (ii) In lieu of initial training for
(A) Consequences of deviation; and those employees already involved in
(B) Steps required to correct or avoid operating a process on May 26, 1992, an
deviation. employer may certify in writing that
(iii) Safety and health consider- the employee has the required knowl-
ations: edge, skills, and abilities to safely
(A) Properties of, and hazards pre- carry out the duties and responsibil-
sented by, the chemicals used in the ities as specified in the operating pro-
process; cedures.
(B) Precautions necessary to prevent (2) Refresher training. Refresher train-
exposure, including engineering con- ing shall be provided at least every
123
three years, and more often if nec- (vi) The employer shall maintain a
essary, to each employee involved in contract employee injury and illness
operating a process to assure that the log related to the contractor’s work in
employee understands and adheres to process areas.
the current operating procedures of the (3) Contract employer responsibilities.
process. The employer, in consultation (i) The contract employer shall assure
with the employees involved in oper- that each contract employee is trained
ating the process, shall determine the in the work practices necessary to safe-
appropriate frequency of refresher ly perform his/her job.
training. (ii) The contract employer shall as-
(3) Training documentation. The em- sure that each contract employee is in-
ployer shall ascertain that each em- structed in the known potential fire,
ployee involved in operating a process explosion, or toxic release hazards re-
has received and understood the train- lated to his/her job and the process,
ing required by this paragraph. The and the applicable provisions of the
employer shall prepare a record which emergency action plan.
contains the identity of the employee, (iii) The contract employer shall doc-
the date of training, and the means ument that each contract employee
used to verify that the employee under- has received and understood the train-
stood the training. ing required by this paragraph. The
(h) Contractors—(1) Application. This contract employer shall prepare a
paragraph applies to contractors per- record which contains the identity of
forming maintenance or repair, turn- the contract employee, the date of
around, major renovation, or specialty training, and the means used to verify
work on or adjacent to a covered proc- that the employee understood the
ess. It does not apply to contractors training.
providing incidental services which do
(iv) The contract employer shall as-
not influence process safety, such as
sure that each contract employee fol-
janitorial work, food and drink serv-
lows the safety rules of the facility in-
ices, laundry, delivery or other supply
cluding the safe work practices re-
services.
quired by paragraph (f)(4) of this sec-
(2) Employer responsibilities. (i) The
tion.
employer, when selecting a contractor,
(v) The contract employer shall ad-
shall obtain and evaluate information
vise the employer of any unique haz-
regarding the contract employer’s safe-
ards presented by the contract employ-
ty performance and programs.
er’s work, or of any hazards found by
(ii) The employer shall inform con-
the contract employer’s work.
tract employers of the known potential
fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards (i) Pre-startup safety review. (1) The
related to the contractor’s work and employer shall perform a pre-startup
the process. safety review for new facilities and for
modified facilities when the modifica-
(iii) The employer shall explain to
contract employers the applicable pro- tion is significant enough to require a
visions of the emergency action plan change in the process safety informa-
required by paragraph (n) of this section.
tion. (2) The pre-startup safety review
(iv) The employer shall develop and shall confirm that prior to the intro-
implement safe work practices conduction of highly hazardous chemicals
sistent with paragraph (f)(4) of this sec- to a process:
tion, to control the entrance, presence (i) Construction and equipment is in
and exit of contract employers and accordance with design specifications;
contract employees in covered process (ii) Safety, operating, maintenance,
areas. and emergency procedures are in place
(v) The employer shall periodically and are adequate;
evaluate the performance of contract (iii) For new facilities, a process haz-
employers in fulfilling their obliga- ard analysis has been performed and
tions as specified in paragraph (h)(3) of recommendations have been resolved
this section. or implemented before startup; and
124
modified facilities meet the require- (5) Equipment deficiencies. The em-
ments contained in management of ployer shall correct deficiencies in
change, paragraph (l). equipment that are outside acceptable
(iv) Training of each employee in- limits (defined by the process safety in-
volved in operating a process has been formation in paragraph (d) of this sec-
completed. tion) before further use or in a safe and
(j) Mechanical integrity—(1) Applica- timely manner when necessary means
tion. Paragraphs (j)(2) through (j)(6) of are taken to assure safe operation.
this section apply to the following (6) Quality assurance. (i) In the con-
process equipment: struction of new plants and equipment,
(i) Pressure vessels and storage the employer shall assure that equip-
tanks; ment as it is fabricated is suitable for
(ii) Piping systems (including piping the process application for which they
components such as valves); will be used.
(iii) Relief and vent systems and de- (ii) Appropriate checks and inspec-
vices; tions shall be performed to assure that
(iv) Emergency shutdown systems; equipment is installed properly and
(v) Controls (including monitoring consistent with design specifications
devices and sensors, alarms, and inter- and the manufacturer’s instructions.
locks) and, (iii) The employer shall assure that
(vi) Pumps. maintenance materials, spare parts and
(2) Written procedures. The employer equipment are suitable for the process
shall establish and implement written application for which they will be used.
procedures to maintain the on-going (k) Hot work permit. (1) The employer
integrity of process equipment. shall issue a hot work permit for hot
(3) Training for process maintenance work operations conducted on or near a
activities. The employer shall train each covered process.
employee involved in maintaining the (2) The permit shall document that
on-going integrity of process equip- the fire prevention and protection re-
ment in an overview of that process quirements in 29 CFR 1926.352 have
and its hazards and in the procedures been implemented prior to beginning
applicable to the employee’s job tasks the hot work operations; it shall indi-
to assure that the employee can per- cate the date(s) authorized for hot
form the job tasks in a safe manner. work; and identify the object on which
(4) Inspection and testing. (i) Inspec- hot work is to be performed. The per-
tions and tests shall be performed on mit shall be kept on file until comple-
process equipment. tion of the hot work operations.
(ii) Inspection and testing procedures (l) Management of change. (1) The em-
shall follow recognized and generally ployer shall establish and implement
accepted good engineering practices. written procedures to manage changes
(iii) The frequency of inspections and (except for ‘‘replacements in kind’’) to
tests of process equipment shall be con- process chemicals, technology, equip-
sistent with applicable manufacturers’ ment, and procedures; and, changes to
recommendations and good engineering facilities that affect a covered process.
practices, and more frequently if deter- (2) The procedures shall assure that
mined to be necessary by prior oper- the following considerations are ad-
ating experience. dressed prior to any change:
(iv) The employer shall document (i) The technical basis for the pro-
each inspection and test that has been posed change;
performed on process equipment. The (ii) Impact of change on safety and
documentation shall identify the date health;
of the inspection or test, the name of (iii) Modifications to operating pro-
the person who performed the inspec- cedures;
tion or test, the serial number or other (iv) Necessary time period for the
identifier of the equipment on which change; and,
the inspection or test was performed, a (v) Authorization requirements for
description of the inspection or test the proposed change.

performed, and the results of the in- (3) Employees involved in operating a
spection or test. process and maintenance and contract
125
employees whose job tasks will be af- and implement an emergency action
fected by a change in the process shall plan for the entire plant in accordance
be informed of, and trained in, the with the provisions of 29 CFR 1926.35(a).
change prior to start-up of the process In addition, the emergency action plan
or affected part of the process. shall include procedures for handling
(4) If a change covered by this para- small releases. Employers covered
graph results in a change in the process under this standard may also be sub-
safety information required by para- ject to the hazardous waste and emer-
graph (d) of this section, such informa- gency response provisions contained in
tion shall be updated accordingly. 29 CFR 1926.65(a), (p) and (q).
(5) If a change covered by this para- (o) Compliance audits. (1) Employers
graph results in a change in the oper- shall certify that they have evaluated
ating procedures or practices required compliance with the provisions of this
by paragraph (f) of this section, such section at least every three years to
procedures or practices shall be up- verify that the procedures and prac-
dated accordingly. tices developed under the standard are
(m) Incident investigation. (1) The em- adequate and are being followed.
ployer shall investigate each incident (2) The compliance audit shall be
which resulted in, or could reasonably conducted by at least one person
have resulted in a catastrophic release knowledgeable in the process.
of highly hazardous chemical in the (3) A report of the findings of the
workplace. audit shall be developed.
(2) An incident investigation shall be (4) The employer shall promptly de-
initiated as promptly as possible, but termine and document an appropriate
not later than 48 hours following the response to each of the findings of the
incident. compliance audit, and document that
(3) An incident investigation team deficiencies have been corrected.
shall be established and consist of at (5) Employers shall retain the two (2)
least one person knowledgeable in the most recent compliance audit reports.
process involved, including a contract (p) Trade secrets. (1) Employers shall
employee if the incident involved work make all information necessary to
of the contractor, and other persons comply with the section available to
with appropriate knowledge and experi- those persons responsible for compiling
ence to thoroughly investigate and the process safety information (re-
analyze the incident. quired by paragraph (d) of this section),
(4) A report shall be prepared at the those assisting in the development of
conclusion of the investigation which the process hazard analysis (required
includes at a minimum: by paragraph (e) of this section), those
(i) Date of incident; responsible for developing the oper-
(ii) Date investigation began; ating procedures (required by para-
(iii) A description of the incident; graph (f) of this section), and those in-
(iv) The factors that contributed to volved in incident investigations (re-
the incident; and, quired by paragraph (m) of this sec-
(v) Any recommendations resulting tion), emergency planning and response
from the investigation. (paragraph (n) of this section) and com-
(5) The employer shall establish a pliance audits (paragraph (o) of this
system to promptly address and resolve section) without regard to possible
the incident report findings and rec- trade secret status of such informa-
ommendations. Resolutions and correction.
tive actions shall be documented. (2) Nothing in this paragraph shall
(6) The report shall be reviewed with preclude the employer from requiring
all affected personnel whose job tasks the persons to whom the information is
are relevant to the incident findings in- made available under paragraph (p)(1)
cluding contract employees where ap- of this section to enter into confiden-
plicable. tiality agreements not to disclose the
(7) Incident investigation reports information as set forth in 29 CFR
shall be retained for five years. 1926.59.

(n) Emergency planning and re- (3) Subject to the rules and proce-
sponse. The employer shall establish dures set forth in 29 CFR 1926.59(i) (1)
126
through (12), employees and their des- Chemical Name CAS* TQ**
ignated representatives shall have ac-
cess to trade secret information con- Cyanuric Fluoride .................. 675-14-9 100
tained within the process hazard anal- Diacetyl Peroxide (concentra-
ysis and other documents required to tion greater than 70%) ....... 110-22-5 5000
be developed by this standard. Diazomethane ....................... 334-88-3 500
Dibenzoyl Peroxide ............... 94-36-0 7500
APPENDIX A TO § 1926.64—LIST OF HIGHLY HAZ- Diborane ................................ 19287-45-7 100
ARDOUS CHEMICALS, TOXICS AND REACTIVES Dibutyl Peroxide (Tertiary) .... 110-05-4 5000
(MANDATORY) Dichloro Acetylene ................ 7572-29-4 250
Dichlorosilane ........................ 4109-96-0 2500
This appendix contains a listing of toxic Diethylzinc ............................. 557-20-0 10000
and reactive highly hazardous chemicals Diisopropyl
which present a potential for a catastrophic Peroxydicarbonate ............. 105-64-6 7500
event at or above the threshold quantity. Dilauroyl Peroxide ................. 105-74-8 7500
Dimethyldichlorosilane .......... 75-78-5 1000
Chemical Name CAS* TQ** Dimethylhydrazine, 1,1- ........ 57-14-7 1000
Dimethylamine, Anhydrous ... 124-40-3 2500
Acetaldehyde ......................... 75-07-0 2500 2,4-Dinitroaniline ................... 97-02-9 5000
Acrolein (2-Propenal) ............ 107-02-8 150 Ethyl Methyl Ketone Peroxide
Acrylyl Chloride ..................... 814-68-6 250 (also Methyl Ethyl Ketone
Allyl Chloride ......................... 107-05-1 1000 Peroxide; concentration
Allylamine .............................. 107-11-9 1000 greater than 60%) .............. 1338-23-4 5000
Alkylaluminums ..................... Varies 5000 Ethyl Nitrite ............................ 109-95-5 5000
Ammonia, Anhydrous ............ 7664-41-7 10000 Ethylamine ............................. 75-04-7 7500
Ammonia solutions (greater Ethylene Fluorohydrin ........... 371-62-0 100
than 44% ammonia by Ethylene Oxide ...................... 75-21-8 5000
weight) ............................... 7664-41-7 15000 Ethyleneimine ........................ 151-56-4 1000
Ammonium Perchlorate ......... 7790-98-9 500 Fluorine ................................. 7782-41-4 1000
Ammonium Permanganate ... 7787-36-2 7500
Formaldehyde (Formalin) ...... 50-00-0 1000
Arsine (also called Arsenic
Furan ..................................... 110-00-9 500
Hydride) ............................. 7784-42-1 100
Hexafluoroacetone ................ 684-16-2 5000
Bis(Chloromethyl) Ether ........ 542-88-1 100
Hydrochloric Acid, Anhydrous 7647-01-0 5000
Boron Trichloride ................... 10294-34-5 2500
Hydrofluoric Acid, Anhydrous 7664-39-3 1000
Boron Trifluoride .................... 7637-07-2 250
Bromine ................................. 7726-95-6 1500 Hydrogen Bromide ................ 10035-10-6 5000
Bromine Chloride .................. 13863-41-7 1500 Hydrogen Chloride ................ 7647-01-0 5000
Bromine Pentafluoride ........... 7789-30-2 2500 Hydrogen Cyanide, Anhy-
Bromine Trifluoride ................ 7787-71-5 15000 drous .................................. 74-90-8 1000
3-Bromopropyne (also called Hydrogen Fluoride ................. 7664-39-3 1000
Propargyl Bromide) ............ 106-96-7 100 Hydrogen Peroxide (52% by
Butyl Hydroperoxide (Ter- weight or greater) .............. 7722-84-1 7500
tiary) ................................... 75-91-2 5000 Hydrogen Selenide ................ 7783-07-5 150
Butyl Perbenzoate (Tertiary) 614-45-9 7500 Hydrogen Sulfide ................... 7783-06-4 1500
Carbonyl Chloride (see Phos- Hydroxylamine ....................... 7803-49-8 2500
gene) .................................. 75-44-5 100 Iron, Pentacarbonyl ............... 13463-40-6 250
* Carbonyl Fluoride ............... 353-50-4 2500 Isopropylamine ...................... 75-31-0 5000
Cellulose Nitrate (concentra- Ketene ................................... 463-51-4 100
tion greater than 12.6% ni- Methacrylaldehyde ................ 78-85-3 1000
trogen ................................. 9004-70-0 2500 Methacryloyl Chloride ............ 920-46-7 150
Chlorine ................................. 7782-50-5 1500 Methacryloyloxyethyl
Chlorine Dioxide .................... 10049-04-4 1000 Isocyanate ......................... 30674-80-7 100
Chlorine Pentrafluoride ......... 13637-63-3 1000 Methyl Acrylonitrile ................ 126-98-7 250
Chlorine Trifluoride ................ 7790-91-2 1000 Methylamine, Anhydrous ....... 74-89-5 1000
Chlorodiethylaluminum (also Methyl Bromide ..................... 74-83-9 2500
called Diethylaluminum Methyl Chloride ..................... 74-87-3 15000
Chloride) ............................ 96-10-6 5000 Methyl Chloroformate ............ 79-22-1 500
1-Chloro-2,4-Dinitrobenzene 97-00-7 5000 Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide
Chloromethyl Methyl Ether .... 107-30-2 500 (concentration greater than
Chloropicrin ........................... 76-06-2 500 60%) .................................. 1338-23-4 5000
Chloropicrin and Methyl Bro- Methyl Fluoroacetate ............. 453-18-9 100
mide mixture ...................... None 1500 Methyl Fluorosulfate .............. 421-20-5 100
Chloropicrin and Methyl Chlo- Methyl Hydrazine .................. 60-34-4 100
Methyl Iodide ......................... 74-88-4 7500
ride mixture ........................ None 1500

Cumene Hydroperoxide ........ 80-15-9 5000 Methyl Isocyanate ................. 624-83-9 250
Cyanogen .............................. 460-19-5 2500 Methyl Mercaptan .................. 74-93-1 5000
Cyanogen Chloride ............... 506-77-4 500 Methyl Vinyl Ketone .............. 79-84-4 100
127
Chemical Name CAS* TQ** Chemical Name CAS* TQ**
Methyltrichlorosilane .............. 75-79-6 500 Phosphine (Hydrogen

Nickel Carbonly (Nickel Phosphide) ......................... 7803-51-2 100
Tetracarbonyl) .................... 13463-39-3 150 Phosphorus Oxychloride
Nitric Acid (94.5% by weight (also called Phosphoryl
or greater) .......................... 7697-37-2 500 Chloride) ............................ 10025-87-3 1000
Nitric Oxide ............................ 10102-43-9 250 Phosphorus Trichloride ......... 7719-12-2 1000
Nitroaniline (para Nitroaniline 100-01-6 5000 Phosphoryl Chloride (also
Nitromethane ......................... 75-52-5 2500 called Phosphorus
Nitrogen Dioxide .................... 10102-44-0 250 Oxychloride) ....................... 10025-87-3 1000
Nitrogen Oxides (NO; NO(2); Propargyl Bromide ................ 106-96-7 100
N2O4; N2O3) ..................... 10102-44-0 250 Propyl Nitrate ........................ 627-3-4 2500
Nitrogen Tetroxide (also Sarin ...................................... 107-44-8 100
called Nitrogen Peroxide) .. 10544-72-6 250
Selenium Hexafluoride .......... 7783-79-1 1000
Nitrogen Trifluoride ................ 7783-54-2 5000
Stibine (Antimony Hydride) ... 7803-52-3 500
Nitrogen Trioxide ................... 10544-73-7 250
Oleum (65% to 80% by Sulfur Dioxide (liquid) ............ 7446-09-5 1000
weight; also called Fuming Sulfur Pentafluoride ............... 5714-22-7 250
Sulfuric Acid) ..................... 8014-94-7 1000 Sulfur Tetrafluoride ................ 7783-60-0 250
Osmium Tetroxide ................. 20816-12-0 100 Sulfur Trioxide (also called
Oxygen Difluoride (Fluorine Sulfuric Anhydride) ............ 7446-11-9 1000
Monoxide) .......................... 7783-41-7 100 Sulfuric Anhydride (also
Ozone .................................... 10028-15-6 100 called Sulfur Trioxide) ........ 7446-11-9 1000
Pentaborane .......................... 19624-22-7 100 Tellurium Hexafluoride .......... 7783-80-4 250
Peracetic Acid (concentration Tetrafluoroethylene ............... 116-14-3 5000
greater 60% Acetic Acid; Tetrafluorohydrazine ............. 10036-47-2 5000
also called Peroxyacetic Tetramethyl Lead .................. 75-74-1 1000
Acid) ................................... 79-21-0 1000 Thionyl Chloride .................... 7719-09-7 250
Perchloric Acid (concentration Trichloro (chloromethyl) Sil-
greater than 60% by ane ..................................... 1558-25-4 100
weight) ............................... 7601-90-3 5000 Trichloro (dichlorophenyl) Sil-
Perchloromethyl Mercaptan .. 594-42-3 150 ane ..................................... 27137-85-5 2500
Perchloryl Fluoride ................ 7616-94-6 5000 Trichlorosilane ....................... 10025-78-2 5000
Peroxyacetic Acid (concentra- Trifluorochloroethylene .......... 79-38-9 10000
tion greater than 60% Ace- Trimethyoxysilane ................. 2487-90-3 1500
tic Acid; also called Per-
acetic Acid) ........................ 79-21-0 1000 * Chemical Abstract Service Number
Phosgene (also called Car- ** Threshold Quantity in Pounds (Amount
bonyl Chloride) .................. 75-44-5 100 necessary to be covered by this standard.)
128
APPENDIX B TO § 1926.64—BLOCK FLOW DIAGRAM AND SIMPLIFIED PROCESS

FLOW DIAGRAM (NONMANDATORY)
129
EC30OC91.008</GPH>
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.64—COMPLIANCE GUIDE- ment program requires a systematic ap-

LINES AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROCESS proach to evaluating the whole process.
SAFETY MANAGEMENT (NONMANDATORY) Using this approach the process design, proc-
This appendix serves as a nonmandatory ess technology, operational and maintenance
guideline to assist employers and employees activities and procedures, nonroutine activi-
in complying with the requirements of this ties and procedures, emergency preparedness
section, as well as provides other helpful rec- plans and procedures, training programs, and
ommendations and information. Examples other elements which impact the process are
presented in this appendix are not the only all considered in the evaluation. The various
means of achieving the performance goals in lines of defense that have been incorporated
the standard. This appendix neither adds nor into the design and operation of the process
detracts from the requirements of the stand- to prevent or mitigate the release of haz-
ard. ardous chemicals need to be evaluated and
1. Introduction to Process Safety Manage- strengthened to assure their effectiveness at
ment. The major objective of process safety each level. Process safety management is the
management of highly hazardous chemicals proactive identification, evaluation and
is to prevent unwanted releases of hazardous mitigation or prevention of chemical re-

chemicals especially into locations which
leases that could occur as a result of failures
could expose employees and others to serious
in process, procedures or equipment.
hazards. An effective process safety manage-
130
EC30OC91.009</GPH>
The process safety management standard ready established means and methods to
targets highly hazardous chemicals that keep employees and their representatives in-
have the potential to cause a catastrophic formed about relevant safety and health
incident. This standard as a whole is to aid issues and employers may be able to adapt
employers in their efforts to prevent or miti- these practices and procedures to meet their
gate episodic chemical releases that could obligations under this standard. Employers
lead to a catastrophe in the workplace and who have not implemented an occupational
possibly to the surrounding community. To safety and health program may wish to form
control these types of hazards, employers a safety and health committee of employees
need to develop the necessary expertise, ex- and management representatives to help the
periences, judgement and proactive initia- employer meet the obligations specified by
tive within their workforce to properly im- this standard. These committees can become
plement and maintain an effective process
a significant ally in helping the employer to
safety management program as envisioned in
implement and maintain an effective process
the OSHA standard. This OSHA standard is
safety management program for all employ-
required by the Clean Air Act Amendments
as is the Environmental Protection Agency’s ees.
Risk Management Plan. Employers, who 3. Process Safety Information. Complete and
merge the two sets of requirements into accurate written information concerning
their process safety management program, process chemicals, process technology, and
will better assure full compliance with each process equipment is essential to an effective
as well as enhancing their relationship with process safety management program and to a
the local community. process hazards analysis. The compiled infor-
While OSHA believes process safety man- mation will be a necessary resource to a va-
agement will have a positive effect on the riety of users including the team that will
safety of employees in workplaces and also perform the process hazards analysis as re-
offers other potential benefits to employers quired under paragraph (e); those developing
(increased productivity), smaller businesses the training programs and the operating pro-
which may have limited resources available cedures; contractors whose employees will be
to them at this time, might consider alter- working with the process; those conducting
native avenues of decreasing the risks asso- the pre-startup reviews; local emergency
ciated with highly hazardous chemicals at preparedness planners; and insurance and en-
their workplaces. One method which might forcement officials.
be considered is the reduction in the inven- The information to be compiled about the
tory of the highly hazardous chemical. This chemicals, including process intermediates,
reduction in inventory will result in a reduc- needs to be comprehensive enough for an ac-
tion of the risk or potential for a cata- curate assessment of the fire and explosion
strophic incident. Also, employers including characteristics, reactivity hazards, the safe-
small employers may be able to establish ty and health hazards to workers, and the
more efficient inventory control by reducing corrosion and erosion effects on the process
the quantities of highly hazardous chemicals equipment and monitoring tools. Current
on site below the established threshold quan- safety data sheet (SDS) information can be
tities. This reduction can be accomplished
used to help meet this requirement which
by ordering smaller shipments and maintain-
must be supplemented with process chem-
ing the minimum inventory necessary for ef-
istry information including runaway reac-
ficient and safe operation. When reduced in-
tion and over pressure hazards if applicable.
ventory is not feasible, then the employer
might consider dispersing inventory to sev- Process technology information will be a
eral locations on site. Dispersing storage part of the process safety information pack-
into locations where a release in one loca- age and it is expected that it will include
tion will not cause a release in another loca- diagrams of the type shown in appendix B of
tion is a practical method to also reduce the this section as well as employer established
risk or potential for catastrophic incidents. criteria for maximum inventory levels for
2. Employee Involvement in Process Safety process chemicals; limits beyond which
Management. Section 304 of the Clean Air Act would be considered upset conditions; and a
Amendments states that employers are to qualitative estimate of the consequences or
consult with their employees and their rep- results of deviation that could occur if oper-
resentatives regarding the employers efforts ating beyond the established process limits.
in the development and implementation of Employers are encouraged to use diagrams
the process safety management program ele- which will help users understand the process.
ments and hazard assessments. Section 304 A block flow diagram is used to show the
also requires employers to train and educate major process equipment and inter-
their employees and to inform affected em- connecting process flow lines and show flow
rates, stream composition, temperatures,
ployees of the findings from incident inves-

tigations required by the process safety man- and pressures when necessary for clarity.
agement program. Many employers, under The block flow diagram is a simplified dia-
their safety and health programs, have al- gram.
131
Process flow diagrams are more complex tant elements of the process safety manage-
and will show all main flow streams includ- ment program. A PHA is an organized and
ing valves to enhance the understanding of systematic effort to identify and analyze the
the process, as well as pressures and tem- significance of potential hazards associated
peratures on all feed and product lines with- with the processing or handling of highly
in all major vessels, in and out of headers hazardous chemicals. A PHA provides infor-
and heat exchangers, and points of pressure mation which will assist employers and em-
and temperature control. Also, materials of
ployees in making decisions for improving
construction information, pump capacities
safety and reducing the consequences of un-
and pressure heads, compressor horsepower
and vessel design pressures and temperatures wanted or unplanned releases of hazardous
are shown when necessary for clarity. In ad- chemicals. A PHA is directed toward ana-
dition, major components of control loops lyzing potential causes and consequences of
are usually shown along with key utilities fires, explosions, releases of toxic or flam-
on process flow diagrams. mable chemicals and major spills of haz-
Piping and instrument diagrams (P&Ids) ardous chemicals. The PHA focuses on equip-
may be the more appropriate type of dia- ment, instrumentation, utilities, human ac-
grams to show some of the above details and tions (routine and nonroutine), and external
to display the information for the piping de- factors that might impact the process. These
signer and engineering staff. The P&IDs are considerations assist in determining the haz-
to be used to describe the relationships be- ards and potential failure points or failure
tween equipment and instrumentation as modes in a process.
well as other relevant information that will The selection of a PHA methodology or
enhance clarity. Computer software pro-
technique will be influenced by many factors
grams which do P&Ids or other diagrams
including the amount of existing knowledge
useful to the information package, may be
used to help meet this requirement. about the process. Is it a process that has
The information pertaining to process been operated for a long period of time with
equipment design must be documented. In little or no innovation and extensive experi-
other words, what were the codes and stand- ence has been generated with its use? Or, is
ards relied on to establish good engineering it a new process or one which has been
practice. These codes and standards are pub- changed frequently by the inclusion of inno-
lished by such organizations as the American vative features? Also, the size and com-
Society of Mechanical Engineers, American plexity of the process will influence the deci-
Petroleum Institute, American National sion as to the appropriate PHA methodology
Standards Institute, National Fire Protec- to use. All PHA methodologies are subject to
tion Association, American Society for Test- certain limitations. For example, the check-
ing and Materials, National Board of Boiler list methodology works well when the proc-
and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, National As- ess is very stable and no changes are made,
sociation of Corrosion Engineers, American but it is not as effective when the process
Society of Exchange Manufacturers Associa-
has undergone extensive change. The check-
tion, and model building code groups.
In addition, various engineering societies list may miss the most recent changes and
issue technical reports which impact process consequently the changes would not be eval-
design. For example, the American Institute uated. Another limitation to be considered
of Chemical Engineers has published tech- concerns the assumptions made by the team
nical reports on topics such as two phase or analyst. The PHA is dependent on good
flow for venting devices. This type of tech- judgement and the assumptions made during
nically recognized report would constitute the study need to be documented and under-
good engineering practice. stood by the team and reviewer and kept for
For existing equipment designed and con- a future PHA.
structed many years ago in accordance with The team conducting the PHA need to un-
the codes and standards available at that derstand the methodology that is going to be
time and no longer in general use today, the used. A PHA team can vary in size from two
employer must document which codes and people to a number of people with varied
standards were used and that the design and operational and technical backgrounds.
construction along with the testing, inspec- Some team members may only be a part of
tion and operation are still suitable for the the team for a limited time. The team leader
intended use. Where the process technology
needs to be fully knowledgeable in the proper
requires a design which departs from the ap-
implementation of the PHA methodology
plicable codes and standards, the employer
that is to be used and should be impartial in
must document that the design and con-
struction is suitable for the intended pur- the evaluation. The other full or part time
team members need to provide the team with
pose.
4. Process Hazard Analysis. A process hazard expertise in areas such as process tech-
analysis (PHA), sometimes called a process nology, process design, operating procedures
hazard evaluation, is one of the most impor-
132
and practices, including how the work is ac- less data, P&IDs, and process information is
tually performed, alarms, emergency proce- needed to perform a process hazard analysis.
dures, instrumentation, maintenance proce- Many small businesses have processes that
dures, both routine and nonroutine tasks, in- are not unique, such as cold storage lockers
cluding how the tasks are authorized, pro- or water treatment facilities. Where em-
curement of parts and supplies, safety and ployer associations have a number of mem-
health, and any other relevant subject as the bers with such facilities, a generic PHA,
need dictates. At least one team member evolved from a checklist or what-if ques-
must be familiar with the process. tions, could be developed and used by each
The ideal team will have an intimate employer effectively to reflect his/her par-
knowledge of the standards, codes, specifica- ticular process; this would simplify compli-
tions and regulations applicable to the proc- ance for them.
ess being studied. The selected team mem- When the employer has a number of proc-
bers need to be compatible and the team esses which require a PHA, the employer
leader needs to be able to manage the team must set up a priority system of which PHAs
and the PHA study. The team needs to be to conduct first. A preliminary or gross haz-
able to work together while benefiting from ard analysis may be useful in prioritizing the
the expertise of others on the team or out- processes that the employer has determined
side the team, to resolve issues, and to forge are subject to coverage by the process safety
a consensus on the findings of the study and management standard. Consideration should
the recommendations. first be given to those processes with the po-
The application of a PHA to a process may tential of adversely affecting the largest
involve the use of different methodologies number of employees. This prioritizing
for various parts of the process. For example, should consider the potential severity of a
a process involving a series of unit oper- chemical release, the number of potentially
ations of varying sizes, complexities, and affected employees, the operating history of
ages may use different methodologies and the process such as the frequency of chem-
team members for each operation. Then the ical releases, the age of the process and any
conclusions can be integrated into one final other relevant factors. These factors would
study and evaluation. A more specific exam- suggest a ranking order and would suggest
ple is the use of a checklist PHA for a stand- either using a weighing factor system or a
ard boiler or heat exchanger and the use of a systematic ranking method. The use of a
Hazard and Operability PHA for the overall preliminary hazard analysis would assist an
process. Also, for batch type processes like employer in determining which process
custom batch operations, a generic PHA of a should be of the highest priority and thereby
representative batch may be used where the employer would obtain the greatest im-
there are only small changes of monomer or provement in safety at the facility.
other ingredient ratios and the chemistry is Detailed guidance on the content and ap-
documented for the full range and ratio of plication of process hazard analysis meth-
batch ingredients. Another process that odologies is available from the American In-
might consider using a generic type of PHA stitute of Chemical Engineers’ Center for
is a gas plant. Often these plants are simply Chemical Process Safety (see appendix D).
moved from site to site and therefore, a ge- 5. Operating Procedures and Practices. Oper-
neric PHA may be used for these movable ating procedures describe tasks to be per-
plants. Also, when an employer has several formed, data to be recorded, operating condi-
similar size gas plants and no sour gas is tions to be maintained, samples to be col-
being processed at the site, then a generic lected, and safety and health precautions to
PHA is feasible as long as the variations of be taken. The procedures need to be tech-
the individual sites are accounted for in the nically accurate, understandable to employ-
PHA. Finally, when an employer has a large ees, and revised periodically to ensure that
continuous process which has several control they reflect current operations. The process
rooms for different portions of the process safety information package is to be used as
such as for a distillation tower and a blend- a resource to better assure that the oper-
ing operation, the employer may wish to do ating procedures and practices are consistent
each segment separately and then integrate with the known hazards of the chemicals in
the final results. the process and that the operating param-
Additionally, small businesses which are eters are accurate. Operating procedures
covered by this rule, will often have proc- should be reviewed by engineering staff and
esses that have less storage volume, less ca- operating personnel to ensure that they are
pacity, and less complicated than processes accurate and provide practical instructions
at a large facility. Therefore, OSHA would on how to actually carry out job duties safe-
anticipate that the less complex methodolo- ly.
gies would be used to meet the process haz- Operating procedures will include specific
ard analysis criteria in the standard. These instructions or details on what steps are to
process hazard analyses can be done in less be taken or followed in carrying out the
time and with a few people being involved. A stated procedures. These operating instruc-
less complex process generally means that tions for each procedure should include the
133
applicable safety precautions and should within the process area, such as nonroutine
contain appropriate information on safety tasks, also must be maintained. The hazards
implications. For example, the operating of the tasks are to be conveyed to operating
procedures addressing operating parameters personnel in accordance with established
will contain operating instructions about procedures and to those performing the ac-
pressure limits, temperature ranges, flow tual tasks. When the work is completed, op-
rates, what to do when an upset condition erating personnel should be informed to pro-
occurs, what alarms and instruments are vide closure on the job.
pertinent if an upset condition occurs, and 6. Employee Training. All employees, includ-
other subjects. Another example of using oping maintenance and contractor employees,
erating instructions to properly implement involved with highly hazardous chemicals
operating procedures is in starting up or need to fully understand the safety and
shutting down the process. In these cases, health hazards of the chemicals and proc-
different parameters will be required from esses they work with for the protection of
those of normal operation. These operating themselves, their fellow employees and the
instructions need to clearly indicate the dis- citizens of nearby communities. Training
tinctions between startup and normal oper- conducted in compliance with 1926.59, the
ations such as the appropriate allowances for Hazard Communication standard, will help
heating up a unit to reach the normal oper- employees to be more knowledgeable about
ating parameters. Also the operating in- the chemicals they work with as well as fa-
structions need to describe the proper meth- miliarize them with reading and under-
od for increasing the temperature of the unit standing SDS. However, additional training
until the normal operating temperature pain subjects such as operating procedures and
rameters are achieved. safety work practices, emergency evacuation
Computerized process control systems add and response, safety procedures, routine and
complexity to operating instructions. These nonroutine work authorization activities,
operating instructions need to describe the and other areas pertinent to process safety
logic of the software as well as the relation- and health will need to be covered by an em-
ship between the equipment and the control ployer’s training program.
system; otherwise, it may not be apparent to In establishing their training programs,
the operator. employers must clearly define the employees
Operating procedures and instructions are to be trained and what subjects are to be
important for training operating personnel. covered in their training. Employers in set-
The operating procedures are often viewed as ting up their training program will need to
the standard operating practices (SOPs) for clearly establish the goals and objectives
operations. Control room personnel and oper- they wish to achieve with the training that
ating staff, in general, need to have a full un- they provide to their employees. The learn-
derstanding of operating procedures. If working goals or objectives should be written in
ers are not fluent in English then procedures clear measurable terms before the training
and instructions need to be prepared in a sec- begins. These goals and objectives need to be
ond language understood by the workers. In tailored to each of the specific training mod-
addition, operating procedures need to be ules or segments. Employers should describe
changed when there is a change in the proc- the important actions and conditions under
ess as a result of the management of change which the employee will demonstrate com-
procedures. The consequences of operating petence or knowledge as well as what is ac-
procedure changes need to be fully evaluated ceptable performance.
and the information conveyed to the per- Hands-on-training where employees are
sonnel. For example, mechanical changes to able to use their senses beyond listening,
the process made by the maintenance depart- will enhance learning. For example, oper-
ment (like changing a valve from steel to ating personnel, who will work in a control
brass or other subtle changes) need to be room or at control panels, would benefit by
evaluated to determine if operating proce- being trained at a simulated control panel or
dures and practices also need to be changed. panels. Upset conditions of various types
All management of change actions must be could be displayed on the simulator, and
coordinated and integrated with current op- then the employee could go through the
erating procedures and operating personnel proper operating procedures to bring the
must be oriented to the changes in proce- simulator panel back to the normal oper-
dures before the change is made. When the ating parameters. A training environment
process is shutdown in order to make a could be created to help the trainee feel the
change, then the operating procedures must full reality of the situation but, of course,
be updated before startup of the process. under controlled conditions. This realistic
Training in how to handle upset conditions type of training can be very effective in
must be accomplished as well as what oper- teaching employees correct procedures while
ating personnel are to do in emergencies allowing them to also see the consequences
such as when a pump seal fails or a pipeline of what might happens if they do not follow
ruptures. Communication between operating established operating procedures. Other
personnel and workers performing work training techniques using videos or on-the-
134
job training can also be very effective for knowledge of work activities involving con-
teaching other job tasks, duties, or other im- tract employees working on or adjacent to
portant information. An effective training covered processes. Injury and illness logs of
program will allow the employee to fully both the employer’s employees and contract
participate in the training process and to employees allow an employer to have full
practice their skill or knowledge. knowledge of process injury and illness expe-
Employers need to periodically evaluate rience. This log will also contain informa-
their training programs to see if the nection which will be of use to those auditing
essary skills, knowledge, and routines are process safety management compliance and
being properly understood and implemented those involved in incident investigations.
by their trained employees. The means or Contract employees must perform their
methods for evaluating the training should work safely. Considering that contractors
be developed along with the training pro- often perform very specialized and poten-
gram goals and objectives. Training program tially hazardous tasks such as confined space
evaluation will help employers to determine entry activities and nonroutine repair activi-
the amount of training their employees un- ties it is quite important that their activi-
derstood, and whether the desired results ties be controlled while they are working on
were obtained. If, after the evaluation, it ap- or near a covered process. A permit system
pears that the trained employees are not at or work authorization system for these ac-
the level of knowledge and skill that was ex- tivities would also be helpful to all affected
pected, the employer will need to revise the employers. The use of a work authorization
training program, provide retraining, or pro- system keeps an employer informed of con-
vide more frequent refresher training ses- tract employee activities, and as a benefit
sions until the deficiency is resolved. Those the employer will have better coordination
who conducted the training and those who and more management control over the work
received the training should also be con- being performed in the process area. A well
sulted as to how best to improve the training run and well maintained process where em-
process. If there is a language barrier, the ployee safety is fully recognized will benefit
language known to the trainees should be all of those who work in the facility whether
used to reinforce the training messages and they be contract employees or employees of
information. the owner.
Careful consideration must be given to as- 8. Pre-Startup Safety. For new processes,
sure that employees including maintenance the employer will find a PHA helpful in im-
and contract employees receive current and proving the design and construction of the
updated training. For example, if changes process from a reliability and quality point
are made to a process, impacted employees of view. The safe operation of the new proc-
must be trained in the changes and under- ess will be enhanced by making use of the
stand the effects of the changes on their job PHA recommendations before final installa-
tasks (e.g., any new operating procedures tions are completed. P&IDs are to be com-
pertinent to their tasks). Additionally, as al- pleted along with having the operating pro-
ready discussed the evaluation of the em- cedures in place and the operating staff
ployee’s absorption of training will certainly trained to run the process before startup.
influence the need for training. The initial startup procedures and normal
7. Contractors. Employers who use contrac- operating procedures need to be fully evalu-
tors to perform work in and around processes ated as part of the pre-startup review to as-
that involve highly hazardous chemicals, sure a safe transfer into the normal oper-
will need to establish a screening process so ating mode for meeting the process param-
that they hire and use contractors who ac- eters.
complish the desired job tasks without com- For existing processes that have been shut-
promising the safety and health of employ- down for turnaround, or modification, etc.,
ees at a facility. For contractors, whose safe- the employer must assure that any changes
ty performance on the job is not known to other than ‘‘replacement in kind’’ made to
the hiring employer, the employer will need the process during shutdown go through the
to obtain information on injury and illness management of change procedures. P&IDs
rates and experience and should obtain con- will need to be updated as necessary, as well
tractor references. Additionally, the em- as operating procedures and instructions. If
ployer must assure that the contractor has the changes made to the process during shut-
the appropriate job skills, knowledge and down are significant and impact the training
certifications (such as for pressure vessel program, then operating personnel as well as
welders). Contractor work methods and expe- employees engaged in routine and nonrou-
riences should be evaluated. For example, tine work in the process area may need some
does the contractor conducting demolition refresher or additional training in light of
work swing loads over operating processes or the changes. Any incident investigation rec-
does the contractor avoid such hazards? ommendations, compliance audits or PHA
Maintaining a site injury and illness log recommendations need to be reviewed as
for contractors is another method employers well to see what impacts they may have on
must use to track and maintain current the process before beginning the startup.
135
9. Mechanical Integrity. Employers will need ety for Testing and Material, American Pe-
to review their maintenance programs and troleum Institute, National Fire Protection
schedules to see if there are areas where Association, American National Standards
‘‘breakdown’’ maintenance is used rather Institute, American Society of Mechanical
than an on-going mechanical integrity pro- Engineers, and other groups, provide infor-
gram. Equipment used to process, store, or mation to help establish an effective testing
handle highly hazardous chemicals needs to and inspection frequency, as well as appro-
be designed, constructed, installed and main- priate methodologies.
tained to minimize the risk of releases of The applicable codes and standards provide
such chemicals. This requires that a mechan- criteria for external inspections for such
ical integrity program be in place to assure items as foundation and supports, anchor
the continued integrity of process equip- bolts, concrete or steel supports, guy wires,
ment. Elements of a mechanical integrity nozzles and sprinklers, pipe hangers, ground-
program include the identification and cating connections, protective coatings and in-
egorization of equipment and instrumenta- sulation, and external metal surfaces of pip-
tion, inspections and tests, testing and ining and vessels, etc. These codes and stand-
spection frequencies, development of mainte- ards also provide information on methodolo-
nance procedures, training of maintenance gies for internal inspection, and a frequency
personnel, the establishment of criteria for formula based on the corrosion rate of the
acceptable test results, documentation of materials of construction. Also, erosion both
test and inspection results, and documenta- internal and external needs to be considered
tion of manufacturer recommendations as to along with corrosion effects for piping and
meantime to failure for equipment and in- valves. Where the corrosion rate is not
strumentation. known, a maximum inspection frequency is
The first line of defense an employer has recommended, and methods of developing
available is to operate and maintain the the corrosion rate are available in the codes.
process as designed, and to keep the chemi- Internal inspections need to cover items
cals contained. This line of defense is backed such as vessel shell, bottom and head; metal-
up by the next line of defense which is the lic linings; nonmetallic linings; thickness
controlled release of chemicals through measurements for vessels and piping; inspec-
venting to scrubbers or flares, or to surge or tion for erosion, corrosion, cracking and
overflow tanks which are designed to receive bulges; internal equipment like trays, baf-
such chemicals, etc. These lines of defense fles, sensors and screens for erosion, corro-
are the primary lines of defense or means to sion or cracking and other deficiencies.
prevent unwanted releases. The secondary Some of these inspections may be performed
lines of defense would include fixed fire pro- by state or local government inspectors
tection systems like sprinklers, water spray, under state and local statutes. However,
or deluge systems, monitor guns, etc., dikes, each employer needs to develop procedures
designed drainage systems, and other sys- to ensure that tests and inspections are con-
tems which would control or mitigate haz- ducted properly and that consistency is
ardous chemicals once an unwanted release maintained even where different employees
occurs. These primary and secondary lines of may be involved. Appropriate training is to
defense are what the mechanical integrity be provided to maintenance personnel to en-
program needs to protect and strengthen sure that they understand the preventive
these primary and secondary lines of de- maintenance program procedures, safe prac-
fenses where appropriate. tices, and the proper use and application of
The first step of an effective mechanical special equipment or unique tools that may
integrity program is to compile and cat- be required. This training is part of the over-
egorize a list of process equipment and in- all training program called for in the stand-
strumentation for inclusion in the program. ard.
This list would include pressure vessels, stor- A quality assurance system is needed to
age tanks, process piping, relief and vent help ensure that the proper materials of con-
systems, fire protection system components, struction are used, that fabrication and in-
emergency shutdown systems and alarms spection procedures are proper, and that in-
and interlocks and pumps. For the cat- stallation procedures recognize field instal-
egorization of instrumentation and the listed lation concerns. The quality assurance pro-
equipment the employer would prioritize gram is an essential part of the mechanical
which pieces of equipment require closer integrity program and will help to maintain
scrutiny than others. Meantime to failure of the primary and secondary lines of defense
various instrumentation and equipment that have been designed into the process to
parts would be known from the manufactur- prevent unwanted chemical releases or those
ers data or the employer’s experience with which control or mitigate a release. ‘‘As
the parts, which would then influence the in- built’’ drawings, together with certifications
spection and testing frequency and associ- of coded vessels and other equipment, and
ated procedures. Also, applicable codes and materials of construction need to be verified
standards such as the National Board Inspec- and retained in the quality assurance docu-
tion Code, or those from the American Soci- mentation. Equipment installation jobs need
136
to be properly inspected in the field for use changes in production rates, raw materials,
of proper materials and procedures and to as- experimentation, equipment unavailability,
sure that qualified craftsmen are used to do new equipment, new product development,
the job. The use of appropriate gaskets, change in catalyst and changes in operating
packing, bolts, valves, lubricants and weld- conditions to improve yield or quality.
ing rods need to be verified in the field. Also, Equipment changes include among others
procedures for installation of safety devices change in materials of construction, equip-
need to be verified, such as the torque on the ment specifications, piping pre-arrange-
bolts on ruptured disc installations, uniform ments, experimental equipment, computer
torque on flange bolts, proper installation of program revisions and changes in alarms and
pump seals, etc. If the quality of parts is a interlocks. Employers need to establish
problem, it may be appropriate to conduct means and methods to detect both technical
audits of the equipment supplier’s facilities
changes and mechanical changes.
to better assure proper purchases of required
equipment which is suitable for its intended Temporary changes have caused a number
service. Any changes in equipment that may of catastrophes over the years, and employ-
become necessary will need to go through ers need to establish ways to detect tem-
the management of change procedures. porary changes as well as those that are per-
10. Nonroutine Work Authorizations. Nonrou- manent. It is important that a time limit for
tine work which is conducted in process temporary changes be established and mon-
areas needs to be controlled by the employer itored since, without control, these changes
in a consistent manner. The hazards identi- may tend to become permanent. Temporary
fied involving the work that is to be accom- changes are subject to the management of
plished must be communicated to those change provisions. In addition, the manage-
doing the work, but also to those operating ment of change procedures are used to insure
personnel whose work could affect the safety that the equipment and procedures are re-
of the process. A work authorization notice turned to their original or designed condi-
or permit must have a procedure that de- tions at the end of the temporary change.
scribes the steps the maintenance super- Proper documentation and review of these
visor, contractor representative or other per- changes is invaluable in assuring that the
son needs to follow to obtain the necessary safety and health considerations are being
clearance to get the job started. The work incorporated into the operating procedures
authorization procedures need to reference and the process.
and coordinate, as applicable, lockout/tagout Employers may wish to develop a form or
procedures, line breaking procedures, con- clearance sheet to facilitate the processing
fined space entry procedures and hot work
of changes through the management of
authorizations. This procedure also needs to
change procedures. A typical change form
provide clear steps to follow once the job is
may include a description and the purpose of
completed in order to provide closure for
the change, the technical basis for the
those that need to know the job is now com-
change, safety and health considerations,
pleted and equipment can be returned to nor-
mal. documentation of changes for the operating
11. Managing Change. To properly manage procedures, maintenance procedures, inspec-
changes to process chemicals, technology, tion and testing, P&IDs, electrical classifica-
equipment and facilities, one must define tion, training and communications, pre-
what is meant by change. In this process startup inspection, duration if a temporary
safety management standard, change in- change, approvals and authorization. Where
cludes all modifications to equipment, proce- the impact of the change is minor and well
dures, raw materials and processing condi- understood, a check list reviewed by an au-
tions other than ‘‘replacement in kind.’’ thorized person with proper communication
These changes need to be properly managed to others who are affected may be sufficient.
by identifying and reviewing them prior to However, for a more complex or significant
implementation of the change. For example, design change, a hazard evaluation procedure
the operating procedures contain the oper- with approvals by operations, maintenance,
ating parameters (pressure limits, tempera- and safety departments may be appropriate.
ture ranges, flow rates, etc.) and the impor- Changes in documents such as P&IDs, raw
tance of operating within these limits. While materials, operating procedures, mechanical
the operator must have the flexibility to integrity programs, electrical classifica-
maintain safe operation within the estab- tions, etc., need to be noted so that these re-
lished parameters, any operation outside of visions can be made permanent when the
these parameters requires review and ap- drawings and procedure manuals are up-
proval by a written management of change dated. Copies of process changes need to be
procedure. kept in an accessible location to ensure that
design changes are available to operating
Management of change covers such as

changes in process technology and changes personnel as well as to PHA team members
to equipment and instrumentation. Changes when a PHA is being done or one is being up-
in process technology can result from dated.
137
12. Investigation of Incidents. Incident inves- ferent emergency preparedness or tertiary
tigation is the process of identifying the un- lines of defense they plan to have and then
derlying causes of incidents and imple- develop the necessary plans and procedures,
menting steps to prevent similar events from and appropriately train employees in their
occurring. The intent of an incident inves- emergency duties and responsibilities and
tigation is for employers to learn from past then implement these lines of defense.
experiences and thus avoid repeating past Employers at a minimum must have an
mistakes. The incidents for which OSHA ex- emergency action plan which will facilitate
pects employers to become aware and to in- the prompt evacuation of employees when an
vestigate are the types of events which re- unwanted release of highly hazardous chem-
sult in or could reasonably have resulted in ical. This means that the employer will have
a catastrophic release. Some of the events a plan that will be activated by an alarm
are sometimes referred to as ‘‘near misses,’’ system to alert employees when to evacuate
meaning that a serious consequence did not and, that employees who are physically im-
occur, but could have. paired, will have the necessary support and
Employers need to develop in-house capa- assistance to get them to the safe zone as
bility to investigate incidents that occur in well. The intent of these requirements is to
their facilities. A team needs to be assem- alert and move employees to a safe zone
bled by the employer and trained in the tech- quickly. Delaying alarms or confusing
niques of investigation including how to con- alarms are to be avoided. The use of process
duct interviews of witnesses, needed docu- control centers or similar process buildings
mentation and report writing. A multi-dis- in the process area as safe areas is discour-
ciplinary team is better able to gather the aged. Recent catastrophes have shown that a
facts of the event and to analyze them and large life loss has occurred in these struc-
develop plausible scenarios as to what hap- tures because of where they have been sited
pened, and why. Team members should be se- and because they are not necessarily de-
lected on the basis of their training, knowl- signed to withstand over-pressures from
edge and ability to contribute to a team ef- shockwaves resulting from explosions in the
fort to fully investigate the incident. Em- process area.
ployees in the process area where the inci- Unwanted incidental releases of highly
dent occurred should be consulted, inter- hazardous chemicals in the process area
viewed or made a member of the team. Their must be addressed by the employer as to
knowledge of the events form a significant what actions employees are to take. If the
set of facts about the incident which oc- employer wants employees to evacuate the
curred. The report, its findings and rec- area, then the emergency action plan will be
ommendations are to be shared with those activated. For outdoor processes where wind
who can benefit from the information. The direction is important for selecting the safe
cooperation of employees is essential to an route to a refuge area, the employer should
effective incident investigation. The focus of place a wind direction indicator such as a
the investigation should be to obtain facts, wind sock or pennant at the highest point
and not to place blame. The team and the in- that can be seen throughout the process
vestigation process should clearly deal with area. Employees can move in the direction of
all involved individuals in a fair, open and cross wind to upwind to gain safe access to
consistent manner. the refuge area by knowing the wind direc-
13. Emergency Preparedness. Each employer tion.
must address what actions employees are to If the employer wants specific employees
take when there is an unwanted release of in the release area to control or stop the
highly hazardous chemicals. Emergency pre- minor emergency or incidental release, these
paredness or the employer’s tertiary (third) actions must be planned for in advance and
lines of defense are those that will be relied procedures developed and implemented.
on along with the secondary lines of defense Preplanning for handling incidental releases
when the primary lines of defense which are for minor emergencies in the process area
used to prevent an unwanted release fail to needs to be done, appropriate equipment for
stop the release. Employers will need to de- the hazards must be provided, and training
cide if they want employees to handle and conducted for those employees who will per-
stop small or minor incidental releases. form the emergency work before they re-
Whether they wish to mobilize the available spond to handle an actual release. The em-
resources at the plant and have them ployer’s training program, including the
brought to bear on a more significant re- Hazard Communication standard training is
lease. Or whether employers want their em- to address the training needs for employees
ployees to evacuate the danger area and who are expected to handle incidental or
promptly escape to a preplanned safe zone minor releases.
area, and allow the local community emer- Preplanning for releases that are more se-
gency response organizations to handle the rious than incidental releases is another im-
release. Or whether the employer wants to portant line of defense to be used by the em-
use some combination of these actions. Em- ployer. When a serious release of a highly
ployers will need to select how many dif- hazardous chemical occurs, the employer
138
through preplanning will have determined in gency response equipment, mutual aid infor-
advance what actions employees are to take. mation, and access to meteorological or
The evacuation of the immediate release weather condition data and any dispersion
area and other areas as necessary would be modeling data.
accomplished under the emergency action 14. Compliance Audits. Employers need to
plan. If the employer wishes to use plant per- select a trained individual or assemble a
sonnel such as a fire brigade, spill control trained team of people to audit the process
team, a hazardous materials team, or use safety management system and program. A
employees to render aid to those in the im- small process or plant may need only one
mediate release area and control or mitigate knowledgeable person to conduct an audit.
the incident, these actions are covered by The audit is to include an evaluation of the
1926.65, the Hazardous Waste Operations and design and effectiveness of the process safety
Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) stand- management system and a field inspection of
ard. If outside assistance is necessary, such the safety and health conditions and prac-
as through mutual aid agreements between tices to verify that the employer’s systems
employers or local government emergency are effectively implemented. The audit
response organizations, these emergency re- should be conducted or lead by a person
sponders are also covered by HAZWOPER. knowledgeable in audit techniques and who
The safety and health protections required is impartial towards the facility or area
for emergency responders are the responsi- being audited. The essential elements of an
bility of their employers and of the on-scene audit program include planning, staffing,
incident commander. conducting the audit, evaluation and correc-
Responders may be working under very tive action, follow-up and documentation.
hazardous conditions and therefore the ob- Planning in advance is essential to the suc-
jective is to have them competently led by cess of the auditing process. Each employer
an on-scene incident commander and the needs to establish the format, staffing,
commander’s staff, properly equipped to do scheduling and verification methods prior to
their assigned work safely, and fully trained conducting the audit. The format should be
to carry out their duties safely before they designed to provide the lead auditor with a
respond to an emergency. Drills, training ex- procedure or checklist which details the re-
ercises, or simulations with the local com- quirements of each section of the standard.
munity emergency response planners and re- The names of the audit team members
sponder organizations is one means to obtain should be listed as part of the format as well.
better preparedness. This close cooperation The checklist, if properly designed, could
and coordination between plant and local serve as the verification sheet which pro-
community emergency preparedness man- vides the auditor with the necessary infor-
agers will also aid the employer in com- mation to expedite the review and assure
plying with the Environmental Protection that no requirements of the standard are
Agency’s Risk Management Plan criteria. omitted. This verification sheet format
One effective way for medium to large fa- could also identify those elements that will
cilities to enhance coordination and commu- require evaluation or a response to correct
nication during emergencies for on plant op- deficiencies. This sheet could also be used for
erations and with local community organiza- developing the follow-up and documentation
tions is for employers to establish and equip requirements.
an emergency control center. The emergency The selection of effective audit team mem-
control center would be sited in a safe zone bers is critical to the success of the program.
area so that it could be occupied throughout Team members should be chosen for their ex-
the duration of an emergency. The center perience, knowledge, and training and should
would serve as the major communication be familiar with the processes and with au-
link between the on-scene incident com- diting techniques, practices and procedures.
mander and plant or corporate management The size of the team will vary depending on
as well as with the local community offi- the size and complexity of the process under
cials. The communication equipment in the consideration. For a large, complex, highly
emergency control center should include a instrumented plant, it may be desirable to
network to receive and transmit information have team members with expertise in proc-
by telephone, radio or other means. It is im- ess engineering and design, process chem-
portant to have a backup communication istry, instrumentation and computer con-
network in case of power failure or one com- trols, electrical hazards and classifications,
munication means fails. The center should safety and health disciplines, maintenance,
also be equipped with the plant layout and emergency preparedness, warehousing or
community maps, utility drawings including shipping, and process safety auditing. The
fire water, emergency lighting, appropriate team may use part-time members to provide
reference materials such as a government for the depth of expertise required as well as
agency notification list, company personnel for what is actually done or followed, com-
phone list, SARA Title III reports and safety pared to what is written.
data sheets, emergency plans and procedures An effective audit includes a review of the
manual, a listing with the location of emer- relevant documentation and process safety
139
information, inspection of the physical fa- cluding an explanation where no action is
cilities, and interviews with all levels of taken on a finding, needs to be documented
plant personnel. Utilizing the audit proce- as to what was done and why.
dure and checklist developed in the It is important to assure that each defi-
preplanning stage, the audit team can sys- ciency identified is addressed, the corrective
tematically analyze compliance with the action to be taken noted, and the audit per-
provisions of the standard and any other cor- son or team responsible be properly docu-
porate policies that are relevant. For exam- mented by the employer. To control the cor-
ple, the audit team will review all aspects of rective action process, the employer should
the training program as part of the overall consider the use of a tracking system. This
audit. The team will review the written tracking system might include periodic sta-
training program for adequacy of content, tus reports shared with affected levels of
frequency of training, effectiveness of train- management, specific reports such as com-
ing in terms of its goals and objectives as pletion of an engineering study, and a final
well as to how it fits into meeting the stand- implementation report to provide closure for
ard’s requirements, documentation, etc. audit findings that have been through man-
Through interviews, the team can determine agement of change, if appropriate, and then
the employee’s knowledge and awareness of shared with affected employees and manage-
the safety procedures, duties, rules, emer- ment. This type of tracking system provides
gency response assignments, etc. During the the employer with the status of the correc-
inspection, the team can observe actual tive action. It also provides the documenta-
practices such as safety and health policies, tion required to verify that appropriate cor-
procedures, and work authorization prac- rective actions were taken on deficiencies
tices. This approach enables the team to identified in the audit.
identify deficiencies and determine where
corrective actions or improvements are nec- APPENDIX D TO § 1926.64—SOURCES OF
essary. FURTHER INFORMATION (NONMANDATORY)
An audit is a technique used to gather suf-
ficient facts and information, including sta- 1. Center for Chemical Process Safety,
tistical information, to verify compliance American Institute of Chemical Engineers,
with standards. Auditors should select as 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017,
part of their preplanning a sample size suffi- (212) 705-7319.
cient to give a degree of confidence that the 2. ‘‘Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Pro-
audit reflects the level of compliance with cedures,’’ American Institute of Chemical
the standard. The audit team, through this Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York,
systematic analysis, should document areas NY 10017.
which require corrective action as well as 3. ‘‘Guidelines for Technical Management
those areas where the process safety man- of Chemical Process Safety,’’ Center for
agement system is effective and working in Chemical Process Safety of the American In-
an effective manner. This provides a record stitute of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th
of the audit procedures and findings, and Street, New York, NY 10017.
serves as a baseline of operation data for fu- 4. ‘‘Evaluating Process Safety in the Chem-
ture audits. It will assist future auditors in ical Industry,’’ Chemical Manufacturers As-
determining changes or trends from previous sociation; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC
audits. 20037.
Corrective action is one of the most impor- 5. ‘‘Safe Warehousing of Chemicals,’’
tant parts of the audit. It includes not only Chemical Manufacturers Association; 2501 M
addressing the identified deficiencies, but Street NW, Washington, DC 20037.
also planning, followup, and documentation. 6. ‘‘Management of Process Hazards,’’
The corrective action process normally be- American Petroleum Institute (API Rec-
gins with a management review of the audit ommended Practice 750); 1220 L Street, N.W.,
findings. The purpose of this review is to de- Washington, DC 20005.
termine what actions are appropriate, and to 7. ‘‘Improving Owner and Contractor Safe-
establish priorities, timetables, resource al- ty Performance,’’ American Petroleum Insti-
locations and requirements and responsibil- tute (API Recommended Practice 2220); API,
ities. In some cases, corrective action may 1220 L Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005.
involve a simple change in procedure or 8. Chemical Manufacturers Association
minor maintenance effort to remedy the con- (CMA’s Manager Guide), First Edition, Sep-
cern. Management of change procedures need tember 1991; CMA, 2501 M Street, N.W.,
to be used, as appropriate, even for what Washington, DC 20037.
may seem to be a minor change. Many of the 9. ‘‘Improving Construction Safety Per-
deficiencies can be acted on promptly, while formance,’’ Report A- 3, The Business Round-
some may require engineering studies or in- table; The Business Roundtable, 200 Park Av-
depth review of actual procedures and prac- enue, New York, NY 10166. (Report includes
tices. There may be instances where no ac- criteria to evaluate contractor safety per-
tion is necessary and this is a valid response formance and criteria to enhance contractor
to an audit finding. All actions taken, in- safety performance).
140
10. ‘‘Recommended Guidelines for Con- ardous substances has been
tractor Safety and Health,’’ Texas Chemical ascertained);
Council; Texas Chemical Council, 1402 (ii) Corrective actions involving
Nueces Street, Austin, TX 78701-1534.
clean-up operations at sites covered by
11. ‘‘Loss Prevention in the Process Indus-
tries,’’ Volumes I and II; Frank P. Lees,
the Resource Conservation and Recov-
Butterworth; London 1983. ery Act of 1976 (RCRA) as amended (42
12. ‘‘Safety and Health Program Manage- U.S.C. 6901 et seq.);
ment Guidelines,’’ 1989; U.S. Department of (iii) Voluntary clean-up operations at
Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Ad- sites recognized by Federal, state, local
ministration. or other governmental bodies as uncon-
13. ‘‘Safety and Health Guide for the Chem- trolled hazardous waste sites;
ical Industry,’’ 1986, (OSHA 3091); U.S. De- (iv) Operations involving hazardous
partment of Labor, Occupational Safety and wastes that are conducted at treat-
Health Administration; 200 Constitution Av-
enue, N.W., Washington, DC 20210.
ment, storage, and disposal (TSD) fa-
14. ‘‘Review of Emergency Systems,’’ June cilities regulated by 40 CFR parts 264
1988; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and 265 pursuant to RCRA; or by agen-
(EPA), Office of Solid Waste and Emergency cies under agreement with U.S.E.P.A.
Response, Washington, DC 20460. to implement RCRA regulations; and
15. ‘‘Technical Guidance for Hazards Anal- (v) Emergency response operations
ysis, Emergency Planning for Extremely for releases of, or substantial threats of
Hazardous Substances,’’ December 1987; U.S. releases of, hazardous substances with-
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), out regard to the location of the haz-
Federal Emergency Management Adminis-
tration (FEMA) and U.S. Department of
ard.
Transportation (DOT), Washington, DC 20460. (2) Application. (i) All requirements of
16. ‘‘Accident Investigation...A New Ap- part 1910 and part 1926 of title 29 of the
proach,’’ 1983, National Safety Council; 444 Code of Federal Regulations apply pur-
North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611- suant to their terms to hazardous
3991. waste and emergency response oper-
17. ‘‘Fire & Explosion Index Hazard Classi- ations whether covered by this section
fication Guide,’’ 6th Edition, May 1987, Dow or not. If there is a conflict or overlap,
Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan 48674. the provision more protective of em-
18. ‘‘Chemical Exposure Index,’’ May 1988,
Dow Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan
ployee safety and health shall apply
48674. without regard to 29 CFR 1926.20(e)(1).
(ii) Hazardous substance clean-up op-
[58 FR 35115, June 30, 1993, as amended at 77 erations within the scope of paragraphs
FR 17890, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9315, Feb. 8,
(a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iii) of this sec-
2013]
tion must comply with all paragraphs
of this section except paragraphs (p)
§ 1926.65 Hazardous waste operations and (q).
and emergency response. (iii) Operations within the scope of
paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section
(a) Scope, application, and definitions—
must comply only with the require-
(1) Scope. This section covers the fol-
ments of paragraph (p) of this section.
lowing operations, unless the employer
can demonstrate that the operation NOTES AND EXCEPTIONS: (A) All provisions
does not involve employee exposure or of paragraph (p) of this section cover any
the reasonable possibility for employee treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) oper-
ation regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265
exposure to safety or health hazards:
or by state law authorized under RCRA, and
(i) Clean-up operations required by a required to have a permit or interim status
governmental body, whether Federal, from EPA pursuant to 40 CFR 270.1 or from
state, local or other involving haz- a state agency pursuant to RCRA.
ardous substances that are conducted (B) Employers who are not required to
at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites have a permit or interim status because they
(including, but not limited to, the are conditionally exempt small quantity
EPA’s National Priority Site List generators under 40 CFR 261.5 or are genera-
tors who qualify under 40 CFR 262.34 for ex-
(NPL), state priority site lists, sites
emptions from regulation under 40 CFR parts
recommended for the EPA NPL, and
264, 265 and 270 (‘‘excepted employers’’) are

initial investigations of government not covered by paragraphs (p)(1) through
identified sites which are conducted be- (p)(7) of this section. Excepted employers
fore the presence or absence of haz- who are required by the EPA or state agency
141
to have their employees engage in emer- substance. Responses to incidental re-
gency response or who direct their employ- leases of hazardous substances where
ees to engage in emergency response are cov-
the substance can be absorbed, neutral-
ered by paragraph (p)(8) of this section, and
cannot be exempted by (p)(8)(i) of this sec- ized, or otherwise controlled at the
tion. Excepted employers who are not re- time of release by employees in the im-
quired to have employees engage in emer- mediate release area, or by mainte-
gency response, who direct their employees nance personnel are not considered to
to evacuate in the case of such emergencies be emergency responses within the
and who meet the requirements of paragraph
(p)(8)(i) of this section are exempt from the
scope of this standard. Responses to re-
balance of paragraph (p)(8) of this section. leases of hazardous substances where
(C) If an area is used primarily for treat- there is no potential safety or health
ment, storage or disposal, any emergency re- hazard (i.e., fire, explosion, or chemical
sponse operations in that area shall comply exposure) are not considered to be
with paragraph (p)(8) of this section. In other emergency responses.
areas not used primarily for treatment, stor-
age, or disposal, any emergency response op- Facility means (A) any building,
erations shall comply with paragraph (q) of structure, installation, equipment, pipe
this section. Compliance with the require- or pipeline (including any pipe into a
ments of paragraph (q) of this section shall sewer or publicly owned treatment
be deemed to be in compliance with the re- works), well, pit, pond, lagoon, im-
quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this sec-
poundment, ditch, storage container,
tion.
motor vehicle, rolling stock, or air-
(iv) Emergency response operations craft, or (B) any site or area where a
for releases of, or substantial threats of hazardous substance has been depos-
releases of, hazardous substances which ited, stored, disposed of, or placed, or
are not covered by paragraphs (a)(1)(i) otherwise come to be located; but does
through (a)(1)(iv) of this section must not include any consumer product in
only comply with the requirements of consumer use or any water-borne ves-
paragraph (q) of this section. sel.
(3) Definitions—Buddy system means a Hazardous materials response
system of organizing employees into
(HAZMAT) team means an organized
work groups in such a manner that
group of employees, designated by the
each employee of the work group is
designated to be observed by at least employer, who are expected to perform
one other employee in the work group. work to handle and control actual or
The purpose of the buddy system is to potential leaks or spills of hazardous
provide rapid assistance to employees substances requiring possible close ap-
in the event of an emergency. proach to the substance. The team
Clean-up operation means an oper- members perform responses to releases
ation where hazardous substances are or potential releases of hazardous sub-
removed, contained, incinerated, neu- stances for the purpose of control or
tralized, stabilized, cleared-up, or in stabilization of the incident. A
any other manner processed or handled HAZMAT team is not a fire brigade nor
with the ultimate goal of making the is a typical fire brigade a HAZMAT
site safer for people or the environ- team. A HAZMAT team, however, may
ment. be a separate component of a fire bri-
Decontamination means the removal gade or fire department.
of hazardous substances from employ- Hazardous substance means any sub-
ees and their equipment to the extent stance designated or listed under para-
necessary to preclude the occurrence of graphs (A) through (D) of this defini-
foreseeable adverse health affects. tion, exposure to which results or may
Emergency response or responding to result in adverse affects on the health
emergencies means a response effort by or safety of employees:
employees from outside the immediate
(A) Any substance defined under sec-
release area or by other designated re-
tion 101(14) of CERCLA;
sponders (i.e., mutual-aid groups, local
fire departments, etc.) to an occurrence (B) Any biological agent and other
which results, or is likely to result, in disease-causing agent which after re-
an uncontrolled release of a hazardous lease into the environment and upon
142
exposure, ingestion, inhalation, or as- vidual’s ability to escape from a dan-

similation into any person, either di- gerous atmosphere.
rectly from the environment or indi- Oxygen deficiency means that con-
rectly by ingestion through food centration of oxygen by volume below
chains, will or may reasonably be an- which atmosphere supplying res-
ticipated to cause death, disease, be- piratory protection must be provided.
havioral abnormalities, cancer, genetic It exists in atmospheres where the per-
mutation, physiological malfunctions centage of oxygen by volume is less
(including malfunctions in reproduc- than 19.5 percent oxygen.
tion) or physical deformations in such Permissible exposure limit means the
persons or their offspring; exposure, inhalation or dermal permis-
(C) Any substance listed by the U.S. sible exposure limit specified either in
Department of Transportation as haz- § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in
ardous materials under 49 CFR 172.101 other pertinent sections of this part.
and appendices; and Published exposure level means the ex-
(D) Hazardous waste as herein de- posure limits published in ‘‘NIOSH
fined. Recommendations for Occupational
Hazardous waste means—(A) A waste Health Standards’’ dated 1986 incor-
or combination of wastes as defined in porated by reference, or if none is spec-
40 CFR 261.3, or ified, the exposure limits published in
(B) Those substances defined as haz- the standards specified by the Amer-
ardous wastes in 49 CFR 171.8. ican Conference of Governmental In-
Hazardous waste operation means any dustrial Hygienists in their publication
operation conducted within the scope ‘‘Threshold Limit Values and Biologi-
of this standard. cal Exposure Indices for 1987–88’’ dated
Hazardous waste site or Site means 1987 incorporated by reference.
any facility or location within the Post emergency response means that
scope of this standard at which haz- portion of an emergency response per-
ardous waste operations take place. formed after the immediate threat of a
Health hazard means a chemical or a release has been stabilized or elimi-
pathogen where acute or chronic nated and clean-up of the site has
health effects may occur in exposed begun. If post emergency response is
employees. It also includes stress due performed by an employer’s own em-
to temperature extremes. The term ployees who were part of the initial
health hazard includes chemicals that emergency response, it is considered to
are classified in accordance with the be part of the initial response and not
Hazard Communication Standard, post emergency response. However, if a
§ 1910.1200, as posing one of the fol- group of an employer’s own employees,
lowing hazardous effects: acute tox- separate from the group providing ini-
icity (any route of exposure); skin cor- tial response, performs the clean-up op-
rosion or irritation; serious eye dam- eration, then the separate group of em-
age or eye irritation; respiratory or ployees would be considered to be per-
skin sensitization; germ cell mutage- forming post-emergency response and
nicity; carcinogenicity; reproductive subject to paragraph (q)(11) of this sec-
toxicity; specific target organ toxicity tion.
(single or repeated exposure); aspira- Qualified person means a person with
tion toxicity or simple asphyxiant. (See specific training, knowledge and expe-
Appendix A to § 1910.1200—Health Haz- rience in the area for which the person
ard Criteria (Mandatory) for the cri- has the responsibility and the author-
teria for determining whether a chem- ity to control.
ical is classified as a health hazard.) Site safety and health supervisor (or of-
IDLH or Immediately dangerous to life ficial) means the individual located on
or health means an atmospheric con- a hazardous waste site who is respon-
centration of any toxic, corrosive or sible to the employer and has the au-
asphyxiant substance that poses an im- thority and knowledge necessary to
mediate threat to life or would cause implement the site safety and health
irreversible or delayed adverse health plan and verify compliance with appli-
effects or would interfere with an indi- cable safety and health requirements.
143
Small quantity generator means a gen- (F) The employer’s standard oper-
erator of hazardous wastes who in any ating procedures for safety and health;
calendar month generates no more and
than 1,000 kilograms (2,205 pounds) of (G) Any necessary interface between
hazardous waste in that month. general program and site specific ac-
Uncontrolled hazardous waste site, tivities.
means an area identified as an uncon- (iii) Site excavation. Site excavations
trolled hazardous waste site by a gov- created during initial site preparation
ernmental body, whether Federal, or during hazardous waste operations
state, local or other where an accumu- shall be shored or sloped as appropriate
lation of hazardous substances creates to prevent accidental collapse in ac-
a threat to the health and safety of in- cordance with subpart P of 29 CFR part
dividuals or the environment or both. 1926.
Some sites are found on public lands (iv) Contractors and sub-contractors.
such as those created by former munic- An employer who retains contractor or
ipal, county or state landfills where il- sub-contractor services for work in
legal or poorly managed waste disposal hazardous waste operations shall in-
has taken place. Other sites are found form those contractors, sub-contrac-
on private property, often belonging to tors, or their representatives of the
generators or former generators of haz- site emergency response procedures
ardous substance wastes. Examples of and any potential fire, explosion,
such sites include, but are not limited health, safety or other hazards of the
to, surface impoundments, landfills, hazardous waste operation that have
dumps, and tank or drum farms. Nor- been identified by the employer, in-
mal operations at TSD sites are not cluding those identified in the employ-
covered by this definition. er’s information program.
(b) Safety and health program. (v) Program availability. The written
safety and health program shall be
NOTE TO (b): Safety and health programs made available to any contractor or
developed and implemented to meet other
subcontractor or their representative
Federal, state, or local regulations are con-
sidered acceptable in meeting this require- who will be involved with the haz-
ment if they cover or are modified to cover ardous waste operation; to employees;
the topics required in this paragraph. An ad- to employee designated representa-
ditional or separate safety and health pro- tives; to OSHA personnel, and to per-
gram is not required by this paragraph. sonnel of other Federal, state, or local
agencies with regulatory authority
(1) General. (i) Employers shall de-
over the site.
velop and implement a written safety
(2) Organizational structure part of the
and health program for their employ-
site program—(i) The organizationa1
ees involved in hazardous waste oper-
structure part of the program shall es-
ations. The program shall be designed
tablish the specific chain of command
to identify, evaluate, and control safe-
and specify the overall responsibilities
ty and health hazards, and provide for
of supervisors and employees. It shall
emergency response for hazardous
include, at a minimum, the following
waste operations.
elements:
(ii) The written safety and health (A) A general supervisor who has the
program shall incorporate the fol- responsibility and authority to direct
lowing: all hazardous waste operations.
(A) An organizational structure; (B) A site safety and health super-
(B) A comprehensive workplan; visor who has the responsibility and
(C) A site-specific safety and health authority to develop and implement
plan which need not repeat the employ- the site safety and health plan and
er’s standard operating procedures re- verify compliance.
quired in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(F) of this (C) All other personnel needed for
section; hazardous waste site operations and
(D) The safety and health training emergency response and their general
program; functions and responsibilities.

(E) The medical surveillance pro- (D) The lines of authority, responsi-
gram; bility, and communication.
144
(ii) The organizational structure (D) Medical surveillance require-

shall be reviewed and updated as nec- ments in accordance with the program
essary to reflect the current status of in paragraph (f) of this section.
waste site operations. (E) Frequency and types of air moni-
(3) Comprehensive workplan part of the toring, personnel monitoring, and envi-
site program. The comprehensive ronmental sampling techniques and in-
workplan part of the program shall ad- strumentation to be used, including
dress the tasks and objectives of the methods of maintenance and calibra-
site operations and the logistics and re- tion of monitoring and sampling equip-
sources required to reach those tasks ment to be used.
and objectives. (F) Site control measures in accord-
(i) The comprehensive workplan shall ance with the site control program re-
address anticipated clean-up activities quired in paragraph (d) of this section.
as well as normal operating procedures (G) Decontamination procedures in
which need not repeat the employer’s accordance with paragraph (k) of this
procedures available elsewhere. section.
(ii) The comprehensive workplan
(H) An emergency response plan
shall define work tasks and objectives
meeting the requirements of paragraph
and identify the methods for accom-
(l) of this section for safe and effective
plishing those tasks and objectives.
responses to emergencies, including
(iii) The comprehensive workplan
the necessary PPE and other equip-
shall establish personnel requirements
ment.
for implementing the plan.
(iv) The comprehensive workplan (I) Confined space entry procedures.
shall provide for the implementation of (J) A spill containment program
the training required in paragraph (e) meeting the requirements of paragraph
of this section. (j) of this section.
(v) The comprehensive workplan (iii) Pre-entry briefing. The site spe-
shall provide for the implementation of cific safety and health plan shall pro-
the required informational programs vide for pre-entry briefings to be held
required in paragraph (i) of this sec- prior to initiating any site activity,
tion. and at such other times as necessary to
(vi) The comprehensive workplan ensure that employees are apprised of
shall provide for the implementation of the site safety and health plan and
the medical surveillance program de- that this plan is being followed. The in-
scribed in paragraph (f) of this section. formation and data obtained from site
(4) Site-specific safety and health plan characterization and analysis work re-
part of the program—(i) General. The site quired in paragraph (c) of this section
safety and health plan, which must be shall be used to prepare and update the
kept on site, shall address the safety site safety and health plan.
and health hazards of each phase of site (iv) Effectiveness of site safety and
operation and include the requirements health plan. Inspections shall be con-
and procedures for employee protec- ducted by the site safety and health su-
tion. pervisor or, in the absence of that indi-
(ii) Elements. The site safety and vidual, another individual who is
health plan, as a minimum, shall ad- knowledgeable in occupational safety
dress the following: and health, acting on behalf of the em-
(A) A safety and health risk or haz- ployer as necessary to determine the
ard analysis for each site task and op- effectiveness of the site safety and
eration found in the workplan. health plan. Any deficiencies in the ef-
(B) Employee training assignments fectiveness of the site safety and
to assure compliance with paragraph health plan shall be corrected by the
(e) of this section. employer.
(C) Personal protective equipment to (c) Site characterization and analysis—
be used by employees for each of the (1) General. Hazardous waste sites shall
site tasks and operations being con- be evaluated in accordance with this
ducted as required by the personal pro- paragraph to identify specific site haz-
tective equipment program in para- ards and to determine the appropriate
graph (g)(5) of this section. safety and health control procedures
145
needed to protect employees from the (5) Personal protective equipment. Per-
identified hazards. sonal protective equipment (PPE) shall
(2) Preliminary evaluation. A prelimi- be provided and used during initial site
nary evaluation of a site’s characteris- entry in accordance with the following
tics shall be performed prior to site requirements:
entry by a qualified person in order to (i) Based upon the results of the pre-
aid in the selection of appropriate em- liminary site evaluation, an ensemble
ployee protection methods prior to site of PPE shall be selected and used dur-
entry. Immediately after initial site ing initial site entry which will provide
entry, a more detailed evaluation of protection to a level of exposure below
the site’s specific characteristics shall permissible exposure limits and pub-
be performed by a qualified person in lished exposure levels for known or sus-
order to further identify existing site pected hazardous substances and
hazards and to further aid in the selec- health hazards, and which will provide
tion of the appropriate engineering protection against other known and
controls and personal protective equip-
suspected hazards identified during the
ment for the tasks to be performed.
preliminary site evaluation. If there is
(3) Hazard identification. All suspected no permissible exposure limit or pub-
conditions that may pose inhalation or
lished exposure level, the employer
skin absorption hazards that are imme-
may use other published studies and in-
diately dangerous to life or health
formation as a guide to appropriate
(IDLH), or other conditions that may
cause death or serious harm, shall be personal protective equipment.
identified during the preliminary sur- (ii) If positive-pressure self-contained
vey and evaluated during the detailed breathing apparatus is not used as part
survey. Examples of such hazards in- of the entry ensemble, and if res-
clude, but are not limited to, confined piratory protection is warranted by the
space entry, potentially explosive or potential hazards identified during the
flammable situations, visible vapor preliminary site evaluation, an escape
clouds, or areas where biological indi- self-contained breathing apparatus of
cators such as dead animals or vegeta- at least five minute’s duration shall be
tion are located. carried by employees during initial site
(4) Required information. The fol- entry.
lowing information to the extent avail- (iii) If the preliminary site evalua-
able shall be obtained by the employer tion does not produce sufficient infor-
prior to allowing employees to enter a mation to identify the hazards or sus-
site: pected hazards of the site, an ensemble
(i) Location and approximate size of providing protection equivalent to
the site. Level B PPE shall be provided as min-
(ii) Description of the response activ- imum protection, and direct reading
ity and/or the job task to be performed. instruments shall be used as appro-
(iii) Duration of the planned em- priate for identifying IDLH conditions.
ployee activity. (See appendix B for a description of
(iv) Site topography and accessibility Level B hazards and the recommenda-
by air and roads. tions for Level B protective equip-
(v) Safety and health hazards ex- ment.)
pected at the site. (iv) Once the hazards of the site have
(vi) Pathways for hazardous sub- been identified, the appropriate PPE
stance dispersion. shall be selected and used in accord-
(vii) Present status and capabilities ance with paragraph (g) of this section.
of emergency response teams that (6) Monitoring. The following moni-
would provide assistance to hazardous toring shall be conducted during initial
waste clean-up site employees at the site entry when the site evaluation
time of an emergency. produces information that shows the
(viii) Hazardous substances and potential for ionizing radiation or
health hazards involved or expected at IDLH conditions, or when the site in-
the site, and their chemical and phys- formation is not sufficient reasonably
ical properties. to eliminate these possible conditions:
146
(i) Monitoring with direct reading in- (2) Site control program. A site control
struments for hazardous levels of ion- program for protecting employees
izing radiation. which is part of the employer’s site
(ii) Monitoring the air with appro- safety and health program required in
priate direct reading test equipment paragraph (b) of this section shall be
(i.e., combustible gas meters, detector developed during the planning stages of
tubes) for IDLH and other conditions a hazardous waste clean-up operation
that may cause death or serious harm and modified as necessary as new infor-
(combustible or explosive atmospheres, mation becomes available.
oxygen deficiency, toxic substances). (3) Elements of the site control program.
(iii) Visually observing for signs of The site control program shall, as a
actual or potential IDLH or other dan- minimum, include: A site map; site
gerous conditions. work zones; the use of a ‘‘buddy sys-
(iv) An ongoing air monitoring pro- tem’’; site communications including
gram in accordance with paragraph (h) alerting means for emergencies; the
of this section shall be implemented standard operating procedures or safe
after site characterization has deter- work practices; and, identification of
mined the site is safe for the start-up the nearest medical assistance. Where
of operations. these requirements are covered else-
(7) Risk identification. Once the pres-
where they need not be repeated.
ence and concentrations of specific
hazardous substances and health haz- (e) Training—(1) General. (i) All em-
ards have been established, the risks ployees working on site (such as but
associated with these substances shall not limited to equipment operators,
be identified. Employees who will be general laborers and others) exposed to
working on the site shall be informed hazardous substances, health hazards,
of any risks that have been identified. or safety hazards and their supervisors
In situations covered by the Hazard and management responsible for the
Communication Standard, 29 CFR site shall receive training meeting the
1926.59, training required by that stand- requirements of this paragraph before
ard need not be duplicated. they are permitted to engage in haz-
ardous waste operations that could ex-
NOTE TO (c)(7). Risks to consider include, pose them to hazardous substances,
but are not limited to: safety, or health hazards, and they
(a) Exposures exceeding the permissible ex-
posure limits and published exposure levels. shall receive review training as speci-
(b) IDLH concentrations. fied in this paragraph.
(c) Potential skin absorption and irritation (ii) Employees shall not be permitted
sources. to participate in or supervise field ac-
(d) Potential eye irritation sources. tivities until they have been trained to
(e) Explosion sensitivity and flammability a level required by their job function
ranges.
(f) Oxygen deficiency. and responsibility.
(2) Elements to be covered. The train-
(8) Employee notification. Any infor- ing shall thoroughly cover the fol-
mation concerning the chemical, phys- lowing:
ical, and toxicologic properties of each (i) Names of personnel and alternates
substance known or expected to be responsible for site safety and health;
present on site that is available to the
(ii) Safety, health and other hazards
employer and relevant to the duties an
present on the site;
employee is expected to perform shall
be made available to the affected em- (iii) Use of personal protective equip-
ployees prior to the commencement of ment;
their work activities. The employer (iv) Work practices by which the em-
may utilize information developed for ployee can minimize risks from haz-
the hazard communication standard for ards;
this purpose. (v) Safe use of engineering controls
(d) Site control—(1) General. Appro- and equipment on the site;
priate site control procedures shall be (vi) Medical surveillance require-
implemented to control employee expo- ments, including recognition of symp-

sure to hazardous substances before toms and signs which might indicate
clean-up work begins. overexposure to hazards; and
147
(vii) The contents of paragraphs (G) sponsibility is employees covered by

through (J) of the site safety and paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii)) and
health plan set forth in paragraph at least eight additional hours of spe-
(b)(4)(ii) of this section. cialized training at the time of job as-
(3) Initial training. (i) General site signment on such topics as, but not
workers (such as equipment operators, limited to, the employer’s safety and
general laborers and supervisory per- health program and the associated em-
sonnel) engaged in hazardous substance ployee training program, personal pro-
removal or other activities which ex- tective equipment program, spill con-
pose or potentially expose workers to tainment program, and health hazard
hazardous substances and health haz- monitoring procedure and techniques.
ards shall receive a minimum of 40 (5) Qualifications for trainers. Trainers
hours of instruction off the site, and a shall be qualified to instruct employees
minimum of three days actual field ex- about the subject matter that is being
perience under the direct supervision of presented in training. Such trainers
a trained, experienced supervisor. shall have satisfactorily completed a
(ii) Workers on site only occasionally training program for teaching the sub-
for a specific limited task (such as, but jects they are expected to teach, or
not limited to, ground water moni- they shall have the academic creden-
toring, land surveying, or geo-physical tials and instructional experience nec-
surveying) and who are unlikely to be essary for teaching the subjects. In-
exposed over permissible exposure lim- structors shall demonstrate competent
its and published exposure limits shall instructional skills and knowledge of
receive a minimum of 24 hours of in- the applicable subject matter.
struction off the site, and the min-
(6) Training certification. Employees
imum of one day actual field experi-
and supervisors that have received and
ence under the direct supervision of a
successfully completed the training
trained, experienced supervisor.
and field experience specified in para-
(iii) Workers regularly on site who
graphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of this sec-
work in areas which have been mon-
tion shall be certified by their instruc-
itored and fully characterized indi-
tor or the head instructor and trained
cating that exposures are under per-
supervisor as having successfully com-
missible exposure limits and published
exposure limits where respirators are pleted the necessary training. A writ-
not necessary, and the characterization ten certificate shall be given to each
indicates that there are no health haz- person so certified. Any person who has
ards or the possibility of an emergency not been so certified or who does not
developing, shall receive a minimum of meet the requirements of paragraph
24 hours of instruction off the site and (e)(9) of this section shall be prohibited
the minimum of one day actual field from engaging in hazardous waste oper-
experience under the direct supervision ations.
of a trained, experienced supervisor. (7) Emergency response. Employees
(iv) Workers with 24 hours of training who are engaged in responding to haz-
who are covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) ardous emergency situations at haz-
and (e)(3)(iii) of this section, and who ardous waste clean-up sites that may
become general site workers or who are expose them to hazardous substances
required to wear respirators, shall have shall be trained in how to respond to
the additional 16 hours and two days of such expected emergencies.
training necessary to total the training (8) Refresher training. Employees spec-
specified in paragraph (e)(3)(i). ified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section,
(4) Management and supervisor train- and managers and supervisors specified
ing. On-site management and super- in paragraph (e)(4) of this section, shall
visors directly responsible for, or who receive eight hours of refresher train-
supervise employees engaged in, haz- ing annually on the items specified in
ardous waste operations shall receive paragraph (e)(2) and/or (e)(4) of this
40 hours initial training, and three section, any critique of incidents that
days of supervised field experience (the have occurred in the past year that can
training may be reduced to 24 hours serve as training examples of related
and one day if the only area of their re- work, and other relevant topics.
148
(9) Equivalent training. Employers ployee covered under paragraph (f)(2) of

who can show by documentation or cer- this section on the following schedules:
tification that an employee’s work ex- (i) For employees covered under
perience and/or training has resulted in paragraphs (f)(2)(i), (f)(2)(ii), and
training equivalent to that training re- (f)(2)(iv):
quired in paragraphs (e)(1) through (A) Prior to assignment;
(e)(4) of this section shall not be re- (B) At least once every twelve
quired to provide the initial training months for each employee covered un-
requirements of those paragraphs to less the attending physician believes a
such employees and shall provide a longer interval (not greater than bien-
copy of the certification or documenta- nially) is appropriate;
tion to the employee upon request. (C) At termination of employment or
However, certified employees or em- reassignment to an area where the em-
ployees with equivalent training new ployee would not be covered if the em-
to a site shall receive appropriate, site ployee has not had an examination
specific training before site entry and within the last six months;
have appropriate supervised field expe- (D) As soon as possible upon notifica-
rience at the new site. Equivalent tion by an employee that the employee
training includes any academic train- has developed signs or symptoms indi-
ing or the training that existing em- cating possible overexposure to haz-
ployees might have already received ardous substances or health hazards, or
from actual hazardous waste site work that the employee has been injured or
experience. exposed above the permissible exposure
(f) Medical surveillance—(1) General. limits or published exposure levels in
Employers engaged in operations speci- an emergency situation;
fied in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (E) At more frequent times, if the ex-
(a)(1)(iv) of this section and not cov- amining physician determines that an
ered by (a)(2)(iii) exceptions and em- increased frequency of examination is
ployers of employees specified in para- medically necessary.
graph (q)(9) shall institute a medical (ii) For employees covered under
surveillance program in accordance paragraph (f)(2)(iii) and for all employ-
with this paragraph. ees including those of employers cov-
ered by paragraph (a)(1)(v) who may
(2) Employees covered. The medical
have been injured, received a health
surveillance program shall be insti-
impairment, developed signs or symp-
tuted by the employer for the following
toms which may have resulted from ex-
employees:
posure to hazardous substances result-
(i) All employees who are or may be ing from an emergency incident, or ex-
exposed to hazardous substances or posed during an emergency incident to
health hazards at or above the permis- hazardous substances at concentra-
sible exposure limits or, if there is no tions above the permissible exposure
permissible exposure limit, above the limits or the published exposure levels
published exposure levels for these sub- without the necessary personal protec-
stances, without regard to the use of tive equipment being used:
respirators, for 30 days or more a year; (A) As soon as possible following the
(ii) All employees who wear a res- emergency incident or development of
pirator for 30 days or more a year or as signs or symptoms;
required by § 1926.103; (B) At additional times, if the exam-
(iii) All employees who are injured, ining physician determines that follow-
become ill or develop signs or symp- up examinations or consultations are
toms due to possible overexposure in- medically necessary.
volving hazardous substances or health (4) Content of medical examinations and
hazards from an emergency response or consultations. (i) Medical examinations
hazardous waste operation; and required by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec-
(iv) Members of HAZMAT teams. tion shall include a medical and work
(3) Frequency of medical examinations history (or updated history if one is in
and consultations. Medical examina- the employee’s file) with special em-
tions and consultations shall be made phasis on symptoms related to the han-
available by the employer to each em- dling of hazardous substances and
149
health hazards, and to fitness for duty (C) The results of the medical exam-
including the ability to wear any re- ination and tests if requested by the
quired PPE under conditions (i.e., tem- employee.
perature extremes) that may be ex- (D) A statement that the employee
pected at the work site. has been informed by the physician of
(ii) The content of medical examina- the results of the medical examination
tions or consultations made available and any medical conditions which re-
to employees pursuant to paragraph (f) quire further examination or treat-
shall be determined by the attending ment.
physician. The guidelines in the Occu- (ii) The written opinion obtained by
pational Safety and Health Guidance the employer shall not reveal specific
Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi- findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc-
ties (See appendix D, Reference #10) cupational exposures.
should be consulted. (8) Recordkeeping. (i) An accurate
(5) Examination bv a physician and record of the medical surveillance re-
costs. All medical examinations and quired by paragraph (f) of this section
procedures shall be performed by or shall be retained. This record shall be
under the supervision of a licensed phy- retained for the period specified and
sician, preferably one knowledgeable in meet the criteria of 29 CFR 1926.33.
occupational medicine, and shall be (ii) The record required in paragraph
provided without cost to the employee, (f)(8)(i) of this section shall include at
without loss of pay, and at a reason- least the following information:
able time and place. (A) The name and social security
number of the employee;
(6) Information provided to the physi-
(B) Physician’s written opinions, rec-
cian. The employer shall provide one
ommended limitations, and results of
copy of this standard and its appen-
examinations and tests;
dices to the attending physician, and in
(C) Any employee medical com-
addition the following for each em-
plaints related to exposure to haz-
ployee:
ardous substances;
(i) A description of the employee’s (D) A copy of the information pro-
duties as they relate to the employee’s vided to the examining physician by
exposures. the employer, with the exception of the
(ii) The employee’s exposure levels or standard and its appendices.
anticipated exposure levels. (g) Engineering controls, work prac-
(iii) A description of any personal tices, and personal protective equipment
protective equipment used or to be for employee protection. Engineering
used. controls, work practices, personal pro-
(iv) Information from previous med- tective equipment, or a combination of
ical examinations of the employee these shall be implemented in accord-
which is not readily available to the ance with this paragraph to protect
examining physician. employees from exposure to hazardous
(v) Information required by § 1926.103. substances and safety and health haz-
(7) Physician’s written opinion. (i) The ards.
employer shall obtain and furnish the (1) Engineering controls, work practices
employee with a copy of a written and PPE for substances regulated either
opinion from the attending physician in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in
containing the following: other pertinent sections of this part. (i)
(A) The physician’s opinion as to Engineering controls and work prac-
whether the employee has any detected tices shall be instituted to reduce and
medical conditions which would place maintain employee exposure to or
the employee at increased risk of ma- below the permissible exposure limits
terial impairment of the employee’s for substances regulated either in
health from work in hazardous waste § 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of
operations or emergency response, or this part, except to the extent that
from respirator use. such controls and practices are not fea-
(B) The physician’s recommended sible.

limitations upon the employee’s as- NOTE TO (g)(1)(i): Engineering controls
signed work. which may be feasible include the use of
150
pressurized cabs or control booths on equip- (iii) Positive pressure self-contained
ment, and/or the use of remotely operated breathing apparatus, or positive pres-
material handling equipment. Work prac- sure air-line respirators equipped with
tices which may be feasible are removing all
an escape air supply, shall be used
non-essential employees from potential ex-
posure during opening of drums, wetting when chemical exposure levels present
down dusty operations and locating employ- will create a substantial possibility of
ees upwind of possible hazards. immediate death, immediate serious
(ii) Whenever engineering controls and illness or injury, or impair the ability
work practices are not feasible or not re- to escape.
quired, any reasonable combination of engi- (iv) Totally-encapsulating chemical
neering controls, work practices and PPE protective suits (protection equivalent
shall be used to reduce and maintain em-
ployee exposures to or below the permissible
to Level A protection as recommended
exposure limits or dose limits for substances in appendix B) shall be used in condi-
regulated either in § 1926.55 or other perti- tions where skin absorption of a haz-
nent sections of this part. ardous substance may result in a sub-
(iii) The employer shall not implement a stantial possibility of immediate
schedule of employee rotation as a means of death, immediate serious illness or in-
compliance with permissible exposure limits jury, or impair the ability to escape.
or dose limits except when there is no other (v) The level of protection provided
feasible way of complying with the airborne
or dermal dose limits for ionizing radiation.
by PPE selection shall be increased
(iv) The provisions of subpart D shall be when additional information on site
followed. conditions indicates that increased
protection is necessary to reduce em-
(2) Engineering controls, work practices, ployee exposures below permissible ex-
and PPE for substances not regulated ei- posure limits and published exposure
ther in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, levels for hazardous substances and
or in other pertinent sections of this part. health hazards. (See appendix B for
An appropriate combination of engi- guidance on selecting PPE ensembles.)
neering controls, work practices and
personal protective equipment shall be NOTE TO (g)(3): The level of employee pro-
used to reduce and maintain employee tection provided may be decreased when ad-
ditional information or site conditions show
exposure to or below published expo-
that decreased protection will not result in
sure levels for hazardous substances hazardous exposures to employees.
and health hazards not regulated either
in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or (vi) Personal protective equipment
in other pertinent sections of this part. shall be selected and used to meet the
The employer may use the published requirements of subpart E of this part
literature and MSDS as a guide in and additional requirements specified
making the employer’s determination in this section.
as to what level of protection the em- (4) Totally-encapsulating chemical pro-
ployer believes is appropriate for haz- tective suits. (i) Totally-encapsulating
ardous substances and health hazards suits shall protect employees from the
for which there is no permissible expo- particular hazards which are identified
sure limit or published exposure limit. during site characterization and anal-
(3) Personal protective equipment selec- ysis.
tion. (i) Personal protective equipment (ii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall
(PPE) shall be selected and used which be capable of maintaining positive air
will protect employees from the haz- pressure. (See appendix A for a test
ards and potential hazards they are method which may be used to evaluate
likely to encounter as identified during this requirement.)
the site characterization and analysis. (iii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall
(ii) Personal protective equipment be capable of preventing inward test
selection shall be based on an evalua- gas leakage of more than 0.5 percent.
tion of the performance characteristics (See appendix A for a test method
of the PPE relative to the require- which may be used to evaluate this re-
ments and limitations of the site, the quirement.)
task-specific conditions and duration, (5) Personal protective equipment (PPE)

and the hazards and potential hazards program. A written personal protective
identified at the site. equipment program, which is part of
151
the employer’s safety and health pro- condition such as the presence of flam-
gram required in paragraph (b) of this mable atmospheres or oxygen-deficient
section or required in paragraph (p)(1) environments.
of this section and which is also a part (3) Periodic monitoring. Periodic moni-
of the site-specific safety and health toring shall be conducted when the pos-
plan shall be established. The PPE pro- sibility of an IDLH condition or flam-
gram shall address the elements listed mable atmosphere has developed or
below. When elements, such as donning when there is indication that exposures
and doffing procedures, are provided by may have risen over permissible expo-
the manufacturer of a piece of equip- sure limits or published exposure levels
ment and are attached to the plan, since prior monitoring. Situations
they need not be rewritten into the where it shall be considered whether
plan as long as they adequately address the possibility that exposures have
the procedure or element. risen are as follows:
(i) PPE selection based upon site haz- (i) When work begins on a different
ards, portion of the site.
(ii) PPE use and limitations of the (ii) When contaminants other than
equipment, those previously identified are being
(iii) Work mission duration, handled.
(iv) PPE maintenance and storage, (iii) When a different type of oper-
(v) PPE decontamination and dis- ation is initiated (e.g., drum opening as
posal, opposed to exploratory well drilling).
(vi) PPE training and proper fitting, (iv) When employees are handling
(vii) PPE donning and doffing proce- leaking drums or containers or work-
dures, ing in areas with obvious liquid con-
(viii) PPE inspection procedures tamination (e.g., a spill or lagoon).
prior to, during, and after use, (4) Monitoring of high-risk employees.
(ix) Evaluation of the effectiveness of After the actual clean-up phase of any
the PPE program, and hazardous waste operation commences;
(x) Limitations during temperature for example, when soil, surface water
extremes, heat stress, and other appro- or containers are moved or disturbed;
priate medical considerations. the employer shall monitor those em-
(h) Monitoring—(1) General. (i) Moni- ployees likely to have the highest ex-
toring shall be performed in accord- posures to hazardous substances and
health hazards likely to be present
ance with this paragraph where there
above permissible exposure limits or
may be a question of employee expo-
published exposure levels by using per-
sure to hazardous concentrations of
sonal sampling frequently enough to
hazardous substances in order to assure
characterize employee exposures. If the
proper selection of engineering con-
employees likely to have the highest
trols, work practices and personal pro-
exposure are over permissible exposure
tective equipment so that employees
limits or published exposure limits,
are not exposed to levels which exceed
then monitoring shall continue to de-
permissible exposure limits, or pub-
termine all employees likely to be
lished exposure levels if there are no
above those limits. The employer may
permissible exposure limits, for haz-
utilize a representative sampling ap-
ardous substances.
proach by documenting that the em-
(ii) Air monitoring shall be used to
ployees and chemicals chosen for moni-
identify and quantify airborne levels of
toring are based on the criteria stated
hazardous substances and safety and
above.
health hazards in order to determine
the appropriate level of employee pro- NOTE TO (h): It is not required to monitor
tection needed on site. employees engaged in site characterization
(2) Initial entry. Upon initial entry, operations covered by paragraph (c) of this
section.
representative air monitoring shall be
conducted to identify any IDLH condi- (i) Informational programs. Employers
tion, exposure over permissible expo- shall develop and implement a pro-
sure limits or published exposure lev- gram, which is part of the employer’s
els, exposure over a radioactive mate- safety and health program required in
rial’s dose limits or other dangerous paragraph (b) of this section, to inform
152
employees, contractors, and sub- (ix) Drums and containers that can-
contractors (or their representative) not be moved without rupture, leakage,
actually engaged in hazardous waste or spillage shall be emptied into a
operations of the nature, level and de- sound container using a device classi-
gree of exposure likely as a result of fied for the material being transferred.
participation in such hazardous waste (x) A ground-penetrating system or
operations. Employees, contractors and other type of detection system or de-
subcontractors working outside of the vice shall be used to estimate the loca-
operations part of a site are not cov- tion and depth of buried drums or con-
ered by this standard. tainers.
(j) Handling drums and containers—(1) (xi) Soil or covering material shall be
General. (i) Hazardous substances and removed with caution to prevent drum
contaminated soils, liquids, and other or container rupture.
residues shall be handled, transported, (xii) Fire extinguishing equipment
labeled, and disposed of in accordance meeting the requirements of subpart F
with this paragraph. of this part shall be on hand and ready
(ii) Drums and containers used dur- for use to control incipient fires.
ing the clean-up shall meet the appro- (2) Opening drums and containers. The
priate DOT, OSHA, and EPA regula- following procedures shall be followed
tions for the wastes that they contain. in areas where drums or containers are
(iii) When practical, drums and con- being opened:
tainers shall be inspected and their in-
(i) Where an airline respirator system
tegrity shall be assured prior to being
is used, connections to the source of air
moved. Drums or containers that can-
supply shall be protected from con-
not be inspected before being moved
tamination and the entire system shall
because of storage conditions (i.e., bur-
be protected from physical damage.
ied beneath the earth, stacked behind
(ii) Employees not actually involved
other drums, stacked several tiers high
in opening drums or containers shall be
in a pile, etc.) shall be moved to an ac-
kept a safe distance from the drums or
cessible location and inspected prior to
containers being opened.
further handling.
(iv) Unlabelled drums and containers (iii) If employees must work near or
shall be considered to contain haz- adjacent to drums or containers being
ardous substances and handled accord- opened, a suitable shield that does not
ingly until the contents are positively interfere with the work operation shall
identified and labeled. be placed between the employee and
(v) Site operations shall be organized the drums or containers being opened
to minimize the amount of drum or to protect the employee in case of acci-
container movement. dental explosion.
(vi) Prior to movement of drums or (iv) Controls for drum or container
containers, all employees exposed to opening equipment, monitoring equip-
the transfer operation shall be warned ment, and fire suppression equipment
of the potential hazards associated shall be located behind the explosion-
with the contents of the drums or con- resistant barrier.
tainers. (v) When there is a reasonable possi-
(vii) U.S. Department of Transpor- bility of flammable atmospheres being
tation specified salvage drums or con- present, material handling equipment
tainers and suitable quantities of prop- and hand tools shall be of the type to
er absorbent shall be kept available prevent sources of ignition.
and used in areas where spills, leaks, or (vi) Drums and containers shall be
ruptures may occur. opened in such a manner that excess
(viii) Where major spills may occur, a interior pressure will be safely re-
spill containment program, which is lieved. If pressure can not be relieved
part of the employer’s safety and from a remote location, appropriate
health program required in paragraph shielding shall be placed between the
(b) of this section, shall be imple- employee and the drums or containers
mented to contain and isolate the en- to reduce the risk of employee injury.
tire volume of the hazardous substance (vii) Employees shall not stand upon
being transferred. or work from drums or containers.
153
(3) Material handling equipment. Mate- Transportation regulations. Employers and

rial handiing equipment used to trans- their shippers should refer to 49 CFR 173.21
fer drums and containers shall be se- and 173.50.
lected, positioned and operated to min- (6) Laboratory waste packs. In addition
imize sources of ignition related to the to the requirements of paragraph (j)(5)
equipment from igniting vapors re- of this section, the following pre-
leased from ruptured drums or con- cautions shall be taken, as a minimum,
tainers. in handling laboratory waste packs
(4) Radioactive wastes. Drums and con-
(lab packs):
tainers containing radioactive wastes
shall not be handled until such time as (i) Lab packs shall be opened only
their hazard to employees is properly when necessary and then only by an in-
assessed. dividual knowledgeable in the inspec-
(5) Shock sensitive wastes. As a min- tion, classification, and segregation of
imum, the following special pre- the containers within the pack accord-
cautions shall be taken when drums ing to the hazards of the wastes.
and containers containing or suspected (ii) If crystalline material is noted on
of containing shock-sensitive wastes any container, the contents shall be
are handled: handled as a shock-sensitive waste
(i) All non-essential employees shall until the contents are identified.
be evacuated from the area of transfer. (7) Sampling of drum and container
(ii) Material handling equipment contents. Sampling of containers and
shall be provided with explosive con- drums shall be done in accordance with
tainment devices or protective shields a sampling procedure which is part of
to protect equipment operators from the site safety and health plan devel-
exploding containers. oped for and available to employees
(iii) An employee alarm system capa- and others at the specific worksite.
ble of being perceived above sur- (8) Shipping and transport. (i) Drums
rounding light and noise conditions and containers shall be identified and
shall be used to signal the commence- classified prior to packaging for ship-
ment and completion of explosive ment.
waste handling activities. (ii) Drum or container staging areas
(iv) Continuous communications (i.e.,
shall be kept to the minimum number
portable radios, hand signals, tele-
necessary to identify and classify ma-
phones, as appropriate) shall be main-
terials safely and prepare them for
tained between the employee-in-charge
transport.
of the immediate handling area and
both the site safety and health super- (iii) Staging areas shall be provided
visor and the command post until such with adequate access and egress routes.
time as the handling operation is com- (iv) Bulking of hazardous wastes
pleted. Communication equipment or shall be permitted only after a thor-
methods that could cause shock sen- ough characterization of the materials
sitive materials to explode shall not be has been completed.
used. (9) Tank and vault procedures. (i)
(v) Drums and containers under pres- Tanks and vaults containing hazardous
sure, as evidenced by bulging or swell- substances shall be handled in a man-
ing, shall not be moved until such time ner similar to that for drums and con-
as the cause for excess pressure is de- tainers, taking into consideration the
termined and appropriate containment size of the tank or vault.
procedures have been implemented to (ii) Appropriate tank or vault entry
protect employees from explosive relief procedures as described in the employ-
of the drum. er’s safety and health plan shall be fol-
(vi) Drums and containers containing lowed whenever employees must enter
packaged laboratory wastes shall be a tank or vault.
considered to contain shock-sensitive (k) Decontamination—(1) General. Pro-
or explosive materials until they have cedures for all phases of decontamina-
been characterized. tion shall be developed and imple-

CAUTION: Shipping of shock sensitive wastes mented in accordance with this para-
may be prohibited under U.S. Department of graph.
154
(2) Decontamination procedures. (i) A (8) Showers and change rooms. Where
decontamination procedure shall be de- the decontamination procedure indi-
veloped, communicated to employees cates a need for regular showers and
and implemented before any employees change rooms outside of a contami-
or equipment may enter areas on site nated area, they shall be provided and
where potential for exposure to haz- meet the requirements of 29 CFR
ardous substances exists. 1910.141. If temperature conditions pre-
(ii) Standard operating procedures vent the effective use of water, then
shall be developed to minimize em- other effective means for cleansing
ployee contact with hazardous sub- shall be provided and used.
stances or with equipment that has (l) Emergency response by employees at
contacted hazardous substances. uncontrolled hazardous waste sites—(1)
(iii) All employees leaving a contami- Emergency response plan. (i) An emer-
nated area shall be appropriately de- gency response plan shall be developed
contaminated; all contaminated cloth- and implemented by all employers
ing and equipment leaving a contami- within the scope of paragraphs (a)(1)
nated area shall be appropriately dis- (i)–(ii) of this section to handle antici-
posed of or decontaminated. pated emergencies prior to the com-
(iv) Decontamination procedures mencement of hazardous waste oper-
shall be monitored by the site safety ations. The plan shall be in writing and
and health supervisor to determine available for inspection and copying by
their effectiveness. When such proce- employees, their representatives,
dures are found to be ineffective, ap- OSHA personnel and other govern-
propriate steps shall be taken to cor- mental agencies with relevant respon-
rect any deficiencies. sibilities.
(3) Location. Decontamination shall (ii) Employers who will evacuate
be performed in geographical areas their employees from the danger area
that will minimize the exposure of when an emergency occurs, and who do
uncontaminated employees or equip- not permit any of their employees to
ment to contaminated employees or assist in handling the emergency, are
equipment. exempt from the requirements of this
(4) Equipment and solvents. All equip- paragraph if they provide an emer-
ment and solvents used for decon- gency action plan complying with
tamination shall be decontaminated or § 1926.35 of this part.
disposed of properly. (2) Elements of an emergency response
(5) Personal protective clothing and plan. The employer shall develop an
equipment. (i) Protective clothing and emergency response plan for emer-
equipment shall be decontaminated, gencies which shall address, as a min-
cleaned, laundered, maintained or re- imum, the following:
placed as needed to maintain their ef- (i) Pre-emergency planning.
fectiveness. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author-
(ii) Employees whose non-imper- ity, and communication.
meable clothing becomes wetted with (iii) Emergency recognition and pre-
hazardous substances shall imme- vention.
diately remove that clothing and pro- (iv) Safe distances and places of ref-
ceed to shower. The clothing shall be uge.
disposed of or decontaminated before it (v) Site security and control.
is removed from the work zone. (vi) Evacuation routes and proce-
(6) Unauthorized employees. Unauthor- dures.
ized employees shall not remove pro- (vii) Decontamination procedures
tective clothing or equipment from which are not covered by the site safe-
change rooms. ty and health plan.
(7) Commercial laundries or cleaning es- (viii) Emergency medical treatment
tablishments. Commercial laundries or and first aid.
cleaning establishments that decon- (ix) Emergency alerting and response
taminate protective clothing or equip- procedures.
ment shall be informed of the poten- (x) Critique of response and follow-
tially harmful effects of exposures to up.
hazardous substances. (xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
155
(3) Procedures for handling emergency TABLE D–65.1—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION

incidents. (i) In addition to the ele- INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES—Continued
ments for the emergency response plan
Foot-
required in paragraph (1)(2) of this sec- can- Area or operations
tion, the following elements shall be dles
included for emergency response plans: 5 ........ Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work
(A) Site topography, layout, and pre- areas. (Exception: Minimum of 10 foot-candles is
vailing weather conditions. required at tunnel and shaft heading during drilling
mucking, and scaling. Mine Safety and Health Ad-
(B) Procedures for reporting inci- ministration approved cap lights shall be accept-
dents to local, state, and federal gov- able for use in the tunnel heading.)
ernmental agencies. 10 ...... General shops (e.g., mechanical and electrical
equipment rooms, active storerooms, barracks or
(ii) The emergency response plan living quarters, locker or dressing rooms, dining
shall be a separate section of the Site areas, and indoor toilets and workrooms.)
Safety and Health Plan. 30 ...... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices.
(iii) The emergency response plan
shall be compatible and integrated (n) Sanitation at temporary work-
with the disaster, fire and/or emer- places—(1) Potable water. (i) An ade-
gency response plans of local, state, quate supply of potable water shall be
and federal agencies. provided on the site.
(iv) The emergency response plan (ii) Portable containers used to dis-
shall be rehearsed regularly as part of pense drinking water shall be capable
the overall training program for site of being tightly closed, and equipped
operations. with a tap. Water shall not be dipped
(v) The site emergency response plan from containers.
shall be reviewed periodically and, as (iii) Any container used to distribute
necessary, be amended to keep it cur- drinking water shall be clearly marked
rent with new or changing site condi- as to the nature of its contents and not
tions or information. used for any other purpose.
(vi) An employee alarm system shall (iv) Where single service cups (to be
be installed in accordance with 29 CFR used but once) are supplied, both a san-
1926.159 to notify employees of an emer- itary container for the unused cups and
gency situation; to stop work activities a receptacle for disposing of the used
if necessary; to lower background noise cups shall be provided.
in order to speed communication; and (2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for
to begin emergency procedures. nonpotable water, such as water for
firefighting purposes, shall be identi-
(vii) Based upon the information
fied to indicate clearly that the water
available at time of the emergency, the
is unsafe and is not to be used for
employer shall evaluate the incident
drinking, washing, or cooking pur-
and the site response capabilities and
poses.
proceed with the appropriate steps to
(ii) There shall be no cross-connec-
implement the site emergency response
tion, open or potential, between a sys-
plan.
tem furnishing potable water and a
(m) Illumination. Areas accessible to
system furnishing nonpotable water.
employees shall be lighted to not less
(3) Toilet facilities. (i) Toilets shall be
than the minimum illumination inten-
provided for employees according to
sities listed in the following Table D–
the following Table D–65.2.
65.1 while any work is in progress:
TABLE D–65.2—TOILET FACILITIES
TABLE D–65.1—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION
INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES Number of employees Minimum number of facilities
Foot- 20 or fewer ............................. One.

can- Area or operations More than 20, fewer than 200 One toilet seat and one uri-
dles nal per 40 employees.
More than 200 ........................ One toilet seat and one uri-
5 ........ General site areas. nal per 50 employees.
3 ........ Excavation and waste areas, accessways, active
storage areas, loading platforms, refueling, and

field maintenance areas.
(ii) Under temporary field conditions,
5 ........ Indoors: Warehouses, corridors, hallways, and provisions shall be made to assure that
exitways. at least one toilet facility is available.
156
(iii) Hazardous waste sites not pro- the worksite, shall provide employees
vided with a sanitary sewer shall be with a clean area where they can re-
provided with the following toilet fa- move, store, and put on street clothing.
cilities unless prohibited by local The second area, with an exit to the
codes: worksite, shall provide employees with
(A) Chemical toilets; an area where they can put on, remove
(B) Recirculating toilets; and store work clothing and personal
(C) Combustion toilets; or protective equipment.
(D) Flush toilets. (iii) Showers and change rooms shall
(iv) The requirements of this para- be located in areas where exposures are
graph for sanitation facilities shall not below the permissible exposure limits
apply to mobile crews having transpor- and published exposure levels. If this
tation readily available to nearby toi- cannot be accomplished, then a ven-
let facilities. tilation system shall be provided that
(v) Doors entering toilet facilities will supply air that is below the per-
shall be provided with entrance locks missible exposure limits and published
controlled from inside the facility. exposure levels.
(4) Food handling. All food service fa- (iv) Employers shall assure that em-
cilities and operations for employees ployees shower at the end of their work
shall meet the applicable laws, ordi- shift and when leaving the hazardous
nances, and regulations of the jurisdic- waste site.
tions in which they are located. (o) New technology programs. (1) The
(5) Temporary sleeping quarters. When employer shall develop and implement
temporary sleeping quarters are pro- procedures for the introduction of ef-
vided, they shall be heated, ventilated, fective new technologies and equip-
and lighted. ment developed for the improved pro-
(6) Washing facilities. The employer tection of employees working with haz-
shall provide adequate washing facili- ardous waste clean-up operations, and
ties for employees engaged in oper- the same shall be implemented as part
ations where hazardous substances of the site safety and health program
may be harmful to employees. Such fa- to assure that employee protection is
cilities shall be in near proximity to being maintained.
the worksite; in areas where exposures (2) New technologies, equipment or
are below permissible exposure limits control measures available to the in-
and published exposure levels and dustry, such as the use of foams,
which are under the controls of the em- absorbents, adsorbents, neutralizers, or
ployer; and shall be so equipped as to other means to suppress the level of air
enable employees to remove hazardous contaminates while excavating the site
substances from themselves. or for spill control, shall be evaluated
(7) Showers and change rooms. When by employers or their representatives.
hazardous waste clean-up or removal Such an evaluation shall be done to de-
operations commence on a site and the termine the effectiveness of the new
duration of the work will require six methods, materials, or equipment be-
months or greater time to complete, fore implementing their use on a large
the employer shall provide showers and scale for enhancing employee protec-
change rooms for all employees ex- tion. Information and data from manu-
posed to hazardous substances and facturers or suppliers may be used as
health hazards involved in hazardous part of the employer’s evaluation ef-
waste clean-up or removal operations. fort. Such evaluations shall be made
(i) Showers shall be provided and available to OSHA upon request.
shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR (p) Certain operations conducted under
1926.51(f)(4). the Resource Conservation and Recovery
(ii) Change rooms shall be provided Act of 1976 (RCRA). Employers con-
and shall meet the requirements of 29 ducting operations at treatment, stor-
CFR 1926.51(i). Change rooms shall con- age and disposal (TSD) facilities speci-
sist of two separate change areas sepa- fied in paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this sec-
rated by the shower area required in tion shall provide and implement the
paragraph (n)(7)(i) of this section. One programs specified in this paragraph.
change area, with an exit leading off See the ‘‘Notes and Exceptions’’ to
157
paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section for stances at TSD operations to enable

employers not covered.)’’. the employees to perform their as-
(1) Safety and health program. The em- signed duties and functions in a safe
ployer shall develop and implement a and healthful manner so as not endan-
written safety and health program for ger themselves or other employees. The
employees involved in hazardous waste initial training shall be for 24 hours
operations that shall be available for and refresher training shall be for eight
inspection by employees, their rep- hours annually. Employees who have
resentatives and OSHA personnel. The received the initial training required
program shall be designed to identify, by this paragraph shall be given a writ-
evaluate and control safety and health ten certificate attesting that they have
hazards in their facilities for the pur- successfully completed the necessary
pose of employee protection, to provide training.
for emergency response meeting the re- (ii) Current employees. Employers who
quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this can show by an employee’s previous
section and to address as appropriate work experience and/or training that
site analysis, engineering controls, the employee has had training equiva-
maximum exposure limits, hazardous lent to the initial training required by
waste handling procedures and uses of this paragraph, shall be considered as
new technologies. meeting the initial training require-
(2) Hazard communication program. ments of this paragraph as to that em-
The employer shall implement a haz- ployee. Equivalent training includes
ard communication program meeting the training that existing employees
the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.59 as might have already received from ac-
part of the employer’s safety and pro- tual site work experience. Current em-
gram. ployees shall receive eight hours of re-
NOTE TO 1926.65: The exemption for haz- fresher training annually.
ardous waste provided in § 1926.59 is applica- (iii) Trainers. Trainers who teach ini-
ble to this section. tial training shall have satisfactorily
(3) Medical surveillance program. The completed a training course for teach-
employer shall develop and implement ing the subjects they are expected to
a medical surveillance program meet- teach or they shall have the academic
ing the requirements of paragraph (f) of credentials and instruction experience
this section. necessary to demonstrate a good com-
(4) Decontamination program. The em- mand of the subject matter of the
ployer shall develop and implement a courses and competent instructional
decontamination procedure meeting skills.
the requirements of paragraph (k) of (8) Emergency response program—(i)
this section. Emergency response plan. An emergency
(5) New technology program. The em- response plan shall be developed and
ployer shall develop and implement implemented by all employers. Such
procedures meeting the requirements plans need not duplicate any of the
of paragraph (o) of this section for in- subjects fully addressed in the employ-
troducing new and innovative equip- er’s contingency planning required by
ment into the workplace. permits, such as those issued by the
(6) Material handling program. Where U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-
employees will be handling drums or cy, provided that the contingency plan
containers, the employer shall develop is made part of the emergency response
and implement procedures meeting the plan. The emergency response plan
requirements of paragraphs (j)(1) (ii) shall be a written portion of the em-
through (viii) and (xi) of this section, ployers safety and health program re-
as well as (j)(3) and (j)(8) of this section quired in paragraph (p)(1) of this sec-
prior to starting such work. tion. Employers who will evacuate
(7) Training program—(i) New employ- their employees from the worksite lo-
ees. The employer shall develop and im- cation when an emergency occurs and
plement a training program, which is who do not permit any of their employ-
part of the employer’s safety and ees to assist in handling the emergency
health program, for employees exposed are exempt from the requirements of
to health hazards or hazardous subparagraph (p)(8) if they provide an
158
emergency action plan complying with ness training to recognize that an emer-
§ 1926.35 of this part. gency response situation exists and they
(ii) Elements of an emergency response have been instructed to call the designated
outside fully-trained emergency response
plan. The employer shall develop an
team for assistance.
emergency response plan for emer-
gencies which shall address, as a min- (B) Employee members of TSD facil-
imum, the following areas to the ex- ity emergency response organizations
tent that they are not addressed in any shall be trained to a level of com-
specific program required in this para- petence in the recognition of health
graph: and safety hazards to protect them-
(A) Pre-emergency planning and co- selves and other employees. This would
ordination with outside parties. include training in the methods used to
(B) Personnel roles, lines of author- minimize the risk from safety and
ity, and communication. health hazards; in the safe use of con-
(C) Emergency recognition and pre- trol equipment; in the selection and
vention. use of appropriate personal protective
(D) Safe distances and places of ref- equipment; in the safe operating proce-
uge. dures to be used at the incident scene;
(E) Site security and control. in the techniques of coordination with
(F) Evacuation routes and proce- other employees to minimize risks; in
dures. the appropriate response to over expo-
(G) Decontamination procedures. sure from health hazards or injury to
(H) Emergency medical treatment themselves and other employees; and
and first aid. in the recognition of subsequent symp-
(I) Emergency alerting and response toms which may result from over expo-
procedures. sures.
(J) Critique of response and follow- (C) The employer shall certify that
up. each covered employee has attended
(K) PPE and emergency equipment. and successfully completed the train-
(iii) Training. (A) Training for emer- ing required in paragraph (p)(8)(iii) of
gency response employees shall be this section, or shall certify the em-
completed before they are called upon ployee’s competency at least yearly.
to perform in real emergencies. Such The method used to demonstrate com-
training shall include the elements of petency for certification of training
the emergency response plan, standard shall be recorded and maintained by
operating procedures the employer has the employer.
established for the job, the personal (iv) Procedures for handling emergency
protective equipment to be worn and incidents. (A) In addition to the ele-
procedures for handling emergency in- ments for the emergency response plan
cidents. required in paragraph (p)(8)(ii) of this
Exception #1: An employer need not train all section, the following elements shall be
employees to the degree specified if the included for emergency response plans
employer divides the work force in a man- to the extent that they do not repeat
ner such that a sufficient number of em- any information already contained in
ployees who have responsibility to control the emergency response plan:
emergencies have the training specified, (1) Site topography, layout, and pre-
and all other employees, who may first re-
vailing weather conditions.
spond to an emergency incident, have suffi-
cient awareness training to recognize that (2) Procedures for reporting incidents
an emergency response situation exists and to local, state, and federal govern-
that they are instructed in that case to mental agencies.
summon the fully trained employees and (B) The emergency response plan
not attempt control activities for which shall be compatible and integrated
they are not trained. with the disaster, fire and/or emer-
Exception #2: An employer need not train all gency response plans of local, state,
employees to the degree specified if ar-
and federal agencies.
rangements have been made in advance for
(C) The emergency response plan
an outside fully-trained emergency re-

sponse team to respond in a reasonable pe- shall be rehearsed regularly as part of
riod and all employees, who may come to the overall training program for site
the incident first, have sufficient aware- operations.
159
(D) The site emergency response plan imum, the following to the extent that
shall be reviewed periodically and, as they are not addressed elsewhere:
necessary, be amended to keep it cur- (i) Pre-emergency planning and co-
rent with new or changing site condi- ordination with outside parties.
tions or information. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author-
(E) An employee alarm system shall ity, training, and communication.
be installed in accordance with 29 CFR (iii) Emergency recognition and pre-
1926.159 to notify employees of an emer- vention.
gency situation; to stop work activities
(iv) Safe distances and places of ref-
if necessary; to lower background noise
in order to speed communication; and uge.
to begin emergency procedures. (v) Site security and control.
(F) Based upon the information avail- (vi) Evacuation routes and proce-
able at time of the emergency, the em- dures.
ployer shall evaluate the incident and (vii) Decontamination.
the site response capabilities and pro- (viii) Emergency medical treatment
ceed with the appropriate steps to im- and first aid.
plement the site emergency response (ix) Emergency alerting and response
plan. procedures.
(q) Emerqency response to hazardous (x) Critique of response and follow-
substance releases. This paragraph cov- up.
ers employers whose employees are en- (xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
gaged in emergency response no matter
(xii) Emergency response organiza-
where it occurs except that it does not
tions may use the local emergency re-
cover employees engaged in operations
specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through sponse plan or the state emergency re-
(a)(1)(iv) of this section. Those emer- sponse plan or both, as part of their
gency response organizations who have emergency response plan to avoid du-
developed and implemented programs plication. Those items of the emer-
equivalent to this paragraph for han- gency response plan that are being
dling releases of hazardous substances properly addressed by the SARA Title
pursuant to section 303 of the Super- III plans may be substituted into their
fund Amendments and Reauthorization emergency plan or otherwise kept to-
Act of 1986 (Emergency Planning and gether for the employer and employee’s
Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986, use.
42 U.S.C. 11003) shall be deemed to have (3) Procedures for handling emergency
met the requirements of this para- response. (i) The senior emergency re-
graph. sponse official responding to an emer-
(1) Emergency response plan. An emergency shall become the individual in
gency response plan shall be developed charge of a site-specific Incident Com-
and implemented to handle anticipated mand System (ICS). All emergency re-
emergencies prior to the commence- sponders and their communications
ment of emergency response oper- shall be coordinated and controlled
ations. The plan shall be in writing and through the individual in charge of the
available for inspection and copying by ICS assisted by the senior official
employees, their representatives and
present for each employer.
OSHA personnel. Employers who will
evacuate their employees from the NOTE TO (g)(3)(i): The senior official at an
danger area when an emergency occurs, emergency response is the most senior offi-
and who do not permit any of their em- cial on the site who has the responsibility
ployees to assist in handling the emer- for controlling the operations at the site.
gency, are exempt from the require- Initially it is the senior officer on the first-
ments of this paragraph if they provide due piece of responding emergency apparatus
an emergency action plan in accord- to arrive on the incident scene. As more sen-
ior officers arrive (i.e., battalion chief, fire
ance with § 1926.35 of this part.
chief, state law enforcement official, site co-
(2) Elements of an emergency response
ordinator, etc.) the position is passed up the

plan. The employer shall develop an line of authority which has been previously
emergency response plan for emer- established.
gencies which shall address, as a min-
160
(ii) The individual in charge of the (viii) When activities are judged by
ICS shall identify, to the extent pos- the safety official to be an IDLH condi-
sible, all hazardous substances or con- tion and/or to involve an imminent
ditions present and shall address as ap- danger condition, the safety official
propriate site analysis, use of engineer- shall have the authority to alter, sus-
ing controls, maximum exposure lim- pend, or terminate those activities.
its, hazardous substance handling pro- The safety official shall immediately
cedures, and use of any new tech- inform the individual in charge of the
nologies. ICS of any actions needed to be taken
(iii) Based on the hazardous sub- to correct these hazards at the emer-
stances and/or conditions present, the gency scene.
individual in charge of the ICS shall (ix) After emergency operations have
implement appropriate emergency op- terminated, the individual in charge of
erations, and assure that the personal the ICS shall implement appropriate
protective equipment worn is appro- decontamination procedures.
priate for the hazards to be encoun-
(x) When deemed necessary for meet-
tered. However, personal protective
ing the tasks at hand, approved self-
equipment shall meet, at a minimum,
contained compressed air breathing ap-
the criteria contained in 29 CFR 1926.97
paratus may be used with approved cyl-
when worn while performing fire fight-
inders from other approved self-con-
ing operations beyond the incipient
tained compressed air breathing appa-
stage for any incident.
ratus provided that such cylinders are
(iv) Employees engaged in emergency
of the same capacity and pressure rat-
response and exposed to hazardous sub-
ing. All compressed air cylinders used
stances presenting an inhalation haz-
with self-contained breathing appa-
ard or potential inhalation hazard shall
wear positive pressure self-contained ratus shall meet U.S. Department of
breathing apparatus while engaged in Transportation and National Institute
emergency response, until such time for Occupational Safety and Health cri-
that the individual in charge of the ICS teria.
determines through the use of air mon- (4) Skilled support personnel. Per-
itoring that a decreased level of res- sonnel, not necessarily an employer’s
piratory protection will not result in own employees, who are skilled in the
hazardous exposures to employees. operation of certain equipment, such as
(v) The individual in charge of the mechanized earth moving or digging
ICS shall limit the number of emer- equipment or crane and hoisting equip-
gency response personnel at the emer- ment, and who are needed temporarily
gency site, in those areas of potential to perform immediate emergency sup-
or actual exposure to incident or site port work that cannot reasonably be
hazards, to those who are actively per- performed in a timely fashion by an
forming emergency operations. How- employer’s own employees, and who
ever, operations in hazardous areas will be or may be exposed to the haz-
shall be performed using the buddy sys- ards at an emergency response scene,
tem in groups of two or more. are not required to meet the training
(vi) Back-up personnel shall stand by required in this paragraph for the em-
with equipment ready to provide as- ployer’s regular employees. However,
sistance or rescue. Advance first aid these personnel shall be given an ini-
support personnel, as a minimum, shall tial briefing at the site prior to their
also stand by with medical equipment participation in any emergency re-
and transportation capability. sponse. The initial briefing shall in-
(vii) The individual in charge of the clude instruction in the wearing of ap-
ICS shall designate a safety official, propriate personal protective equip-
who is knowledgable in the operations ment, what chemical hazards are in-
being implemented at the emergency volved, and what duties are to be per-
response site, with specific responsi- formed. All other appropriate safety
bility to identify and evaluate hazards and health precautions provided to the
and to provide direction with respect employer’s own employees shall be

to the safety of operations for the used to assure the safety and health of
emergency at hand. these personnel.
161
(5) Specialist employees. Employees Transportation’s Emergency Response

who, in the course of their regular job Guidebook.
duties, work with and are trained in (F) The ability to realize the need for
the hazards of specific hazardous sub- additional resources, and to make ap-
stances, and who will be called upon to propriate notifications to the commu-
provide technical advice or assistance nication center.
at a hazardous substance release inci- (ii) First responder operations level.
dent to the individual in charge, shall First responders at the operations level
receive training or demonstrate com- are individuals who respond to releases
petency in the area of their specializa- or potential releases of hazardous sub-
tion annually. stances as part of the initial response
(6) Training. Training shall be based to the site for the purpose of protecting
on the duties and function to be per- nearby persons, property, or the envi-
formed by each responder of an emer- ronment from the effects of the re-
gency response organization. The skill lease. They are trained to respond in a
and knowledge levels required for all defensive fashion without actually try-
new responders, those hired after the ing to stop the release. Their function
effective date of this standard, shall be is to contain the release from a safe
conveyed to them through training be- distance, keep it from spreading, and
fore they are permitted to take part in prevent exposures. First responders at
actual emergency operations on an in- the operational level shall have re-
cident. Employees who participate, or
ceived at least eight hours of training
are expected to participate, in emer-
or have had sufficient experience to ob-
gency response, shall be given training
jectively demonstrate competency in
in accordance with the following para-
the following areas in addition to those
graphs:
listed for the awareness level and the
(i) First responder awareness level. employer shall so certify:
First responders at the awareness level
(A) Knowledge of the basic hazard
are individuals who are likely to wit-
and risk assessment techniques.
ness or discover a hazardous substance
release and who have been trained to (B) Know how to select and use prop-
initiate an emergency response se- er personal protective equipment pro-
quence by notifying the proper authori- vided to the first responder operational
ties of the release. They would take no level.
further action beyond notifying the au- (C) An understanding of basic haz-
thorities of the release. First respond- ardous materials terms.
ers at the awareness level shall have (D) Know how to perform basic con-
sufficient training or have had suffi- trol, containment and/or confinement
cient experience to objectively dem- operations within the capabilities of
onstrate competency in the following the resources and personal protective
areas: equipment available with their unit.
(A) An understanding of what haz- (E) Know how to implement basic de-
ardous substances are, and the risks as- contamination procedures.
sociated with them in an incident. (F) An understanding of the relevant
(B) An understanding of the potential standard operating procedures and ter-
outcomes associated with an emer- mination procedures.
gency created when hazardous sub- (iii) Hazardous materials technician.
stances are present. Hazardous materials technicians are
(C) The ability to recognize the pres- individuals who respond to releases or
ence of hazardous substances in an potential releases for the purpose of
emergency. stopping the release. They assume a
(D) The ability to identify the haz- more aggressive role than a first re-
ardous substances, if possible. sponder at the operations level in that
(E) An understanding of the role of they will approach the point of release
the first responder awareness indi- in order to plug, patch or otherwise
vidual in the employer’s emergency re- stop the release of a hazardous sub-
sponse plan including site security and stance. Hazardous materials techni-
control and the U.S. Department of cians shall have received at least 24
162
hours of training equal to the first re- (D) Be able to select and use proper
sponder operations level and in addi- specialized chemical personal protec-
tion have competency in the following tive equipment provided to the haz-
areas and the employer shall so certify: ardous materials specialist.
(A) Know how to implement the em- (E) Understand in-depth hazard and
ployer’s emergency response plan. risk techniques.
(B) Know the classification, identi- (F) Be able to perform specialized
fication and verification of known and control, containment, and/or confine-
unknown materials by using field sur- ment operations within the capabili-
vey instruments and equipment. ties of the resources and personal pro-
(C) Be able to function within an as- tective equipment available.
signed role in the Incident Command (G) Be able to determine and imple-
System. ment decontamination procedures.
(D) Know how to select and use prop- (H) Have the ability to develop a site
er specialized chemical personal pro- safety and control plan.
tective equipment provided to the haz- (I) Understand chemical, radiological
ardous materials technician. and toxicological terminology and be-
(E) Understand hazard and risk as- havior.
sessment techniques. (v) On scene incident commander. Inci-
(F) Be able to perform advance con- dent commanders, who will assume
trol, containment, and/or confinement control of the incident scene beyond
operations within the capabilities of the first responder awareness level,
the resources and personal protective shall receive at least 24 hours of train-
equipment available with the unit. ing equal to the first responder oper-
(G) Understand and implement de- ations level and in addition have com-
contamination procedures. petency in the following areas and the
(H) Understand termination proce- employer shall so certify:
dures. (A) Know and be able to implement
(I) Understand basic chemical and the employer’s incident command sys-
toxicological terminology and behav- tem.
ior. (B) Know how to implement the em-
(iv) Hazardous materials specialist. ployer’s emergency response plan.
Hazardous materials specialists are in- (C) Know and understand the hazards
dividuals who respond with and provide and risks associated with employees
support to hazardous materials techni- working in chemical protective cloth-
cians. Their duties parallel those of the ing.
hazardous materials technician, how- (D) Know how to implement the local
ever, those duties require a more di- emergency response plan.
rected or specific knowledge of the var- (E) Know of the state emergency re-
ious substances they may be called sponse plan and of the Federal Re-
upon to contain. The hazardous mate- gional Response Team.
rials specialist would also act as the (F) Know and understand the impor-
site liaison with Federal, state, local tance of decontamination procedures.
and other government authorities in (7) Trainers. Trainers who teach any
regards to site activities. Hazardous of the above training subjects shall
materials specialists shall have re- have satisfactorily completed a train-
ceived at least 24 hours of training ing course for teaching the subjects
equal to the technician level and in ad- they are expected to teach, such as the
dition have competency in the fol- courses offered by the U.S. National
lowing areas and the employer shall so Fire Academy, or they shall have the
certify: training and/or academic credentials
(A) Know how to implement the local and instructional experience necessary
emergency response plan. to demonstrate competent instruc-
(B) Understand classification, identi- tional skills and a good command of
fication and verification of known and the subject matter of the courses they
unknown materials by using advanced are to teach.
survey instruments and equipment. (8) Refresher training. (i) Those em-
(C) Know of the state emergency re- ployees who are trained in accordance
sponse plan. with paragraph (q)(6) of this section
163
shall receive annual refresher training sonal protective equipment and decon-
of sufficient content and duration to tamination procedures. All equipment
maintain their competencies, or shall to be used in the performance of the
demonstrate competency in those areas clean-up work shall be in serviceable
at least yearly. condition and shall have been inspected
(ii) A statement shall be made of the prior to use.
training or competency, and if a state-
APPENDICES TO § 1926.65—HAZARDOUS WASTE
ment of competency is made, the em-
OPERATIONS AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE
ployer shall keep a record of the meth-
odology used to demonstrate com- NOTE: The following appendices serve as
petency. non-mandatory guidelines to assist employ-
(9) Medical surveillance and consulta- ees and employers in complying with the ap-
propriate requirements of this section. How-
tion. (i) Members of an organized and
ever § 1926.65(g) makes mandatory in certain
designated HAZMAT team and haz- circumstances the use of Level A and Level
ardous materials specialists shall re- B PPE protection.
ceive a baseline physical examination
and be provided with medical surveil- APPENDIX A TO § 1926.65—PERSONAL
lance as required in paragraph (f) of PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT TEST METHODS
this section. This appendix sets forth the non-manda-
(ii) Any emergency response employ- tory examples of tests which may be used to
ees who exhibits signs or symptoms evaluate compliance with § 1926.65(g)(4) (ii)
which may have resulted from exposure and (iii). Other tests and other challenge
to hazardous substances during the agents may be used to evaluate compliance.
course of an emergency incident, either A. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective
immediately or subsequently, shall be suit pressure test
provided with medical consultation as
1.0—Scope
required in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this
1.1 This practice measures the ability of a
section. gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
(10) Chemical protective clothing. protective suit material, seams, and closures
Chemical protective clothing and to maintain a fixed positive pressure. The re-
equipment to be used by organized and sults of this practice allow the gas tight in-
designated HAZMAT team members, or tegrity of a totally-encapsulating chemical
to be used by hazardous materials spe- protective suit to be evaluated.
cialists, shall meet the requirements of 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to
paragraphs (g) (3) through (5) of this permeation, penetration, and degradation by
specific hazardous substances is not deter-
section.
mined by this test method.
(11) Post-emergency response oper- 2.0—Definition of terms
ations. Upon completion of the emer- 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective
gency response, if it is determined that suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment
it is necessary to remove hazardous which is constructed of protective clothing
substances, health hazards, and mate- materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head,
rials contaminated with them (such as arms, legs and respirator; may cover the
contaminated soil or other elements of wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at-
the natural environment) from the site tached gloves and boots; completely encloses
the wearer and respirator by itself or in com-
of the incident, the employer con-
bination with the wearer’s gloves and boots.
ducting the clean-up shall comply with 2.2 Protective clothing material means any
one of the following: material or combination of materials used in
(i) Meet all of the requirements of an item of clothing for the purpose of iso-
paragraphs (b) through (o) of this sec- lating parts of the body from direct contact
tion; or with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas-
(ii) Where the clean-up is done on eous chemicals.
plant property using plant or work- 2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this
place employees, such employees shall test method, the limited flow of a gas under
pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to
have completed the training require-
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and
ments of the following: 29 CFR 1926.35, time interval.
1926.59, and 1926.103, and other appro- 3.0—Summary of test method
priate safety and health training made 3.1 The TECP suit is visually inspected and
necessary by the tasks that they are modified for the test. The test apparatus is
expected to be performed such as per- attached to the suit to permit inflation to
164
the pre-test suit expansion pressure for re- sure to pressure (B), the suit test pressure.
moval of suit wrinkles and creases. The pres- Begin timing. At the end of three minutes,
sure is lowered to the test pressure and mon- record the suit pressure as pressure (C), the
itored for three minutes. If the pressure drop ending suit pressure. The difference between
is excessive, the TECP suit fails the test and the suit test pressure and the ending suit
is removed from service. The test is repeated test pressure (B-C) shall be defined as the
after leak location and repair. suit pressure drop.
4.0—Required Supplies 6.1.6 If the suit pressure drop is more than
4.1 Source of compressed air. 20 percent of the suit test pressure (B) during
4.2 Test apparatus for suit testing, includ- the three-minute test period, the suit fails
ing a pressure measurement device with a the test and shall be removed from service.
sensitivity of at least 1⁄4 inch water gauge. 7.0—Retest Procedure
4.3 Vent valve closure plugs or sealing 7.1 If the suit fails the test check for leaks
tape. by inflating the suit to pressure (A) and
4.4 Soapy water solution and soft brush. brushing or wiping the entire suit (including
4.5 Stop watch or appropriate timing de-
seams, closures, lens gaskets, glove-to-sleeve
vice.
joints, etc.) with a mild soap and water solu-
5.0—Safety Precautions
tion. Observe the suit for the formation of
5.1 Care shall be taken to provide the cor-
soap bubbles, which is an indication of a
rect pressure safety devices required for the
leak. Repair all identified leaks.
source of compressed air used.
6.0—Test Procedure 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in
6.1 Prior to each test, the tester shall per- Test procedure 6.0.
form a visual inspection of the suit. Check 8.0—Report
the suit for seam integrity by visually exam- 8.1 Each TECP suit tested by this practice
ining the seams and gently pulling on the shall have the following information re-
seams. Ensure that all air supply lines, fit- corded:
tings, visor, zippers, and valves are secure 8.1.1 Unique identification number, identi-
and show no signs of deterioration. fying brand name, date of purchase, material
6.1.1 Seal off the vent valves along with of construction, and unique fit features, e.g.,
any other normal inlet or exhaust points special breathing apparatus.
(such as umbilical air line fittings or face 8.1.2 The actual values for test pressures
piece opening) with tape or other appropriate (A), (B), and (C) shall be recorded along with
means (caps, plugs, fixture, etc.). Care should the specific observation times. If the ending
be exercised in the sealing process not to pressure (C) is less than 80 percent of the test
damage any of the suit components. pressure (B), the suit shall be identified as
6.1.2 Close all closure assemblies. failing the test. When possible, the specific
6.1.3 Prepare the suit for inflation by pro- leak location shall be identified in the test
viding an improvised connection point on the records. Retest pressure data shall be re-
suit for connecting an airline. Attach the corded as an additional test.
pressure test apparatus to the suit to permit 8.1.3 The source of the test apparatus used
suit inflation from a compressed air source shall be identified and the sensitivity of the
equipped with a pressure indicating regu- pressure gauge shall be recorded.
lator. The leak tightness of the pressure test 8.1.4 Records shall be kept for each pres-
apparatus should be tested before and after sure test even if repairs are being made at
each test by closing off the end of the tubing the test location.
attached to the suit and assuring a pressure
of three inches water gauge for three min- CAUTION
utes can be maintained. If a component is re-
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be
moved for the test, that component shall be
sure they are positioned correctly and se-
replaced and a second test conducted with
cured tightly before putting the suit back
another component removed to permit a
into service. Special care should be taken to
complete test of the ensemble.
examine each exhaust valve to make sure it
6.1.4 The pre-test expansion pressure (A)
is not blocked.
and the suit test pressure (B) shall be sup-
plied by the suit manufacturer, but in no Care should also be exercised to assure
case shall they be less than: (A) = three that the inside and outside of the suit is
inches water gauge; and (B) = two inches completely dry before it is put into storage.
water gauge. The ending suit pressure (C) B. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective
shall be no less than 80 percent of the test suit qualitative leak test
pressure (B); i.e., the pressure drop shall not
exceed 20 percent of the test pressure (B). 1.0—Scope
6.1.5 Inflate the suit until the pressure in- 1.1 This practice semi-qualitatively tests
side is equal to pressure (A), the pre-test ex- gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
pansion suit pressure. Allow at least one protective suit integrity by detecting inward
minute to fill out the wrinkles in the suit. leakage of ammonia vapor. Since no modi-
Release sufficient air to reduce the suit pres- fications are made to the suit to carry out
165
this test, the results from this practice pro- the test room and his stand-by person meas-
vide a realistic test for the integrity of the ures the ammonia concentration inside the
entire suit. suit using a low range ammonia length of
1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to per- stain detector tube or other more sensitive
meation, penetration, and degradation is not ammonia detector. A stand-by person is re-
determined by this test method. ASTM test quired to observe the test individual during
methods are available to test suit materials the test procedure; aid the person in donning
for these characteristics and the tests are and doffing the TECP suit; and monitor the
usually conducted by the manufacturers of suit interior. The intrusion coefficient of the
the suits. suit can be calculated by dividing the aver-
2.0—Definition of terms age test area concentration by the interior
2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit concentration. A colorimetric ammonia
suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment indicator strip of bromophenol blue or equiv-
which is constructed of protective clothing alent is placed on the inside of the suit face
materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head, piece lens so that the suited individual is
arms, legs and respirator; may cover the able to detect a color change and know if the
wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at- suit has a significant leak. If a color change
tached gloves and boots; completely encloses is observed the individual shall leave the test
the wearer and respirator by itself or in com- room immediately.
bination with the wearer’s gloves, and boots. 4.0—Required supplies
2.2 Protective clothing material means any 4.1 A supply of concentrated aqueous am-
material or combination of materials used in monium hydroxide (58% by weight).
an item of clothing for the purpose of iso- 4.2 A supply of bromophenol/blue indi-
lating parts of the body from direct contact cating paper or equivalent, sensitive to 5–10
with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas- ppm ammonia or greater over a two-minute
eous chemicals. period of exposure. [pH 3.0 (yellow) to pH 4.6
2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this (blue)]
test method, the limited flow of a gas under 4.3 A supply of high range (0.5–10 volume
pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to percent) and low range (5–700 ppm) detector
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and tubes for ammonia and the corresponding
time interval. sampling pump. More sensitive ammonia de-
2.4 Intrusion Coefficient means a number ex- tectors can be substituted for the low range
pressing the level of protection provided by a detector tubes to improve the sensitivity of
gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical this practice.
protective suit. The intrusion coefficient is 4.4 A shallow plastic pan (PVC) at least
calculated by dividing the test room chal- 12″:14″:1″ and a half pint plastic container
lenge agent concentration by the concentra- (PVC) with tightly closing lid.
tion of challenge agent found inside the suit. 4.5 A graduated cylinder or other volu-
The accuracy of the intrusion coefficient is metric measuring device of at least 50 milli-
dependent on the challenge agent monitoring liters in volume with an accuracy of at least
methods. The larger the intrusion coefficient ±1 milliliters.
the greater the protection provided by the
TECP suit. 5.0—SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
3.0—Summary of recommended practice 5.1 Concentrated aqueous ammonium hy-
3.1 The volume of concentrated aqueous droxide, NH4 OH, is a corrosive volatile liq-
ammonia solution (ammonia hydroxide NH4 uid requiring eye, skin, and respiratory pro-
OH) required to generate the test atmos- tection. The person conducting the test shall
phere is determined using the directions out- review the MSDS for aqueous ammonia.
lined in 6.1. The suit is donned by a person 5.2 Since the established permissible ex-
wearing the appropriate respiratory equip- posure limit for ammonia is 35 ppm as a 15
ment (either a positive pressure self-con- minute STEL, only persons wearing a posi-
tained breathing apparatus or a positive tive pressure self-contained breathing appa-
pressure supplied air respirator) and worn in- ratus or a positive pressure supplied air res-
side the enclosed test room. The con- pirator shall be in the chamber. Normally
centrated aqueous ammonia solution is only the person wearing the totally-encap-
taken by the suited individual into the test sulating suit will be inside the chamber. A
room and poured into an open plastic pan. A stand-by person shall have a positive pres-
two-minute evaporation period is observed sure self-contained breathing apparatus, or a
before the test room concentration is meas- positive pressure supplied air respirator
ured, using a high range ammonia length of available to enter the test area should the
stain detector tube. When the ammonia suited individual need assistance.
vapor reaches a concentration of between 5.3 A method to monitor the suited indi-
1000 and 1200 ppm, the suited individual vidual must be used during this test. Visual
starts a standardized exercise protocol to contact is the simplest but other methods
stress and flex the suit. After this protocol is using communication devices are acceptable.
completed, the test room concentration is 5.4 The test room shall be large enough to
measured again. The suited individual exits allow the exercise protocol to be carried out
166
and then to be ventilated to allow for easy centration of 1000 ppm ammonia or greater
exhaust of the ammonia test atmosphere shall be generated before the exercises are
after the test(s) are completed. started.
5.5 Individuals shall be medically 6.7 To test the integrity of the suit the
screened for the use of respiratory protection following four minute exercise protocol
and checked for allergies to ammonia before should be followed:
participating in this test procedure. 6.7.1 Raising the arms above the head
with at least 15 raising motions completed in
6.0—TEST PROCEDURE one minute.
6.1.1 Measure the test area to the nearest 6.7.2 Walking in place for one minute with
foot and calculate its volume in cubic feet. at least 15 raising motions of each leg in a
Multiply the test area volume by 0.2 milli- one-minute period.
liters of concentrated aqueous ammonia so- 6.7.3 Touching the toes with a least 10
lution per cubic foot of test area volume to complete motions of the arms from above
determine the approximate volume of con- the head to touching of the toes in a one-
centrated aqueous ammonia required to gen- minute period.
erate 1000 ppm in the test area. 6.7.4 Knee bends with at least 10 complete
6.1.2 Measure this volume from the supply standing and squatting motions in a one-
of concentrated aqueous ammonia and place minute period.
it into a closed plastic container. 6.8 If at any time during the test the col-
6.1.3 Place the container, several high orimetric indicating paper should change
range ammonia detector tubes, and the pump colors, the test should be stopped and section
in the clean test pan and locate it near the 6.10 and 6.12 initiated (See ¶ 4.2).
test area entry door so that the suited indi- 6.9 After completion of the test exercise,
vidual has easy access to these supplies. the test area concentration should be meas-
6.2.1 In a non-contaminated atmosphere, ured again using the high range colorimetric
open a pre-sealed ammonia indicator strip detector tube.
and fasten one end of the strip to the inside 6.10 Exit the test area.
of the suit face shield lens where it can be 6.11 The opening created by the suit zip-
seen by the wearer. Moisten the indicator per or other appropriate suit penetration
strip with distilled water. Care shall be should be used to determine the ammonia
taken not to contaminate the detector part concentration in the suit with the low range
of the indicator paper by touching it. A length of stain detector tube or other ammo-
small piece of masking tape or equivalent nia monitor. The internal TECP suit air
should be used to attach the indicator strip should be sampled far enough from the en-
to the interior of the suit face shield. closed test area to prevent a false ammonia
6.2.2 If problems are encountered with reading.
this method of attachment, the indicator 6.12 After completion of the measurement
strip can be attached to the outside of the of the suit interior ammonia concentration
respirator face piece lens being used during the test is concluded and the suit is doffed
the test. and the respirator removed.
6.3 Don the respiratory protective device 6.13 The ventilating fan for the test room
normally used with the suit, and then don should be turned on and allowed to run for
the TECP suit to be tested. Check to be sure enough time to remove the ammonia gas.
all openings which are intended to be sealed The fan shall be vented to the outside of the
(zippers, gloves, etc.) are completely sealed. building.
DO NOT, however, plug off any venting 6.14 Any detectable ammonia in the suit
valves. interior (five ppm ammonia (NH3) or more
6.4 Step into the enclosed test room such for the length of stain detector tube) indi-
as a closet, bathroom, or test booth, cates that the suit has failed the test. When
equipped with an exhaust fan. No air should other ammonia detectors are used a lower
be exhausted from the chamber during the level of detection is possible, and it should be
test because this will dilute the ammonia specified as the pass/fail criteria.
challenge concentrations. 6.15 By following this test method, an in-
6.5 Open the container with the pre-meas- trusion coefficient of approximately 200 or
ured volume of concentrated aqueous ammo- more can be measured with the suit in a
nia within the enclosed test room, and pour completely operational condition. If the in-
the liquid into the empty plastic test pan. trusion coefficient is 200 or more, then the
Wait two minutes to allow for adequate vola- suit is suitable for emergency response and
tilization of the concentrated aqueous am- field use.
monia. A small mixing fan can be used near
7.0—Retest procedures
the evaporation pan to increase the evapo-
ration rate of the ammonia solution. 7.1 If the suit fails this test, check for
6.6 After two minutes a determination of leaks by following the pressure test in test A
the ammonia concentration within the above.
chamber should be made using the high 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in
range colorimetric detector tube. A con- the test procedure 6.0.
167
8.0—Report or skin contact); and the performance of the
PPE materials (and seams) in providing a bar-
8.1 Each gas tight totally-encapsulating
rier to these hazards. The amount of protec-
chemical protective suit tested by this prac-
tion provided by PPE is material-hazard spe-
tice shall have the following information re-
corded. cific. That is, protective equipment mate-
8.1.1 Unique identification number, iden- rials will protect well against some haz-
tifying brand name, date of purchase, mate- ardous substances and poorly, or not at all,
rial of construction, and unique suit fea- against others. In many instances, protec-
tures; e.g., special breathing apparatus. tive equipment materials cannot be found
8.1.2 General description of test room which will provide continuous protection
used for test. from the particular hazardous substance. In
8.1.3 Brand name and purchase date of these cases the breakthrough time of the
ammonia detector strips and color change protective material should exceed the work
data. durations.
8.1.4 Brand name, sampling range, and ex- Other factors in this selection process to
piration date of the length of stain ammonia be considered are matching the PPE to the
detector tubes. The brand name and model of employee’s work requirements and task-spe-
the sampling pump should also be recorded. cific conditions. The durability of PPE mate-
If another type of ammonia detector is used, rials, such as tear strength and seam
it should be identified along with its min- strength, should be considered in relation to
imum detection limit for ammonia. the employee’s tasks. The effects of PPE in
8.1.5 Actual test results shall list the two relation to heat stress and task duration are
test area concentrations, their average, the a factor in selecting and using PPE. In some
interior suit concentration, and the cal- cases layers of PPE may be necessary to pro-
culated intrusion coefficient. Retest data vide sufficient protection, or to protect ex-
shall be recorded as an additional test. pensive PPE inner garments, suits or equip-
8.2 The evaluation of the data shall be ment.
specified as ‘‘suit passed’’ or ‘‘suit failed,’’ The more that is known about the hazards
and the date of the test. Any detectable am- at the site, the easier the job of PPE selec-
monia (five ppm or greater for the length of tion becomes. As more information about
stain detector tube) in the suit interior indi- the hazards and conditions at the site be-
cates the suit has failed this test. When comes available, the site supervisor can
other ammonia detectors are used, a lower make decisions to up-grade or down-grade
level of detection is possible and it should be the level of PPE protection to match the
specified as the pass fail criteria. tasks at hand.
The following are guidelines which an em-
CAUTION ployer can use to begin the selection of the
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be appropriate PPE. As noted above, the site in-
sure they are positioned correctly and se- formation may suggest the use of combina-
cured tightly before putting the suit back tions of PPE selected from the different pro-
into service. Special care should be taken to tection levels (i.e., A, B, C, or D) as being
examine each exhaust valve to make sure it more suitable to the hazards of the work. It
is not blocked. should be cautioned that the listing below
Care should also be exercised to assure does not fully address the performance of the
that the inside and outside of the suit is specific PPE material in relation to the spe-
completely dry before it is put into storage. cific hazards at the job site, and that PPE
selection, evaluation and re-selection is an
APPENDIX B TO § 1926.65—GENERAL DESCRIP- ongoing process until sufficient information
TION AND DISCUSSION OF THE LEVELS OF about the hazards and PPE performance is
PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE GEAR obtained.
This appendix sets forth information about Part A. Personal protective equipment is
personal protective equipment (PPE) protec- divided into four categories based on the de-
tion levels which may be used to assist em- gree of protection afforded. (See part B of
ployers in complying with the PPE require- this appendix for further explanation of Lev-
ments of this section. els A, B, C, and D hazards.)
As required by the standard, PPE must be I. Level A— To be selected when the great-
selected which will protect employees from est level of skin, respiratory, and eye protec-
the specific hazards which they are likely to tion is required.
encounter during their work on-site. The following constitute Level A equip-
Selection of the appropriate PPE is a com- ment; it may be used as appropriate;
plex process which should take into consider- 1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self-
ation a variety of factors. Key factors in- contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or
volved in this process are identification of positive pressure supplied air respirator with
the hazards, or suspected hazards; their escape SCBA, approved by the National In-
routes of potential hazard to employees (institute for Occupational Safety and Health
halation, skin absorption, ingestion, and eye (NIOSH).
168
2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protec- 4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (dispos-
tive suit. able). 1
3. Coveralls. 1 5. Safety glasses or chemical splash
4. Long underwear. 1 goggles*.
5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. 6. Hard hat. 1
6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 7. Escape mask. 1
7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and 8. Face shield. 1
shank. Part B. The types of hazards for which lev-
8. Hard hat (under suit). 1 els A, B, C, and D protection are appropriate
9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and are described below:
boots (depending on suit construction, may I. Level A—Level A protection should be
be worn over totally-encapsulating suit). used when:
II. Level B—The highest level of res- 1. The hazardous substance has been iden-
piratory protection is necessary but a lesser tified and requires the highest level of pro-
level of skin protection is needed. tection for skin, eyes, and the respiratory
The following constitute Level B equip- system based on either the measured (or po-
ment; it may be used as appropriate. tential for) high concentration of atmos-
1. Positive pressure, full-facepiece self-con- pheric vapors, gases, or particulates; or the
tained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or posi- site operations and work functions involve a
tive pressure supplied air respirator with es- high potential for splash, immersion, or ex-
cape SCBA (NIOSH approved). posure to unexpected vapors, gases, or par-
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing ticulates of materials that are harmful to
(overalls and long-sleeved jacket; coveralls; skin or capable of being absorbed through
one or two-piece chemical-splash suit; dis- the skin;
posable chemical-resistant overalls). 2. Substances with a high degree of hazard
3. Coveralls. 1 to the skin are known or suspected to be
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. present, and skin contact is possible; or
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 3. Operations are being conducted in con-
6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel fined, poorly ventilated areas, and the ab-
toe and shank. sence of conditions requiring Level A have
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant not yet been determined.
(disposable). 1 II. Level B—Level B protection should be
8. Hard hat. 1 used when:
9. [Reserved] 1. The type and atmospheric concentration
10. Face shield. 1 of substances have been identified and re-
III. Level C—The concentration(s) and quire a high level of respiratory protection,
type(s) of airborne substance(s) is known and but less skin protection;
the criteria for using air purifying res- 2. The atmosphere contains less than 19.5
pirators are met. percent oxygen; or
The following constitute Level C equip- 3. The presence of incompletely identified
ment; it may be used as appropriate. vapors or gases is indicated by a direct-read-
1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying res- ing organic vapor detection instrument, but
pirators (NIOSH approved). vapors and gases are not suspected of con-
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing taining high levels of chemicals harmful to
(overalls; two-piece chemical-splash suit; skin or capable of being absorbed through
disposable chemical-resistant overalls). the skin.
3. Coveralls. 1
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. NOTE: This involves atmospheres with
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. IDLH concentrations of specific substances
6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel that present severe inhalation hazards and
toe and shank. 1 that do not represent a severe skin hazard;
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant or that do not meet the criteria for use of
(disposable) 1. air-purifying respirators.
8. Hard hat. 1 III. Level C—Level C protection should be
9. Escape mask. 1 used when:
10. Face shield. 1 1. The atmospheric contaminants, liquid
IV. Level D—A work uniform affording splashes, or other direct contact will not ad-
minimal protection, used for nuisance conversely affect or be absorbed through any ex-
tamination only. posed skin;
The following constitute Level D equip- 2. The types of air contaminants have been
ment; it may be used as appropriate: identified, concentrations measured, and an
1. Coveralls.
air-purifying respirator is available that can
2. Gloves. 1
remove the contaminants; and
3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe
3. All criteria for the use of air-purifying

and shank.
respirators are met.
IV. Level D—Level D protection should be
1 Optional, as applicable. used when:
169
1. The atmosphere contains no known haz- ty and health of employees at the site, and
ard; and the relationships with contractors or support
2. Work functions preclude splashes, im- services as to what each employer’s safety
mersion, or the potential for unexpected in- and health responsibilities are for their em-
halation of or contact with hazardous levels ployees on the site. Each contractor on the
of any chemicals. site needs to have its own safety and health
program so structured that it will smoothly
NOTE: As stated before, combinations of
interface with the program of the site coor-
personal protective equipment other than
dinator or principal contractor.
those described for Levels A, B, C, and D pro-
Also those employers involved with treat-
tection may be more appropriate and may be
ing, storing or disposal of hazardous waste as
used to provide the proper level of protec-
covered in paragraph (p) must have imple-
tion.
mented a safety and health program for their
As an aid in selecting suitable chemical
employees. This program is to include the
protective clothing, it should be noted that
hazard communication program required in
the National Fire Protection Association
paragraph (p)(1) and the training required in
(NFPA) has developed standards on chemical
paragraphs (p)(7) and (p)(8) as parts of the
protective clothing. The standards that have
employers comprehensive overall safety and
been adopted by include:
health program. This program is to be in
NFPA 1991—Standard on Vapor-Protective
writing.
Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies
Each site or workplace safety and health
(EPA Level A Protective Clothing).
program will need to include the following:
NFPA 1992—Standard on Liquid Splash-
(1) Policy statements of the line of authority
Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical
and accountability for implementing the
Emergencies (EPA Level B Protective Cloth-
program, the objectives of the program and
ing).
the role of the site safety and health super-
NFPA 1993—Standard on Liquid Splash-
visor or manager and staff; (2) means or
Protective Suits for Non-emergency, Non-
methods for the development of procedures
flammable Hazardous Chemical Situations for identifying and controlling workplace
(EPA Level B Protective Clothing). hazards at the site; (3) means or methods for
These standards apply documentation and the development and communication to em-
performance requirements to the manufac- ployees of the various plans, work rules,
ture of chemical protective suits. Chemical standard operating procedures and practices
protective suits meeting these requirements that pertain to individual employees and su-
are labelled as compliant with the appro- pervisors; (4) means for the training of super-
priate standard. It is recommended that visors and employees to develop the needed
chemical protective suits that meet these skills and knowledge to perform their work
standards be used. in a safe and healthful manner; (5) means to
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.65—COMPLIANCE anticipate and prepare for emergency situa-
GUIDELINES tions; and (6) means for obtaining informa-
tion feedback to aid in evaluating the pro-
1. Occupational Safety and Health Program. gram and for improving the effectiveness of
Each hazardous waste site clean-up effort the program. The management and employ-
will require an occupational safety and ees should be trying continually to improve
health program headed by the site coordi- the effectiveness of the program thereby en-
nator or the employer’s representative. The hancing the protection being afforded those
purpose of the program will be the protec- working on the site.
tion of employees at the site and will be an Accidents on the site or workplace should
extension of the employer’s overall safety be investigated to provide information on
and health program. The program will need how such occurrences can be avoided in the
to be developed before work begins on the future. When injuries or illnesses occur on
site and implemented as work proceeds as the site or workplace, they will need to be
stated in paragraph (b). The program is to fa- investigated to determine what needs to be
cilitate coordination and communication of done to prevent this incident from occurring
safety and health issues among personnel re- again. Such information will need to be used
sponsible for the various activities which as feedback on the effectiveness of the pro-
will take place at the site. It will provide the gram and the information turned into posi-
overall means for planning and imple- tive steps to prevent any reoccurrence. Re-
menting the needed safety and health train- ceipt of employee suggestions or complaints
ing and job orientation of employees who relating to safety and health issues involved
will be working at the site. The program will with site or workplace activities is also a
provide the means for identifying and con- feedback mechanism that can be used effec-
trolling worksite hazards and the means for tively to improve the program and may serve
monitoring program effectiveness. The pro- in part as an evaluative tool(s).

gram will need to cover the responsibilities For the development and implementation
and authority of the site coordinator or the of the program to be the most effective, pro-
employer’s manager on the site for the safe- fessional safety and health personnel should
170
be used. Certified Safety Professionals, ical surveillance program, the standard oper-
Board Certified Industrial Hygienists or Reg- ating procedures for the hazardous materials
istered Professional Safety Engineers are team including the use of plugging and
good examples of professional stature for patching equipment and other subject areas.
safety and health managers who will admin- Officers and leaders who may be expected
ister the employer’s program. to be in charge at an incident should be fully
2. Training. The training programs for em- knowledgeable of their company’s incident
ployees subject to the requirements of para- command system. They should know where
graph (e) of this standard should address: the and how to obtain additional assistance and
safety and health hazards employees should be familiar with the local district’s emer-
expect to find on hazardous waste clean-up gency response plan and the state emergency
sites; what control measures or techniques response plan.
are effective for those hazards; what moni- Specialist employees such as technical ex-
toring procedures are effective in character- perts, medical experts or environmental ex-
izing exposure levels; what makes an effec- perts that work with hazardous materials in
tive employer’s safety and health program; their regular jobs, who may be sent to the
what a site safety and health plan should in- incident scene by the shipper, manufacturer
clude; hands on training with personal pro- or governmental agency to advise and assist
tective equipment and clothing they may be the person in charge of the incident should
expected to use; the contents of the OSHA have training on an annual basis. Their
standard relevant to the employee’s duties training should include the care and use of
and function; and, employee’s responsibil- personal protective equipment including res-
ities under OSHA and other regulations. Su-
pirators; knowledge of the incident com-
pervisors will need training in their respon-
mand system and how they are to relate to
sibilities under the safety and health pro-
it; and those areas needed to keep them cur-
gram and its subject areas such as the spill
rent in their respective field as it relates to
containment program, the personal protec-
safety and health involving specific haz-
tive equipment program, the medical sur-
ardous substances.
veillance program, the emergency response
plan and other areas. Those skilled support personnel, such as
The training programs for employees sub- employees who work for public works depart-
ject to the requirements of paragraph (p) of ments or equipment operators who operate
this standard should address: the employers bulldozers, sand trucks, backhoes, etc., who
safety and health program elements impact- may be called to the incident scene to pro-
ing employees; the hazard communication vide emergency support assistance, should
program; the medical surveillance program; have at least a safety and health briefing be-
the hazards and the controls for such hazards fore entering the area of potential or actual
that employees need to know for their job exposure. These skilled support personnel,
duties and functions. All require annual re- who have not been a part of the emergency
fresher training. response plan and do not meet the training
The training programs for employees cov- requirements, should be made aware of the
ered by the requirements of paragraph (q) of hazards they face and should be provided all
this standard should address those com- necessary protective clothing and equipment
petencies required for the various levels of required for their tasks.
response such as: the hazards associated with There are two National Fire Protection As-
hazardous substances; hazard identification sociation standards, NFPA 472—‘‘Standard
and awareness; notification of appropriate for Professional Competence of Responders
persons; the need for and use of personal pro- to Hazardous Material Incidents’’ and NFPA
tective equipment including respirators; the 471—‘‘Recommended Practice for Responding
decontamination procedures to be used; to Hazardous Material Incidents’’, which are
preplanning activities for hazardous sub- excellent resource documents to aid fire de-
stance incidents including the emergency partments and other emergency response or-
reponse plan; company standard operating ganizations in developing their training pro-
procedures for hazardous substance emer- gram materials. NFPA 472 provides guidance
gency responses; the use of the incident com- on the skills and knowledge needed for first
mand system and other subjects. Hands-on responder awareness level, first responder
training should be stressed whenever pos- operations level, hazmat technicians, and
sible. Critiques done after an incident which hazmat specialist. It also offers guidance for
include an evaluation of what worked and the officer corp who will be in charge of haz-
what did not and how could the incident be ardous substance incidents.
better handled the next time may be counted 3. Decontamination. Decontamination pro-
as training time. cedures should be tailored to the specific
For hazardous materials specialists (usu- hazards of the site, and may vary in com-
ally members of hazardous materials teams), plexity and number of steps, depending on
the training should address the care, use and/ the level of hazard and the employee’s expo-
or testing of chemical protective clothing insure to the hazard. Decontamination proce-
cluding totally encapsulating suits, the med- dures and PPE decontamination methods
171
will vary depending upon the specific sub- the wearer from incorrect use and/or mal-
stance, since one procedure or method may function of the PPE. To accomplish these
not work for all substances. Evaluation of goals, a comprehensive PPE program should
decontamination methods and procedures include hazard identification, medical moni-
should be performed, as necessary, to assure toring, environmental surveillance, selec-
that employees are not exposed to hazards tion, use, maintenance, and decontamination
by re-using PPE. References in appendix D of PPE and its associated training.
may be used for guidance in establishing an The written PPE program should include
effective decontamination program. In addi- policy statements, procedures, and guide-
tion, the U.S. Coast Guard’s Manual, ‘‘Policy lines. Copies should be made available to all
Guidance for Response to Hazardous Chem- employees, and a reference copy should be
ical Releases,’’ U.S. Department of Transpor- made available at the worksite. Technical
tation, Washington, DC (COMDTINST data on equipment, maintenance manuals,
M16465.30) is a good reference for establishing relevant regulations, and other essential in-
an effective decontamination program. formation should also be collected and main-
4. Emergency response plans. States, along tained.
with designated districts within the states, 6. Incident command system (ICS). Paragraph
will be developing or have developed local 1926.65(q)(3)(ii) requires the implementation
emergency response plans. These state and of an ICS. The ICS is an organized approach
district plans should be utilized in the emer- to effectively control and manage operations
gency response plans called for in the stand- at an emergency incident. The individual in
ard. Each employer should assure that its charge of the ICS is the senior official re-
emergency response plan is compatible with sponding to the incident. The ICS is not
the local plan. The major reference being much different than the ‘‘command post’’ ap-
used to aid in developing the state and local
proach used for many years by the fire serv-
district plans is the Hazardous Materials
ice. During large complex fires involving sev-
Emergency Planning Guide, NRT–1. The cur-
eral companies and many pieces of appa-
rent Emergency Response Guidebook from
ratus, a command post would be established.
the U.S. Department of Transportation,
This enabled one individual to be in charge of
CMA’s CHEMTREC and the Fire Service
managing the incident, rather than having
Emergency Management Handbook may also
several officers from different companies
be used as resources.
making separate, and sometimes conflicting,
Employers involved with treatment, stor-
age, and disposal facilities for hazardous decisions. The individual in charge of the
waste, which have the required contingency command post would delegate responsibility
plan called for by their permit, would not for performing various tasks to subordinate
need to duplicate the same planning ele- officers. Additionally, all communications
ments. Those items of the emergency re- were routed through the command post to
sponse plan that are properly addressed in reduce the number of radio transmissions
the contingency plan may be substituted and eliminate confusion. However, strategy,
into the emergency response plan required in tactics, and all decisions were made by one
1926.65 or otherwise kept together for em- individual.
ployer and employee use. The ICS is a very similar system, except it
5. Personal protective equipment programs. is implemented for emergency response to
The purpose of personal protective clothing all incidents, both large and small, that in-
and equipment (PPE) is to shield or isolate volve hazardous substances.
individuals from the chemical, physical, and For a small incident, the individual in
biologic hazards that may be encountered at charge of the ICS may perform many tasks
a hazardous substance site. of the ICS. There may not be any, or little,
As discussed in appendix B, no single com- delegation of tasks to subordinates. For ex-
bination of protective equipment and cloth- ample, in response to a small incident, the
ing is capable of protecting against all haz- individual in charge of the ICS, in addition
ards. Thus PPE should be used in conjunc- to normal command activities, may become
tion with other protective methods and its the safety officer and may designate only
effectiveness evaluated periodically. one employee (with proper equipment) as a
The use of PPE can itself create significant back-up to provide assistance if needed.
worker hazards, such as heat stress, physical OSHA does recommend, however, that at
and psychological stress, and impaired vi- least two employees be designated as back-
sion, mobility, and communication. For any up personnel since the assistance needed
given situation, equipment and clothing may include rescue.
should be selected that provide an adequate To illustrate the operation of the ICS, the
level of protection. However, over-protec- following scenario might develop during a
tion, as well as under-protection, can be haz- small incident, such as an overturned tank
truck with a small leak of flammable liquid.
ardous and should be avoided where possible.

Two basic objectives of any PPE program The first responding senior officer would
should be to protect the wearer from safety implement and take command of the ICS.
and health hazards, and to prevent injury to That person would size-up the incident and
172
determine if additional personnel and appa- ter; standard operating procedures and safe
ratus were necessary; would determine what work practices; medical assistance and
actions to take to control the leak; and, de- triage area; hazard monitoring plan (air con-
termine the proper level of personal protec- taminate monitoring, etc.); decontamination
tive equipment. If additional assistance is procedures and area; and other relevant
not needed, the individual in charge of the areas. This plan should be a part of the em-
ICS would implement actions to stop and ployer’s emergency response plan or an ex-
control the leak using the fewest number of tension of it to the specific site.
personnel that can effectively accomplish 8. Medical surveillance programs. Workers
the tasks. The individual in charge of the handling hazardous substances may be ex-
ICS then would designate himself as the safe-
posed to toxic chemicals, safety hazards, bio-
ty officer and two other employees as a
logic hazards, and radiation. Therefore, a
back-up in case rescue may become nec-
medical surveillance program is essential to
essary. In this scenario, decontamination
procedures would not be necessary. assess and monitor workers’ health and fit-
A large complex incident may require ness for employment in hazardous waste op-
many employees and difficult, time-con- erations and during the course of work; to
suming efforts to control. In these situa- provide emergency and other treatment as
tions, the individual in charge of the ICS will needed; and to keep accurate records for fu-
want to delegate different tasks to subordi- ture reference.
nates in order to maintain a span of control The Occupational Safety and Health Guid-
that will keep the number of subordinates, ance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi-
that are reporting, to a manageable level. ties developed by the National Institute for
Delegation of task at large incidents may Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH),
be by location, where the incident scene is the Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
divided into sectors, and subordinate officers istration (OSHA), the U.S. Coast Guard
coordinate activities within the sector that (USCG), and the Environmental Protection
they have been assigned. Agency (EPA); October 1985 provides an ex-
Delegation of tasks can also be by func- cellent example of the types of medical test-
tion. Some of the functions that the indi- ing that should be done as part of a medical
vidual in charge of the ICS may want to del- surveillance program.
egate at a large incident are: medical serv- 9. New Technology and Spill Containment
ices; evacuation; water supply; resources Programs. Where hazardous substances may
(equipment, apparatus); media relations; be released by spilling from a container that
safety; and, site control (integrate activities will expose employees to the hazards of the
with police for crowd and traffic control). materials, the employer will need to imple-
Also for a large incident, the individual in ment a program to contain and control the
charge of the ICS will designate several em- spilled material. Diking and ditching, as well
ployees as back-up personnel; and a number
as use of absorbents like diatomaceous
of safety officers to monitor conditions and
earth, are traditional techniques which have
recommend safety precautions.
proven to be effective over the years. How-
Therefore, no matter what size or com-
ever, in recent years new products have come
plexity an incident may be, by implementing
an ICS there will be one individual in charge into the marketplace, the use of which com-
who makes the decisions and gives direc- plement and increase the effectiveness of
tions; and, all actions, and communications these traditional methods. These new prod-
are coordinated through one central point of ucts also provide emergency responders and
command. Such a system should reduce con- others with additional tools or agents to use
fusion, improve safety, organize and coordi- to reduce the hazards of spilled materials.
nate actions, and should facilitate effective These agents can be rapidly applied over a
management of the incident. large area and can be uniformly applied or
7. Site Safety and Control Plans. The safety otherwise can be used to build a small dam,
and security of response personnel and oth- thus improving the workers’ ability to con-
ers in the area of an emergeny response inci- trol spilled material. These application tech-
dent site should be of primary concern to the niques enhance the intimate contact be-
incident commander. The use of a site safety tween the agent and the spilled material al-
and control plan could greatly assist those in lowing for the quickest effect by the agent or
charge of assuring the safety and health of quickest control of the spilled material.
employees on the site. Agents are available to solidify liquid spilled
A comprehensive site safety and control materials, to suppress vapor generation from
plan should include the following: summary spilled materials, and to do both. Some spe-
analysis of hazards on the site and a risk cial agents, which when applied as rec-
analysis of those hazards; site map or ommended by the manufacturer, will react
in a controlled manner with the spilled ma-
sketch; site work zones (clean zone, transi-

tion or decontamination zone, work or hot terial to neutralize acids or caustics, or
zone); use of the buddy system; site commu- greatly reduce the level of hazard of the
nications; command post or command cen- spilled material.
173
There are several modern methods and de- follow the employer’s established standard
vices for use by emergency response per- operating procedures for spill control. All in-
sonnel or others involved with spill control volved workers need to be trained in the es-
efforts to safely apply spill control agents to tablished operating procedures; in the use
control spilled material hazards. These in- and care of spill control equipment; and in
clude portable pressurized applicators simi- the associated hazards and control of such
lar to hand-held portable fire extinguishing hazards of spill containment work.
devices, and nozzle and hose systems similar These new tools and agents are the things
to portable fire fighting foam systems which that employers will want to evaluate as part
allow the operator to apply the agent with- of their new technology program. The treat-
out having to come into contact with the ment of spills of hazardous substances or
spilled material. The operator is able to wastes at an emergency incident as part of
apply the agent to the spilled material from the immediate spill containment and control
a remote position. efforts is sometimes acceptable to EPA and a
The solidification of liquids provides for permit exception is described in 40 CFR
rapid containment and isolation of haz- 264.1(g)(8) and 265.1(c)(11).
ardous substance spills. By directing the
agent at run-off points or at the edges of the APPENDIX D TO § 1926.65—REFERENCES
spill, the reactant solid will automatically The following references may be consulted
create a barrier to slow or stop the spread of for further information on the subject of this
the material. Clean-up of hazardous substandard:
stances is greatly improved when solidifying 1. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2.70—Janu-
agents, acid or caustic neutralizers, or acti- ary 29, 1986, Special Emphasis Program: Haz-
vated carbon adsorbents are used. Properly ardous Waste Sites.
applied, these agents can totally solidify liq- 2. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2–2.37A—
uid hazardous substances or neutralize or ab- January 29, 1986, Technical Assistance and
sorb them, which results in materials which Guidelines for Superfund and Other Hazardous
are less hazardous and easier to handle, Waste Site Activities.
transport, and dispose of. The concept of 3. OSHA Instruction DTS CPL 2.74—Janu-
spill treatment, to create less hazardous sub- ary 29, 1986, Hazardous Waste Activity Form,
stances, will improve the safety and level of OSHA 175.
protection of employees working at spill 4. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference
clean-up operations or emergency response Manual, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupa-
operations to spills of hazardous substances. tional Safety and Health Administration,
The use of vapor suppression agents for 1986.
volatile hazardous substances, such as flam- 5. Memorandum of Understanding Among
mable liquids and those substances which the National Institute for Occupational Safe-
present an inhalation hazard, is important ty and Health, the Occupational Safety and
for protecting workers. The rapid and uni- Health Administration, the United States
form distribution of the agent over the sur- Coast Guard, and the United States Environ-
face of the spilled material can provide quick mental Protection Agency, Guidance for
vapor knockdown. There are temporary and Worker Protection During Hazardous Waste Site
long-term foam-type agents which are effec- Investigations and Clean-up and Hazardous
tive on vapors and dusts, and activated car- Substance Emergencies. December 18, 1980.
bon adsorption agents which are effective for 6. National Priorities List, 1st Edition, Octo-
vapor control and soaking-up of the liquid. ber 1984; U.S. Environmental Protection
The proper use of hose lines or hand-held Agency, Revised periodically.
portable pressurized applicators provides 7. The Decontamination of Response Per-
good mobility and permits the worker to de- sonnel, Field Standard Operating Procedures
liver the agent from a safe distance without (F.S.O.P.) 7; U.S. Environmental Protection
having to step into the untreated spilled ma- Agency, Office of Emergency and Remedial
terial. Some of these systems can be re- Response, Hazardous Response Support Divi-
charged in the field to provide coverage of sion, December 1984.
larger spill areas than the design limits of a 8. Preparation of a Site Safety Plan, Field
single charged applicator unit. Some of the Standard Operating Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 9;
more effective agents can solidify the liquid U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Of-
flammable hazardous substances and at the fice of Emergency and Remedial Response,
same time elevate the flashpoint above 140 Hazardous Response Support Division, April
°F so the resulting substance may be handled 1985.
as a nonhazardous waste material if it meets 9. Standard Operating Safety Guidelines; U.S.
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s Environmental Protection Agency, Office of
40 CFR part 261 requirements (See particu- Emergency and Remedial Response, Haz-
larly § 261.21). ardous Response Support Division, Environ-
All workers performing hazardous sub- mental Response Team; November 1984.
stance spill control work are expected to 10. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance
wear the proper protective clothing and Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities,
equipment for the materials present and to National Institute for Occupational Safety
174
and Health (NIOSH), Occupational Safety programs must be developed on the basis of
and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. a needs assessment of the hazardous waste
Coast Guard (USCG), and Environmental site, RCRA/TSDF, or emergency response op-
Protection Agency (EPA); October 1985. eration in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.65.
11. Protecting Health and Safety at Haz- It is noted that the legal requirements are
ardous Waste Sites: An Overview, U.S. Envi- set forth in the regulatory text of § 1926.65.
ronmental Protection Agency, EPA/625/9–85/ The guidance set forth here presents a highly
006; September 1985. effective program that in the areas covered
12. Hazardous Waste Sites and Hazardous would meet or exceed the regulatory require-
Substance Emergencies, NIOSH Worker Bul-
ments. In addition, other approaches could
letin, U.S. Department of Health and Human
meet the regulatory requirements.
Services, Public Health Service, Centers for
Disease Control, National Institute for Occu- Suggested General Criteria
pational Safety and Health; December 1982. Definitions:
13. Personal Protective Equipment for Haz- Competent means possessing the skills,
ardous Materials Incidents: A Selection Guide; knowledge, experience, and judgment to per-
U.S. Department of Health and Human Serv- form assigned tasks or activities satisfac-
ices, Public Health Service, Centers for Dis- torily as determined by the employer.
ease Control, National Institute for Occupa- Demonstration means the showing by actual
tional Safety and Health; October 1984. use of equipment or procedures.
14. Fire Service Emergency Management Hands-on training means training in a sim-
Handbook, International Association of Fire ulated work environment that permits each
Chiefs Foundation, 101 East Holly Avenue, student to have experience performing tasks,
Unit 10B, Sterling, VA 22170, January 1985. making decisions, or using equipment appro-
15. Emergency Response Guidebook, U.S De- priate to the job assignment for which the
partment of Transportation, Washington, training is being conducted.
DC, 1987. Initial training means training required
16. Report to the Congress on Hazardous Ma- prior to beginning work.
terials Training, Planning and Preparedness, Lecture means an interactive discourse
Federal Emergency Management Agency, with a class lead by an instructor.
Washington, DC, July 1986. Proficient means meeting a stated level of
17. Workbook for Fire Command, Alan V. achievement.
Brunacini and J. David Beageron, National Site-specific means individual training di-
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch rected to the operations of a specific job site.
Park, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985.
Training hours means the number of hours
18. Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini, Na-
devoted to lecture, learning activities, small
tional Fire Protection Association,
group work sessions, demonstration, evalua-
Batterymarch Park,, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985.
tions, or hands-on experience.
19. Incident Command System, Fire Protec-
tion Publications, Oklahoma State Univer- Suggested Core Criteria:
sity, Stillwater, OK 74078, 1983. 1. Training facility. The training facility
20. Site Emergency Response Planning, Chem- should have available sufficient resources,
ical Manufacturers Association, Washington, equipment, and site locations to perform di-
DC 20037, 1986. dactic and hands-on training when appro-
21. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning priate. Training facilities should have suffi-
Guide, NRT–1, Environmental Protection cient organization, support staff, and serv-
Agency, Washington, DC, March 1987. ices to conduct training in each of the
22. Community Teamwork: Working Together courses offered.
to Promote Hazardous Materials Transportation 2. Training Director. Each training program
Safety. U.S. Department of Transportation, should be under the direction of a training
Washington, DC, May 1983. director who is responsible for the program.
23. Disaster Planning Guide for Business and The Training Director should have a min-
Industry, Federal Emergency Management imum of two years of employee education ex-
Agency, Publication No. FEMA 141, August perience.
1987. 3. Instructors. Instructors should be deem
competent on the basis of previous docu-
APPENDIX E TO § 1926.65—TRAINING
mented experience in their area of instruc-
CURRICULUM GUIDELINES
tion, successful completion of a ‘‘train-the-
The following non-mandatory general cri- trainer’’ program specific to the topics they
teria may be used for assistance in devel- will teach, and an evaluation of instruc-
oping site-specific training curriculum used tional competence by the Training Director.
to meet the training requirements of 29 CFR Instructors should be required to maintain
1926.65(e); 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(7), (p)(8)(iii); and professional competency by participating in
29 CFR 1926.65(q)(6), (q)(7), and (q)(8). These continuing education or professional devel-
are generic guidelines and they are not pre- opment programs or by completing success-
sented as a complete training curriculum for fully an annual refresher course and having
any specific employer. Site-specific training an annual review by the Training Director.
175
The annual review by the Training Direc- riculum and any update should be approved
tor should include observation of an instruc- by the Training Director.
tor’s delivery, a review of those observations The proficiency assessment methods, re-
with the trainer, and an analysis of any in- gardless of the approach or combination of
structor or class evaluations completed by approaches used, should be justified, docu-
the students during the previous year. ment and approved by the Training Director.
4. Course materials. The Training Director The proficiency of those taking the addi-
should approve all course materials to be tional courses for supervisors should be eval-
used by the training provider. Course mate- uated and document by using proficiency as-
rials should be reviewed and updated at least sessment methods acceptable to the Training
annually. Materials and equipment should be Director. These proficiency assessment
in good working order and maintained prop- methods must reflect the additional respon-
erly. sibilities borne by supervisory personnel in
All written and audio-visual materials in hazardous waste operations or emergency re-
training curricula should be peer reviewed by sponse.
technically competent outside reviewers or 8. Course certificate. Written documentation
by a standing advisory committee. should be provided to each student who sat-
Reviews should possess expertise in the fol- isfactorily completes the training course.
lowing disciplines were applicable: occupa- The documentation should include:
tional health, industrial hygiene and safety, a. Student’s name.
chemical/environmental engineering, em- b. Course title.
ployee education, or emergency response. c. Course date.
One or more of the peer reviewers should be d. Statement that the student has success-
a employee experienced in the work activi- fully completed the course.
ties to which the training is directed.
e. Name and address of the training pro-
5. Students. The program for accepting stu-
vider.
dents should include:
f. An individual identification number for
a. Assurance that the student is or will be
the certificate.
involved in work where chemical exposures
g. List of the levels of personal protective
are likely and that the student possesses the
skills necessary to perform the work. equipment used by the student to complete
b. A policy on the necessary medical clear- the course.
ance. This documentation may include a certifi-
6. Ratios. Student-instructor ratios should cate and an appropriate wallet-sized lami-
not exceed 30 students per instructor. Hands- nated card with a photograph of the student
on activity requiring the use of personal pro- and the above information. When such
tective equipment should have the following course certificate cards are used, the indi-
student-instructor ratios. For Level C or vidual identification number for the training
Level D personal protective equipment the certificate should be shown on the card.
ratio should be 10 students per instructor. 9. Recordkeeping. Training providers should
For Level A or Level B personal protective maintain records listing the dates courses
equipment the ratio should be 5 students per were presented, the names of the individual
instructor. course attenders, the names of those stu-
7. Proficiency assessment. Proficiency should dents successfully completing each course,
be evaluated and documented by the use of a and the number of training certificates
written assessment and a skill demonstra- issued to each successful student. These
tion selected and developed by the Training records should be maintained for a minimum
Director and training staff. The assessment of five years after the date an individual par-
and demonstration should evaluate the ticipated in a training program offered by
knowledge and individual skills developed in the training provider. These records should
the course of training. The level of minimum be available and provided upon the student’s
achievement necessary for proficiency shall request or as mandated by law.
be specified in writing by the Training Direc- 10. Program quality control. The Training
tor. Director should conduct or direct an annual
If a written test is used, there should be a written audit of the training program. Pro-
minimum of 50 questions. If a written test is gram modifications to address deficiencies, if
used in combination with a skills demonstra- any, should be documented, approved, and
tion, a minimum of 25 questions should be implemented by the training provider. The
used. If a skills demonstration is used, the audit and the program modification docu-
tasks chosen and the means to rate success- ments should be maintained at the training
ful completion should be fully documented facility.
by the Training Director. Suggested Program Quality Control Criteria
The content of the written test or of the Factors listed here are suggested criteria
skill demonstration shall be relevant to the for determining the quality and appropriate-
objectives of the course. The written test ness of employee health and safety training
and skill demonstration should be updated as for hazardous waste operations and emer-
necessary to reflect changes in the cur- gency response.
176
A. Training Plan. Adequacy and appropriateness of the facili-
Adequacy and appropriateness of the train- ties and resources for supporting the train-
ing program’s curriculum development, ining program should be considered, including,
structor training, distribution of course ma- 1. Space and equipment to conduct the
terials, and direct student training should be training.
considered, including 2. Facilities for representative hands-on
1. The duration of training, course content, training.
and course schedules/agendas; 3. In the case of multiple-site programs,
2. The different training requirements of equipment and facilities at the satellite cen-
the various target populations, as specified ters.
in the appropriate generic training cur- 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
riculum; quality control and evaluations program to
3. The process for the development of cur- account for instructor performance.
riculum, which includes appropriate tech- 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
nical input, outside review, evaluation, pro- quality control and evaluation program to
gram pretesting. ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed-
4. The adequate and appropriate inclusion back, updating, and corrective action.
of hands-on, demonstration, and instruction 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis-
methods; ciplines and expertise being used within the
5. Adequate monitoring of student safety, quality control and evaluation program.
progress, and performance during the train- 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
ing. role of student evaluations to provide feed-
B. Program management, Training Director, back for training program improvement.
staff, and consultants. D. Quality control and evaluation.
Adequacy and appropriateness of staff per- Adequacy and appropriateness of quality
formance and delivering an effective training control and evaluation plans for training
program should be considered, including programs should be considered, including:
1. Demonstration of the training director’s 1. A balanced advisory committee and/or
leadership in assuring quality of health and competent outside reviewers to give overall
safety training. policy guidance;
2. Demonstration of the competency of the 2. Clear and adequate definition of the
staff to meet the demands of delivering high composition and active programmatic role of
quality hazardous waste employee health the advisory committee or outside reviewers.
and safety training. 3. Adequacy of the minutes or reports of
3. Organization charts establishing clear the advisory committee or outside reviewers’
lines of authority. meetings or written communication.
4. Clearly defined staff duties including the 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
relationship of the training staff to the over- quality control and evaluations program to
all program. account for instructor performance.
5. Evidence that the training organiza- 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
tional structure suits the needs of the train- quality control and evaluation program to
ing program. ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed-
6. Appropriateness and adequacy of the back, updating, and corrective action.
training methods used by the instructors. 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis-
7. Sufficiency of the time committed by
ciplines and expertise being used within the
the training director and staff to the train-
quality control and evaluation program.
ing program.
7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
8. Adequacy of the ratio of training staff to
role of student evaluations to provide feed-
students.
back for training program improvement.
9. Availability and commitment of the
training program of adequate human and E. Students
equipment resources in the areas of Adequacy and appropriateness of the pro-
a. Health effects, gram for accepting students should be con-
b. Safety, sidered, including
c. Personal protective equipment (PPE), 1. Assurance that the student already pos-
d. Operational procedures, sess the necessary skills for their job, includ-
e. Employee protection practices/proce- ing necessary documentation.
dures. 2. Appropriateness of methods the program
10. Appropriateness of management con- uses to ensure that recruits are capable of
trols. satisfactorily completing training.
11. Adequacy of the organization and ap- 3. Review and compliance with any medical
propriate resources assigned to assure appro- clearance policy.
priate training. F. Institutional Environment and Administra-
12. In the case of multiple-site training
tive Support. The adequacy and appropriate-

programs, adequacy of satellite centers man- ness of the institutional environment and
agement. administrative support system for the train-
C. Training facilities and resources. ing program should be considered, including
177
1. Adequacy of the institutional commit- (6) Sanitation recommendation and equip-
ment to the employee training program. ment.
2. Adequacy and appropriateness of the ad- (7) Review and explanation of OSHA’s haz-
ministrative structure and administrative ard-communication standard (29 CFR
support. 1910.1200) and lock-out-tag-out standard (29
G. Summary of Evaluation Questions Key CFR 1910.147).
questions for evaluating the quality and ap- (8) Review of other applicable standards in-
propriateness of an overall training program cluding but not limited to those in the con-
should include the following: struction standards (29 CFR part 1926).
1. Are the program objectives clearly stat- (9) Rights and responsibilities of employers
ed? and employees under applicable OSHA and
2. Is the program accomplishing its objec- EPA laws.
tives? b. Technical knowledge. (1) Type of poten-
3. Are appropriate facilities and staff avail- tial exposures to chemical, biological, and
able? radiological hazards; types of human re-
4. Is there an appropriate mix of classroom, sponses to these hazards and recognition of
demonstration, and hands-on training? those responses; principles of toxicology and
5. Is the program providing quality em- information about acute and chronic haz-
ployee health and safety training that fully ards; health and safety considerations of new
meets the intent of regulatory requirements? technology.
6. What are the program’s main strengths? (2) Fundamentals of chemical hazards in-
7. What are the program’s main weak- cluding but not limited to vapor pressure,
nesses? boiling points, flash points, ph, other phys-
8. What is recommended to improve the ical and chemical properties.
program? (3) Fire and explosion hazards of chemi-
9. Are instructors instructing according to cals.
their training outlines? (4) General safety hazards such as but not
10. Is the evaluation tool current and ap- limited to electrical hazards, powered equip-
propriate for the program content? ment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, walk-
11. Is the course material current and rel- ing-working surface hazards, excavation haz-
evant to the target group? ards, and hazards associated with working in
hot and cold temperature extremes.
Suggested Training Curriculum Guidelines (5) Review and knowledge of confined space
The following training curriculum guide- entry procedures in 29 CFR 1910.146.
lines are for those operations specifically (6) Work practices to minimize employee
identified in 29 CFR 1926.65 as requiring risk from site hazards.
training. Issues such as qualifications of in- (7) Safe use of engineering controls, equip-
structors, training certification, and similar ment, and any new relevant safety tech-
criteria appropriate to all categories of oper- nology or safety procedures.
ations addressed in 1926.65 have been covered (8) Review and demonstration of com-
in the preceding section and are not re-ad- petency with air sampling and monitoring
dressed in each of the generic guidelines. equipment that may be used in a site moni-
Basic core requirements for training pro- toring program.
grams that are addressed include (9) Container sampling procedures and
1. General Hazardous Waste Operations safeguarding; general drum and container
2. RCRA operations—Treatment, storage, handling procedures including special re-
and disposal facilities. quirement for laboratory waste packs,
3. Emergency Response. shock-sensitive wastes, and radioactive
A. General Hazardous Waste Operations and wastes.
Site-specific Training 1. Off-site training. (10) The elements of a spill control pro-
Minimum training course content for haz- gram.
ardous waste operations, required by 29 CFR (11) Proper use and limitations of material
1926.65(e), should include the following topics handling equipment.
or procedures: (12) Procedures for safe and healthful prep-
a. Regulatory knowledge. aration of containers for shipping and trans-
(1) A review of 29 CFR 1926.65 and the core port.
elements of an occupational safety and (13) Methods of communication including
health program. those used while wearing respiratory protec-
(2) The content of a medical surveillance tion.
program as outlined in 29 CFR 1926.65(f). c. Technical skills. (1) Selection, use main-
(3) The content of an effective site safety tenance, and limitations of personal protec-
and health plan consistent with the require- tive equipment including the components
ments of 29 CFR 1926.65(b)(4)(ii). and procedures for carrying out a respirator
(4) Emergency response plan and proce- program to comply with 29 CFR 1910.134.
dures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 (2) Instruction in decontamination pro-
CFR 1926.65(l). grams including personnel, equipment, and
(5) Adequate illumination. hardware; hands-on training including level
178
A, B, and C ensembles and appropriate de- (2) Activities and locations in their work
contamination lines; field activities includ- area where hazardous substance may be
ing the donning and doffing of protective present.
equipment to a level commensurate with the (3) Methods and observations that may be
employee’s anticipated job function and reused to detect the present or release of a haz-
sponsibility and to the degree required by ardous chemical in the work area (such as
potential hazards. monitoring conducted by the employer, con-
(3) Sources for additional hazard informa- tinuous monitoring devices, visual appear-
tion; exercises using relevant manuals and ances, or other evidence (sight, sound or
hazard coding systems. smell) of hazardous chemicals being released,
d. Additional suggested items. (1) A lami- and applicable alarms from monitoring de-
nated, dated card or certificate with photo, vices that record chemical releases.
denoting limitations and level of protection (4) The physical and health hazards of sub-
for which the employee is trained should be stances known or potentially present in the
issued to those students successfully com- work area.
pleting a course. (5) The measures employees can take to
(2) Attendance should be required at all help protect themselves from work-site haz-
training modules, with successful comple- ards, including specific procedures the em-
tion of exercises and a final written or oral ployer has implemented.
examination with at least 50 questions. (6) An explanation of the labeling system
(3) A minimum of one-third of the program and safety data sheets and how employees
should be devoted to hands-on exercises. can obtain and use appropriate hazard infor-
(4) A curriculum should be established for mation.
the 8-hour refresher training required by 29 (7) The elements of the confined space pro-
CFR 1926.65(e)(8), with delivery of such gram including special PPE, permits, moni-
courses directed toward those areas of pre- toring requirements, communication proce-
vious training that need improvement or re- dures, emergency response, and applicable
emphasis. lock-out procedures.
(5) A curriculum should be established for b. The employer should provide hazardous
the required 8-hour training for supervisors. waste employees information and training
Demonstrated competency in the skills and and should provide a review and access to
knowledge provided in a 40-hour course the site safety and plan as follows:
should be a prerequisite for supervisor train- (1) Names of personnel and alternate re-
ing. sponsible for site safety and health.
2. Refresher training. The 8-hour annual re- (2) Safety and health hazards present on
fresher training required in 29 CFR the site.
1926.65(e)(8) should be conducted by qualified (3) Selection, use, maintenance, and limi-
training providers. Refresher training should tations of personal protective equipment
include at a minimum the following topics specific to the site.
and procedures: (4) Work practices by which the employee
(a) Review of and retraining on relevant can minimize risks from hazards.
topics covered in the 40-hour program, as ap- (5) Safe use of engineering controls and
propriate, using reports by the students on equipment available on site.
their work experiences. (6) Safe decontamination procedures estab-
(b) Update on developments with respect to lished to minimize employee contact with
material covered in the 40-hour course. hazardous substances, including:
(c) Review of changes to pertinent provi- (A) Employee decontamination,
sions of EPA or OSHA standards or laws. (B) Clothing decontamination, and
(d) Introduction of additional subject areas (C) Equipment decontamination.
as appropriate. (7) Elements of the site emergency re-
(e) Hands-on review of new or altered PPE sponse plan, including:
or decontamination equipment or proce- (A) Pre-emergency planning.
dures. Review of new developments in per- (B) Personnel roles and lines of authority
sonal protective equipment. and communication.
(f) Review of newly developed air and con- (C) Emergency recognition and prevention.
taminant monitoring equipment. (D) Safe distances and places of refuge.
3. On-site training. a. The employer should (E) Site security and control.
provide employees engaged in hazardous (F) Evacuation routes and procedures.
waste site activities with information and (G) Decontamination procedures not cov-
training prior to initial assignment into ered by the site safety and health plan.
their work area, as follows: (H) Emergency medical treatment and first
(1) The requirements of the hazard commu- aid.
nication program including the location and (I) Emergency equipment and procedures
availability of the written program, required for handling emergency incidents.
lists of hazardous chemicals, and safety data c. The employer should provide hazardous
sheets. waste employees information and training
179
on personal protective equipment used at the (g) A review of procedures to minimize ex-
site, such as the following: posure to hazardous waste and various type
(1) PPE to be used based upon known or an- of waste streams, including the materials
ticipated site hazards. handling program and spill containment pro-
(2) PPE limitations of materials and con- gram.
struction; limitations during temperature (h) A review of hazard communication pro-
extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
medical considerations; use and limitations 1910.1200.
of respirator equipment as well as docu- (i) A review of medical surveillance pro-
mentation procedures as outlined in 29 CFR grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
1910.134. 1926.65(p)(3) including the recognition of
(3) PPE inspection procedures prior to, signs and symptoms of overexposure to haz-
during, and after use. ardous substance including known syner-
(4) PPE donning and doffing procedures. gistic interactions.
(5) PPE decontamination and disposal pro- (j) A review of decontamination programs
cedures. and procedures meeting the requirements of
(6) PPE maintenance and storage. 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(4).
(7) Task duration as related to PPE limita- (k) A review of an employer’s requirements
tions. to implement a training program and its ele-
d. The employer should instruct the em- ments.
ployee about the site medical surveillance (l) A review of the criteria and programs
program relative to the particular site, infor proper selection and use of personal pro-
cluding tective equipment, including respirators.
(m) A review of the applicable appendices
(1) Specific medical surveillance programs
to 29 CFR 1926.65.
that have been adapted for the site.
(n) Principles of toxicology and biological
(2) Specific signs and symptoms related to
monitoring as they pertain to occupational
exposure to hazardous materials on the site.
health.
(3) The frequency and extent of periodic
(o) Rights and responsibilities of employ-
medical examinations that will be used on
ees and employers under applicable OSHA
the site.
and EPA laws.
(4) Maintenance and availability of
(p) Hands-on exercises and demonstrations
records.
of competency with equipment to illustrate
(5) Personnel to be contacted and proce-
the basic equipment principles that may be
dures to be followed when signs and symp-
used during the performance of work duties,
toms of exposures are recognized.
including the donning and doffing of PPE.
e. The employees will review and discuss (q) Sources of reference, efficient use of
the site safety plan as part of the training relevant manuals, and knowledge of hazard
program. The location of the site safety plan coding systems to include information con-
and all written programs should be discussed tained in hazardous waste manifests.
with employees including a discussion of the (r) At least 8 hours of hands-on training.
mechanisms for access, review, and ref- (s) Training in the job skills required for
erences described. an employee’s job function and responsi-
B. RCRA Operations Training for Treatment, bility before they are permitted to partici-
Storage and Disposal Facilities. pate in or supervise field activities.
1. As a minimum, the training course re- 2. The individual employer should provide
quired in 29 CFR 1926.65 (p) should include hazardous waste employees with information
the following topics: and training prior to an employee’s initial
(a) Review of the applicable paragraphs of assignment into a work area. The training
29 CFR 1926.65 and the elements of the em- and information should cover the following
ployer’s occupational safety and health plan. topics:
(b) Review of relevant hazards such as, but (a) The Emergency response plan and pro-
not limited to, chemical, biological, and ra- cedures including first aid.
diological exposures; fire and explosion haz- (b) A review of the employer’s hazardous
ards; thermal extremes; and physical haz- waste handling procedures including the ma-
ards. terials handling program and elements of the
(c) General safety hazards including those spill containment program, location of spill
associated with electrical hazards, powered response kits or equipment, and the names of
equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out proce- those trained to respond to releases.
dures, motor vehicle hazards and walking- (c) The hazardous communication program
working surface hazards. meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
(d) Confined-space hazards and procedures. 1910.1200.
(e) Work practices to minimize employee (d) A review of the employer’s medical sur-
risk from workplace hazards. veillance program including the recognition

(f) Emergency response plan and proce- of signs and symptoms of exposure to rel-
dures including first aid meeting the require- evant hazardous substance including known
ments of paragraph (p)(8). synergistic interactions.
180
(e) A review of the employer’s decon- and the individuals responsible for the site
tamination program and procedures. where the response would be expected.
(f) An review of the employer’s training (1) Hazard recognition, including:
program and the parties responsible for that (A) Nature of hazardous substances
program. present,
(g) A review of the employer’s personal (B) Practical applications of hazard rec-
protective equipment program including the ognition, including presentations on biology,
proper selection and use of PPE based upon chemistry, and physics.
specific site hazards. (2) Principles of toxicology, biological
(h) All relevant site-specific procedures ad- monitoring, and risk assessment.
dressing potential safety and health hazards.
(3) Safe work practices and general site
This may include, as appropriate, biological
safety.
and radiological exposures, fire and explo-
sion hazards, thermal hazards, and physical (4) Engineering controls and hazardous
hazards such as electrical hazards, powered waste operations.
equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out haz- (5) Site safety plans and standard oper-
ards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking- ating procedures.
working surface hazards. (6) Decontamination procedures and prac-
(i) Safe use engineering controls and equip- tices.
ment on site. (7) Emergency procedures, first aid, and
(j) Names of personnel and alternates re- self-rescue.
sponsible for safety and health. (8) Safe use of field equipment.
C. Emergency response training. (9) Storage, handling, use and transpor-
Federal OSHA standards in 29 CFR tation of hazardous substances.
1926.65(q) are directed toward private sector (10) Use, care, and limitations of personal
emergency responders. Therefore, the guide- protective equipment.
lines provided in this portion of the appendix (11) Safe sampling techniques.
are directed toward that employee popu- (12) Rights and responsibilities of employ-
lation. However, they also impact indirectly ees under OSHA and other related laws con-
through State OSHA or USEPA regulations cerning right-to-know, safety and health,
some public sector emergency responders. compensations and liability.
Therefore, the guidelines provided in this (13) Medical monitoring requirements.
portion of the appendix may be applied to (14) Community relations.
both employee populations. b. Suggested criteria for specific courses.
States with OSHA state plans must cover (1) First responder awareness level.
their employees with regulations at least as (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
effective as the Federal OSHA standards. petency in performing the applicable skills
Public employees in states without approved of 29 CFR 1926.65(q).
state OSHA programs covering hazardous
(B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De-
waste operations and emergency response
partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re-
are covered by the U.S. EPA under 40 CFR
sponse Guidebook (ERG) and familiarization
311, a regulation virtually identical to
with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.60.
§ 1926.65.
Since this is a non-mandatory appendix (C) Review of the principles and practices
and therefore not an enforceable standard, for analyzing an incident to determine both
OSHA recommends that those employers, the hazardous substances present and the
employees or volunteers in public sector basic hazard and response information for
emergency response organizations outside each hazardous substance present.
Federal OSHA jurisdiction consider the fol- (D) Review of procedures for implementing
lowing criteria in developing their own actions consistent with the local emergency
training programs. A unified approach to response plan, the organization’s standard
training at the community level between operating procedures, and the current edi-
emergency response organizations covered tion of DOT’s ERG including emergency no-
by Federal OSHA and those not covered di- tification procedures and follow-up commu-
rectly by Federal OSHA can help ensure an nications.
effective community response to the release (E) Review of the expected hazards includ-
or potential release of hazardous substances ing fire and explosions hazards, confined
in the community. space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
a. General considerations. equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards,
Emergency response organizations are re- and walking-working surface hazards.
quired to consider the topics listed in (F) Awareness and knowledge of the com-
§ 1926.65(q)(6). Emergency response organiza- petencies for the First Responder at the
tions may use some or all of the following Awareness Level covered in the National
Fire Protection Association’s Standard No.
topics to supplement those mandatory topics

when developing their response training pro- 472, Professional Competence of Responders to
grams. Many of the topics would require an Hazardous Materials Incidents.
interaction between the response provider (2) First responder operations level.
181
(A) Review of and demonstration of com- (D) Review of procedures for implementing
petency in performing the applicable skills continuing response actions consistent with
of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). the local emergency response plan, the orga-
(B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De- nization’s standard operating procedures,
partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re- and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in-
sponse Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer safety cluding extended emergency notification
data sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper procedures and follow-up communications.
or manufacturer contacts and other relevant (E) Review of the principles and practice
sources of information addressing hazardous for proper selection and use of personal pro-
substance releases. Familiarization with tective equipment.
OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.60. (F) Review of the principles and practices
(C) Review of the principles and practices of establishing exposure zones, proper decon-
for analyzing an incident to determine the tamination and medical surveillance sta-
hazardous substances present, the likely be- tions and procedures.
havior of the hazardous substance and its (G) Review of the expected hazards includ-
container, the types of hazardous substance ing fire and explosions hazards, confined
transportation containers and vehicles, the space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
types and selection of the appropriate defen- equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards,
sive strategy for containing the release. and walking-working surface hazards.
(D) Review of procedures for implementing (H) Awareness and knowledge of the com-
continuing response actions consistent with petencies for the Hazardous Materials Tech-
the local emergency response plan, the orga- nician covered in the National Fire Protec-
nization’s standard operating procedures, tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes-
and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in- sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous
cluding extended emergency notification Materials Incidents.
procedures and follow-up communications. (4) Hazardous materials specialist.
(E) Review of the principles and practice (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
for proper selection and use of personal pro- petency in performing the applicable skills
tective equipment. of 29 CFR 1926.65(q).
(F) Review of the principles and practice of (B) Hands-on experience with retrieval and
personnel and equipment decontamination. use of written and electronic information
(G) Review of the expected hazards includ- relative to response decision making includ-
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined ing but not limited to the U.S. Department
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered of Transportation’s Emergency Response
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer safety data
and walking-working surface hazards. sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or
(H) Awareness and knowledge of the com- manufacturer contacts, computer data bases
petencies for the First Responder at the Op- and response models, and other relevant
erations Level covered in the National Fire sources of information addressing hazardous
Protection Association’s Standard No. 472, substance releases. Familiarization with 29
Professional Competence of Responders to Haz- CFR 1926.60.
ardous Materials Incidents. (C) Review of the principles and practices
(3) Hazardous materials technician. for analyzing an incident to determine the
(A) Review of and demonstration of com- hazardous substances present, their physical
petency in performing the applicable skills and chemical properties, and the likely be-
of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). havior of the hazardous substance and its
(B) Hands-on experience with written and container, vessel, or vehicle.
electronic information relative to response (D) Review of the principles and practices
decision making including but not limited to for identification of the types of hazardous
the U.S. Department of Transportation’s substance transportation containers, vessels
Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG), manu- and vehicles involved in the release; select-
facturer safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/ ing and using the various types of equipment
CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer con- available for plugging or patching transpor-
tacts, computer data bases and response tation containers, vessels or vehicles; orga-
models, and other relevant sources of infor- nizing and directing the use of multiple
mation addressing hazardous substance re- teams of hazardous material technicians and
leases. Familiarization with 29 CFR 1926.60. selecting the appropriate strategy for ap-
(C) Review of the principles and practices proaching release sites and containing or
for analyzing an incident to determine the stopping the release.
hazardous substances present, their physical (E) Review of procedures for implementing
and chemical properties, the likely behavior continuing response actions consistent with
of the hazardous substance and its container, the local emergency response plan, the orga-
the types of hazardous substance transpor- nization’s standard operating procedures, in-
tation containers and vehicles involved in cluding knowledge of the available public
the release, the appropriate strategy for ap- and private response resources, establish-
proaching release sites and containing the ment of an incident command post, direction
release. of hazardous material technician teams, and
182
extended emergency notification procedures higher levels of response when required by
and follow-up communications. the changes to the response plan.
(F) Review of the principles and practice [58 FR 35129, June 30, 1993, as amended at 59
for proper selection and use of personal pro- FR 43275, Aug. 22, 1994: 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
tective equipment. 1996; 77 FR 17890, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9315,
(G) Review of the principles and practices Feb. 8, 2013]
of establishing exposure zones and proper de-
contamination, monitoring and medical sur- § 1926.66 Criteria for design and con-
veillance stations and procedures. struction of spray booths.
(H) Review of the expected hazards includ- (a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined tion—(1) Aerated solid powders. Aerated
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered powders shall mean any powdered ma-
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards,
terial used as a coating material which
and walking-working surface hazards.
shall be fluidized within a container by
(I) Awareness and knowledge of the com-
passing air uniformly from below. It is
petencies for the Off-site Specialist Em-
ployee covered in the National Fire Protec-
common practice to fluidize such mate-
tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes- rials to form a fluidized powder bed and
sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous then dip the part to be coated into the
Materials Incidents. bed in a manner similar to that used in
(5) Incident commander. The incident com- liquid dipping. Such beds are also used
mander is the individual who, at any one as sources for powder spray operations.
time, is responsible for and in control of the (2) Spraying area. Any area in which
response effort. This individual is the person dangerous quantities of flammable va-
responsible for the direction and coordina- pors or mists, or combustible residues,
tion of the response effort. An incident com- dusts, or deposits are present due to
mander’s position should be occupied by the the operation of spraying processes.
most senior, appropriately trained individual (3) Spray booth. A power-ventilated
present at the response site. Yet, as nec- structure provided to enclose or accom-
essary and appropriate by the level of re- modate a spraying operation to confine
sponse provided, the position may be occu- and limit the escape of spray, vapor,
pied by many individuals during a particular and residue, and to safely conduct or
response as the need for greater authority,
direct them to an exhaust system.
responsibility, or training increases. It is
(4) Waterwash spray booth. A spray
possible for the first responder at the aware-
ness level to assume the duties of incident
booth equipped with a water washing
commander until a more senior and appro- system designed to minimize dusts or
priately trained individual arrives at the re- residues entering exhaust ducts and to
sponse site. permit the recovery of overspray fin-
Therefore, any emergency responder ex- ishing material.
pected to perform as an incident commander (5) Dry spray booth. A spray booth not
should be trained to fulfill the obligations of equipped with a water washing system
the position at the level of response they will as described in paragraph (a)(4) of this
be providing including the following: section. A dry spray booth may be
(A) Ability to analyze a hazardous sub- equipped with
stance incident to determine the magnitude (i) Distribution or baffle plates to
of the response problem. promote an even flow of air through
(B) Ability to plan and implement an ap- the booth or cause the deposit of
propriate response plan within the capabili- overspray before it enters the exhaust
ties of available personnel and equipment. duct; or
(C) Ability to implement a response to fa- (ii) Overspray dry filters to minimize
vorably change the outcome of the incident dusts; or
in a manner consistent with the local emer- (iii) Overspray dry filters to mini-
gency response plan and the organization’s mize dusts or residues entering exhaust
standard operating procedures.
ducts; or
(D) Ability to evaluate the progress of the
(iv) Overspray dry filter rolls de-
emergency response to ensure that the re-
signed to minimize dusts or residues
sponse objectives are being met safely, effec-
tively, and efficiently.
entering exhaust ducts; or
(v) Where dry powders are being
(E) Ability to adjust the response plan to

the conditions of the response and to notify sprayed, with powder collection sys-
tems so arranged in the exhaust to cap-
ture oversprayed material.
183
(6) Fluidized bed. A container holding or filter rolls, if installed, shall con-
powder coating material which is aer- form to the following:
ated from below so as to form an air- (i) The spraying operations except
supported expanded cloud of such ma- electrostatic spraying operations shall
terial through which the preheated ob- be so designed, installed and main-
ject to be coated is immersed and tained that the average air velocity
transported. over the open face of the booth (or
(7) Electrostatic fluidized bed. A con- booth cross section during spraying op-
tainer holding powder coating material erations) shall be not less than 100 lin-
which is aerated from below so as to ear feet per minute. Electrostatic
form an air-supported expanded cloud spraying operations may be conducted
of such material which is electrically with an air velocity over the open face
charged with a charge opposite to the of the booth of not less than 60 linear
charge of the object to be coated; such feet per minute, or more, depending on
object is transported, through the con- the volume of the finishing material
tainer immediately above the charged being applied and its flammability and
and aerated materials in order to be explosion characteristics. Visible
coated. gauges or audible alarm or pressure ac-
(8) Approved. Shall mean approved tivated devices shall be installed to in-
and listed by a nationally recognized dicate or insure that the required air
testing laboratory. velocity is maintained. Filter rolls
(9) Listed. See ‘‘approved’’ in para- shall be inspected to insure proper re-
graph (a)(8) of this section. placement of filter media.
(b) Spray booths—(1) Construction. (ii) All discarded filter pads and filter
Spray booths shall be substantially rolls shall be immediately removed to
constructed of steel, securely and rig- a safe, well-detached location or placed
idly supported, or of concrete or main a water-filled metal container and
sonry except that aluminum or other disposed of at the close of the day’s op-
substantial noncombustible material eration unless maintained completely
may be used for intermittent or low in water.
volume spraying. Spray booths shall be (iii) The location of filters in a spray
designed to sweep air currents toward booth shall be so as to not reduce the
the exhaust outlet. effective booth enclosure of the arti-
(2) Interiors. The interior surfaces of cles being sprayed.
spray booths shall be smooth and con- (iv) Space within the spray booth on
tinuous without edges and otherwise the downstream and upstream sides of
designed to prevent pocketing of resi- filters shall be protected with approved
dues and facilitate cleaning and wash- automatic sprinklers.
ing without injury. (v) Filters or filter rolls shall not be
(3) Floors. The floor surface of a spray used when applying a spray material
booth and operator’s working area, if known to be highly susceptible to spon-
combustible, shall be covered with non- taneous heating and ignition.
combustible material of such character (vi) Clean filters or filter rolls shall
as to facilitate the safe cleaning and be noncombustible or of a type having
removal of residues. a combustibility not in excess of class
(4) Distribution or baffle plates. Dis- 2 filters as listed by Underwriters’ Lab-
tribution or baffle plates, if installed oratories, Inc. Filters and filter rolls
to promote an even flow of air through shall not be alternately used for dif-
the booth or cause the deposit of ferent types of coating materials,
overspray before it enters the exhaust where the combination of materials
duct, shall be of noncombustible mate- may be conducive to spontaneous igni-
rial and readily removable or acces- tion.
sible on both sides for cleaning. Such (6) Frontal area. Each spray booth
plates shall not be located in exhaust having a frontal area larger than 9
ducts. square feet shall have a metal deflector
(5) Dry type overspray collectors—(ex- or curtain not less than 21⁄2 inches (5.35
haust air filters). In conventional dry cm) deep installed at the upper outer
type spray booths, overspray dry filters edge of the booth over the opening.
184
(7) Conveyors. Where conveyors are deposits of combustible residues may

arranged to carry work into or out of readily accumulate.
spray booths, the openings therefor (4) Wiring conformance. Electrical wir-
shall be as small as practical. ing and equipment shall conform to the
(8) Separation of operations. Each provisions of this paragraph and shall
spray booth shall be separated from otherwise be in accordance with sub-
other operations by not less than 3 feet part S of this part.
(0.912 m), or by a greater distance, or (5) Combustible residues, areas. Unless
by such partition or wall as to reduce specifically approved for locations con-
the danger from juxtaposition of haz- taining both deposits of readily ignit-
ardous operations. See also paragraph able residue and explosive vapors, there
(c)(1) of this section. shall be no electrical equipment in any
(9) Cleaning. Spray booths shall be so spraying area, whereon deposits of
installed that all portions are readily combustible residues may readily accu-
accessible for cleaning. A clear space of mulate, except wiring in rigid conduit
not less than 3 feet (0.912 m) on all or in boxes or fittings containing no
sides shall be kept free from storage or taps, splices, or terminal connections.
combustible construction. (6) Wiring type approved. Electrical
(10) Illumination. When spraying areas wiring and equipment not subject to
are illuminated through glass panels or deposits of combustible residues but lo-
other transparent materials, only fixed cated in a spraying area as herein de-
lighting units shall be used as a source fined shall be of explosion-proof type
of illumination. Panels shall effec- approved for Class I, group D locations
tively isolate the spraying area from and shall otherwise conform to the pro-
the area in which the lighting unit is visions of subpart S of this part, for
located, and shall be of a noncombus- Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca-
tible material of such a nature or so tions. Electrical wiring, motors, and
protected that breakage will be un- other equipment outside of but within
likely. Panels shall be so arranged that 20 feet (6.08 m) of any spraying area,
normal accumulations of residue on and not separated therefrom by parti-
the exposed surface of the panel will tions, shall not produce sparks under
not be raised to a dangerous tempera- normal operating conditions and shall
ture by radiation or conduction from otherwise conform to the provisions of
the source of illumination. subpart S of this part for Class I, Divi-
sion 2 Hazardous Locations.
(c) Electrical and other sources of igni-
(7) Lamps. Electric lamps outside of,
tion—(1) Conformance. All electrical
but within 20 feet (6.08 m) of any spray-
equipment, open flames and other
ing area, and not separated therefrom
sources of ignition shall conform to the
by a partition, shall be totally enclosed
requirements of this paragraph, except
to prevent the falling of hot particles
as follows:
and shall be protected from mechanical
(i) Electrostatic apparatus shall con- injury by suitable guards or by loca-
form to the requirements of paragraphs tion.
(e) and (f) of this section; (8) Portable lamps. Portable electric
(ii) Drying, curing, and fusion appa- lamps shall not be used in any spraying
ratus shall conform to the require- area during spraying operations. Port-
ments of paragraph (g) of this section; able electric lamps, if used during
(iii) [Reserved] cleaning or repairing operations, shall
(iv) Powder coating equipment shall be of the type approved for hazardous
conform to the requirements of para- Class I locations.
graph (c)(1) of this section. (9) Grounding. (i) All metal parts of
(2) Minimum separation. There shall be spray booths, exhaust ducts, and piping
no open flame or spark producing systems conveying flammable or com-
equipment in any spraying area nor bustible liquids or aerated solids shall
within 20 feet (6.08 m) thereof, unless be properly electrically grounded in an
separated by a partition. effective and permanent manner.
(3) Hot surfaces. Space-heating appli- (d) Ventilation—(1) Conformance. Ven-

ances, steampipes, or hot surfaces shall tilating and exhaust systems shall be
not be located in a spraying area where in accordance with the Standard for
185
Blower and Exhaust Systems for Vapor substantially supported. Exhaust ducts
Removal, NFPA No. 91–1961, where ap- without dampers are preferred; how-
plicable and shall also conform to the ever, if dampers are installed, they
provisions of this section. shall be maintained so that they will
(2) General. All spraying areas shall be in a full open position at all times
be provided with mechanical ventila- the ventilating system is in operation.
tion adequate to remove flammable va- (i) Exhaust ducts shall be protected
pors, mists, or powders to a safe loca- against mechanical damage and have a
tion and to confine and control com- clearance from unprotected combus-
bustible residues so that life is not en- tible construction or other combustible
dangered. Mechanical ventilation shall material of not less than 18 inches
be kept in operation at all times while (45.72 cm).
spraying operations are being con- (ii) If combustible construction is
ducted and for a sufficient time there- provided with the following protection
after to allow vapors from drying coat- applied to all surfaces within 18 inches
ed articles and drying finishing mate- (45.72 cm), clearances may be reduced
rial residue to be exhausted. to the distances indicated:
(3) Independent exhaust. Each spray (a) 28-gage sheet metal on 1/4-inch as- 12 inches (30.48
bestos mill board. cm).
booth shall have an independent ex- (b) 28-gage sheet metal on 1/8-inch as- 9 inches (22.86
haust duct system discharging to the bestos mill board spaced out 1 inch cm).
exterior of the building, except that (2.54 cm) on noncombustible spacers.
(c) 22-gage sheet metal on 1-inch 3 inches (7.62
multiple cabinet spray booths in which rockwool batts reinforced with wire cm).
identical spray finishing material is mesh or the equivalent.
used with a combined frontal area of (d) Where ducts are protected with an ap-
not more than 18 square feet may have proved automatic sprinkler system,
properly maintained, the clearance re-
a common exhaust. If more than one quired in paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this sec-
fan serves one booth, all fans shall be tion may be reduced to 6 inches (15.24
so interconnected that one fan cannot cm).
operate without all fans being oper- (8) Discharge clearance. Unless the
ated. spray booth exhaust duct terminal is
(4) Fan-rotating element. The fan-ro- from a water-wash spray booth, the
tating element shall be nonferrous or terminal discharge point shall be not
nonsparking or the casing shall consist less than 6 feet from any combustible
of or be lined with such material. exterior wall or roof nor discharge in
There shall be ample clearance be- the direction of any combustible con-
tween the fan-rotating element and the struction or unprotected opening in
fan casing to avoid a fire by friction, any noncombustible exterior wall with-
necessary allowance being made for or- in 25 feet (7.6 m).
dinary expansion and loading to pre- (9) Air exhaust. Air exhaust from
vent contact between moving parts and spray operations shall not be directed
the duct or fan housing. Fan blades so that it will contaminate makeup air
shall be mounted on a shaft suffi- being introduced into the spraying area
ciently heavy to maintain perfect or other ventilating intakes, nor di-
alignment even when the blades of the rected so as to create a nuisance. Air
fan are heavily loaded, the shaft pref- exhausted from spray operations shall
erably to have bearings outside the not be recirculated.
duct and booth. All bearings shall be of (10) Access doors. When necessary to
the self-lubricating type, or lubricated facilitate cleaning, exhaust ducts shall
from the outside duct. be provided with an ample number of
(5) Electric motors. Electric motors access doors.
driving exhaust fans shall not be placed (11) Room intakes. Air intake openings
inside booths or ducts. See also para- to rooms containing spray finishing op-
graph (c) of this section. erations shall be adequate for the effi-
(6) Belts. Belts shall not enter the cient operation of exhaust fans and
duct or booth unless the belt and pul- shall be so located as to minimize the
ley within the duct or booth are thor- creation of dead air pockets.
oughly enclosed. (12) Drying spaces. Freshly sprayed

(7) Exhaust ducts. Exhaust ducts shall articles shall be dried only in spaces
be constructed of steel and shall be provided with adequate ventilation to
186
prevent the formation of explosive va- (7) Conveyors required. Goods being
pors. In the event adequate and reliable painted using this process are to be
ventilation is not provided such drying supported on conveyors. The conveyors
spaces shall be considered a spraying shall be so arranged as to maintain
area. safe distances between the goods and
(e) Fixed electrostatic apparatus—(1) the electrodes or electrostatic atom-
Conformance. Where installation and izing heads at all times. Any irregu-
use of electrostatic spraying equip- larly shaped or other goods subject to
ment is used, such installation and use possible swinging or movement shall be
shall conform to all other paragraphs rigidly supported to prevent such
of this section, and shall also conform swinging or movement which would re-
to the requirements of this paragraph. duce the clearance to less than that
(2) Type approval. Electrostatic appa- specified in paragraph (e)(6) of this sec-
ratus and devices used in connection tion.
with coating operations shall be of ap- (8) Prohibition. This process is not ac-
proved types. ceptable where goods being coated are
(3) Location. Transformers, power manipulated by hand. When finishing
packs, control apparatus, and all other materials are applied by electrostatic
electrical portions of the equipment, equipment which is manipulated by
with the exception of high-voltage hand, see paragraph (f) of this section
grids, electrodes, and electrostatic for applicable requirements.
atomizing heads and their connections, (9) Fail-safe controls. Electrostatic ap-
shall be located outside of the spraying paratus shall be equipped with auto-
area, or shall otherwise conform to the matic controls which will operate with-
requirements of paragraph (c) of this out time delay to disconnect the power
section. supply to the high voltage transformer
(4) Support. Electrodes and electro- and to signal the operator under any of
static atomizing heads shall be ade- the following conditions:
quately supported in permanent loca- (i) Stoppage of ventilating fans or
tions and shall be effectively insulated failure of ventilating equipment from
from the ground. Electrodes and elec- any cause.
trostatic atomizing heads which are (ii) Stoppage of the conveyor car-
permanently attached to their bases, rying goods through the high voltage
supports, or reciprocators, shall be field.
deemed to comply with this section. (iii) Occurrence of a ground or of an
Insulators shall be nonporous and non- imminent ground at any point on the
combustible. high voltage system.
(5) Insulators, grounding. High-voltage (iv) Reduction of clearance below
leads to electrodes shall be properly in- that specified in paragraph (e)(6) of this
sulated and protected from mechanical section.
injury or exposure to destructive (10) Guarding. Adequate booths, fenc-
chemicals. Electrostatic atomizing ing, railings, or guards shall be so
heads shall be effectively and perma- placed about the equipment that they,
nently supported on suitable insulators either by their location or character or
and shall be effectively guarded both, assure that a safe isolation of the
against accidental contact or ground- process is maintained from plant stor-
ing. An automatic means shall be pro- age or personnel. Such railings, fenc-
vided for grounding the electrode sys- ing, and guards shall be of conducting
tem when it is electrically deenergized material, adequately grounded.
for any reason. All insulators shall be (11) Ventilation. Where electrostatic
kept clean and dry. atomization is used the spraying area
(6) Safe distance. A safe distance shall shall be so ventilated as to insure safe
be maintained between goods being conditions from a fire and health
painted and electrodes or electrostatic standpoint.
atomizing heads or conductors of at (12) Fire protection. All areas used for
least twice the sparking distance. A spraying, including the interior of the
suitable sign indicating this safe dis- booth, shall be protected by automatic
tance shall be conspicuously posted sprinklers where this protection is
near the assembly. available. Where this protection is not
187
available, other approved automatic tained in metallic contact with the

extinguishing equipment shall be pro- conveyor or other grounded support.
vided. Hooks shall be regularly cleaned to in-
(f) Electrostatic hand spraying equip- sure this contact and areas of contact
ment—(1) Application. This paragraph shall be sharp points or knife edges
shall apply to any equipment using where possible. Points of support of the
electrostatically charged elements for object shall be concealed from random
the atomization and/or, precipitation spray where feasible and where the ob-
of materials for coatings on articles, or jects being sprayed are supported from
for other similar purposes in which the a conveyor, the point of attachment to
atomizing device is hand held and ma- the conveyor shall be so located as to
nipulated during the spraying oper- not collect spray material during nor-
ation. mal operation.
(2) Conformance. Electrostatic hand (8) Interlocks. The electrical equip-
spraying equipment shall conform with ment shall be so interlocked with the
the other provisions of this section. ventilation of the spraying area that
(3) Equipment approval and specifica- the equipment cannot be operated un-
tions. Electrostatic hand spray appa- less the ventilation fans are in oper-
ratus and devices used in connection ation.
with coating operations shall be of ap- (9) Ventilation. The spraying oper-
proved types. The high voltage circuits ation shall take place within a spray
shall be designed so as to not produce area which is adequately ventilated to
a spark of sufficient intensity to ignite remove solvent vapors released from
any vapor-air mixtures nor result in the operation.
appreciable shock hazard upon coming (g) Drying, curing, or fusion appa-
in contact with a grounded object ratus—(1) Conformance. Drying, curing,
under all normal operating conditions. or fusion apparatus in connection with
The electrostatically charged exposed spray application of flammable and
elements of the handgun shall be capa- combustible finishes shall conform to
ble of being energized only by a switch the Standard for Ovens and Furnaces,
which also controls the coating mate- NFPA 86A–1969, where applicable and
rial supply. shall also conform with the following
(4) Electrical support equipment. Trans- requirements of this paragraph.
formers, powerpacks, control appa- (2) Alternate use prohibited. Spray
ratus, and all other electrical portions booths, rooms, or other enclosures used
of the equipment, with the exception of for spraying operations shall not alter-
the handgun itself and its connections nately be used for the purpose of dry-
to the power supply shall be located ing by any arrangement which will
outside of the spraying area or shall cause a material increase in the sur-
otherwise conform to the requirements face temperature of the spray booth,
of paragraph (c) of this section. room, or enclosure.
(5) Spray gun ground. The handle of (3) Adjacent system interlocked. Except
the spraying gun shall be electrically as specifically provided in paragraph
connected to ground by a metallic con- (g)(4) of this section, drying, curing, or
nection and to be so constructed that fusion units utilizing a heating system
the operator in normal operating posi- having open flames or which may
tion is in intimate electrical contact produce sparks shall not be installed in
with the grounded handle. a spraying area, but may be installed
(6) Grounding-general. All electrically adjacent thereto when equipped with
conductive objects in the spraying area an interlocked ventilating system ar-
shall be adequately grounded. This re- ranged to:
quirement shall apply to paint con- (i) Thoroughly ventilate the drying
tainers, wash cans, and any other ob- space before the heating system can be
jects or devices in the area. The equip- started;
ment shall carry a prominent perma- (ii) Maintain a safe atmosphere at
nently installed warning regarding the any source of ignition;
necessity for this grounding feature. (iii) Automatically shut down the
(7) Maintenance of grounds. Objects heating system in the event of failure
being painted or coated shall be main- of the ventilating system.
188
(4) Alternate use permitted. Auto- Subpart E—Personal Protective

mobile refinishing spray booths or en- and Life Saving Equipment
closures, otherwise installed and main-
tained in full conformity with this sec-
AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; 29 U.S.C.
tion, may alternately be used for dry- 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No.
ing with portable electrical infrared 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48
drying apparatus when conforming FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111),
with the following: 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31160), 4–
(i) Interior (especially floors) of 2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as
applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
spray enclosures shall be kept free of
overspray deposits. § 1926.95 Criteria for personal protec-
(ii) During spray operations, the dry- tive equipment.
ing apparatus and electrical connec-
tions and wiring thereto shall not be (a) Application. Protective equipment,
including personal protective equip-
located within spray enclosure nor in
ment for eyes, face, head, and extrem-
any other location where spray resi-
ities, protective clothing, respiratory
dues may be deposited thereon.
devices, and protective shields and bar-
(iii) The spraying apparatus, the dry- riers, shall be provided, used, and
ing apparatus, and the ventilating sys- maintained in a sanitary and reliable
tem of the spray enclosure shall be condition wherever it is necessary by
equipped with suitable interlocks so ar- reason of hazards of processes or envi-
ranged that: ronment, chemical hazards, radio-
(a) The spraying apparatus cannot be logical hazards, or mechanical irri-
operated while the drying apparatus is tants encountered in a manner capable
inside the spray enclosure. of causing injury or impairment in the
(b) The spray enclosure will be function of any part of the body
purged of spray vapors for a period of through absorption, inhalation or
not less than 3 minutes before the dry- physical contact.
ing apparatus can be energized. (b) Employee-owned equipment. Where
(c) The ventilating system will main- employees provide their own protective
tain a safe atmosphere within the en- equipment, the employer shall be re-
closure during the drying process and sponsible to assure its adequacy, in-
the drying apparatus will automati- cluding proper maintenance, and sani-
cally shut off in the event of failure of tation of such equipment.
the ventilating system. (c) Design. All personal protective
(iv) All electrical wiring and equip- equipment shall be of safe design and
ment of the drying apparatus shall con- construction for the work to be per-
form with the applicable sections of formed.
subpart S of this part. Only equipment (d) Payment for protective equipment.
of a type approved for Class I, Division (1) Except as provided by paragraphs
2 hazardous locations shall be located (d)(2) through (d)(6) of this section, the
within 18 inches (45.72 cm) of floor protective equipment, including per-
level. All metallic parts of the drying sonal protective equipment (PPE), used
apparatus shall be properly electrically to comply with this part, shall be pro-
bonded and grounded. vided by the employer at no cost to
employees.
(v) The drying apparatus shall con-
(2) The employer is not required to
tain a prominently located, perma-
pay for non-specialty safety-toe protec-
nently attached warning sign indi-
tive footwear (including steel-toe shoes
cating that ventilation should be main- or steel-toe boots) and non-specialty
tained during the drying period and prescription safety eyewear, provided
that spraying should not be conducted that the employer permits such items
in the vicinity that spray will deposit to be worn off the job-site.
on apparatus. (3) When the employer provides
[58 FR 35149, June 30, 1993] metatarsal guards and allows the em-
ployee, at his or her request, to use
shoes or boots with built-in metatarsal
189
protection, the employer is not re- sulating sleeves shall meet the fol-
quired to reimburse the employee for lowing requirements:
the shoes or boots. (1) Manufacture and marking of rubber
(4) The employer is not required to insulating equipment. (i) Blankets,
pay for: gloves, and sleeves shall be produced by
(i) Everyday clothing, such as long- a seamless process.
sleeve shirts, long pants, street shoes, (ii) Each item shall be clearly
and normal work boots; or marked as follows:
(ii) Ordinary clothing, skin creams, (A) Class 00 equipment shall be
or other items, used solely for protec- marked Class 00.
tion from weather, such as winter (B) Class 0 equipment shall be
coats, jackets, gloves, parkas, rubber marked Class 0.
boots, hats, raincoats, ordinary sun- (C) Class 1 equipment shall be
glasses, and sunscreen. marked Class 1.
(5) The employer must pay for re- (D) Class 2 equipment shall be
placement PPE, except when the em- marked Class 2.
ployee has lost or intentionally dam- (E) Class 3 equipment shall be
aged the PPE. marked Class 3.
(6) Where an employee provides ade- (F) Class 4 equipment shall be
quate protective equipment he or she marked Class 4.
owns pursuant to paragraph (b) of this (G) Nonozone-resistant equipment
section, the employer may allow the shall be marked Type I.
employee to use it and is not required (H) Ozone-resistant equipment shall
to reimburse the employee for that be marked Type II.
equipment. The employer shall not re- (I) Other relevant markings, such as
quire an employee to provide or pay for the manufacturer’s identification and
his or her own PPE, unless the PPE is the size of the equipment, may also be
excepted by paragraphs (d)(2) through provided.
(d)(5) of this section. (iii) Markings shall be nonconducting
(7) This section shall become effec- and shall be applied in such a manner
tive on February 13, 2008. Employers as not to impair the insulating quali-
must implement the PPE payment re- ties of the equipment.
quirements no later than May 15, 2008. (iv) Markings on gloves shall be con-
NOTE TO § 1926.95(d): When the provisions of
fined to the cuff portion of the glove.
another OSHA standard specify whether or (2) Electrical requirements. (i) Equip-
not the employer must pay for specific ment shall be capable of withstanding
equipment, the payment provisions of that the ac proof-test voltage specified in
standard shall prevail. Table E–1 or the dc proof-test voltage
[58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993, as amended at 72 specified in Table E–2.
FR 64429, Nov. 15, 2007] (A) The proof test shall reliably indi-
cate that the equipment can withstand
§ 1926.96 Occupational foot protection. the voltage involved.
Safety-toe footwear for employees (B) The test voltage shall be applied
shall meet the requirements and speci- continuously for 3 minutes for equip-
fications in American National Stand- ment other than matting and shall be
ard for Men’s Safety-Toe Footwear, applied continuously for 1 minute for
Z41.1–1967. matting.
(C) Gloves shall also be capable of
[58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993] separately withstanding the ac proof-
test voltage specified in Table E–1 after
§ 1926.97 Electrical protective equip- a 16-hour water soak. (See the note fol-
ment. lowing paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this
(a) Design requirements for specific section.)
types of electrical protective equipment. (ii) When the ac proof test is used on
Rubber insulating blankets, rubber in- gloves, the 60-hertz proof-test current
sulating matting, rubber insulating may not exceed the values specified in
covers, rubber insulating line hose, Table E–1 at any time during the test
rubber insulating gloves, and rubber in- period.
190
(A) If the ac proof test is made at a NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): Rubber insulating
frequency other than 60 hertz, the per- equipment meeting the following national
missible proof-test current shall be consensus standards is deemed to be in com-
pliance with the performance requirements
computed from the direct ratio of the of paragraph (a) of this section:
frequencies. American Society for Testing and Mate-
(B) For the test, gloves (right side rials (ASTM) D120–09, Standard Specification
out) shall be filled with tap water and for Rubber Insulating Gloves.
immersed in water to a depth that is in ASTM D178–01 (2010), Standard Specification
accordance with Table E–3. Water shall for Rubber Insulating Matting.
be added to or removed from the glove, ASTM D1048–12, Standard Specification for
as necessary, so that the water level is Rubber Insulating Blankets.
the same inside and outside the glove. ASTM D1049–98 (2010), Standard Specifica-
tion for Rubber Insulating Covers.
(C) After the 16-hour water soak spec- ASTM D1050–05 (2011), Standard Specifica-
ified in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(C) of this tion for Rubber Insulating Line Hose.
section, the 60-hertz proof-test current ASTM D1051–08, Standard Specification for
may not exceed the values given in Rubber Insulating Sleeves.
Table E–1 by more than 2 milliamperes. The preceding standards also contain spec-
(iii) Equipment that has been sub- ifications for conducting the various tests
jected to a minimum breakdown volt- required in paragraph (a) of this section. For
example, the ac and dc proof tests, the
age test may not be used for electrical
breakdown test, the water-soak procedure,
protection. (See the note following and the ozone test mentioned in this para-
paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.) graph are described in detail in these ASTM
(iv) Material used for Type II insu- standards.
lating equipment shall be capable of ASTM F1236–96 (2012), Standard Guide for
withstanding an ozone test, with no Visual Inspection of Electrical Protective Rub-
visible effects. The ozone test shall re- ber Products, presents methods and tech-
niques for the visual inspection of electrical
liably indicate that the material will
protective equipment made of rubber. This
resist ozone exposure in actual use. guide also contains descriptions and photo-
Any visible signs of ozone deterioration graphs of irregularities that can be found in
of the material, such as checking, this equipment.
cracking, breaks, or pitting, is evi- ASTM F819–10, Standard Terminology Relat-
dence of failure to meet the require- ing to Electrical Protective Equipment for Work-
ments for ozone-resistant material. ers, includes definitions of terms relating to
(See the note following paragraph the electrical protective equipment covered
(a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.) under this section.
(3) Workmanship and finish. (i) Equip- (b) Design requirements for other types
ment shall be free of physical irreg- of electrical protective equipment. The
ularities that can adversely affect the following requirements apply to the de-
insulating properties of the equipment sign and manufacture of electrical pro-
and that can be detected by the tests tective equipment that is not covered
or inspections required under this sec- by paragraph (a) of this section:
tion. (1) Voltage withstand. Insulating
(ii) Surface irregularities that may equipment used for the protection of
be present on all rubber goods (because employees shall be capable of with-
of imperfections on forms or molds or standing, without failure, the voltages
because of inherent difficulties in the that may be imposed upon it.
manufacturing process) and that may
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(1): These voltages
appear as indentations, protuberances, include transient overvoltages, such as
or imbedded foreign material are ac- switching surges, as well as nominal line
ceptable under the following condi- voltage. See appendix B to subpart V of this
tions: part for a discussion of transient
(A) The indentation or protuberance overvoltages on electric power transmission
blends into a smooth slope when the and distribution systems. See IEEE Std 516–
material is stretched. 2009, IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on
Energized Power Lines, for methods of deter-
(B) Foreign material remains in
mining the magnitude of transient

place when the insulating material is overvoltages on an electrical system and for
folded and stretches with the insu- a discussion comparing the ability of insula-
lating material surrounding it. tion equipment to withstand a transient
191
overvoltage based on its ability to withstand NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(ii): ASTM F1236–
ac voltage testing. 96 (2012), Standard Guide for Visual Inspection
of Electrical Protective Rubber Products, pre-
(2) Equipment current. (i) Protective sents methods and techniques for the visual
equipment used for the primary insula- inspection of electrical protective equipment
tion of employees from energized cir- made of rubber. This guide also contains de-
cuit parts shall be capable of passing a scriptions and photographs of irregularities
current test when subjected to the that can be found in this equipment.
highest nominal voltage on which the (iii) Insulating equipment with any
equipment is to be used. of the following defects may not be
(ii) When insulating equipment is used:
tested in accordance with paragraph (A) A hole, tear, puncture, or cut;
(b)(2)(i) of this section, the equipment (B) Ozone cutting or ozone checking
current may not exceed 1 microampere (that is, a series of interlacing cracks
per kilovolt of phase-to-phase applied produced by ozone on rubber under me-
voltage. chanical stress);
NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2): This para- (C) An embedded foreign object;
graph applies to equipment that provides pri- (D) Any of the following texture
mary insulation of employees from energized changes: Swelling, softening, hard-
parts. It does not apply to equipment used ening, or becoming sticky or inelastic.
for secondary insulation or equipment used (E) Any other defect that damages
for brush contact only. the insulating properties.
NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2): For ac exci-
(iv) Insulating equipment found to
tation, this current consists of three compo-
nents: Capacitive current because of the di- have other defects that might affect its
electric properties of the insulating material insulating properties shall be removed
itself, conduction current through the vol- from service and returned for testing
ume of the insulating equipment, and leak- under paragraphs (c)(2)(viii) and
age current along the surface of the tool or (c)(2)(ix) of this section.
equipment. The conduction current is nor- (v) Insulating equipment shall be
mally negligible. For clean, dry insulating cleaned as needed to remove foreign
equipment, the leakage current is small, and
the capacitive current predominates.
substances.
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): Plastic guard (vi) Insulating equipment shall be
equipment is deemed to conform to the per- stored in such a location and in such a
formance requirements of paragraph (b) of manner as to protect it from light,
this section if it meets, and is used in ac- temperature extremes, excessive hu-
cordance with, ASTM F712–06 (2011), Standard midity, ozone, and other damaging sub-
Test Methods and Specifications for Electrically stances and conditions.
Insulating Plastic Guard Equipment for Protec- (vii) Protector gloves shall be worn
tion of Workers.
over insulating gloves, except as fol-
(c) In-service care and use of electrical lows:
protective equipment—(1) General. Elec- (A) Protector gloves need not be used
trical protective equipment shall be with Class 0 gloves, under limited-use
maintained in a safe, reliable condi- conditions, when small equipment and
tion. parts manipulation necessitate unusu-
(2) Specific requirements. The following ally high finger dexterity.
specific requirements apply to rubber NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(vii)(A): Persons
insulating blankets, rubber insulating inspecting rubber insulating gloves used
covers, rubber insulating line hose, under these conditions need to take extra
rubber insulating gloves, and rubber in- care in visually examining them. Employees
sulating sleeves: using rubber insulating gloves under these
(i) Maximum use voltages shall con- conditions need to take extra care to avoid
handling sharp objects.
form to those listed in Table E–4.
(ii) Insulating equipment shall be in- (B) If the voltage does not exceed 250
spected for damage before each day’s volts, ac, or 375 volts, dc, protector
use and immediately following any in- gloves need not be used with Class 00
cident that can reasonably be sus- gloves, under limited-use conditions,
pected of causing damage. Insulating when small equipment and parts ma-
gloves shall be given an air test, along nipulation necessitate unusually high
with the inspection. finger dexterity.
192
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(vii)(B): Persons (x) Insulating equipment failing to
inspecting rubber insulating gloves used pass inspections or electrical tests may
under these conditions need to take extra not be used by employees, except as
care in visually examining them. Employees
follows:
using rubber insulating gloves under these
conditions need to take extra care to avoid
(A) Rubber insulating line hose may
handling sharp objects. be used in shorter lengths with the de-
fective portion cut off.
(C) Any other class of glove may be (B) Rubber insulating blankets may
used without protector gloves, under be salvaged by severing the defective
limited-use conditions, when small area from the undamaged portion of
equipment and parts manipulation ne- the blanket. The resulting undamaged
cessitate unusually high finger dex- area may not be smaller than 560 milli-
terity but only if the employer can meters by 560 millimeters (22 inches by
demonstrate that the possibility of 22 inches) for Class 1, 2, 3, and 4 blan-
physical damage to the gloves is small kets.
and if the class of glove is one class (C) Rubber insulating blankets may
higher than that required for the volt- be repaired using a compatible patch
age involved. that results in physical and electrical
(D) Insulating gloves that have been properties equal to those of the blan-
used without protector gloves may not ket.
be reused until they have been tested (D) Rubber insulating gloves and
under the provisions of paragraphs sleeves with minor physical defects,
(c)(2)(viii) and (c)(2)(ix) of this section. such as small cuts, tears, or punctures,
(viii) Electrical protective equipment may be repaired by the application of a
shall be subjected to periodic electrical compatible patch. Also, rubber insu-
tests. Test voltages and the maximum lating gloves and sleeves with minor
intervals between tests shall be in ac- surface blemishes may be repaired with
cordance with Table E–4 and Table E–5. a compatible liquid compound. The re-
(ix) The test method used under para- paired area shall have electrical and
graphs (c)(2)(viii) and (c)(2)(xi) of this physical properties equal to those of
section shall reliably indicate whether the surrounding material. Repairs to
the insulating equipment can with- gloves are permitted only in the area
stand the voltages involved. between the wrist and the reinforced
edge of the opening.
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(ix): Standard (xi) Repaired insulating equipment
electrical test methods considered as meet-
ing this paragraph are given in the following
shall be retested before it may be used
national consensus standards: by employees.
ASTM D120–09, Standard Specification for (xii) The employer shall certify that
Rubber Insulating Gloves. equipment has been tested in accord-
ASTM D178–01 (2010), Standard Specification ance with the requirements of para-
for Rubber Insulating Matting. graphs (c)(2)(iv), (c)(2)(vii)(D),
ASTM D1048–12, Standard Specification for (c)(2)(viii), (c)(2)(ix), and (c)(2)(xi) of
Rubber Insulating Blankets. this section. The certification shall
ASTM D1049–98 (2010), Standard Specifica- identify the equipment that passed the
tion for Rubber Insulating Covers. test and the date it was tested and
ASTM D1050–05 (2011), Standard Specifica- shall be made available upon request to
tion for Rubber Insulating Line Hose. the Assistant Secretary for Occupa-
ASTM D1051–08, Standard Specification for tional Safety and Health and to em-
Rubber Insulating Sleeves.
ployees or their authorized representa-
ASTM F478–09, Standard Specification for In-
Service Care of Insulating Line Hose and Cov- tives.
ers. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(xii): Marking
ASTM F479–06 (2011), Standard Specification equipment with, and entering onto logs, the
for In-Service Care of Insulating Blankets. results of the tests and the dates of testing
ASTM F496–08, Standard Specification for In- are two acceptable means of meeting the cer-
Service Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves. tification requirement.
193
TABLE E–1—AC PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS

Maximum proof-test current, mA
(gloves only)
Proof-test
Class of equipment voltage 280-mm 360-mm 410-mm 460-mm
rms V (11-in) (14-in) (16-in) (18-in)
glove glove glove glove
00 .............................................................. 2,500 8 12 ........................ ........................

0 ................................................................ 5,000 8 12 14 16
1 ................................................................ 10,000 ........................ 14 16 18
2 ................................................................ 20,000 ........................ 16 18 20
3 ................................................................ 30,000 ........................ 18 20 22
4 ................................................................ 40,000 ........................ ........................ 22 24
TABLE E–2—DC PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS

Class of equipment Proof-test voltage
00 ........................................................................................................................................................... 10,000
0 ............................................................................................................................................................. 20,000
1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 40,000
2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 50,000
3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 60,000
4 ............................................................................................................................................................. 70,000
Note: The dc voltages listed in this table are not appropriate for proof testing rubber insulating line hose or covers. For this
equipment, dc proof tests shall use a voltage high enough to indicate that the equipment can be safely used at the voltages list-
ed in Table E–4. See ASTM D1050–05 (2011) and ASTM D1049–98 (2010) for further information on proof tests for rubber insu-
lating line hose and covers, respectively.
TABLE E–3—GLOVE TESTS—WATER LEVEL 1 2

AC proof test DC proof test
Class of glove
mm in mm in
00 .......................................................................................... 38 1.5 38 1.5

0 ............................................................................................ 38 1.5 38 1.5
1 ............................................................................................ 38 1.5 51 2.0
2 ............................................................................................ 64 2.5 76 3.0
3 ............................................................................................ 89 3.5 102 4.0
4 ............................................................................................ 127 5.0 153 6.0
1 The water level is given as the clearance from the reinforced edge of the glove to the water line, with a tolerance of ±13 mm.
(±0.5 in.).
2 If atmospheric conditions make the specified clearances impractical, the clearances may be increased by a maximum of 25
mm. (1 in.).
TABLE E–4—RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT, VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS

Maximum use Retest Retest
Class of equipment voltage 1 voltage 2 voltage 2
AC rms AC rms DC avg
00 ....................................................................................................................... 500 2,500 10,000

0 ......................................................................................................................... 1,000 5,000 20,000
1 ......................................................................................................................... 7,500 10,000 40,000
2 ......................................................................................................................... 17,000 20,000 50,000
3 ......................................................................................................................... 26,500 30,000 60,000
4 ......................................................................................................................... 36,000 40,000 70,000
1 The maximum use voltage is the ac voltage (rms) classification of the protective equipment that designates the maximum
nominal design voltage of the energized system that may be safely worked. The nominal design voltage is equal to the phase-to-
phase voltage on multiphase circuits. However, the phase-to-ground potential is considered to be the nominal design voltage if:
(1) There is no multiphase exposure in a system area and the voltage exposure is limited to the phase-to-ground potential, or
(2) The electric equipment and devices are insulated or isolated or both so that the multiphase exposure on a grounded wye
circuit is removed.
2 The proof-test voltage shall be applied continuously for at least 1 minute, but no more than 3 minutes.
TABLE E–5—RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT, TEST INTERVALS

Type of equipment When to test
Rubber insulating line hose ............................................. Upon indication that insulating value is suspect and after repair.
Rubber insulating covers ................................................. Upon indication that insulating value is suspect and after repair.
Rubber insulating blankets ............................................... Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter;1 upon indication
that insulating value is suspect; and after repair.
194
TABLE E–5—RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT, TEST INTERVALS—Continued

Type of equipment When to test
Rubber insulating gloves .................................................. Before first issue and every 6 months thereafter;1 upon indication that
insulating value is suspect; after repair; and after use without pro-
tectors.
Rubber insulating sleeves ................................................ Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter;1 upon indication
that insulating value is suspect; and after repair.
1 If the insulating equipment has been electrically tested but not issued for service, the insulating equipment may not be placed
into service unless it has been electrically tested within the previous 12 months.
[79 FR 20693, Apr. 11, 2014]
§ 1926.98 [Reserved] of this section to be in compliance with

the requirements of this section.
§ 1926.100 Head protection.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, as amended at 77 FR
(a) Employees working in areas 37600, June 22, 2012; 77 FR 42988, July 23, 2012]
where there is a possible danger of head
injury from impact, or from falling or § 1926.101 Hearing protection.
flying objects, or from electrical shock (a) Wherever it is not feasible to re-
and burns, shall be protected by protec- duce the noise levels or duration of ex-
tive helmets. posures to those specified in Table D–2,
(b) Criteria for head protection. (1) The Permissible Noise Exposures, in
employer must provide each employee § 1926.52, ear protective devices shall be
with head protection that meets the provided and used.
specifications contained in any of the (b) Ear protective devices inserted in
following consensus standards: the ear shall be fitted or determined in-
(i) American National Standards In- dividually by competent persons.
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2009, ‘‘American (c) Plain cotton is not an acceptable
National Standard for Industrial Head protective device.
Protection,’’ incorporated by reference
§ 1926.102 Eye and face protection.
in § 1926.6;
(ii) American National Standards In- (a) General. (1) The employer shall en-
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2003, ‘‘American sure that each affected employee uses
National Standard for Industrial Head appropriate eye or face protection
Protection,’’ incorporated by reference when exposed to eye or face hazards
in § 1926.6; or from flying particles, molten metal,
(iii) American National Standards In- liquid chemicals, acids or caustic liq-
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–1997, ‘‘American uids, chemical gases or vapors, or po-
tentially injurious light radiation.
National Standard for Personnel Pro-
tection—Protective Headwear for In- (2) The employer shall ensure that
each affected employee uses eye pro-
dustrial Workers—Requirements,’’ in-
tection that provides side protection
corporated by reference in § 1926.6.
when there is a hazard from flying ob-
(2) The employer must ensure that jects. Detachable side protectors (e.g.
the head protection provided for each clip-on or slide-on side shields) meeting
employee exposed to high-voltage elec- the pertinent requirements of this sec-
tric shock and burns also meets the tion are acceptable.
specifications contained in Section 9.7 (3) The employer shall ensure that
(‘‘Electrical Insulation’’) of any of the each affected employee who wears pre-
consensus standards identified in para- scription lenses while engaged in oper-
graph (b)(1) of this section. ations that involve eye hazards wears
(3) OSHA will deem any head protec- eye protection that incorporates the
tion device that the employer dem- prescription in its design, or wears eye
onstrates is at least as effective as a protection that can be worn over the
head protection device constructed in prescription lenses without disturbing

accordance with one of the consensus the proper position of the prescription
standards identified in paragraph (b)(1) lenses or the protective lenses.
195
(4) Eye and face PPE shall be dis- TABLE E–1—FILTER LENS SHADE NUMBERS FOR
tinctly marked to facilitate identifica- PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY—
tion of the manufacturer. Continued
(5) Protectors shall meet the fol-
lowing minimum requirements: Shade
Welding operation number
(i) They shall provide adequate pro-
tection against the particular hazards Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous) 1/16-, 3/
32-, 1/8-, 5/32-inch diameter electrodes ............ 11
for which they are designed.
Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous) 1/16-, 3/32-,
(ii) They shall be reasonably com- 1/8-, 5/32-inch diameter electrodes ................... 12
fortable when worn under the des- Shielded metal-arc welding 3/16-, 7/32-, 1/4-inch
ignated conditions. diameter electrodes ........................................... 12
(iii) They shall fit snugly and shall 5/16-, 3/8-inch diameter electrodes ....................... 14
not unduly interfere with the move- Atomic hydrogen welding ...................................... 10–14
Carbon-arc welding ............................................... 14
ments of the wearer. Soldering ................................................................ 2
(iv) They shall be durable. Torch brazing ......................................................... 3 or 4
(v) They shall be capable of being dis- Light cutting, up to 1 inch ...................................... 3 or 4
infected. Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches ....................... 4 or 5
(vi) They shall be easily cleanable. Heavy cutting, over 6 inches ................................. 5 or 6
(b) Criteria for protective eye and face Gas welding (light), up to 1/8-inch ........................ 4 or 5
protection. (1) Protective eye and face Gas welding (medium), 1/8-inch to 1/2-inch ......... 5 or 6
Gas welding (heavy), over 1/2-inch ...................... 6 or 8
protection devices must comply with
any of the following consensus stand-
ards: (2) Laser protection. (i) Employees
(i) ANSI/ISEA Z87.1–2010, Occupa- whose occupation or assignment re-
tional and Educational Personal Eye quires exposure to laser beams shall be
and Face Protection Devices, incor- furnished suitable laser safety goggles
porated by reference in § 1926.6; which will protect for the specific
(ii) ANSI Z87.1–2003, Occupational wavelength of the laser and be of opti-
and Educational Personal Eye and cal density (O.D.) adequate for the en-
Face Protection Devices, incorporated ergy involved. Table E–2 lists the max-
by reference in § 1926.6; or imum power or energy density for
(iii) ANSI Z87.1–1989 (R–1998), Prac- which adequate protection is afforded
tice for Occupational and Educational by glasses of optical densities from 5
Eye and Face Protection, incorporated through 8. Output levels falling be-
by reference in § 1926.6; tween lines in this table shall require
(2) Protective eye and face protection the higher optical density.
devices that the employer dem-
onstrates are at least as effective as TABLE E–2—SELECTING LASER SAFETY GLASS
protective eye and face protection de-
vices that are constructed in accord- Attenuation
Intensity, CW max-
ance with one of the above consensus imum power density Optical density
(watts/cm2) Attenuation factor
standards will be deemed to be in com- (O.D.)
pliance with the requirements of this 10¥2 ......................... 5 ......................... 105
section. 10¥1 ......................... 6 ......................... 106
(c) Protection against radiant energy— 1.0 ............................ 7 ......................... 107
(1) Selection of shade numbers for welding 10.0 .......................... 8 ......................... 108
filter. Table E–1 shall be used as a guide
for the selection of the proper shade (ii) All protective goggles shall bear
numbers of filter lenses or plates used a label identifying the following data:
in welding. Shades more dense than (A) The laser wavelengths for which
those listed may be used to suit the in- use is intended;
dividual’s needs. (B) The optical density of those
wavelengths;
TABLE E–1—FILTER LENS SHADE NUMBERS FOR
PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY (C) The visible light transmission.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
Shade
Welding operation 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35160, June 30, 1993;

number
81 FR 16092, Mar. 25, 2016]
Shielded metal-arc welding 1/16-, 3/32-, 1/8-, 5/
32-inch diameter electrodes .............................. 10
196
§ 1926.103 Respiratory protection. (b) Where safety net protection is re-

NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
quired by this part, operations shall
struction work under this section are iden- not be undertaken until the net is in
tical to those set forth at 29 CFR 1910.134 of place and has been tested.
this chapter. (c)(1) Nets shall extend 8 feet beyond
[63 FR 1297; Jan. 8, 1998] the edge of the work surface where em-
ployees are exposed and shall be in-
§ 1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and stalled as close under the work surface
lanyards. as practical but in no case more than
(a) Lifelines, safety belts, and lan- 25 feet below such work surface. Nets
yards shall be used only for employee shall be hung with sufficient clearance
safeguarding. Any lifeline, safety belt, to prevent user’s contact with the sur-
or lanyard actually subjected to in- faces or structures below. Such clear-
service loading, as distinguished from ances shall be determined by impact
static load testing, shall be imme- load testing.
diately removed from service and shall (2) It is intended that only one level
not be used again for employee safe- of nets be required for bridge construc-
guarding. tion.
(b) Lifelines shall be secured above (d) The mesh size of nets shall not ex-
the point of operation to an anchorage ceed 6 inches by 6 inches. All new nets
or structural member capable of sup- shall meet accepted performance
porting a minimum dead weight of 5,400 standards of 17,500 foot-pounds min-
pounds. imum impact resistance as determined
(c) Lifelines used on rock-scaling op- and certified by the manufacturers,
erations, or in areas where the lifeline and shall bear a label of proof test.
may be subjected to cutting or abra- Edge ropes shall provide a minimum
sion, shall be a minimum of 7⁄8-inch breaking strength of 5,000 pounds.
wire core manila rope. For all other (e) Forged steel safety hooks or
lifeline applications, a minimum of 3⁄4- shackles shall be used to fasten the net
inch manila or equivalent, with a min- to its supports.
imum breaking strength of 5,400 (f) Connections between net panels
pounds, shall be used. shall develop the full strength of the
(d) Safety belt lanyard shall be a net.
minimum of 1⁄2-inch nylon, or equiva-
lent, with a maximum length to pro- § 1926.106 Working over or near water.
vide for a fall of no greater than 6 feet. (a) Employees working over or near
The rope shall have a nominal breaking water, where the danger of drowning
strength of 5,400 pounds. exists, shall be provided with U.S.
(e) All safety belt and lanyard hard- Coast Guard-approved life jacket or
ware shall be drop forged or pressed buoyant work vests.
steel, cadmium plated in accordance (b) Prior to and after each use, the
with type 1, Class B plating specified in buoyant work vests or life preservers
Federal Specification QQ-P-416. Sur- shall be inspected for defects which
face shall be smooth and free of sharp would alter their strength or buoy-
edges. ancy. Defective units shall not be used.
(f) All safety belt and lanyard hard- (c) Ring buoys with at least 90 feet of
ware, except rivets, shall be capable of line shall be provided and readily avail-
withstanding a tensile loading of 4,000 able for emergency rescue operations.
pounds without cracking, breaking, or Distance between ring buoys shall not
taking a permanent deformation. exceed 200 feet.
(d) At least one lifesaving skiff shall
§ 1926.105 Safety nets. be immediately available at locations
(a) Safety nets shall be provided where employees are working over or
when workplaces are more than 25 feet adjacent to water.
above the ground or water surface, or
other surfaces where the use of ladders, § 1926.107 Definitions applicable to
scaffolds, catch platforms, temporary this subpart.

floors, safety lines, or safety belts is (a) Contaminant means any material
impractical. which by reason of its action upon,
197
within, or to a person is likely to cause tive equipment shall be immediately

physical harm. replaced.
(b) Lanyard means a rope, suitable (5) As warranted by the project, the
for supporting one person. One end is employer shall provide a trained and
fastened to a safety belt or harness and equipped firefighting organization
the other end is secured to a substan- (Fire Brigade) to assure adequate pro-
tial object or a safety line. tection to life.
(c) Lifeline means a rope, suitable for (b) Water supply. (1) A temporary or
supporting one person, to which a lan- permanent water supply, of sufficient
yard or safety belt (or harness) is at- volume, duration, and pressure, re-
tached. quired to properly operate the fire-
(d) O.D. means optical density and fighting equipment shall be made
refers to the light refractive character- available as soon as combustible mate-
istics of a lens. rials accumulate.
(e) Radiant energy means energy that (2) Where underground water mains
travels outward in all directions from are to be provided, they shall be in-
its sources. stalled, completed, and made available
(f) Safety belt means a device, usually for use as soon as practicable.
worn around the waist which, by rea- (c) Portable firefighting equipment—(1)
son of its attachment to a lanyard and Fire extinguishers and small hose lines. (i)
lifeline or a structure, will prevent a A fire extinguisher, rated not less than
worker from falling. 2A, shall be provided for each 3,000
square feet of the protected building
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979]
area, or major fraction thereof. Travel
distance from any point of the pro-
Subpart F—Fire Protection and tected area to the nearest fire extin-
Prevention guisher shall not exceed 100 feet.
(ii) One 55-gallon open drum of water
AUTHORITY: Section 107 of the Contract with two fire pails may be substituted
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 for a fire extinguisher having a 2A rat-
U.S.C. 3704); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- ing.
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 (iii) A 1⁄2-inch diameter garden-type
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
hose line, not to exceed 100 feet in
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736),1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6– length and equipped with a nozzle, may
96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (62 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 be substituted for a 2A-rated fire extin-
FR 650008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), 4–2010 (75 FR guisher, providing it is capable of dis-
55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; charging a minimum of 5 gallons per
and 29 CFR part 1911. minute with a minimum hose stream
range of 30 feet horizontally. The gar-
§ 1926.150 Fire protection. den-type hose lines shall be mounted
(a) General requirements. (1) The em- on conventional racks or reels. The
ployer shall be responsible for the de- number and location of hose racks or
velopment of a fire protection program reels shall be such that at least one
to be followed throughout all phases of hose stream can be applied to all points
the construction and demolition work, in the area.
and he shall provide for the firefighting (iv) One or more fire extinguishers,
equipment as specified in this subpart. rated not less than 2A, shall be pro-
As fire hazards occur, there shall be no vided on each floor. In multistory
delay in providing the necessary equip- buildings, at least one fire extinguisher
ment. shall be located adjacent to stairway.
(2) Access to all available firefighting (v) Extinguishers and water drums,
equipment shall be maintained at all subject to freezing, shall be protected
times. from freezing.
(3) All firefighting equipment, pro- (vi) A fire extinguisher, rated not less
vided by the employer, shall be con- than 10B, shall be provided within 50
spicuously located. feet of wherever more than 5 gallons of
(4) All firefighting equipment shall flammable or combustible liquids or 5

be periodically inspected and main- pounds of flammable gas are being used
tained in operating condition. Defec- on the jobsite. This requirement does
198
not apply to the integral fuel tanks of (ix) Fire extinguishers which have
motor vehicles. been listed or approved by a nationally
(vii) Carbon tetrachloride and other recognized testing laboratory, shall be
toxic vaporizing liquid fire extin- used to meet the requirements of this
guishers are prohibited. subpart.
(viii) Portable fire extinguishers (x) Table F–1 may be used as a guide
shall be inspected periodically and for selecting the appropriate portable
maintained in accordance with Mainte- fire extinguishers.
nance and Use of Portable Fire Extin-
guishers, NFPA No. 10A–1970.
(2) Fire hose and connections. (i) One being constructed includes the instal-
hundred feet, or less, of 11⁄2-inch hose, lation of automatic sprinkler protec-
with a nozzle capable of discharging tion, the installation shall closely fol-
water at 25 gallons or more per minute, low the construction and be placed in
may be substituted for a fire extin- service as soon as applicable laws per-
guisher rated not more than 2A in the mit following completion of each story.
designated area provided that the hose (ii) During demolition or alterations,
line can reach all points in the area. existing automatic sprinkler installa-
(ii) If fire hose connections are not tions shall be retained in service as
compatible with local firefighting long as reasonable. The operation of
equipment, the contractor shall pro- sprinkler control valves shall be per-
vide adapters, or equivalent, to permit mitted only by properly authorized
connections. persons. Modification of sprinkler sys-
(iii) During demolition involving tems to permit alterations or addi-
combustible materials, charged hose tional demolition should be expedited
lines, supplied by hydrants, water tank so that the automatic protection may
trucks with pumps, or equivalent, shall be returned to service as quickly as
be made available. possible. Sprinkler control valves shall

(d) Fixed firefighting equipment—(1)
Sprinkler protection. (i) If the facility
199
EC30OC91.012</GPH>
be checked daily at close of work to as- spicuously posted: ‘‘No Smoking or

certain that the protection is in serv- Open Flame.’’
ice. (4) Portable battery powered lighting
(2) Standpipes. In all structures in equipment, used in connection with the
which standpipes are required, or storage, handling, or use of flammable
where standpipes exist in structures gases or liquids, shall be of the type ap-
being altered, they shall be brought up proved for the hazardous locations.
as soon as applicable laws permit, and (5) The nozzle of air, inert gas, and
shall be maintained as construction steam lines or hoses, when used in the
progresses in such a manner that they cleaning or ventilation of tanks and
are always ready for fire protection vessels that contain hazardous con-
use. The standpipes shall be provided centrations of flammable gases or va-
with Siamese fire department connec- pors, shall be bonded to the tank or
tions on the outside of the structure, at vessel shell. Bonding devices shall not
the street level, which shall be con-
be attached or detached in hazardous
spicuously marked. There shall be at
concentrations of flammable gases or
least one standard hose outlet at each
vapors.
floor.
(e) Fire alarm devices. (1) An alarm (b) Temporary buildings. (1) No tem-
system, e.g., telephone system, siren, porary building shall be erected where
etc., shall be established by the em- it will adversely affect any means of
ployer whereby employees on the site exit.
and the local fire department can be (2) Temporary buildings, when lo-
alerted for an emergency. cated within another building or struc-
(2) The alarm code and reporting in- ture, shall be of either noncombustible
structions shall be conspicuously post- construction or of combustible con-
ed at phones and at employee en- struction having a fire resistance of
trances. not less than 1 hour.
(f) Fire cutoffs. (1) Fire walls and exit (3) Temporary buildings, located
stairways, required for the completed other than inside another building and
buildings, shall be given construction not used for the storage, handling, or
priority. Fire doors, with automatic use of flammable or combustible liq-
closing devices, shall be hung on open- uids, flammable gases, explosives, or
ings as soon as practicable. blasting agents, or similar hazardous
(2) Fire cutoffs shall be retained in occupancies, shall be located at a dis-
buildings undergoing alterations or tance of not less than 10 feet from an-
demolition until operations necessitate other building or structure. Groups of
their removal. temporary buildings, not exceeding
2,000 square feet in aggregate, shall, for
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993; the purposes of this part, be considered
61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] a single temporary building.
(c) Open yard storage. (1) Combustible
§ 1926.151 Fire prevention. materials shall be piled with due re-
(a) Ignition hazards. (1) Electrical wir- gard to the stability of piles and in no
ing and equipment for light, heat, or case higher than 20 feet.
power purposes shall be installed in (2) Driveways between and around
compliance with the requirements of combustible storage piles shall be at
subpart K of this part. least 15 feet wide and maintained free
(2) Internal combustion engine pow- from accumulation of rubbish, equip-
ered equipment shall be so located that ment, or other articles or materials.
the exhausts are well away from com- Driveways shall be so spaced that a
bustible materials. When the exhausts maximum grid system unit of 50 feet
are piped to outside the building under by 150 feet is produced.
construction, a clearance of at least 6 (3) The entire storage site shall be
inches shall be maintained between kept free from accumulation of unnec-
such piping and combustible material. essary combustible materials. Weeds
(3) Smoking shall be prohibited at or and grass shall be kept down and a reg-
in the vicinity of operations which con- ular procedure provided for the peri-
stitute a fire hazard, and shall be con- odic cleanup of the entire area.
200
(4) When there is a danger of an un- the handling and use of flammable liq-
derground fire, that land shall not be uids in quantities of 5 gallons or less,
used for combustible or flammable except that this shall not apply to
storage. those flammable liquid materials
(5) Method of piling shall be solid which are highly viscid (extremely
wherever possible and in orderly and hard to pour), which may be used and
regular piles. No combustible material handled in original shipping con-
shall be stored outdoors within 10 feet tainers. For quantities of one gallon or
of a building or structure. less, the original container may be
(6) Portable fire extinguishing equip- used, for storage, use and handling of
ment, suitable for the fire hazard in- flammable liquids.
volved, shall be provided at convenient, (2) Flammable liquids shall not be
conspicuously accessible locations in stored in areas used for exits, stair-
the yard area. Portable fire extin- ways, or normally used for the safe
guishers, rated not less than 2A, shall passage of people.
be placed so that maximum travel dis-
(b) Indoor storage of flammable liquids.
tance to the nearest unit shall not ex-
(1) No more than 25 gallons of flam-
ceed 100 feet.
(d) Indoor storage. (1) Storage shall mable liquids shall be stored in a room
not obstruct, or adversely affect, outside of an approved storage cabinet.
means of exit. For storage of liquefied petroleum gas,
(2) All materials shall be stored, han- see § 1926.153.
dled, and piled with due regard to their (2) Quantities of flammable liquid in
fire characteristics. excess of 25 gallons shall be stored in
(3) Noncompatible materials, which an acceptable or approved cabinet
may create a fire hazard, shall be seg- meeting the following requirements:
regated by a barrier having a fire re- (i) Acceptable wooden storage cabi-
sistance of at least 1 hour. nets shall be constructed in the fol-
(4) Material shall be piled to mini- lowing manner, or equivalent: The bot-
mize the spread of fire internally and tom, sides, and top shall be constructed
to permit convenient access for fire- of an exterior grade of plywood at least
fighting. Stable piling shall be main- 1 inch in thickness, which shall not
tained at all times. Aisle space shall be break down or delaminate under stand-
maintained to safely accommodate the ard fire test conditions. All joints shall
widest vehicle that may be used within be rabbeted and shall be fastened in
the building for firefighting purposes. two directions with flathead wood
(5) Clearance of at least 36 inches screws. When more than one door is
shall be maintained between the top used, there shall be a rabbeted overlap
level of the stored material and the of not less than 1 inch. Steel hinges
sprinkler deflectors. shall be mounted in such a manner as
(6) Clearance shall be maintained to not lose their holding capacity due
around lights and heating units to pre- to loosening or burning out of the
vent ignition of combustible materials. screws when subjected to fire. Such
(7) A clearance of 24 inches shall be cabinets shall be painted inside and out
maintained around the path of travel with fire retardant paint.
of fire doors unless a barricade is pro- (ii) Approved metal storage cabinets
vided, in which case no clearance is will be acceptable.
needed. Material shall not be stored (iii) Cabinets shall be labeled in con-
within 36 inches of a fire door opening. spicuous lettering, ‘‘Flammable-Keep
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, Away from Open Flames.’’
1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986] (3) Not more than 60 gallons of Cat-
egory 1, 2 and/or 3 flammable liquids or
§ 1926.152 Flammable liquids. 120 gallons of Category 4 flammable
(a) General requirements. (1) Only ap- liquids shall be stored in any one stor-
proved containers and portable tanks age cabinet. Not more than three such
shall be used for storage and handling cabinets may be located in a single
of flammable liquids. Approved safety storage area. Quantities in excess of

cans or Department of Transportation this shall be stored in an inside storage
approved containers shall be used for room.
201
(4)(i) Inside storage rooms shall be mechanical exhausting system. Such

constructed to meet the required fire- system shall commence not more than
resistive rating for their use. Such con- 12 inches above the floor and be de-
struction shall comply with the test signed to provide for a complete
specifications set forth in Standard change of air within the room at least
Methods of Fire Test of Building Con- 6 times per hour. If a mechanical ex-
struction and Material, NFPA 251–1969. hausting system is used, it shall be
(ii) Where an automatic extin- controlled by a switch located outside
guishing system is provided, the sys- of the door. The ventilating equipment
tem shall be designed and installed in and any lighting fixtures shall be oper-
an approved manner. Openings to other
ated by the same switch. An electric
rooms or buildings shall be provided
pilot light shall be installed adjacent
with noncombustible liquid-tight
to the switch if Category 1, 2, or 3 flam-
raised sills or ramps at least 4 inches in
height, or the floor in the storage area mable liquids are dispensed within the
shall be at least 4 inches below the sur- room. Where gravity ventilation is pro-
rounding floor. Openings shall be provided, the fresh air intake, as well as
vided with approved self-closing fire the exhausting outlet from the room,
doors. The room shall be liquid-tight shall be on the exterior of the building
where the walls join the floor. A per- in which the room is located.
missible alternate to the sill or ramp is (vii) In every inside storage room
an open-grated trench, inside of the there shall be maintained one clear
room, which drains to a safe location. aisle at least 3 feet wide. Containers
Where other portions of the building or over 30 gallons capacity shall not be
other buildings are exposed, windows stacked one upon the other.
shall be protected as set forth in the (viii) Flammable liquids in excess of
Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, that permitted in inside storage rooms
NFPA No. 80–1970, for Class E or F shall be stored outside of buildings in
openings. Wood of at least 1-inch nomi- accordance with paragraph (c) of this
nal thickness may be used for shelving, section.
racks, dunnage, scuffboards, floor over- (5) Quantity. The quantity of flam-
lay, and similar installations.
mable liquids kept in the vicinity of
(iii) Materials which will react with
spraying operations shall be the min-
water and create a fire hazard shall not
imum required for operations and
be stored in the same room with flam-
mable liquids. should ordinarily not exceed a supply
(iv) Storage in inside storage rooms for 1 day or one shift. Bulk storage of
shall comply with Table F–2 following: portable containers of flammable liq-
uids shall be in a separate, constructed
TABLE F–2 building detached from other impor-
tant buildings or cut off in a standard
Total al-
lowable manner.
Fire protection Fire resist- quantities (c) Storage outside buildings. (1) Stor-
Maximum size
provided ance gals./sq.
ft./floor age of containers (not more than 60
area gallons each) shall not exceed 1,100 gal-
Yes ................ 2 hrs ............. 500 sq. ft ...... 10 lons in any one pile or area. Piles or
No .................. 2 hrs ............. 500 sq. ft ...... 4 groups of containers shall be separated
Yes ................ 1 hr ............... 150 sq. ft ...... 5
No .................. 1 hr ............... 150 sq. ft ...... 2
by a 5-foot clearance. Piles or groups of
containers shall not be nearer than 20
NOTE: Fire protection system shall be sprinkler, water spray,
carbon dioxide or other system approved by a nationally rec- feet to a building.
ognized testing laboratory for this purpose. (2) Within 200 feet of each pile of con-
(v) Electrical wiring and equipment tainers, there shall be a 12-foot-wide
located in inside storage rooms shall be access way to permit approach of fire
approved for Class I, Division 1, Haz- control apparatus.
ardous Locations. For definition of (3) The storage area shall be graded
Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca- in a manner to divert possible spills
tions, see § 1926.449. away from buildings or other expo-

(vi) Every inside storage room shall sures, or shall be surrounded by a curb
be provided with either a gravity or a or earth dike at least 12 inches high.
202
When curbs or dikes are used, provi- (e) Dispensing liquids. (1) Areas in
sions shall be made for draining off ac- which flammable liquids are trans-
cumulations of ground or rain water, ferred at one time, in quantities great-
or spills of flammable liquids. Drains er than 5 gallons from one tank or con-
shall terminate at a safe location and tainer to another tank or container,
shall be accessible to operation under shall be separated from other oper-
fire conditions. ations by 25-feet distance or by con-
(4) Outdoor portable tank storage: (i) struction having a fire resistance of at
Portable tanks shall not be nearer than least 1 hour. Drainage or other means
20 feet from any building. Two or more shall be provided to control spills. Ade-
portable tanks, grouped together, hav- quate natural or mechanical ventila-
ing a combined capacity in excess of tion shall be provided to maintain the
2,200 gallons, shall be separated by a 5- concentration of flammable vapor at or
foot-clear area. Individual portable below 10 percent of the lower flam-
tanks exceeding 1,100 gallons shall be mable limit.
separated by a 5-foot-clear area. (2) Transfer of Category 1, 2, or 3
(ii) Within 200 feet of each portable flammable liquids from one container
tank, there shall be a 12-foot-wide ac- to another shall be done only when
cess way to permit approach of fire containers are electrically inter-
control apparatus. connected (bonded).
(5) Storage areas shall be kept free of (3) Flammable liquids shall be drawn
weeds, debris, and other combustible from or transferred into vessels, con-
material not necessary to the storage. tainers, or tanks within a building or
(6) Portable tanks, not exceeding 660 outside only through a closed piping
gallons, shall be provided with emer- system, from safety cans, by means of
gency venting and other devices, as re- a device drawing through the top, or
quired by chapters III and IV of NFPA from a container, or portable tanks, by
30–1969, The Flammable and Combus- gravity or pump, through an approved
tible Liquids Code. self-closing valve. Transferring by
(7) Portable tanks, in excess of 660 means of air pressure on the container
gallons, shall have emergency venting or portable tanks is prohibited.
and other devices, as required by chap- (4) The dispensing units shall be pro-
ters II and III of The Flammable and tected against collision damage.
Combustible Liquids Code, NFPA 30– (5) Dispensing devices and nozzles for
1969. Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids
(d) Fire control for flammable liquid shall be of an approved type.
storage. (1) At least one portable fire (f) Handling liquids at point of final
extinguisher, having a rating of not use. (1) Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable
less than 20–B units, shall be located liquids shall be kept in closed con-
outside of, but not more than 10 feet tainers when not actually in use.
from, the door opening into any room (2) Leakage or spillage of flammable
used for storage of more than 60 gal- liquids shall be disposed of promptly
lons of flammable liquids. and safely.
(2) At least one portable fire extin- (3) Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liq-
guisher having a rating of not less than uids may be used only where there are
20–B units shall be located not less no open flames or other sources of igni-
than 25 feet, nor more than 75 feet, tion within 50 feet of the operation, un-
from any flammable liquid storage less conditions warrant greater clear-
area located outside. ance.
(3) When sprinklers are provided, (g) Service and refueling areas. (1)
they shall be installed in accordance Flammable liquids shall be stored in
with the Standard for the Installation approved closed containers, in tanks
of Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 13–1969. located underground, or in above-
(4) At least one portable fire extin- ground portable tanks.
guisher having a rating of not less than (2) The tank trucks shall comply
20–B:C units shall be provided on all with the requirements covered in the
tank trucks or other vehicles used for Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flam-
transporting and/or dispensing flammable and Combustible Liquids, NFPA
mable liquids. No. 385–1966.
203
(3) The dispensing hose shall be an (B) Tanks may be built of materials
approved type. other than steel for installation under-
(4) The dispensing nozzle shall be an ground or if required by the properties
approved automatic-closing type with- of the liquid stored. Tanks located
out a latch-open device. above ground or inside buildings shall
(5) Underground tanks shall not be be of noncombustible construction.
abandoned. (C) Tanks built of materials other
(6) Clearly identified and easily ac- than steel shall be designed to speci-
cessible switch(es) shall be provided at fications embodying principles recog-
a location remote from dispensing de- nized as good engineering design for
vices to shut off the power to all dis- the material used.
pensing devices in the event of an (D) Unlined concrete tanks may be
emergency. used for storing flammable liquids hav-
(7)(i) Heating equipment of an ap- ing a gravity of 40° API or heavier.
proved type may be installed in the lu- Concrete tanks with special lining may
brication or service area where there is be used for other services provided the
no dispensing or transferring of Cat- design is in accordance with sound en-
egory 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids, pro- gineering practice.
vided the bottom of the heating unit is (E) [Reserved]
at least 18 inches above the floor and is
(F) Special engineering consideration
protected from physical damage.
shall be required if the specific gravity
(ii) Heating equipment installed in
of the liquid to be stored exceeds that
lubrication or service areas, where Cat-
of water or if the tanks are designed to
egory 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids are
contain flammable liquids at a liquid
dispensed, shall be of an approved type
temperature below 0 °F.
for garages, and shall be installed at
(ii) Fabrication. (A) [Reserved]
least 8 feet above the floor.
(8) There shall be no smoking or open (B) Metal tanks shall be welded, riv-
flames in the areas used for fueling, eted, and caulked, brazed, or bolted, or
servicing fuel systems for internal constructed by use of a combination of
combustion engines, receiving or dis- these methods. Filler metal used in
pensing of flammable liquids. brazing shall be nonferrous metal or an
(9) Conspicuous and legible signs pro- alloy having a melting point above 1000
hibiting smoking shall be posted. °F. and below that of the metal joined.
(10) The motors of all equipment (iii) Atmospheric tanks. (A) Atmos-
being fueled shall be shut off during pheric tanks shall be built in accord-
the fueling operation. ance with acceptable good standards of
(11) Each service or fueling area shall design. Atmospheric tanks may be
be provided with at least one fire extin- built in accordance with:
guisher having a rating of not less than (1) Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.,
20–B:C located so that an extinguisher Subjects No. 142, Standard for Steel
will be within 75 feet of each pump, dis- Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and
penser, underground fill pipe opening, Combustible Liquids, 1968; No. 58,
and lubrication or service area. Standard for Steel Underground Tanks
(h) Scope. This section applies to the for Flammable and Combustible Liq-
handling, storage, and use of flam- uids, Fifth Edition, December 1961; or
mable liquids with a flashpoint at or No. 80, Standard for Steel Inside Tanks
below 199.4 °F (93 °C). This section does for Oil-Burner Fuel, September 1963.
not apply to: (2) American Petroleum Institute
(1) Bulk transportation of flammable Standards No. 12A, Specification for
liquids; and Oil Storage Tanks with Riveted Shells,
(2) Storage, handling, and use of fuel Seventh Edition, September 1951, or
oil tanks and containers connected No. 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil
with oil burning equipment. Storage, Third Edition, 1966.
(i) Tank storage—(1) Design and con- (3) American Petroleum Institute
struction of tanks—(i) Materials. (A) Standards No. 12B, Specification for
Tanks shall be built of steel except as Bolted Production Tanks, Eleventh

provided in paragraphs (i)(1)(i) (B) Edition, May 1958, and Supplement 1,
through (E) of this section. March 1962; No. 12D, Specification for
204
Large Welded Production Tanks, Sev- ical Engineers, or the Underwriters’

enth Edition, August 1957; or No. 12F, Laboratories, Inc.’s, standards, or if
Specification for Small Welded Produc- corrosion is anticipated beyond that
tion Tanks, Fifth Edition, March 1961. provided for in the design formulas
Tanks built in accordance with these used, additional metal thickness or
standards shall be used only as produc- suitable protective coatings or linings
tion tanks for storage of crude petro- shall be provided to compensate for the
leum in oil-producing areas. corrosion loss expected during the de-
(B) Tanks designed for underground sign life of the tank.
service not exceeding 2,500 gallons (2) Installation of outside aboveground
(9,462.5 L) capacity may be used above- tanks. (i) [Reserved]
ground. (ii) Spacing (shell-to-shell) between
(C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure aboveground tanks. (A) The distance be-
vessels may be used as atmospheric tween any two flammable liquid stor-
tanks. age tanks shall not be less than 3 feet
(D) Atmospheric tanks shall not be (0.912 m).
used for the storage of a flammable liq-
(B) Except as provided in paragraph
uid at a temperature at or above its
(i)(2)(ii)(C) of this section, the distance
boiling point.
between any two adjacent tanks shall
(iv) Low pressure tanks. (A) The nor-
not be less than one-sixth the sum of
mal operating pressure of the tank
their diameters. When the diameter of
shall not exceed the design pressure of
one tank is less than one-half the di-
the tank.
(B) Low-pressure tanks shall be built ameter of the adjacent tank, the dis-
in accordance with acceptable stand- tance between the two tanks shall not
ards of design. Low-pressure tanks may be less than one-half the diameter of
be built in accordance with: the smaller tank.
(1) American Petroleum Institute (C) Where crude petroleum in con-
Standard No. 620. Recommended Rules junction with production facilities are
for the Design and Construction of located in noncongested areas and have
Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage capacities not exceeding 126,000 gallons
Tanks, Third Edition, 1966. (3,000 barrels), the distance between
(2) The principles of the Code for such tanks shall not be less than 3 feet
Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII (0.912 m).
of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Ves- (D) Where unstable flammable liquids
sels Code, 1968. are stored, the distance between such
(C) Atmospheric tanks built accord- tanks shall not be less than one-half
ing to Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., the sum of their diameters.
requirements in paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(A) (E) When tanks are compacted in
of this section and shall be limited to three or more rows or in an irregular
2.5 p.s.i.g. under emergency venting pattern, greater spacing or other
conditions. means shall be provided so that inside
This paragraph may be used for oper- tanks are accessible for firefighting
ating pressures not exceeding 1 p.s.i.g. purposes.
(D) Pressure vessels may be used as (F) The minimum separation between
low-pressure tanks. a liquefied petroleum gas container
(v) Pressure vessels. (A) The normal and a flammable liquid storage tank
operating pressure of the vessel shall shall be 20 feet (6.08 m), except in the
not exceed the design pressure of the case of flammable liquid tanks oper-
vessel. ating at pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g.
(B) Pressure vessels shall be built in or equipped with emergency venting
accordance with the Code for Unfired which will permit pressures to exceed
Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the 2.5 p.s.i.g. in which case the provisions
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code of paragraphs (i)(2)(ii) (A) and (B) of
1968. this section shall apply. Suitable
(vi) Provisions for internal corrosion. means shall be taken to prevent the ac-
When tanks are not designed in accord- cumulation of flammable liquids under
ance with the American Petroleum In- adjacent liquefied petroleum gas con-
stitute, American Society of Mechan- tainers such as by diversion curbs or
205
grading. When flammable liquid stor- event vapors from such vents are ig-
age tanks are within a diked area, the nited.
liquefied petroleum gas containers (F) Tanks and pressure vessels stor-
shall be outside the diked area and at ing Category 1 flammable liquids shall
least 10 feet (3.04 m) away from the be equipped with venting devices that
centerline of the wall of the diked area. shall be normally closed except when
The foregoing provisions shall not venting to pressure or vacuum condi-
apply when liquefied petroleum gas tions. Tanks and pressure vessels stor-
containers of 125 gallons (473.125 L) or ing Category 2 flammable liquids, or
less capacity are installed adjacent to Category 3 flammable liquids with a
fuel oil supply tanks of 550 gallons flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall
(2,081.75 L) or less capacity. be equipped with venting devices that
(iii) [Reserved] shall be normally closed except when
(iv) Normal venting for aboveground venting under pressure or vacuum con-
tanks. (A) Atmospheric storage tanks ditions, or with approved flame arrest-
shall be adequately vented to prevent ers.
the development of vacuum or pressure Exemption: Tanks of 3,000 bbls (bar-
sufficient to distort the roof of a cone rels) (84 m(3)) capacity or less con-
roof tank or exceeding the design pres- taining crude petroleum in crude-pro-
sure in the case of other atmospheric ducing areas; and, outside aboveground
tanks, as a result of filling or atmospheric tanks under 1,000 gallons
emptying, and atmospheric tempera- (3,785 L) capacity containing other
ture changes. than Category 1 flammable liquids may
have open vents. (See paragraph
(B) Normal vents shall be sized either
(i)(2)(vi)(B) of this section.)
in accordance with: (1) The American
(G) Flame arresters or venting de-
Petroleum Institute Standard 2000
vices required in paragraph (i)(2)(iv)(F)
(1968), Venting Atmospheric and Low-
of this section may be omitted for Cat-
Pressure Storage Tanks; or (2) other
egory 2 flammable liquids or Category
accepted standard; or (3) shall be at
3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint
least as large as the filling or with- below 100 °F (37.8 °C) where conditions
drawal connection, whichever is larger are such that their use may, in case of
but in no case less than 11⁄4 inch (3.175 obstruction, result in tank damage.
cm) nominal inside diameter. (v) Emergency relief venting for fire ex-
(C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure posure for aboveground tanks. (A) Every
vessels shall be adequately vented to aboveground storage tank shall have
prevent development of pressure or some form of construction or device
vacuum, as a result of filling or that will relieve excessive internal
emptying and atmospheric tempera- pressure caused by exposure fires.
ture changes, from exceeding the de- (B) In a vertical tank the construc-
sign pressure of the tank or vessel. tion referred to in paragraph
Protection shall also be provided to (i)(2)(v)(A) of this section may take the
prevent overpressure from any pump form of a floating roof, lifter roof, a
discharging into the tank or vessel weak roof-to-shell seam, or other ap-
when the pump discharge pressure can proved pressure relieving construction.
exceed the design pressure of the tank The weak roof-to-shell seam shall be
or vessel. constructed to fail preferential to any
(D) If any tank or pressure vessel has other seam.
more than one fill or withdrawal con- (C) Where entire dependence for
nection and simultaneous filling or emergency relief is placed upon pres-
withdrawal can be made, the vent size sure relieving devices, the total vent-
shall be based on the maximum antici- ing capacity of both normal and emer-
pated simultaneous flow. gency vents shall be enough to prevent
(E) Unless the vent is designed to rupture of the shell or bottom of the
limit the internal pressure 2.5 p.s.i. or tank if vertical, or of the shell or heads
less, the outlet of vents and vent drains if horizontal. If unstable liquids are
shall be arranged to discharge in such stored, the effects of heat or gas result-
a manner as to prevent localized over- ing from polymerization, decomposi-
heating of any part of the tank in the tion, condensation, or self-reactivity
206
shall be taken into account. The total additional or larger relief valve or
capacity of both normal and emergency valves. The wetted area of the tank
venting devices shall be not less than shall be calculated on the basis of 55
that derived from Table F–10 except as percent of the total exposed area of a
provided in paragraph (i)(2)(v) (E) or sphere or spheroid, 75 percent of the
(F) of this section. Such device may be total exposed area of a horizontal tank
a self-closing manhole cover, or one and the first 30 feet (9.12 m) above
using long bolts that permit the cover grade of the exposed shell area of a
to lift under internal pressure, or an vertical tank.
TABLE F–10—WETTED AREA VERSUS CUBIC FEET (METERS) FREE AIR PER HOUR
[14.7 psia and 60 °F. (15.55 °C)]
Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H) Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H) Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H)
20 (1.84) 21,100 (590.8) 200 (18.4) 211,000 (5,908) 1,000 (90.2) 524,000 (14,672)
30 (2.76) 31,600 (884.8) 250 (23) 239,000 (6,692) 1,200 (110.4) 557,000 (15,596)
40 (3.68) 42,100 (1,178.8) 300 (27.6) 265,000 (7,420) 1,400 (128.8) 587,000 (16,436)
50 (4.6) 52,700 (1,475.6) 350 (32.2) 288,000 (8,064) 1,600 (147.2) 614,000 (17,192)
60 (5.52) 63,200 (1,769.6) 400 (36.8) 312,000 (8,736) 1,800 (165.6) 639,000 (17,892)
70 (6.44) 73,700 (2,063.6) 500 (46) 354,000 (9,912) 2,000 (180.4) 662,000 (18,536)
80 (7.36) 84,200 (2,357.6) 600 (55.2) 392,000 (10,976) 2,400 (220.8) 704,000 (19,712)
90 (8.28) 94,800 (2,654.4) 700 (64.4) 428,000 (11,984) 2,800 (257.6) 742,000 (20,776)
100 (9.2) 105,000 (2,940) 800 (73.6) 462,000 (12,936) and
120 (11.04) 126,000 (3,528) 900 (82.8) 493,000 (13,804) over
140 (12.88) 147,000 (4,116) 1,000 (90.2) 524,000 (14,672)
160 (14.72) 168,000 (4,704)
180 (16.56) 190,000 (5,320)
200 (18.4) 211,000 (5,908)
(D) For tanks and storage vessels de- factor listed in the following schedule
signed for pressure over 1 p.s.i.g., the when protection is provided as indi-
total rate of venting shall be deter- cated. Only one factor may be used for
mined in accordance with Table F–10, any one tank.
except that when the exposed wetted 0.5 for drainage in accordance with para-
area of the surface is greater than 2,800 graph (i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section for tanks
square feet (257.6 m2), the total rate of over 200 square feet (18.4 m2) of wetted area.
venting shall be calculated by the fol- 0.3 for approved water spray.
lowing formula: 0.3 for approved insulation.
0.15 for approved water spray with approved
CFH = 1,107A0.82 insulation.
Where: (G) The outlet of all vents and vent
CFH = Venting requirement, in cubic feet drains on tanks equipped with emer-
(meters) of free air per hour. gency venting to permit pressures ex-
A = Exposed wetted surface, in square feet
ceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. shall be arranged to
(m2).
discharge in such a way as to prevent
NOTE: The foregoing formula is based on Q localized overheating of any part of the
= 21,000A0.82. tank, in the event vapors from such
(E) The total emergency relief vent- vents are ignited.
ing capacity for any specific stable liq- (H) Each commercial tank venting
uid may be determined by the fol- device shall have stamped on it the
lowing formula: opening pressure, the pressure at which
the valve reaches the full open posi-
V = 1337 ÷ L√ M tion, and the flow capacity at the lat-
V = Cubic feet (meters) of free air per hour ter pressure, expressed in cubic feet
from Table F–10. (meters) per hour of air at 60 °F. (15.55
L = Latent heat of vaporization of specific °C) and at a pressure of 14.7 p.s.i.a.
liquid in B.t.u. per pound. (I) The flow capacity of tank venting
M = Molecular weight of specific liquids.
devices 12 inches (30.48 cm) and smaller
(F) The required airflow rate of para- in nominal pipe size shall be deter-
graph (i)(2)(v) (C) or (E) of this section mined by actual test of each type and
may be multiplied by the appropriate size of vent. These flow tests may be
207
conducted by the manufacturer if cer- (1) [Reserved]

tified by a qualified impartial observer, (2) The drainage system shall termi-
or may be conducted by an outside nate in vacant land or other area or in
agency. The flow capacity of tank an impounding basin having a capacity
venting devices larger than 12 inches not smaller than that of the largest
(30.48 cm) nominal pipe size, including tank served. This termination area and
manhole covers with long bolts or the route of the drainage system shall
equivalent, may be calculated provided be so located that, if the flammable
that the opening pressure is actually liquids in the drainage system are ig-
measured, the rating pressure and cor- nited, the fire will not seriously expose
responding free orifice area are stated, tanks or adjoining property.
the word ‘‘calculated’’ appears on the (C) Diked areas. Where protection of
nameplate, and the computation is adjoining property or waterways is ac-
based on a flow coefficient of 0.5 ap- complished by retaining the liquid
plied to the rated orifice area. around the tank by means of a dike,
(vi) Vent piping for aboveground tanks. the volume of the diked area shall
(A) Vent piping shall be constructed in comply with the following require-
accordance with paragraph (c) of this ments:
section. (1) Except as provided in paragraph
(B) Where vent pipe outlets for tanks (i)(2)(vii)(C)(2) of this section, the volu-
storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liq- metric capacity of the diked area shall
uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids not be less than the greatest amount of
with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), liquid that can be released from the
are adjacent to buildings or public largest tank within the diked area, as-
ways, they shall be located so that the suming a full tank. The capacity of the
vapors are released at a safe point out- diked area enclosing more than one
side of buildings and not less than 12 tank shall be calculated by deducting
feet (3.658 m) above the adjacent the volume of the tanks other than the
ground level. In order to aid their dis- largest tank below the height of the
persion, vapors shall be discharged up- dike.
ward or horizontally away from closely (2) For a tank or group of tanks with
adjacent walls. Vent outlets shall be fixed roofs containing crude petroleum
located so that flammable vapors will with boilover characteristics, the volu-
not be trapped by eaves or other ob- metric capacity of the diked area shall
structions and shall be at least 5 feet be not less than the capacity of the
(1.52 m) from building openings. largest tank served by the enclosure,
(C) When tank vent piping is assuming a full tank. The capacity of
manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as the diked enclosure shall be calculated
to discharge, within the pressure limi- by deducting the volume below the
tations of the system, the vapors they height of the dike of all tanks within
may be required to handle when the enclosure.
manifolded tanks are subject to the (3) Walls of the diked area shall be of
same fire exposure. earth, steel, concrete or solid masonry
(vii) Drainage, dikes, and walls for designed to be liquidtight and to with-
aboveground tanks—(A) Drainage and stand a full hydrostatic head. Earthen
diked areas. The area surrounding a walls 3 feet (0.912 m) or more in height
tank or a group of tanks shall be pro- shall have a flat section at the top not
vided with drainage as in paragraph less than 2 feet (0.608 m) wide. The
(i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section, or shall be slope of an earthen wall shall be con-
diked as provided in (i)(2)(vii)(C) of this sistent with the angle of repose of the
section, to prevent accidental dis- material of which the wall is con-
charge of liquid from endangering ad- structed.
joining property or reaching water- (4) The walls of the diked area shall
ways. be restricted to an average height of 6
(B) Drainage. Where protection of ad- feet (1.824 m) above interior grade.
joining property or waterways is by (5) [Reserved]
means of a natural or manmade drain- (6) No loose combustible material,

age system, such systems shall comply empty or full drum or barrel, shall be
with the following: permitted within the diked area.
208
(viii) Tank openings other than vents hole can break a weld, puncture or
for aboveground tanks. damage the tank, or scrape off the pro-
(A)–(C) [Reserved] tective coating of coated tanks. Tanks
(D) Openings for gaging shall be pro- shall be covered with a minimum of 2
vided with a vaportight cap or cover. feet (0.608 m) of earth, or shall be cov-
(E) For Category 2 flammable liquids ered with not less than 1 foot (0.304 m)
or Category 3 flammable liquids with a of earth, on top of which shall be
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other placed a slab of reinforced concrete not
than crude oils, gasolines, and as- less than 4 inches (10.16 cm) thick.
phalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed When underground tanks are, or are
and installed as to minimize the possi- likely to be, subject to traffic, they
bility of generating static electricity. shall be protected against damage from
A fill pipe entering the top of a tank vehicles passing over them by at least
shall terminate within 6 inches (15.24 3 feet (0.912 m) of earth cover, or 18
cm) of the bottom of the tank and shall inches (45.72 cm) of well-tamped earth,
be installed to avoid excessive vibra- plus 6 inches (15.24 cm) of reinforced
tion. concrete or 8 inches (20.32 cm) of as-
(F) Filling and emptying connections phaltic concrete. When asphaltic or re-
which are made and broken shall be lo- inforced concrete paving is used as part
cated outside of buildings at a location of the protection, it shall extend at
free from any source of ignition and least 1 foot (0.304 m) horizontally be-
not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from yond the outline of the tank in all di-
any building opening. Such connection rections.
shall be closed and liquidtight when (iii) Corrosion protection. Corrosion
not in use. The connection shall be protection for the tank and its piping
properly identified. shall be provided by one or more of the
(3) Installation of underground tanks— following methods:
(i) Location. Evacuation for under-
(A) Use of protective coatings or
ground storage tanks shall be made
wrappings;
with due care to avoid undermining of
(B) Cathodic protection; or,
foundations of existing structures. Un-
derground tanks or tanks under build- (C) Corrosion resistant materials of
ings shall be so located with respect to construction.
existing building foundations and sup- (iv) Vents. (A) Location and arrange-
ports that the loads carried by the lat- ment of vents for Category 1 or 2 flam-
ter cannot be transmitted to the tank. mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable
The distance from any part of a tank liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F
storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liq- (37.8 °C). Vent pipes from tanks storing
uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or
with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), Category 3 flammable liquids with a
to the nearest wall of any basement or flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall
pit shall be not less than 1 foot (0.304 be so located that the discharge point
m), and to any property line that may is outside of buildings, higher than the
be built upon, not less than 3 feet (0.912 fill pipe opening, and not less than 12
m). The distance from any part of a feet (3.658 m) above the adjacent
tank storing Category 3 flammable liq- ground level. Vent pipes shall dis-
uids with a flashpoint at or above 100 charge only upward in order to disperse
°F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable vapors. Vent pipes 2 inches (5.08 cm) or
liquids to the nearest wall of any base- less in nominal inside diameter shall
ment, pit or property line shall be not not be obstructed by devices that will
less than 1 foot (0.304 m). cause excessive back pressure. Vent
(ii) Depth and cover. Underground pipe outlets shall be so located that
tanks shall be set on firm foundations flammable vapors will not enter build-
and surrounded with at least 6 inches ing openings, or be trapped under eaves
(15.24 cm) of noncorrosive, inert mate- or other obstructions. If the vent pipe
rials such as clean sand, earth, or grav- is less than 10 feet (3.04 m) in length, or
el well tamped in place. The tank shall greater than 2 inches (5.08 cm) in nomi-
be placed in the hole with care since nal inside diameter, the outlet shall be
dropping or rolling the tank into the provided with a vacuum and pressure
209
relief device or there shall be an ap- to prevent blow-back of vapor or liquid

proved flame arrester located in the at the fill opening while the tank is
vent line at the outlet or within the being filled. Vent pipes shall be not less
approved distance from the outlet. than 11⁄4 inch (3.175 cm) nominal inside
(B) Size of vents. Each tank shall be diameter.
vented through piping adequate in size
TABLE F–11—VENT LINE DIAMETERS
Pipe length 1
Maximum flow GPM (L)
50 feet (15.2 m) 100 feet (30.4 m) 200 feet (60.8 m)
Inches (cm) Inches (cm) Inches (cm)

100 (378.5) ...................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175)
200 (757) ......................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175)
300 (1,135.5) ................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄2 (3.81)
400 (1,514) ...................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08)
500 (1,892.5) ................................................................................... 11⁄2 (3.81) 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08)
600 (2,271) ...................................................................................... 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08)
700 (2,649.5) ................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08)
800 (3,028) ...................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
900 (3,406.5) ................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
1,000 (3,785) ................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
1 Vent lines of 50 ft. (15.2 m), 100 ft. (30.4 m), and 200 ft. (60.8 m) of pipe plus 7 ells.
(C) Location and arrangement of provided with a liquid-tight cap or

vents for Category 3 flammable liquids cover. If inside a building, each such
with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F opening shall be protected against liq-
(37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liquid overflow and possible vapor release
uids. Vent pipes from tanks storing by means of a spring loaded check
Category 3 flammable liquids with a valve or other approved device.
flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or (C) Fill and discharge lines shall
Category 4 flammable liquids shall ter- enter tanks only through the top. Fill
minate outside of the building and lines shall be sloped toward the tank.
higher than the fill pipe opening. Vent (D) For Category 2 flammable liq-
outlets shall be above normal snow uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids
level. They may be fitted with return with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C),
bends, coarse screens or other devices other than crude oils, gasolines, and
to minimize ingress of foreign mate- asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de-
rial. signed and installed as to minimize the
(D) Vent piping shall be constructed possibility of generating static elec-
in accordance with paragraph (3)(iv)(C) tricity by terminating within 6 inches
of this section. Vent pipes shall be so (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank.
laid as to drain toward the tank with- (E) Filling and emptying connections
out sags or traps in which liquid can which are made and broken shall be lo-
collect. They shall be located so that cated outside of buildings at a location
they will not be subjected to physical free from any source of ignition and
damage. The tank end of the vent pipe not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from
shall enter the tank through the top. any building opening. Such connection
(E) When tank vent piping is shall be closed and liquidtight when
manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as not in use. The connection shall be
to discharge, within the pressure limi- properly identified.
tations of the system, the vapors they (4) Installation of tanks inside of build-
may be required to handle when ings—(i) Location. Tanks shall not be
manifolded tanks are filled simulta- permitted inside of buildings except as
neously. provided in paragraphs (e), (g), (h), or
(v) Tank openings other than vents. (A) (i) of this section.
Connections for all tank openings shall (ii) Vents. Vents for tanks inside of
be vapor or liquid tight. buildings shall be as provided in para-

(B) Openings for manual gaging, if graphs (i)(2) (iv), (v), (vi)(B), and (3)(iv)
independent of the fill pipe, shall be of this section, except that emergency
210
venting by the use of weak roof seams by terminating within 6 inches (15.24
on tanks shall not be permitted. Vents cm) of the bottom of the tank.
shall discharge vapors outside the (F) The fill pipe inside of the tank
buildings. shall be installed to avoid excessive vi-
(iii) Vent piping. Vent piping shall be bration of the pipe.
constructed in accordance with para- (G) The inlet of the fill pipe shall be
graph (c) of this section. located outside of buildings at a loca-
(iv) Tank openings other than vents. tion free from any source of ignition
(A) Connections for all tank openings and not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away
shall be vapor or liquidtight. Vents are from any building opening. The inlet of
covered in paragraph (i)(4)(ii) of this the fill pipe shall be closed and
section. liquidtight when not in use. The fill
(B) Each connection to a tank inside connection shall be properly identified.
of buildings through which liquid can (H) Tanks inside buildings shall be
normally flow shall be provided with equipped with a device, or other means
an internal or an external valve lo- shall be provided, to prevent overflow
cated as close as practical to the shell into the building.
of the tank. Such valves, when exter- (5) Supports, foundations, and anchor-
nal, and their connections to the tank age for all tank locations—(i) General.
shall be of steel except when the chem- Tank supports shall be installed on
ical characteristics of the liquid stored firm foundations. Tank supports shall
are incompatible with steel. When ma- be of concrete, masonry, or protected
terials other than steel are necessary, steel. Single wood timber supports (not
they shall be suitable for the pressures, cribbing) laid horizontally may be used
structural stresses, and temperatures for outside aboveground tanks if not
involved, including fire exposures. more than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at
(C) Flammable liquid tanks located their lowest point.
inside of buildings, except in one-story (ii) Fire resistance. Steel supports or
buildings designed and protected for exposed piling shall be protected by
flammable liquid storage, shall be pro- materials having a fire resistance rat-
vided with an automatic-closing heating of not less than 2 hours, except that
actuated valve on each withdrawal con- steel saddles need not be protected if
nection below the liquid level, except less than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at
for connections used for emergency dis- their lowest point. Water spray protec-
posal, to prevent continued flow in the tion or its equivalent may be used in
event of fire in the vicinity of the tank. lieu of fire-resistive materials to pro-
This function may be incorporated in tect supports.
the valve required in paragraph (iii) Spheres. The design of the sup-
(i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section, and if a sep- porting structure for tanks such as
arate valve, shall be located adjacent spheres shall receive special engineer-
to the valve required in paragraph ing consideration.
(i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section. (iv) Load distribution. Every tank
(D) Openings for manual gaging, if shall be so supported as to prevent the
independent of the fill pipe (see para- excessive concentration of loads on the
graph (i)(4)(iv)(F) of this section), shall supporting portion of the shell.
be provided with a vaportight cap or (v) Foundations. Tanks shall rest on
cover. Each such opening shall be pro- the ground or on foundations made of
tected against liquid overflow and pos- concrete, masonry, piling, or steel.
sible vapor release by means of a spring Tank foundations shall be designed to
loaded check valve or other approved minimize the possibility of uneven set-
device. tling of the tank and to minimize cor-
(E) For Category 2 flammable liquids, rosion in any part of the tank resting
or Category 3 flammable liquids with a on the foundation.
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other (vi) Flood areas. Where a tank is lo-
than crude oils, gasolines, and as- cated in an area that may be subjected
phalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed to flooding, the applicable precautions
and installed as to minimize the possi- outlined in this subdivision shall be ob-
bility of generating static electricity served.
211
(A) No aboveground vertical storage stalled that it will safely resist exter-
tank containing a flammable liquid nal pressures due to high ground water
shall be located so that the allowable or flood waters.
liquid level within the tank is below (G) At locations where there is an
the established maximum flood stage, ample and dependable water supply
unless the tank is provided with a guid- available, underground tanks con-
ing structure such as described in para- taining flammable liquids, so installed
graphs (i)(5)(vi) (M), (N), and (O) of this that more than 70 percent of their stor-
section. age capacity will be submerged at the
(B) Independent water supply facili- maximum flood stage, shall be so an-
ties shall be provided at locations chored, weighted, or secured by other
where there is no ample and dependable means, as to prevent movement of such
public water supply available for load- tanks when filled with flammable liq-
ing partially empty tanks with water. uids, and submerged by flood waters to
(C) In addition to the preceding re- the established flood stage.
quirements, each tank so located that (H) Pipe connections below the allow-
more than 70 percent, but less than 100 able liquid level in a tank shall be pro-
percent, of its allowable liquid storage vided with valves or cocks located as
capacity will be submerged at the es- closely as practicable to the tank shell.
tablished maximum flood stage, shall Such valves and their connections to
be safeguarded by one of the following tanks shall be of steel or other mate-
methods: Tank shall be raised, or its rial suitable for use with the liquid
height shall be increased, until its top being stored. Cast iron shall not be per-
extends above the maximum flood mitted.
stage a distance equivalent to 30 per- (I) At locations where an independent
cent or more of its allowable liquid water supply is required, it shall be en-
storage capacity: Provided, however, tirely independent of public power and
That the submerged part of the tank water supply. Independent source of
shall not exceed two and one-half times water shall be available when flood wa-
the diameter. Or, as an alternative to ters reach a level not less than 10 feet
the foregoing, adequate noncombus- (3.04 m) below the bottom of the lowest
tible structural guides, designed to per- tank on a property.
mit the tank to float vertically with- (J) The self-contained power and
out loss of product, shall be provided. pumping unit shall be so located or so
(D) Each horizontal tank so located designed that pumping into tanks may
that more than 70 percent of its stor- be carried on continuously throughout
age capacity will be submerged at the the rise in flood waters from a level 10
established flood stage, shall be an- feet (3.04 m) below the lowest tank to
chored, attached to a foundation of the level of the potential flood stage.
concrete or of steel and concrete, of (K) Capacity of the pumping unit
sufficient weight to provide adequate shall be such that the rate of rise of
load for the tank when filled with flam- water in all tanks shall be equivalent
mable liquid and submerged by flood to the established potential average
waters to the established flood stage, rate of rise of flood waters at any
or adequately secured by other means. stage.
(E) [Reserved] (L) Each independent pumping unit
(F) At locations where there is no shall be tested periodically to insure
ample and dependable water supply, or that it is in satisfactory operating con-
where filling of underground tanks dition.
with liquids is impracticable because of (M) Structural guides for holding
the character of their contents, their floating tanks above their foundations
use, or for other reasons, each tank shall be so designed that there will be
shall be safeguarded against movement no resistance to the free rise of a tank,
when empty and submerged by high and shall be constructed of noncombus-
ground water or flood waters by an- tible material.
choring, weighting with concrete or (N) The strength of the structure
other approved solid loading material, shall be adequate to resist lateral

or securing by other means. Each such movement of a tank subject to a hori-
tank shall be so constructed and in- zontal force in any direction equivalent
212
to not less than 25 pounds per square formed as to the location and operation
foot (1.05 kg m2) acting on the proof such valves and other equipment
jected vertical cross-sectional area of necessary to effect these requirements.
the tank. (vii) Earthquake areas. In areas sub-
(O) Where tanks are situated on ex- ject to earthquakes, the tank supports
posed points or bends in a shoreline and connections shall be designed to
where swift currents in flood waters resist damage as a result of such
will be present, the structures shall be shocks.
designed to withstand a unit force of (6) Sources of ignition. In locations
not less than 50 pounds per square foot where flammable vapors may be
(2.1 kg m2). present, precautions shall be taken to
(P) The filling of a tank to be pro- prevent ignition by eliminating or con-
tected by water loading shall be start- trolling sources of ignition. Sources of
ed as soon as flood waters reach a dan- ignition may include open flames,
gerous flood stage. The rate of filling lightning, smoking, cutting and weld-
shall be at least equal to the rate of ing, hot surfaces, frictional heat,
rise of the floodwaters (or the estab- sparks (static, electrical, and mechan-
lished average potential rate of rise). ical), spontaneous ignition, chemical
(Q) Sufficient fuel to operate the and physical-chemical reactions, and
water pumps shall be available at all radiant heat.
times to insure adequate power to fill
(7) Testing—(i) General. All tanks,
all tankage with water.
whether shop built or field erected,
(R) All valves on connecting pipe-
shall be strength tested before they are
lines shall be closed and locked in
placed in service in accordance with
closed position when water loading has
the applicable paragraphs of the code
been completed.
under which they were built. The
(S) Where structural guides are pro-
American Society of Mechanical Engi-
vided for the protection of floating
neers (ASME) code stamp, American
tanks, all rigid connections between
Petroleum Institute (API) monogram,
tanks and pipelines shall be discon-
or the label of the Underwriters’ Lab-
nected and blanked off or blinded be-
fore the floodwaters reach the bottom oratories, Inc., on a tank shall be evi-
of the tank, unless control valves and dence of compliance with this strength
their connections to the tank are of a test. Tanks not marked in accordance
type designed to prevent breakage be- with the above codes shall be strength
tween the valve and the tank shell. tested before they are placed in service
(T) All valves attached to tanks in accordance with good engineering
other than those used in connection principles and reference shall be made
with water loading operations shall be to the sections on testing in the codes
closed and locked. listed in paragraphs (i)(1) (iii)(A),
(U) If a tank is equipped with a swing (iv)(B), or (v)(B) of this section.
line, the swing pipe shall be raised to (ii) Strength. When the vertical
and secured at its highest position. length of the fill and vent pipes is such
(V) Inspections. The Assistant Sec- that when filled with liquid the static
retary or his designated representative head imposed upon the bottom of the
shall make periodic inspections of all tank exceeds 10 pounds per square inch
plants where the storage of flammable (68.94 kPa), the tank and related piping
liquids is such as to require compliance shall be tested hydrostatically to a
with the foregoing requirements, in pressure equal to the static head thus
order to assure the following: imposed.
(1) That all flammable liquid storage (iii) Tightness. In addition to the
tanks are in compliance with these re- strength test called for in paragraphs
quirements and so maintained. (i)(7) (i) and (ii) of this section, all
(2) That detailed printed instructions tanks and connections shall be tested
of what to do in flood emergencies are for tightness. Except for underground
properly posted. tanks, this tightness test shall be made
(3) That station operators and other at operating pressure with air, inert
employees depended upon to carry out gas, or water prior to placing the tank
such instructions are thoroughly in- in service. In the case of field-erected
213
tanks the strength test may be consid- except as provided in paragraphs (j)(2)
ered to be the test for tank tightness. (ii), (iii) and (iv) of this section.
Underground tanks and piping, before (ii) Exceptions. Materials other than
being covered, enclosed, or placed in steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron
use, shall be tested for tightness may be used underground, or if re-
hydrostatically, or with air pressure at quired by the properties of the flam-
not less than 3 pounds per square inch mable liquid handled. Material other
(20.68 kPa) and not more than 5 pounds than steel, nodular iron, or malleable
per square inch (34.47 kPa). iron shall be designed to specifications
(iv) Repairs. All leaks or deforma- embodying principles recognized as
tions shall be corrected in an accept- good engineering practices for the ma-
able manner before the tank is placed terial used.
in service. Mechanical caulking is not (iii) Linings. Piping, valves, and fit-
permitted for correcting leaks in weld- tings may have combustible or non-
ed tanks except pinhole leaks in the combustible linings.
roof. (iv) Low-melting materials. When low-
(v) Derated operations. Tanks to be op- melting point materials such as alu-
erated at pressures below their design minum and brass or materials that
pressure may be tested by the applica- soften on fire exposure such as plastics,
ble provisions of paragraphs (i)(7) (i) or or non-ductile materials such as cast
(ii) of this section, based upon the pres- iron, are necessary, special consider-
sure developed under full emergency ation shall be given to their behavior
venting of the tank. on fire exposure. If such materials are
(j) Piping, valves, and fittings—(1) Gen- used in above ground piping systems or
eral—(i) Design. The design (including inside buildings, they shall be suitably
selection of materials) fabrication, as- protected against fire exposure or so
sembly, test, and inspection of piping located that any spill resulting from
systems containing flammable liquids the failure of these materials could not
shall be suitable for the expected work- unduly expose persons, important
ing pressures and structural stresses. buildings or structures or can be read-
Conformity with the applicable provi- ily controlled by remote valves.
sions of Pressure Piping, ANSI B31 se- (3) Pipe joints. Joints shall be made
ries and the provisions of this para- liquid tight. Welded or screwed joints
graph, shall be considered prima facie or approved connectors shall be used.
evidence of compliance with the fore- Threaded joints and connections shall
going provisions. be made up tight with a suitable lubri-
(ii) Exceptions. This paragraph does cant or piping compound. Pipe joints
not apply to any of the following: dependent upon the friction character-
(A) Tubing or casing on any oil or gas istics of combustible materials for me-
wells and any piping connected directly chanical continuity of piping shall not
thereto. be used inside buildings. They may be
(B) Motor vehicle, aircraft, boat, or used outside of buildings above or
portable or stationary engines. below ground. If used above ground, the
(C) Piping within the scope of any ap- piping shall either be secured to pre-
plicable boiler and pressures vessel vent disengagement at the fitting or
code. the piping system shall be so designed
(iii) Definitions. As used in this para- that any spill resulting from such dis-
graph, piping systems consist of pipe, engagement could not unduly expose
tubing, flanges, bolting, gaskets, persons, important buildings or struc-
valves, fittings, the pressure con- tures, and could be readily controlled
taining parts of other components such by remote valves.
as expansion joints and strainers, and (4) Supports. Piping systems shall be
devices which serve such purposes as substantially supported and protected
mixing, separating, snubbing, distrib- against physical damage and excessive
uting, metering, or controlling flow. stresses arising from settlement, vibra-
(2) Materials for piping, valves, and fit- tion, expansion, or contraction.
tings—(i) Required materials. Materials (5) Protection against corrosion. All

for piping, valves, or fittings shall be piping for flammable liquids, both
steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron, aboveground and underground, where
214
subject to external corrosion, shall be (iii) Dispensing nozzles shall be auto-

painted or otherwise protected. matic-closing without a hold-open
(6) Valves. Piping systems shall con- latch.
tain a sufficient number of valves to (2) Tanks and pumps. (i) Tanks, and
operate the system properly and to pumps not integral with the dispensing
protect the plant. Piping systems in unit, shall be on shore or on a pier of
connection with pumps shall contain a the solid fill type, except as provided in
sufficient number of valves to control paragraphs (k)(2) (ii) and (iii) of this
properly the flow of liquid in normal section.
operation and in the event of physical (ii) Where shore location would re-
damage. Each connection to pipelines, quire excessively long supply lines to
by which equipments such as tankcars dispensers, tanks may be installed on a
or tank vehicles discharge liquids by pier provided that applicable portions
means of pumps into storage tanks, of paragraph (b) of this section relative
shall be provided with a check valve for to spacing, diking, and piping are com-
automatic protection against backflow plied with and the quantity so stored
if the piping arrangement is such that does not exceed 1,100 gallons (4,163.5 L)
backflow from the system is possible. aggregate capacity.
(7) Testing. All piping before being
(iii) Shore tanks supplying marine
covered, enclosed, or placed in use
shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 service stations may be located above
percent of the maximum anticipated ground, where rock ledges or high
pressure of the system, or pneumati- water table make underground tanks
cally tested to 110 percent of the max- impractical.
imum anticipated pressure of the sys- (iv) Where tanks are at an elevation
tem, but not less than 5 pounds per which would produce gravity head on
square inch gage at the highest point the dispensing unit, the tank outlet
of the system. This test shall be main- shall be equipped with a pressure con-
tained for a sufficient time to complete trol valve positioned adjacent to and
visual inspection of all joints and con- outside the tank block valve specified
nections, but for at least 10 minutes. in § 1926.152(c)(8) of this section, so ad-
(k) Marine service stations—(1) Dis- justed that liquid cannot flow by grav-
pensing. (i) The dispensing area shall be ity from the tank in case of piping or
located away from other structures so hose failure.
as to provide room for safe ingress and (3) Piping. (i) Piping between shore
egress of craft to be fueled. Dispensing tanks and dispensing units shall be as
units shall in all cases be at least 20 described in paragraph (k)(2)(iii) of this
feet (6.08 m) from any activity involv- section, except that, where dispensing
ing fixed sources of ignition. is from a floating structure, suitable
(ii) Dispensing shall be by approved lengths of oil-resistant flexible hose
dispensing units with or without inte- may be employed between the shore
gral pumps and may be located on open piping and the piping on the floating
piers, wharves, or floating docks or on structure as made necessary by change
shore or on piers of the solid fill type. in water level or shoreline.
215
216
ER26MR12.128</GPH>
(ii) A readily accessible valve to shut and shall include all facilities used in
off the supply from shore shall be pro- connection therewith.
vided in each pipeline at or near the
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
approach to the pier and at the shore
1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986;
end of each pipeline adjacent to the 58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993; 63 FR 33469, June
point where flexible hose is attached. 18, 1998; 77 FR 17891, Mar. 26, 2012]
(iii) Piping shall be located so as to
be protected from physical damage. § 1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas
(iv) Piping handling Category 1 or 2 (LP-Gas).
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam-
mable liquids with a flashpoint below (a) Approval of equipment and systems.
100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be grounded to (1) Each system shall have containers,
control stray currents. valves, connectors, manifold valve as-
(4) Definition; as used in this section: semblies, and regulators of an approved
Marine service station shall mean that type.
portion of a property where flammable (2) All cylinders shall meet the De-
liquids used as fuels are stored and dis- partment of Transportation specifica-
pensed from fixed equipment on shore, tion identification requirements pub-

piers, wharves, or floating docks into lished in 49 CFR part 178, Shipping
the fuel tanks of self-propelled craft, Container Specifications.
217
ER26MR12.129</GPH>
(3) Definition. As used in this section, (f) Requirements for appliances. (1) LP-
Containers—All vessels, such as tanks, Gas consuming appliances shall be ap-
cylinders, or drums, used for transpor- proved types.
tation or storing liquefied petroleum (2) Any appliance that was originally
gases. manufactured for operation with a gas-
(b) Welding on LP-Gas containers. eous fuel other than LP-Gas, and is in
Welding is prohibited on containers. good condition, may be used with LP-
(c) Container valves and container ac- Gas only after it is properly converted,
cessories. (1) Valves, fittings, and acces- adapted, and tested for performance
sories connected directly to the con- with LP-Gas before the appliance is
tainer, including primary shut off placed in use.
valves, shall have a rated working pres- (g) Containers and regulating equip-
sure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. and shall be ment installed outside of buildings or
of material and design suitable for LP- structures. Containers shall be upright
Gas service. upon firm foundations or otherwise
(2) Connections to containers, except firmly secured. The possible effect on
safety relief connections, liquid level the outlet piping of settling shall be
gauging devices, and plugged openings, guarded against by a flexible connec-
shall have shutoff valves located as tion or special fitting.
close to the container as practicable. (h) Containers and equipment used in-
side of buildings or structures. (1) When
(d) Safety devices. (1) Every container
operational requirements make port-
and every vaporizer shall be provided
able use of containers necessary, and
with one or more approved safety relief
their location outside of buildings or
valves or devices. These valves shall be structures is impracticable, containers
arranged to afford free vent to the and equipment shall be permitted to be
outer air with discharge not less than 5 used inside of buildings or structures in
feet horizontally away from any open- accordance with paragraphs (h)(2)
ing into a building which is below such through (11) of this section.
discharge. (2) Containers in use means connected
(2) Shutoff valves shall not be infor use.
stalled between the safety relief device (3) Systems utilizing containers hav-
and the container, or the equipment or ing a water capacity greater than 21⁄2
piping to which the safety relief device pounds (nominal 1 pound LP-Gas ca-
is connected, except that a shutoff pacity) shall be equipped with excess
valve may be used where the arrange- flow valves. Such excess flow valves
ment of this valve is such that full re- shall be either integral with the con-
quired capacity flow through the safety tainer valves or in the connections to
relief device is always afforded. the container valve outlets.
(3) Container safety relief devices and (4) Regulators shall be either directly
regulator relief vents shall be located connected to the container valves or to
not less than 5 feet in any direction manifolds connected to the container
from air openings into sealed combus- valves. The regulator shall be suitable
tion system appliances or mechanical for use with LP-Gas. Manifolds and fit-
ventilation air intakes. tings connecting containers to pressure
(e) Dispensing. (1) Filling of fuel con- regulator inlets shall be designed for at
tainers for trucks or motor vehicles least 250 p.s.i.g. service pressure.
from bulk storage containers shall be (5) Valves on containers having water
performed not less than 10 feet from capacity greater than 50 pounds (nomi-
the nearest masonry-walled building, nal 20 pounds LP-Gas capacity) shall be
or not less than 25 feet from the near- protected from damage while in use or
est building or other construction and, storage.
in any event, not less than 25 feet from (6) Aluminum piping or tubing shall
any building opening. not be used.
(2) Filling of portable containers or (7) Hose shall be designed for a work-
containers mounted on skids from storing pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. De-
age containers shall be performed not sign, construction, and performance of

less than 50 feet from the nearest build- hose, and hose connections shall have
ing. their suitability determined by listing
218
by a nationally recognized testing (14) If two or more heater-container

agency. The hose length shall be as units, of either the integral or non-
short as practicable. Hoses shall be integral type, are located in an
long enough to permit compliance with unpartitioned area on the same floor,
spacing provisions of paragraphs (h)(1) the container or containers of each
through (13) of this section, without unit shall be separated from the con-
kinking or straining, or causing hose tainer or containers of any other unit
to be so close to a burner as to be dam- by at least 20 feet.
aged by heat. (15) When heaters are connected to
(8) Portable heaters, including sala- containers for use in an unpartitioned
manders, shall be equipped with an ap- area on the same floor, the total water
proved automatic device to shut off the capacity of containers, manifolded to-
flow of gas to the main burner, and gether for connection to a heater or
pilot if used, in the event of flame fail- heaters, shall not be greater than 735
ure. Such heaters, having inputs above
pounds (nominal 300 pounds LP-Gas ca-
50,000 B.t.u. per hour, shall be equipped
pacity). Such manifolds shall be sepa-
with either a pilot, which must be
rated by at least 20 feet.
lighted and proved before the main
burner can be turned on, or an elec- (16) Storage of containers awaiting
trical ignition system. use shall be in accordance with para-
graphs (j) and (k) of this section.
NOTE: The provisions of this subparagraph (i) Multiple container systems. (1)
do not apply to portable heaters under 7,500
B.t.u. per hour input when used with con-
Valves in the assembly of multiple con-
tainers having a maximum water capacity of tainer systems shall be arranged so
21⁄2 pounds. that replacement of containers can be
made without shutting off the flow of
(9) Container valves, connectors, reg- gas in the system. This provision is not
ulators, manifolds, piping, and tubing
to be construed as requiring an auto-
shall not be used as structural supports
matic changeover device.
for heaters.
(10) Containers, regulating equip- (2) Heaters shall be equipped with an
ment, manifolds, pipe, tubing, and hose approved regulator in the supply line
shall be located to minimize exposure between the fuel cylinder and the heat-
to high temperatures or physical dam- er unit. Cylinder connectors shall be
age. provided with an excess flow valve to
(11) Containers having a water capac- minimize the flow of gas in the event
ity greater than 21⁄2 pounds (nominal 1 the fuel line becomes ruptured.
pound LP-Gas capacity) connected for (3) Regulators and low-pressure relief
use shall stand on a firm and substan- devices shall be rigidly attached to the
tially level surface and, when nec- cylinder valves, clyinders, supporting
essary, shall be secured in an upright standards, the building walls, or other-
position. wise rigidly secured, and shall be so in-
(12) The maximum water capacity of stalled or protected from the elements.
individual containers shall be 245 (j) Storage of LPG containers. Storage
pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca- of LPG within buildings is prohibited.
pacity). (k) Storage outside of buildings. (1)
(13) For temporary heating, heaters Storage outside of buildings, for con-
(other than integral heater-container tainers awaiting use, shall be located
units) shall be located at least 6 feet from the nearest building or group of
from any LP-Gas container. This shall buildings, in accordance with the fol-
not prohibit the use of heaters specifi- lowing:
cally designed for attachment to the
container or to a supporting standard, TABLE F–3
provided they are designed and in-
Distance
stalled so as to prevent direct or radi- Quantity of LP-Gas stored (feet)
ant heat application from the heater
onto the containers. Blower and radi- 500 lbs. or less .................................................... 0
ant type heaters shall not be directed 501 to 6,000 lbs ................................................... 10
6,001 to 10,000 lbs .............................................. 20
toward any LP-Gas container within 20
Over 10,000 lbs ................................................... 25
feet.
219
(2) Containers shall be in a suitable dles but shall have adequate ferrous
ventilated enclosure or otherwise pro- metal supports.
tected against tampering. (ii) They shall not be located with
(l) Fire protection. Storage locations the outside bottom of the container
shall be provided with at least one ap- shell more than 5 feet (1.52 m) above
proved portable fire extinguisher hav- the surface of the ground unless fire-re-
ing a rating of not less than 20–B:C. sisting supports are provided.
(m) Systems utilizing containers other (iii) The bottom of the skids shall not
than DOT containers—(1) Application. be less than 2 inches (5.08 cm) or more
This paragraph applies specifically to than 12 inches (30.48 cm) below the out-
systems utilizing storage containers side bottom of the container shell.
other than those constructed in accord- (iv) Flanges, nozzles, valves, fittings,
ance with DOT specifications. Para- and the like, having communication
graph (b) of this section applies to this with the interior of the container, shall
paragraph unless otherwise noted in be protected against physical damage.
paragraph (b) of this section. (v) When not permanently located on
(2) Design pressure and classification of fire-resisting foundations, piping con-
storage containers. Storage containers nections shall be sufficiently flexible
shall be designed and classified in ac- to minimize the possibility of breakage
cordance with Table F–31. or leakage of connections if the con-
tainer settles, moves, or is otherwise
TABLE F–31 displaced.
(vi) Skids, or lugs for attachment of
Minimum design pressure of con- skids, shall be secured to the container
tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage
For gases in accordance with the code or rules
with vapor 1949 edition of ASME under which the container is designed
press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U–200,
Con- to exceed earlier edi- U–201); 1950, 1952, and built (with a minimum factor of
tainer
type lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962, safety of four) to withstand loading in
in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi-
100 °F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of any direction equal to four times the
(37.8 °C.) U–68, U– ASME Code; All edi- weight of the container and attach-
69) tions of API-ASME
Code 3 ments when filled to the maximum per-
missible loaded weight.
1 80 1 80 1 80 1 100
(4) Field welding where necessary
100 100 100 125
125 125 125 156
shall be made only on saddle plates or
150 150 150 187 brackets which were applied by the
175 175 175 219 manufacturer of the tank.
2 200 215 200 250 (n) When LP-Gas and one or more
1 New storage containers of the 80 type have not been au- other gases are stored or used in the
thorized since Dec. 31, 1947. same area, the containers shall be
2 Container type may be increased by increments of 25.
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100% of marked to identify their content.
the container type designation when constructed under 1949 Marking shall be in compliance with
or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U–68 and U–69).
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of American National Standard Z48.1–
the container type designation when constructed under: (1) 1954, ‘‘Method of Marking Portable
the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U–200 and U–201), (2) 1950,
1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions Compressed Gas Containers To Identify
of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME the Material Contained.’’
Code.
3 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is (o) Damage from vehicles. When dam-
not authorized after July 1, 1961. age to LP-Gas systems from vehicular
(3) Containers with foundations at- traffic is a possibility, precautions
tached (portable or semiportable b con- against such damage shall be taken.
tainers with suitable steel ‘‘runners’’ [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
or ‘‘skids’’ and popularly known in the 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35170, June 30, 1993]
industry as ‘‘skid tanks’’) shall be de-
signed, installed, and used in accord- § 1926.154 Temporary heating devices.
ance with these rules subject to the fol- (a) Ventilation. (1) Fresh air shall be
lowing provisions: supplied in sufficient quantities to
(i) If they are to be used at a given maintain the health and safety of
general location for a temporary period workmen. Where natural means of

not to exceed 6 months they need not fresh air supply is inadequate, mechan-
have fire-resisting foundations or sad- ical ventilation shall be provided.
220
(2) When heaters are used in confined (2) Heaters designed for barometric
spaces, special care shall be taken to or gravity oil feed shall be used only
provide sufficient ventilation in order with the integral tanks.
to ensure proper combustion, maintain (3) [Reserved]
the health and safety of workmen, and (4) Heaters specifically designed and
limit temperature rise in the area. approved for use with separate supply
(b) Clearance and mounting. (1) Tem- tanks may be directly connected for
porary heating devices shall be in- gravity feed, or an automatic pump,
stalled to provide clearance to combus- from a supply tank.
tible material not less than the § 1926.155 Definitions applicable to
amount shown in Table F–4. this subpart.
(2) Temporary heating devices, which
(a) Approved, for the purpose of this
are listed for installation with lesser
subpart, means equipment that has
clearances than specified in Table F–4,
been listed or approved by a nationally
may be installed in accordance with recognized testing laboratory such as
their approval. Factory Mutual Engineering Corp., or
Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., or
TABLE F–4
Federal agencies such as Bureau of
Minimum clearance, (inches) Mines, or U.S. Coast Guard, which
issue approvals for such equipment.
Heating appliances Chimney
Sides Rear con- (b) Closed container means a container
nector so sealed by means of a lid or other de-
Room heater, circulating
vice that neither liquid nor vapor will
type .................................. 12 12 18 escape from it at ordinary tempera-
Room heater, radiant type .. 36 36 18 tures.
(c) [Reserved]
(3) Heaters not suitable for use on (d) Combustion means any chemical
wood floors shall not be set directly process that involves oxidation suffi-
upon them or other combustible mate- cient to produce light or heat.
rials. When such heaters are used, they (e) Fire brigade means an organized
shall rest on suitable heat insulating group of employees that are knowl-
material or at least 1-inch concrete, or edgeable, trained, and skilled in the
equivalent. The insulating material safe evacuation of employees during
shall extend beyond the heater 2 feet or emergency situations and in assisting
more in all directions. in fire fighting operations.
(4) Heaters used in the vicinity of (f) Fire resistance means so resistant
combustible tarpaulins, canvas, or to fire that, for specified time and
similar coverings shall be located at under conditions of a standard heat in-
least 10 feet from the coverings. The tensity, it will not fail structurally and
coverings shall be securely fastened to will not permit the side away from the
prevent ignition or upsetting of the fire to become hotter than a specified
heater due to wind action on the cov- temperature. For purposes of this part,
fire resistance shall be determined by
ering or other material.
the Standard Methods of Fire Tests of
(c) Stability. Heaters, when in use,
Building Construction and Materials,
shall be set horizontally level, unless NFPA 251–1969.
otherwise permitted by the manufac- (g) Flammable means capable of being
turer’s markings. easily ignited, burning intensely, or
(d) Solid fuel salamanders. Solid fuel having a rapid rate of flame spread.
salamanders are prohibited in buildings (h) Flammable liquid means any liquid
and on scaffolds. having a vapor pressure not exceeding
(e) Oil-fired heaters. (1) Flammable 40 pounds per square inch (absolute) at
liquid-fired heaters shall be equipped 100 °F (37.8 °C) and having a flashpoint
with a primary safety control to stop at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C). Flammable
the flow of fuel in the event of flame liquids are divided into four categories
failure. Barometric or gravity oil feed as follows:

shall not be considered a primary safe- (1) Category 1 shall include liquids
ty control. having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C)
221
and having a boiling point at or below inch (absolute), exerted by a volatile

95 °F (35 °C). liquid as determined by the ‘‘Standard
(2) Category 2 shall include liquids Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of
having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C) Petroleum Products (Reid Method).’’
and having a boiling point above 95 °F (ASTM D–323–58).
(35 °C).
(3) Category 3 shall include liquids [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
having flashpoints at or above 73.4 °F 1979, as amended at 77 FR 17894, Mar. 26, 2012]
(23 °C) and at or below 140 °F (60 °C).
(4) Category 4 shall include liquids Subpart G—Signs, Signals, and
having flashpoints above 140 °F (60 °C) Barricades
and at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C).
(i) Flash point of the liquid means the AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655,
temperature at which it gives off vapor 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36
sufficient to form an ignitable mixture FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736),
with the air near the surface of the liq- 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–
uid or within the vessel used as deter- 2007 (72 FR 31159), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–
mined by appropriate test procedure 2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR
and apparatus as specified below. part 1911.
(1) The flashpoint of liquids having a
viscosity less than 45 Saybolt Uni- § 1926.200 Accident prevention signs
versal Second(s) at 100 °F (37.8 °C) and and tags.
a flashpoint below 175 °F (79.4 °C) shall (a) General. Signs and symbols re-
be determined in accordance with the quired by this subpart shall be visible
Standard Method of Test for Flash at all times when work is being per-
Point by the Tag Closed Tester, ASTM formed, and shall be removed or cov-
D–56–69 (incorporated by reference; See ered promptly when the hazards no
§ 1926.6), or an equivalent method as de-
longer exist.
fined by § 1910.1200 appendix B.
(b) Danger signs. (1) Danger signs
(2) The flashpoints of liquids having a
viscosity of 45 Saybolt Universal Sec- shall be used only where an immediate
ond(s) or more at 175 °F (79.4 °C) or hazard exists, and shall follow the spec-
higher shall be determined in accord- ifications illustrated in Figure 1 of
ance with the Standard Method of Test ANSI Z35.1–1968 or in Figures 1 to 13 of
for Flash Point by the Pensky Martens ANSI Z535.2–2011, incorporated by ref-
Closed Tester, ASTM D–93–69 (incor- erence in § 1926.6.
porated by reference; See § 1926.6), or an (2) Danger signs shall have red as the
equivalent method as defined by predominating color for the upper
§ 1910.1200 appendix B. panel; black outline on the borders;
(j) Liquefied petroleum gases, LPG and and a white lower panel for additional
LP Gas mean and include any material sign wording.
which is composed predominantly of (c) Caution signs. (1) Caution signs
any of the following hydrocarbons, or shall be used only to warn against po-
mixtures of them, such as propane, pro- tential hazards or to caution against
pylene, butane (normal butane or iso- unsafe practices, and shall follow the
butane), and butylenes. specifications illustrated in Figure 4 of
(k) Portable tank means a closed con- ANSI Z35.1–1968 or in Figures 1 to 13 of
tainer having a liquid capacity more
ANSI Z535.2–2011, incorporated by ref-
than 60 U.S. gallons, and not intended
erence in § 1926.6.
for fixed installation.
(l) Safety can means an approved (2) Caution signs shall have yellow as
closed container, of not more than 5 the predominating color; black upper
gallons capacity, having a flash-arrest- panel and borders: yellow lettering of
ing screen, spring-closing lid and spout ‘‘caution’’ on the black panel; and the
cover and so designed that it will safe- lower yellow panel for additional sign
ly relieve internal pressure when sub- wording. Black lettering shall be used
jected to fire exposure. for additional wording.

(m) Vapor pressure means the pres-
sure, measured in pounds per square
222
ees of an existing hazard, such as defec-

tive tools, equipment, etc. They shall
not be used in place of, or as a sub-
stitute for, accident prevention signs.
(2) For accident prevention tags, em-
ployers shall follow specifications that
are similar to those in Figures 1 to 4 of
ANSI Z35.2–1968 or Figures 1 to 8 of
erence in § 1926.6.
(i) Additional rules. ANSI Z35.1–1968,
ANSI Z535.2–2011, ANSI Z35.2–1968, and
erence in § 1926.6, contain rules in addi-
tion to those specifically prescribed in
this subpart. The employer shall com-
ply with ANSI Z35.1–1968 or ANSI
(3) The standard color of the back- Z535.2–2011, and ANSI Z35.2–1968 or
ground shall be yellow; and the panel, Z535.5–2011, with respect to such addi-
black with yellow letters. Any letters tional rules.
used against the yellow background
shall be black. The colors shall be [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
those of opaque glossy samples as spec- 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993;
67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, 2002; 69 FR 18803, Apr.
ified in Table 1 of ANSI Z53.1–1967 or in 9, 2004; 78 FR 35567, June 13, 2013; 78 FR 66642,
Table 1 of ANSI Z535.1–2006(R2011), in- Nov. 6, 2013]
corporated by reference in § 1926.6.
(d) Exit signs. Exit signs, when re- § 1926.201 Signaling.
quired, shall be lettered in legible red
letters, not less than 6 inches high, on (a) Flaggers. Signaling by flaggers
a white field and the principal stroke and the use of flaggers, including warn-
of the letters shall be at least three- ing garments worn by flaggers, shall
fourths inch in width. conform to Part VI of the Manual on
(e) Safety instruction signs. Safety in- Uniform Traffic Control Devices (1988
struction signs, when used, shall be Edition, Revision 3, or the Millennium
white with green upper panel with Edition), incorporated by reference in
white letters to convey the principal § 1926.6.
message. Any additional wording on (b) Crane and hoist signals. Regula-
the sign shall be black letters on the tions for crane and hoist signaling will
white background. be found in applicable American Na-
(f) Directional signs. Directional signs, tional Standards Institute standards.
other than automotive traffic signs [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
specified in paragraph (g) of this sec- 1979, as amended at 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12,
tion, shall be white with a black panel 2002; 78 FR 35567, June 13, 2013]
and a white directional symbol. Any
additional wording on the sign shall be § 1926.202 Barricades.
black letters on the white background. Barricades for protection of employ-
(g) Traffic signs. (1) Construction ees shall conform to Part VI of the
areas shall be posted with legible traf- Manual on Uniform Traffic Control De-
fic signs at points of hazard. vices (1988 Edition, Revision 3, or the
(2) All traffic control signs or devices Millennium Edition), incorporated by
used for protection of construction reference in § 1926.6.
workers shall conform to Part VI of
the MUTCD, 1988 Edition, Revision 3, [78 FR 35567, June 13, 2013]
or Part VI of the MUTCD, Millennium
Edition, incorporated by reference in § 1926.203 Definitions applicable to
§ 1926.6. this subpart.
(h) Accident prevention tags. (1) Acci- (a) Barricade means an obstruction to
dent prevention tags shall be used as a deter the passage of persons or vehi-
temporary means of warning employ- cles.
223
EC30OC91.013</GPH>
(b) Signs are the warnings of hazard, equipment meeting the requirements
temporarily or permanently affixed or of subpart M of this part.
placed, at locations where hazards (3) Noncompatible materials shall be
exist. segregated in storage.
(c) Signals are moving signs, provided (4) Bagged materials shall be stacked
by workers, such as flaggers, or by de- by stepping back the layers and cross-
vices, such as flashing lights, to warn keying the bags at least every 10 bags
of possible or existing hazards. high.
(d) Tags are temporary signs, usually
(5) Materials shall not be stored on
attached to a piece of equipment or
part of a structure, to warn of existing scaffolds or runways in excess of sup-
or immediate hazards. plies needed for immediate operations.
(6) Brick stacks shall not be more
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, than 7 feet in height. When a loose
1979, as amended at 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12,
2002]
brick stack reaches a height of 4 feet,
it shall be tapered back 2 inches in
every foot of height above the 4-foot
Subpart H—Materials Handling, level.
Storage, Use, and Disposal (7) When masonry blocks are stacked
higher than 6 feet, the stack shall be
AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655,
tapered back one-half block per tier
657; and Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71
(36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR above the 6-foot level.
35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), (8) Lumber:
or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable. Section (i) Used lumber shall have all nails
1926.250 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911. withdrawn before stacking.
§ 1926.250 General requirements for (ii) Lumber shall be stacked on level
storage. and solidly supported sills.
(iii) Lumber shall be so stacked as to
(a) General. (1) All materials stored in
be stable and self-supporting.
tiers shall be stacked, racked, blocked,
interlocked, or otherwise secured to (iv) Lumber piles shall not exceed 20
prevent sliding, falling or collapse. feet in height provided that lumber to
(2) Maximum safe load limits of be handled manually shall not be
floors within buildings and structures, stacked more than 16 feet high.
in pounds per square foot, shall be con- (9) Structural steel, poles, pipe, bar
spicuously posted in all storage areas, stock, and other cylindrical materials,
except for floor or slab on grade. Max- unless racked, shall be stacked and
imum safe loads shall not be exceeded. blocked so as to prevent spreading or
(3) Aisles and passageways shall be tilting.
kept clear to provide for the free and (c) Housekeeping. Storage areas shall
safe movement of material handling be kept free from accumulation of ma-
equipment or employees. Such areas terials that constitute hazards from
shall be kept in good repair. tripping, fire, explosion, or pest harbor-
(4) When a difference in road or work- age. Vegetation control will be exer-
ing levels exist, means such as ramps, cised when necessary.
blocking, or grading shall be used to (d) Dockboards (bridge plates). (1) Port-
ensure the safe movement of vehicles
able and powered dockboards shall be
between the two levels.
strong enough to carry the load im-
(b) Material storage. (1) Material
posed on them.
stored inside buildings under construc-
tion shall not be placed within 6 feet of (2) Portable dockboards shall be se-
any hoistway or inside floor openings, cured in position, either by being an-
nor within 10 feet of an exterior wall chored or equipped with devices which
which does not extend above the top of will prevent their slipping.
the material stored. (3) Handholds, or other effective
(2) Each employee required to work means, shall be provided on portable
on stored material in silos, hoppers, dockboards to permit safe handling.

tanks, and similar storage areas shall (4) Positive protection shall be pro-
be equipped with personal fall arrest vided to prevent railroad cars from
224
being moved while dockboards or during sling use, where service condi-
bridge plates are in position. tions warrant. Damaged or defective
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, slings shall be immediately removed
1979, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; from service.
54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 58 FR 35173, June 30, (b) Alloy steel chains. (1) Welded alloy
1993; 59 FR 40729, Aug. 9, 1994; 61 FR 5510, Feb. steel chain slings shall have perma-
13, 1996] nently affixed durable identification
stating size, grade, rated capacity, and
§ 1926.251 Rigging equipment for ma-
terial handling. sling manufacturer.
(2) Hooks, rings, oblong links, pear-
(a) General. (1) Rigging equipment for shaped links, welded or mechanical
material handling shall be inspected
coupling links, or other attachments,
prior to use on each shift and as nec-
when used with alloy steel chains, shall
essary during its use to ensure that it
have a rated capacity at least equal to
is safe. Defective rigging equipment
shall be removed from service. that of the chain.
(2) Employers must ensure that rig- (3) Job or shop hooks and links, or
ging equipment: makeshift fasteners, formed from
(i) Has permanently affixed and leg- bolts, rods, etc., or other such attach-
ible identification markings as pre- ments, shall not be used.
scribed by the manufacturer that indi- (4) Employers must not use alloy
cate the recommended safe working steel-chain slings with loads in excess
load; of the rated capacities (i.e., working
(ii) Not be loaded in excess of its rec- load limits) indicated on the sling by
ommended safe working load as pre- permanently affixed and legible identi-
scribed on the identification markings fication markings prescribed by the
by the manufacturer; and manufacturer.
(iii) Not be used without affixed, leg- (5) Whenever wear at any point of
ible identification markings, required any chain link exceeds that shown in
by paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section. Table H–1, the assembly shall be re-
(3) Rigging equipment, when not in moved from service.
use, shall be removed from the imme- (6) Inspections. (i) In addition to the
diate work area so as not to present a inspection required by other para-
hazard to employees. graphs of this section, a thorough peri-
(4) Special custom design grabs, odic inspection of alloy steel chain
hooks, clamps, or other lifting acces- slings in use shall be made on a regular
sories, for such units as modular pan- basis, to be determined on the basis of
els, prefabricated structures and simi- (A) frequency of sling use; (B) severity
lar materials, shall be marked to indi- of service conditions; (C) nature of lifts
cate the safe working loads and shall
being made; and (D) experience gained
be proof-tested prior to use to 125 per-
on the service life of slings used in
cent of their rated load.
similar circumstances. Such inspec-
(5) Scope. This section applies to
tions shall in no event be at intervals
slings used in conjunction with other
greater than once every 12 months.
material handling equipment for the
movement of material by hoisting, in (ii) The employer shall make and
employments covered by this part. The maintain a record of the most recent
types of slings covered are those made month in which each alloy steel chain
from alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal sling was thoroughly inspected, and
mesh, natural or synthetic fiber rope shall make such record available for
(conventional three strand construc- examination.
tion), and synthetic web (nylon, poly- (c) Wire rope. (1) Employers must not
ester, and polypropylene). use improved plow-steel wire rope and
(6) Inspections. Each day before being wire-rope slings with loads in excess of
used, the sling and all fastenings and the rated capacities (i.e., working load
attachments shall be inspected for limits) indicated on the sling by per-
damage or defects by a competent permanently affixed and legible identifica-

son designated by the employer. Addi- tion markings prescribed by the manu-
tional inspections shall be performed facturer.
225
(2) Protruding ends of strands in (13) Minimum sling lengths. (i) Cable
splices on slings and bridles shall be laid and 6 × 19 and 6 × 37 slings shall
covered or blunted. have a minimum clear length of wire
(3) Wire rope shall not be secured by rope 10 times the component rope di-
knots, except on haul back lines on ameter between splices, sleeves or end
scrapers. fittings.
(4) The following limitations shall (ii) Braided slings shall have a min-
apply to the use of wire rope: imum clear length of wire rope 40 times
(i) An eye splice made in any wire the component rope diameter between
rope shall have not less than three full the loops or end fittings.
tucks. However, this requirement shall (iii) Cable laid grommets, strand laid
not operate to preclude the use of an- grommets and endless slings shall have
other form of splice or connection a minimum circumferential length of
which can be shown to be as efficient 96 times their body diameter.
and which is not otherwise prohibited. (14) Safe operating temperatures. Fiber
(ii) Except for eye splices in the ends core wire rope slings of all grades shall
of wires and for endless rope slings, be permanently removed from service
each wire rope used in hoisting or low- if they are exposed to temperatures in
ering, or in pulling loads, shall consist excess of 200 °F (93.33 °C). When
of one continuous piece without knot nonfiber core wire rope slings of any
or splice. grade are used at temperatures above
(iii) Eyes in wire rope bridles, slings, 400 °F (204.44 °C) or below minus 60 °F
or bull wires shall not be formed by (15.55 °C), recommendations of the sling
wire rope clips or knots. manufacturer regarding use at that
(iv) Wire rope shall not be used if, in temperature shall be followed.
any length of eight diameters, the (15) End attachments. (i) Welding of
total number of visible broken wires end attachments, except covers to
exceeds 10 percent of the total number thimbles, shall be performed prior to
of wires, or if the rope shows other the assembly of the sling.
signs of excessive wear, corrosion, or (ii) All welded end attachments shall
defect. not be used unless proof tested by the
manufacturer or equivalent entity at
(5) When U-bolt wire rope clips are
twice their rated capacity prior to ini-
used to form eyes, Table H–2 shall be
tial use. The employer shall retain a
used to determine the number and
certificate of the proof test, and make
spacing of clips.
it available for examination.
(i) When used for eye splices, the U-
(16) Wire rope slings shall have per-
bolt shall be applied so that the ‘‘U’’
manently affixed, legible identification
section is in contact with the dead end
markings stating size, rated capacity
of the rope.
for the type(s) of hitch(es) used and the
(i1) [Reserved] angle upon which it is based, and the
(6) Slings shall not be shortened with number of legs if more than one.
knots or bolts or other makeshift de- (d) Natural rope, and synthetic fiber. (1)
vices. Employers must not use natural- and
(7) Sling legs shall not be kinked. synthetic-fiber rope slings with loads
(8) Slings used in a basket hitch shall in excess of the rated capacities (i.e.,
have the loads balanced to prevent slip- working load limits) indicated on the
page. sling by permanently affixed and leg-
(9) Slings shall be padded or pro- ible identification markings prescribed
tected from the sharp edges of their by the manufacturer.
loads. (2) All splices in rope slings provided
(10) Hands or fingers shall not be by the employer shall be made in ac-
placed between the sling and its load cordance with fiber rope manufacturers
while the sling is being tightened recommendations.
around the load. (i) In manila rope, eye splices shall
(11) Shock loading is prohibited. contain at least three full tucks, and
(12) A sling shall not be pulled from short splices shall contain at least six
under a load when the load is resting full tucks (three on each side of the
on the sling. centerline of the splice).
226
(ii) In layed synthetic fiber rope, eye rope immediately adjacent to the full
splices shall contain at least four full tucks. This applies to all types of fiber
tucks, and short splices shall contain rope and both eye and short splices.
at least eight full tucks (four on each For fiber rope under 1 inch (2.54 cm) in
side of the centerline of the splice). diameter, the tail shall project at least
(iii) Strand end tails shall not be six rope diameters beyond the last full
trimmed short (flush with the surface tuck. For fiber rope 1 inch (2.54 cm) in
of the rope) immediately adjacent to diameter and larger, the tail shall
the full tucks. This precaution applies project at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) be-
to both eye and short splices and all yond the last full tuck. Where a pro-
types of fiber rope. For fiber ropes jecting tail interferes with the use of
under 1-inch diameter, the tails shall the sling, the tail shall be tapered and
project at least six rope diameters be- spliced into the body of the rope using
yond the last full tuck. For fiber ropes at least two additional tucks (which
1-inch diameter and larger, the tails will require a tail length of approxi-
shall project at least 6 inches beyond mately six rope diameters beyond the
the last full tuck. In applications last full tuck).
where the projecting tails may be ob- (iv) Fiber rope slings shall have a
jectionable, the tails shall be tapered minimum clear length of rope between
and spliced into the body of the rope eye splices equal to 10 times the rope
using at least two additional tucks diameter.
(which will require a tail length of ap- (v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of
proximately six rope diameters beyond splices.
the last full tuck). (vi) Clamps not designed specifically
(iv) For all eye splices, the eye shall for fiber ropes shall not be used for
be sufficiently large to provide an in- splicing.
cluded angle of not greater than 60° at (vii) For all eye splices, the eye shall
the splice when the eye is placed over be of such size to provide an included
the load or support. angle of not greater than 60 degrees at
(v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of the splice when the eye is placed over
splices. the load or support.
(3) Safe operating temperatures. Nat- (5) End attachments. Fiber rope slings
ural and synthetic fiber rope slings, ex- shall not be used if end attachments in
cept for wet frozen slings, may be used contact with the rope have sharp edges
in a temperature range from minus 20 or projections.
°F (¥28.88 °C) to plus 180 °F (82.2 °C) (6) Removal from service. Natural and
without decreasing the working load synthetic fiber rope slings shall be im-
limit. For operations outside this tem- mediately removed from service if any
perature range and for wet frozen of the following conditions are present:
slings, the sling manufacturer’s rec- (i) Abnormal wear.
ommendations shall be followed. (ii) Powdered fiber between strands.
(4) Splicing. Spliced fiber rope slings (iii) Broken or cut fibers.
shall not be used unless they have been (iv) Variations in the size or round-
spliced in accordance with the fol- ness of strands.
lowing minimum requirements and in (v) Discoloration or rotting.
accordance with any additional rec- (vi) Distortion of hardware in the
ommendations of the manufacturer: sling.
(i) In manila rope, eye splices shall (7) Employers must use natural- and
consist of at least three full tucks, and synthetic-fiber rope slings that have
short splices shall consist of at least permanently affixed and legible identi-
six full tucks, three on each side of the fication markings that state the rated
splice center line. capacity for the type(s) of hitch(es)
(ii) In synthetic fiber rope, eye used and the angle upon which it is
splices shall consist of at least four full based, type of fiber material, and the
tucks, and short splices shall consist of number of legs if more than one.
at least eight full tucks, four on each (e) Synthetic webbing (nylon, polyester,
side of the center line. and polypropylene). (1) The employer

(iii) Strand end tails shall not be shall have each synthetic web sling
trimmed flush with the surface of the marked or coded to show:
227
(i) Name or trademark of manufac- ing load limits) indicated on the shack-
turer. le by permanently affixed and legible
(ii) Rated capacities for the type of identification markings prescribed by
hitch. the manufacturer.
(iii) Type of material. (2) The manufacturer’s recommenda-
(2) Rated capacity shall not be ex- tions shall be followed in determining
ceeded. the safe working loads of the various
(3) Webbing. Synthetic webbing shall sizes and types of specific and identifi-
be of uniform thickness and width and able hooks. All hooks for which no ap-
selvage edges shall not be split from plicable manufacturer’s recommenda-
the webbing’s width. tions are available shall be tested to
(4) Fittings. Fittings shall be: twice the intended safe working load
(i) Of a minimum breaking strength before they are initially put into use.
equal to that of the sling; and The employer shall maintain a record
(ii) Free of all sharp edges that could of the dates and results of such tests.
in any way damage the webbing.
(5) Attachment of end fittings to web- TABLE H–1—MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WEAR AT
bing and formation of eyes. Stitching ANY POINT OF LINK
shall be the only method used to at- Maximum
tach end fittings to webbing and to Chain size (inches) allowable
wear (inch)
form eyes. The thread shall be in an
even pattern and contain a sufficient ⁄ .........................................................................
14 ⁄
3 64
number of stitches to develop the full ⁄ .........................................................................

38
12
⁄
5 64
⁄ ......................................................................... ⁄
7 64
breaking strength of the sling. 5⁄8 ......................................................................... 9⁄64
(6) Environmental conditions. When 3⁄4 ......................................................................... 5⁄32
synthetic web slings are used, the fol- 7⁄8 ......................................................................... 11⁄64
lowing precautions shall be taken: 1 ........................................................................... 3⁄16
11⁄8 ....................................................................... 7⁄32

(i) Nylon web slings shall not be used 11⁄4 ....................................................................... 1⁄4
where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or 13⁄8 ....................................................................... 9⁄32
liquids of acids or phenolics are 11⁄2 ....................................................................... 5⁄16
13⁄4 ....................................................................... 11⁄32

present.
(ii) Polyester and polypropylene web
slings shall not be used where fumes, TABLE H–2—NUMBER AND SPACING OF U-BOLT
vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of WIRE ROPE CLIPS
caustics are present. Number of clips Minimum
(iii) Web slings with aluminum fit- Improved plow steel, rope spacing
diameter (inches) Drop Other
tings shall not be used where fumes, forged material (inches)
vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of
⁄ .....................................
12 3 4 3
caustics are present. 58
⁄ ..................................... 3 4 33⁄4
(7) Safe operating temperatures. Syn- ⁄ .....................................
34 4 5 41⁄2
thetic web slings of polyester and 7⁄8 ..................................... 4 5 51⁄4
nylon shall not be used at tempera- 1 ....................................... 5 6 6
tures in excess of 180 °F (82.2 °C). Poly- 11⁄8 ...................................
11⁄4 ...................................
6
6
6
7
63⁄4
7 ⁄2
1
propylene web slings shall not be used 13⁄8 ................................... 7 7 81⁄4
at temperatures in excess of 200 °F 11⁄2 ................................... 7 8 9
(93.33 °C).
(8) Removal from service. Synthetic [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
web slings shall be immediately re- 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993;
moved from service if any of the fol- 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 23118, Apr. 18,
lowing conditions are present: 2012]
(i) Acid or caustic burns;
(ii) Melting or charring of any part of § 1926.252 Disposal of waste materials.
the sling surface; (a) Whenever materials are dropped
(iii) Snags, punctures, tears or cuts; more than 20 feet to any point lying
(iv) Broken or worn stitches; or outside the exterior walls of the build-
(v) Distortion of fittings. ing, an enclosed chute of wood, or
(f) Shackles and hooks. (1) Employers equivalent material, shall be used. For
must not use shackles with loads in ex- the purpose of this paragraph, an en-
cess of the rated capacities (i.e., work- closed chute is a slide, closed in on all
228
sides, through which material is moved (3) Types of guarding. One or more
from a high place to a lower one. methods of machine guarding shall be
(b) When debris is dropped through provided to protect the operator and
holes in the floor without the use of other employees in the machine area
chutes, the area onto which the mate- from hazards such as those created by
rial is dropped shall be completely en- point of operation, ingoing nip points,
closed with barricades not less than 42 rotating parts, flying chips and sparks.
inches high and not less than 6 feet Examples of guarding methods are—
back from the projected edge of the barrier guards, two-hand tripping de-
opening above. Signs warning of the vices, electronic safety devices, etc.
hazard of falling materials shall be (4) Point of operation guarding. (i)
posted at each level. Removal shall not Point of operation is the area on a ma-
be permitted in this lower area until chine where work is actually performed
debris handling ceases above. upon the material being processed.
(c) All scrap lumber, waste material, (ii) The point of operation of ma-
and rubbish shall be removed from the chines whose operation exposes an em-
immediate work area as the work pro- ployee to injury, shall be guarded. The
gresses. guarding device shall be in conformity
(d) Disposal of waste material or de- with any appropriate standards there-
bris by burning shall comply with local for, or, in the absence of applicable spe-
fire regulations. cific standards, shall be so designed
(e) All solvent waste, oily rags, and and constructed as to prevent the oper-
flammable liquids shall be kept in fire ator from having any part of his body
resistant covered containers until rein the danger zone during the operating
moved from worksite. cycle.
(iii) Special handtools for placing and
Subpart I—Tools—Hand and removing material shall be such as to
Power permit easy handling of material with-
out the operator placing a hand in the
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
danger zone. Such tools shall not be in
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 lieu of other guarding required by this
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s section, but can only be used to supple-
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR ment protection provided.
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or (iv) The following are some of the
5–2002 (67 FR 65008), as applicable; and 29 CFR machines which usually require point
part 1911. Section 1926.307 also issued under 5 of operation guarding:
U.S.C. 553.
(a) Guillotine cutters.
§ 1926.300 General requirements. (b) Shears.
(c) Alligator shears.
(a) Condition of tools. All hand and
(d) Power presses.
power tools and similar equipment,
whether furnished by the employer or (e) Milling machines.
the employee, shall be maintained in a (f) Power saws.
safe condition. (g) Jointers.
(b) Guarding. (1) When power operated (h) Portable power tools.
tools are designed to accommodate (i) Forming rolls and calenders.
guards, they shall be equipped with (5) Exposure of blades. When the pe-
such guards when in use. riphery of the blades of a fan is less
(2) Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, than 7 feet (2.128 m) above the floor or
sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels, working level, the blades shall be
chains, or other reciprocating, rotating guarded. The guard shall have openings
or moving parts of equipment shall be no larger than 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm).
guarded if such parts are exposed to (6) Anchoring fixed machinery. Ma-
contact by employees or otherwise cre- chines designed for a fixed location
ate a hazard. Guarding shall meet the shall be securely anchored to prevent
requirements as set forth in American walking or moving.
National Standards Institute, B15.1– (7) Guarding of abrasive wheel machin-

1953 (R1958), Safety Code for Mechan- ery—exposure adjustment. Safety guards
ical Power-Transmission Apparatus. of the types described in paragraphs (b)
229
(8) and (9) of this section, where the op- shall begin at a point not more than 65°
erator stands in front of the opening, above the horizontal plane of the wheel
shall be constructed so that the periph- spindle. (See Figures I–7 and I–8 and
eral protecting member can be ad- paragraph (b)(7) of this section.)
justed to the constantly decreasing di-
ameter of the wheel. The maximum an-
gular exposure above the horizontal
plane of the wheel spindle as specified
in paragraphs (b) (8) and (9) of this sec-
tion shall never be exceeded, and the
distance between the wheel periphery
and the adjustable tongue or the end of
the peripheral member at the top shall
never exceed 1⁄4 inch (0.635 cm). (See Figure I–7 Figure I–8
Figures I–1 through I–6.) Wherever the nature of the work requires
contact with the wheel below the hori-
zontal plane of the spindle, the exposure
shall not exceed 125° (See Figures I–9 and
I–10.)
Figure I–1 Figure I–2

Correct
Showing adjustable tongue giving required
angle protection for all sizes of wheel
used. Figure I–9 Figure I–10
(9) Cylindrical grinders. The maximum
angular exposure of the grinding wheel
periphery and sides for safety guards
used on cylindrical grinding machines
shall not exceed 180°. This exposure
shall begin at a point not more than 65°
Figure I–3 Figure I–4
above the horizontal plane of the wheel
ER07MR96.005</GPH>
spindle. (See Figures I–11 and I–12 and
Correct
paragraph (b)(7) of this section.)
Showing movable guard with opening small
enough to give required protection for
the smallest size wheel used.
ER07MR96.004</GPH>
Figure I–11 Figure I–12 ER07MR96.003</GPH>
(c) Personal protective equipment. Em-

Figure I–5 Figure I–6 ployees using hand and power tools and
Incorrect exposed to the hazard of falling, flying,
Showing movable guard with size of opening abrasive, and splashing objects, or ex-
correct for full size wheel but too large posed to harmful dusts, fumes, mists,
ER07MR96.002</GPH>
for smaller wheel. vapors, or gases shall be provided with

(8) Bench and floor stands. The angu- the particular personal protective
lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe- equipment necessary to protect them
riphery and sides for safety guards used from the hazard. All personal protec-
on machines known as bench and floor tive equipment shall meet the require-
ER07MR96.001</GPH>
stands should not exceed 90° or one- ments and be maintained according to
fourth of the periphery. This exposure subparts D and E of this part.
230
ER07MR96.000</GPH>
(d) Switches. (1) All hand-held pow- (2) The use of electric cords for hoist-
ered platen sanders, grinders with ing or lowering tools shall not be per-
wheels 2-inch diameter or less, routers, mitted.
planers, laminate trimmers, nibblers, (b) Pneumatic power tools. (1) Pneu-
shears, scroll saws, and jigsaws with matic power tools shall be secured to
blade shanks one-fourth of an inch the hose or whip by some positive
wide or less may be equipped with only means to prevent the tool from becom-
a positive ‘‘on-off’’ control. ing accidentally disconnected.
(2) All hand-held powered drills, tap- (2) Safety clips or retainers shall be
pers, fastener drivers, horizontal, securely installed and maintained on
vertical, and angle grinders with pneumatic impact (percussion) tools to
wheels greater than 2 inches in diame- prevent attachments from being acci-
ter, disc sanders, belt sanders, recipro- dentally expelled.
cating saws, saber saws, and other
(3) All pneumatically driven nailers,
similar operating powered tools shall
be equipped with a momentary contact staplers, and other similar equipment
‘‘on-off’’ control and may have a lock- provided with automatic fastener feed,
on control provided that turnoff can be which operate at more than 100 p.s.i.
accomplished by a single motion of the pressure at the tool shall have a safety
same finger or fingers that turn it on. device on the muzzle to prevent the
(3) All other hand-held powered tools, tool from ejecting fasteners, unless the
such as circular saws, chain saws, and muzzle is in contact with the work sur-
percussion tools without positive ac- face.
cessory holding means, shall be (4) Compressed air shall not be used
equipped with a constant pressure for cleaning purposes except where re-
switch that will shut off the power duced to less than 30 p.s.i. and then
when the pressure is released. only with effective chip guarding and
(4) The requirements of this para- personal protective equipment which
graph shall become effective on July meets the requirements of subpart E of
15, 1972. this part. The 30 p.s.i. requirement does
(5) Exception: This paragraph does not apply for concrete form, mill scale
not apply to concrete vibrators, con- and similar cleaning purposes.
crete breakers, powered tampers, jack (5) The manufacturer’s safe operating
hammers, rock drills, and similar hand pressure for hoses, pipes, valves, filters,
operated power tools. and other fittings shall not be exceed-
ed,
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993; (6) The use of hoses for hoisting or
61 FR 9250, Mar. 7, 1996] lowering tools shall not be permitted.
(7) All hoses exceeding 1⁄2-inch inside
§ 1926.301 Hand tools. diameter shall have a safety device at
(a) Employers shall not issue or per- the source of supply or branch line to
mit the use of unsafe hand tools. reduce pressure in case of hose failure.
(b) Wrenches, including adjustable, (8) Airless spray guns of the type
pipe, end, and socket wrenches shall which atomize paints and fluids at high
not be used when jaws are sprung to pressures (1,000 pounds or more per
the point that slippage occurs. square inch) shall be equipped with
(c) Impact tools, such as drift pins, automatic or visible manual safety de-
wedges, and chisels, shall be kept free vices which will prevent pulling of the
of mushroomed heads. trigger to prevent release of the paint
(d) The wooden handles of tools shall or fluid until the safety device is
be kept free of splinters or cracks and manually released.
shall be kept tight in the tool. (9) In lieu of the above, a diffuser nut
which will prevent high pressure, high
§ 1926.302 Power-operated hand tools. velocity release, while the nozzle tip is
(a) Electric power-operated tools. (1) removed, plus a nozzle tip guard which
Electric power operated tools shall ei- will prevent the tip from coming into
ther be of the approved double-insu- contact with the operator, or other

lated type or grounded in accordance equivalent protection, shall be pro-
with subpart K of this part. vided.
231
(10) Abrasive blast cleaning nozzles. ing, but not limited to, cast iron,
The blast cleaning nozzles shall be glazed tile, surface-hardened steel,
equipped with an operating valve which glass block, live rock, face brick, or
must be held open manually. A support hollow tile.
shall be provided on which the nozzle (8) Driving into materials easily pen-
may be mounted when it is not in use. etrated shall be avoided unless such
(c) Fuel powered tools. (1) All fuel pow- materials are backed by a substance
ered tools shall be stopped while being that will prevent the pin or fastener
refueled, serviced, or maintained, and from passing completely through and
fuel shall be transported, handled, and creating a flying missile hazard on the
stored in accordance with subpart F of other side.
this part. (9) No fastener shall be driven into a
(2) When fuel powered tools are used spalled area caused by an unsatisfac-
in enclosed spaces, the applicable re- tory fastening.
quirements for concentrations of toxic (10) Tools shall not be used in an ex-
gases and use of personal protective plosive or flammable atmosphere.
equipment, as outlined in subparts D (11) All tools shall be used with the
and E of this part, shall apply. correct shield, guard, or attachment
(d) Hydraulic power tools. (1) The fluid recommended by the manufacturer.
used in hydraulic powered tools shall (12) Powder-actuated tools used by
be fire-resistant fluids approved under employees shall meet all other applica-
Schedule 30 of the U.S. Bureau of ble requirements of American National
Mines, Department of the Interior, and Standards Institute, A10.3–1970, Safety
shall retain its operating characteris- Requirements for Explosive-Actuated
tics at the most extreme temperatures Fastening Tools.
to which it will be exposed.
(2) The manufacturer’s safe operating [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
pressures for hoses, valves, pipes, fil- 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993]
ters, and other fittings shall not be ex-
§ 1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools.
ceeded.
(e) Powder-actuated tools. (1) Only em- (a) Power. All grinding machines
ployees who have been trained in the shall be supplied with sufficient power
operation of the particular tool in use to maintain the spindle speed at safe
shall be allowed to operate a powder- levels under all conditions of normal
actuated tool. operation.
(2) The tool shall be tested each day (b) Guarding. (1) Grinding machines
before loading to see that safety de- shall be equipped with safety guards in
vices are in proper working condition. conformance with the requirements of
The method of testing shall be in ac- American National Standards Insti-
cordance with the manufacturer’s rec- tute, B7.1–1970, Safety Code for the Use,
ommended procedure. Care and Protection of Abrasive
(3) Any tool found not in proper Wheels, and paragraph (d) of this sec-
working order, or that develops a de- tion.
fect during use, shall be immediately (2) Guard design. The safety guard
removed from service and not used shall cover the spindle end, nut, and
until properly repaired. flange projections. The safety guard
(4) Personal protective equipment shall be mounted so as to maintain
shall be in accordance with subpart E proper alignment with the wheel, and
of this part. the strength of the fastenings shall ex-
(5) Tools shall not be loaded until ceed the strength of the guard, except:
just prior to the intended firing time. (i) Safety guards on all operations
Neither loaded nor empty tools are to where the work provides a suitable
be pointed at any employees. Hands measure of protection to the operator,
shall be kept clear of the open barrel may be so constructed that the spindle
end. end, nut, and outer flange are exposed;
(6) Loaded tools shall not be left un- and where the nature of the work is
attended. such as to entirely cover the side of the

(7) Fasteners shall not be driven into wheel, the side covers of the guard may
very hard or brittle materials includ- be omitted; and
232
(ii) The spindle end, nut, and outer and the guard and its fastenings shall
flange may be exposed on machines de- be of sufficient strength to retain frag-
signed as portable saws. ments of the wheel in case of acci-
(c) Use of abrasive wheels. (1) Floor dental breakage. The maximum angu-
stand and bench mounted abrasive lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe-
wheels, used for external grinding, riphery and sides shall not exceed 180°.
shall be provided with safety guards (6) When safety flanges are required,
(protection hoods). The maximum an- they shall be used only with wheels de-
gular exposure of the grinding wheel signed to fit the flanges. Only safety
periphery and sides shall be not more flanges, of a type and design and prop-
than 90°, except that when work re- erly assembled so as to ensure that the
quires contact with the wheel below pieces of the wheel will be retained in
the horizontal plane of the spindle, the case of accidental breakage, shall be
angular exposure shall not exceed 125°. used.
In either case, the exposure shall begin (7) All abrasive wheels shall be close-
not more than 65° above the horizontal ly inspected and ring-tested before
plane of the spindle. Safety guards mounting to ensure that they are free
shall be strong enough to withstand from cracks or defects.
the effect of a bursting wheel. (8) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on
(2) Floor and bench-mounted grinders the spindle and shall not be forced on.
shall be provided with work rests The spindle nut shall be tightened only
which are rigidly supported and readily enough to hold the wheel in place.
adjustable. Such work rests shall be (9) All employees using abrasive
kept at a distance not to exceed one- wheels shall be protected by eye pro-
eighth inch from the surface of the tection equipment in accordance with
wheel. the requirements of subpart E of this
(3) Cup type wheels used for external part, except when adequate eye protec-
grinding shall be protected by either a tion is afforded by eye shields which
revolving cup guard or a band type are permanently attached to the bench
guard in accordance with the provi- or floor stand.
sions of the American National Stand- (d) Other requirements. All abrasive
ards Institute, B7.1–1970 Safety Code wheels and tools used by employees
for the Use, Care, and Protection of Ab- shall meet other applicable require-
rasive Wheels. All other portable abra- ments of American National Standards
sive wheels used for external grinding, Institute, B7.1–1970, Safety Code for the
shall be provided with safety guards Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive
(protection hoods) meeting the require- Wheels.
ments of paragraph (c)(5) of this sec- (e) Work rests. On offhand grinding
tion, except as follows: machines, work rests shall be used to
(i) When the work location makes it support the work. They shall be of
impossible, a wheel equipped with safe- rigid construction and designed to be
ty flanges, as described in paragraph adjustable to compensate for wheel
(c)(6) of this section, shall be used; wear. Work rests shall be kept adjusted
(ii) When wheels 2 inches or less in closely to the wheel with a maximum
diameter which are securely mounted opening of 1⁄8 inch (0.3175 cm) to pre-
on the end of a steel mandrel are used. vent the work from being jammed be-
(4) Portable abrasive wheels used for tween the wheel and the rest, which
internal grinding shall be provided may cause wheel breakage. The work
with safety flanges (protection flanges) rest shall be securely clamped after
meeting the requirements of paragraph each adjustment. The adjustment shall
(c)(6) of this section, except as follows: not be made with the wheel in motion.
(i) When wheels 2 inches or less in di-
ameter which are securely mounted on [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
the end of a steel mandrel are used; 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993]
(ii) If the wheel is entirely within the
work being ground while in use. § 1926.304 Woodworking tools.
(5) When safety guards are required, (a) Disconnect switches. All fixed
they shall be so mounted as to main- power driven woodworking tools shall
tain proper alignment with the wheel, be provided with a disconnect switch
233
that can either be locked or tagged in the stock and remain in contact with
the off position. stock being cut to give maximum pro-
(b) Speeds. The operating speed shall tection possible for the operation being
be etched or otherwise permanently performed.
marked on all circular saws over 20 (h) Hand-fed crosscut table saws. (1)
inches in diameter or operating at over Each circular crosscut table saw shall
10,000 peripheral feet per minute. Any be guarded by a hood which shall meet
saw so marked shall not be operated at all the requirements of paragraph (i)(1)
a speed other than that marked on the of this section for hoods for circular
blade. When a marked saw is reten- ripsaws.
sioned for a different speed, the mark- (i) Hand-fed ripsaws. (1) Each circular
ing shall be corrected to show the new hand-fed ripsaw shall be guarded by a
speed. hood which shall completely enclose
(c) Self-feed. Automatic feeding de- that portion of the saw above the table
vices shall be installed on machines and that portion of the saw above the
whenever the nature of the work will material being cut. The hood and
permit. Feeder attachments shall have mounting shall be arranged so that the
the feed rolls or other moving parts hood will automatically adjust itself to
covered or guarded so as to protect the the thickness of and remain in contact
operator from hazardous points. with the material being cut but it shall
(d) Guarding. All portable, power- not offer any considerable resistance to
driven circular saws shall be equipped insertion of material to saw or to pas-
with guards above and below the base sage of the material being sawed. The
plate or shoe. The upper guard shall hood shall be made of adequate
cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, strength to resist blows and strains in-
except for the minimum arc required cidental to reasonable operation, ad-
to permit the base to be tilted for bevel justing, and handling, and shall be so
cuts. The lower guard shall cover the designed as to protect the operator
saw to the depth of the teeth, except from flying splinters and broken saw
for the minimum arc required to allow teeth. It shall be made of material that
proper retraction and contact with the is soft enough so that it will be un-
work. When the tool is withdrawn from likely to cause tooth breakage. The
the work, the lower guard shall auto- hood shall be so mounted as to insure
matically and instantly return to the that its operation will be positive, reli-
covering position. able, and in true alignment with the
(e) Personal protective equipment. All saw; and the mounting shall be ade-
personal protective equipment pro- quate in strength to resist any reason-
vided for use shall conform to subpart able side thrust or other force tending
E of this part. to throw it out of line.
(f) Other requirements. All wood- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
working tools and machinery shall 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993;
meet other applicable requirements of 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, 1996]
American National Standards Insti-
tute, 01.1–1961, Safety Code for Wood- § 1926.305 Jacks—lever and ratchet,
working Machinery. screw, and hydraulic.
(g) Radial saws. (1) The upper hood (a) General requirements. (1) The man-
shall completely enclose the upper por- ufacturer’s rated capacity shall be leg-
tion of the blade down to a point that ibly marked on all jacks and shall not
will include the end of the saw arbor. be exceeded.
The upper hood shall be constructed in (2) All jacks shall have a positive
such a manner and of such material stop to prevent overtravel.
that it will protect the operator from (b) [Reserved]
flying splinters, broken saw teeth, etc., (c) Blocking. When it is necessary to
and will deflect sawdust away from the provide a firm foundation, the base of
operator. The sides of the lower ex- the jack shall be blocked or cribbed.
posed portion of the blade shall be Where there is a possibility of slippage
guarded to the full diameter of the of the metal cap of the jack, a wood
blade by a device that will automati- block shall be placed between the cap
cally adjust itself to the thickness of and the load.
234
(d)(1) Operation and maintenance. (i) and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII
After the load has been raised, it shall Edition 1968.
be cribbed, blocked, or otherwise se- (b) Installation and equipment require-
cured at once. ments—(1) Installation. Air receivers
(ii) Hydraulic jacks exposed to freez- shall be so installed that all drains,
ing temperatures shall be supplied with handholes, and manholes therein are
an adequate antifreeze liquid. easily accessible. Under no cir-
(iii) All jacks shall be properly lubri- cumstances shall an air receiver be
cated at regular intervals. buried underground or located in an in-
(iv) Each jack shall be thoroughly inaccessible place.
spected at times which depend upon (2) Drains and traps. A drain pipe and
the service conditions. Inspections valve shall be installed at the lowest
shall be not less frequent than the fol- point of every air receiver to provide
lowing: for the removal of accumulated oil and
(a) For constant or intermittent use water. Adequate automatic traps may
at one locality, once every 6 months, be installed in addition to drain valves.
(b) For jacks sent out of shop for spe- The drain valve on the air receiver
cial work, when sent out and when re- shall be opened and the receiver com-
turned, pletely drained frequently and at such
(c) For a jack subjected to abnormal intervals as to prevent the accumula-
load or shock, immediately before and tion of excessive amounts of liquid in
immediately thereafter. the receiver.
(v) Repair or replacement parts shall (3) Gages and valves. (i) Every air re-
be examined for possible defects. ceiver shall be equipped with an indi-
(vi) Jacks which are out of order cating pressure gage (so located as to
shall be tagged accordingly, and shall be readily visible) and with one or
not be used until repairs are made. more spring-loaded safety valves. The
total relieving capacity of such safety
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990;
valves shall be such as to prevent pres-
58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993] sure in the receiver from exceeding the
maximum allowable working pressure
§ 1926.306 Air receivers. of the receiver by more than 10 per-
(a) General requirements—(1) Applica- cent.
tion. This section applies to compressed (ii) No valve of any type shall be
air receivers, and other equipment used placed between the air receiver and its
in providing and utilizing compressed safety valve or valves.
air for performing operations such as (iii) Safety appliances, such as safety
cleaning, drilling, hoisting, and chip- valves, indicating devices and control-
ping. On the other hand, however, this ling devices, shall be constructed, lo-
section does not deal with the special cated, and installed so that they can-
problems created by using compressed not be readily rendered inoperative by
air to convey materials nor the prob- any means, including the elements.
lems created when men work in com- (iv) All safety valves shall be tested
pressed air as in tunnels and caissons. frequently and at regular intervals to
This section is not intended to apply to determine whether they are in good op-
compressed air machinery and equip- erating condition.
ment used on transportation vehicles [58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993]
such as steam railroad cars, electric
railway cars, and automotive equip- § 1926.307 Mechanical power-trans-
ment. mission apparatus.
(2) New and existing equipment. (i) All (a) General requirements. (1) This sec-
new air receivers installed after the ef- tion covers all types and shapes of
fective date of these regulations shall power-transmission belts, except the
be constructed in accordance with the following when operating at two hun-
1968 edition of the A.S.M.E. Boiler and dred and fifty (250) feet per minute or
Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII. less: (i) Flat belts 1 inch (2.54 cm) or
(ii) All safety valves used shall be less in width, (ii) flat belts 2 inches
constructed, installed, and maintained (5.08 cm) or less in width which are free
in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler from metal lacings or fasteners, (iii)
235
round belts 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) or less in facilitate turning the wheel over.
diameter; and (iv) single strand V- Where a disk is used, the keys or other
belts, the width of which is thirteen dangerous projections not covered by
thirty-seconds (13⁄32) inch or less. disk shall be cut off or covered. This
(2) Vertical and inclined belts (para- subdivision does not apply to flywheels
graphs (e) (3) and (4) of this section) if with solid web centers.
not more than 21⁄2 inches (6.35 cm) wide (v) Adjustable guard to be used for
and running at a speed of less than one starting engine or for running adjust-
thousand (1,000) feet per minute, and if ment may be provided at the flywheel
free from metal lacings or fastenings of gas or oil engines. A slot opening for
may be guarded with a nip-point belt jack bar will be permitted.
and pulley guard. (vi) Wherever flywheels are above
(3) For the Textile Industry, because working areas, guards shall be in-
of the presence of excessive deposits of stalled having sufficient strength to
lint, which constitute a serious fire hold the weight of the flywheel in the
hazard, the sides and face sections only event of a shaft or wheel mounting fail-
of nip-point belt and pulley guards are ure.
required, provided the guard shall ex- (2) Cranks and connecting rods. Cranks
tend at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) beyond and connecting rods, when exposed to
the rim of the pulley on the in-running contact, shall be guarded in accordance
and off-running sides of the belt and at with paragraphs (m) and (n) of this sec-
least 2 inches (5.08 cm) away from the tion, or by a guardrail as described in
rim and face of the pulley in all other paragraph (o)(5) of this section.
directions. (3) Tail rods or extension piston rods.
(4) This section covers the principal Tail rods or extension piston rods shall
features with which power trans- be guarded in accordance with para-
mission safeguards shall comply. graphs (m) and (o) of this section, or by
(b) Prime-mover guards—(1) Flywheels. a guardrail on sides and end, with a
Flywheels located so that any part is 7 clearance of not less than 15 (38.1 cm)
feet (2.128 m) or less above floor or nor more than 20 inches (50.8 cm) when
platform shall be guarded in accord- rod is fully extended.
ance with the requirements of this sub- (c) Shafting—(1) Installation. (i) Each
paragraph: continuous line of shafting shall be se-
(i) With an enclosure of sheet, per- cured in position against excessive end-
forated, or expanded metal, or woven wise movement.
wire; (ii) Inclined and vertical shafts, par-
(ii) With guard rails placed not less ticularly inclined idler shafts, shall be
than 15 inches (38.1 cm) nor more than securely held in position against end-
20 inches (50.8 cm) from rim. When wise thrust.
flywheel extends into pit or is within 12 (2) Guarding horizontal shafting. (i) All
inches (30.48 cm) of floor, a standard exposed parts of horizontal shafting 7
toeboard shall also be provided; feet (2.128 m) or less from floor or
(iii) When the upper rim of flywheel working platform, excepting runways
protrudes through a working floor, it used exclusively for oiling, or running
shall be entirely enclosed or sur- adjustments, shall be protected by a
rounded by a guardrail and toeboard. stationary casing enclosing shafting
(iv) For flywheels with smooth rims 5 completely or by a trough enclosing
feet (1.52 m) or less in diameter, where sides and top or sides and bottom of
the preceding methods cannot be ap- shafting as location requires.
plied, the following may be used: A (ii) Shafting under bench machines
disk attached to the flywheel in such shall be enclosed by a stationary cas-
manner as to cover the spokes of the ing, or by a trough at sides and top or
wheel on the exposed side and present a sides and bottom, as location requires.
smooth surface and edge, at the same The sides of the trough shall come
time providing means for periodic in- within at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) of
spection. An open space, not exceeding the underside of table, or if shafting is
4 inches (10.16 cm) in width, may be left located near floor within 6 inches (15.24
between the outside edge of the disk cm) of floor. In every case the sides of
and the rim of the wheel if desired, to trough shall extend at least 2 inches
236
(5.08 cm) beyond the shafting or protu- the belt used, a guide shall be provided
berance. to prevent the belt from leaving the
(3) Guarding vertical and inclined pulley on the side where insufficient
shafting. Vertical and inclined shafting clearance exists.
7 feet (2.128 m) or less from floor or (ii) [Reserved]
working platform, excepting mainte- (3) Broken pulleys. Pulleys with
nance runways, shall be enclosed with cracks, or pieces broken out of rims,
a stationary casing in accordance with shall not be used.
requirements of paragraphs (m) and (o) (4) Pulley speeds. Pulleys intended to
of this section. operate at rim speed in excess of manu-
(4) Projecting shaft ends. (i) Projecting facturers normal recommendations
shaft ends shall present a smooth edge shall be specially designed and care-
and end and shall not project more fully balanced for the speed at which
than one-half the diameter of the shaft they are to operate.
unless guarded by nonrotating caps or (e) Belt, rope, and chain drives—(1)
safety sleeves. Horizontal belts and ropes. (i) Where
(ii) Unused keyways shall be filled up both runs of horizontal belts are 7 feet
or covered. (2.128 m) or less from the floor level,
(5) Power-transmission apparatus lo- the guard shall extend to at least 15
cated in basements. All mechanical inches (38.1 cm) above the belt or to a
power transmission apparatus located standard height except that where both
in basements, towers, and rooms used runs of a horizontal belt are 42 inches
exclusively for power transmission (106.68 cm) or less from the floor, the
equipment shall be guarded in accord- belt shall be fully enclosed.
ance with this section, except that the (ii) In powerplants or power-develop-
requirements for safeguarding belts, ment rooms, a guardrail may be used
pulleys, and shafting need not be com- in lieu of the guard required by para-
plied with when the following require- graph (e)(1)(i) of this section.
ments are met:
(2) Overhead horizontal belts. (i) Over-
(i) The basement, tower, or room oc-
head horizontal belts, with lower parts
cupied by transmission equipment is
7 feet (2.128 m) or less from the floor or
locked against unauthorized entrance.
platform, shall be guarded on sides and
(ii) The vertical clearance in passage-
bottom in accordance with paragraph
ways between the floor and power
(o)(3) of this section.
transmission beams, ceiling, or any
(ii) Horizontal overhead belts more
other objects, is not less than 5 ft. 6 in.
than 7 feet (2.128 m) above floor or plat-
(1.672 m).
form shall be guarded for their entire
(iii) The intensity of illumination
length under the following conditions:
conforms to the requirements of ANSI
A11.1–1965 (R–1970). (a) If located over passageways or
(iv) [Reserved] work places and traveling 1,800 feet or
(v) The route followed by the oiler is more per minute.
protected in such manner as to prevent (b) If center to center distance be-
accident. tween pulleys is 10 feet (3.04 m) or
(d) Pulleys—(1) Guarding. Pulleys, any more.
parts of which are 7 feet (2.128 m) or (c) If belt is 8 inches (20.32 cm) or
less from the floor or working plat- more in width.
form, shall be guarded in accordance (iii) Where the upper and lower runs
with the standards specified in para- of horizontal belts are so located that
graphs (m) and (o) of this section. Pul- passage of persons between them would
leys serving as balance wheels (e.g., be possible, the passage shall be either:
punch presses) on which the point of (a) Completely barred by a guardrail
contact between belt and pulley is or other barrier in accordance with
more than 6 ft. 6 in. (1.976 m) from the paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section;
floor or platform may be guarded with or
a disk covering the spokes. (b) Where passage is regarded as nec-
(2) Location of pulleys. (i) Unless the essary, there shall be a platform over
distance to the nearest fixed pulley, the lower run guarded on either side by
clutch, or hanger exceeds the width of a railing completely filled in with wire
237
mesh or other filler, or by a solid bar- parts thereof shall be of substantial

rier. The upper run shall be so guarded construction and securely fastened; the
as to prevent contact therewith either bearings shall be securely capped.
by the worker or by objects carried by Means must be provided to prevent
him. In powerplants only the lower run tightener from falling, in case the belt
of the belt need be guarded. breaks.
(iv) Overhead chain and link belt (ii) Where suspended counterweights
drives are governed by the same rules are used and not guarded by location,
as overhead horizontal belts and shall they shall be so encased as to prevent
be guarded in the same manner as accident.
belts. (f) Gears, sprockets, and chains—(1)
(3) Vertical and inclined belts. (i) Gears. Gears shall be guarded in accord-
Vertical and inclined belts shall be en- ance with one of the following meth-
closed by a guard conforming to stand- ods:
ards in paragraphs (m) and (o) of this (i) By a complete enclosure; or
section. (ii) By a standard guard as described
(ii) All guards for inclined belts shall in paragraph (o) of this section, at
be arranged in such a manner that a least 7 feet (2.128 m) high extending 6
minimum clearance of 7 feet (2.128 m) inches (15.24 cm) above the mesh point
is maintained between belt and floor at of the gears; or
any point outside of guard. (iii) By a band guard covering the
(4) Vertical belts. Vertical belts run- face of gear and having flanges ex-
ning over a lower pulley more than 7 tended inward beyond the root of the
feet (2.128 m) above floor or platform teeth on the exposed side or sides.
shall be guarded at the bottom in the Where any portion of the train of gears
same manner as horizontal overhead guarded by a band guard is less than 6
belts, if conditions are as stated in feet (1.824 m) from the floor a disk
paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) (a) and (c) of this guard or a complete enclosure to the
section. height of 6 feet (1.824 m) shall be re-
(5) Cone-pulley belts. (i) The cone belt quired.
and pulley shall be equipped with a belt (2) Hand-operated gears. Paragraph
shifter so constructed as to adequately (f)(1) of this section does not apply to
guard the nip point of the belt and pul- hand-operated gears used only to ad-
ley. If the frame of the belt shifter does just machine parts and which do not
not adequately guard the nip point of continue to move after hand power is
the belt and pulley, the nip point shall removed. However, the guarding of
be further protected by means of a these gears is highly recommended.
vertical guard placed in front of the (3) Sprockets and chains. All sprocket
pulley and extending at least to the top wheels and chains shall be enclosed un-
of the largest step of the cone. less they are more than 7 feet (2.128 m)
(ii) If the belt is of the endless type above the floor or platform. Where the
or laced with rawhide laces, and a belt drive extends over other machine or
shifter is not desired, the belt will be working areas, protection against fall-
considered guarded if the nip point of ing shall be provided. This subpara-
the belt and pulley is protected by a graph does not apply to manually oper-
nip point guard located in front of the ated sprockets.
cone extending at least to the top of (4) Openings for oiling. When frequent
the largest step of the cone, and formed oiling must be done, openings with
to show the contour of the cone in hinged or sliding self-closing covers
order to give the nip point of the belt shall be provided. All points not read-
and pulley the maximum protection. ily accessible shall have oil feed tubes
(iii) If the cone is located less than 3 if lubricant is to be added while ma-
feet (0.912 m) from the floor or working chinery is in motion.
platform, the cone pulley and belt shall (g) Guarding friction drives. The driv-
be guarded to a height of 3 feet (0.912 ing point of all friction drives when ex-
m) regardless of whether the belt is posed to contact shall be guarded, all
endless or laced with rawhide. arm or spoke friction drives and all
(6) Belt tighteners. (i) Suspended web friction drives with holes in the
counterbalanced tighteners and all web shall be entirely enclosed, and all
238
projecting belts on friction drives a permanent belt shifter provided with

where exposed to contact shall be mechanical means to prevent belt from
guarded. creeping from loose to tight pulley. It
(h) Keys, setscrews, and other projec- is recommended that old installations
tions. (1) All projecting keys, setscrews, be changed to conform to this rule.
and other projections in revolving (ii) Belt shifter and clutch handles
parts shall be removed or made flush or shall be rounded and be located as far
guarded by metal cover. This subpara- as possible from danger of accidental
graph does not apply to keys or contact, but within easy reach of the
setscrews within gear or sprocket cas- operator. Where belt shifters are not
ings or other enclosures, nor to keys, directly located over a machine or
setscrews, or oilcups in hubs of pulleys bench, the handles shall be cut off 6 ft.
less than 20 inches (50.8 cm) in diame- 6 in. (1.976 m) above floor level.
ter where they are within the plane of (2) Belt shippers and shipper poles. The
the rim of the pulley. use of belt poles as substitutes for me-
(2) It is recommended, however, that chanical shifters is not recommended.
no projecting setscrews or oilcups be (3) Belt perches. Where loose pulleys
used in any revolving pulley or part of or idlers are not practicable, belt
machinery. perches in form of brackets, rollers,
(i) Collars and couplings—(1) Collars. etc., shall be used to keep idle belts
All revolving collars, including split away from the shafts.
collars, shall be cylindrical, and screws (4) Belt fasteners. Belts which of ne-
or bolts used in collars shall not cessity must be shifted by hand and
project beyond the largest periphery of belts within 7 feet (2.128 m) of the floor
the collar. or working platform which are not
(2) Couplings. Shaft couplings shall be guarded in accordance with this sec-
so constructed as to present no hazard tion shall not be fastened with metal in
from bolts, nuts, setscrews, or revolv- any case, nor with any other fastening
ing surfaces. Bolts, nuts, and setscrews which by construction or wear will
will, however, be permitted where they constitute an accident hazard.
are covered with safety sleeves or
(m) Standard guards—general require-
where they are used parallel with the
ments—(1) Materials. (i) Standard condi-
shafting and are countersunk or else do
tions shall be secured by the use of the
not extend beyond the flange of the
following materials. Expanded metal,
coupling.
perforated or solid sheet metal, wire
(j) Bearings and facilities for oiling. All
mesh on a frame of angle iron, or iron
drip cups and pans shall be securely
pipe securely fastened to floor or to
fastened.
frame of machine.
(k) Guarding of clutches, cutoff cou-
(ii) All metal should be free from
plings, and clutch pulleys—(1) Guards.
burrs and sharp edges.
Clutches, cutoff couplings, or clutch
pulleys having projecting parts, where (2) Methods of manufacture. (i) Ex-
such clutches are located 7 feet (2.128 panded metal, sheet or perforated
m) or less above the floor or working metal, and wire mesh shall be securely
platform, shall be enclosed by a sta- fastened to frame.
tionary guard constructed in accord- (n) [Reserved]
ance with this section. A ‘‘U’’ type (o) Approved materials—(1) Minimum
guard is permissible. requirements. The materials and dimen-
(2) Engine rooms. In engine rooms a sions specified in this paragraph shall
guardrail, preferably with toeboard, apply to all guards, except horizontal
may be used instead of the guard re- overhead belts, rope, cable, or chain
quired by paragraph (k)(1) of this sec- guards more than 7 feet (2.128 m) above
tion, provided such a room is occupied floor, or platform.
only by engine room attendants. (i) [Reserved]
(l) Belt shifters, clutches, shippers, (a) All guards shall be rigidly braced
poles, perches, and fasteners—(1) Belt every 3 feet (0.912 m) or fractional part
shifters. (i) Tight and loose pulleys on of their height to some fixed part of
all new installations made on or after machinery or building structure.
August 31, 1971, shall be equipped with Where guard is exposed to contact with
239
moving equipment additional strength chain-drive guard construction shall

may be necessary. conform to the rules for overhead-belt
(2) Wood guards. (i) Wood guards may guard.
be used in the woodworking and chem- (5) Guardrails and toeboards. (i) Guard-
ical industries, in industries where the rail shall be 42 inches (106.68 cm) in
presence of fumes or where manufac- height, with midrail between top rail
turing conditions would cause the and floor.
rapid deterioration of metal guards; (ii) Posts shall be not more than 8
also in construction work and in loca- feet (2.432 m) apart; they are to be per-
tions outdoors where extreme cold or manent and substantial, smooth, and
extreme heat make metal guards and free from protruding nails, bolts, and
railings undesirable. In all other indus- splinters. If made of pipe, the post shall
tries, wood guards shall not be used. be 11⁄4 inches (3.175 cm) inside diameter,
(3) Guards for horizontal overhead or larger. If made of metal shapes or
belts. (i) Guards for horizontal overhead
bars, their section shall be equal in
belts shall run the entire length of the
strength to that of 11⁄2 (3.81 cm) by 11⁄2
belt and follow the line of the pulley to
(3.81 cm) by 3⁄16 inch angle iron. If made
the ceiling or be carried to the nearest
of wood, the posts shall be two by four
wall, thus enclosing the belt effec-
(2 × 4) inches or larger. The upper rail
tively. Where belts are so located as to
make it impracticable to carry the shall be two by four (2 × 4) inches, or
guard to wall or ceiling, construction two one by four (1 × 4) strips, one at the
of guard shall be such as to enclose top and one at the side of posts. The
completely the top and bottom runs of midrail may be one by four (1 × 4)
belt and the face of pulleys. inches or more. Where panels are fitted
(ii) [Reserved] with expanded metal or wire mesh the
(iii) Suitable reinforcement shall be middle rails may be omitted. Where
provided for the ceiling rafters or over- guard is exposed to contact with mov-
head floor beams, where such is nec- ing equipment, additional strength
essary, to sustain safely the weight and may be necessary.
stress likely to be imposed by the (iii) Toeboards shall be 4 inches (10.16
guard. The interior surface of all cm) or more in height, of wood, metal,
guards, by which is meant the surface or of metal grill not exceeding 1 inch
of the guard with which a belt will (2.54 cm) mesh.
come in contact, shall be smooth and (p) Care of equipment—(1) General. All
free from all projections of any char- power-transmission equipment shall be
acter, except where construction de- inspected at intervals not exceeding 60
mands it; protruding shallow round- days and be kept in good working con-
head rivets may be used. Overhead belt dition at all times.
guards shall be at least one-quarter (2) Shafting. (i) Shafting shall be kept
wider than belt which they protect, ex- in alignment, free from rust and excess
cept that this clearance need not in oil or grease.
any case exceed 6 inches (15.24 cm) on (ii) Where explosives, explosive dusts,
each side. Overhead rope drive and flammable vapors or flammable liquids
block and roller-chain-drive guards exist, the hazard of static sparks from
shall be not less than 6 inches (15.24 shafting shall be carefully considered.
cm) wider than the drive on each side.
(3) Bearings. Bearings shall be kept in
In overhead silent chain-drive guards
alignment and properly adjusted.
where the chain is held from lateral
displacement on the sprockets, the side (4) Hangers. Hangers shall be in-
clearances required on drives of 20 inch spected to make certain that all sup-
(50.8 cm) centers or under shall be not porting bolts and screws are tight and
less than 1⁄4 inch (0.635 cm) from the that supports of hanger boxes are ad-
nearest moving chain part, and on justed properly.
drives of over 20 inch (50.8 cm) centers (5) Pulleys. (i) Pulleys shall be kept in
a minimum of 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) from proper alignment to prevent belts from
the nearest moving chain part. running off.

(4) Guards for horizontal overhead rope (6) Care of belts.
and chain drives. Overhead-rope and (i) [Reserved]
240
(ii) Inspection shall be made of belts, (9) Compressed gas cylinders shall be
lacings, and fasteners and such equip- secured in an upright position at all
ment kept in good repair. times except, if necessary, for short pe-
(7) Lubrication. The regular oilers riods of time while cylinders are actu-
shall wear tight-fitting clothing. Ma- ally being hoisted or carried.
chinery shall be oiled when not in mo- (10) Oxygen cylinders in storage shall
tion, wherever possible. be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or
combustible materials (especially oil
[58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993, as amended at 69
or grease), a minimum distance of 20
FR 31882, June 8, 2004]
feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible bar-
rier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having
Subpart J—Welding and Cutting a fire-resistance rating of at least one-
half hour.
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours (11) Inside of buildings, cylinders
and Safety Standards Act (Construction shall be stored in a well-protected,
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- well-ventilated, dry location, at least
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 20 feet (6.1 m) from highly combustible
materials such as oil or excelsior. Cyl-
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable. inders should be stored in definitely as-
signed places away from elevators,
§ 1926.350 Gas welding and cutting. stairs, or gangways. Assigned storage
places shall be located where cylinders
(a) Transporting, moving, and storing will not be knocked over or damaged
compressed gas cylinders. (1) Valve pro- by passing or falling objects, or subject
tection caps shall be in place and se- to tampering by unauthorized persons.
cured. Cylinders shall not be kept in
(2) When cylinders are hoisted, they unventilated enclosures such as lockers
shall be secured on a cradle, and cupboards.
slingboard, or pallet. They shall not be (12) The in-plant handling, storage,
hoisted or transported by means of and utilization of all compressed gases
magnets or choker slings. in cylinders, portable tanks, rail
(3) Cylinders shall be moved by tilt- tankcars, or motor vehicle cargo tanks
ing and rolling them on their bottom shall be in accordance with Compressed
edges. They shall not be intentionally Gas Association Pamphlet P–1–1965.
dropped, struck, or permitted to strike (b) Placing cylinders. (1) Cylinders
each other violently. shall be kept far enough away from the
(4) When cylinders are transported by actual welding or cutting operation so
powered vehicles, they shall be secured that sparks, hot slag, or flame will not
in a vertical position. reach them. When this is impractical,
(5) Valve protection caps shall not be fire resistant shields shall be provided.
used for lifting cylinders from one (2) Cylinders shall be placed where
vertical position to another. Bars shall they cannot become part of an elec-
not be used under valves or valve pro- trical circuit. Electrodes shall not be
tection caps to pry cylinders loose struck against a cylinder to strike an
when frozen. Warm, not boiling, water arc.
shall be used to thaw cylinders loose. (3) Fuel gas cylinders shall be placed
(6) Unless cylinders are firmly se- with valve end up whenever they are in
cured on a special carrier intended for use. They shall not be placed in a loca-
this purpose, regulators shall be re- tion where they would be subject to
moved and valve protection caps put in open flame, hot metal, or other sources
place before cylinders are moved. of artificial heat.
(7) A suitable cylinder truck, chain, (4) Cylinders containing oxygen or
or other steadying device shall be used acetylene or other fuel gas shall not be
to keep cylinders from being knocked taken into confined spaces.
over while in use. (c) Treatment of cylinders. (1) Cyl-
(8) When work is finished, when cylinders, whether full or empty, shall not
inders are empty, or when cylinders are be used as rollers or supports.

moved at any time, the cylinder valve (2) No person other than the gas sup-
shall be closed. plier shall attempt to mix gases in a
241
cylinder. No one except the owner of shall be closed and the gland nut tight-
the cylinder or person authorized by ened. If this action does not stop the
him, shall refill a cylinder. No one leak, the use of the cylinder shall be
shall use a cylinder’s contents for pur- discontinued, and it shall be properly
poses other than those intended by the tagged and removed from the work
supplier. All cylinders used shall meet area. In the event that fuel gas should
the Department of Transportation re- leak from the cylinder valve, rather
quirements published in 49 CFR part than from the valve stem, and the gas
178, subpart C, Specification for Cyl- cannot be shut off, the cylinder shall
inders. be properly tagged and removed from
(3) No damaged or defective cylinder the work area. If a regulator attached
shall be used. to a cylinder valve will effectively stop
(d) Use of fuel gas. The employer shall a leak through the valve seat, the cyl-
thoroughly instruct employees in the inder need not be removed from the
safe use of fuel gas, as follows: work area.
(1) Before a regulator to a cylinder (6) If a leak should develop at a fuse
valve is connected, the valve shall be plug or other safety device, the cyl-
opened slightly and closed imme- inder shall be removed from the work
diately. (This action is generally area.
termed ‘‘cracking’’ and is intended to (e) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds. (1)
clear the valve of dust or dirt that Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds shall
might otherwise enter the regulator.) bear the name of the substance they
The person cracking the valve shall contain in letters at least 1-inch high
stand to one side of the outlet, not in which shall be either painted on the
front of it. The valve of a fuel gas cyl- manifold or on a sign permanently at-
inder shall not be cracked where the tached to it.
gas would reach welding work, sparks, (2) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds
flame, or other possible sources of igni- shall be placed in safe, well ventilated,
tion. and accessible locations. They shall
(2) The cylinder valve shall always be not be located within enclosed spaces.
opened slowly to prevent damage to (3) Manifold hose connections, in-
the regulator. For quick closing, valves cluding both ends of the supply hose
on fuel gas cylinders shall not be that lead to the manifold, shall be such
opened more than 11⁄2 turns. When a that the hose cannot be interchanged
special wrench is required, it shall be between fuel gas and oxygen manifolds
left in position on the stem of the valve and supply header connections. Adapt-
while the cylinder is in use so that the ers shall not be used to permit the
fuel gas flow can be shut off quickly in interchange of hose. Hose connections
case of an emergency. In the case of shall be kept free of grease and oil.
manifolded or coupled cylinders, at (4) When not in use, manifold and
least one such wrench shall always be header hose connections shall be
available for immediate use. Nothing capped.
shall be placed on top of a fuel gas cyl- (5) Nothing shall be placed on top of
inder, when in use, which may damage a manifold, when in use, which will
the safety device or interfere with the damage the manifold or interfere with
quick closing of the valve. the quick closing of the valves.
(3) Fuel gas shall not be used from (f) Hose. (1) Fuel gas hose and oxygen
cylinders through torches or other de- hose shall be easily distinguishable
vices which are equipped with shutoff from each other. The contrast may be
valves without reducing the pressure made by different colors or by surface
through a suitable regulator attached characteristics readily distinguishable
to the cylinder valve or manifold. by the sense of touch. Oxygen and fuel
(4) Before a regulator is removed gas hoses shall not be interchangeable.
from a cylinder valve, the cylinder A single hose having more than one gas
valve shall always be closed and the passage shall not be used.
gas released from the regulator. (2) When parallel sections of oxygen
(5) If, when the valve on a fuel gas and fuel gas hose are taped together,
cylinder is opened, there is found to be not more than 4 inches out of 12 inches
a leak around the valve stem, the valve shall be covered by tape.
242
(3) All hose in use, carrying acety- 1967, Safety in Welding and Cutting,
lene, oxygen, natural or manufactured shall apply.
fuel gas, or any gas or substance which
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
may ignite or enter into combustion, 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990;
or be in any way harmful to employees, 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993]
shall be inspected at the beginning of
each working shift. Defective hose § 1926.351 Arc welding and cutting.
shall be removed from service. (a) Manual electrode holders. (1) Only
(4) Hose which has been subject to manual electrode holders which are
flashback, or which shows evidence of specifically designed for arc welding
severe wear or damage, shall be tested and cutting, and are of a capacity capa-
to twice the normal pressure to which ble of safely handling the maximum
it is subject, but in no case less than rated current required by the elec-
300 p.s.i. Defective hose, or hose in trodes, shall be used.
doubtful condition, shall not be used. (2) Any current-carrying parts pass-
(5) Hose couplings shall be of the type ing through the portion of the holder
that cannot be unlocked or discon- which the arc welder or cutter grips in
nected by means of a straight pull his hand, and the outer surfaces of the
without rotary motion. jaws of the holder, shall be fully insu-
(6) Boxes used for the storage of gas lated against the maximum voltage en-
hose shall be ventilated. countered to ground.
(7) Hoses, cables, and other equip- (b) Welding cables and connectors. (1)
ment shall be kept clear of passage- All arc welding and cutting cables shall
ways, ladders and stairs. be of the completely insulated, flexible
(g) Torches. (1) Clogged torch tip type, capable of handling the max-
openings shall be cleaned with suitable imum current requirements of the
cleaning wires, drills, or other devices work in progress, taking into account
designed for such purpose. the duty cycle under which the arc
(2) Torches in use shall be inspected welder or cutter is working.
at the beginning of each working shift (2) Only cable free from repair or
for leaking shutoff valves, hose cou- splices for a minimum distance of 10
plings, and tip connections. Defective feet from the cable end to which the
torches shall not be used. electrode holder is connected shall be
(3) Torches shall be lighted by fric- used, except that cables with standard
tion lighters or other approved devices, insulated connectors or with splices
and not by matches or from hot work. whose insulating quality is equal to
that of the cable are permitted.
(h) Regulators and gauges. Oxygen and
fuel gas pressure regulators, including (3) When it becomes necessary to con-
their related gauges, shall be in proper nect or splice lengths of cable one to
another, substantial insulated connec-
working order while in use.
tors of a capacity at least equivalent to
(i) Oil and grease hazards. Oxygen cyl-
that of the cable shall be used. If con-
inders and fittings shall be kept away
nections are effected by means of cable
from oil or grease. Cylinders, cylinder lugs, they shall be securely fastened to-
caps and valves, couplings, regulators, gether to give good electrical contact,
hose, and apparatus shall be kept free and the exposed metal parts of the lugs
from oil or greasy substances and shall shall be completely insulated.
not be handled with oily hands or (4) Cables in need of repair shall not
gloves. Oxygen shall not be directed at be used. When a cable, other than the
oily surfaces, greasy clothes, or within cable lead referred to in paragraph
a fuel oil or other storage tank or ves- (b)(2) of this section, becomes worn to
sel. the extent of exposing bare conductors,
(j) Additional rules. For additional de- the portion thus exposed shall be pro-
tails not covered in this subpart, appli- tected by means of rubber and friction
cable technical portions of American tape or other equivalent insulation.

National Standards Institute, Z49.1– (c) Ground returns and machine
grounding. (1) A ground return cable
243
shall have a safe current carrying ca- placed or protected that they cannot
pacity equal to or exceeding the speci- make electrical contact with employ-
fied maximum output capacity of the ees or conducting objects.
arc welding or cutting unit which it (2) Hot electrode holders shall not be
services. When a single ground return dipped in water; to do so may expose
cable services more than one unit, its the arc welder or cutter to electric
safe current-carrying capacity shall shock.
equal or exceed the total specified (3) When the arc welder or cutter has
maximum output capacities of all the occasion to leave his work or to stop
units which it services. work for any appreciable length of
(2) Pipelines containing gases or time, or when the arc welding or cut-
flammable liquids, or conduits con- ting machine is to be moved, the power
taining electrical circuits, shall not be supply switch to the equipment shall
used as a ground return. For welding be opened.
on natural gas pipelines, the technical (4) Any faulty or defective equipment
portions of regulations issued by the shall be reported to the supervisor.
Department of Transportation, Office (5) See § 1926.406(c) for additional re-
of Pipeline Safety, 49 CFR part 192, quirements.
Minimum Federal Safety Standards for (e) Shielding. Whenever practicable,
Gas Pipelines, shall apply. all arc welding and cutting operations
(3) When a structure or pipeline is shall be shielded by noncombustible or
employed as a ground return circuit, it flameproof screens which will protect
shall be determined that the required employees and other persons working
electrical contact exists at all joints. in the vicinity from the direct rays of
The generation of an arc, sparks, or the arc.
heat at any point shall cause rejection
of the structures as a ground circuit. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(4) When a structure or pipeline is 1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986]
continuously employed as a ground re- § 1926.352 Fire prevention.
turn circuit, all joints shall be bonded,
and periodic inspections shall be con- (a) When practical, objects to be
ducted to ensure that no condition of welded, cut, or heated shall be moved
electrolysis or fire hazard exists by vir- to a designated safe location or, if the
tue of such use. objects to be welded, cut, or heated
(5) The frames of all arc welding and cannot be readily moved, all movable
cutting machines shall be grounded ei- fire hazards in the vicinity shall be
ther through a third wire in the cable taken to a safe place, or otherwise pro-
containing the circuit conductor or tected.
through a separate wire which is (b) If the object to be welded, cut, or
grounded at the source of the current. heated cannot be moved and if all the
Grounding circuits, other than by fire hazards cannot be removed, posi-
means of the structure, shall be tive means shall be taken to confine
checked to ensure that the circuit be- the heat, sparks, and slag, and to pro-
tween the ground and the grounded tect the immovable fire hazards from
power conductor has resistance low them.
enough to permit sufficient current to (c) No welding, cutting, or heating
flow to cause the fuse or circuit break- shall be done where the application of
er to interrupt the current. flammable paints, or the presence of
(6) All ground connections shall be other flammable compounds, or heavy
inspected to ensure that they are me- dust concentrations creates a hazard.
chanically strong and electrically ade- (d) Suitable fire extinguishing equip-
quate for the required current. ment shall be immediately available in
(d) Operating instructions. Employers the work area and shall be maintained
shall instruct employees in the safe in a state of readiness for instant use.
means of arc welding and cutting as (e) When the welding, cutting, or
follows: heating operation is such that normal
(1) When electrode holders are to be fire prevention precautions are not suf-
left unattended, the electrodes shall be ficient, additional personnel shall be
removed and the holders shall be so assigned to guard against fire while the
244
actual welding, cutting, or heating op- or opening shall be provided for the re-
eration is being performed, and for a lease of any built-up pressure during
sufficient period of time after comple- the application of heat.
tion of the work to ensure that no pos-
sibility of fire exists. Such personnel § 1926.353 Ventilation and protection
shall be instructed as to the specific in welding, cutting, and heating.
anticipated fire hazards and how the (a) Mechanical ventilation. For pur-
firefighting equipment provided is to poses of this section, mechanical ven-
be used. tilation shall meet the following re-
(f) When welding, cutting, or heating quirements:
is performed on walls, floors, and ceil- (1) Mechanical ventilation shall con-
ings, since direct penetration of sparks sist of either general mechanical ven-
or heat transfer may introduce a fire tilation systems or local exhaust sys-
hazard to an adjacent area, the same tems.
precautions shall be taken on the oppo- (2) General mechanical ventilation
site side as are taken on the side on shall be of sufficient capacity and so
which the welding is being performed. arranged as to produce the number of
(g) For the elimination of possible air changes necessary to maintain
fire in enclosed spaces as a result of gas welding fumes and smoke within safe
escaping through leaking or improp- limits, as defined in subpart D of this
erly closed torch valves, the gas supply part.
to the torch shall be positively shut off (3) Local exhaust ventilation shall
at some point outside the enclosed consist of freely movable hoods in-
space whenever the torch is not to be tended to be placed by the welder or
used or whenever the torch is left unat- burner as close as practicable to the
tended for a substantial period of time, work. This system shall be of sufficient
such as during the lunch period. Over- capacity and so arranged as to remove
night and at the change of shifts, the fumes and smoke at the source and
torch and hose shall be removed from keep the concentration of them in the
the confined space. Open end fuel gas breathing zone within safe limits as de-
and oxygen hoses shall be immediately fined in subpart D of this part.
removed from enclosed spaces when (4) Contaminated air exhausted from
they are disconnected from the torch a working space shall be discharged
or other gas-consuming device. into the open air or otherwise clear of
(h) Except when the contents are the source of intake air.
being removed or transferred, drums, (5) All air replacing that withdrawn
pails, and other containers which con- shall be clean and respirable.
tain or have contained flammable liq- (6) Oxygen shall not be used for ven-
uids shall be kept closed. Empty con- tilation purposes, comfort cooling,
tainers shall be removed to a safe area blowing dust from clothing, or for
apart from hot work operations or open cleaning the work area.
flames. (b) Welding, cutting, and heating in
(i) Drums containers, or hollow confined spaces. (1) Except as provided
structures which have contained toxic in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, and
or flammable substances shall, before paragraph (c)(2) of this section, either
welding, cutting, or heating is under- general mechanical or local exhaust
taken on them, either be filled with ventilation meeting the requirements
water or thoroughly cleaned of such of paragraph (a) of this section shall be
substances and ventilated and tested. provided whenever welding, cutting, or
For welding, cutting and heating on heating is performed in a confined
steel pipelines containing natural gas, space.
the pertinent portions of regulations (2) When sufficient ventilation can-
issued by the Department of Transpor- not be obtained without blocking the
tation, Office of Pipeline Safety, 49 means of access, employees in the con-
CFR part 192, Minimum Federal Safety fined space shall be protected by air
Standards for Gas Pipelines, shall line respirators in accordance with the
apply. requirements of subpart E of this part,

(j) Before heat is applied to a drum, and an employee on the outside of such
container, or hollow structure, a vent a confined space shall be assigned to
245
maintain communication with those part E of this part, except that employ-
working within it and to aid them in ees performing such operations on be-
an emergency. ryllium-containing base or filler met-
(3) Lifelines. Where a welder must als shall be protected by air line res-
enter a confined space through a man- pirators in accordance with the re-
hole or other small opening, means quirements of subpart E of this part.
shall be provided for quickly removing (4) Other employees exposed to the
him in case of emergency. When safety same atmosphere as the welders or
belts and lifelines are used for this pur- burners shall be protected in the same
pose they shall be so attached to the manner as the welder or burner.
welder’s body that his body cannot be (d) Inert-gas metal-arc welding. (1)
jammed in a small exit opening. An at- Since the inert-gas metal-arc welding
tendant with a pre-planned rescue pro- process involves the production of
cedure shall be stationed outside to ob- ultra-violet radiation of intensities of 5
serve the welder at all times and be ca- to 30 times that produced during
pable of putting rescue operations into shielded metal-arc welding, the decom-
effect. position of chlorinated solvents by ul-
(c) Welding, cutting, or heating of met- traviolet rays, and the liberation of
als of toxic significance. (1) Welding, cut- toxic fumes and gases, employees shall
ting, or heating in any enclosed spaces not be permitted to engage in, or be ex-
involving the metals specified in this posed to the process until the following
subparagraph shall be performed with special precautions have been taken:
either general mechanical or local ex- (i) The use of chlorinated solvents
haust ventilation meeting the require- shall be kept at least 200 feet, unless
ments of paragraph (a) of this section: shielded, from the exposed arc, and sur-
(i) Zinc-bearing base or filler metals faces prepared with chlorinated sol-
or metals coated with zinc-bearing ma- vents shall be thoroughly dry before
terials; welding is permitted on such surfaces.
(ii) Lead base metals; (ii) Employees in the area not pro-
(iii) Cadmium-bearing filler mate- tected from the arc by screening shall
rials; be protected by filter lenses meeting
(iv) Chromium-bearing metals or the requirements of subpart E of this
metals coated with chromium-bearing part. When two or more welders are ex-
materials. posed to each other’s arc, filter lens
(2) Welding, cutting, or heating in goggles of a suitable type, meeting the
any enclosed spaces involving the met- requirements of subpart E of this part,
als specified in this subparagraph shall shall be worn under welding helmets.
be performed with local exhaust ven- Hand shields to protect the welder
tilation in accordance with the require- against flashes and radiant energy
ments of paragraph (a) of this section, shall be used when either the helmet is
or employees shall be protected by air lifted or the shield is removed.
line respirators in accordance with the (iii) Welders and other employees
requirements of subpart E of this part: who are exposed to radiation shall be
(i) Metals containing lead, other than suitably protected so that the skin is
as an impurity, or metals coated with covered completely to prevent burns
lead-bearing materials; and other damage by ultraviolet rays.
(ii) Cadmium-bearing or cadmium- Welding helmets and hand shields shall
coated base metals; be free of leaks and openings, and free
(iii) Metals coated with mercury- of highly reflective surfaces.
bearing metals; (iv) When inert-gas metal-arc weld-
(iv) Beryllium-containing base or ing is being performed on stainless
filler metals. Because of its high tox- steel, the requirements of paragraph
icity, work involving beryllium shall (c)(2) of this section shall be met to
be done with both local exhaust ven- protect against dangerous concentra-
tilation and air line respirators. tions of nitrogen dioxide.
(3) Employees performing such oper- (e) General welding, cutting, and heat-
ations in the open air shall be pro- ing. (1) Welding, cutting, and heating,
tected by filter-type respirators in ac- not involving conditions or materials
cordance with the requirements of sub- described in paragraph (b), (c), or (d) of
246
this section, may normally be done Subpart K—Electrical

without mechanical ventilation or res-
piratory protective equipment, but
AUTHORITY: Sections 6 and 8 of the Occupa-
where, because of unusual physical or tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
atmospheric conditions, an unsafe ac- U.S.C. 655 and 657); sec. 107, Contract Work
cumulation of contaminants exists, Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C.
suitable mechanical ventilation or res- 333); Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 9–83 (48
piratory protective equipment shall be FR 35736) or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable;
provided. 29 CFR part 1911.
(2) Employees performing any type of SOURCE: 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, unless
welding, cutting, or heating shall be otherwise noted.
protected by suitable eye protective
equipment in accordance with the re- GENERAL
quirements of subpart E of this part.
§ 1926.400 Introduction.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, This subpart addresses electrical
1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990;
58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993]
safety requirements that are necessary
for the practical safeguarding of em-
§ 1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heat- ployees involved in construction work
ing in way of preservative coatings. and is divided into four major divisions
and applicable definitions as follows:
(a) Before welding, cutting, or heat- (a) Installation safety requirements. In-
ing is commenced on any surface cov- stallation safety requirements are con-
ered by a preservative coating whose tained in §§ 1926.402 through 1926.408. In-
flammability is not known, a test shall cluded in this category are electric
be made by a competent person to de- equipment and installations used to
termine its flammability. Preservative provide electric power and light on
coatings shall be considered to be high- jobsites.
ly flammable when scrapings burn with
(b) Safety-related work practices. Safe-
extreme rapidity.
ty-related work practices are contained
(b) Precautions shall be taken to pre- in §§ 1926.416 and 1926.417. In addition to
vent ignition of highly flammable covering the hazards arising from the
hardened preservative coatings. When use of electricity at jobsites, these reg-
coatings are determined to be highly ulations also cover the hazards arising
flammable, they shall be stripped from from the accidental contact, direct or
the area to be heated to prevent igni- indirect, by employees with all ener-
tion. gized lines, above or below ground,
(c) Protection against toxic preserva- passing through or near the jobsite.
tive coatings: (1) In enclosed spaces, all (c) Safety-related maintenance and en-
surfaces covered with toxic preserva- vironmental considerations. Safety-re-
tives shall be stripped of all toxic coat- lated maintenance and environmental
ings for a distance of at least 4 inches considerations are contained in
from the area of heat application, or §§ 1926.431 and 1926.432.
the employees shall be protected by air (d) Safety requirements for special
line respirators, meeting the require- equipment. Safety requirements for spe-
ments of subpart E of this part. cial equipment are contained in
(2) In the open air, employees shall be § 1926.441.
protected by a respirator, in accord- (e) Definitions. Definitions applicable
ance with requirements of subpart E of to this subpart are contained in
this part. § 1926.449.
(d) The preservative coatings shall be
removed a sufficient distance from the § 1926.401 [Reserved]
area to be heated to ensure that the
temperature of the unstripped metal INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
will not be appreciably raised. Artifi-
cial cooling of the metal surrounding § 1926.402 Applicability.
the heating area may be used to limit (a) Covered. Sections 1926.402 through
the size of the area required to be 1926.408 contain installation safety re-
cleaned. quirements for electrical equipment
247
and installations used to provide elec- (vii) Other factors which contribute
tric power and light at the jobsite. to the practical safeguarding of em-
These sections apply to installations, ployees using or likely to come in con-
both temporary and permanent, used tact with the equipment.
on the jobsite; but these sections do (2) Installation and use. Listed, la-
not apply to existing permanent instal- beled, or certified equipment shall be
lations that were in place before the installed and used in accordance with
construction activity commenced. instructions included in the listing, la-
NOTE: If the electrical installation is made beling, or certification.
in accordance with the National Electrical (c) Interrupting rating. Equipment in-
Code ANSI/NFPA 70–1984, exclusive of For- tended to break current shall have an
mal Interpretations and Tentative Interim
Amendments, it will be deemed to be in com-
interrupting rating at system voltage
pliance with §§ 1926.403 through 1926.408, ex- sufficient for the current that must be
cept for §§ 1926.404(b)(1) and 1926.405(a)(2)(ii) interrupted.
(E), (F), (G), and (J). (d) Mounting and cooling of equip-
(b) Not covered. Sections 1926.402 ment—(1) Mounting. Electric equipment
through 1926.408 do not cover installa- shall be firmly secured to the surface
tions used for the generation, trans- on which it is mounted. Wooden plugs
mission, and distribution of electric driven into holes in masonry, concrete,
energy, including related communica- plaster, or similar materials shall not
tion, metering, control, and trans- be used.
formation installations. (However, (2) Cooling. Electrical equipment
these regulations do cover portable and which depends upon the natural cir-
vehicle-mounted generators used to culation of air and convection prin-
provide power for equipment used at ciples for cooling of exposed surfaces
the jobsite.) See subpart V of this part shall be installed so that room air flow
for the construction of power distribu- over such surfaces is not prevented by
tion and transmission lines. walls or by adjacent installed equip-
§ 1926.403 General requirements. ment. For equipment designed for floor
mounting, clearance between top sur-
(a) Approval. All electrical conduc- faces and adjacent surfaces shall be
tors and equipment shall be approved. provided to dissipate rising warm air.
(b) Examination, installation, and use
Electrical equipment provided with
of equipment—(1) Examination. The em-
ventilating openings shall be installed
ployer shall ensure that electrical
equipment is free from recognized haz- so that walls or other obstructions do
ards that are likely to cause death or not prevent the free circulation of air
serious physical harm to employees. through the equipment.
Safety of equipment shall be deter- (e) Splices. Conductors shall be
mined on the basis of the following spliced or joined with splicing devices
considerations: designed for the use or by brazing,
(i) Suitability for installation and welding, or soldering with a fusible
use in conformity with the provisions metal or alloy. Soldered splices shall
of this subpart. Suitability of equip- first be so spliced or joined as to be me-
ment for an identified purpose may be chanically and electrically secure
evidenced by listing, labeling, or cer- without solder and then soldered. All
tification for that identified purpose. splices and joints and the free ends of
(ii) Mechanical strength and dura- conductors shall be covered with an in-
bility, including, for parts designed to sulation equivalent to that of the con-
enclose and protect other equipment, ductors or with an insulating device
the adequacy of the protection thus designed for the purpose.
provided. (f) Arcing parts. Parts of electric
(iii) Electrical insulation.
equipment which in ordinary operation
(iv) Heating effects under conditions
produce arcs, sparks, flames, or molten
of use.
(v) Arcing effects. metal shall be enclosed or separated

(vi) Classification by type, size, volt- and isolated from all combustible ma-
age, current capacity, specific use. terial.
248
(g) Marking. Electrical equipment sible from locations other than the
shall not be used unless the manufac- back.
turer’s name, trademark, or other de-
scriptive marking by which the organi- TABLE K–1—WORKING CLEARANCES
zation responsible for the product may Minimum clear distance
be identified is placed on the equip- Nominal voltage to ground for conditions 1
ment and unless other markings are (a) (b) (c)
provided giving voltage, current, watt-
age, or other ratings as necessary. The Feet 2 Feet 2 Feet 2
marking shall be of sufficient dura- 0–150 ......................................... 3 3 3
151–600 ..................................... 3 31⁄2 4
bility to withstand the environment in-
1 Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live
volved. parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other
(h) Identification of disconnecting side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides
means and circuits. Each disconnecting effectively guarded by insulating material. Insulated wire or in-
sulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not con-
means required by this subpart for mo- sidered live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and
tors and appliances shall be legibly grounded parts on the other side. (c) Exposed live parts on
both sides of the workspace [not guarded as provided in Con-
marked to indicate its purpose, unless dition (a)] with the operator between.
2 Note: For International System of Units (SI): one foot =
located and arranged so the purpose is 0.3048m.
evident. Each service, feeder, and
branch circuit, at its disconnecting (ii) Clear spaces. Working space re-
means or overcurrent device, shall be quired by this subpart shall not be used
legibly marked to indicate its purpose, for storage. When normally enclosed
unless located and arranged so the pur- live parts are exposed for inspection or
pose is evident. These markings shall servicing, the working space, if in a
be of sufficient durability to withstand passageway or general open space,
the environment involved. shall be guarded.
(i) 600 Volts, nominal, or less. This (iii) Access and entrance to working
paragraph applies to equipment oper- space. At least one entrance shall be
ating at 600 volts, nominal, or less. provided to give access to the working
(1) Working space about electric equip- space about electric equipment.
ment. Sufficient access and working (iv) Front working space. Where there
space shall be provided and maintained are live parts normally exposed on the
about all electric equipment to permit front of switchboards or motor control
ready and safe operation and mainte- centers, the working space in front of
nance of such equipment. such equipment shall not be less than 3
(i) Working clearances. Except as re- feet (914 mm).
quired or permitted elsewhere in this (v) Headroom. The minimum head-
subpart, the dimension of the working room of working spaces about service
space in the direction of access to live equipment, switchboards, panelboards,
parts operating at 600 volts or less and or motor control centers shall be 6 feet
likely to require examination, adjust- 3 inches (1.91 m).
ment, servicing, or maintenance while (2) Guarding of live parts. (i) Except as
alive shall not be less than indicated in required or permitted elsewhere in this
Table K–1. In addition to the dimen- subpart, live parts of electric equip-
sions shown in Table K–1, workspace ment operating at 50 volts or more
shall not be less than 30 inches (762 shall be guarded against accidental
mm) wide in front of the electric equip- contact by cabinets or other forms of
ment. Distances shall be measured enclosures, or by any of the following
from the live parts if they are exposed, means:
or from the enclosure front or opening (A) By location in a room, vault, or
if the live parts are enclosed. Walls similar enclosure that is accessible
constructed of concrete, brick, or tile only to qualified persons.
are considered to be grounded. Working (B) By partitions or screens so ar-
space is not required in back of assem- ranged that only qualified persons will
blies such as dead-front switchboards have access to the space within reach
or motor control centers where there of the live parts. Any openings in such
are no renewable or adjustable parts partitions or screens shall be so sized

such as fuses or switches on the back and located that persons are not likely
and where all connections are acces- to come into accidental contact with
249
the live parts or to bring conducting shall be made with metal-enclosed

objects into contact with them. equipment or shall be enclosed in a
(C) By location on a balcony, gallery, vault or in an area, access to which is
or platform so elevated and arranged as controlled by a lock. Metal-enclosed
to exclude unqualified persons. switchgear, unit substations, trans-
(D) By elevation of 8 feet (2.44 m) or formers, pull boxes, connection boxes,
more above the floor or other working and other similar associated equipment
surface and so installed as to exclude shall be marked with appropriate cau-
unqualified persons. tion signs. If equipment is exposed to
(ii) In locations where electric equip- physical damage from vehicular traffic,
ment would be exposed to physical guards shall be provided to prevent
damage, enclosures or guards shall be
such damage. Ventilating or similar
so arranged and of such strength as to
openings in metal-enclosed equipment
prevent such damage.
(iii) Entrances to rooms and other shall be designed so that foreign ob-
guarded locations containing exposed jects inserted through these openings
live parts shall be marked with con- will be deflected from energized parts.
spicuous warning signs forbidding un- (3) Workspace about equipment. Suffi-
qualified persons to enter. cient space shall be provided and main-
(j) Over 600 volts, nominal—(1) General. tained about electric equipment to per-
Conductors and equipment used on cir- mit ready and safe operation and main-
cuits exceeding 600 volts, nominal, tenance of such equipment. Where en-
shall comply with all applicable provi- ergized parts are exposed, the min-
sions of paragraphs (a) through (g) of imum clear workspace shall not be less
this section and with the following pro- than 6 feet 6 inches (1.98 m) high (meas-
visions which supplement or modify ured vertically from the floor or plat-
those requirements. The provisions of form), or less than 3 feet (914 mm) wide
paragraphs (j)(2), (j)(3), and (j)(4) of this (measured parallel to the equipment).
section do not apply to equipment on The depth shall be as required in Table
the supply side of the service conduc- K–2. The workspace shall be adequate
tors. to permit at least a 90-degree opening
(2) Enclosure for electrical installations. of doors or hinged panels.
Electrical installations in a vault,
(i) Working space. The minimum clear
room, closet or in an area surrounded
working space in front of electric
by a wall, screen, or fence, access to
equipment such as switchboards, con-
which is controlled by lock and key or
other equivalent means, are considered trol panels, switches, circuit breakers,
to be accessible to qualified persons motor controllers, relays, and similar
only. A wall, screen, or fence less than equipment shall not be less than speci-
8 feet (2.44 m) in height is not consid- fied in Table K–2 unless otherwise spec-
ered adequate to prevent access unless ified in this subpart. Distances shall be
it has other features that provide a de- measured from the live parts if they
gree of isolation equivalent to an 8-foot are exposed, or from the enclosure
(2.44-m) fence. The entrances to all front or opening if the live parts are
buildings, rooms or enclosures con- enclosed. However, working space is
taining exposed live parts or exposed not required in back of equipment such
conductors operating at over 600 volts, as deadfront switchboards or control
nominal, shall be kept locked or shall assemblies where there are no renew-
be under the observation of a qualified able or adjustable parts (such as fuses
person at all times. or switches) on the back and where all
(i) Installations accessible to qualified connections are accessible from loca-
persons only. Electrical installations tions other than the back. Where rear
having exposed live parts shall be ac- access is required to work on de-ener-
cessible to qualified persons only and gized parts on the back of enclosed
shall comply with the applicable provi- equipment, a minimum working space
sions of paragraph (j)(3) of this section.
of 30 inches (762 mm) horizontally shall

(ii) Installations accessible to unquali-
be provided.
fied persons. Electrical installations
that are open to unqualified persons
250
TABLE K–2—MINIMUM DEPTH OF CLEAR WORK- cent to such entrance, they shall be
ING SPACE IN FRONT OF ELECTRIC EQUIP- guarded.
MENT
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61
Conditions 1
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
Nominal voltage to ground
(a) (b) (c) § 1926.404 Wiring design and protec-
tion.
Feet 2 Feet 2 Feet 2
601 to 2,500 .............................. 3 4 5 (a) Use and identification of grounded
2,501 to 9,000 ........................... 4 5 6 and grounding conductors—(1) Identifica-
9,001 to 25,000 ......................... 5 6 9 tion of conductors. A conductor used as
25,001 to 75 kV ......................... 6 8 10 a grounded conductor shall be identifi-
Above 75kV ............................... 8 10 12 able and distinguishable from all other
1Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live conductors. A conductor used as an
parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other equipment grounding conductor shall
side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides
effectively guarded by insulating materials. Insulated wire or be identifiable and distinguishable
insulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not con- from all other conductors.
sidered live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and
grounded parts on the other side. Walls constructed of con- (2) Polarity of connections. No ground-
crete, brick, or tile are considered to be grounded surfaces. ed conductor shall be attached to any
(c) Exposed live parts on both sides of the workspace [not
guarded as provided in Condition (a)] with the operator be- terminal or lead so as to reverse des-
tween.
2 NOTE: For SI units: one foot = 0.3048 m.
ignated polarity.
(3) Use of grounding terminals and de-
(ii) Lighting outlets and points of con- vices. A grounding terminal or ground-
trol. The lighting outlets shall be so ar- ing-type device on a receptacle, cord
ranged that persons changing lamps or connector, or attachment plug shall
making repairs on the lighting system not be used for purposes other than
will not be endangered by live parts or grounding.
other equipment. The points of control (b) Branch circuits—(1) Ground-fault
shall be so located that persons are not protection—(i) General. The employer
likely to come in contact with any live shall use either ground fault circuit in-
part or moving part of the equipment terrupters as specified in paragraph
while turning on the lights. (b)(1)(ii) of this section or an assured
(iii) Elevation of unguarded live parts. equipment grounding conductor pro-
Unguarded live parts above working gram as specified in paragraph
space shall be maintained at elevations (b)(1)(iii) of this section to protect em-
not less than specified in Table K–3. ployees on construction sites. These re-
quirements are in addition to any
TABLE K–3—ELEVATION OF UNGUARDED other requirements for equipment
ENERGIZED PARTS ABOVE WORKING SPACE grounding conductors.
(ii) Ground-fault circuit interrupters.
Nominal voltage between All 120-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-
Minimum elevation
phases
ampere receptacle outlets on construc-
601–7,500 .............................. 8 feet 6 inches. 1 tion sites, which are not a part of the
7,501–35,000 ......................... 9 feet. permanent wiring of the building or
Over 35kV .............................. 9 feet + 0.37 inches per kV
above 35kV.
structure and which are in use by em-
ployees, shall have approved ground-
1 NOTE: For SI units: one inch = 25.4 mm; one foot =
0.3048 m.
fault circuit interrupters for personnel
protection. Receptacles on a two-wire,
(4) Entrance and access to workspace. single-phase portable or vehicle-
At least one entrance not less than 24 mounted generator rated not more
inches (610 mm) wide and 6 feet 6 inches than 5kW, where the circuit conductors
(1.98 m) high shall be provided to give of the generator are insulated from the
access to the working space about elec- generator frame and all other grounded
tric equipment. On switchboard and surfaces, need not be protected with
control panels exceeding 48 inches (1.22 ground-fault circuit interrupters.
m) in width, there shall be one en- (iii) Assured equipment grounding con-
trance at each end of such board where ductor program. The employer shall es-
practicable. Where bare energized parts tablish and implement an assured

at any voltage or insulated energized equipment grounding conductor pro-
parts above 600 volts are located adja- gram on construction sites covering all
251
cord sets, receptacles which are not a (F) The employer shall not make
part of the building or structure, and available or permit the use by employ-
equipment connected by cord and plug ees of any equipment which has not
which are available for use or used by met the requirements of this paragraph
employees. This program shall comply (b)(1)(iii) of this section.
with the following minimum require- (G) Tests performed as required in
ments: this paragraph shall be recorded. This
(A) A written description of the pro- test record shall identify each recep-
gram, including the specific procedures tacle, cord set, and cord- and plug-con-
adopted by the employer, shall be nected equipment that passed the test
available at the jobsite for inspection and shall indicate the last date it was
and copying by the Assistant Secretary tested or the interval for which it was
and any affected employee. tested. This record shall be kept by
(B) The employer shall designate one means of logs, color coding, or other ef-
or more competent persons (as defined fective means and shall be maintained
in § 1926.32(f)) to implement the pro- until replaced by a more current
gram. record. The record shall be made avail-
(C) Each cord set, attachment cap, able on the jobsite for inspection by
plug and receptacle of cord sets, and the Assistant Secretary and any af-
any equipment connected by cord and fected employee.
plug, except cord sets and receptacles (2) Outlet devices. Outlet devices shall
which are fixed and not exposed to have an ampere rating not less than
damage, shall be visually inspected be- the load to be served and shall comply
fore each day’s use for external defects, with the following:
such as deformed or missing pins or in- (i) Single receptacles. A single recep-
sulation damage, and for indications of tacle installed on an individual branch
possible internal damage. Equipment circuit shall have an ampere rating of
found damaged or defective shall not not less than that of the branch cir-
be used until repaired. cuit.
(D) The following tests shall be per- (ii) Two or more receptacles. Where
formed on all cord sets, receptacles connected to a branch circuit sup-
which are not a part of the permanent plying two or more receptacles or out-
wiring of the building or structure, and lets, receptacle ratings shall conform
cord- and plug-connected equipment re- to the values listed in Table K–4.
quired to be grounded: (iii) Receptacles used for the connection
(1) All equipment grounding conduc- of motors. The rating of an attachment
tors shall be tested for continuity and plug or receptacle used for cord- and
shall be electrically continuous. plug-connection of a motor to a branch
(2) Each receptacle and attachment circuit shall not exceed 15 amperes at
cap or plug shall be tested for correct 125 volts or 10 amperes at 250 volts if
attachment of the equipment ground- individual overload protection is omit-
ing conductor. The equipment ground- ted.
ing conductor shall be connected to its TABLE K–4—RECEPTACLE RATINGS FOR
proper terminal. VARIOUS SIZE CIRCUITS
(E) All required tests shall be per-
formed: Circuit rating amperes Receptacle
rating amperes
(1) Before first use;
(2) Before equipment is returned to 15 ................................................................... Not over 15.
service following any repairs; 20 ................................................................... 15 or 20.
30 ................................................................... 30.
(3) Before equipment is used after 40 ................................................................... 40 or 50.
any incident which can be reasonably 50 ................................................................... 50.
suspected to have caused damage (for
example, when a cord set is run over); (c) Outside conductors and lamps—(1)
and 600 volts, nominal, or less. Paragraphs
(4) At intervals not to exceed 3 (c)(1)(i) through (c)(1)(iv) of this sec-
months, except that cord sets and re- tion apply to branch circuit, feeder,
ceptacles which are fixed and not ex- and service conductors rated 600 volts,
posed to damage shall be tested at in- nominal, or less and run outdoors as
tervals not exceeding 6 months. open conductors.
252
(i) Conductors on poles. Conductors vertical or diagonal clearance of not

supported on poles shall provide a hori- less than 3 feet (914 mm), or
zontal climbing space not less than the (C) Where the voltage between con-
following: ductors is 300 volts or less and the roof
(A) Power conductors below commu- has a slope of not less than 4 inches (102
nication conductors—30 inches (762 mm) in 12 inches (305 mm), the clear-
mm) . ance from roofs shall be at least 3 feet
(B) Power conductors alone or above (914 mm), or
communication conductors: 300 volts or (D) Where the voltage between con-
less—24 inches (610 mm); more than 300 ductors is 300 volts or less and the con-
volts—30 inches (762 mm). ductors do not pass over more than 4
(C) Communication conductors below feet (1.22 m) of the overhang portion of
power conductors: with power conduc- the roof and they are terminated at a
tors 300 volts or less—24 inches (610 through-the-roof raceway or support,
mm); more than 300 volts—30 inches the clearance from roofs shall be at
(762 mm). least 18 inches (457 mm).
(ii) Clearance from ground. Open con- (2) Location of outdoor lamps. Lamps
ductors shall conform to the following for outdoor lighting shall be located
minimum clearances: below all live conductors, trans-
(A) 10 feet (3.05 m)—above finished formers, or other electric equipment,
grade, sidewalks, or from any platform unless such equipment is controlled by
or projection from which they might be a disconnecting means that can be
reached. locked in the open position or unless
(B) 12 feet (3.66 m)—over areas sub- adequate clearances or other safe-
ject to vehicular traffic other than guards are provided for relamping oper-
truck traffic. ations.
(C) 15 feet (4.57 m)—over areas other (d) Services—(1) Disconnecting means—
than those specified in paragraph (i) General. Means shall be provided to
(c)(1)(ii)(D) of this section that are sub- disconnect all conductors in a building
ject to truck traffic. or other structure from the service-en-
(D) 18 feet (5.49 m)—over public trance conductors. The disconnecting
streets, alleys, roads, and driveways. means shall plainly indicate whether it
(iii) Clearance from building openings. is in the open or closed position and
Conductors shall have a clearance of at shall be installed at a readily acces-
least 3 feet (914 mm) from windows, sible location nearest the point of en-
doors, fire escapes, or similar loca- trance of the service-entrance conduc-
tions. Conductors run above the top tors.
level of a window are considered to be (ii) Simultaneous opening of poles.
out of reach from that window and, Each service disconnecting means shall
therefore, do not have to be 3 feet (914 simultaneously disconnect all
mm) away. ungrounded conductors.
(iv) Clearance over roofs. Conductors (2) Services over 600 volts, nominal. The
above roof space accessible to employ- following additional requirements
ees on foot shall have a clearance from apply to services over 600 volts, nomi-
the highest point of the roof surface of nal.
not less than 8 feet (2.44 m) vertical (i) Guarding. Service-entrance con-
clearance for insulated conductors, not ductors installed as open wires shall be
less than 10 feet (3.05 m) vertical or di- guarded to make them accessible only
agonal clearance for covered conduc- to qualified persons.
tors, and not less than 15 feet (4.57 m) (ii) Warning signs. Signs warning of
for bare conductors, except that: high voltage shall be posted where un-
(A) Where the roof space is also ac- authorized employees might come in
cessible to vehicular traffic, the contact with live parts.
vertical clearance shall not be less (e) Overcurrent protection—(1) 600
than 18 feet (5.49 m), or volts, nominal, or less. The following re-
(B) Where the roof space is not nor- quirements apply to overcurrent pro-
mally accessible to employees on foot, tection of circuits rated 600 volts,
fully insulated conductors shall have a nominal, or less.
253
(i) Protection of conductors and equip- (1) Systems to be grounded. The fol-
ment. Conductors and equipment shall lowing systems which supply premises
be protected from overcurrent in ac- wiring shall be grounded:
cordance with their ability to safely (i) Three-wire DC systems. All 3-wire
conduct current. Conductors shall have DC systems shall have their neutral
sufficient ampacity to carry the load. conductor grounded.
(ii) Grounded conductors. Except for (ii) Two-wire DC systems. Two-wire DC
motor-running overload protection, systems operating at over 50 volts
overcurrent devices shall not interrupt through 300 volts between conductors
the continuity of the grounded con- shall be grounded unless they are rec-
ductor unless all conductors of the cir- tifier-derived from an AC system com-
cuit are opened simultaneously. plying with paragraphs (f)(1)(iii),
(iii) Disconnection of fuses and thermal (f)(1)(iv), and (f)(1)(v) of this section.
cutouts. Except for devices provided for (iii) AC circuits, less than 50 volts. AC
current-limiting on the supply side of circuits of less than 50 volts shall be
the service disconnecting means, all grounded if they are installed as over-
cartridge fuses which are accessible to head conductors outside of buildings or
other than qualified persons and all if they are supplied by transformers
fuses and thermal cutouts on circuits and the transformer primary supply
over 150 volts to ground shall be pro- system is ungrounded or exceeds 150
vided with disconnecting means. This volts to ground.
disconnecting means shall be installed (iv) AC systems, 50 volts to 1000 volts.
so that the fuse or thermal cutout can AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts
be disconnected from its supply with- shall be grounded under any of the fol-
out disrupting service to equipment lowing conditions, unless exempted by
and circuits unrelated to those pro- paragraph (f)(1)(v) of this section:
tected by the overcurrent device. (A) If the system can be so grounded
(iv) Location in or on premises. Over- that the maximum voltage to ground
current devices shall be readily acces- on the ungrounded conductors does not
sible. Overcurrent devices shall not be exceed 150 volts;
located where they could create an em- (B) If the system is nominally rated
ployee safety hazard by being exposed 480Y/277 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which
to physical damage or located in the the neutral is used as a circuit con-
vicinity of easily ignitible material. ductor;
(v) Arcing or suddenly moving parts. (C) If the system is nominally rated
Fuses and circuit breakers shall be so 240/120 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which
located or shielded that employees will the midpoint of one phase is used as a
not be burned or otherwise injured by circuit conductor; or
their operation. (D) If a service conductor is
(vi) Circuit breakers—(A) Circuit uninsulated.
breakers shall clearly indicate whether (v) Exceptions. AC systems of 50 volts
they are in the open (off) or closed (on) to 1000 volts are not required to be
position. grounded if the system is separately
(B) Where circuit breaker handles on derived and is supplied by a trans-
switchboards are operated vertically former that has a primary voltage rat-
rather than horizontally or ing less than 1000 volts, provided all of
rotationally, the up position of the the following conditions are met:
handle shall be the closed (on) position. (A) The system is used exclusively
(C) If used as switches in 120-volt, flu- for control circuits,
orescent lighting circuits, circuit (B) The conditions of maintenance
breakers shall be marked ‘‘SWD.’’ and supervision assure that only quali-
(2) Over 600 volts, nominal. Feeders fied persons will service the installa-
and branch circuits over 600 volts, tion,
nominal, shall have short-circuit pro- (C) Continuity of control power is re-
tection. quired, and
(f) Grounding. Paragraphs (f)(1) (D) Ground detectors are installed on
through (f)(11) of this section contain the control system.

grounding requirements for systems, (2) Separately derived systems. Where
circuits, and equipment. paragraph (f)(1) of this section requires
254
grounding of wiring systems whose circuit conductor to the grounding

power is derived from generator, trans- electrode. Both the equipment ground-
former, or converter windings and has ing conductor and the grounding elec-
no direct electrical connection, includ- trode conductor shall be connected to
ing a solidly connected grounded cir- the grounded circuit conductor on the
cuit conductor, to supply conductors supply side of the service disconnecting
originating in another system, para- means, or on the supply side of the sys-
graph (f)(5) of this section shall also tem disconnecting means or overcur-
apply. rent devices if the system is separately
(3) Portable and vehicle-mounted gen- derived.
erators—(i) Portable generators. Under (ii) Ungrounded systems. For an
the following conditions, the frame of a ungrounded service-supplied system,
portable generator need not be ground- the equipment grounding conductor
ed and may serve as the grounding shall be connected to the grounding
electrode for a system supplied by the electrode conductor at the service
generator: equipment. For an ungrounded sepa-
(A) The generator supplies only rately derived system, the equipment
equipment mounted on the generator grounding conductor shall be con-
and/or cord- and plug-connected equip- nected to the grounding electrode con-
ment through receptacles mounted on ductor at, or ahead of, the system dis-
the generator, and connecting means or overcurrent de-
(B) The noncurrent-carrying metal vices.
parts of equipment and the equipment (6) Grounding path. The path to
grounding conductor terminals of the ground from circuits, equipment, and
receptacles are bonded to the generator enclosures shall be permanent and con-
frame. tinuous.
(ii) Vehicle-mounted generators. Under (7) Supports, enclosures, and equipment
the following conditions the frame of a to be grounded—(i) Supports and enclo-
vehicle may serve as the grounding sures for conductors. Metal cable trays,
electrode for a system supplied by a metal raceways, and metal enclosures
generator located on the vehicle: for conductors shall be grounded, ex-
(A) The frame of the generator is cept that:
bonded to the vehicle frame, and (A) Metal enclosures such as sleeves
(B) The generator supplies only that are used to protect cable assem-
equipment located on the vehicle and/ blies from physical damage need not be
or cord- and plug-connected equipment grounded; and
through receptacles mounted on the (B) Metal enclosures for conductors
vehicle or on the generator, and added to existing installations of open
(C) The noncurrent-carrying metal wire, knob-and-tube wiring, and non-
parts of equipment and the equipment metallic-sheathed cable need not be
grounding conductor terminals of the grounded if all of the following condi-
receptacles are bonded to the generator tions are met:
frame, and (1) Runs are less than 25 feet (7.62 m);
(D) The system complies with all (2) Enclosures are free from probable
other provisions of this section. contact with ground, grounded metal,
(iii) Neutral conductor bonding. A neu- metal laths, or other conductive mate-
tral conductor shall be bonded to the rials; and
generator frame if the generator is a (3) Enclosures are guarded against
component of a separately derived sys- employee contact.
tem. No other conductor need be bond- (ii) Service equipment enclosures. Metal
ed to the generator frame. enclosures for service equipment shall
(4) Conductors to be grounded. For AC be grounded.
premises wiring systems the identified (iii) Fixed equipment. Exposed noncur-
conductor shall be grounded. rent-carrying metal parts of fixed
(5) Grounding connections—(i) Ground- equipment which may become ener-
ed system. For a grounded system, a gized shall be grounded under any of
grounding electrode conductor shall be the following conditions:

used to connect both the equipment (A) If within 8 feet (2.44 m) vertically
grounding conductor and the grounded or 5 feet (1.52 m) horizontally of ground
255
or grounded metal objects and subject (4) Tools likely to be used in wet and/
to employee contact. or conductive locations; and
(B) If located in a wet or damp loca- (5) Portable hand lamps.
tion and subject to employee contact. (6) Tools likely to be used in wet and/
(C) If in electrical contact with or conductive locations need not be
metal. grounded if supplied through an iso-
(D) If in a hazardous (classified) loca- lating transformer with an ungrounded
tion. secondary of not over 50 volts. Listed
(E) If supplied by a metal-clad, or labeled portable tools and appli-
metal-sheathed, or grounded metal ances protected by a system of double
raceway wiring method. insulation, or its equivalent, need not
(F) If equipment operates with any be grounded. If such a system is em-
terminal at over 150 volts to ground; ployed, the equipment shall be distinc-
however, the following need not be tively marked to indicate that the tool
grounded: or appliance utilizes a system of double
(1) Enclosures for switches or circuit insulation.
breakers used for other than service (v) Nonelectrical equipment. The metal
equipment and accessible to qualified parts of the following nonelectrical
persons only; equipment shall be grounded: Frames
(2) Metal frames of electrically heat- and tracks of electrically operated
ed appliances which are permanently
cranes; frames of nonelectrically driv-
and effectively insulated from ground;
en elevator cars to which electric con-
and
ductors are attached; hand-operated
(3) The cases of distribution appa-
metal shifting ropes or cables of elec-
ratus such as transformers and capaci-
tric elevators, and metal partitions,
tors mounted on wooden poles at a
grill work, and similar metal enclo-
height exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m) above
sures around equipment of over IkV be-
ground or grade level.
tween conductors.
(iv) Equipment connected by cord and
plug. Under any of the conditions de- (8) Methods of grounding equipment—
scribed in paragraphs (f)(7)(iv)(A) (i) With circuit conductors. Noncurrent-
through (f)(7)(iv)(C) of this section, ex- carrying metal parts of fixed equip-
posed noncurrent-carrying metal parts ment, if required to be grounded by
of cord- and plug-connected equipment this subpart, shall be grounded by an
which may become energized shall be equipment grounding conductor which
grounded: is contained within the same raceway,
(A) If in a hazardous (classified) loca- cable, or cord, or runs with or encloses
tion (see § 1926.407). the circuit conductors. For DC circuits
(B) If operated at over 150 volts to only, the equipment grounding con-
ground, except for guarded motors and ductor may be run separately from the
metal frames of electrically heated ap- circuit conductors.
pliances if the appliance frames are (ii) Grounding conductor. A conductor
permanently and effectively insulated used for grounding fixed or movable
from ground. equipment shall have capacity to con-
(C) If the equipment is one of the duct safely any fault current which
types listed in paragraphs may be imposed on it.
(f)(7)(iv)(C)(1) through (f)(7)(iv)(C)(5) of (iii) Equipment considered effectively
this section. However, even though the grounded. Electric equipment is consid-
equipment may be one of these types, ered to be effectively grounded if it is
it need not be grounded if it is exempt- secured to, and in electrical contact
ed by paragraph (f)(7)(iv)(C)(6). with, a metal rack or structure that is
(1) Hand held motor-operated tools; provided for its support and the metal
(2) Cord- and plug-connected equip- rack or structure is grounded by the
ment used in damp or wet locations or method specified for the noncurrent-
by employees standing on the ground carrying metal parts of fixed equip-
or on metal floors or working inside of ment in paragraph (f)(8)(i) of this sec-
metal tanks or boilers; tion. Metal car frames supported by

(3) Portable and mobile X-ray and as- metal hoisting cables attached to or
sociated equipment; running over metal sheaves or drums of
256
grounded elevator machines are also tem neutral impedance is connected

considered to be effectively grounded. shall be isolated from and separated in
(9) Bonding. If bonding conductors are the ground by at least 20 feet (6.1 m)
used to assure electrical continuity, from any other system or equipment
they shall have the capacity to conduct grounding electrode, and there shall be
any fault current which may be im- no direct connection between the
posed. grounding electrodes, such as buried
(10) Made electrodes. If made elec- pipe, fence or like objects.
trodes are used, they shall be free from (iii) Grounding of equipment. All non-
nonconductive coatings, such as paint current-carrying metal parts of port-
or enamel; and, if practicable, they able equipment and fixed equipment in-
shall be embedded below permanent cluding their associated fences,
moisture level. A single electrode con- housings, enclosures, and supporting
sisting of a rod, pipe or plate which has structures shall be grounded. However,
a resistance to ground greater than 25 equipment which is guarded by loca-
ohms shall be augmented by one addition and isolated from ground need not
tional electrode installed no closer be grounded. Additionally, pole-mount-
than 6 feet (1.83 m) to the first elec- ed distribution apparatus at a height
trode. exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m) above ground
(11) Grounding of systems and circuits or grade level need not be grounded.
of 1000 volts and over (high voltage)—(i)
General. If high voltage systems are [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 54
grounded, they shall comply with all FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
applicable provisions of paragraphs 1996]
(f)(1) through (f)(10) of this section as
§ 1926.405 Wiring methods, compo-
supplemented and modified by this nents, and equipment for general
paragraph (f)(11). use.
(ii) Grounding of systems supplying
portable or mobile equipment. Systems (a) Wiring methods. The provisions of
supplying portable or mobile high volt- this paragraph do not apply to conduc-
age equipment, other than substations tors which form an integral part of
installed on a temporary basis, shall equipment such as motors, controllers,
comply with the following: motor control centers and like equip-
(A) Portable and mobile high voltage ment.
equipment shall be supplied from a sys- (1) General requirements—(i) Electrical
tem having its neutral grounded continuity of metal raceways and enclo-
through an impedance. If a delta-con- sures. Metal raceways, cable armor, and
nected high voltage system is used to other metal enclosures for conductors
supply the equipment, a system neu- shall be metallically joined together
tral shall be derived. into a continuous electric conductor
(B) Exposed noncurrent-carrying and shall be so connected to all boxes,
metal parts of portable and mobile fittings, and cabinets as to provide ef-
equipment shall be connected by an fective electrical continuity.
equipment grounding conductor to the (ii) Wiring in ducts. No wiring systems
point at which the system neutral im- of any type shall be installed in ducts
pedance is grounded. used to transport dust, loose stock or
(C) Ground-fault detection and relay- flammable vapors. No wiring system of
ing shall be provided to automatically any type shall be installed in any duct
de-energize any high voltage system used for vapor removal or in any shaft
component which has developed a containing only such ducts.
ground fault. The continuity of the (2) Temporary wiring—(i) Scope. The
equipment grounding conductor shall provisions of paragraph (a)(2) of this
be continuously monitored so as to de- section apply to temporary electrical
energize automatically the high volt- power and lighting wiring methods
age feeder to the portable equipment which may be of a class less than would
upon loss of continuity of the equip- be required for a permanent installa-
ment grounding conductor. tion. Except as specifically modified in

(D) The grounding electrode to which paragraph (a)(2) of this section, all
the portable or mobile equipment sys- other requirements of this subpart for
257
permanent wiring shall apply to tem- (G) Portable electric lighting used in
porary wiring installations. Temporary wet and/or other conductive locations,
wiring shall be removed immediately as for example, drums, tanks, and ves-
upon completion of construction or the sels, shall be operated at 12 volts or
purpose for which the wiring was in- less. However, 120-volt lights may be
stalled. used if protected by a ground-fault cir-
(ii) General requirements for temporary cuit interrupter.
wiring—(A) Feeders shall originate in a (H) A box shall be used wherever a
distribution center. The conductors change is made to a raceway system or
shall be run as multiconductor cord or a cable system which is metal clad or
cable assemblies or within raceways; metal sheathed.
or, where not subject to physical dam- (I) Flexible cords and cables shall be
age, they may be run as open conduc- protected from damage. Sharp corners
tors on insulators not more than 10 feet and projections shall be avoided. Flexi-
(3.05 m) apart. ble cords and cables may pass through
(B) Branch circuits shall originate in doorways or other pinch points, if pro-
a power outlet or panelboard. Conduc- tection is provided to avoid damage.
tors shall be run as multiconductor (J) Extension cord sets used with
cord or cable assemblies or open con- portable electric tools and appliances
ductors, or shall be run in raceways. shall be of three-wire type and shall be
All conductors shall be protected by designed for hard or extra-hard usage.
overcurrent devices at their ampacity. Flexible cords used with temporary and
Runs of open conductors shall be lo- portable lights shall be designed for
cated where the conductors will not be hard or extra-hard usage.
subject to physical damage, and the NOTE: The National Electrical Code, ANSI/
conductors shall be fastened at inter- NFPA 70, in Article 400, Table 400–4, lists
vals not exceeding 10 feet (3.05 m). No various types of flexible cords, some of which
branch-circuit conductors shall be laid are noted as being designed for hard or extra-
on the floor. Each branch circuit that hard usage. Examples of these types of flexi-
supplies receptacles or fixed equipment ble cords include hard service cord (types S,
shall contain a separate equipment ST, SO, STO) and junior hard service cord
(types SJ, SJO, SJT, SJTO).
grounding conductor if the branch cir-
cuit is run as open conductors. (iii) Guarding. For temporary wiring
(C) Receptacles shall be of the over 600 volts, nominal, fencing, bar-
grounding type. Unless installed in a riers, or other effective means shall be
complete metallic raceway, each provided to prevent access of other
branch circuit shall contain a separate than authorized and qualified per-
equipment grounding conductor, and sonnel.
all receptacles shall be electrically (b) Cabinets, boxes, and fittings—(1)
connected to the grounding conductor. Conductors entering boxes, cabinets, or
Receptacles for uses other than tem- fittings. Conductors entering boxes,
porary lighting shall not be installed cabinets, or fittings shall be protected
on branch circuits which supply tem- from abrasion, and openings through
porary lighting. Receptacles shall not which conductors enter shall be effec-
be connected to the same ungrounded tively closed. Unused openings in cabi-
conductor of multiwire circuits which nets, boxes, and fittings shall also be
supply temporary lighting. effectively closed.
(D) Disconnecting switches or plug (2) Covers and canopies. All pull boxes,
connectors shall be installed to permit junction boxes, and fittings shall be
the disconnection of all ungrounded provided with covers. If metal covers
conductors of each temporary circuit. are used, they shall be grounded. In en-
(E) All lamps for general illumina- ergized installations each outlet box
tion shall be protected from accidental shall have a cover, faceplate, or fixture
contact or breakage. Metal-case sock- canopy. Covers of outlet boxes having
ets shall be grounded. holes through which flexible cord pend-
(F) Temporary lights shall not be ants pass shall be provided with bush-
suspended by their electric cords unless ings designed for the purpose or shall
cords and lights are designed for this have smooth, well-rounded surfaces on
means of suspension. which the cords may bear.
258
(3) Pull and junction boxes for systems (2) Switches and circuit breakers.
over 600 volts, nominal. In addition to Switches, circuit breakers, and switch-
other requirements in this section for boards installed in wet locations shall
pull and junction boxes, the following be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures.
shall apply to these boxes for systems (f) Conductors for general wiring. All
over 600 volts, nominal: conductors used for general wiring
(i) Complete enclosure. Boxes shall shall be insulated unless otherwise per-
provide a complete enclosure for the mitted in this subpart. The conductor
contained conductors or cables. insulation shall be of a type that is
(ii) Covers. Boxes shall be closed by suitable for the voltage, operating tem-
covers securely fastened in place. Un- perature, and location of use. Insulated
derground box covers that weigh over conductors shall be distinguishable by
100 pounds (43.6 kg) meet this require- appropriate color or other means as
ment. Covers for boxes shall be perma- being grounded conductors,
nently marked ‘‘HIGH VOLTAGE.’’ ungrounded conductors, or equipment
The marking shall be on the outside of grounding conductors.
the box cover and shall be readily visi- (g) Flexible cords and cables—(1) Use of
ble and legible. flexible cords and cables—(i) Permitted
(c) Knife switches. Single-throw knife uses. Flexible cords and cables shall be
switches shall be so connected that the suitable for conditions of use and loca-
tion. Flexible cords and cables shall be
blades are dead when the switch is in
used only for:
the open position. Single-throw knife
(A) Pendants;
switches shall be so placed that gravity
(B) Wiring of fixtures;
will not tend to close them. Single-
(C) Connection of portable lamps or
throw knife switches approved for use
appliances;
in the inverted position shall be pro-
(D) Elevator cables;
vided with a locking device that will
(E) Wiring of cranes and hoists;
ensure that the blades remain in the
(F) Connection of stationary equip-
open position when so set. Double-
ment to facilitate their frequent inter-
throw knife switches may be mounted
change;
so that the throw will be either (G) Prevention of the transmission of
vertical or horizontal. However, if the noise or vibration; or
throw is vertical, a locking device shall (H) Appliances where the fastening
be provided to ensure that the blades means and mechanical connections are
remain in the open position when so designed to permit removal for mainte-
set. nance and repair.
(d) Switchboards and panelboards. (ii) Attachment plugs for cords. If used
Switchboards that have any exposed as permitted in paragraphs (g)(1)(i)(C),
live parts shall be located in perma- (g)(1)(i)(F), or (g)(1)(i)(H) of this sec-
nently dry locations and accessible tion, the flexible cord shall be equipped
only to qualified persons. Panelboards with an attachment plug and shall be
shall be mounted in cabinets, cutout energized from a receptacle outlet.
boxes, or enclosures designed for the (iii) Prohibited uses. Unless necessary
purpose and shall be dead front. How- for a use permitted in paragraph
ever, panelboards other than the dead (g)(1)(i) of this section, flexible cords
front externally-operable type are per- and cables shall not be used:
mitted where accessible only to quali- (A) As a substitute for the fixed wir-
fied persons. Exposed blades of knife ing of a structure;
switches shall be dead when open. (B) Where run through holes in walls,
(e) Enclosures for damp or wet loca- ceilings, or floors;
tions—(1) Cabinets, fittings, and boxes. (C) Where run through doorways,
Cabinets, cutout boxes, fittings, boxes, windows, or similar openings, except as
and panelboard enclosures in damp or permitted in paragraph (a)(2)(ii)(1) of
wet locations shall be installed so as to this section;
prevent moisture or water from enter- (D) Where attached to building sur-
ing and accumulating within the enclo- faces; or

sures. In wet locations the enclosures (E) Where concealed behind building
shall be weatherproof. walls, ceilings, or floors.
259
(2) Identification, splices, and termi- (i) For installation in lighting, fix-
nations—(i) Identification. A conductor tures and in similar equipment where
of a flexible cord or cable that is used enclosed or protected and not subject
as a grounded conductor or an equip- to bending or twisting in use; or
ment grounding conductor shall be dis- (ii) For connecting lighting fixtures
tinguishable from other conductors. to the branch-circuit conductors sup-
(ii) Marking. Type SJ, SJO, SJT, plying the fixtures.
SJTO, S, SO, ST, and STO cords shall (3) Uses not permitted. Fixture wires
not be used unless durably marked on shall not be used as branch-circuit con-
the surface with the type designation, ductors except as permitted for Class 1
size, and number of conductors. power-limited circuits.
(iii) Splices. Flexible cords shall be (j) Equipment for general use—(1)
used only in continuous lengths with- Lighting fixtures, lampholders, lamps,
out splice or tap. Hard service flexible and receptacles—(i) Live parts. Fixtures,
cords No. 12 or larger may be repaired lampholders, lamps, rosettes, and re-
if spliced so that the splice retains the ceptacles shall have no live parts nor-
insulation, outer sheath properties, mally exposed to employee contact.
and usage characteristics of the cord However, rosettes and cleat-type
being spliced. lampholders and receptacles located at
(iv) Strain relief. Flexible cords shall least 8 feet (2.44 m) above the floor may
be connected to devices and fittings so have exposed parts.
that strain relief is provided which will (ii) Support. Fixtures, lampholders,
prevent pull from being directly trans- rosettes, and receptacles shall be se-
mitted to joints or terminal screws. curely supported. A fixture that weighs
(v) Cords passing through holes. Flexi- more than 6 pounds (2.72 kg) or exceeds
ble cords and cables shall be protected 16 inches (406 mm) in any dimension
by bushings or fittings where passing shall not be supported by the screw
through holes in covers, outlet boxes, shell of a lampholder.
or similar enclosures.
(iii) Portable lamps. Portable lamps
(h) Portable cables over 600 volts, nomi-
shall be wired with flexible cord and an
nal. Multiconductor portable cable for
attachment plug of the polarized or
use in supplying power to portable or
grounding type. If the portable lamp
mobile equipment at over 600 volts,
uses an Edison-based lampholder, the
nominal, shall consist of No. 8 or larger
grounded conductor shall be identified
conductors employing flexible strand-
and attached to the screw shell and the
ing. Cables operated at over 2000 volts
identified blade of the attachment
shall be shielded for the purpose of con-
plug. In addition, portable handlamps
fining the voltage stresses to the insu-
shall comply with the following:
lation. Grounding conductors shall be
(A) Metal shell, paperlined
provided. Connectors for these cables
lampholders shall not be used;
shall be of a locking type with provi-
sions to prevent their opening or clos- (B) Handlamps shall be equipped with
ing while energized. Strain relief shall a handle of molded composition or
be provided at connections and termi- other insulating material;
nations. Portable cables shall not be (C) Handlamps shall be equipped with
operated with splices unless the splices a substantial guard attached to the
are of the permanent molded, vulcan- lampholder or handle;
ized, or other equivalent type. Termi- (D) Metallic guards shall be grounded
nation enclosures shall be marked with by the means of an equipment ground-
a high voltage hazard warning, and tering conductor run within the power
minations shall be accessible only to supply cord.
authorized and qualified personnel. (iv) Lampholders. Lampholders of the
(i) Fixture wires—(1) General. Fixture screw-shell type shall be installed for
wires shall be suitable for the voltage, use as lampholders only. Lampholders
temperature, and location of use. A fix- installed in wet or damp locations shall
ture wire which is used as a grounded be of the weatherproof type.
conductor shall be identified. (v) Fixtures. Fixtures installed in wet

(2) Uses permitted. Fixture wires may or damp locations shall be identified
be used: for the purpose and shall be installed
260
so that water cannot enter or accumu- ductors and shall be so designed that
late in wireways, lampholders, or other no pole can be operated independently.
electrical parts. (C) If a motor and the driven machin-
(2) Receptacles, cord connectors, and at- ery are not in sight from the controller
tachment plugs (caps)—(i) Configuration. location, the installation shall comply
Receptacles, cord connectors, and at- with one of the following conditions:
tachment plugs shall be constructed so (1) The controller disconnecting
that no receptacle or cord connector means shall be capable of being locked
will accept an attachment plug with a in the open position.
different voltage or current rating than (2) A manually operable switch that
that for which the device is intended. will disconnect the motor from its
However, a 20-ampere T-slot receptacle source of supply shall be placed in
or cord connector may accept a 15-am- sight from the motor location.
pere attachment plug of the same volt- (D) The disconnecting means shall
age rating. Receptacles connected to plainly indicate whether it is in the
circuits having different voltages, fre- open (off) or closed (on) position.
quencies, or types of current (ac or dc) (E) The disconnecting means shall be
on the same premises shall be of such readily accessible. If more than one
design that the attachment plugs used disconnect is provided for the same
on these circuits are not interchange- equipment, only one need be readily
able. accessible.
(ii) Damp and wet locations. A recep- (F) An individual disconnecting
tacle installed in a wet or damp loca- means shall be provided for each
tion shall be designed for the location. motor, but a single disconnecting
means may be used for a group of mo-
(3) Appliances—(i) Live parts. Appli-
tors under any one of the following
ances, other than those in which the
conditions:
current-carrying parts at high tem-
(1) If a number of motors drive spe-
peratures are necessarily exposed, shall
cial parts of a single machine or piece
have no live parts normally exposed to
of apparatus, such as a metal or wood-
employee contact.
working machine, crane, or hoist;
(ii) Disconnecting means. A means
(2) If a group of motors is under the
shall be provided to disconnect each
protection of one set of branch-circuit
appliance.
protective devices; or
(iii) Rating. Each appliance shall be (3) If a group of motors is in a single
marked with its rating in volts and room in sight from the location of the
amperes or volts and watts. disconnecting means.
(4) Motors. This paragraph applies to (iii) Motor overload, short-circuit, and
motors, motor circuits, and control- ground-fault protection. Motors, motor-
lers. control apparatus, and motor branch-
(i) In sight from. If specified that one circuit conductors shall be protected
piece of equipment shall be ‘‘in sight against overheating due to motor over-
from’’ another piece of equipment, one loads or failure to start, and against
shall be visible and not more than 50 short-circuits or ground faults. These
feet (15.2 m) from the other. provisions do not require overload pro-
(ii) Disconnecting means—(A) A dis- tection that will stop a motor where a
connecting means shall be located in shutdown is likely to introduce addi-
sight from the controller location. The tional or increased hazards, as in the
controller disconnecting means for case of fire pumps, or where continued
motor branch circuits over 600 volts, operation of a motor is necessary for a
nominal, may be out of sight of the safe shutdown of equipment or process
controller, if the controller is marked and motor overload sensing devices are
with a warning label giving the loca- connected to a supervised alarm.
tion and identification of the dis- (iv) Protection of live parts—all
connecting means which is to be locked voltages—(A) Stationary motors having
in the open position. commutators, collectors, and brush
(B) The disconnecting means shall rigging located inside of motor end
disconnect the motor and the con- brackets and not conductively con-
troller from all ungrounded supply connected to supply circuits operating at
261
more than 150 volts to ground need not from fires which may originate in oil-
have such parts guarded. Exposed live insulated transformers attached to or
parts of motors and controllers oper- adjacent to a building or combustible
ating at 50 volts or more between ter- material.
minals shall be guarded against acci- (vi) Transformer vaults. Transformer
dental contact by any of the following: vaults shall be constructed so as to
(1) By installation in a room or en- contain fire and combustible liquids
closure that is accessible only to quali- within the vault and to prevent unau-
fied persons; thorized access. Locks and latches
(2) By installation on a balcony, gal- shall be so arranged that a vault door
lery, or platform, so elevated and ar- can be readily opened from the inside.
ranged as to exclude unqualified per- (vii) Pipes and ducts. Any pipe or duct
sons; or system foreign to the vault installa-
(3) By elevation 8 feet (2.44 m) or tion shall not enter or pass through a
more above the floor. transformer vault.
(B) Where live parts of motors or con- (viii) Material storage. Materials shall
trollers operating at over 150 volts to not be stored in transformer vaults.
ground are guarded against accidental (6) Capacitors—(i) Drainage of stored
contact only by location, and where ad- charge. All capacitors, except surge ca-
justment or other attendance may be pacitors or capacitors included as a
necessary during the operation of the component part of other apparatus,
apparatus, insulating mats or plat- shall be provided with an automatic
forms shall be provided so that the at- means of draining the stored charge
tendant cannot readily touch live parts and maintaining the discharged state
unless standing on the mats or plat- after the capacitor is disconnected
forms. from its source of supply.
(5) Transformers—(i) Application. The (ii) Over 600 volts. Capacitors rated
following paragraphs cover the instal- over 600 volts, nominal, shall comply
lation of all transformers, except: with the following additional require-
(A) Current transformers; ments:
(B) Dry-type transformers installed (A) Isolating or disconnecting switch-
as a component part of other appa- es (with no interrupting rating) shall
ratus; be interlocked with the load inter-
(C) Transformers which are an inte- rupting device or shall be provided
gral part of an X-ray, high frequency, with prominently displayed caution
or electrostatic-coating apparatus; signs to prevent switching load cur-
(D) Transformers used with Class 2 rent.
and Class 3 circuits, sign and outline (B) For series capacitors the proper
lighting, electric discharge lighting, switching shall be assured by use of at
and power-limited fire-protective sig- least one of the following:
naling circuits. (1) Mechanically sequenced isolating
(ii) Operating voltage. The operating and bypass switches,
voltage of exposed live parts of trans- (2) Interlocks, or
former installations shall be indicated
(3) Switching procedure prominently
by warning signs or visible markings
displayed at the switching location.
on the equipment or structure.
(iii) Transformers over 35 kV. Dry- [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61
type, high fire point liquid-insulated, FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
and askarel-insulated transformers in-
stalled indoors and rated over 35 kV § 1926.406 Specific purpose equipment
shall be in a vault. and installations.
(iv) Oil-insulated transformers. If they (a) Cranes and hoists. This paragraph
present a fire hazard to employees, oil- applies to the installation of electric
insulated transformers installed in- equipment and wiring used in connec-
doors shall be in a vault. tion with cranes, monorail hoists,
(v) Fire protection. Combustible mate- hoists, and all runways.
rial, combustible buildings and parts of (1) Disconnecting means—(i) Runway

buildings, fire escapes, and door and conductor disconnecting means. A readily
window openings shall be safeguarded accessible disconnecting means shall
262
be provided between the runway con- reliable metal-to-metal contact. In this

tact conductors and the power supply. case a separate bonding conductor
(ii) Disconnecting means for cranes and shall be provided.
monorail hoists. A disconnecting means, (b) Elevators, escalators, and moving
capable of being locked in the open po- walks—(1) Disconnecting means. Ele-
sition, shall be provided in the leads vators, escalators, and moving walks
from the runway contact conductors or shall have a single means for dis-
other power supply on any crane or connecting all ungrounded main power
monorail hoist. supply conductors for each unit.
(A) If this additional disconnecting (2) Control panels. If control panels
means is not readily accessible from are not located in the same space as
the crane or monorail hoist operating the drive machine, they shall be lo-
station, means shall be provided at the cated in cabinets with doors or panels
operating station to open the power capable of being locked closed.
circuit to all motors of the crane or (c) Electric welders—disconnecting
monorail hoist. means—(1) Motor-generator, AC trans-
(B) The additional disconnect may be former, and DC rectifier arc welders. A
omitted if a monorail hoist or hand- disconnecting means shall be provided
propelled crane bridge installation in the supply circuit for each motor-
meets all of the following: generator arc welder, and for each AC
(1) The unit is floor controlled;
transformer and DC rectifier arc welder
(2) The unit is within view of the
which is not equipped with a dis-
power supply disconnecting means; and
connect mounted as an integral part of
(3) No fixed work platform has been
the welder.
provided for servicing the unit.
(2) Control. A limit switch or other (2) Resistance welders. A switch or cir-
device shall be provided to prevent the cuit breaker shall be provided by which
load block from passing the safe upper each resistance welder and its control
limit of travel of any hoisting mecha- equipment can be isolated from the
nism. supply circuit. The ampere rating of
(3) Clearance. The dimension of the this disconnecting means shall not be
working space in the direction of ac- less than the supply conductor
cess to live parts which may require ampacity.
examination, adjustment, servicing, or (d) X-Ray equipment—(1) Disconnecting
maintenance while alive shall be a means—(i) General. A disconnecting
minimum of 2 feet 6 inches (762 mm). means shall be provided in the supply
Where controls are enclosed in cabi- circuit. The disconnecting means shall
nets, the door(s) shall open at least 90 be operable from a location readily ac-
degrees or be removable, or the instal- cessible from the X-ray control. For
lation shall provide equivalent access. equipment connected to a 120-volt
(4) Grounding. All exposed metal branch circuit of 30 amperes or less, a
parts of cranes, monorail hoists, hoists grounding-type attachment plug cap
and accessories including pendant con- and receptacle of proper rating may
trols shall be metallically joined to- serve as a disconnecting means.
gether into a continuous electrical con- (ii) More than one piece of equipment.
ductor so that the entire crane or hoist If more than one piece of equipment is
will be grounded in accordance with operated from the same high-voltage
§ 1926.404(f). Moving parts, other than circuit, each piece or each group of
removable accessories or attachments, equipment as a unit shall be provided
having metal-to-metal bearing surfaces with a high-voltage switch or equiva-
shall be considered to be electrically lent disconnecting means. This dis-
connected to each other through the connecting means shall be constructed,
bearing surfaces for grounding pur- enclosed, or located so as to avoid con-
poses. The trolley frame and bridge tact by employees with its live parts.
frame shall be considered as elec- (2) Control—Radiographic and
trically grounded through the bridge fluoroscopic types. Radiographic and
and trolley wheels and its respective fluoroscopic-type equipment shall be

tracks unless conditions such as paint effectively enclosed or shall have inter-
or other insulating materials prevent locks that deenergize the equipment
263
automatically to prevent ready access ture or temperature range, based on

to live current-carrying parts. operation in a 40-degree C ambient, for
which it is approved. The temperature
§ 1926.407 Hazardous (classified) loca- marking shall not exceed the ignition
tions. temperature of the specific gas, vapor,
(a) Scope. This section sets forth re- or dust to be encountered. However,
quirements for electric equipment and the following provisions modify this
wiring in locations which are classified marking requirement for specific
depending on the properties of the equipment:
flammable vapors, liquids or gases, or (A) Equipment of the non-heat-pro-
combustible dusts or fibers which may ducing type (such as junction boxes,
be present therein and the likelihood conduit, and fitting) and equipment of
that a flammable or combustible con- the heat-producing type having a max-
centration or quantity is present. Each imum temperature of not more than
room, section or area shall be consid- 100 degrees C (212 degrees F) need not
ered individually in determining its have a marked operating temperature
classification. These hazardous (classi- or temperature range.
fied) locations are assigned six designa- (B) Fixed lighting fixtures marked
tions as follows: for use only in Class I, Division 2 loca-
tions need not be marked to indicate
Class I, Division 1 the group.
Class I, Division 2 (C) Fixed general-purpose equipment
Class II, Division 1
Class II, Division 2
in Class I locations, other than lighting
Class III, Division l fixtures, which is acceptable for use in
Class III, Division 2 Class I, Division 2 locations need not be
marked with the class, group, division,
For definitions of these locations see or operating temperature.
§ 1926.449. All applicable requirements (D) Fixed dust-tight equipment,
in this subpart apply to all hazardous other than lighting fixtures, which is
(classified) locations, unless modified acceptable for use in Class II, Division
by provisions of this section. 2 and Class III locations need not be
(b) Electrical installations. Equipment, marked with the class, group, division,
wiring methods, and installations of or operating temperature.
equipment in hazardous (classified) lo- (3) Safe for the hazardous (classified)
cations shall be approved as intrinsi- location. Equipment which is safe for
cally safe or approved for the haz- the location shall be of a type and de-
ardous (classified) location or safe for sign which the employer demonstrates
the hazardous (classified) location. Re- will provide protection from the haz-
quirements for each of these options ards arising from the combustibility
are as follows: and flammability of vapors, liquids,
(1) Intrinsically safe. Equipment and gases, dusts, or fibers.
associated wiring approved as intrinsi-
cally safe is permitted in any haz- NOTE: The National Electrical Code, NFPA
70, contains guidelines for determining the
ardous (classified) location included in
type and design of equipment and installa-
its listing or labeling. tions which will meet this requirement. The
(2) Approved for the hazardous (classi- guidelines of this document address electric
fied) location—(i) General. Equipment wiring, equipment, and systems installed in
shall be approved not only for the class hazardous (classified) locations and contain
of location but also for the ignitible or specific provisions for the following: wiring
combustible properties of the specific methods, wiring connections, conductor in-
gas, vapor, dust, or fiber that will be sulation, flexible cords, sealing and drainage,
transformers, capacitors, switches, circuit
present.
breakers, fuses, motor controllers, recep-
NOTE: NFPA 70, the National Electrical tacles, attachment plugs, meters, relays, in-
Code, lists or defines hazardous gases, va- struments, resistors, generators, motors,
pors, and dusts by ‘‘Groups’’ characterized by lighting fixtures, storage battery charging
their ignitible or combustible properties. equipment, electric cranes, electric hoists
and similar equipment, utilization equip-

(ii) Marking. Equipment shall not be ment, signaling systems, alarm systems, re-
used unless it is marked to show the mote control systems, local loud speaker and
class, group, and operating tempera- communication systems, ventilation piping,
264
live parts, lightning surge protection, and tion of circuit breakers shall be pro-
grounding. Compliance with these guidelines vided.
will constitute one means, but not the only
(ii) Fused cutouts. Fused cutouts in-
means, of compliance with this paragraph.
stalled in buildings or transformer
(c) Conduits. All conduits shall be vaults shall be of a type identified for
threaded and shall be made wrench- the purpose. They shall be readily ac-
tight. Where it is impractical to make cessible for fuse replacement.
a threaded joint tight, a bonding jump- (iii) Equipment isolating means. A
er shall be utilized. means shall be provided to completely
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 isolate equipment for inspection and
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] repairs. Isolating means which are not
designed to interrupt the load current
§ 1926.408 Special systems. of the circuit shall be either
interlocked with a circuit interrupter
(a) Systems over 600 volts, nominal.
or provided with a sign warning
Paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) of this
against opening them under load.
section contain general requirements
for all circuits and equipment operated (3) Mobile and portable equipment—(i)
at over 600 volts. Power cable connections to mobile ma-
(1) Wiring methods for fixed installa- chines. A metallic enclosure shall be
tions—(i) Above ground. Above-ground provided on the mobile machine for en-
conductors shall be installed in rigid closing the terminals of the power
metal conduit, in intermediate metal cable. The enclosure shall include pro-
conduit, in cable trays, in cablebus, in visions for a solid connection for the
other suitable raceways, or as open ground wire(s) terminal to ground ef-
runs of metal-clad cable designed for fectively the machine frame. The
the use and purpose. However, open method of cable termination used shall
runs of non-metallic-sheathed cable or prevent any strain or pull on the cable
of bare conductors or busbars may be from stressing the electrical connec-
installed in locations which are acces- tions. The enclosure shall have provi-
sible only to qualified persons. Metallic sion for locking so only authorized
shielding components, such as tapes, qualified persons may open it and shall
wires, or braids for conductors, shall be be marked with a sign warning of the
grounded. Open runs of insulated wires presence of energized parts.
and cables having a bare lead sheath or (ii) Guarding live parts. All energized
a braided outer covering shall be sup- switching and control parts shall be en-
ported in a manner designed to prevent closed in effectively grounded metal
physical damage to the braid or sheath. cabinets or enclosures. Circuit break-
(ii) Installations emerging from the ers and protective equipment shall
ground. Conductors emerging from the have the operating means projecting
ground shall be enclosed in raceways. through the metal cabinet or enclosure
Raceways installed on poles shall be of so these units can be reset without
rigid metal conduit, intermediate locked doors being opened. Enclosures
metal conduit, PVC schedule 80 or and metal cabinets shall be locked so
equivalent extending from the ground that only authorized qualified persons
line up to a point 8 feet (2.44 m) above have access and shall be marked with a
finished grade. Conductors entering a sign warning of the presence of ener-
building shall be protected by an enclo- gized parts. Collector ring assemblies
sure from the ground line to the point on revolving-type machines (shovels,
of entrance. Metallic enclosures shall draglines, etc.) shall be guarded.
be grounded. (4) Tunnel installations—(i) Applica-
(2) Interrupting and isolating devices— tion. The provisions of this paragraph
(i) Circuit breakers. Circuit breakers lo- apply to installation and use of high-
cated indoors shall consist of metal-en- voltage power distribution and utiliza-
closed or fire-resistant, cell-mounted tion equipment which is associated
units. In locations accessible only to with tunnels and which is portable and/
qualified personnel, open mounting of or mobile, such as substations, trailers,

circuit breakers is permitted. A means cars, mobile shovels, draglines, hoists,
of indicating the open and closed posi- drills, dredges, compressors, pumps,
265
conveyors, and underground exca- (B) A Class 1 remote control circuit

vators. or a Class 1 signaling circuit has a volt-
(ii) Conductors. Conductors in tunnels age which does not exceed 600 volts;
shall be installed in one or more of the however, the power output of the
following: source need not be limited.
(A) Metal conduit or other metal (ii) Class 2 and Class 3 circuits—(A)
raceway, Power for Class 2 and Class 3 circuits is
(B) Type MC cable, or limited either inherently (in which no
(C) Other suitable multiconductor overcurrent protection is required) or
cable. by a combination of a power source and
Conductors shall also be so located or overcurrent protection.
guarded as to protect them from phys- (B) The maximum circuit voltage is
ical damage. Multiconductor portable 150 volts AC or DC for a Class 2 inher-
cable may supply mobile equipment. ently limited power source, and 100
An equipment grounding conductor volts AC or DC for a Class 3 inherently
shall be run with circuit conductors in- limited power source.
side the metal raceway or inside the (C) The maximum circuit voltage is
multiconductor cable jacket. The 30 volts AC and 60 volts DC for a Class
equipment grounding conductor may 2 power source limited by overcurrent
be insulated or bare. protection, and 150 volts AC or DC for
(iii) Guarding live parts. Bare termi- a Class 3 power source limited by over-
nals of transformers, switches, motor current protection.
controllers, and other equipment shall (iii) Application. The maximum cir-
be enclosed to prevent accidental con- cuit voltages in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and
tact with energized parts. Enclosures (b)(1)(ii) of this section apply to sinus-
for use in tunnels shall be drip-proof, oidal AC or continuous DC power
weatherproof, or submersible as resources, and where wet contact occur-
quired by the environmental condi- rence is not likely.
tions. (2) Marking. A Class 2 or Class 3
(iv) Disconnecting means. A dis- power supply unit shall not be used un-
connecting means that simultaneously less it is durably marked where plainly
opens all ungrounded conductors shall visible to indicate the class of supply
be installed at each transformer or and its electrical rating.
motor location. (c) Communications systems—(1) Scope.
(v) Grounding and bonding. All non- These provisions for communication
energized metal parts of electric equip- systems apply to such systems as cen-
ment and metal raceways and cable tral-station-connected and non-cen-
sheaths shall be grounded and bonded tral-station-connected telephone cir-
to all metal pipes and rails at the por- cuits, radio receiving and transmitting
tal and at intervals not exceeding 1000 equipment, and outside wiring for fire
feet (305 m) throughout the tunnel. and burglar alarm, and similar central
(b) Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote station systems. These installations
control, signaling, and power-limited cir- need not comply with the provisions of
cuits—(1) Classification. Class 1, Class 2, §§ 1926.403 through 1926.408(b), except
or Class 3 remote control, signaling, or § 1926.404(c)(1)(ii) and § 1926.407.
power-limited circuits are character- (2) Protective devices—(i) Circuits ex-
ized by their usage and electrical power posed to power conductors. Communica-
limitation which differentiates them tion circuits so located as to be ex-
from light and power circuits. These posed to accidental contact with light
circuits are classified in accordance or power conductors operating at over
with their respective voltage and power 300 volts shall have each circuit so ex-
limitations as summarized in para- posed provided with an approved pro-
graphs (b)(1)(i) through (b)(1)(iii) of tector.
this section. (ii) Antenna lead-ins. Each conductor
(i) Class 1 circuits—(A) A Class 1 of a lead-in from an outdoor antenna
power-limited circuit is supplied from shall be provided with an antenna dis-
a source having a rated output of not charge unit or other means that will
more than 30 volts and 1000 volt-am- drain static charges from the antenna
peres. system.
266
(3) Conductor location—(i) Outside of controls accessible to the operating

buildings—(A) Receiving distribution personnel shall be effectively grounded.
lead-in or aerial-drop cables attached Unpowered equipment and enclosures
to buildings and lead-in conductors to shall be considered grounded where
radio transmitters shall be so installed connected to an attached coaxial cable
as to avoid the possibility of accidental with an effectively grounded metallic
contact with electric light or power shield.
conductors.
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61
(B) The clearance between lead-in
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
conductors and any lightning protec-
tion conductors shall not be less than 6 §§ 1926.409–1926.415 [Reserved]
feet (1.83 m).
(ii) On poles. Where practicable, com- SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES
munication conductors on poles shall
be located below the light or power § 1926.416 General requirements.
conductors. Communications conduc-
(a) Protection of employees—(1) No em-
tors shall not be attached to a cross-
ployer shall permit an employee to
arm that carries light or power conduc-
work in such proximity to any part of
tors.
an electric power circuit that the em-
(iii) Inside of buildings. Indoor anten-
nas, lead-ins, and other communication ployee could contact the electric power
conductors attached as open conduc- circuit in the course of work, unless
tors to the inside of buildings shall be the employee is protected against elec-
located at least 2 inches (50.8 mm) from tric shock by deenergizing the circuit
conductors of any light or power or and grounding it or by guarding it ef-
Class 1 circuits unless a special and fectively by insulation or other means.
equally protective method of conductor (2) In work areas where the exact lo-
separation is employed. cation of underground electric
(4) Equipment location. Outdoor metal powerlines is unknown, employees
structures supporting antennas, as well using jack-hammers, bars, or other
as self-supporting antennas such as hand tools which may contact a line
vertical rods or dipole structures, shall shall be provided with insulated protec-
be located as far away from overhead tive gloves.
conductors of electric light and power (3) Before work is begun the em-
circuits of over 150 volts to ground as ployer shall ascertain by inquiry or di-
necessary to avoid the possibility of rect observation, or by instruments,
the antenna or structure falling into or whether any part of an energized elec-
making accidental contact with such tric power circuit, exposed or con-
circuits. cealed, is so located that the perform-
(5) Grounding—(i) Lead-in conductors. ance of the work may bring any person,
If exposed to contact with electric tool, or machine into physical or elec-
light or power conductors, the metal trical contact with the electric power
sheath of aerial cables entering build- circuit. The employer shall post and
ings shall be grounded or shall be inter- maintain proper warning signs where
rupted close to the entrance to the such a circuit exists. The employer
building by an insulating joint or shall advise employees of the location
equivalent device. Where protective de- of such lines, the hazards involved, and
vices are used, they shall be grounded. the protective measures to be taken.
(ii) Antenna structures. Masts and (b) Passageways and open spaces—-(1)
metal structures supporting antennas Barriers or other means of guarding
shall be permanently and effectively shall be provided to ensure that work-
grounded without splice or connection space for electrical equipment will not
in the grounding conductor. be used as a passageway during periods
(iii) Equipment enclosures. Transmit- when energized parts of electrical
ters shall be enclosed in a metal frame equipment are exposed.
or grill or separated from the operating (2) Working spaces, walkways, and
space by a barrier, all metallic parts of similar locations shall be kept clear of
which are effectively connected to cords so as not to create a hazard to
ground. All external metal handles and employees.
267
(c) Load ratings. In existing installa- ronment, no conductors or equipment

tions, no changes in circuit protection shall be located:
shall be made to increase the load in (i) In damp or wet locations;
excess of the load rating of the circuit (ii) Where exposed to gases, fumes,
wiring. vapors, liquids, or other agents having
(d) Fuses. When fuses are installed or a deteriorating effect on the conduc-
removed with one or both terminals en- tors or equipment; or
ergized, special tools insulated for the (iii) Where exposed to excessive tem-
voltage shall be used. peratures.
(e) Cords and cables. (1) Worn or (2) Control equipment, utilization
frayed electric cords or cables shall not equipment, and busways approved for
be used. use in dry locations only shall be pro-
(2) Extension cords shall not be fas- tected against damage from the weath-
tened with staples, hung from nails, or er during building construction.
suspended by wire. (b) Protection against corrosion. Metal
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, raceways, cable armor, boxes, cable
1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings,
58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, fittings, supports, and support hard-
1996; 61 FR 41738, Aug. 12, 1996] ware shall be of materials appropriate
for the environment in which they are
§ 1926.417 Lockout and tagging of cir- to be installed.
cuits.
(a) Controls. Controls that are to be §§ 1926.433–1926.440 [Reserved]
deactivated during the course of work
on energized or deenergized equipment SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL
or circuits shall be tagged. EQUIPMENT
(b) Equipment and circuits. Equipment § 1926.441 Batteries and battery charg-
or circuits that are deenergized shall ing.
be rendered inoperative and shall have
tags attached at all points where such (a) General requirements—(1) Batteries
equipment or circuits can be energized. of the unsealed type shall be located in
(c) Tags. Tags shall be placed to iden- enclosures with outside vents or in well
tify plainly the equipment or circuits ventilated rooms and shall be arranged
being worked on. so as to prevent the escape of fumes,
gases, or electrolyte spray into other
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, areas.
1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; (2) Ventilation shall be provided to
58 FR 35181, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7,
ensure diffusion of the gases from the
1996; 61 FR 41739, Aug. 12, 1996]]
battery and to prevent the accumula-
§§ 1926.418–1926.430 [Reserved] tion of an explosive mixture.
(3) Racks and trays shall be substan-
SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE AND tial and shall be treated to make them
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS resistant to the electrolyte.
(4) Floors shall be of acid resistant
§ 1926.431 Maintenance of equipment. construction unless protected from
The employer shall ensure that all acid accumulations.
wiring components and utilization (5) Face shields, aprons, and rubber
equipment in hazardous locations are gloves shall be provided for workers
maintained in a dust-tight, dust-igni- handling acids or batteries.
tion-proof, or explosion-proof condi- (6) Facilities for quick drenching of
tion, as appropriate. There shall be no the eyes and body shall be provided
loose or missing screws, gaskets, within 25 feet (7.62 m) of battery han-
threaded connections, seals, or other dling areas.
impairments to a tight condition. (7) Facilities shall be provided for
flushing and neutralizing spilled elec-
§ 1926.432 Environmental deteriora- trolyte and for fire protection.
tion of equipment. (b) Charging—(1) Battery charging in-

(a) Deteriorating agents—(1) Unless stallations shall be located in areas
identified for use in the operating envi- designated for that purpose.
268
(2) Charging apparatus shall be pro- structure or finish, or not permanently

tected from damage by trucks. closed in by the structure or finish of
(3) When batteries are being charged, the building. (See ‘‘concealed’’ and ‘‘ex-
the vent caps shall be kept in place to posed.’’)
avoid electrolyte spray. Vent caps shall Accessible. (As applied to equipment.)
be maintained in functioning condi- Admitting close approach; not guarded
tion. by locked doors, elevation, or other ef-
§§ 1926.442–1926.448 [Reserved] fective means. (See‘‘Readily acces-
sible.’’)
DEFINITIONS Ampacity. The current in amperes a
conductor can carry continuously
§ 1926.449 Definitions applicable to under the conditions of use without ex-
this subpart.
ceeding its temperature rating.
The definitions given in this section Appliances. Utilization equipment,
apply to the terms used in subpart K. generally other than industrial, nor-
The definitions given here for ‘‘ap- mally built in standardized sizes or
proved’’ and ‘‘qualified person’’ apply, types, which is installed or connecetcd
instead of the definitions given in as a unit to perform one or more func-
§ 1926.32, to the use of these terms in tions.
subpart K.
Acceptable. An installation or equip- Approved. Acceptable to the author-
ment is acceptable to the Assistant ity enforcing this subpart. The author-
Secretary of Labor, and approved with- ity enforcing this subpart is the Assist-
in the meaning of this subpart K: ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
(a) If it is accepted, or certified, or tional Safety and Health. The defini-
listed, or labeled, or otherwise deter- tion of ‘‘acceptable’’ indicates what is
mined to be safe by a qualified testing acceptable to the Assistant Secretary
laboratory capable of determining the of Labor, and therefore approved with-
suitability of materials and equipment in the meaning of this subpart.
for installation and use in accordance Askarel. A generic term for a group of
with this standard; or nonflammable synthetic chlorinated
(b) With respect to an installation or hydrocarbons used as electrical insu-
equipment of a kind which no qualified lating media. Askarels of various
testing laboratory accepts, certifies, compositional types are used. Under
lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if arcing conditions the gases produced,
it is inspected or tested by another while consisting predominantly of non-
Federal agency, or by a State, munic- combustible hydrogen chloride, can in-
ipal, or other local authority respon- clude varying amounts of combustible
sible for enforcing occupational safety gases depending upon the askarel type.
provisions of the National Electrical Attachment plug (Plug cap)(Cap). A de-
Code, and found in compliance with vice which, by insertion in a recep-
those provisions; or tacle, establishes connection between
(c) With respect to custom-made the conductors of the attached flexible
equipment or related installations cord and the conductors connected per-
which are designed, fabricated for, and
manently to the receptacle.
intended for use by a particular cus-
Automatic. Self-acting, operating by
tomer, if it is determined to be safe for
its intended use by its manufacturer on its own mechanism when actuated by
the basis of test data which the em- some impersonal influence, as for ex-
ployer keeps and makes available for ample, a change in current strength,
inspection to the Assistant Secretary pressure, temperature, or mechanical
and his authorized representatives. configuration.
Accepted. An installation is ‘‘accept- Bare conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’
ed’’ if it has been inspected and found Bonding. The permanent joining of
to be safe by a qualified testing labora- metallic parts to form an electrically
tory. conductive path which will assure elec-
Accessible. (As applied to wiring trical continuity and the capacity to

methods.) Capable of being removed or conduct safely any current likely to be
exposed without damaging the building imposed.
269
Bonding jumper. A reliable conductor (3) In which breakdown or faulty op-

to assure the required electrical con- eration of equipment or processes
ductivity between metal parts required might release ignitible concentrations
to be electrically connected. of flammable gases or vapors, and
Branch circuit. The circuit conductors might also cause simultaneous failure
between the final overcurrent device of electric equipment.
protecting the circuit and the outlet(s).
NOTE: This classification usually includes
Building. A structure which stands locations where volatile flammable liquids
alone or which is cut off from adjoining or liquefied flammable gases are transferred
structures by fire walls with all open- from one container to another; interiors of
ings therein protected by approved fire spray booths and areas in the vicinity of
doors. spraying and painting operations where vola-
Cabinet. An enclosure designed either tile flammable solvents are used; locations
for surface or flush mounting, and pro- containing open tanks or vats of volatile
vided with a frame, mat, or trim in flammable liquids; drying rooms or compart-
ments for the evaporation of flammable sol-
which a swinging door or doors are or vents; inadequately ventilated pump rooms
may be hung. for flammable gas or for volatile flammable
Certified. Equipment is ‘‘certified’’ if liquids; and all other locations where ignit-
it: ible concentrations of flammable vapors or
(a) Has been tested and found by a gases are likely to occur in the course of nor-
qualified testing laboratory to meet mal operations.
applicable test standards or to be safe (b) Class I, Division 2. A Class I, Divi-
for use in a specified manner, and sion 2 location is a location:
(b) Is of a kind whose production is (1) In which volatile flammable liq-
periodically inspected by a qualified uids or flammable gases are handled,
testing laboratory. Certified equipment processed, or used, but in which the
must bear a label, tag, or other record hazardous liquids, vapors, or gases will
of certification. normally be confined within closed
Circuit breaker—(a) (600 volts nomi- containers or closed systems from
nal, or less.) A device designed to open which they can escape only in case of
and close a circuit by nonautomatic accidental rupture or breakdown of
means and to open the circuit auto- such containers or systems, or in case
matically on a predetermined overcur- of abnormal operation of equipment; or
rent without injury to itself when (2) In which ignitible concentrations
properly applied within its rating. of gases or vapors are normally pre-
(b) (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A vented by positive mechanical ventila-
switching device capable of making, tion, and which might become haz-
carrying, and breaking currents under ardous through failure or abnormal op-
normal circuit conditions, and also erations of the ventilating equipment;
making, carrying for a specified time, or
and breaking currents under specified
(3) That is adjacent to a Class I, Divi-
abnormal circuit conditions, such as
sion 1 location, and to which ignitible
those of short circuit.
concentrations of gases or vapors
Class I locations. Class I locations are
might occasionally be communicated
those in which flammable gases or va-
unless such communication is pre-
pors are or may be present in the air in
vented by adequate positive-pressure
quantities sufficient to produce explo-
ventilation from a source of clean air,
sive or ignitible mixtures. Class I loca-
and effective safeguards against ven-
tions include the following:
tilation failure are provided.
(a) Class I, Division 1. A Class I, Divi-
sion 1 location is a location: NOTE: This classification usually includes
(1) In which ignitible concentrations locations where volatile flammable liquids
of flammable gases or vapors may exist or flammable gases or vapors are used, but
under normal operating conditions; or which would become hazardous only in case
of an accident or of some unusual operating
(2) In which ignitible concentrations
condition. The quantity of flammable mate-
of such gases or vapors may exist fre-
rial that might escape in case of accident,

quently because of repair or mainte- the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the
nance operations or because of leakage; total area involved, and the record of the in-
or dustry or business with respect to explosions
270
or fires are all factors that merit consider- of electrical equipment or other appa-
ation in determining the classification and ratus; or
extent of each location.
(2) Dust may be in suspension in the
Piping without valves, checks, meters, and
similar devices would not ordinarily intro- air as a result of infrequent malfunc-
duce a hazardous condition even though used tioning of handling or processing
for flammable liquids or gases. Locations equipment, and dust accumulations re-
used for the storage of flammable liquids or sulting therefrom may be ignitible by
of liquefied or compressed gases in sealed abnormal operation or failure of elec-
containers would not normally be considered trical equipment or other apparatus.
hazardous unless also subject to other haz-
ardous conditions. NOTE: This classification includes loca-
Electrical conduits and their associated tions where dangerous concentrations of sus-
enclosures separated from process fluids by a pended dust would not be likely but where
single seal or barrier are classed as a Divi- dust accumulations might form on or in the
sion 2 location if the outside of the conduit vicinity of electric equipment. These areas
and enclosures is a nonhazardous location. may contain equipment from which appre-
ciable quantities of dust would escape under
Class II locations. Class II locations
abnormal operating conditions or be adja-
are those that are hazardous because of cent to a Class II Division 1 location, as de-
the presence of combustible dust. Class scribed above, into which an explosive or ig-
II locations include the following: nitible concentration of dust may be put into
(a) Class II, Division 1. A Class II, Di- suspension under abnormal operating condi-
vision 1 location is a location: tions.
(1) In which combustible dust is or
Class III locations. Class III locations
may be in suspension in the air under
are those that are hazardous because of
normal operating conditions, in quan-
the presence of easily ignitible fibers
tities sufficient to produce explosive or
ignitible mixtures; or or flyings but in which such fibers or
(2) Where mechanical failure or ab- flyings are not likely to be in suspen-
normal operation of machinery or sion in the air in quantities sufficient
equipment might cause such explosive to produce ignitible mixtures. Class 111
or ignitible mixtures to be produced, locations include the following:
and might also provide a source of igni- (a) Class III, Division 1. A Class III,
tion through simultaneous failure of Division 1 location is a location in
electric equipment, operation of pro- which easily ignitible fibers or mate-
tection devices, or from other causes, rials producing combustible flyings are
or handled, manufactured, or used.
(3) In which combustible dusts of an NOTE: Easily ignitible fibers and flyings in-
electrically conductive nature may be clude rayon, cotton (including cotton linters
present. and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle,
jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled
NOTE: Combustible dusts which are elec-
waste kapok, Spanish moss, excelsior, saw-
trically nonconductive include dusts pro-
dust, woodchips, and other material of simi-
duced in the handling and processing of grain
lar nature.
and grain products, pulverized sugar and
cocoa, dried egg and milk powders, pulver- (b) Class III, Division 2. A Class III,
ized spices, starch and pastes, potato and Division 2 location is a location in
woodflour, oil meal from beans and seed,
dried hay, and other organic materials which
which easily ignitible fibers are stored
may produce combustible dusts when proc- or handled, except in process of manu-
essed or handled. Dusts containing magne- facture.
sium or aluminum are particularly haz- Collector ring. A collector ring is an
ardous and the use of extreme caution is nec- assembly of slip rings for transferring
essary to avoid ignition and explosion. electrical energy from a stationary to
(b) Class II, Division 2. A Class II, Di- a rotating member.
vision 2 location is a location in which: Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by
(1) Combustible dust will not nor- the structure or finish of the building.
mally be in suspension in the air in Wires in concealed raceways are con-
quantities sufficient to produce explo- sidered concealed, even though they
sive or ignitible mixtures, and dust ac- may become accessible by withdrawing
cumulations are normally insufficient them. [See ‘‘Accessible. (As applied to
to interfere with the normal operation wiring methods.)’’]
271
Conductor—(a) Bare. A conductor hav- Equipment. A general term including

ing no covering or electrical insulation material, fittings, devices, appliances,
whatsoever. fixtures, apparatus, and the like, used
(b) Covered. A conductor encased as a part of, or in connection with, an
within material of composition or electrical installation.
thickness that is not recognized as Equipment grounding conductor. See
electrical insulation. ‘‘Grounding conductor, equipment.’’
(c) Insulated. A conductor encased Explosion-proof apparatus. Apparatus
within material of composition and enclosed in a case that is capable of
thickness that is recognized as elec- withstanding an explosion of a speci-
trical insulation. fied gas or vapor which may occur
Controller. A device or group of de- within it and of preventing the ignition
vices that serves to govern, in some of a specified gas or vapor surrounding
predetermined manner, the electric the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or ex-
power delivered to the apparatus to plosion of the gas or vapor within, and
which it is connected. which operates at such an external
Covered conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’ temperature that it will not ignite a
Cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An surrounding flammable atmosphere.
assembly of a fuse support with either Exposed. (As applied to live parts.)
a fuseholder, fuse carrier, or dis- Capable of being inadvertently touched
connecting blade. The fuseholder or or approached nearer than a safe dis-
fuse carrier may include a conducting tance by a person. It is applied to parts
element (fuse link), or may act as the not suitably guarded, isolated, or insu-
disconnecting blade by the inclusion of lated. (See ‘‘Accessible and ‘‘Con-
a nonfusible member. cealed.’’)
Exposed. (As applied to wiring meth-
Cutout box. An enclosure designed for
ods.) On or attached to the surface or
surface mounting and having swinging
behind panels designed to allow access.
doors or covers secured directly to and
[See ‘‘Accessible. (As applied to wiring
telescoping with the walls of the box
methods.)’’]
proper. (See ‘‘Cabinet.’’)
Exposed. (For the purposes of
Damp location. See ‘‘Location.’’
§ 1926.408(d), Communications systems.)
Dead front. Without live parts ex- Where the circuit is in such a position
posed to a person on the operating side that in case of failure of supports or in-
of the equipment. sulation, contact with another circuit
Device. A unit of an electrical system may result.
which is intended to carry but not uti- Externally operable. Capable of being
lize electric energy. operated without exposing the operator
Disconnecting means. A device, or to contact with live parts.
group of devices, or other means by Feeder. All circuit conductors be-
which the conductors of a circuit can tween the service equipment, or the
be disconnected from their source of generator switchboard of an isolated
supply. plant, and the final branch-circuit
Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch. overcurrent device.
(Over 600 volts, nominal.) A mechanical Festoon lighting. A string of outdoor
switching device used for isolating a lights suspended between two points
circuit or equipment from a source of more than 15 feet (4.57 m) apart.
power. Fitting. An accessory such as a lock-
Dry location. See ‘‘Location.’’ nut, bushing, or other part of a wiring
Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, hous- system that is intended primarily to
ing, fence or walls which will prevent perform a mechanical rather than an
persons from accidentally contacting electrical function.
energized parts. Fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An
Enclosure. The case or housing of ap- overcurrent protective device with a
paratus, or the fence or walls sur- circuit opening fusible part that is
rounding an installation to prevent heated and severed by the passage of
personnel from accidentally contacting overcurrent through it. A fuse com-

energized parts, or to protect the prises all the parts that form a unit ca-
equipment from physical damage. pable of performing the prescribed
272
functions. It may or may not be the space in which an elevator or dumb-

complete device necessary to connect waiter is designed to operate.
it into an electrical circuit. Identified (conductors or terminals).
Ground. A conducting connection, Identified, as used in reference to a
whether intentional or accidental, be- conductor or its terminal, means that
tween an electrical circuit or equip- such conductor or terminal can be rec-
ment and the earth, or to some con- ognized as grounded.
ducting body that serves in place of the Identified (for the use). Recognized as
earth. suitable for the specific purpose, func-
Grounded. Connected to earth or to tion, use, environment, application,
some conducting body that serves in etc. where described as a requirement
place of the earth. in this standard. Suitability of equip-
Grounded, effectively (Over 600 volts, ment for a specific purpose, environ-
nominal.) Permanently connected to ment, or application is determined by a
earth through a ground connection of qualified testing laboratory where such
sufficiently low impedance and having identification includes labeling or list-
sufficient ampacity that ground fault ing.
current which may occur cannot build Insulated conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’
up to voltages dangerous to personnel. Interrupter switch. (Over 600 volts,
Grounded conductor. A system or cir- nominal.) A switch capable of making,
cuit conductor that is intentionally carrying, and interrupting specified
grounded. currents.
Grounding conductor. A conductor Intrinsically safe equipment and associ-
used to connect equipment or the ated wiring. Equipment and associated
grounded circuit of a wiring system to wiring in which any spark or thermal
a grounding electrode or electrodes. effect, produced either normally or in
Grounding conductor, equipment. The specified fault conditions, is incapable,
conductor used to connect the noncur- under certain prescribed test condi-
rent-carrying metal parts of equip- tions, of causing ignition of a mixture
ment, raceways, and other enclosures of flammable or combustible material
to the system grounded conductor and/ in air in its most easily ignitible con-
or the grounding electrode conductor centration.
at the service equipment or at the Isolated. Not readily accessible to
source of a separately derived system. persons unless special means for access
Grounding electrode conductor. The are used.
conductor used to connect the ground- Isolated power system. A system com-
ing electrode to the equipment ground- prising an isolating transformer or its
ing conductor and/or to the grounded equivalent, a line isolation monitor,
conductor of the circuit at the service and its ungrounded circuit conductors.
equipment or at the source of a sepa- Labeled. Equipment or materials to
rately derived system. which has been attached a label, sym-
Ground-fault circuit interrupter. A de- bol or other identifying mark of a
vice for the protection of personnel qualified testing laboratory which indi-
that functions to deenergize a circuit cates compliance with appropriate
or portion thereof within an estab- standards or performance in a specified
lished period of time when a current to manner.
ground exceeds some predetermined Lighting outlet. An outlet intended for
value that is less than that required to the direct connection of a lampholder,
operate the overcurrent protective de- a lighting fixture, or a pendant cord
vice of the supply circuit. terminating in a lampholder.
Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, Listed. Equipment or materials in-
enclosed, or otherwise protected by cluded in a list published by a qualified
means of suitable covers, casings, bar- testing laboratory whose listing states
riers, rails, screens, mats, or platforms either that the equipment or material
to remove the likelihood of approach meets appropriate standards or has
to a point of danger or contact by per- been tested and found suitable for use
sons or objects. in a specified manner.

Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway, Location—(a) Damp location. Partially
well hole, or other vertical opening or protected locations under canopies,
273
marquees, roofed open porches, and Power fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.)
like locations, and interior locations See ‘‘Fuse.’’
subject to moderate degrees of mois- Power outlet. An enclosed assembly
ture, such as some basements. which may include receptacles, circuit
(b) Dry location. A location not nor- breakers, fuseholders, fused switches,
mally subject to dampness or wetness. buses and watt-hour meter mounting
A location classified as dry may be means; intended to serve as a means
temporarily subject to dampness or for distributing power required to oper-
wetness, as in the case of a building ate mobile or temporarily installed
under construction. equipment.
(c) Wet location. Installations under- Premises wiring system. That interior
ground or in concrete slabs or masonry and exterior wiring, including power,
in direct contact with the earth, and lighting, control, and signal circuit
locations subject to saturation with wiring together with all of its associ-
water or other liquids, such as loca- ated hardware, fittings, and wiring de-
tions exposed to weather and unpro- vices, both permanently and tempo-
tected. rarily installed, which extends from
Mobile X-ray. X-ray equipment the load end of the service drop, or load
mounted on a permanent base with end of the service lateral conductors to
wheels and/or casters for moving while the outlet(s). Such wiring does not in-
completely assembled. clude wiring internal to appliances, fix-
Motor control center. An assembly of tures, motors, controllers, motor con-
one or more enclosed sections having a trol centers, and similar equipment.
common power bus and principally con- Qualified person. One familiar with
taining motor control units. the construction and operation of the
Outlet. A point on the wiring system equipment and the hazards involved.
at which current is taken to supply
Qualified testing laboratory. A prop-
utilization equipment.
erly equipped and staffed testing lab-
Overcurrent. Any current in excess of
oratory which has capabilities for and
the rated current of equipment or the
which provides the following services:
ampacity of a conductor. It may result
(a) Experimental testing for safety of
from overload (see definition), short
specified items of equipment and mate-
circuit, or ground fault. A current in
rials referred to in this standard to de-
excess of rating may be accommodated
termine compliance with appropriate
by certain equipment and conductors
test standards or performance in a
for a given set of conditions. Hence the
specified manner;
rules for overcurrent protection are
specific for particular situations. (b) Inspecting the run of such items
Overload. Operation of equipment in of equipment and materials at fac-
excess of normal, full load rating, or of tories for product evaluation to assure
a conductor in excess of rated compliance with the test standards;
ampacity which, when it persists for a (c) Service-value determinations
sufficient length of time, would cause through field inspections to monitor
damage or dangerous overheating. A the proper use of labels on products
fault, such as a short circuit or ground and with authority for recall of the
fault, is not an overload. label in the event a hazardous product
(See‘‘Overcurrent.’’) is installed;
Panelboard. A single panel or group of (d) Employing a controlled procedure
panel units designed for assembly in for identifying the listed and/or labeled
the form of a single panel; including equipment or materials tested; and
buses, automatic overcurrent devices, (e) Rendering creditable reports or
and with or without switches for the findings that are objective and without
control of light, heat, or power cir- bias of the tests and test methods em-
cuits; designed to be placed in a cabi- ployed.
net or cutout box placed in or against Raceway. A channel designed ex-
a wall or partition and accessible only pressly for holding wires, cables, or
from the front. (See ‘‘Switchboard.’’) busbars, with additional functions as

Portable X-ray. X-ray equipment de- permitted in this subpart. Raceways
signed to be hand-carried. may be of metal or insulating material,
274
and the term includes rigid metal con- ice-entrance conductors at the building
duit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, inter- or other structure.
mediate metal conduit, liquidtight Service-entrance conductors, overhead
flexible metal conduit, flexible metal- system. The service conductors between
lic tubing, flexible metal conduit, elec- the terminals of the service equipment
trical metallic tubing, underfloor race- and a point usually outside the build-
ways, cellular concrete floor raceways, ing, clear of building walls, where
cellular metal floor raceways, surface joined by tap or splice to the service
raceways, wireways, and busways. drop.
Readily accessible. Capable of being Service-entrance conductors, under-
reached quickly for operation, renewal, ground system. The service conductors
or inspections, without requiring those between the terminals of the service
to whom ready access is requisite to equipment and the point of connection
climb over or remove obstacles or to to the service lateral. Where service
resort to portable ladders, chairs, etc. equipment is located outside the build-
(See ‘‘Accessible.’’) ing walls, there may be no service-en-
Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact trance conductors, or they may be en-
device installed at the outlet for the tirely outside the building.
connection of a single attachment Service equipment. The necessary
plug. A single receptacle is a single equipment, usually consisting of a cir-
contact device with no other contact cuit breaker or switch and fuses, and
device on the same yoke. A multiple their accessories, located near the
receptacle is a single device containing point of entrance of supply conductors
two or more receptacles. to a building or other structure, or an
Receptacle outlet. An outlet where one otherwise defined area, and intended to
or more receptacles are installed. constitute the main control and means
Remote-control circuit. Any electric of cutoff of the supply.
circuit that controls any other circuit Service raceway. The raceway that en-
through a relay or an equivalent de- closes the service-entrance conductors.
vice. Signaling circuit. Any electric circuit
Sealable equipment. Equipment en- that energizes signaling equipment.
closed in a case or cabinet that is pro- Switchboard. A large single panel,
vided with a means of sealing or lock- frame, or assembly of panels which
ing so that live parts cannot be made have switches, buses, instruments,
accessible without opening the enclo- overcurrent and other protective de-
sure. The equipment may or may not vices mounted on the face or back or
be operable without opening the enclo- both. Switchboards are generally ac-
sure. cessible from the rear as well as from
Separately derived system. A premises the front and are not intended to be in-
wiring system whose power is derived stalled in cabinets. (See ‘‘Panelboard.’’)
from generator, transformer, or con- Switches—(a) General-use switch. A
verter windings and has no direct elec- switch intended for use in general dis-
trical connection, including a solidly tribution and branch circuits. It is
connected grounded circuit conductor, rated in amperes, and it is capable of
to supply conductors originating in an- interrupting its rated current at its
other system. rated voltage.
Service. The conductors and equip- (b) General-use snap switch. A form of
ment for delivering energy from the general-use switch so constructed that
electricity supply system to the wiring it can be installed in flush device boxes
system of the premises served. or on outlet box covers, or otherwise
Service conductors. The supply con- used in conjunction with wiring sys-
ductors that extend from the street tems recognized by this subpart.
main or from transformers to the serv- (c) Isolating switch. A switch intended
ice equipment of the premises supplied. for isolating an electric circuit from
Service drop. The overhead service the source of power. It has no inter-
conductors from the last pole or other rupting rating, and it is intended to be
aerial support to and including the operated only after the circuit has been
splices, if any, connecting to the serv- opened by some other means.
275
(d) Motor-circuit switch. A switch, Watertight. So constructed that mois-

rated in horsepower, capable of inter- ture will not enter the enclosure.
rupting the maximum operating over- Weatherproof. So constructed or pro-
load current of a motor of the same tected that exposure to the weather
horsepower rating as the switch at the will not interfere with successful oper-
rated voltage. ation. Rainproof, raintight, or water-
Switching devices. (Over 600 volts, tight equipment can fulfill the require-
nominal.) Devices designed to close ments for weatherproof where varying
and/or open one or more electric cir- weather conditions other than wetness,
cuits. Included in this category are cir- such as snow, ice, dust, or temperature
cuit breakers, cutouts, disconnecting extremes, are not a factor.
(or isolating) switches, disconnecting Wet location. See ‘‘Location.’’
means, and interrupter switches.
Transportable X-ray. X-ray equipment Subpart L—Scaffolds
installed in a vehicle or that may read-
ily be disassembled for transport in a AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655,
vehicle. 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order Nos. 1–90 (55
Utilization equipment. Utilization FR 9033), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1–2012 (77 FR
3912); and 29 CFR part 1911.
equipment means equipment which uti-
lizes electric energy for mechanical, SOURCE: 61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, unless
chemical, heating, lighting, or similar otherwise noted.
useful purpose.
§ 1926.450 Scope, application and defi-
Utilization system. A utilization sys- nitions applicable to this subpart.
tem is a system which provides electric
power and light for employee work- (a) Scope and application. This sub-
places, and includes the premises wir- part applies to all scaffolds used in
ing system and utilization equipment. workplaces covered by this part. It
does not apply to crane or derrick sus-
Ventilated. Provided with a means to
pended personnel platforms. The cri-
permit circulation of air sufficient to
teria for aerial lifts are set out exclu-
remove an excess of heat, fumes, or va-
sively in § 1926.453.
pors. (b) Definitions. Adjustable suspension
Volatile flammable liquid. A flammable scaffold means a suspension scaffold
liquid having a flash point below 38 de- equipped with a hoist(s) that can be op-
grees C (100 degrees F) or whose tem- erated by an employee(s) on the scaf-
perature is above its flash point, or a fold.
Class II combustible liquid having a Bearer (putlog) means a horizontal
vapor pressure not exceeding 40 psia transverse scaffold member (which
(276 kPa) at 38 °C (100 °F) whose tem- may be supported by ledgers or run-
perature is above its flash point. ners) upon which the scaffold platform
Voltage. (Of a circuit.) The greatest rests and which joins scaffold uprights,
root-mean-square (effective) difference posts, poles, and similar members.
of potential between any two conduc- Boatswains’ chair means a single-
tors of the circuit concerned. point adjustable suspension scaffold
Voltage, nominal. A nominal value as- consisting of a seat or sling designed to
signed to a circuit or system for the support one employee in a sitting posi-
purpose of conveniently designating its tion.
voltage class (as 120/240, 480Y/277, 600, Body belt (safety belt) means a strap
etc.). The actual voltage at which a cir- with means both for securing it about
cuit operates can vary from the nomi- the waist and for attaching it to a lan-
nal within a range that permits satis- yard, lifeline, or deceleration device.
factory operation of equipment. Body harness means a design of straps
Voltage to ground. For grounded cir- which may be secured about the em-
cuits, the voltage between the given ployee in a manner to distribute the
conductor and that point or conductor fall arrest forces over at least the
of the circuit that is grounded; for thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoul-
ungrounded circuits, the greatest volt- ders, with means for attaching it to
age between the given conductor and other components of a personal fall ar-
any other conductor of the circuit. rest system.
276
Brace means a rigid connection that energy imposed on an employee during

holds one scaffold member in a fixed fall arrest.
position with respect to another mem- Double pole (independent pole) scaffold
ber, or to a building or structure. means a supported scaffold consisting
Bricklayers’ square scaffold means a of a platform(s) resting on cross beams
supported scaffold composed of framed (bearers) supported by ledgers and a
squares which support a platform. double row of uprights independent of
Carpenters’ bracket scaffold means a support (except ties, guys, braces) from
supported scaffold consisting of a plat- any structure.
form supported by brackets attached to Equivalent means alternative designs,
building or structural walls. materials or methods to protect
Catenary scaffold means a suspension against a hazard which the employer
scaffold consisting of a platform sup- can demonstrate will provide an equal
ported by two essentially horizontal or greater degree of safety for employ-
and parallel ropes attached to struc- ees than the methods, materials or de-
tural members of a building or other signs specified in the standard.
structure. Additional support may be Exposed power lines means electrical
provided by vertical pickups. power lines which are accessible to em-
Chimney hoist means a multi-point ployees and which are not shielded
adjustable suspension scaffold used to from contact. Such lines do not include
provide access to work inside chim- extension cords or power tool cords.
neys. (See ‘‘Multi-point adjustable sus- Eye or Eye splice means a loop with or
pension scaffold’’.) without a thimble at the end of a wire
Cleat means a structural block used rope.
at the end of a platform to prevent the Fabricated decking and planking
platform from slipping off its supports. means manufactured platforms made
Cleats are also used to provide footing of wood (including laminated wood, and
on sloped surfaces such as crawling solid sawn wood planks), metal or
boards. other materials.
Competent person means one who is Fabricated frame scaffold (tubular
capable of identifying existing and pre- welded frame scaffold) means a scaffold
dictable hazards in the surroundings or consisting of a platform(s) supported
working conditions which are unsani- on fabricated end frames with integral
tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em- posts, horizontal bearers, and inter-
ployees, and who has authorization to mediate members.
take prompt corrective measures to Failure means load refusal, breakage,
eliminate them. or separation of component parts. Load
Continuous run scaffold (Run scaffold) refusal is the point where the ultimate
means a two- point or multi-point ad- strength is exceeded.
justable suspension scaffold con- Float (ship) scaffold means a suspen-
structed using a series of inter- sion scaffold consisting of a braced
connected braced scaffold members or platform resting on two parallel bear-
supporting structures erected to form a ers and hung from overhead supports
continuous scaffold. by ropes of fixed length.
Coupler means a device for locking Form scaffold means a supported scaf-
together the tubes of a tube and cou- fold consisting of a platform supported
pler scaffold. by brackets attached to formwork.
Crawling board (chicken ladder) means Guardrail system means a vertical bar-
a supported scaffold consisting of a rier, consisting of, but not limited to,
plank with cleats spaced and secured to toprails, midrails, and posts, erected to
provide footing, for use on sloped sur- prevent employees from falling off a
faces such as roofs. scaffold platform or walkway to lower
Deceleration device means any mecha- levels.
nism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch Hoist means a manual or power-oper-
lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tear- ated mechanical device to raise or
ing or deforming lanyard, or automatic lower a suspended scaffold.
self-retracting lifeline lanyard, which Horse scaffold means a supported scaf-

dissipates a substantial amount of en- fold consisting of a platform supported
ergy during a fall arrest or limits the by construction horses (saw horses).
277
Horse scaffolds constructed of metal to be applied to a scaffold or scaffold

are sometimes known as trestle scaf- component at any one time.
folds. Mobile scaffold means a powered or
Independent pole scaffold (see ‘‘Double unpowered, portable, caster or wheel-
pole scaffold’’). mounted supported scaffold.
Interior hung scaffold means a suspen- Multi-level suspended scaffold means a
sion scaffold consisting of a platform two-point or multi-point adjustable
suspended from the ceiling or roof suspension scaffold with a series of
structure by fixed length supports. platforms at various levels resting on
Ladder jack scaffold means a sup- common stirrups.
ported scaffold consisting of a platform Multi-point adjustable suspension scaf-
resting on brackets attached to lad- fold means a suspension scaffold con-
ders. sisting of a platform(s) which is sus-
Ladder stand means a mobile, fixed- pended by more than two ropes from
size, self-supporting ladder consisting overhead supports and equipped with
of a wide flat tread ladder in the form means to raise and lower the platform
of stairs. to desired work levels. Such scaffolds
include chimney hoists.
Landing means a platform at the end
Needle beam scaffold means a platform
of a flight of stairs.
suspended from needle beams.
Large area scaffold means a pole scaf-
Open sides and ends means the edges
fold, tube and coupler scaffold, systems
of a platform that are more than 14
scaffold, or fabricated frame scaffold
inches (36 cm) away horizontally from
erected over substantially the entire
a sturdy, continuous, vertical surface
work area. For example: a scaffold
(such as a building wall) or a sturdy,
erected over the entire floor area of a
continuous horizontal surface (such as
room.
a floor), or a point of access. Exception:
Lean-to scaffold means a supported For plastering and lathing operations
scaffold which is kept erect by tilting the horizontal threshold distance is 18
it toward and resting it against a inches (46 cm).
building or structure. Outrigger means the structural mem-
Lifeline means a component con- ber of a supported scaffold used to in-
sisting of a flexible line that connects crease the base width of a scaffold in
to an anchorage at one end to hang order to provide support for and in-
vertically (vertical lifeline), or that creased stability of the scaffold.
connects to anchorages at both ends to Outrigger beam (Thrustout) means the
stretch horizontally (horizontal life- structural member of a suspension
line), and which serves as a means for scaffold or outrigger scaffold which
connecting other components of a per- provides support for the scaffold by ex-
sonal fall arrest system to the anchor- tending the scaffold point of attach-
age. ment to a point out and away from the
Lower levels means areas below the structure or building.
level where the employee is located Outrigger scaffold means a supported
and to which an employee can fall. scaffold consisting of a platform rest-
Such areas include, but are not limited ing on outrigger beams (thrustouts)
to, ground levels, floors, roofs, ramps, projecting beyond the wall or face of
runways, excavations, pits, tanks, ma- the building or structure, the inboard
terials, water, and equipment. ends of which are secured inside the
Masons’ adjustable supported scaffold building or structure.
(see ‘‘Self-contained adjustable scaf- Overhand bricklaying means the proc-
fold’’). ess of laying bricks and masonry units
Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspen- such that the surface of the wall to be
sion scaffold means a continuous run jointed is on the opposite side of the
suspension scaffold designed and used wall from the mason, requiring the
for masonry operations. mason to lean over the wall to com-
Maximum intended load means the plete the work. It includes mason tend-
total load of all persons, equipment, ing and electrical installation incor-
tools, materials, transmitted loads, porated into the brick wall during the
and other loads reasonably anticipated overhand bricklaying process.
278
Personal fall arrest system means a suspension scaffold consisting of an ad-

system used to arrest an employee’s justable platform(s) mounted on an
fall. It consists of an anchorage, con- independent supporting frame(s) not a
nectors, a body belt or body harness part of the object being worked on, and
and may include a lanyard, decelera- which is equipped with a means to per-
tion device, lifeline, or combinations of mit the raising and lowering of the
these. platform(s). Such systems include roll-
Platform means a work surface ele- ing roof rigs, rolling outrigger systems,
vated above lower levels. Platforms and some masons’ adjustable supported
can be constructed using individual scaffolds.
wood planks, fabricated planks, fab- Shore scaffold means a supported scaf-
ricated decks, and fabricated plat- fold which is placed against a building
forms. or structure and held in place with
Pole scaffold (see definitions for props.
‘‘Single-pole scaffold’’ and ‘‘Double Single-point adjustable suspension scaf-
(independent) pole scaffold’’). fold means a suspension scaffold con-
Power operated hoist means a hoist sisting of a platform suspended by one
which is powered by other than human rope from an overhead support and
energy. equipped with means to permit the
Pump jack scaffold means a supported movement of the platform to desired
scaffold consisting of a platform sup- work levels.
ported by vertical poles and movable Single-pole scaffold means a supported
support brackets. scaffold consisting of a platform(s)
Qualified means one who, by posses- resting on bearers, the outside ends of
sion of a recognized degree, certificate, which are supported on runners secured
or professional standing, or who by ex- to a single row of posts or uprights, and
tensive knowledge, training, and expe- the inner ends of which are supported
rience, has successfully demonstrated on or in a structure or building wall.
his/her ability to solve or resolve prob- Stair tower (Scaffold stairway/tower)
lems related to the subject matter, the means a tower comprised of scaffold
work, or the project. components and which contains inter-
Rated load means the manufacturer’s nal stairway units and rest platforms.
specified maximum load to be lifted by These towers are used to provide access
a hoist or to be applied to a scaffold or to scaffold platforms and other ele-
scaffold component. vated points such as floors and roofs.
Repair bracket scaffold means a sup- Stall load means the load at which
ported scaffold consisting of a platform the prime-mover of a power-operated
supported by brackets which are se- hoist stalls or the power to the prime-
cured in place around the circum- mover is automatically disconnected.
ference or perimeter of a chimney, Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaf-
stack, tank or other supporting struc- fold means a platform resting directly
ture by one or more wire ropes placed on the rungs of step ladders or trestle
around the supporting structure. ladders.
Roof bracket scaffold means a rooftop Stilts means a pair of poles or similar
supported scaffold consisting of a plat- supports with raised footrests, used to
form resting on angular-shaped sup- permit walking above the ground or
ports. working surface.
Runner (ledger or ribbon) means the Stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable sus-
lengthwise horizontal spacing or brac- pension scaffold means a continuous run
ing member which may support the suspension scaffold designed and used
bearers. for stonesetters’ operations.
Scaffold means any temporary ele- Supported scaffold means one or more
vated platform (supported or sus- platforms supported by outrigger
pended) and its supporting structure beams, brackets, poles, legs, uprights,
(including points of anchorage), used posts, frames, or similar rigid support.
for supporting employees or materials Suspension scaffold means one or
or both. more platforms suspended by ropes or

Self-contained adjustable scaffold other non-rigid means from an over-
means a combination supported and head structure(s).
279
System scaffold means a scaffold con- § 1926.451 General requirements.

sisting of posts with fixed connection This section does not apply to aerial
points that accept runners, bearers, lifts, the criteria for which are set out
and diagonals that can be inter- exclusively in § 1926.453.
connected at predetermined levels. (a) Capacity. (1) Except as provided in
Tank builders’ scaffold means a sup- paragraphs (a)(2), (a)(3), (a)(4), (a)(5)
ported scaffold consisting of a platform and (g) of this section, each scaffold
resting on brackets that are either di- and scaffold component shall be capa-
rectly attached to a cylindrical tank or ble of supporting, without failure, its
attached to devices that are attached own weight and at least 4 times the
to such a tank. maximum intended load applied or
Top plate bracket scaffold means a transmitted to it.
scaffold supported by brackets that (2) Direct connections to roofs and
hook over or are attached to the top of floors, and counterweights used to bal-
a wall. This type of scaffold is similar ance adjustable suspension scaffolds,
to carpenters’ bracket scaffolds and shall be capable of resisting at least 4
form scaffolds and is used in residen- times the tipping moment imposed by
tial construction for setting trusses. the scaffold operating at the rated load
Tube and coupler scaffold means a sup- of the hoist, or 1.5 (minimum) times
ported or suspended scaffold consisting the tipping moment imposed by the
scaffold operating at the stall load of
of a platform(s) supported by tubing,
the hoist, whichever is greater.
erected with coupling devices con-
(3) Each suspension rope, including
necting uprights, braces, bearers, and
connecting hardware, used on non-ad-
runners. justable suspension scaffolds shall be
Tubular welded frame scaffold (see capable of supporting, without failure,
‘‘Fabricated frame scaffold’’). at least 6 times the maximum intended
Two-point suspension scaffold (swing load applied or transmitted to that
stage) means a suspension scaffold con- rope.
sisting of a platform supported by (4) Each suspension rope, including
hangers (stirrups) suspended by two connecting hardware, used on adjust-
ropes from overhead supports and able suspension scaffolds shall be capa-
equipped with means to permit the ble of supporting, without failure, at
raising and lowering of the platform to least 6 times the maximum intended
desired work levels. load applied or transmitted to that
Unstable objects means items whose rope with the scaffold operating at ei-
strength, configuration, or lack of sta- ther the rated load of the hoist, or 2
bility may allow them to become dis- (minimum) times the stall load of the
located and shift and therefore may hoist, whichever is greater.
not properly support the loads imposed (5) The stall load of any scaffold hoist
on them. Unstable objects do not con- shall not exceed 3 times its rated load.
stitute a safe base support for scaf- (6) Scaffolds shall be designed by a
folds, platforms, or employees. Exam- qualified person and shall be con-
ples include, but are not limited to, structed and loaded in accordance with
barrels, boxes, loose brick, and con- that design. Non-mandatory appendix
crete blocks. A to this subpart contains examples of
Vertical pickup means a rope used to criteria that will enable an employer
support the horizontal rope in catenary to comply with paragraph (a) of this
scaffolds. section.
Walkway means a portion of a scaf- (b) Scaffold platform construction. (1)
fold platform used only for access and Each platform on all working levels of
not as a work level. scaffolds shall be fully planked or
decked between the front uprights and
Window jack scaffold means a plat-
the guardrail supports as follows:
form resting on a bracket or jack
(i) Each platform unit (e.g., scaffold
which projects through a window open- plank, fabricated plank, fabricated
ing. deck, or fabricated platform) shall be

[61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, as amended at 75 installed so that the space between ad-
FR 48133, Aug. 9, 2010] jacent units and the space between the
280
platform and the uprights is no more face of the work, unless guardrail sys-
than 1 inch (2.5 cm) wide, except where tems are erected along the front edge
the employer can demonstrate that a and/or personal fall arrest systems are
wider space is necessary (for example, used in accordance with paragraph (g)
to fit around uprights when side brack- of this section to protect employees
ets are used to extend the width of the from falling.
platform). (i) The maximum distance from the
(ii) Where the employer makes the face for outrigger scaffolds shall be 3
demonstration provided for in para- inches (8 cm);
graph (b)(1)(i) of this section, the plat- (ii) The maximum distance from the
form shall be planked or decked as face for plastering and lathing oper-
fully as possible and the remaining ations shall be 18 inches (46 cm).
open space between the platform and (4) Each end of a platform, unless
the uprights shall not exceed 91⁄2 inches cleated or otherwise restrained by
(24.1 cm). hooks or equivalent means, shall ex-
Exception to paragraph (b)(1): The re- tend over the centerline of its support
quirement in paragraph (b)(1) to pro- at least 6 inches (15 cm).
vide full planking or decking does not (5)(i) Each end of a platform 10 feet or
apply to platforms used solely as walk- less in length shall not extend over its
ways or solely by employees per- support more than 12 inches (30 cm) un-
forming scaffold erection or disman- less the platform is designed and in-
tling. In these situations, only the stalled so that the cantilevered portion
planking that the employer establishes of the platform is able to support em-
is necessary to provide safe working ployees and/or materials without tip-
conditions is required. ping, or has guardrails which block em-
(2) Except as provided in paragraphs ployee access to the cantilevered end.
(b)(2)(i) and (b)(2)(ii) of this section, (ii) Each platform greater than 10
each scaffold platform and walkway feet in length shall not extend over its
shall be at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide. support more than 18 inches (46 cm),
(i) Each ladder jack scaffold, top unless it is designed and installed so
plate bracket scaffold, roof bracket that the cantilevered portion of the
scaffold, and pump jack scaffold shall platform is able to support employees
be at least 12 inches (30 cm) wide. without tipping, or has guardrails
There is no minimum width require- which block employee access to the
ment for boatswains’ chairs. cantilevered end.
(6) On scaffolds where scaffold planks
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2)(i): Pursuant to
an administrative stay effective November
are abutted to create a long platform,
29, 1996 and published in the FEDERAL REG- each abutted end shall rest on a sepa-
ISTER on November 25, 1996, the requirement rate support surface. This provision
in paragraph (b)(2)(i) that roof bracket scaf- does not preclude the use of common
folds be at least 12 inches wide is stayed support members, such as ‘‘T’’ sec-
until November 25, 1997 or until rulemaking tions, to support abutting planks, or
regarding the minimum width of roof brack- hook on platforms designed to rest on
et scaffolds has been completed, whichever is common supports.
later.
(7) On scaffolds where platforms are
(ii) Where scaffolds must be used in overlapped to create a long platform,
areas that the employer can dem- the overlap shall occur only over sup-
onstrate are so narrow that platforms ports, and shall not be less than 12
and walkways cannot be at least 18 inches (30 cm) unless the platforms are
inches (46 cm) wide, such platforms and nailed together or otherwise restrained
walkways shall be as wide as feasible, to prevent movement.
and employees on those platforms and (8) At all points of a scaffold where
walkways shall be protected from fall the platform changes direction, such as
hazards by the use of guardrails and/or turning a corner, any platform that
personal fall arrest systems. rests on a bearer at an angle other than
(3) Except as provided in paragraphs a right angle shall be laid first, and
(b)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section, the platforms which rest at right angles
front edge of all platforms shall not be over the same bearer shall be laid sec-
more than 14 inches (36 cm) from the ond, on top of the first platform.
281
(9) Wood platforms shall not be cov- cumstances where an eccentric load,
ered with opaque finishes, except that such as a cantilevered work platform,
platform edges may be covered or is applied or is transmitted to the scaf-
marked for identification. Platforms fold.
may be coated periodically with wood (2) Supported scaffold poles, legs,
preservatives, fire-retardant finishes, posts, frames, and uprights shall bear
and slip-resistant finishes; however, on base plates and mud sills or other
the coating may not obscure the top or adequate firm foundation.
bottom wood surfaces. (i) Footings shall be level, sound,
(10) Scaffold components manufac- rigid, and capable of supporting the
tured by different manufacturers shall loaded scaffold without settling or dis-
not be intermixed unless the compo- placement.
nents fit together without force and (ii) Unstable objects shall not be used
the scaffold’s structural integrity is to support scaffolds or platform units.
maintained by the user. Scaffold com- (iii) Unstable objects shall not be
ponents manufactured by different used as working platforms.
manufacturers shall not be modified in (iv) Front-end loaders and similar
order to intermix them unless a com- pieces of equipment shall not be used
petent person determines the resulting to support scaffold platforms unless
scaffold is structurally sound. they have been specifically designed by
(11) Scaffold components made of dis- the manufacturer for such use.
similar metals shall not be used to- (v) Fork-lifts shall not be used to
gether unless a competent person has support scaffold platforms unless the
determined that galvanic action will entire platform is attached to the fork
not reduce the strength of any compo- and the fork-lift is not moved hori-
nent to a level below that required by zontally while the platform is occu-
paragraph (a)(1) of this section. pied.
(c) Criteria for supported scaffolds. (1) (3) Supported scaffold poles, legs,
Supported scaffolds with a height to posts, frames, and uprights shall be
base width (including outrigger sup- plumb and braced to prevent swaying
ports, if used) ratio of more than four and displacement.
to one (4:1) shall be restrained from tip- (d) Criteria for suspension scaffolds. (1)
ping by guying, tying, bracing, or All suspension scaffold support devices,
equivalent means, as follows: such as outrigger beams, cornice
(i) Guys, ties, and braces shall be in- hooks, parapet clamps, and similar de-
stalled at locations where horizontal vices, shall rest on surfaces capable of
members support both inner and outer supporting at least 4 times the load im-
legs. posed on them by the scaffold oper-
(ii) Guys, ties, and braces shall be in- ating at the rated load of the hoist (or
stalled according to the scaffold manu- at least 1.5 times the load imposed on
facturer’s recommendations or at the them by the scaffold at the stall capac-
closest horizontal member to the 4:1 ity of the hoist, whichever is greater).
height and be repeated vertically at lo- (2) Suspension scaffold outrigger
cations of horizontal members every 20 beams, when used, shall be made of
feet (6.1 m) or less thereafter for scaf- structural metal or equivalent
folds 3 feet (0.91 m) wide or less, and strength material, and shall be re-
every 26 feet (7.9 m) or less thereafter strained to prevent movement.
for scaffolds greater than 3 feet (0.91 m) (3) The inboard ends of suspension
wide. The top guy, tie or brace of com- scaffold outrigger beams shall be sta-
pleted scaffolds shall be placed no fur- bilized by bolts or other direct connec-
ther than the 4:1 height from the top. tions to the floor or roof deck, or they
Such guys, ties and braces shall be in- shall have their inboard ends stabilized
stalled at each end of the scaffold and by counterweights, except masons’
at horizontal intervals not to exceed 30 multi-point adjustable suspension scaf-
feet (9.1 m) (measured from one end fold outrigger beams shall not be sta-
[not both] towards the other). bilized by counterweights.
(iii) Ties, guys, braces, or outriggers (i) Before the scaffold is used, direct
shall be used to prevent the tipping of connections shall be evaluated by a
supported scaffolds in all cir- competent person who shall confirm,
282
based on the evaluation, that the sup- (i) Provided with stop bolts or shack-
porting surfaces are capable of sup- les at both ends;
porting the loads to be imposed. In ad- (ii) Securely fastened together with
dition, masons’ multi-point adjustable the flanges turned out when channel
suspension scaffold connections shall iron beams are used in place of I-
be designed by an engineer experienced beams;
in such scaffold design. (iii) Installed with all bearing sup-
(ii) Counterweights shall be made of ports perpendicular to the beam center
non-flowable material. Sand, gravel line;
and similar materials that can be eas- (iv) Set and maintained with the web
ily dislocated shall not be used as in a vertical position; and
counterweights. (v) When an outrigger beam is used,
(iii) Only those items specifically de- the shackle or clevis with which the
signed as counterweights shall be used rope is attached to the outrigger beam
to counterweight scaffold systems. shall be placed directly over the center
Construction materials such as, but line of the stirrup.
not limited to, masonry units and rolls (5) Suspension scaffold support de-
of roofing felt, shall not be used as vices such as cornice hooks, roof
counterweights. hooks, roof irons, parapet clamps, or
(iv) Counterweights shall be secured similar devices shall be:
by mechanical means to the outrigger (i) Made of steel, wrought iron, or
beams to prevent accidental displace- materials of equivalent strength;
ment. (ii) Supported by bearing blocks; and
(iii) Secured against movement by
(v) Counterweights shall not be re-
tiebacks installed at right angles to
moved from an outrigger beam until
the face of the building or structure, or
the scaffold is disassembled.
opposing angle tiebacks shall be in-
(vi) Outrigger beams which are not stalled and secured to a structurally
stabilized by bolts or other direct con- sound point of anchorage on the build-
nections to the floor or roof deck shall ing or structure. Sound points of an-
be secured by tiebacks. chorage include structural members,
(vii) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in but do not include standpipes, vents,
strength to the suspension ropes. other piping systems, or electrical con-
(viii) Outrigger beams shall be placed duit.
perpendicular to its bearing support (iv) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in
(usually the face of the building or strength to the hoisting rope.
structure). However, where the em- (6) When winding drum hoists are
ployer can demonstrate that it is not used on a suspension scaffold, they
possible to place an outrigger beam shall contain not less than four wraps
perpendicular to the face of the build- of the suspension rope at the lowest
ing or structure because of obstruc- point of scaffold travel. When other
tions that cannot be moved, the out- types of hoists are used, the suspension
rigger beam may be placed at some ropes shall be long enough to allow the
other angle, provided opposing angle scaffold to be lowered to the level
tiebacks are used. below without the rope end passing
(ix) Tiebacks shall be secured to a through the hoist, or the rope end shall
structurally sound anchorage on the be configured or provided with means
building or structure. Sound anchor- to prevent the end from passing
ages include structural members, but through the hoist.
do not include standpipes, vents, other (7) The use of repaired wire rope as
piping systems, or electrical conduit. suspension rope is prohibited.
(x) Tiebacks shall be installed per- (8) Wire suspension ropes shall not be
pendicular to the face of the building joined together except through the use
or structure, or opposing angle of eye splice thimbles connected with
tiebacks shall be installed. Single shackles or coverplates and bolts.
tiebacks installed at an angle are pro- (9) The load end of wire suspension
hibited. ropes shall be equipped with proper size

(4) Suspension scaffold outrigger thimbles and secured by eyesplicing or
beams shall be: equivalent means.
283
(10) Ropes shall be inspected for de- (14) Gasoline-powered equipment and
fects by a competent person prior to hoists shall not be used on suspension
each workshift and after every occur- scaffolds.
rence which could affect a rope’s integ- (15) Gears and brakes of power-oper-
rity. Ropes shall be replaced if any of ated hoists used on suspension scaf-
the following conditions exist: folds shall be enclosed.
(i) Any physical damage which im- (16) In addition to the normal oper-
pairs the function and strength of the ating brake, suspension scaffold power-
rope. operated hoists and manually operated
(ii) Kinks that might impair the hoists shall have a braking device or
tracking or wrapping of rope around locking pawl which engages automati-
the drum(s) or sheave(s). cally when a hoist makes either of the
following uncontrolled movements: an
(iii) Six randomly distributed broken
instantaneous change in momentum or
wires in one rope lay or three broken
an accelerated overspeed.
wires in one strand in one rope lay.
(17) Manually operated hoists shall
(iv) Abrasion, corrosion, scrubbing, require a positive crank force to de-
flattening or peening causing loss of scend.
more than one-third of the original di- (18) Two-point and multi-point sus-
ameter of the outside wires. pension scaffolds shall be tied or other-
(v) Heat damage caused by a torch or wise secured to prevent them from
any damage caused by contact with swaying, as determined to be necessary
electrical wires. based on an evaluation by a competent
(vi) Evidence that the secondary person. Window cleaners’ anchors shall
brake has been activated during an not be used for this purpose.
overspeed condition and has engaged (19) Devices whose sole function is to
the suspension rope. provide emergency escape and rescue
(11) Swaged attachments or spliced shall not be used as working platforms.
eyes on wire suspension ropes shall not This provision does not preclude the
be used unless they are made by the use of systems which are designed to
wire rope manufacturer or a qualified function both as suspension scaffolds
person. and emergency systems.
(12) When wire rope clips are used on (e) Access. This paragraph applies to
suspension scaffolds: scaffold access for all employees. Ac-
(i) There shall be a minimum of 3 cess requirements for employees erect-
wire rope clips installed, with the clips ing or dismantling supported scaffolds
a minimum of 6 rope diameters apart; are specifically addressed in paragraph
(ii) Clips shall be installed according (e)(9) of this section.
to the manufacturer’s recommenda- (1) When scaffold platforms are more
tions; than 2 feet (0.6 m) above or below a
point of access, portable ladders, hook-
(iii) Clips shall be retightened to the
on ladders, attachable ladders, stair
manufacturer’s recommendations after
towers (scaffold stairways/towers),
the initial loading;
stairway-type ladders (such as ladder
(iv) Clips shall be inspected and re- stands), ramps, walkways, integral pre-
tightened to the manufacturer’s rec- fabricated scaffold access, or direct ac-
ommendations at the start of each cess from another scaffold, structure,
workshift thereafter; personnel hoist, or similar surface
(v) U-bolt clips shall not be used at shall be used. Crossbraces shall not be
the point of suspension for any scaffold used as a means of access.
hoist; (2) Portable, hook-on, and attachable
(vi) When U-bolt clips are used, the ladders (Additional requirements for
U-bolt shall be placed over the dead the proper construction and use of
end of the rope, and the saddle shall be portable ladders are contained in sub-
placed over the live end of the rope. part X of this part—Stairways and
(13) Suspension scaffold power-oper- Ladders):
ated hoists and manual hoists shall be (i) Portable, hook-on, and attachable
tested by a qualified testing labora- ladders shall be positioned so as not to
tory. tip the scaffold;
284
(ii) Hook-on and attachable ladders they do not constitute a projection

shall be positioned so that their bot- hazard.
tom rung is not more than 24 inches (61 (vi) Handrails, and toprails that are
cm) above the scaffold supporting used as handrails, shall be at least 3
level; inches (7.6 cm) from other objects.
(iii) When hook-on and attachable (vii) Stairrails shall be not less than
ladders are used on a supported scaffold 28 inches (71 cm) nor more than 37
more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high, they inches (94 cm) from the upper surface
shall have rest platforms at 35-foot of the stairrail to the surface of the
(10.7 m) maximum vertical intervals. tread, in line with the face of the riser
(iv) Hook-on and attachable ladders at the forward edge of the tread.
shall be specifically designed for use (viii) A landing platform at least 18
with the type of scaffold used; inches (45.7 cm) wide by at least 18
(v) Hook-on and attachable ladders inches (45.7 cm) long shall be provided
shall have a minimum rung length of at each level.
111⁄2 inches (29 cm); and (ix) Each scaffold stairway shall be at
(vi) Hook-on and attachable ladders least 18 inches (45.7 cm) wide between
shall have uniformly spaced rungs with stairrails.
a maximum spacing between rungs of (x) Treads and landings shall have
163⁄4 inches. slip-resistant surfaces.
(3) Stairway-type ladders shall: (xi) Stairways shall be installed be-
(i) Be positioned such that their bot- tween 40 degrees and 60 degrees from
tom step is not more than 24 inches (61 the horizontal.
cm) above the scaffold supporting (xii) Guardrails meeting the require-
level; ments of paragraph (g)(4) of this sec-
tion shall be provided on the open sides
(ii) Be provided with rest platforms
and ends of each landing.
at 12 foot (3.7 m) maximum vertical in-
(xiii) Riser height shall be uniform,
tervals;
within 1⁄4 inch, (0.6 cm) for each flight
(iii) Have a minimum step width of 16
of stairs. Greater variations in riser
inches (41 cm), except that mobile scaf-
height are allowed for the top and bot-
fold stairway-type ladders shall have a
tom steps of the entire system, not for
minimum step width of 111⁄2 inches (30
each flight of stairs.
cm); and
(xiv) Tread depth shall be uniform,
(iv) Have slip-resistant treads on all within 1⁄4 inch, for each flight of stairs.
steps and landings. (5) Ramps and walkways. (i) Ramps
(4) Stairtowers (scaffold stairway/ and walkways 6 feet (1.8 m) or more
towers) shall be positioned such that above lower levels shall have guardrail
their bottom step is not more than 24 systems which comply with subpart M
inches (61 cm.) above the scaffold sup- of this part—Fall Protection;
porting level. (ii) No ramp or walkway shall be in-
(i) A stairrail consisting of a toprail clined more than a slope of one (1)
and a midrail shall be provided on each vertical to three (3) horizontal (20 de-
side of each scaffold stairway. grees above the horizontal).
(ii) The toprail of each stairrail sys- (iii) If the slope of a ramp or a walk-
tem shall also be capable of serving as way is steeper than one (1) vertical in
a handrail, unless a separate handrail eight (8) horizontal, the ramp or walk-
is provided. way shall have cleats not more than
(iii) Handrails, and toprails that fourteen (14) inches (35 cm) apart which
serve as handrails, shall provide an are securely fastened to the planks to
adequate handhold for employees provide footing.
grasping them to avoid falling. (6) Integral prefabricated scaffold ac-
(iv) Stairrail systems and handrails cess frames shall:
shall be surfaced to prevent injury to (i) Be specifically designed and con-
employees from punctures or lacera- structed for use as ladder rungs;
tions, and to prevent snagging of cloth- (ii) Have a rung length of at least 8
ing. inches (20 cm);

(v) The ends of stairrail systems and (iii) Not be used as work platforms
handrails shall be constructed so that when rungs are less than 111⁄2 inches in
285
length, unless each affected employee (iii) When erecting or dismantling tu-
uses fall protection, or a positioning bular welded frame scaffolds, (end)
device, which complies with § 1926.502; frames, with horizontal members that
(iv) Be uniformly spaced within each are parallel, level and are not more
frame section; than 22 inches apart vertically may be
(v) Be provided with rest platforms at used as climbing devices for access,
35-foot (10.7 m) maximum vertical in- provided they are erected in a manner
tervals on all supported scaffolds more that creates a usable ladder and pro-
than 35 feet (10.7 m) high; and vides good hand hold and foot space.
(vi) Have a maximum spacing be- (iv) Cross braces on tubular welded
tween rungs of 163⁄4 inches (43 cm). Non- frame scaffolds shall not be used as a
uniform rung spacing caused by joining means of access or egress.
end frames together is allowed, pro- (f) Use. (1) Scaffolds and scaffold com-
vided the resulting spacing does not ex- ponents shall not be loaded in excess of
ceed 163⁄4 inches (43 cm). their maximum intended loads or rated
(7) Steps and rungs of ladder and capacities, whichever is less.
stairway type access shall line up (2) The use of shore or lean-to scaf-
vertically with each other between rest folds is prohibited.
platforms. (3) Scaffolds and scaffold components
(8) Direct access to or from another shall be inspected for visible defects by
surface shall be used only when the a competent person before each work
scaffold is not more than 14 inches (36 shift, and after any occurrence which
cm) horizontally and not more than 24 could affect a scaffold’s structural in-
inches (61 cm) vertically from the other tegrity.
surface. (4) Any part of a scaffold damaged or
(9) Effective September 2, 1997, access weakened such that its strength is less
for employees erecting or dismantling than that required by paragraph (a) of
supported scaffolds shall be in accord- this section shall be immediately re-
ance with the following: paired or replaced, braced to meet
(i) The employer shall provide safe those provisions, or removed from serv-
means of access for each employee ice until repaired.
erecting or dismantling a scaffold (5) Scaffolds shall not be moved hori-
where the provision of safe access is zontally while employees are on them,
feasible and does not create a greater unless they have been designed by a
hazard. The employer shall have a com- registered professional engineer spe-
petent person determine whether it is cifically for such movement or, for mo-
feasible or would pose a greater hazard bile scaffolds, where the provisions of
to provide, and have employees use a § 1926.452(w) are followed.
safe means of access. This determina- (6) The clearance between scaffolds
tion shall be based on site conditions and power lines shall be as follows:
and the type of scaffold being erected Scaffolds shall not be erected, used,
or dismantled. dismantled, altered, or moved such
(ii) Hook-on or attachable ladders that they or any conductive material
shall be installed as soon as scaffold handled on them might come closer to
erection has progressed to a point that exposed and energized power lines than
permits safe installation and use. as follows:
Insulated lines Minimum distance Alternatives
voltage
Less than 300 volts .......................... 3 feet (0.9 m).

300 volts to 50 kv ............................ 10 feet (3.1m).
More than 50 kv ............................... 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) for 2 times the length of the line insulator, but
each 1 kv over 50 kv. never less than 10 feet (3.1 m).
Uninsulated lines Minimum distance Alternatives

voltage
Less than 50 kv ............................... 10 feet (3.1 m).

More than 50 kv ............................... 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) for 2 times the length of the line insulator, but
each 1 kv over 50 kv. never less than 10 feet (3.1 m).
286
EXCEPTION TO PARAGRAPH (f)(6): Scaffolds to increase the working level height of
and materials may be closer to power lines employees.
than specified above where such clearance is
(15) Ladders shall not be used on scaf-
necessary for performance of work, and only
after the utility company, or electrical sys- folds to increase the working level
tem operator, has been notified of the need height of employees, except on large
to work closer and the utility company, or area scaffolds where employers have
electrical system operator, has deenergized satisfied the following criteria:
the lines, relocated the lines, or installed (i) When the ladder is placed against
protective coverings to prevent accidental a structure which is not a part of the
contact with the lines. scaffold, the scaffold shall be secured
(7) Scaffolds shall be erected, moved, against the sideways thrust exerted by
dismantled, or altered only under the the ladder;
supervision and direction of a com- (ii) The platform units shall be se-
petent person qualified in scaffold erec- cured to the scaffold to prevent their
tion, moving, dismantling or alter- movement;
ation. Such activities shall be per- (iii) The ladder legs shall be on the
formed only by experienced and trained same platform or other means shall be
employees selected for such work by provided to stabilize the ladder against
the competent person. unequal platform deflection, and
(8) Employees shall be prohibited (iv) The ladder legs shall be secured
from working on scaffolds covered with to prevent them from slipping or being
snow, ice, or other slippery material pushed off the platform.
except as necessary for removal of such (16) Platforms shall not deflect more
materials. than 1⁄60 of the span when loaded.
(9) Where swinging loads are being (17) To reduce the possibility of weld-
hoisted onto or near scaffolds such that ing current arcing through the suspen-
the loads might contact the scaffold, sion wire rope when performing weld-
tag lines or equivalent measures to ing from suspended scaffolds, the fol-
control the loads shall be used. lowing precautions shall be taken, as
(10) Suspension ropes supporting ad- applicable:
justable suspension scaffolds shall be of (i) An insulated thimble shall be used
a diameter large enough to provide suf- to attach each suspension wire rope to
ficient surface area for the functioning its hanging support (such as cornice
of brake and hoist mechanisms. hook or outrigger). Excess suspension
(11) Suspension ropes shall be shield- wire rope and any additional inde-
ed from heat-producing processes. pendent lines from grounding shall be
When acids or other corrosive sub- insulated;
stances are used on a scaffold, the (ii) The suspension wire rope shall be
ropes shall be shielded, treated to pro- covered with insulating material ex-
tect against the corrosive substances, tending at least 4 feet (1.2 m) above the
or shall be of a material that will not hoist. If there is a tail line below the
be damaged by the substance being hoist, it shall be insulated to prevent
used. contact with the platform. The portion
(12) Work on or from scaffolds is proof the tail line that hangs free below
hibited during storms or high winds the scaffold shall be guided or retained,
unless a competent person has deter- or both, so that it does not become
mined that it is safe for employees to grounded;
be on the scaffold and those employees (iii) Each hoist shall be covered with
are protected by a personal fall arrest insulated protective covers;
system or wind screens. Wind screens (iv) In addition to a work lead at-
shall not be used unless the scaffold is tachment required by the welding proc-
secured against the anticipated wind ess, a grounding conductor shall be
forces imposed. connected from the scaffold to the
(13) Debris shall not be allowed to ac- structure. The size of this conductor
cumulate on platforms. shall be at least the size of the welding
(14) Makeshift devices, such as but process work lead, and this conductor
not limited to boxes and barrels, shall shall not be in series with the welding
not be used on top of scaffold platforms process or the work piece;
287
(v) If the scaffold grounding lead is (vi) Each employee performing

disconnected at any time, the welding overhand bricklaying operations from
machine shall be shut off; and a supported scaffold shall be protected
(vi) An active welding rod or from falling from all open sides and
uninsulated welding lead shall not be ends of the scaffold (except at the side
allowed to contact the scaffold or its next to the wall being laid) by the use
suspension system. of a personal fall arrest system or
(g) Fall protection. (1) Each employee guardrail system (with minimum 200
on a scaffold more than 10 feet (3.1 m) pound toprail capacity).
above a lower level shall be protected (vii) For all scaffolds not otherwise
from falling to that lower level. Para- specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) through
graphs (g)(1) (i) through (vii) of this (g)(1)(vi) of this section, each employee
section establish the types of fall pro- shall be protected by the use of per-
tection to be provided to the employees sonal fall arrest systems or guardrail
on each type of scaffold. Paragraph systems meeting the requirements of
(g)(2) of this section addresses fall pro- paragraph (g)(4) of this section.
tection for scaffold erectors and dis- (2) Effective September 2, 1997, the
mantlers. employer shall have a competent per-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(1): The fall protec- son determine the feasibility and safe-
tion requirements for employees installing ty of providing fall protection for em-
suspension scaffold support systems on ployees erecting or dismantling sup-
floors, roofs, and other elevated surfaces are ported scaffolds. Employers are re-
set forth in subpart M of this part. quired to provide fall protection for
(i) Each employee on a boatswains’ employees erecting or dismantling sup-
chair, catenary scaffold, float scaffold, ported scaffolds where the installation
needle beam scaffold, or ladder jack and use of such protection is feasible
scaffold shall be protected by a per- and does not create a greater hazard.
sonal fall arrest system; (3) In addition to meeting the re-
(ii) Each employee on a single-point quirements of § 1926.502(d), personal fall
or two-point adjustable suspension arrest systems used on scaffolds shall
scaffold shall be protected by both a be attached by lanyard to a vertical
personal fall arrest system and guard- lifeline, horizontal lifeline, or scaffold
rail system; structural member. Vertical lifelines
(iii) Each employee on a crawling shall not be used when overhead com-
board (chicken ladder) shall be pro- ponents, such as overhead protection
tected by a personal fall arrest system, or additional platform levels, are part
a guardrail system (with minimum 200 of a single-point or two-point adjust-
pound toprail capacity), or by a three- able suspension scaffold.
fourth inch (1.9 cm) diameter grabline (i) When vertical lifelines are used,
or equivalent handhold securely fas- they shall be fastened to a fixed safe
tened beside each crawling board; point of anchorage, shall be inde-
(iv) Each employee on a self-con- pendent of the scaffold, and shall be
tained adjustable scaffold shall be pro- protected from sharp edges and abra-
tected by a guardrail system (with sion. Safe points of anchorage include
minimum 200 pound toprail capacity) structural members of buildings, but
when the platform is supported by the do not include standpipes, vents, other
frame structure, and by both a per- piping systems, electrical conduit, out-
sonal fall arrest system and a guardrail rigger beams, or counterweights.
system (with minimum 200 pound top- (ii) When horizontal lifelines are
rail capacity) when the platform is sup- used, they shall be secured to two or
ported by ropes; more structural members of the scaf-
(v) Each employee on a walkway lo- fold, or they may be looped around
cated within a scaffold shall be pro- both suspension and independent sus-
tected by a guardrail system (with pension lines (on scaffolds so equipped)
minimum 200 pound toprail capacity) above the hoist and brake attached to
installed within 91⁄2 inches (24.1 cm) of the end of the scaffold. Horizontal life-
and along at least one side of the walk- lines shall not be attached only to the
way. suspension ropes.
288
(iii) When lanyards are connected to the guardrail system and the platform
horizontal lifelines or structural mem- surface.
bers on a single-point or two-point ad- (v) When screens and mesh are used,
justable suspension scaffold, the scaf- they shall extend from the top edge of
fold shall be equipped with additional the guardrail system to the scaffold
independent support lines and auto- platform, and along the entire opening
matic locking devices capable of stop- between the supports.
ping the fall of the scaffold in the event (vi) When intermediate members
one or both of the suspension ropes (such as balusters or additional rails)
fail. The independent support lines are used, they shall not be more than
shall be equal in number and strength 19 inches (48 cm) apart.
to the suspension ropes. (vii) Each toprail or equivalent mem-
(iv) Vertical lifelines, independent ber of a guardrail system shall be capa-
support lines, and suspension ropes ble of withstanding, without failure, a
shall not be attached to each other, nor force applied in any downward or hori-
shall they be attached to or use the zontal direction at any point along its
same point of anchorage, nor shall they top edge of at least 100 pounds (445 n)
be attached to the same point on the for guardrail systems installed on sin-
scaffold or personal fall arrest system. gle-point adjustable suspension scaf-
(4) Guardrail systems installed to folds or two-point adjustable suspen-
meet the requirements of this section sion scaffolds, and at least 200 pounds
shall comply with the following provi- (890 n) for guardrail systems installed
sions (guardrail systems built in ac- on all other scaffolds.
cordance with appendix A to this sub- (viii) When the loads specified in
part will be deemed to meet the re- paragraph (g)(4)(vii) of this section are
quirements of paragraphs (g)(4) (vii), applied in a downward direction, the
(viii), and (ix) of this section): top edge shall not drop below the
(i) Guardrail systems shall be in- height above the platform surface that
stalled along all open sides and ends of is prescribed in paragraph (g)(4)(ii) of
platforms. Guardrail systems shall be this section.
installed before the scaffold is released (ix) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter-
for use by employees other than erec- mediate vertical members, solid pan-
tion/dismantling crews. els, and equivalent structural members
(ii) The top edge height of toprails or of a guardrail system shall be capable
equivalent member on supported scaf- of withstanding, without failure, a
folds manufactured or placed in service force applied in any downward or hori-
after January 1, 2000 shall be installed zontal direction at any point along the
between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 45 inches midrail or other member of at least 75
(1.2 m) above the platform surface. The pounds (333 n) for guardrail systems
top edge height on supported scaffolds with a minimum 100 pound toprail ca-
manufactured and placed in service be- pacity, and at least 150 pounds (666 n)
fore January 1, 2000, and on all sus- for guardrail systems with a minimum
pended scaffolds where both a guardrail 200 pound toprail capacity.
and a personal fall arrest system are (x) Suspension scaffold hoists and
required shall be between 36 inches (0.9 non-walk-through stirrups may be used
m) and 45 inches (1.2 m). When condi- as end guardrails, if the space between
tions warrant, the height of the top the hoist or stirrup and the side guard-
edge may exceed the 45-inch height, rail or structure does not allow passage
provided the guardrail system meets of an employee to the end of the scaf-
all other criteria of paragraph (g)(4). fold.
(iii) When midrails, screens, mesh, (xi) Guardrails shall be surfaced to
intermediate vertical members, solid prevent injury to an employee from
panels, or equivalent structural mem- punctures or lacerations, and to pre-
bers are used, they shall be installed vent snagging of clothing.
between the top edge of the guardrail (xii) The ends of all rails shall not
system and the scaffold platform. overhang the terminal posts except
(iv) When midrails are used, they when such overhang does not con-
shall be installed at a height approxi- stitute a projection hazard to employ-
mately midway between the top edge of ees.
289
(xiii) Steel or plastic banding shall guardrail shall be erected for a dis-
not be used as a toprail or midrail. tance sufficient to protect employees
(xiv) Manila or plastic (or other syn- below; or
thetic) rope being used for toprails or (iv) A guardrail system shall be in-
midrails shall be inspected by a com- stalled with openings small enough to
petent person as frequently as nec- prevent passage of potential falling ob-
essary to ensure that it continues to jects; or
meet the strength requirements of (v) A canopy structure, debris net, or
paragraph (g) of this section. catch platform strong enough to with-
(xv) Crossbracing is acceptable in
stand the impact forces of the poten-
place of a midrail when the crossing
tial falling objects shall be erected
point of two braces is between 20 inches
(0.5 m) and 30 inches (0.8 m) above the over the employees below.
work platform or as a toprail when the (3) Canopies, when used for falling ob-
crossing point of two braces is between ject protection, shall comply with the
38 inches (0.97 m) and 48 inches (1.3 m) following criteria:
above the work platform. The end (i) Canopies shall be installed be-
points at each upright shall be no more tween the falling object hazard and the
than 48 inches (1.3 m) apart. employees.
(h) Falling object protection. (1) In ad- (ii) When canopies are used on sus-
dition to wearing hardhats each em- pension scaffolds for falling object pro-
ployee on a scaffold shall be provided tection, the scaffold shall be equipped
with additional protection from falling with additional independent support
hand tools, debris, and other small ob- lines equal in number to the number of
jects through the installation of points supported, and equivalent in
toeboards, screens, or guardrail sys- strength to the strength of the suspen-
tems, or through the erection of debris sion ropes.
nets, catch platforms, or canopy struc- (iii) Independent support lines and
tures that contain or deflect the falling
suspension ropes shall not be attached
objects. When the falling objects are
to the same points of anchorage.
too large, heavy or massive to be con-
tained or deflected by any of the above- (4) Where used, toeboards shall be:
listed measures, the employer shall (i) Capable of withstanding, without
place such potential falling objects failure, a force of at least 50 pounds
away from the edge of the surface from (222 n) applied in any downward or hor-
which they could fall and shall secure izontal direction at any point along the
those materials as necessary to prevent toeboard (toeboards built in accord-
their falling. ance with appendix A to this subpart
(2) Where there is a danger of tools, will be deemed to meet this require-
materials, or equipment falling from a ment); and
scaffold and striking employees below, (ii) At least three and one-half inches
the following provisions apply: (9 cm) high from the top edge of the
(i) The area below the scaffold to toeboard to the level of the walking/
which objects can fall shall be barri- working surface. Toeboards shall be se-
caded, and employees shall not be per- curely fastened in place at the outer-
mitted to enter the hazard area; or most edge of the platform and have not
(ii) A toeboard shall be erected along more than 1⁄4 inch (0.7 cm) clearance
the edge of platforms more than 10 feet above the walking/working surface.
(3.1 m) above lower levels for a distance Toeboards shall be solid or with open-
sufficient to protect employees below, ings not over one inch (2.5 cm) in the
except on float (ship) scaffolds where greatest dimension.
an edging of 3⁄4 × 11⁄2 inch (2 × 4 cm)
wood or equivalent may be used in lieu [61 FR 46107, Aug. 30, 1996, as corrected and
of toeboards; amended at 61 FR 59831, 59832, Nov. 25, 1996]
(iii) Where tools, materials, or equip- EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 61 FR 59832, Nov.
ment are piled to a height higher than 25, 1996, § 1926.451(b)(2)(i) was amended and
the top edge of the toeboard, paneling certain requirements stayed until Nov. 25,
or screening extending from the 1997, or until further rulemaking has been
toeboard or platform to the top of the completed, whichever is later.
290
§ 1926.452 Additional requirements ap- criteria that will enable an employer

plicable to specific types of scaf- to comply with design and loading re-
folds. quirements for pole scaffolds under 60
In addition to the applicable require- feet in height.
ments of § 1926.451, the following re- (b) Tube and coupler scaffolds. (1)
quirements apply to the specific types When platforms are being moved to the
of scaffolds indicated. Scaffolds not next level, the existing platform shall
specifically addressed by § 1926.452, such be left undisturbed until the new bear-
as but not limited to systems scaffolds, ers have been set in place and braced
must meet the requirements of prior to receiving the new platforms.
§ 1926.451. (2) Transverse bracing forming an
(a) Pole scaffolds. (1) When platforms ‘‘X’’ across the width of the scaffold
are being moved to the next level, the shall be installed at the scaffold ends
existing platform shall be left undis- and at least at every third set of posts
turbed until the new bearers have been horizontally (measured from only one
set in place and braced, prior to receiv- end) and every fourth runner
ing the new platforms. vertically. Bracing shall extend diago-
(2) Crossbracing shall be installed be- nally from the inner or outer posts or
tween the inner and outer sets of poles runners upward to the next outer or
on double pole scaffolds. inner posts or runners. Building ties
(3) Diagonal bracing in both direc- shall be installed at the bearer levels
tions shall be installed across the en- between the transverse bracing and
tire inside face of double-pole scaffolds shall conform to the requirements of
used to support loads equivalent to a § 1926.451(c)(1).
uniformly distributed load of 50 pounds (3) On straight run scaffolds, longitu-
(222 kg) or more per square foot (929 dinal bracing across the inner and
square cm). outer rows of posts shall be installed
(4) Diagonal bracing in both direc- diagonally in both directions, and shall
tions shall be installed across the en- extend from the base of the end posts
tire outside face of all double- and sin- upward to the top of the scaffold at ap-
gle-pole scaffolds. proximately a 45 degree angle. On scaf-
(5) Runners and bearers shall be in- folds whose length is greater than their
stalled on edge. height, such bracing shall be repeated
(6) Bearers shall extend a minimum beginning at least at every fifth post.
of 3 inches (7.6 cm) over the outside On scaffolds whose length is less than
edges of runners. their height, such bracing shall be in-
(7) Runners shall extend over a min- stalled from the base of the end posts
imum of two poles, and shall be sup- upward to the opposite end posts, and
ported by bearing blocks securely at- then in alternating directions until
tached to the poles. reaching the top of the scaffold. Brac-
(8) Braces, bearers, and runners shall ing shall be installed as close as pos-
not be spliced between poles. sible to the intersection of the bearer
(9) Where wooden poles are spliced, and post or runner and post.
the ends shall be squared and the upper (4) Where conditions preclude the at-
section shall rest squarely on the lower tachment of bracing to posts, bracing
section. Wood splice plates shall be shall be attached to the runners as
provided on at least two adjacent sides, close to the post as possible.
and shall extend at least 2 feet (0.6 m) (5) Bearers shall be installed trans-
on either side of the splice, overlap the versely between posts, and when cou-
abutted ends equally, and have at least pled to the posts, shall have the in-
the same cross-sectional areas as the board coupler bear directly on the run-
pole. Splice plates of other materials of ner coupler. When the bearers are cou-
equivalent strength may be used. pled to the runners, the couplers shall
(10) Pole scaffolds over 60 feet in be as close to the posts as possible.
height shall be designed by a registered (6) Bearers shall extend beyond the
professional engineer, and shall be con- posts and runners, and shall provide
structed and loaded in accordance with full contact with the coupler.
that design. Non-mandatory appendix (7) Runners shall be installed along
A to this subpart contains examples of the length of the scaffold, located on
291
both the inside and outside posts at (iii) Be used only to support per-
level heights (when tube and coupler sonnel, unless the scaffold has been de-
guardrails and midrails are used on signed for other loads by a qualified en-
outside posts, they may be used in lieu gineer and built to withstand the tip-
of outside runners). ping forces caused by those other loads
(8) Runners shall be interlocked on being placed on the bracket-supported
straight runs to form continuous section of the scaffold.
lengths, and shall be coupled to each (6) Scaffolds over 125 feet (38.0 m) in
post. The bottom runners and bearers height above their base plates shall be
shall be located as close to the base as designed by a registered professional
possible. engineer, and shall be constructed and
(9) Couplers shall be of a structural loaded in accordance with such design.
metal, such as drop-forged steel, malle- (d) Plasterers’, decorators’, and large
able iron, or structural grade alu- area scaffolds. Scaffolds shall be con-
minum. The use of gray cast iron is structed in accordance with paragraphs
prohibited. (a), (b), or (c) of this section, as appro-
(10) Tube and coupler scaffolds over priate.
125 feet in height shall be designed by (e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds
a registered professional engineer, and (squares). (1) Scaffolds made of wood
shall be constructed and loaded in ac- shall be reinforced with gussets on
cordance with such design. Non-manda- both sides of each corner.
tory appendix A to this subpart con- (2) Diagonal braces shall be installed
tains examples of criteria that will en- on all sides of each square.
able an employer to comply with de- (3) Diagonal braces shall be installed
sign and loading requirements for tube between squares on the rear and front
and coupler scaffolds under 125 feet in sides of the scaffold, and shall extend
height. from the bottom of each square to the
(c) Fabricated frame scaffolds (tubular top of the next square.
welded frame scaffolds). (1) When mov- (4) Scaffolds shall not exceed three
ing platforms to the next level, the ex- tiers in height, and shall be so con-
isting platform shall be left undis- structed and arranged that one square
turbed until the new end frames have rests directly above the other. The
been set in place and braced prior to re- upper tiers shall stand on a continuous
ceiving the new platforms. row of planks laid across the next
(2) Frames and panels shall be braced lower tier, and shall be nailed down or
by cross, horizontal, or diagonal otherwise secured to prevent displace-
braces, or combination thereof, which ment.
secure vertical members together lat- (f) Horse scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall
erally. The cross braces shall be of such not be constructed or arranged more
length as will automatically square than two tiers or 10 feet (3.0 m) in
and align vertical members so that the height, whichever is less.
erected scaffold is always plumb, level, (2) When horses are arranged in tiers,
and square. All brace connections shall each horse shall be placed directly over
be secured. the horse in the tier below.
(3) Frames and panels shall be joined (3) When horses are arranged in tiers,
together vertically by coupling or the legs of each horse shall be nailed
stacking pins or equivalent means. down or otherwise secured to prevent
(4) Where uplift can occur which displacement.
would displace scaffold end frames or (4) When horses are arranged in tiers,
panels, the frames or panels shall be each tier shall be crossbraced.
locked together vertically by pins or (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’
equivalent means. bracket scaffolds. (1) Each bracket, ex-
(5) Brackets used to support canti- cept those for wooden bracket-form
levered loads shall: scaffolds, shall be attached to the sup-
(i) Be seated with side-brackets par- porting formwork or structure by
allel to the frames and end-brackets at means of one or more of the following:
90 degrees to the frames; nails; a metal stud attachment device;

(ii) Not be bent or twisted from these welding; hooking over a secured struc-
positions; and tural supporting member, with the
292
form wales either bolted to the form or fessional engineer and shall be con-
secured by snap ties or tie bolts ex- structed and loaded in accordance with
tending through the form and securely such design.
anchored; or, for carpenters’ bracket (j) Pump jack scaffolds. (1) Pump jack
scaffolds only, by a bolt extending brackets, braces, and accessories shall
through to the opposite side of the be fabricated from metal plates and an-
structure’s wall. gles. Each pump jack bracket shall
(2) Wooden bracket-form scaffolds have two positive gripping mechanisms
shall be an integral part of the form to prevent any failure or slippage.
panel. (2) Poles shall be secured to the
(3) Folding type metal brackets, structure by rigid triangular bracing or
when extended for use, shall be either equivalent at the bottom, top, and
bolted or secured with a locking-type other points as necessary. When the
pin. pump jack has to pass bracing already
(h) Roof bracket scaffolds. (1) Scaffold installed, an additional brace shall be
brackets shall be constructed to fit the installed approximately 4 feet (1.2 m)
pitch of the roof and shall provide a above the brace to be passed, and shall
level support for the platform. be left in place until the pump jack has
(2) Brackets (including those pro- been moved and the original brace re-
vided with pointed metal projections) installed.
shall be anchored in place by nails un- (3) When guardrails are used for fall
less it is impractical to use nails. When protection, a workbench may be used
nails are not used, brackets shall be se- as the toprail only if it meets all the
cured in place with first-grade manila requirements in paragraphs (g)(4) (ii),
rope of at least three-fourth inch (1.9 (vii), (viii), and (xiii) of § 1926.451.
cm) diameter, or equivalent. (4) Work benches shall not be used as
(i) Outrigger scaffolds. (1) The inboard scaffold platforms.
end of outrigger beams, measured from
(5) When poles are made of wood, the
the fulcrum point to the extreme point
pole lumber shall be straight-grained,
of anchorage, shall be not less than one
free of shakes, large loose or dead
and one-half times the outboard end in
knots, and other defects which might
length.
impair strength.
(2) Outrigger beams fabricated in the
shape of an I-beam or channel shall be (6) When wood poles are constructed
placed so that the web section is of two continuous lengths, they shall
vertical. be joined together with the seam par-
(3) The fulcrum point of outrigger allel to the bracket.
beams shall rest on secure bearings at (7) When two by fours are spliced to
least 6 inches (15.2 cm) in each hori- make a pole, mending plates shall be
zontal dimension. installed at all splices to develop the
(4) Outrigger beams shall be secured full strength of the member.
in place against movement, and shall (k) Ladder jack scaffolds. (1) Platforms
be securely braced at the fulcrum point shall not exceed a height of 20 feet (6.1
against tipping. m).
(5) The inboard ends of outrigger (2) All ladders used to support ladder
beams shall be securely anchored ei- jack scaffolds shall meet the require-
ther by means of braced struts bearing ments of subpart X of this part—Stair-
against sills in contact with the over- ways and Ladders, except that job-
head beams or ceiling, or by means of made ladders shall not be used to sup-
tension members secured to the floor port ladder jack scaffolds.
joists underfoot, or by both. (3) The ladder jack shall be so de-
(6) The entire supporting structure signed and constructed that it will bear
shall be securely braced to prevent any on the side rails and ladder rungs or on
horizontal movement. the ladder rungs alone. If bearing on
(7) To prevent their displacement, rungs only, the bearing area shall in-
platform units shall be nailed, bolted, clude a length of at least 10 inches (25.4
or otherwise secured to outriggers. cm) on each rung.

(8) Scaffolds and scaffold components (4) Ladders used to support ladder
shall be designed by a registered pro- jacks shall be placed, fastened, or
293
equipped with devices to prevent slip- (iii) The supporting rope is protected
ping. to ensure that it will not chafe at any
(5) Scaffold platforms shall not be point where a change in direction oc-
bridged one to another. curs, and
(l) Window jack scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds (iv) The scaffold is positioned so that
shall be securely attached to the win- swinging cannot bring the scaffold into
dow opening. contact with another surface.
(2) Scaffolds shall be used only for (3) Boatswains’ chair tackle shall
the purpose of working at the window consist of correct size ball bearings or
opening through which the jack is bushed blocks containing safety hooks
placed. and properly ‘‘eye-spliced’’ minimum
(3) Window jacks shall not be used to five-eighth (5⁄8) inch (1.6 cm) diameter
support planks placed between one win- first-grade manila rope, or other rope
dow jack and another, or for other ele- which will satisfy the criteria (e.g.,
ments of scaffolding. strength and durability) of manila
(m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). rope.
(1) Crawling boards shall extend from (4) Boatswains’ chair seat slings shall
the roof peak to the eaves when used in be reeved through four corner holes in
connection with roof construction, re- the seat; shall cross each other on the
pair, or maintenance. underside of the seat; and shall be
(2) Crawling boards shall be secured rigged so as to prevent slippage which
to the roof by ridge hooks or by means could cause an out-of-level condition.
that meet equivalent criteria (e.g., (5) Boatswains’ chair seat slings shall
strength and durability). be a minimum of five-eight (5⁄8) inch
(n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder (1.6 cm) diameter fiber, synthetic, or
scaffolds. (1) Scaffold platforms shall other rope which will satisfy the cri-
not be placed any higher than the sec- teria (e.g., strength, slip resistance, du-
ond highest rung or step of the ladder rability, etc.) of first grade manila
supporting the platform. rope.
(2) All ladders used in conjunction (6) When a heat-producing process
with step, platform and trestle ladder such as gas or arc welding is being con-
scaffolds shall meet the pertinent re- ducted, boatswains’ chair seat slings
quirements of subpart X of this part— shall be a minimum of three-eight (3⁄8)
Stairways and Ladders, except that inch (1.0 cm) wire rope.
job-made ladders shall not be used to (7) Non-cross-laminated wood boat-
support such scaffolds. swains’ chairs shall be reinforced on
(3) Ladders used to support step, plat- their underside by cleats securely fas-
form, and trestle ladder scaffolds shall tened to prevent the board from split-
be placed, fastened, or equipped with ting.
devices to prevent slipping. (p) Two-point adjustable suspension
(4) Scaffolds shall not be bridged one scaffolds (swing stages). The following
to another. requirements do not apply to two-point
(o) Single-point adjustable suspension adjustable suspension scaffolds used as
scaffolds. (1) When two single-point ad- masons’ or stonesetters’ scaffolds.
justable suspension scaffolds are com- Such scaffolds are covered by para-
bined to form a two-point adjustable graph (q) of this section.
suspension scaffold, the resulting two- (1) Platforms shall not be more than
point scaffold shall comply with the re- 36 inches (0.9 m) wide unless designed
quirements for two-point adjustable by a qualified person to prevent unsta-
suspension scaffolds in paragraph (p) of ble conditions.
this section. (2) The platform shall be securely fas-
(2) The supporting rope between the tened to hangers (stirrups) by U-bolts
scaffold and the suspension device shall or by other means which satisfy the re-
be kept vertical unless all of the fol- quirements of § 1926.451(a).
lowing conditions are met: (3) The blocks for fiber or synthetic
(i) The rigging has been designed by a ropes shall consist of at least one dou-
qualified person, and ble and one single block. The sheaves
(ii) The scaffold is accessible to res- of all blocks shall fit the size of the
cuers, and rope used.
294
(4) Platforms shall be of the ladder- project a minimum of 6 inches (15.2 cm)
type, plank-type, beam-type, or light- beyond the platform on both sides.
metal type. Light metal-type plat- Each bearer shall be securely fastened
forms having a rated capacity of 750 to the platform.
pounds or less and platforms 40 feet (2) Rope connections shall be such
(12.2 m) or less in length shall be tested that the platform cannot shift or slip.
and listed by a nationally recognized (3) When only two ropes are used
testing laboratory. with each float:
(5) Two-point scaffolds shall not be (i) They shall be arranged so as to
bridged or otherwise connected one to provide four ends which are securely
another during raising and lowering fastened to overhead supports.
operations unless the bridge connec- (ii) Each supporting rope shall be
tions are articulated (attached), and hitched around one end of the bearer
the hoists properly sized. and pass under the platform to the
(6) Passage may be made from one other end of the bearer where it is
platform to another only when the hitched again, leaving sufficient rope
platforms are at the same height, are at each end for the supporting ties.
abutting, and walk-through stirrups (t) Interior hung scaffolds. (1) Scaf-
specifically designed for this purpose folds shall be suspended only from the
are used. roof structure or other structural
(q) Multi-point adjustable suspension member such as ceiling beams.
scaffolds, stonesetters’ multi-point adjust-
(2) Overhead supporting members
able suspension scaffolds, and masons’
(roof structure, ceiling beams, or other
multi-point adjustable suspension scaf-
structural members) shall be inspected
folds. (1) When two or more scaffolds
and checked for strength before the
are used they shall not be bridged one
scaffold is erected.
to another unless they are designed to
(3) Suspension ropes and cables shall
be bridged, the bridge connections are
be connected to the overhead sup-
articulated, and the hoists are properly
porting members by shackles, clips,
sized.
thimbles, or other means that meet
(2) If bridges are not used, passage
equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, du-
may be made from one platform to an-
rability).
other only when the platforms are at
the same height and are abutting. (u) Needle beam scaffolds. (1) Scaffold
(3) Scaffolds shall be suspended from support beams shall be installed on
metal outriggers, brackets, wire rope edge.
slings, hooks, or means that meet (2) Ropes or hangers shall be used for
equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, du- supports, except that one end of a nee-
rability). dle beam scaffold may be supported by
(r) Catenary scaffolds. (1) No more a permanent structural member.
than one platform shall be placed be- (3) The ropes shall be securely at-
tween consecutive vertical pickups, tached to the needle beams.
and no more than two platforms shall (4) The support connection shall be
be used on a catenary scaffold. arranged so as to prevent the needle
(2) Platforms supported by wire ropes beam from rolling or becoming dis-
shall have hook-shaped stops on each placed.
end of the platforms to prevent them (5) Platform units shall be securely
from slipping off the wire ropes. These attached to the needle beams by bolts
hooks shall be so placed that they will or equivalent means. Cleats and over-
prevent the platform from falling if hang are not considered to be adequate
one of the horizontal wire ropes breaks. means of attachment.
(3) Wire ropes shall not be tightened (v) Multi-level suspended scaffolds. (1)
to the extent that the application of a Scaffolds shall be equipped with addi-
scaffold load will overstress them. tional independent support lines, equal
(4) Wire ropes shall be continuous in number to the number of points sup-
and without splices between anchors. ported, and of equivalent strength to
(s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (1) The plat- the suspension ropes, and rigged to
form shall be supported by a minimum support the scaffold in the event the
of two bearers, each of which shall suspension rope(s) fail.
295
(2) Independent support lines and sus- (iii) Outrigger frames, when used, are
pension ropes shall not be attached to installed on both sides of the scaffold;
the same points of anchorage. (iv) When power systems are used,
(3) Supports for platforms shall be at- the propelling force is applied directly
tached directly to the support stirrup to the wheels, and does not produce a
and not to any other platform. speed in excess of 1 foot per second (.3
(w) Mobile scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall mps); and
be braced by cross, horizontal, or di- (v) No employee is on any part of the
agonal braces, or combination thereof, scaffold which extends outward beyond
to prevent racking or collapse of the the wheels, casters, or other supports.
scaffold and to secure vertical mem- (7) Platforms shall not extend out-
bers together laterally so as to auto- ward beyond the base supports of the
matically square and align the vertical scaffold unless outrigger frames or
members. Scaffolds shall be plumb, equivalent devices are used to ensure
level, and squared. All brace connec- stability.
tions shall be secured. (8) Where leveling of the scaffold is
(i) Scaffolds constructed of tube and necessary, screw jacks or equivalent
coupler components shall also comply means shall be used.
with the requirements of paragraph (b) (9) Caster stems and wheel stems
of this section; shall be pinned or otherwise secured in
(ii) Scaffolds constructed of fab- scaffold legs or adjustment screws.
ricated frame components shall also (10) Before a scaffold is moved, each
comply with the requirements of para- employee on the scaffold shall be made
graph (c) of this section. aware of the move.
(2) Scaffold casters and wheels shall (x) Repair bracket scaffolds. (1) Brack-
be locked with positive wheel and/or ets shall be secured in place by at least
wheel and swivel locks, or equivalent one wire rope at least 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm)
means, to prevent movement of the in diameter.
scaffold while the scaffold is used in a (2) Each bracket shall be attached to
stationary manner. the securing wire rope (or ropes) by a
(3) Manual force used to move the positive locking device capable of pre-
scaffold shall be applied as close to the venting the unintentional detachment
base as practicable, but not more than of the bracket from the rope, or by
5 feet (1.5 m) above the supporting sur- equivalent means.
face. (3) Each bracket, at the contact point
(4) Power systems used to propel mo- between the supporting structure and
bile scaffolds shall be designed for such the bottom of the bracket, shall be pro-
use. Forklifts, trucks, similar motor vided with a shoe (heel block or foot)
vehicles or add-on motors shall not be capable of preventing the lateral move-
used to propel scaffolds unless the scaf- ment of the bracket.
fold is designed for such propulsion sys- (4) Platforms shall be secured to the
tems. brackets in a manner that will prevent
(5) Scaffolds shall be stabilized to the separation of the platforms from
prevent tipping during movement. the brackets and the movement of the
(6) Employees shall not be allowed to platforms or the brackets on a com-
ride on scaffolds unless the following pleted scaffold.
conditions exist: (5) When a wire rope is placed around
(i) The surface on which the scaffold the structure in order to provide a safe
is being moved is within 3 degrees of anchorage for personal fall arrest sys-
level, and free of pits, holes, and ob- tems used by employees erecting or
structions; dismantling scaffolds, the wire rope
(ii) The height to base width ratio of shall meet the requirements of subpart
the scaffold during movement is two to M of this part, but shall be at least 5⁄16
one or less, unless the scaffold is de- inch (0.8 cm) in diameter.
signed and constructed to meet or ex- (6) Each wire rope used for securing
ceed nationally recognized stability brackets in place or as an anchorage
test requirements such as those listed for personal fall arrest systems shall be
in paragraph (x) of appendix A to this protected from damage due to contact
subpart (ANSI/SIA A92.5 and A92.6); with edges, corners, protrusions, or
296
other discontinuities of the supporting less they shall have been modified so as
structure or scaffold components. to conform with the applicable design
(7) Tensioning of each wire rope used and construction requirements of ANSI
for securing brackets in place or as an A92.2–1969. Aerial lifts include the fol-
anchorage for personal fall arrest sys- lowing types of vehicle-mounted aerial
tems shall be by means of a turnbuckle devices used to elevate personnel to
at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in diameter, or job-sites above ground:
by equivalent means. (i) Extensible boom platforms;
(8) Each turnbuckle shall be con- (ii) Aerial ladders;
nected to the other end of its rope by (iii) Articulating boom platforms;
use of an eyesplice thimble of a size ap- (iv) Vertical towers; and
propriate to the turnbuckle to which it (v) A combination of any such de-
is attached. vices. Aerial equipment may be made
(9) U-bolt wire rope clips shall not be of metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced
used on any wire rope used to secure plastic (FRP), or other material; may
brackets or to serve as an anchor for be powered or manually operated; and
personal fall arrest systems. are deemed to be aerial lifts whether or
(10) The employer shall ensure that not they are capable of rotating about
materials shall not be dropped to the a substantially vertical axis.
outside of the supporting structure. (2) Aerial lifts may be ‘‘field modi-
(11) Scaffold erection shall progress fied’’ for uses other than those in-
in only one direction around any struc- tended by the manufacturer provided
ture. the modification has been certified in
(y) Stilts. Stilts, when used, shall be writing by the manufacturer or by any
used in accordance with the following other equivalent entity, such as a na-
requirements: tionally recognized testing laboratory,
(1) An employee may wear stilts on a to be in conformity with all applicable
scaffold only if it is a large area scaf- provisions of ANSI A92.2–1969 and this
fold. section and to be at least as safe as the
(2) When an employee is using stilts equipment was before modification.
on a large area scaffold where a guard- (b) Specific requirements—(1) Ladder
rail system is used to provide fall pro- trucks and tower trucks. Aerial ladders
tection, the guardrail system shall be shall be secured in the lower traveling
increased in height by an amount equal position by the locking device on top of
to the height of the stilts being used by the truck cab, and the manually oper-
the employee. ated device at the base of the ladder be-
(3) Surfaces on which stilts are used fore the truck is moved for highway
shall be flat and free of pits, holes and travel.
obstructions, such as debris, as well as (2) Extensible and articulating boom
other tripping and falling hazards. platforms. (i) Lift controls shall be test-
(4) Stilts shall be properly main- ed each day prior to use to determine
tained. Any alteration of the original that such controls are in safe working
equipment shall be approved by the condition.
manufacturer. (ii) Only authorized persons shall op-
erate an aerial lift.
§ 1926.453 Aerial lifts. (iii) Belting off to an adjacent pole,
(a) General requirements. (1) Unless structure, or equipment while working
otherwise provided in this section, aer- from an aerial lift shall not be per-
ial lifts acquired for use on or after mitted.
January 22, 1973 shall be designed and (iv) Employees shall always stand
constructed in conformance with the firmly on the floor of the basket, and
applicable requirements of the Amer- shall not sit or climb on the edge of the
ican National Standards for ‘‘Vehicle basket or use planks, ladders, or other
Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work devices for a work position.
Platforms,’’ ANSI A92.2–1969, including (v) A body belt shall be worn and a
appendix. Aerial lifts acquired before lanyard attached to the boom or bas-
January 22, 1973 which do not meet the ket when working from an aerial lift.
requirements of ANSI A92.2–1969, may NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2)(v): As of Janu-
not be used after January 1, 1976, un- ary 1, 1998, subpart M of this part
297
(§ 1926.502(d)) provides that body belts are not 1969, section 4.9 Bursting Safety Factor
acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest shall apply to all critical hydraulic and
system. The use of a body belt in a tethering pneumatic components. Critical com-
system or in a restraint system is acceptable
and is regulated under § 1926.502(e). ponents are those in which a failure
would result in a free fall or free rota-
(vi) Boom and basket load limits tion of the boom. All noncritical com-
specified by the manufacturer shall not ponents shall have a bursting safety
be exceeded. factor of at least 2 to 1.
(vii) The brakes shall be set and when (5) Welding standards. All welding
outriggers are used, they shall be posi- shall conform to the following stand-
tioned on pads or a solid surface. Wheel ards as applicable:
chocks shall be installed before using
(i) Standard Qualification Procedure,
an aerial lift on an incline, provided
AWS B3.0–41.
they can be safely installed.
(viii) An aerial lift truck shall not be (ii) Recommended Practices for
moved when the boom is elevated in a Automotive Welding Design, AWS
working position with men in the bas- D8.4–61.
ket, except for equipment which is spe- (iii) Standard Qualification of Weld-
cifically designed for this type of oper- ing Procedures and Welders for Piping
ation in accordance with the provisions and Tubing, AWS D10.9–69.
of paragraphs (a) (1) and (2) of this sec- (iv) Specifications for Welding High-
tion. way and Railway Bridges, AWS D2.0–69.
(ix) Articulating boom and extensible NOTE TO § 1926.453: Non-mandatory appen-
boom platforms, primarily designed as dix C to this subpart lists examples of na-
personnel carriers, shall have both tional consensus standards that are consid-
platform (upper) and lower controls. ered to provide employee protection equiva-
Upper controls shall be in or beside the lent to that provided through the application
platform within easy reach of the oper- of ANSI A92.2–1969, where appropriate. This
ator. Lower controls shall provide for incorporation by reference was approved by
overriding the upper controls. Controls the Director of the Federal Register in ac-
shall be plainly marked as to their cordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part
51. Copies may be obtained from the Amer-
function. Lower level controls shall not
ican National Standards Institute. Copies
be operated unless permission has been may be inspected at the Docket Office, Occu-
obtained from the employee in the lift, pational Safety and Health Administration,
except in case of emergency. U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution
(x) Climbers shall not be worn while Avenue, NW., room N2634, Washington, DC or
performing work from an aerial lift. at the National Archives and Records Ad-
(xi) The insulated portion of an aerial ministration (NARA). For information on
lift shall not be altered in any manner the availability of this material at NARA,
that might reduce its insulating value. call 202–741–6030, or go to: http://
www.archives.gov/federallregister/
(xii) Before moving an aerial lift for codeloflfederallregulations/
travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected ibrllocations.html.
to see that it is properly cradled and
outriggers are in stowed position ex- [61 FR 46116, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov.
cept as provided in paragraph 25, 1996, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9,
2004]
(b)(2)(viii) of this section.
(3) Electrical tests. All electrical tests § 1926.454 Training requirements.
shall conform to the requirements of
ANSI A92.2–1969 section 5. However This section supplements and clari-
equivalent d.c.; voltage tests may be fies the requirements of § 1926.21(b)(2)
used in lieu of the a.c. voltage specified as these relate to the hazards of work
in A92.2–1969; d.c. voltage tests which on scaffolds.
are approved by the equipment manu- (a) The employer shall have each em-
facturer or equivalent entity shall be ployee who performs work while on a
considered an equivalent test for the scaffold trained by a person qualified
purpose of this paragraph (b)(3). in the subject matter to recognize the
(4) Bursting safety factor. The provi- hazards associated with the type of
sions of the American National Stand- scaffold being used and to understand
ards Institute standard ANSI A92.2– the procedures to control or minimize
298
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A
those hazards. The training shall indicate that the employee has not re-
clude the following areas, as applica- tained the requisite proficiency.
ble:
(1) The nature of any electrical haz- NON-MANDATORY APPENDICES
ards, fall hazards and falling object
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX A TO SUB-
hazards in the work area;
PART L OF PART 1926—SCAFFOLD
(2) The correct procedures for dealing SPECIFICATIONS
with electrical hazards and for erect-
ing, maintaining, and disassembling This appendix provides non-mandatory
the fall protection systems and falling guidelines to assist employers in complying
object protection systems being used; with the requirements of subpart L of this
part. An employer may use these guidelines
(3) The proper use of the scaffold, and and tables as a starting point for designing
the proper handling of materials on the scaffold systems. However, the guidelines do
scaffold; not provide all the information necessary to
(4) The maximum intended load and build a complete system, and the employer is
the load-carrying capacities of the still responsible for designing and assem-
scaffolds used; and bling these components in such a way that
the completed system will meet the require-
(5) Any other pertinent requirements
ments of § 1926.451(a). Scaffold components
of this subpart. which are not selected and loaded in accord-
(b) The employer shall have each em- ance with this Appendix, and components for
ployee who is involved in erecting, dis- which no specific guidelines or tables are
assembling, moving, operating, repair- given in this appendix (e.g., joints, ties, com-
ing, maintaining, or inspecting a scaf- ponents for wood pole scaffolds more than 60
fold trained by a competent person to feet in height, components for heavy-duty
recognize any hazards associated with horse scaffolds, components made with other
materials, and components with other di-
the work in question. The training mensions, etc.) must be designed and con-
shall include the following topics, as structed in accordance with the capacity re-
applicable: quirements of § 1926.451(a), and loaded in ac-
(1) The nature of scaffold hazards; cordance with § 1926.451(d)(1).
(2) The correct procedures for erect-
Index to appendix A for Subpart L
ing, disassembling, moving, operating,
repairing, inspecting, and maintaining 1. General guidelines and tables.
the type of scaffold in question; 2. Specific guidelines and tables.
(a) Pole scaffolds:
(3) The design criteria, maximum in- Single-pole wood pole scaffolds.
tended load-carrying capacity and in- Independent wood pole scaffolds.
tended use of the scaffold; (b) Tube and coupler scaffolds.
(4) Any other pertinent requirements (c) Fabricated frame scaffolds.
of this subpart. (d) Plasterers’, decorators’ and large area
(c) When the employer has reason to scaffolds.
(e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds.
believe that an employee lacks the (f) Horse scaffolds.
skill or understanding needed for safe (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ bracket
work involving the erection, use or dis- scaffolds.
mantling of scaffolds, the employer (h) Roof bracket scaffolds.
shall retrain each such employee so (i) Outrigger scaffolds (one level).
that the requisite proficiency is re- (j) Pump jack scaffolds.
gained. Retraining is required in at (k) Ladder jack scaffolds.
least the following situations: (l) Window jack scaffolds.
(m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders).
(1) Where changes at the worksite (n) Step, platform and trestle ladder scaf-
present a hazard about which an em- folds.
ployee has not been previously trained; (o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaf-
or folds.
(2) Where changes in the types of (p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaf-
scaffolds, fall protection, falling object folds.
protection, or other equipment present (q)(1) Stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable
suspension scaffolds.
a hazard about which an employee has
(2) Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspen-

not been previously trained; or sion scaffolds.
(3) Where inadequacies in an affected (r) Catenary scaffolds.
employee’s work involving scaffolds in- (s) Float (ship) scaffolds.
299
Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
(t) Interior hung scaffolds. the American Softwood Lumber Standard of
(u) Needle beam scaffolds. the U.S. Department of Commerce.
(v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds. (i) Allowable spans shall be determined in
(w) Mobile scaffolds. compliance with the National Design Speci-
(x) Repair bracket scaffolds. fication for Wood Construction published by
(y) Stilts. the National Forest Products Association;
(z) Tank builders’ scaffolds. paragraph 5 of ANSI A10.8–1988 Scaffolding-
Safety Requirements published by the Amer-
1. GENERAL GUIDELINES AND TABLES ican National Standards Institute; or for 2 ×
10 inch (nominal) or 2 × 9 inch (rough) solid
(a) The following tables, and the tables in sawn wood planks, as shown in the following
part 2—Specific guidelines and tables, as- table:
sume that all load-carrying timber members
(except planks) of the scaffold are a min- Maximum per- Maximum per-
imum of 1,500 lb-f/in2 (stress grade) construc- missible span missible span
Maximum intended nominal using full thick-
tion grade lumber. All dimensions are nomi- load ness un- using nominal
nal sizes as provided in the American thickness
(lb/ft2) dressed lumber
Softwood Lumber Standards, dated January lumber (ft)
(ft)
1970, except that, where rough sizes are
noted, only rough or undressed lumber of the 25 ....................................... 10 8
size specified will satisfy minimum require- 50 ....................................... 8 6
ments. 75 ....................................... 6
(b) Solid sawn wood used as scaffold planks
shall be selected for such use following the (ii) The maximum permissible span for 11⁄4
grading rules established by a recognized × 9-inch or wider wood plank of full thick-
lumber grading association or by an inde- ness with a maximum intended load of 50 lb/
pendent lumber grading inspection agency. ft.2 shall be 4 feet.
Such planks shall be identified by the grade (c) Fabricated planks and platforms may
stamp of such association or agency. The as- be used in lieu of solid sawn wood planks.
sociation or agency and the grading rules Maximum spans for such units shall be as
under which the wood is graded shall be cer- recommended by the manufacturer based on
tified by the Board of Review, American the maximum intended load being calculated
Lumber Standard Committee, as set forth in as follows:
Rated load Intended load

capacity
Light-duty ................... • 25 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
Medium-duty .............. • 50 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
Heavy-duty ................. • 75 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
One-person ................ • 250 pounds placed at the center of the span (total 250 pounds).
Two-person ................ • 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of the center of the span (total 500 pounds).
Three-person ............. • 250 pounds placed at the center of the span and 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of
the center of the span (total 750 pounds).
NOTE: Platform units used to make scaf- (iii) Toeboards shall be equivalent in
fold platforms intended for light-duty use strength to 1 inch by 4 inch lumber; or
shall be capable of supporting at least 25 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch structural angle iron; or
pounds per square foot applied uniformly 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or
over the entire unit-span area, or a 250-pound 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub-
point load placed on the unit at the center of ing.
the span, whichever load produces the great- (iv) Posts shall be equivalent in strength
er shear force. to 2 inch by 4 inch lumber; or
(d) Guardrails shall be as follows: 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 structural angle
(i) Toprails shall be equivalent in strength iron; or
to 2 inch by 4 inch lumber; or 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or
11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural angle iron; or 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub-
1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or 1.990 ing.
inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tubing. (v) Distance between posts shall not exceed
(ii) Midrails shall be equivalent in strength 8 feet.
to 1 inch by 6 inch lumber; or (e) Overhead protection shall consist of 2
11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural inch nominal planking laid tight, or 3⁄4-inch
angle iron; or plywood.
1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or (f) Screen installed between toeboards and
1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub- midrails or toprails shall consist of No. 18
ing. gauge U.S. Standard wire one inch mesh.
300
2. SPECIFIC GUIDELINES AND TABLES.
(a) Pole Scaffolds.
SINGLE POLE WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS

Light duty up to Light duty up to Medium duty up to Heavy duty up to
20 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high
Maximum intended load (lbs/ft 2) ................... 25 ......................... 25 ......................... 50 ......................... 75

Poles or uprights ........................................... 2 × 4 in ................ 4 × 4 in ................ 4 × 4 in ................ 4 × 6 in.
Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal) ............ 6 feet ................... 10 feet ................. 8 feet ................... 6 feet
Maximum pole spacing (transverse) ............. 5 feet ................... 5 feet ................... 5 feet ................... 5 feet
Runners ......................................................... 1 × 4 in ................ 11⁄4 × 9 in ............ 2 × 10 in .............. 2 × 10 in.
Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers:
3 feet ............................................... 2 × 4 in ................ 2 × 4 in ................ 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 5
in. in.
5 feet ............................................... 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 5
in. in. (rough). in. in.
6 feet ............................................... .............................. .............................. 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 5
in. in.
8 feet ............................................... .............................. .............................. 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4
in.
Planking ......................................................... 1 ⁄ × 9 in ............
14 2 × 10 in .............. 2 × 10 in .............. 2 × 10 in.
Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal 7 feet ................... 9 feet ................... 7 feet ................... 6 ft. 6 in.
members.
Bracing horizontal .......................................... 1 × 4 in ................ 1 × 4 in ................ 1 × 6 in. or 11⁄4 × 2 × 4 in.
4 in.
Bracing diagonal ............................................ 1 × 4 in ................ 1 × 4 in ................ 1 × 4 in ................ 2 × 4 in.
Tie-ins ............................................................ 1 × 4 in ................ 1 × 4 in ................ 1 × 4 in ................ 1 × 4 in.
NOTE: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with 3⁄16 × 2 inch steel strip, or the
equivalent, secured to the lower edges for the entire length of the bearer.
INDEPENDENT WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS

Light duty up to Light duty up to Medium duty up to Heavy duty up to
20 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high
Maximum intended load ................................ 25 lbs/ft2 .............. 25 lbs/ft2 .............. 50 lbs/ft2 .............. 75 lbs/ft2.
Poles or uprights ........................................... 2 × 4 in ................ 4 × 4 in ................ 4 × 4 in ................ 4 × 4 in.
Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal) ............ 6 feet ................... 10 feet ................. 8 feet ................... 6 feet.
Maximum (transverse) ................................... 6 feet ................... 10 feet ................. 8 feet ................... 8 feet.
Runners ......................................................... 11⁄4 × 4 in ............ 11⁄4 × 9 in ............ 2 × 10 in .............. 2 × 10 in.
Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers:
3 feet ............................................... 2 × 4 in ................ 2 × 4 in ................ 2 × 10 in .............. 2 × 10 in. (rough).
6 feet ............................................... 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 10 in. (rough) 2 × 10 in .............. 2 × 10 in. (rough).
in. or 3 × 8 in.
8 feet ............................................... 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 10 in. (rough) 2 × 10 in ..............
in. or 3 × 8 in.
10 feet ............................................. 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 10 in. (rough) ..............................
in. or 3 × 3 in.
Planking ......................................................... 11⁄4 × 9 in ............ 2 × 10 in .............. 2 × 10 in .............. 2 × 10 in.
Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal 7 feet ................... 7 feet ................... 6 feet ................... 6 feet.
members.
Bracing horizontal .......................................... 1 × 4 in ................ 1 × 4 in ................ 1 × 6 in. or 11⁄4 × 2 × 4 in.
4 in.
Bracing diagonal ............................................ 1 × 4 in ................ 1 × 4 in ................ 1 × 4 in ................ 2 × 4 in.
Tie-ins ............................................................ 1 × 4 in ................ 1 × 4 in ................ 1 × 4 in ................ 1 × 4 in.
NOTE: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with 3⁄16 × 2 inch steel strip, or the
equivalent, secured to the lower edges for the entire length of the bearer.
(b) Tube and coupler scaffolds.
MINIMUM SIZE OF MEMBERS

Light duty Medium duty Heavy duty
Maximum intended load .......... 25 lbs/ft2 ................................. 50 lbs/ft2 ................................. 75 lbs/ft2.

Posts, runners and braces ...... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches)
OD steel tube or pipe. OD steel tube or pipe. OD steel tube or pipe.

Bearers .................................... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) .... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) .... Nominal 21⁄2 in. (2.375 in.).
301
MINIMUM SIZE OF MEMBERS—Continued

Light duty Medium duty Heavy duty
OD steel tube or pipe and a OD steel tube or pipe and a OD steel tube or pipe and a
maximum post spacing of 4 maximum post spacing of 4 maximum post spacing of 6
ft. × 10 ft.. ft. × 7 ft. or. ft. × 6 ft.
Nominal 21⁄2 in. (2.375 in.).
OD steel tube or pipe and a
maximum post spacing of 6
ft. × 8 ft.*.
Maximum runner spacing 6 ft. 6 in .................................. 6 ft. 6 in .................................. 6 ft. 6 in.
vertically.
* Bearers shall be installed in the direction of the shorter dimension.
NOTE: Longitudinal diagonal bracing shall be installed at an angle of 45° (±5°).
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF PLANKED LEVELS

Maximum number of addi-
tional planked levels Maximum
height of
Me- scaffold
Light Heavy
dium (in feet)
duty duty
duty
Number of Working Levels:

1 ...................................................................................................................... 16 11 6 125
2 ...................................................................................................................... 11 1 0 125
3 ...................................................................................................................... 6 0 0 125
4 ...................................................................................................................... 1 0 0 125
(c) Fabricated frame scaffolds. Because of (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ bracket
their prefabricated nature, no additional scaffolds. (1) Brackets shall consist of a tri-
guidelines or tables for these scaffolds are angular-shaped frame made of wood with a
being adopted in this Appendix. cross-section not less than 2 inches by 3
(d) Plasterers’, decorators’, and large area inches, or of 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch
scaffolds. The guidelines for pole scaffolds or structural angle iron.
tube and coupler scaffolds (Appendix A (a) (2) Bolts used to attach brackets to struc-
and (b)) may be applied. tures shall not be less than 5⁄8 inches in di-
(e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds. ameter.
Maximum intended load: 50 lb/ft.2* (3) Maximum bracket spacing shall be 8
Maximum width: 5 ft. feet on centers.
Maximum height: 5 ft. (4) No more than two employees shall oc-
Gussets: 1 × 6 in. cupy any given 8 feet of a bracket or form
Braces: 1 × 8 in. scaffold at any one time. Tools and materials
Legs: 2 × 6 in. shall not exceed 75 pounds in addition to the
occupancy.
Bearers (horizontal members): 2 × 6 in.
(5) Wooden figure-four scaffolds:
(f) Horse scaffolds.
Maximum intended load (light duty): 25 lb/ Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2
ft.2 ** Uprights: 2 × 4 in. or 2 × 6 in.
Maximum intended load (medium duty): 50 Bearers (two): 1 × 6 in.
lb/ft.2 ** Braces: 1 × 6 in.
Maximum length of bearers (unsupported): 3
Horizontal members or bearers:
ft. 6 in.
Light duty: 2 × 4 in.
(i) Outrigger bearers shall consist of two
Medium duty: 3 × 4 in.
pieces of 1 × 6 inch lumber nailed on opposite
Legs: 2 × 4 in.
sides of the vertical support.
Longitudinal brace between legs: 1 × 6 in.
(ii) Bearers for wood figure-four brackets
Gusset brace at top of legs: 1 × 8 in.
shall project not more than 3 feet 6 inches
Half diagonal braces: 2 × 4 in. from the outside of the form support, and
shall be braced and secured to prevent tip-
* The squares shall be set not more than 8 ping or turning. The knee or angle brace
feet apart for light duty scaffolds and not shall intersect the bearer at least 3 feet from
more than 5 feet apart for medium duty scaf- the form at an angle of approximately 45 de-
grees, and the lower end shall be nailed to a
folds.
** Horses shall be spaced not more than 8 vertical support.
feet apart for light duty loads, and not more (6) Metal bracket scaffolds:
than 5 feet apart for medium duty loads. Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2
302
Uprights: 2 × 4 inch seats for boatswains’ chairs shall be not less
Bearers: As designed. than 1 inch thick if made of non-laminated
Braces: As designed. wood, or 5⁄8 inches thick if made of marine
(7) Wood bracket scaffolds: quality plywood.
Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 (p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds.
Uprights: 2 × 4 in or 2 × 6 in (1) In addition to direct connections to build-
Bearers: 2 × 6 in ings (except window cleaners’ anchors) ac-
Maximum scaffold width: 3 ft 6 in ceptable ways to prevent scaffold sway in-
Braces: 1 × 6 in clude angulated roping and static lines. An-
(h) Roof bracket scaffolds. No specific guide- gulated roping is a system of platform sus-
lines or tables are given. pension in which the upper wire rope sheaves
(i) Outrigger scaffolds (single level). No spe- or suspension points are closer to the plane
cific guidelines or tables are given. of the building face than the corresponding
(j) Pump jack scaffolds. Wood poles shall not attachment points on the platform, thus
exceed 30 feet in height. Maximum intended causing the platform to press against the
load—500 lbs between poles; applied at the face of the building. Static lines are separate
center of the span. Not more than two em- ropes secured at their top and bottom ends
ployees shall be on a pump jack scaffold at closer to the plane of the building face than
one time between any two supports. When 2 the outermost edge of the platform. By draw-
× 4’s are spliced together to make a 4 × 4 inch ing the static line taut, the platform is
wood pole, they shall be spliced with ‘‘10 drawn against the face of the building.
penny’’ common nails no more than 12 inches (2) On suspension scaffolds designed for a
center to center, staggered uniformly from working load of 500 pounds, no more than
the opposite outside edges. two employees shall be permitted on the
(k) Ladder jack scaffolds. Maximum in-
scaffold at one time. On suspension scaffolds
tended load—25 lb/ft2. However, not more
with a working load of 750 pounds, no more
than two employees shall occupy any plat-
than three employees shall be permitted on
form at any one time. Maximum span be-
tween supports shall be 8 feet. the scaffold at one time.
(l) Window jack scaffolds. Not more than (3) Ladder-type platforms. The side string-
one employee shall occupy a window jack er shall be of clear straight-grained spruce.
scaffold at any one time. The rungs shall be of straight-grained oak,
(m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). ash, or hickory, at least 11⁄8 inches in diame-
Crawling boards shall be not less than 10 ter, with 7⁄8 inch tenons mortised into the
inches wide and 1 inch thick, with cleats side stringers at least 7⁄8 inch. The stringers
having a minimum 1 × 11⁄2 inch cross-sec- shall be tied together with tie rods not less
tional area. The cleats shall be equal in than 1⁄4 inch in diameter, passing through
length to the width of the board and spaced the stringers and riveted up tight against
at equal intervals not to exceed 24 inches. washers on both ends. The flooring strips
(n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaf- shall be spaced not more than 5⁄8 inch apart,
folds. No additional guidelines or tables are except at the side rails where the space may
given. be 1 inch. Ladder-type platforms shall be
(o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaf- constructed in accordance with the following
folds. Maximum intended load—250 lbs. Wood table:
SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS
Length of Platform ................................ 12 feet .............. 14 & 16 feet ...... 18 & 20 feet.
Side stringers, minimum cross section
(finished sizes):
At ends ................................... 13⁄4 × 23⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 23⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 3 in.
At middle ................................ 13⁄4 × 33⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 33⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 4 in.
Reinforcing strip (minimum) ................. A1⁄8 × 7⁄8 inch steel reinforcing strip shall be attached
to the side or underside, full length.
Rungs ................................................... Rungs shall be 11⁄8 inch minimum diameter with at
least 7⁄8 inch in diameter tenons, and the maximum
spacing shall be 12 inches to center.
Tie rods:
Number (minimum) ................ 3 ....................... 4 ....................... 4
Diameter (minimum) ............... ⁄ inch ..............
14 ⁄ inch ..............
14 ⁄ inch
14
Flooring, minimum finished size ........... 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ........ 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ........ 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in.
303
SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS
Length of Platform ............................................................... 22 & 24 ft .......... 28 & 30 ft.

Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes):
At ends .................................................................. 13⁄4 × 3 in ......... 13⁄4 × 31⁄2 in.
At middle ............................................................... 13⁄4 × 41⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 5 in.
Reinforcing strip (minimum) ................................................ A1⁄8 × 7⁄8-inch steel reinforcing strip
shall be attached to the side or
underside, full length.
Rungs .................................................................................. Rungs shall be 11⁄8 inch minimum
diameter with at least 7⁄8 inch in
diameter tenons, and the max-
imum spacing shall be 12 inches
to center. Tie rods.
Number (minimum) ............................................... 5 ....................... 6.
Diameter (minimum) .............................................. 1⁄4 in .................. 1⁄4 in.
Flooring, minimum finished size .......................................... 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ........ 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in.
(4) Plank-Type Platforms. Plank-type plat- (5) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to
forms shall be composed of not less than at least 1⁄2 inch (1.3 cm) diameter improved
nominal 2 × 8 inch unspliced planks, con- plow steel wire rope.
nected together on the underside with cleats (s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (1) Maximum in-
at intervals not exceeding 4 feet, starting 6 tended load—750 lbs.
inches from each end. A bar or other effec- (2) Platforms shall be made of 3⁄4 inch ply-
tive means shall be securely fastened to the wood, equivalent in rating to American Ply-
platform at each end to prevent the platform wood Association Grade B-B, Group I, Exte-
from slipping off the hanger. The span be- rior.
tween hangers for plank-type platforms shall (3) Bearers shall be made from 2 × 4 inch,
not exceed 10 feet. or 1 × 10 inch rough lumber. They shall be
(5) Beam-Type Platforms. Beam platforms free of knots and other flaws.
shall have side stringers of lumber not less (4) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to
than 2 × 6 inches set on edge. The span be- at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade
tween hangers shall not exceed 12 feet when manila rope.
beam platforms are used. The flooring shall (t) Interior hung scaffolds.
be supported on 2 × 6 inch cross beams, laid Bearers (use on edge): 2 × 10 in.
flat and set into the upper edge of the string-
Maximum intended load: Maximum span
ers with a snug fit, at intervals of not more
25 lb/ft.2: 10 ft.
than 4 feet, securely nailed to the cross
50 lb/ft.2: 10 ft.
beams. Floor-boards shall not be spaced
more than 1⁄2 inch apart. 75 lb/ft.2: 7 ft.
(q)(1) Multi-point adjustable suspension scaf- (u) Needle beam scaffolds.
folds and stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2
suspension scaffolds. No specific guidelines or Beams: 4 × 6 in.
tables are given for these scaffolds. Maximum platform span: 8 ft.
(2) Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspension Maximum beam span: 10 ft.
scaffolds. Maximum intended load—50 lb/ft2. (1) Ropes shall be attached to the needle
Each outrigger beam shall be at least a beams by a scaffold hitch or an eye splice.
standard 7 inch, 15.3 pound steel I-beam, at The loose end of the rope shall be tied by a
least 15 feet long. Such beams shall not bowline knot or by a round turn and a half
project more than 6 feet 6 inches beyond the hitch.
bearing point. Where the overhang exceeds 6 (2) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to
feet 6 inches, outrigger beams shall be com- at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade
posed of stronger beams or multiple beams. manila rope.
(r) Catenary scaffolds. (1) Maximum in- (v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds. No addi-
tended load—500 lbs. tional guidelines or tables are being given
(2) Not more than two employees shall be for these scaffolds.
permitted on the scaffold at one time. (w) Mobile Scaffolds. Stability test as de-
(3) Maximum capacity of come-along shall
scribed in the ANSI A92 series documents, as

be 2,000 lbs. appropriate for the type of scaffold, can be
(4) Vertical pickups shall be spaced not used to establish stability for the purpose of
more than 50 feet apart. § 1926.452(w)(6).
304
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. D
(x) Repair bracket scaffolds. No additional ANSI/SIA A92.6–1990 Self-Propelled Elevating
guidelines or tables are being given for these Work Platforms
scaffolds. ANSI/SIA A92.7–1990 Airline Ground Support
(y) Stilts. No specific guidelines or tables Vehicle-Mounted Vertical Lift Devices
are given. ANSI/SIA A92.8–1993 Vehicle-Mounted Bridge
(z) Tank builder’s scaffold. (1) The maximum Inspection and Maintenance Devices
distance between brackets to which scaf- ANSI/SIA A92.9–1993 Mast-Climbing Work
folding and guardrail supports are attached Platforms
shall be no more than 10 feet 6 inches.
(2) Not more than three employees shall (NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX D TO SUB-
occupy a 10 feet 6 inch span of scaffold plank- PART L OF PART 1926—LIST OF
ing at any time.
(3) A taut wire or synthetic rope supported
TRAINING TOPICS FOR SCAFFOLD
on the scaffold brackets shall be installed at ERECTORS AND DISMANTLERS
the scaffold plank level between the inner-
This appendix D is provided to serve as a
most edge of the scaffold platform and the
guide to assist employers when evaluating
curved plate structure of the tank shell to
the training needs of employees erecting or
serve as a safety line in lieu of an inner
dismantling supported scaffolds.
guardrail assembly where the space between
The Agency believes that employees erect-
the scaffold platform and the tank exceeds 12
inches (30.48 cm). In the event the open space ing or dismantling scaffolds should be
on either side of the rope exceeds 12 inches trained in the following topics:
(30.48 cm), a second wire or synthetic rope • General Overview of Scaffolding
appropriately placed, or guardrails in ac- • regulations and standards
cordance with § 1926.451(g)(4), shall be in- • erection/dismantling planning
stalled in order to reduce that open space to • PPE and proper procedures
less than 12 inches (30.48 cm). • fall protection
(4) Scaffold planks of rough full-dimen- • materials handling
sioned 2-inch (5.1 cm) × 12-inch (30.5 cm) • access
Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine of Se- • working platforms
lect Structural Grade shall be used. Douglas • foundations
Fir planks shall have a fiber stress of at • guys, ties and braces
least 1900 lb/in2 (130,929 n/cm2) and a modulus • Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds
of elasticity of at least 1,900,000 lb/in2 • specific regulations and standards
(130,929,000 n/cm2), while Yellow Pine planks • components
shall have a fiber stress of at least 2500 lb/in2 • parts inspection
(172,275 n/cm2) and a modulus of elasticity of • erection/dismantling planning
at least 2,000,000 lb/in2 (137,820,000 n/cm2). • guys, ties and braces
(5) Guardrails shall be constructed of a • fall protection
taut wire or synthetic rope, and shall be sup- • general safety
ported by angle irons attached to brackets • access and platforms
welded to the steel plates. These guardrails • erection/dismantling procedures
shall comply with § 1926.451(g)(4). Guardrail • rolling scaffold assembly
supports shall be located at no greater than • putlogs
10 feet 6 inch intervals.
• Tube and Clamp Scaffolds
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, as amended at 77 FR • specific regulations and standards
46950, Aug. 7, 2012] • components
• parts inspection
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX B TO SUB- • erection/dismantling planning
PART L OF PART 1926—CRITERIA FOR • guys, ties and braces
DETERMINING THE FEASIBILITY OF • fall protection
PROVIDING SAFE ACCESS AND FALL • general safety
PROTECTION FOR SCAFFOLD EREC- • access and platforms
TORS AND DISMANTLERS [RE- • erection/dismantling procedures
SERVED] • buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges
• System Scaffolds
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX C TO SUB- • specific regulations and standards
PART L OF PART 1926—LIST OF NA- • components
• parts inspection
TIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS
• erection/dismantling planning
ANSI/SIA A92.2–1990 Vehicle-Mounted Ele- • guys, ties and braces
vating and Rotating Aerial Devices • fall protection
• general safety
ANSI/SIA A92.3–1990 Manually Propelled Ele-

vating Aerial Platforms • access and platforms
ANSI/SIA A92.5–1990 Boom Supported Ele- • erection/dismantling procedures
vating Work Platforms • buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges
305
Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
Scaffold erectors and dismantlers should dition, specific training for the type of sup-
all receive the general overview, and, in ad- ported scaffold being erected or dismantled.
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926—DRAWINGS AND

ILLUSTRATIONS
This appendix provides drawings of particular types of scaffolds and scaffold components,
and graphic illustrations of bracing patterns and tie spacing patterns.
This appendix is intended to provide visual guidance to assist the user in complying with
the requirements of subpart L, part 1926.
306
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E
307
ER30au96.000</GPH>
HOISTS MUST BE ELECTRONICALLY ISOLATED FROM SCAFFOLD

308
ER30au96.001
309
ER30au96.002</GPH>
310
ER30au96.003</GPH>
311
ER30au96.004</GPH>
312
ER30au96.005</GPH>
313
ER30au96.006</GPH>
314
ER30au96.007</GPH>
[61 FR 46122, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov. 25, 1996]
Subpart M—Fall Protection § 1926.500 Scope, application, and defi-

nitions applicable to this subpart.
AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; 29 U.S.C. (a) Scope and application. (1) This sub-
653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. part sets forth requirements and cri-
1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 teria for fall protection in construction
FR 50017), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1–2012 (77 workplaces covered under 29 CFR part
FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR Part 1911. 1926. Exception: The provisions of this
SOURCE: 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, unless subpart do not apply when employees
otherwise noted. are making an inspection, investiga-
tion, or assessment of workplace condi-
tions prior to the actual start of con-

struction work or after all construc-
tion work has been completed.
315
ER30au96.008</GPH>
(2) Section 1926.501 sets forth those belts, lanyards and lifelines used for
workplaces, conditions, operations, and fall protection during tank and com-
circumstances for which fall protection munication and broadcast tower erec-
shall be provided except as follows: tion. Paragraphs (b),(c) and (f) of
(i) Requirements relating to fall pro- § 1926.107 provide definitions for the
tection for employees working on scaf- pertinent terms.)
folds are provided in subpart L of this (v) Criteria for steps, handholds, lad-
part. ders, and grabrails/guardrails/railings
(ii) Requirements relating to fall pro- required by subpart CC are provided in
tection for employees working on subpart CC. Sections 1926.502(a), (c)
cranes and derricks are provided in through (e), and (i) apply to activities
subpart CC of this part. covered under subpart CC unless other-
(iii) Fall protection requirements for wise stated in subpart CC. No other
employees performing steel erection paragraphs of § 1926.502 apply to subpart
work (except for towers and tanks) are CC.
provided in subpart R of this part. (4) Section 1926.503 sets forth require-
(iv) Requirements relating to fall ments for training in the installation
protection for employees working on and use of fall protection systems, ex-
certain types of equipment used in tun- cept in relation to steel erection ac-
neling operations are provided in sub- tivities and the use of equipment cov-
part S of this part. ered by subpart CC.
(v) Requirements relating to fall pro- (b) Definitions.
tection for employees engaged in the Anchorage means a secure point of at-
erection of tanks and communication tachment for lifelines, lanyards or de-
and broadcast towers are provided in celeration devices.
§ 1926.105. Body belt (safety belt) means a strap
(vi) Subpart V of this part provides with means both for securing it about
requirements relating to fall protec- the waist and for attaching it to a lan-
tion for employees working from aerial yard, lifeline, or deceleration device.
lifts or on poles, towers, or similar Body harness means straps which
structures while engaged in the con- may be secured about the employee in
struction of electric transmission or a manner that will distribute the fall
distribution lines or equipment. arrest forces over at least the thighs,
(vii) Requirements relating to fall pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with
protection for employees working on means for attaching it to other compo-
stairways and ladders are provided in nents of a personal fall arrest system.
subpart X of this part. Buckle means any device for holding
(3) Section 1926.502 sets forth the re- the body belt or body harness closed
quirements for the installation, con- around the employee’s body.
struction, and proper use of fall protec- Connector means a device which is
tion required by part 1926, except as used to couple (connect) parts of the
follows: personal fall arrest system and posi-
(i) Performance requirements for tioning device systems together. It
guardrail systems used on scaffolds and may be an independent component of
performance requirements for falling the system, such as a carabiner, or it
object protection used on scaffolds are may be an integral component of part
provided in subpart L of this part. of the system (such as a buckle or dee-
(ii) Performance requirements for ring sewn into a body belt or body har-
stairways, stairrail systems, and hand- ness, or a snap-hook spliced or sewn to
rails are provided in subpart X of this a lanyard or self-retracting lanyard).
part. Controlled access zone (CAZ) means an
(iii) Additional performance require- area in which certain work (e.g.,
ments for fall arrest and work-posi- overhand bricklaying) may take place
tioning equipment are provided in sub- without the use of guardrail systems,
part V of this part. personal fall arrest systems, or safety
(iv) Section 1926.502 does not apply to net systems and access to the zone is
the erection of tanks and communica- controlled.

tion and broadcast towers. (Note: Sec- Dangerous equipment means equip-
tion 1926.104 sets the criteria for body ment (such as pickling or galvanizing
316
tanks, degreasing units, machinery, a floor, roof, or other walking/working

electrical equipment, and other units) surface.
which, as a result of form or function, Infeasible means that it is impossible
may be hazardous to employees who to perform the construction work using
fall onto or into such equipment. a conventional fall protection system
Deceleration device means any mecha- (i.e., guardrail system, safety net sys-
nism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch tem, or personal fall arrest system) or
lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tear- that it is technologically impossible to
ing or deforming lanyards, automatic use any one of these systems to provide
self-retracting lifelines/lanyards, etc., fall protection.
which serves to dissipate a substantial Lanyard means a flexible line of rope,
amount of energy during a fall arrest, wire rope, or strap which generally has
or otherwise limit the energy imposed a connector at each end for connecting
on an employee during fall arrest. the body belt or body harness to a de-
Deceleration distance means the addi- celeration device, lifeline, or anchor-
tional vertical distance a falling em- age.
ployee travels, excluding lifeline elon- Leading edge means the edge of a
gation and free fall distance, before floor, roof, or formwork for a floor or
stopping, from the point at which the other walking/working surface (such as
deceleration device begins to operate. the deck) which changes location as ad-
It is measured as the distance between ditional floor, roof, decking, or
the location of an employee’s body belt formwork sections are placed, formed,
or body harness attachment point at or constructed. A leading edge is con-
the moment of activation (at the onset sidered to be an ‘‘unprotected side and
of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration edge’’ during periods when it is not ac-
device during a fall, and the location of tively and continuously under con-
that attachment point after the em- struction.
ployee comes to a full stop. Lifeline means a component con-
Equivalent means alternative designs, sisting of a flexible line for connection
materials, or methods to protect to an anchorage at one end to hang
against a hazard which the employer vertically (vertical lifeline), or for con-
can demonstrate will provide an equal nection to anchorages at both ends to
or greater degree of safety for employ- stretch horizontally (horizontal life-
ees than the methods, materials or de- line), and which serves as a means for
signs specified in the standard. connecting other components of a per-
Failure means load refusal, breakage, sonal fall arrest system to the anchor-
or separation of component parts. Load age.
refusal is the point where the ultimate Low-slope roof means a roof having a
strength is exceeded. slope less than or equal to 4 in 12
Free fall means the act of falling be- (vertical to horizontal).
fore a personal fall arrest system be- Lower levels means those areas or sur-
gins to apply force to arrest the fall. faces to which an employee can fall.
Free fall distance means the vertical Such areas or surfaces include, but are
displacement of the fall arrest attach- not limited to, ground levels, floors,
ment point on the employee’s body belt platforms, ramps, runways, exca-
or body harness between onset of the vations, pits, tanks, material, water,
fall and just before the system begins equipment, structures, or portions
to apply force to arrest the fall. This thereof.
distance excludes deceleration dis- Mechanical equipment means all
tance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation, motor or human propelled wheeled
but includes any deceleration device equipment used for roofing work, ex-
slide distance or self-retracting life- cept wheelbarrows and mopcarts.
line/lanyard extension before they op- Opening means a gap or void 30
erate and fall arrest forces occur. inches (76 cm) or more high and 18
Guardrail system means a barrier inches (48 cm) or more wide, in a wall
erected to prevent employees from fall- or partition, through which employees
ing to lower levels. can fall to a lower level.

Hole means a gap or void 2 inches (5.1 Overhand bricklaying and related work
cm) or more in its least dimension, in means the process of laying bricks and
317
masonry units such that the surface of permit the hook to receive an object
the wall to be jointed is on the opposite and, when released, automatically
side of the wall from the mason, requir- closes to retain the object. Snaphooks
ing the mason to lean over the wall to are generally one of two types:
complete the work. Related work in- (1) The locking type with a self-clos-
cludes mason tending and electrical ining, self-locking keeper which remains
stallation incorporated into the brick closed and locked until unlocked and
wall during the overhand bricklaying pressed open for connection or dis-
process. connection; or
Personal fall arrest system means a
(2) The non-locking type with a self-
system used to arrest an employee in a
closing keeper which remains closed
fall from a working level. It consists of
an anchorage, connectors, a body belt until pressed open for connection or
or body harness and may include a lan- disconnection. As of January 1, 1998,
yard, deceleration device, lifeline, or the use of a non-locking snaphook as
suitable combinations of these. As of part of personal fall arrest systems and
January 1, 1998, the use of a body belt positioning device systems is prohib-
for fall arrest is prohibited. ited.
Positioning device system means a body Steep roof means a roof having a slope
belt or body harness system rigged to greater than 4 in 12 (vertical to hori-
allow an employee to be supported on zontal).
an elevated vertical surface, such as a Toeboard means a low protective bar-
wall, and work with both hands free rier that will prevent the fall of mate-
while leaning. rials and equipment to lower levels and
Rope grab means a deceleration de- provide protection from falls for per-
vice which travels on a lifeline and sonnel.
automatically, by friction, engages the Unprotected sides and edges means any
lifeline and locks so as to arrest the side or edge (except at entrances to
fall of an employee. A rope grab usu- points of access) of a walking/working
ally employs the principle of inertial
surface, e.g., floor, roof, ramp, or run-
locking, cam/level locking, or both.
way where there is no wall or guardrail
Roof means the exterior surface on
the top of a building. This does not in- system at least 39 inches (1.0 m) high.
clude floors or formwork which, be- Walking/working surface means any
cause a building has not been com- surface, whether horizontal or vertical
pleted, temporarily become the top on which an employee walks or works,
surface of a building. including, but not limited to, floors,
Roofing work means the hoisting, roofs, ramps, bridges, runways,
storage, application, and removal of formwork and concrete reinforcing
roofing materials and equipment, in- steel but not including ladders, vehi-
cluding related insulation, sheet metal, cles, or trailers, on which employees
and vapor barrier work, but not includ- must be located in order to perform
ing the construction of the roof deck. their job duties.
Safety-monitoring system means a safe- Warning line system means a barrier
ty system in which a competent person erected on a roof to warn employees
is responsible for recognizing and warn- that they are approaching an unpro-
ing employees of fall hazards. tected roof side or edge, and which des-
Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard means a ignates an area in which roofing work
deceleration device containing a drum- may take place without the use of
wound line which can be slowly ex- guardrail, body belt, or safety net sys-
tracted from, or retracted onto, the tems to protect employees in the area.
drum under slight tension during nor-
Work area means that portion of a
mal employee movement, and which,
after onset of a fall, automatically walking/working surface where job du-
locks the drum and arrests the fall. ties are being performed.
Snaphook means a connector com- [59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, as amended at 60
prised of a hook-shaped member with a FR 39255, Aug. 2, 1995; 66 FR 5265, Jan. 18,
normally closed keeper, or similar ar- 2001; 75 FR 48133, Aug. 9, 2010; 79 FR 20696,
rangement, which may be opened to Apr. 11, 2014]
318
§ 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection. the edge that parallels the leading
(a) General. (1) This section sets forth edge.
requirements for employers to provide (3) Hoist areas. Each employee in a
fall protection systems. All fall protec- hoist area shall be protected from fall-
tion required by this section shall con- ing 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to lower lev-
form to the criteria set forth in els by guardrail systems or personal
§ 1926.502 of this subpart. fall arrest systems. If guardrail sys-
(2) The employer shall determine if tems, [or chain, gate, or guardrail] or
the walking/working surfaces on which portions thereof, are removed to facili-
its employees are to work have the tate the hoisting operation (e.g., dur-
strength and structural integrity to ing landing of materials), and an em-
support employees safely. Employees ployee must lean through the access
shall be allowed to work on those sur- opening or out over the edge of the ac-
faces only when the surfaces have the cess opening (to receive or guide equip-
requisite strength and structural integ- ment and materials, for example), that
rity. employee shall be protected from fall
(b)(1) Unprotected sides and edges. hazards by a personal fall arrest sys-
Each employee on a walking/working tem.
surface (horizontal and vertical sur- (4) Holes. (i) Each employee on walk-
face) with an unprotected side or edge ing/working surfaces shall be protected
which is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above a from falling through holes (including
lower level shall be protected from fall- skylights) more than 6 feet (1.8 m)
ing by the use of guardrail systems, above lower levels, by personal fall ar-
safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems, covers, or guardrail sys-
rest systems. tems erected around such holes.
(2) Leading edges. (i) Each employee (ii) Each employee on a walking/
who is constructing a leading edge 6 working surface shall be protected
feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels from tripping in or stepping into or
shall be protected from falling by through holes (including skylights) by
guardrail systems, safety net systems, covers.
or personal fall arrest systems. Excep- (iii) Each employee on a walking/
tion: When the employer can dem- working surface shall be protected
onstrate that it is infeasible or creates from objects falling through holes (in-
a greater hazard to use these systems, cluding skylights) by covers.
the employer shall develop and imple- (5) Formwork and reinforcing steel.
ment a fall protection plan which Each employee on the face of formwork
meets the requirements of paragraph or reinforcing steel shall be protected
(k) of § 1926.502. from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to
NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea- lower levels by personal fall arrest sys-
sible and will not create a greater hazard to tems, safety net systems, or posi-
implement at least one of the above-listed tioning device systems.
fall protection systems. Accordingly, the
(6) Ramps, runways, and other walk-
employer has the burden of establishing that
it is appropriate to implement a fall protec- ways. Each employee on ramps, run-
tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k) ways, and other walkways shall be pro-
for a particular workplace situation, in lieu tected from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or
of implementing any of those systems. more to lower levels by guardrail sys-
(ii) Each employee on a walking/ tems.
working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) or more (7) Excavations. (i) Each employee at
above a lower level where leading edges the edge of an excavation 6 feet (1.8 m)
are under construction, but who is not or more in depth shall be protected
engaged in the leading edge work, shall from falling by guardrail systems,
be protected from falling by a guard- fences, or barricades when the exca-
rail system, safety net system, or per- vations are not readily seen because of
sonal fall arrest system. If a guardrail plant growth or other visual barrier;
system is chosen to provide the fall (ii) Each employee at the edge of a
protection, and a controlled access well, pit, shaft, and similar excavation
zone has already been established for 6 feet (1.8 m) or more in depth shall be
leading edge work, the control line protected from falling by guardrail sys-
may be used in lieu of a guardrail along tems, fences, barricades, or covers.
319
(8) Dangerous equipment. (i) Each em- (12) Precast concrete erection. Each em-
ployee less than 6 feet (1.8 m) above ployee engaged in the erection of pre-
dangerous equipment shall be pro- cast concrete members (including, but
tected from falling into or onto the not limited to the erection of wall pan-
dangerous equipment by guardrail sys- els, columns, beams, and floor and roof
tems or by equipment guards. ‘‘tees’’) and related operations such as
(ii) Each employee 6 feet (1.8 m) or grouting of precast concrete members,
more above dangerous equipment shall who is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above
be protected from fall hazards by lower levels shall be protected from
guardrail systems, personal fall arrest falling by guardrail systems, safety net
systems, or safety net systems. systems, or personal fall arrest sys-
(9) Overhand bricklaying and related tems, unless another provision in para-
work. (i) Except as otherwise provided graph (b) of this section provides for an
in paragraph (b) of this section, each alternative fall protection measure.
employee performing overhand brick- Exception: When the employer can
laying and related work 6 feet (1.8 m) demonstrate that it is infeasible or cre-
or more above lower levels, shall be ates a greater hazard to use these sys-
protected from falling by guardrail systems, the employer shall develop and
tems, safety net systems, personal fall implement a fall protection plan which
arrest systems, or shall work in a con- meets the requirements of paragraph
trolled access zone. (k) of § 1926.502.
(ii) Each employee reaching more NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea-
sible and will not create a greater hazard to
than 10 inches (25 cm) below the level
implement at least one of the above-listed
of the walking/working surface on fall protection systems. Accordingly, the
which they are working, shall be pro- employer has the burden of establishing that
tected from falling by a guardrail sys- it is appropriate to implement a fall protec-
tem, safety net system, or personal fall tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k)
arrest system. for a particular workplace situation, in lieu
NOTE: Bricklaying operations performed on of implementing any of those systems.
scaffolds are regulated by subpart L—Scaf- (13) Residential construction. Each em-
folds of this part. ployee engaged in residential construc-
(10) Roofing work on Low-slope roofs. tion activities 6 feet (1.8 m) or more
Except as otherwise provided in para- above lower levels shall be protected
graph (b) of this section, each employee by guardrail systems, safety net sys-
engaged in roofing activities on low- tem, or personal fall arrest system un-
slope roofs, with unprotected sides and less another provision in paragraph (b)
edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower of this section provides for an alter-
levels shall be protected from falling native fall protection measure. Excep-
by guardrail systems, safety net sys- tion: When the employer can dem-
tems, personal fall arrest systems, or a onstrate that it is infeasible or creates
combination of warning line system a greater hazard to use these systems,
and guardrail system, warning line sys- the employer shall develop and imple-
tem and safety net system, or warning ment a fall protection plan which
line system and personal fall arrest meets the requirements of paragraph
system, or warning line system and (k) of § 1926.502.
safety monitoring system. Or, on roofs NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea-
50-feet (15.25 m) or less in width (see ap- sible and will not create a greater hazard to
pendix A to subpart M of this part), the implement at least one of the above-listed
use of a safety monitoring system fall protection systems. Accordingly, the
employer has the burden of establishing that
alone [i.e. without the warning line it is appropriate to implement a fall protec-
system] is permitted. tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k)
(11) Steep roofs. Each employee on a for a particular workplace situation, in lieu
steep roof with unprotected sides and of implementing any of those systems.
edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower (14) Wall openings. Each employee
levels shall be protected from falling working on, at, above, or near wall
by guardrail systems with toeboards, openings (including those with chutes

safety net systems, or personal fall ar- attached) where the outside bottom
rest systems. edge of the wall opening is 6 feet (1.8 m)
320
or more above lower levels and the in- working level. When conditions war-
side bottom edge of the wall opening is rant, the height of the top edge may
less than 39 inches (1.0 m) above the exceed the 45-inch height, provided the
walking/working surface, shall be pro- guardrail system meets all other cri-
tected from falling by the use of a teria of this paragraph.
guardrail system, a safety net system, NOTE: When employees are using stilts, the
or a personal fall arrest system. top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent
(15) Walking/working surfaces not oth- member, shall be increased an amount equal
to the height of the stilts.
erwise addressed. Except as provided in
(2) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter-
§ 1926.500(a)(2) or in § 1926.501 (b)(1)
mediate vertical members, or equiva-
through (b)(14), each employee on a
lent intermediate structural members
walking/working surface 6 feet (1.8 m)
shall be installed between the top edge
or more above lower levels shall be pro-
of the guardrail system and the walk-
tected from falling by a guardrail sys-
ing/working surface when there is no
tem, safety net system, or personal fall
wall or parapet wall at least 21 inches
arrest system.
(53 cm) high.
(c) Protection from falling objects. (i) Midrails, when used, shall be in-
When an employee is exposed to falling stalled at a height midway between the
objects, the employer shall have each top edge of the guardrail system and
employee wear a hard hat and shall im- the walking/working level.
plement one of the following measures: (ii) Screens and mesh, when used,
(1) Erect toeboards, screens, or shall extend from the top rail to the
guardrail systems to prevent objects walking/working level and along the
from falling from higher levels; or, entire opening between top rail sup-
(2) Erect a canopy structure and keep ports.
potential fall objects far enough from (iii) Intermediate members (such as
the edge of the higher level so that balusters), when used between posts,
those objects would not go over the shall be not more than 19 inches (48
edge if they were accidentally dis- cm) apart.
placed; or, (iv) Other structural members (such
(3) Barricade the area to which ob- as additional midrails and architec-
jects could fall, prohibit employees tural panels) shall be installed such
from entering the barricaded area, and that there are no openings in the
keep objects that may fall far enough guardrail system that are more than 19
away from the edge of a higher level so inches (.5 m) wide.
that those objects would not go over (3) Guardrail systems shall be capa-
the edge if they were accidentally dis- ble of withstanding, without failure, a
placed. force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) ap-
plied within 2 inches (5.1 cm) of the top
§ 1926.502 Fall protection systems cri- edge, in any outward or downward di-
teria and practices.
rection, at any point along the top
(a) General. (1) Fall protection sys- edge.
tems required by this part shall comply (4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test
with the applicable provisions of this load specified in paragraph (b)(3) of
section. this section is applied in a downward
(2) Employers shall provide and in- direction, the top edge of the guardrail
stall all fall protection systems re- shall not deflect to a height less than
quired by this subpart for an employee, 39 inches (1.0 m) above the walking/
and shall comply with all other perti- working level. Guardrail system com-
nent requirements of this subpart be- ponents selected and constructed in ac-
fore that employee begins the work cordance with the appendix B to sub-
that necessitates the fall protection. part M of this part will be deemed to
(b) Guardrail systems. Guardrail sys- meet this requirement.
tems and their use shall comply with (5) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter-
the following provisions: mediate vertical members, solid pan-
(1) Top edge height of top rails, or els, and equivalent structural members
equivalent guardrail system members, shall be capable of withstanding, with-

shall be 42 inches (1.1 m) plus or minus out failure, a force of at least 150
3 inches (8 cm) above the walking/ pounds (666 N) applied in any downward
321
or outward direction at any point (1) Safety nets shall be installed as

along the midrail or other member. close as practicable under the walking/
(6) Guardrail systems shall be so sur- working surface on which employees
faced as to prevent injury to an em- are working, but in no case more than
ployee from punctures or lacerations, 30 feet (9.1 m) below such level. When
and to prevent snagging of clothing. nets are used on bridges, the potential
(7) The ends of all top rails and fall area from the walking/working sur-
midrails shall not overhang the ter- face to the net shall be unobstructed.
minal posts, except where such over- (2) Safety nets shall extend outward
hang does not constitute a projection from the outermost projection of the
hazard. work surface as follows:
(8) Steel banding and plastic banding Minimum required horizontal
shall not be used as top rails or Vertical distance from working distance of outer edge of net
level to horizontal plane of net from the edge of the working
midrails. surface
(9) Top rails and midrails shall be at
Up to 5 feet ............................ 8 feet.
least one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal More than 5 feet up to 10 feet 10 feet.
diameter or thickness to prevent cuts More than 10 feet ................... 13 feet.
and lacerations. If wire rope is used for
top rails, it shall be flagged at not (3) Safety nets shall be installed with
more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with sufficient clearance under them to pre-
high-visibility material. vent contact with the surface or struc-
(10) When guardrail systems are used tures below when subjected to an im-
at hoisting areas, a chain, gate or re- pact force equal to the drop test speci-
movable guardrail section shall be fied in paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
placed across the access opening be- (4) Safety nets and their installations
tween guardrail sections when hoisting shall be capable of absorbing an impact
operations are not taking place. force equal to that produced by the
(11) When guardrail systems are used drop test specified in paragraph (c)(4)(i)
at holes, they shall be erected on all of this section.
unprotected sides or edges of the hole. (i) Except as provided in paragraph
(c)(4)(ii) of this section, safety nets and
(12) When guardrail systems are used
safety net installations shall be drop-
around holes used for the passage of
tested at the jobsite after initial in-
materials, the hole shall have not more
stallation and before being used as a
than two sides provided with remov- fall protection system, whenever relo-
able guardrail sections to allow the cated, after major repair, and at 6-
passage of materials. When the hole is month intervals if left in one place.
not in use, it shall be closed over with The drop-test shall consist of a 400
a cover, or a guardrail system shall be pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30 ±2 inches
provided along all unprotected sides or (76 ±5 cm) in diameter dropped into the
edges. net from the highest walking/working
(13) When guardrail systems are used surface at which employees are exposed
around holes which are used as points to fall hazards, but not from less than
of access (such as ladderways), they 42 inches (1.1 m) above that level.
shall be provided with a gate, or be so (ii) When the employer can dem-
offset that a person cannot walk di- onstrate that it is unreasonable to per-
rectly into the hole. form the drop-test required by para-
(14) Guardrail systems used on ramps graph (c)(4)(i) of this section, the em-
and runways shall be erected along ployer (or a designated competent per-
each unprotected side or edge. son) shall certify that the net and net
(15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope installation is in compliance with the
being used for top rails or midrails provisions of paragraphs (c)(3) and
shall be inspected as frequently as nec- (c)(4)(i) of this section by preparing a
essary to ensure that it continues to certification record prior to the net
meet the strength requirements of being used as a fall protection system.
paragraph (b)(3) of this section. The certification record must include
(c) Safety net systems. Safety net sys- an identification of the net and net in-
tems and their use shall comply with stallation for which the certification
the following provisions: record is being prepared; the date that
322
it was determined that the identified (4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be
net and net installation were in com- proof-tested to a minimum tensile load
pliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without crack-
section and the signature of the person ing, breaking, or taking permanent de-
making the determination and certifi- formation.
cation. The most recent certification (5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be
record for each net and net installation compatible with the member to which
shall be available at the jobsite for in- they are connected to prevent uninten-
spection. tional disengagement of the snaphook
(5) Defective nets shall not be used. by depression of the snaphook keeper
Safety nets shall be inspected at least by the connected member, or shall be a
once a week for wear, damage, and locking type snaphook designed and
other deterioration. Defective compo- used to prevent disengagement of the
nents shall be removed from service. snaphook by the contact of the
Safety nets shall also be inspected snaphook keeper by the connected
after any occurrence which could affect member. Effective January 1, 1998, only
the integrity of the safety net system. locking type snaphooks shall be used.
(6) Materials, scrap pieces, equip- (6) Unless the snaphook is a locking
ment, and tools which have fallen into type and designed for the following
the safety net shall be removed as soon connections, snaphooks shall not be en-
as possible from the net and at least gaged:
before the next work shift. (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire
(7) The maximum size of each safety rope;
net mesh opening shall not exceed 36 (ii) to each other;
square inches (230 cm 2) nor be longer (iii) to a Dee-ring to which another
than 6 inches (15 cm) on any side, and snaphook or other connector is at-
the opening, measured center-to-center tached;
of mesh ropes or webbing, shall not be (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or
longer than 6 inches (15 cm). All mesh (v) to any object which is incom-
crossings shall be secured to prevent patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela-
enlargement of the mesh opening. tion to the snaphook such that unin-
(8) Each safety net (or section of it) tentional disengagement could occur
shall have a border rope for webbing by the connected object being able to
with a minimum breaking strength of depress the snaphook keeper and re-
5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). lease itself.
(9) Connections between safety net (7) On suspended scaffolds or similar
panels shall be as strong as integral work platforms with horizontal life-
net components and shall be spaced not lines which may become vertical life-
more than 6 inches (15 cm) apart. lines, the devices used to connect to a
(d) Personal fall arrest systems. Per- horizontal lifeline shall be capable of
sonal fall arrest systems and their use locking in both directions on the life-
shall comply with the provisions set line.
forth below. Effective January 1, 1998, (8) Horizontal lifelines shall be de-
body belts are not acceptable as part of signed, installed, and used, under the
a personal fall arrest system. Note: The supervision of a qualified person, as
use of a body belt in a positioning depart of a complete personal fall arrest
vice system is acceptable and is regu- system, which maintains a safety fac-
lated under paragraph (e) of this sector of at least two.
tion. (9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines
(1) Connectors shall be drop forged, shall have a minimum breaking
pressed or formed steel, or made of strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
equivalent materials. (10) (i) Except as provided in para-
(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion- graph (d)(10)(ii) of this section, when
resistant finish, and all surfaces and vertical lifelines are used, each em-
edges shall be smooth to prevent dam- ployee shall be attached to a separate
age to interfacing parts of the system. lifeline.
(3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall (ii) During the construction of eleva-
have a minimum tensile strength of tor shafts, two employees may be at-
5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). tached to the same lifeline in the
323
hoistway, provided both employees are distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet
working atop a false car that is (1.07 m); and,
equipped with guardrails; the strength (v) have sufficient strength to with-
of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000 stand twice the potential impact en-
pounds per employee attached] (44.4 ergy of an employee free falling a dis-
kN); and all other criteria specified in tance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the free fall
this paragraph for lifelines have been distance permitted by the system,
met. whichever is less.
(11) Lifelines shall be protected NOTE: If the personal fall arrest system
against being cut or abraded. meets the criteria and protocols contained in
(12) Self-retracting lifelines and lan- appendix C to subpart M, and if the system
yards which automatically limit free is being used by an employee having a com-
fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less bined person and tool weight of less than 310
shall be capable of sustaining a min- pounds (140 kg), the system will be consid-
ered to be in compliance with the provisions
imum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3
of paragraph (d)(16) of this section. If the
kN) applied to the device with the life- system is used by an employee having a com-
line or lanyard in the fully extended bined tool and body weight of 310 pounds (140
position. kg) or more, then the employer must appro-
(13) Self-retracting lifelines and lan- priately modify the criteria and protocols of
yards which do not limit free fall dis- the appendix to provide proper protection for
tance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch such heavier weights, or the system will not
lanyards, and tearing and deforming be deemed to be in compliance with the re-
lanyards shall be capable of sustaining quirements of paragraph (d)(16) of this sec-
a minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds tion.
(22.2 kN) applied to the device with the (17) The attachment point of the
lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended body belt shall be located in the center
position. of the wearer’s back. The attachment
(14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used point of the body harness shall be lo-
in lanyards, lifelines, and strength cated in the center of the wearer’s back
components of body belts and body har- near shoulder level, or above the wear-
nesses shall be made from synthetic fi- er’s head.
bers. (18) Body belts, harnesses, and com-
(15) Anchorages used for attachment ponents shall be used only for em-
of personal fall arrest equipment shall ployee protection (as part of a personal
be independent of any anchorage being fall arrest system or positioning device
used to support or suspend platforms system) and not to hoist materials.
and capable of supporting at least 5,000 (19) Personal fall arrest systems and
pounds (22.2 kN) per employee at- components subjected to impact load-
tached, or shall be designed, installed, ing shall be immediately removed from
and used as follows: service and shall not be used again for
(i) as part of a complete personal fall employee protection until inspected
arrest system which maintains a safety and determined by a competent person
factor of at least two; and to be undamaged and suitable for
(ii) under the supervision of a quali- reuse.
fied person. (20) The employer shall provide for
(16) Personal fall arrest systems, prompt rescue of employees in the
when stopping a fall, shall: event of a fall or shall assure that em-
(i) limit maximum arresting force on ployees are able to rescue themselves.
an employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when (21) Personal fall arrest systems shall
used with a body belt; be inspected prior to each use for wear,
(ii) limit maximum arresting force damage and other deterioration, and
on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) defective components shall be removed
when used with a body harness; from service.
(iii) be rigged such that an employee (22) Body belts shall be at least one
can neither free fall more than 6 feet and five-eighths (15⁄8) inches (4.1 cm)
(1.8 m), nor contact any lower level; wide.

(iv) bring an employee to a complete (23) Personal fall arrest systems shall
stop and limit maximum deceleration not be attached to guardrail systems,
324
nor shall they be attached to hoists ex- (v) to any object which is incom-
cept as specified in other subparts of patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela-
this part. tion to the snaphook such that unin-
(24) When a personal fall arrest sys- tentional disengagement could occur
tem is used at hoist areas, it shall be by the connected object being able to
rigged to allow the movement of the depress the snaphook keeper and re-
employee only as far as the edge of the lease itself.
walking/working surface. (9) Positioning device systems shall
(e) Positioning device systems. Posi- be inspected prior to each use for wear,
tioning device systems and their use damage, and other deterioration, and
shall conform to the following provi- defective components shall be removed
sions: from service.
(1) Positioning devices shall be rigged (10) Body belts, harnesses, and com-
such that an employee cannot free fall ponents shall be used only for em-
more than 2 feet (.6 m). ployee protection (as part of a personal
(2) Positioning devices shall be se- fall arrest system or positioning device
cured to an anchorage capable of sup- system) and not to hoist materials.
porting at least twice the potential im- (f) Warning line systems. Warning line
pact load of an employee’s fall or 3,000 systems [See § 1926.501(b)(10)] and their
pounds (13.3 kN), whichever is greater. use shall comply with the following
(3) Connectors shall be drop forged, provisions:
pressed or formed steel, or made of (1) The warning line shall be erected
equivalent materials. around all sides of the roof work area.
(i) When mechanical equipment is
(4) Connectors shall have a corrosion-
not being used, the warning line shall
resistant finish, and all surfaces and
be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m)
edges shall be smooth to prevent dam-
from the roof edge.
age to interfacing parts of this system.
(ii) When mechanical equipment is
(5) Connecting assemblies shall have
being used, the warning line shall be
a minimum tensile strength of 5,000
erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from
pounds (22.2 kN)
the roof edge which is parallel to the
(6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be direction of mechanical equipment op-
proof-tested to a minimum tensile load eration, and not less than 10 feet (3.1
of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without crack- m) from the roof edge which is perpen-
ing, breaking, or taking permanent de- dicular to the direction of mechanical
formation. equipment operation.
(7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be (iii) Points of access, materials han-
compatible with the member to which dling areas, storage areas, and hoisting
they are connected to prevent uninten- areas shall be connected to the work
tional disengagement of the snaphook area by an access path formed by two
by depression of the snaphook keeper warning lines.
by the connected member, or shall be a (iv) When the path to a point of ac-
locking type snaphook designed and cess is not in use, a rope, wire, chain,
used to prevent disengagement of the or other barricade, equivalent in
snaphook by the contact of the strength and height to the warning
snaphook keeper by the connected line, shall be placed across the path at
member. As of January 1, 1998, only the point where the path intersects the
locking type snaphooks shall be used. warning line erected around the work
(8) Unless the snaphook is a locking area, or the path shall be offset such
type and designed for the following that a person cannot walk directly into
connections, snaphooks shall not be en- the work area.
gaged: (2) Warning lines shall consist of
(i) directly to webbing, rope or wire ropes, wires, or chains, and supporting
rope; stanchions erected as follows:
(ii) to each other; (i) The rope, wire, or chain shall be
(iii) to a Dee-ring to which another flagged at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m)
snaphook or other connector is at- intervals with high-visibility material;

tached; (ii) The rope, wire, or chain shall be
(iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or rigged and supported in such a way
325
that its lowest point (including sag) is whichever is less, from the leading
no less than 34 inches (.9 m) from the edge.
walking/working surface and its high- (iii) The control line shall extend
est point is no more than 39 inches (1.0 along the entire length of the unpro-
m) from the walking/working surface; tected or leading edge and shall be ap-
(iii) After being erected, with the proximately parallel to the unpro-
rope, wire, or chain attached, stan- tected or leading edge.
chions shall be capable of resisting, (iv) The control line shall be con-
without tipping over, a force of at least nected on each side to a guardrail sys-
16 pounds (71 N) applied horizontally tem or wall.
against the stanchion, 30 inches (.8 m) (2) When used to control access to
above the walking/working surface, areas where overhand bricklaying and
perpendicular to the warning line, and related work are taking place:
in the direction of the floor, roof, or (i) The controlled access zone shall
platform edge; be defined by a control line erected not
(iv) The rope, wire, or chain shall less than 10 feet (3.1 m) nor more than
have a minimum tensile strength of 500 15 feet (4.5 m) from the working edge.
pounds (2.22 kN), and after being at- (ii) The control line shall extend for
tached to the stanchions, shall be capa- a distance sufficient for the controlled
ble of supporting, without breaking, access zone to enclose all employees
the loads applied to the stanchions as performing overhand bricklaying and
prescribed in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of related work at the working edge and
this section; and shall be approximately parallel to the
(v) The line shall be attached at each working edge.
stanchion in such a way that pulling on
(iii) Additional control lines shall be
one section of the line between stan-
erected at each end to enclose the con-
chions will not result in slack being
trolled access zone.
taken up in adjacent sections before
the stanchion tips over. (iv) Only employees engaged in
(3) No employee shall be allowed in overhand bricklaying or related work
the area between a roof edge and a shall be permitted in the controlled ac-
warning line unless the employee is cess zone.
performing roofing work in that area. (3) Control lines shall consist of
(4) Mechanical equipment on roofs ropes, wires, tapes, or equivalent mate-
shall be used or stored only in areas rials, and supporting stanchions as fol-
where employees are protected by a lows:
warning line system, guardrail system, (i) Each line shall be flagged or oth-
or personal fall arrest system. erwise clearly marked at not more
(g) Controlled access zones. Controlled than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high-
access zones [See § 1926.501(b)(9) and visibility material.
§ 1926.502(k)] and their use shall con- (ii) Each line shall be rigged and sup-
form to the following provisions. ported in such a way that its lowest
(1) When used to control access to point (including sag) is not less than 39
areas where leading edge and other op- inches (1 m) from the walking/working
erations are taking place the con- surface and its highest point is not
trolled access zone shall be defined by more than 45 inches (1.3 m) [50 inches
a control line or by any other means (1.3 m) when overhand bricklaying op-
that restricts access. erations are being performed] from the
(i) When control lines are used, they walking/working surface.
shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 (iii) Each line shall have a minimum
m) nor more than 25 feet (7.7 m) from breaking strength of 200 pounds (.88
the unprotected or leading edge, except kN).
when erecting precast concrete mem- (4) On floors and roofs where guard-
bers. rail systems are not in place prior to
(ii) When erecting precast concrete the beginning of overhand bricklaying
members, the control line shall be operations, controlled access zones
erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor shall be enlarged, as necessary, to en-
more than 60 feet (18 m) or half the close all points of access, material han-
length of the member being erected, dling areas, and storage areas.
326
(5) On floors and roofs where guard- vehicle expected to cross over the
rail systems are in place, but need to cover.
be removed to allow overhand brick- (2) All other covers shall be capable
laying work or leading edge work to of supporting, without failure, at least
take place, only that portion of the twice the weight of employees, equip-
guardrail necessary to accomplish that ment, and materials that may be im-
day’s work shall be removed. posed on the cover at any one time.
(h) Safety monitoring systems. Safety (3) All covers shall be secured when
monitoring systems [See installed so as to prevent accidental
§§ 1926.501(b)(10) and 1926.502(k)] and displacement by the wind, equipment,
their use shall comply with the fol- or employees.
lowing provisions: (4) All covers shall be color coded or
(1) The employer shall designate a they shall be marked with the word
competent person to monitor the safe- ‘‘HOLE’’ or ‘‘COVER’’ to provide warn-
ty of other employees and the em- ing of the hazard.
ployer shall ensure that the safety
NOTE: This provision does not apply to cast
monitor complies with the following iron manhole covers or steel grates used on
requirements: streets or roadways.
(i) The safety monitor shall be com- (j) Protection from falling objects. Fall-
petent to recognize fall hazards; ing object protection shall comply with
(ii) The safety monitor shall warn the following provisions:
the employee when it appears that the
(1) Toeboards, when used as falling
employee is unaware of a fall hazard or
object protection, shall be erected
is acting in an unsafe manner;
along the edge of the overhead walking/
(iii) The safety monitor shall be on
working surface for a distance suffi-
the same walking/working surface and
cient to protect employees below.
within visual sighting distance of the
(2) Toeboards shall be capable of
employee being monitored;
withstanding, without failure, a force
(iv) The safety monitor shall be close
of at least 50 pounds (222 N) applied in
enough to communicate orally with
any downward or outward direction at
the employee; and
any point along the toeboard.
(v) The safety monitor shall not have
other responsibilities which could take (3) Toeboards shall be a minimum of
the monitor’s attention from the moni- 31⁄2 inches (9 cm) in vertical height
toring function. from their top edge to the level of the
(2) Mechanical equipment shall not walking/working surface. They shall
be used or stored in areas where safety have not more than 1⁄4 inch (0.6 cm)
monitoring systems are being used to clearance above the walking/working
monitor employees engaged in roofing surface. They shall be solid or have
operations on low-slope roofs. openings not over 1 inch (2.5 cm) in
(3) No employee, other than an em- greatest dimension.
ployee engaged in roofing work [on (4) Where tools, equipment, or mate-
low-sloped roofs] or an employee cov- rials are piled higher than the top edge
ered by a fall protection plan, shall be of a toeboard, paneling or screening
allowed in an area where an employee shall be erected from the walking/
is being protected by a safety moni- working surface or toeboard to the top
toring system. of a guardrail system’s top rail or
(4) Each employee working in a con- midrail, for a distance sufficient to
trolled access zone shall be directed to protect employees below.
comply promptly with fall hazard (5) Guardrail systems, when used as
warnings from safety monitors. falling object protection, shall have all
(i) Covers. Covers for holes in floors, openings small enough to prevent pas-
roofs, and other walking/working sur- sage of potential falling objects.
faces shall meet the following require- (6) During the performance of
ments: overhand bricklaying and related work:
(1) Covers located in roadways and (i) No materials or equipment except
vehicular aisles shall be capable of sup- masonry and mortar shall be stored
porting, without failure, at least twice within 4 feet (1.2 m) of the working
the maximum axle load of the largest edge.
327
(ii) Excess mortar, broken or scat- tion systems. For example, the em-
tered masonry units, and all other ma- ployer shall discuss the extent to
terials and debris shall be kept clear which scaffolds, ladders, or vehicle
from the work area by removal at reg- mounted work platforms can be used to
ular intervals. provide a safer working surface and
(7) During the performance of roofing thereby reduce the hazard of falling.
work: (7) The fall protection plan shall
(i) Materials and equipment shall not identify each location where conven-
be stored within 6 feet (1.8 m) of a roof tional fall protection methods cannot
edge unless guardrails are erected at be used. These locations shall then be
the edge. classified as controlled access zones
(ii) Materials which are piled, and the employer must comply with
grouped, or stacked near a roof edge the criteria in paragraph (g) of this sec-
shall be stable and self-supporting. tion.
(8) Canopies, when used as falling ob- (8) Where no other alternative meas-
ject protection, shall be strong enough ure has been implemented, the em-
to prevent collapse and to prevent pen- ployer shall implement a safety moni-
etration by any objects which may fall toring system in conformance with
onto the canopy. § 1926.502(h).
(k) Fall protection plan. This option is (9) The fall protection plan must in-
available only to employees engaged in clude a statement which provides the
leading edge work, precast concrete name or other method of identification
erection work, or residential construc- for each employee who is designated to
tion work (See § 1926.501(b)(2), (b)(12), work in controlled access zones. No
and (b)(13)) who can demonstrate that other employees may enter controlled
it is infeasible or it creates a greater access zones.
hazard to use conventional fall protec- (10) In the event an employee falls, or
tion equipment. The fall protection some other related, serious incident oc-
plan must conform to the following curs, (e.g., a near miss) the employer
provisions. shall investigate the circumstances of
(1) The fall protection plan shall be the fall or other incident to determine
prepared by a qualified person and de- if the fall protection plan needs to be
veloped specifically for the site where changed (e.g. new practices, proce-
the leading edge work, precast concrete dures, or training) and shall implement
work, or residential construction work those changes to prevent similar types
is being performed and the plan must of falls or incidents.
be maintained up to date.
(2) Any changes to the fall protection § 1926.503 Training requirements.
plan shall be approved by a qualified The following training provisions
person. supplement and clarify the require-
(3) A copy of the fall protection plan ments of § 1926.21 regarding the hazards
with all approved changes shall be addressed in subpart M of this part.
maintained at the job site. (a) Training program. (1) The em-
(4) The implementation of the fall ployer shall provide a training program
protection plan shall be under the su- for each employee who might be ex-
pervision of a competent person. posed to fall hazards. The program
(5) The fall protection plan shall doc- shall enable each employee to recog-
ument the reasons why the use of con- nize the hazards of falling and shall
ventional fall protection systems train each employee in the procedures
(guardrail systems, personal fall arrest to be followed in order to minimize
systems, or safety nets systems) are in- these hazards.
feasible or why their use would create (2) The employer shall assure that
a greater hazard. each employee has been trained, as
(6) The fall protection plan shall in- necessary, by a competent person
clude a written discussion of other qualified in the following areas:
measures that will be taken to reduce (i) The nature of fall hazards in the
or eliminate the fall hazard for workers work area;

who cannot be provided with protec- (ii) The correct procedures for erect-
tion from the conventional fall protec- ing, maintaining, disassembling, and
328
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A
inspecting the fall protection systems (3) Inadequacies in an affected em-

to be used; ployee’s knowledge or use of fall pro-
(iii) The use and operation of guard- tection systems or equipment indicate
rail systems, personal fall arrest sys- that the employee has not retained the
tems, safety net systems, warning line requisite understanding or skill.
systems, safety monitoring systems, NOTE: The following appendices to subpart
controlled access zones, and other pro- M of this part serve as non-mandatory guide-
tection to be used; lines to assist employers in complying with
(iv) The role of each employee in the the appropriate requirements of subpart M of
safety monitoring system when this this part.
system is used;
(v) The limitations on the use of me- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART M OF PART
chanical equipment during the per- 1926—DETERMINING ROOF WIDTHS
formance of roofing work on low-sloped Non-mandatory Guidelines for Complying With
roofs; § 1926.501(b)(10)
(vi) The correct procedures for the
handling and storage of equipment and (1) This appendix serves as a guideline to
assist employers complying with the require-
materials and the erection of overhead
ments of § 1926.501(b)(10). Section
protection; and 1910.501(b)(10) allows the use of a safety mon-
(vii) The role of employees in fall itoring system alone as a means of providing
protection plans; fall protection during the performance of
(viii) The standards contained in this roofing operations on low-sloped roofs 50 feet
subpart. (15.25 m) or less in width. Each example in
(b) Certification of training. (1) The the appendix shows a roof plan or plans and
employer shall verify compliance with indicates where each roof or roof area is to
paragraph (a) of this section by pre- be measured to determine its width. Section
views or elevation views are shown where ap-
paring a written certification record.
propriate. Some examples show ‘‘correct’’
The written certification record shall and ‘‘incorrect’’ subdivisions of irregularly
contain the name or other identity of shaped roofs divided into smaller, regularly
the employee trained, the date(s) of the shaped areas. In all examples, the dimension
training, and the signature of the per- selected to be the width of an area is the
son who conducted the training or the lesser of the two primary dimensions of the
signature of the employer. If the em- area, as viewed from above. Example A
ployer relies on training conducted by shows that on a simple rectangular roof,
another employer or completed prior to width is the lesser of the two primary overall
dimensions. This is also the case with roofs
the effective date of this section, the which are sloped toward or away from the
certification record shall indicate the roof center, as shown in Example B.
date the employer determined the prior (2) Many roofs are not simple rectangles.
training was adequate rather than the Such roofs may be broken down into sub-
date of actual training. areas as shown in Example C. The process of
(2) The latest training certification dividing a roof area can produce many dif-
shall be maintained. ferent configurations. Example C gives the
(c) Retraining. When the employer has general rule of using dividing lines of min-
reason to believe that any affected em- imum length to minimize the size and num-
ber of the areas which are potentially less
ployee who has already been trained than 50 feet (15.25 m) wide. The intent is to
does not have the understanding and minimize the number of roof areas where
skill required by paragraph (a) of this safety monitoring systems alone are suffi-
section, the employer shall retrain cient protection.
each such employee. Circumstances (3) Roofs which are comprised of several
where retraining is required include, separate, non-contiguous roof areas, as in
but are not limited to, situations Example D, may be considered as a series of
where: individual roofs. Some roofs have pent-
(1) Changes in the workplace render houses, additional floors, courtyard open-
ings, or similar architectural features; Ex-
previous training obsolete; or ample E shows how the rule for dividing
(2) Changes in the types of fall pro- roofs into subareas is applied to such con-
tection systems or equipment to be figurations. Irregular, non-rectangular roofs
used render previous training obsolete; must be considered on an individual basis, as

or shown in Example F.
329
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
EXAMPLE A: RECTANGULAR SHAPED ROOFS
EXAMPLE B: SLOPED RECTANGULAR SHAPED ROOFS
EXAMPLE C: IRREGULARLY SHAPED ROOFS the size of roof areas where the safety moni-
WITH RECTANGULAR SHAPED SECTIONS toring system alone can be used
Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas [1926.502(b)(10)]. Dotted lines are used in the
by using dividing lines of minimum length to examples to show the location of dividing
minimize the size and number of the areas lines. W denotes incorrect measurements of
which are potentially less than or equal to 50 width.
feet (15.25 meters) in width, in order to limit
ER09AU94.001</GPH>
330
ER09AU94.000</GPH>
331
ER09AU94.002</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
EXAMPLE D: SEPARATE, NON-CONTIGUOUS ROOF AREAS
EXAMPLE E: ROOFS WITH PENTHOUSES, OPEN feet (15.25 meters) in width, in order to limit
COURTYARDS, ADDITIONAL FLOORS, ETC. the size of roof areas where the safety moni-
Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas toring system alone can be used
by using dividing lines of minimum length to [1926.502(b)(10)]. Dotted lines are used in the
minimize the size and number of the areas examples to show the location of dividing
which are potentially less than or equal to 50
332
ER09AU94.003</GPH>
lines. W denotes incorrect measurements of
width.
333
ER09AU94.004</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
EXAMPLE F: IRREGULAR, NON-RECTANGULAR SHAPED ROOFS
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART M OF PART plying with these requirements. An employer

1926—GUARDRAIL SYSTEMS may use these guidelines as a starting point
for designing guardrail systems. However,
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying with the guidelines do not provide all the infor-
§ 1926.502(b) mation necessary to build a complete sys-
The standard requires guardrail systems tem, and the employer is still responsible for
designing and assembling these components
and components to be designed and built to

meet the requirements of § 1926.502 (b) (3), (4), in such a way that the completed system
and (5). This appendix serves as a non-man- will meet the requirements of § 1926.502(b) (3),
datory guideline to assist employers in com- (4), and (5). Components for which no specific
334
ER09AU94.005</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C
guidelines are given in this appendix (e.g., of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm
joints, base connections, components made plus or minus 10 cm).
with other materials, and components with (5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create
other dimensions) must also be designed and the free fall distance should be supplied with
constructed in such a way that the com- the system, or in its absence, the least elas-
pleted system meets the requirements of tic lanyard or lifeline available to be used
§ 1926.502. with the system.
(1) For wood railings: Wood components (6) The test weight for each test should be
shall be minimum 1500 lb-ft/in2 fiber (stress hoisted to the required level and should be
grade) construction grade lumber; the posts quickly released without having any appre-
shall be at least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm × 10 ciable motion imparted to it.
cm) lumber spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 (7) The system’s performance should be
m) apart on centers; the top rail shall be at evaluated taking into account the range of
least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm × 10 cm) lumber, environmental conditions for which it is de-
the intermediate rail shall be at least 1-inch signed to be used.
by 6-inch (2.5 cm × 15 cm) lumber. All lumber (8) Following the test, the system need not
dimensions are nominal sizes as provided by be capable of further operation.
the American Softwood Lumber Standards, (c) Strength test. (1) During the testing of
dated January 1970. all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus
or minus 5 pounds (135 kg plus or minus 2.5
(2) For pipe railings: posts, top rails, and
kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of
intermediate railings shall be at least one
this section.)
and one-half inches nominal diameter
(2) The test consists of dropping the test
(schedule 40 pipe) with posts spaced not more
weight once. A new unused system should be
than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers. used for each test.
(3) For structural steel railings: posts, top (3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard
rails, and intermediate rails shall be at least length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches
2-inch by 2-inch (5 cm × 10 cm) by 3⁄8-inch (1.1 (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from
cm) angles, with posts spaced not more than the fixed anchorage to the attachment on
8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers. the body belt or body harness.
(4) For rope-grab-type deceleration sys-
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART M OF PART tems, the length of the lifeline above the
1926—PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEMS centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the
lifeline’s anchorage point should not exceed
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With 2 feet (0.61 m).
§ 1926.502(d) (5) For lanyard systems, for systems with
deceleration devices which do not automati-
I. Test methods for personal fall arrest systems
cally limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m)
and positioning device systems—(a) General.
or less, and for systems with deceleration de-
This appendix serves as a non-mandatory
vices which have a connection distance in ex-
guideline to assist employers comply with
cess of 1 foot (0.3 m) (measured between the
the requirements in § 1926.502(d). Paragraphs
centerline of the lifeline and the attachment
(b), (c), (d) and (e) of this appendix describe
point to the body belt or harness), the test
test procedures which may be used to deter-
weight should be rigged to free fall a dis-
mine compliance with the requirements in
tance of 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from a point that is
§ 1926.502 (d)(16). As noted in appendix D of
1.5 feet (.46 m) above the anchorage point, to
this subpart, the test methods listed here in
its hanging location (6 feet below the anchor-
appendix C can also be used to assist employ-
age). The test weight should fall without in-
ers comply with the requirements in
terference, obstruction, or hitting the floor
§ 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) for positioning device
or ground during the test. In some cases a
systems.
non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length
(b) General conditions for all tests in the ap- may need to be added to the system (for test
pendix to § 1926.502(d). (1) Lifelines, lanyards purposes) to create the necessary free fall
and deceleration devices should be attached distance.
to an anchorage and connected to the body- (6) For deceleration device systems with
belt or body harness in the same manner as integral lifelines or lanyards which auto-
they would be when used to protect employ- matically limit free fall distance to 2 feet
ees. (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should be
(2) The anchorage should be rigid, and rigged to free fall a distance of 4 feet (1.22
should not have a deflection greater than m).
0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 (7) Any weight which detaches from the
pounds (10 kN) is applied. belt or harness has failed the strength test.
(3) The frequency response of the load (d) Force test—(1) General. The test consists
measuring instrumentation should be 500 Hz.
of dropping the respective test weight once

(4) The test weight used in the strength as specified in paragraph (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i)
and force tests should be a rigid, metal, cy- of this section. A new, unused system should
lindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth be used for each test.
335
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
(2) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight of (3) Other self-activating-type deceleration de-
220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg vices. The locking mechanisms of other self-
plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See activating-type deceleration devices de-
paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix). signed for more than one arrest should lock
(ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or each of 1,000 times as they would in normal
minus two inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) service.
as measured from the fixed anchorage to the II. Additional non-mandatory guidelines for
attachment on the body belt or body har- personal fall arrest systems. The following in-
ness. formation constitutes additional guidelines
(iii) The test weight should fall free from for use in complying with requirements for a
the anchorage level to its hanging location personal fall arrest system.
(a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) (a) Selection and use considerations. (1) The
without interference, obstruction, or hitting kind of personal fall arrest system selected
the floor or ground during the test. should match the particular work situation,
(3) For all other systems. (i) A test weight of and any possible free fall distance should be
220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg kept to a minimum. Consideration should be
plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See given to the particular work environment.
paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix) For example, the presence of acids, dirt,
(ii) The free fall distance to be used in the moisture, oil, grease, etc., and their effect on
test should be the maximum fall distance the system, should be evaluated. Hot or cold
physically permitted by the system during environments may also have an adverse ef-
normal use conditions, up to a maximum fect on the system. Wire rope should not be
free fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet
used where an electrical hazard is antici-
(1.83 m), except as follows:
pated. As required by the standard, the em-
(A) For deceleration systems which have a ployer must plan to have means available to
connection link or lanyard, the test weight
promptly rescue an employee should a fall
should free fall a distance equal to the con-
occur, since the suspended employee may not
nection distance (measured between the cen-
be able to reach a work level independently.
terline of the lifeline and the attachment
point to the body belt or harness). (2) Where lanyards, connectors, and life-
lines are subject to damage by work oper-
(B) For deceleration device systems with
ations such as welding, chemical cleaning,
integral lifelines or lanyards which auto-
and sandblasting, the component should be
matically limit free fall distance to 2 feet
(0.61 m) or less, the test weight should free protected, or other securing systems should
fall a distance equal to that permitted by the be used. The employer should fully evaluate
system in normal use. (For example, to test the work conditions and environment (in-
a system with a self-retracting lifeline or cluding seasonal weather changes) before se-
lanyard, the test weight should be supported lecting the appropriate personal fall protec-
and the system allowed to retract the life- tion system. Once in use, the system’s effec-
line or lanyard as it would in normal use. tiveness should be monitored. In some cases,
The test weight would then be released and a program for cleaning and maintenance of
the force and deceleration distance meas- the system may be necessary.
ured). (b) Testing considerations. Before pur-
(4) A system fails the force test if the re- chasing or putting into use a personal fall
corded maximum arresting force exceeds arrest system, an employer should obtain
1,260 pounds (5.6 kN) when using a body belt, from the supplier information about the sys-
and/or exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when tem based on its performance during testing
using a body harness. so that the employer can know if the system
(5) The maximum elongation and decelera- meets this standard. Testing should be done
tion distance should be recorded during the using recognized test methods. This appendix
force test. contains test methods recognized for evalu-
(e) Deceleration device tests—(1) General. The ating the performance of fall arrest systems.
device should be evaluated or tested under Not all systems may need to be individually
the environmental conditions, (such as rain, tested; the performance of some systems
ice, grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.), for may be based on data and calculations de-
which the device is designed. rived from testing of similar systems, pro-
(2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i) vided that enough information is available
Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000 to demonstrate similarity of function and
times over the same length of line a distance design.
of not less than 1 foot (30.5 cm), and the (c) Component compatibility considerations.
mechanism should lock each time. Ideally, a personal fall arrest system is de-
(ii) Unless the device is permanently signed, tested, and supplied as a complete
system. However, it is common practice for
marked to indicate the type(s) of lifeline

which must be used, several types (different lanyards, connectors, lifelines, deceleration
diameters and different materials), of life- devices, body belts and body harnesses to be
lines should be used to test the device. interchanged since some components wear
336
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C
out before others. The employer and em- can rescue themselves should a fall occur.
ployee should realize that not all compo- The availability of rescue personnel, ladders
nents are interchangeable. For instance, a or other rescue equipment should be evalu-
lanyard should not be connected between a ated. In some situations, equipment which
body belt (or harness) and a deceleration de- allows employees to rescue themselves after
vice of the self-retracting type since this can the fall has been arrested may be desirable,
result in additional free fall for which the such as devices which have descent capa-
system was not designed. Any substitution bility.
or change to a personal fall arrest system (g) Inspection considerations. As required by
should be fully evaluated or tested by a com- § 1926.502(d)(21), personal fall arrest systems
petent person to determine that it meets the must be regularly inspected. Any component
standard, before the modified system is put with any significant defect, such as cuts,
in use. tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching;
(d) Employee training considerations. Thor- alterations or additions which might affect
ough employee training in the selection and its efficiency; damage due to deterioration;
use of personal fall arrest systems is impera- contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives;
tive. Employees must be trained in the safe distorted hooks or faulty hook springs;
use of the system. This should include the tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles;
following: application limits; proper anchor- loose or damaged mountings; non-func-
ing and tie-off techniques; estimation of free tioning parts; or wearing or internal deterio-
fall distance, including determination of de- ration in the ropes must be withdrawn from
celeration distance, and total fall distance to service immediately, and should be tagged or
prevent striking a lower level; methods of marked as unusable, or destroyed.
use; and inspection and storage of the sys- (h) Tie-off considerations. (1) One of the
tem. Careless or improper use of the equip- most important aspects of personal fall pro-
ment can result in serious injury or death. tection systems is fully planning the system
Employers and employees should become fa- before it is put into use. Probably the most
miliar with the material in this Appendix, as overlooked component is planning for suit-
well as manufacturer’s recommendations, able anchorage points. Such planning should
before a system is used. Of uppermost impor- ideally be done before the structure or build-
tance is the reduction in strength caused by ing is constructed so that anchorage points
certain tie-offs (such as using knots, tying can be incorporated during construction for
around sharp edges, etc.) and maximum per- use later for window cleaning or other build-
mitted free fall distance. Also, to be stressed ing maintenance. If properly planned, these
are the importance of inspections prior to anchorage points may be used during con-
use, the limitations of the equipment, and struction, as well as afterwards.
unique conditions at the worksite which may (i) Properly planned anchorages should be
be important in determining the type of sys- used if they are available. In some cases, an-
tem to use. chorages must be installed immediately
(e) Instruction considerations. Employers prior to use. In such cases, a registered pro-
should obtain comprehensive instructions fessional engineer with experience in design-
from the supplier as to the system’s proper ing fall protection systems, or another quali-
use and application, including, where appli- fied person with appropriate education and
cable: experience should design an anchor point to
(1) The force measured during the sample be installed.
force test; (ii) In other cases, the Agency recognizes
(2) The maximum elongation measured for that there will be a need to devise an anchor
lanyards during the force test; point from existing structures. Examples of
(3) The deceleration distance measured for what might be appropriate anchor points are
deceleration devices during the force test; steel members or I-beams if an acceptable
(4) Caution statements on critical use limi- strap is available for the connection (do not
tations; use a lanyard with a snaphook clipped onto
(5) Application limits; itself); large eye-bolts made of an appro-
(6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off priate grade steel; guardrails or railings if
techniques, including the proper dee-ring or they have been designed for use as an anchor
other attachment point to use on the body point; or masonry or wood members only if
belt and harness for fall arrest; the attachment point is substantial and pre-
(7) Proper climbing techniques; cautions have been taken to assure that
(8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, bolts or other connectors will not pull
and storage; and through. A qualified person should be used to
(9) Specific lifelines which may be used. evaluate the suitable of these ‘‘make shift’’
This information should be provided to em- anchorages with a focus on proper strength.
ployees during training. (2) Employers and employees should at all
(f) Rescue considerations. As required by times be aware that the strength of a per-
§ 1926.502(d)(20), when personal fall arrest sys- sonal fall arrest system is based on its being
tems are used, the employer must assure attached to an anchoring system which does
that employees can be promptly rescued or not reduce the strength of the system (such
337
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
as a properly dimensioned eye-bolt/snap- greatly reduced if the force is applied at an
hook anchorage). Therefore, if a means of at- angle to this axis (in the direction of shear).
tachment is used that will reduce the Also, care should be exercised in selecting
strength of the system, that component the proper diameter of the eye to avoid acci-
should be replaced by a stronger one, but one dental disengagement of snap-hooks not de-
that will also maintain the appropriate max- signed to be compatible for the connection.
imum arrest force characteristics. (8) Due to the significant reduction in the
(3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or strength of the lifeline/lanyard (in some
lifeline (at any location) can reduce the life- cases, as much as a 70 percent reduction), the
line or lanyard strength by 50 percent or sliding hitch knot (prusik) should not be
more. Therefore, a stronger lanyard or life- used for lifeline/lanyard connections except
line should be used to compensate for the in emergency situations where no other
weakening effect of the knot, or the lanyard available system is practical. The ‘‘one-and-
length should be reduced (or the tie-off loca- one’’ sliding hitch knot should never be used
tion raised) to minimize free fall distance, or because it is unreliable in stopping a fall.
the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by The ‘‘two-and-two,’’ or ‘‘three-and-three’’
one which has an appropriately incorporated knot (preferable) may be used in emergency
connector to eliminate the need for a knot. situations; however, care should be taken to
(4) Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline limit free fall distance to a minimum be-
around an ‘‘H’’ or ‘‘I’’ beam or similar sup- cause of reduced lifeline/lanyard strength.
port can reduce its strength as much as 70 (i) Vertical lifeline considerations. As re-
percent due to the cutting action of the quired by the standard, each employee must
beam edges. Therefore, use should be made of have a separate lifeline [except employees
a webbing lanyard or wire core lifeline engaged in constructing elevator shafts who
around the beam; or the lanyard or lifeline are permitted to have two employees on one
should be protected from the edge; or free lifeline] when the lifeline is vertical. The
fall distance should be greatly minimized. reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to
(5) Tie-off where the line passes over or a single lifeline, if one employee falls, the
around rough or sharp surfaces reduces movement of the lifeline during the arrest of
strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be the fall may pull other employees’ lanyards,
avoided or an alternative tie-off rigging causing them to fall as well.
should be used. Such alternatives may in- (j) Snap-hook considerations. (1) Although
clude use of a snap-hook/dee ring connection, not required by this standard for all connec-
wire rope tie-off, an effective padding of the tions until January 1, 1998, locking
surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap snaphooks designed for connection to suit-
around or over the problem surface. able objects (of sufficient strength) are high-
(6) Horizontal lifelines may, depending on ly recommended in lieu of the nonlocking
their geometry and angle of sag, be subjected type. Locking snaphooks incorporate a posi-
to greater loads than the impact load im- tive locking mechanism in addition to the
posed by an attached component. When the spring loaded keeper, which will not allow
angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less than 30 the keeper to open under moderate pressure
degrees, the impact force imparted to the without someone first releasing the mecha-
lifeline by an attached lanyard is greatly nism. Such a feature, properly designed, ef-
amplified. For example, with a sag angle of fectively prevents roll-out from occurring.
15 degrees, the force amplification is about (2) As required by § 1926.502(d)(6), the fol-
2:1 and at 5 degrees sag, it is about 6:1. De- lowing connections must be avoided (unless
pending on the angle of sag, and the line’s properly designed locking snaphooks are
elasticity, the strength of the horizontal life- used) because they are conditions which can
line and the anchorages to which it is at- result in roll-out when a nonlocking
tached should be increased a number of snaphook is used:
times over that of the lanyard. Extreme care (i) Direct connection of a snaphook to a
should be taken in considering a horizontal horizontal lifeline.
lifeline for multiple tie-offs. The reason for (ii) Two (or more) snaphooks connected to
this is that in multiple tie-offs to a hori- one dee-ring.
zontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the (iii) Two snaphooks connected to each
movement of the falling employee and the other.
horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall (iv) A snaphook connected back on its inte-
may cause other employees to fall also. Hori- gral lanyard.
zontal lifeline and anchorage strength should (v) A snaphook connected to a webbing
be increased for each additional employee to loop or webbing lanyard.
be tied off. For these and other reasons, the (vi) Improper dimensions of the dee-ring,
design of systems using horizontal lifelines rebar, or other connection point in relation
must only be done by qualified persons. Test- to the snaphook dimensions which would
ing of installed lifelines and anchors prior to allow the snaphook keeper to be depressed
use is recommended. by a turning motion of the snaphook.
(7) The strength of an eye-bolt is rated (k) Free fall considerations. The employer
along the axis of the bolt and its strength is and employee should at all times be aware
338
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. D
that a system’s maximum arresting force is be considered. In addition, when a body belt
evaluated under normal use conditions es- is used, the employee’s body will go through
tablished by the manufacturer, and in no a horizontal position to a jack-knifed posi-
case using a free fall distance in excess of 6 tion during the arrest of all falls. Thus, ob-
feet (1.8 m). A few extra feet of free fall can structions which might interfere with this
significantly increase the arresting force on motion should be avoided or a severe injury
the employee, possibly to the point of caus- could occur.
ing injury. Because of this, the free fall dis- (n) Other considerations. Because of the de-
tance should be kept at a minimum, and, as sign of some personal fall arrest systems, ad-
required by the standard, in no case greater ditional considerations may be required for
than 6 feet (1.8 m). To help assure this, the proper tie-off. For example, heavy decelera-
tie-off attachment point to the lifeline or an- tion devices of the self-retracting type
chor should be located at or above the con- should be secured overhead in order to avoid
nection point of the fall arrest equipment to the weight of the device having to be sup-
belt or harness. (Since otherwise additional
ported by the employee. Also, if self- retract-
free fall distance is added to the length of
ing equipment is connected to a horizontal
the connecting means (i.e. lanyard)). Attach-
lifeline, the sag in the lifeline should be
ing to the working surface will often result
minimized to prevent the device from sliding
in a free fall greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). For
down the lifeline to a position which creates
instance, if a 6 foot (1.8 m) lanyard is used,
a swing hazard during fall arrest. In all
the total free fall distance will be the dis-
tance from the working level to the body cases, manufacturer’s instructions should be
belt (or harness) attachment point plus the 6 followed.
feet (1.8 m) of lanyard length. Another im-
portant consideration is that the arresting APPENDIX D TO SUBPART M OF PART
force which the fall system must withstand 1926—POSITIONING DEVICE SYSTEMS
also goes up with greater distances of free
fall, possibly exceeding the strength of the Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With
system. § 1926.502(e)
(l) Elongation and deceleration distance con- I. Testing Methods For Positioning Device
siderations. Other factors involved in a proper Systems. This appendix serves as a non-man-
tie-off are elongation and deceleration dis- datory guideline to assist employers comply
tance. During the arresting of a fall, a lan- with the requirements for positioning device
yard will experience a length of stretching or systems in § 1926.502(e). Paragraphs (b), (c),
elongation, whereas activation of a decelera- (d) and (e) of appendix C of subpart M relat-
tion device will result in a certain stopping ing to § 1926.502(d)—Personal Fall Arrest Sys-
distance. These distances should be available tems—set forth test procedures which may
with the lanyard or device’s instructions and
be used, along with the procedures listed
must be added to the free fall distance to ar-
below, to determine compliance with the re-
rive at the total fall distance before an em-
quirements for positioning device systems in
ployee is fully stopped. The additional stop-
§ 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) of subpart M.
ping distance may be very significant if the
lanyard or deceleration device is attached (a) General. (1) Single strap positioning de-
near or at the end of a long lifeline, which vices shall have one end attached to a fixed
may itself add considerable distance due to anchorage and the other end connected to a
its own elongation. As required by the stand- body belt or harness in the same manner as
ard, sufficient distance to allow for all of they would be used to protect employees.
these factors must also be maintained be- Double strap positioning devices, similar to
tween the employee and obstructions below, window cleaner’s belts, shall have one end of
to prevent an injury due to impact before the the strap attached to a fixed anchorage and
system fully arrests the fall. In addition, a the other end shall hang free. The body belt
minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should or harness shall be attached to the strap in
be allowed below the securing point of a rope the same manner as it would be used to pro-
grab type deceleration device, and the end tect employees. The two strap ends shall be
terminated to prevent the device from slid- adjusted to their maximum span.
ing off the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline (2) The fixed anchorage shall be rigid, and
should extend to the ground or the next shall not have a deflection greater than .04
working level below. These measures are inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds
suggested to prevent the worker from inad- (10 kN) is applied.
vertently moving past the end of the lifeline (3) During the testing of all systems, a test
and having the rope grab become disengaged weight of 250 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds
from the lifeline. (113 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) shall be used.
(m) Obstruction considerations. The location The weight shall be a rigid object with a
girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96
of the tie-off should also consider the hazard

of obstructions in the potential fall path of cm plus or minus 10 cm).
the employee. Tie-offs which minimize the (4) Each test shall consist of dropping the
possibilities of exaggerated swinging should specified weight one time without failure of
339
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
the system being tested. A new system shall SAMPLE FALL PROTECTION PLANS
be used for each test.
(5) The test weight for each test shall be Fall Protection Plan For Precast/Prestress
Concrete Structures
hoisted exactly 4 feet (1.2 m above its ‘‘at
rest’’ position), and shall be dropped so as to This Fall Protection Plan is specific for
permit a vertical free fall of 4 feet (1.2 m). the following project:
(6) The test is failed whenever any break- Location of Job lllllllllllllll
age or slippage occurs which permits the Erecting Company lllllllllllll
weight to fall free of the system. Date Plan Prepared or Modified llllll
(7) Following the test, the system need not Plan Prepared By llllllllllllll
be capable of further operation; however, all Plan Approved By llllllllllllll
such incapacities shall be readily apparent. Plan Supervised By lllllllllllll
The following Fall Protection Plan is a
II. Inspection Considerations. As required in
sample program prepared for the prevention
§ 1926.502 (e)(5), positioning device systems of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Pro-
must be regularly inspected. Any component tection Plan must be developed and evalu-
with any significant defect, such as cuts, ated on a site by site basis. It is rec-
tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching; ommended that erectors discuss the written
alterations or additions which might affect Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area
its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; Office prior to going on a jobsite.
contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives;
distorted hooks or faulty hook springs; I. STATEMENT OF COMPANY POLICY
tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; (Company Name) is dedicated to the pro-
loose or damaged mountings; non-func- tection of its employees from on-the-job in-
tioning parts; or wearing or internal deterio- juries. All employees of (Company Name)
ration in the ropes must be withdrawn from have the responsibility to work safely on the
service immediately, and should be tagged or job. The purpose of this plan is: (a) To sup-
marked as unusable, or destroyed. plement our standard safety policy by pro-
viding safety standards specifically designed
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART M OF PART to cover fall protection on this job and; (b) to
1926—SAMPLE FALL PROTECTION PLAN ensure that each employee is trained and
made aware of the safety provisions which
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With are to be implemented by this plan prior to
§ 1926.502(k) the start of erection.
This Fall Protection Plan addresses the
Employers engaged in leading edge work, use of other than conventional fall protec-
precast concrete construction work and resi- tion at a number of areas on the project, as
dential construction work who can dem- well as identifying specific activities that re-
onstrate that it is infeasible or creates a quire non-conventional means of fall protec-
greater hazard to use conventional fall pro- tion. These areas include:
tection systems must develop and follow a a. Connecting activity (point of erection).
fall protection plan. Below are sample fall b. Leading edge work.
protection plans developed for precast con- c. Unprotected sides or edge.
crete construction and residential work that d. Grouting.
could be tailored to be site specific for other This plan is designed to enable employers
precast concrete or residential jobsite. This and employees to recognize the fall hazards
sample plan can be modified to be used for on this job and to establish the procedures
that are to be followed in order to prevent
other work involving leading edge work. The
falls to lower levels or through holes and
sample plan outlines the elements that must
openings in walking/working surfaces. Each
be addressed in any fall protection plan. The employee will be trained in these procedures
reasons outlined in this sample fall protec- and strictly adhere to them except when
tion plan are for illustrative purposes only doing so would expose the employee to a
and are not necessarily a valid, acceptable greater hazard. If, in the employee’s opinion,
rationale (unless the conditions at the job this is the case, the employee is to notify the
site are the same as those covered by these foreman of the concern and the concern ad-
sample plans) for not using conventional fall dressed before proceeding.
protection systems for a particular precast Safety policy and procedure on any one
concrete or residential construction work- project cannot be administered, imple-
site. However, the sample plans provide guid- mented, monitored and enforced by any one
ance to employers on the type of information individual. The total objective of a safe, ac-
that is required to be discussed in fall pro- cident free work environment can only be ac-
tection plans. complished by a dedicated, concerted effort

by every individual involved with the project
from management down to the last em-
ployee. Each employee must understand
340
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E
their value to the company; the costs of acci- Only individuals with the appropriate experi-
dents, both monetary, physical, and emo- ence, skills, and training will be authorized
tional; the objective of the safety policy and as designated erectors. All employees that
procedures; the safety rules that apply to the will be working as designated erectors under
safety policy and procedures; and what their the safety monitoring system shall have
individual role is in administering, imple- been trained and instructed in the following
menting, monitoring, and compliance of areas:
their safety policy and procedures. This al- 1. Recognition of the fall hazards in the
lows for a more personal approach to compli- work area (at the leading edge and when
ance through planning, training, under- making initial connections—point of erec-
standing and cooperative effort, rather than tion).
by strict enforcement. If for any reason an 2. Avoidance of fall hazards using estab-
unsafe act persists, strict enforcement will lished work practices which have been made
be implemented. known to the employees.
It is the responsibility of (name of com- 3. Recognition of unsafe practices or work-
petent person) to implement this Fall Pro- ing conditions that could lead to a fall, such
tection Plan. (Name of Competent Person) is as windy conditions.
responsible for continual observational safe- 4. The function, use, and operation of safe-
ty checks of their work operations and to en- ty monitoring systems, guardrail systems,
force the safety policy and procedures. The body belt/harness systems, control zones and
foreman also is responsible to correct any other protection to be used.
unsafe acts or conditions immediately. It is 5. The correct procedure for erecting,
the responsibility of the employee to under- maintaining, disassembling and inspecting
stand and adhere to the procedures of this the system(s) to be used.
plan and to follow the instructions of the 6. Knowledge of construction sequence or
foreman. It is also the responsibility of the the erection plan.
employee to bring to management’s atten- A conference will take place prior to start-
tion any unsafe or hazardous conditions or ing work involving all members of the erec-
acts that may cause injury to either them- tion crew, crane crew and supervisors of any
selves or any other employees. Any changes other concerned contractors. This conference
to this Fall Protection Plan must be ap- will be conducted by the precast concrete
proved by (name of Qualified Person). erection supervisor in charge of the project.
During the pre-work conference, erection
II. FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS TO BE USED ON procedures and sequences pertinent to this
THIS PROJECT job will be thoroughly discussed and safety
Where conventional fall protection is in- practices to be used throughout the project
feasible or creates a greater hazard at the will be specified. Further, all personnel will
leading edge and during initial connecting be informed that the controlled access zones
activity, we plan to do this work using a are off limits to all personnel other than
safety monitoring system and expose only a those designated erectors specifically
minimum number of employees for the time trained to work in that area.
necessary to actually accomplish the job.
Safety Monitoring System
The maximum number of workers to be mon-
itored by one safety monitor is six (6). We A safety monitoring system means a fall
are designating the following trained em- protection system in which a competent per-
ployees as designated erectors and they are son is responsible for recognizing and warn-
permitted to enter the controlled access ing employees of fall hazards. The duties of
zones and work without the use of conven- the safety monitor are to:
tional fall protection. 1. Warn by voice when approaching the
Safety monitor: open edge in an unsafe manner.
Designated erector: 2. Warn by voice if there is a dangerous sit-
Designated erector: uation developing which cannot be seen by
another person involved with product place-
Designated erector:
ment, such as a member getting out of con-
Designated erector:
trol.
Designated erector:
3. Make the designated erectors aware they
Designated erector: are in a dangerous area.
The safety monitor shall be identified by 4. Be competent in recognizing fall haz-
wearing an orange hard hat. The designated ards.
erectors will be identified by one of the fol- 5. Warn employees when they appear to be
lowing methods: unaware of a fall hazard or are acting in an
1. They will wear a blue colored arm band, unsafe manner.
or
6. Be on the same walking/working surface

2. They will wear a blue colored hard hat, as the monitored employees and within vis-
or ual sighting distance of the monitored em-
3. They will wear a blue colored vest. ployees.
341
7. Be close enough to communicate orally ers will not be removed without the approval
with the employees. of the erection foreman.
8. Not allow other responsibilities to en- Precast concrete column erection through
cumber monitoring. If the safety monitor be- the existing deck requires that many holes
comes too encumbered with other respon- be provided through this deck. These are to
sibilities, the monitor shall (1) stop the erec- be covered and protected. Except for the
tion process; and (2) turn over other respon- opening being currently used to erect a col-
sibilities to a designated erector; or (3) turn umn, all opening protection is to be left un-
over the safety monitoring function to an- disturbed. The opening being uncovered to
other designated, competent person. The erect a column will become part of the point
safety monitoring system shall not be used of erection and will be addressed as part of
when the wind is strong enough to cause this Fall Protection Plan. This uncovering is
loads with large surface areas to swing out of to be done at the erection foreman’s direc-
radius, or result in loss of control of the tion and will only occur immediately prior
load, or when weather conditions cause the to ‘‘feeding’’ the column through the open-
walking-working surfaces to become icy or ing. Once the end of the column is through
slippery. the slab opening, there will no longer exist a
fall hazard at this location.
Control Zone System
III. IMPLEMENTATION OF FALL PROTECTION
A controlled access zone means an area PLAN
designated and clearly marked, in which
leading edge work may take place without The structure being erected is a multistory
the use of guardrail, safety net or personal total precast concrete building consisting of
fall arrest systems to protect the employees columns, beams, wall panels and hollow core
in the area. Control zone systems shall com- slabs and double tee floor and roof members.
ply with the following provisions: The following is a list of the products and
1. When used to control access to areas erection situations on this job:
where leading edge and other operations are
Columns
taking place the controlled access zone shall
be defined by a control line or by any other For columns 10 ft to 36 ft long, employees
means that restricts access. disconnecting crane hooks from columns will
When control lines are used, they shall be work from a ladder and wear a body belt/har-
erected not less than 6 feet (l.8 m) nor more ness with lanyard and be tied off when both
than 60 feet (18 m) or half the length of the hands are needed to disconnect. For tying
member being erected, whichever is less, off, a vertical lifeline will be connected to
from the leading edge. the lifting eye at the top of the column,
2. The control line shall extend along the prior to lifting, to be used with a manually
entire length of the unprotected or leading operated or mobile rope grab. For columns
edge and shall be approximately parallel to too high for the use of a ladder, 36 ft and
the unprotected or leading edge. higher, an added cable will be used to reduce
3. The control line shall be connected on the height of the disconnecting point so that
each side to a guardrail system or wall. a ladder can be used. This cable will be left
4. Control lines shall consist of ropes, in place until a point in erection that it can
wires, tapes, or equivalent materials, and be removed safely. In some cases, columns
supporting stanchions as follows: will be unhooked from the crane by using an
5. Each line shall be flagged or otherwise erection tube or shackle with a pull pin
clearly marked at not more than 6-foot (1.8 which is released from the ground after the
m) intervals with high- visibility material. column is stabilized.
6. Each line shall be rigged and supported The column will be adequately connected
in such a way that its lowest point (includ- and/or braced to safely support the weight of
ing sag) is not less than 39 inches (1 m) from a ladder with an employee on it.
the walking/working surface and its highest
point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from Inverted Tee Beams
the walking/working surface. Employees erecting inverted tee beams, at
7. Each line shall have a minimum break- a height of 6 to 40 ft, will erect the beam,
ing strength of 200 pounds (.88 kN). make initial connections, and final align-
ment from a ladder. If the employee needs to
Holes
reach over the side of the beam to bar or
All openings greater than 12 in. × 12 in. will make an adjustment to the alignment of the
have perimeter guarding or covering. All beam, they will mount the beam and be tied
predetermined holes will have the plywood off to the lifting device in the beam after en-
covers made in the precasters’ yard and suring the load has been stabilized on its
shipped with the member to the jobsite. bearing. To disconnect the crane from the
Prior to cutting holes on the job, proper pro- beam an employee will stand a ladder
tection for the hole must be provided to pro- against the beam. Because the use of ladders
tect the workers. Perimeter guarding or cov- is not practical at heights above 40 ft, beams
342
will be initially placed with the use of tag under the control of the safety monitor for
lines and their final alignment made by a fall protection and are directed to stay a
person on a manlift or similar employee po- minimum of six (6) ft from the edge. In the
sitioning systems. event a designated erector must move from
one end of a member, which has just been
Spandrel Beams placed at the leading edge, they must first
Spandrel beams at the exterior of the move away from the leading edge a min-
building will be aligned as closely as possible imum of six (6) ft and then progress to the
with the use of tag lines with the final place- other end while maintaining the minimum
ment of the spandrel beam made from a lad- distance of six (6) ft at all times.
der at the open end of the structure. A ladder Erection of double tees, where conditions
will be used to make the initial connections require bearing of one end into a closed
and a ladder will be used to disconnect the pocket and the other end on a beam ledge,
crane. The other end of the beam will be restricting the tee legs from going directly
placed by the designated erector from the into the pockets, require special consider-
double tee deck under the observation of the ations. The tee legs that are to bear in the
safety monitor. closed pocket must hang lower than those at
The beams will be adequately connected the beam bearing. The double tee will be
and/or braced to safely support the weight of ‘‘two-lined’’ in order to elevate one end high-
er than the other to allow for the low end to
a ladder with an employee on it.
be ducked into the closed pocket using the
Floor and Roof Members following procedure.
The double tee will be rigged with a stand-
During installation of the precast concrete ard four-way spreader off of the main load
floor and/or roof members, the work deck line. An additional choker will be attached
continuously increases in area as more and to the married point of the two-legged
more units are being erected and positioned. spreader at the end of the tee that is to be
Thus, the unprotected floor/roof perimeter is elevated. The double tee will be hoisted with
constantly modified with the leading edge the main load line and swung into a position
changing location as each member is in- as close as possible to the tee’s final bearing
stalled. The fall protection for workers at elevation. When the tee is in this position
the leading edge shall be assured by properly and stabilized, the whip line load block will
constructed and maintained control zone be lowered to just above the tee deck. At this
lines not more than 60 ft away from the lead- time, two erectors will walk out on the sus-
ing edge supplemented by a safety moni- pended tee deck at midspan of the tee mem-
toring system to ensure the safety of all des- ber and pull the load block to the end of the
ignated erectors working within the area de- tee to be elevated and attach the additional
fined by the control zone lines. choker to the load block. The possibility of
The hollow core slabs erected on the ma- entanglement with the crane lines and other
sonry portion of the building will be erected obstacles during this two lining process
and grouted using the safety monitoring sys- while raising and lowering the crane block
tem. Grout will be placed in the space be- on that second line could be hazardous to an
tween the end of the slab and face shell of encumbered employee. Therefore, the des-
the concrete masonry by dumping from a ignated erectors will not tie off during any
wheelbarrow. The grout in the keyways be- part of this process. While the designated
tween the slabs will be dumped from a wheel- erectors are on the double tee, the safety
barrow and then spread with long handled monitoring system will be used. After at-
tools, allowing the worker to stand erect fac- taching the choker, the two erectors then
ing toward the unprotected edge and back step back on the previously erected tee deck
from any work deck edge. and signal the crane operator to hoist the
Whenever possible, the designated erectors load with the whip line to the elevation that
will approach the incoming member at the will allow for enough clearance to let the low
leading edge only after it is below waist end tee legs slide into the pockets when the
height so that the member itself provides main load line is lowered. The erector, who
protection against falls. is handling the lowered end of the tee at the
Except for the situations described below, closed pocket bearing, will step out on the
when the arriving floor or roof member is suspended tee. An erection bar will then be
within 2 to 3 inches of its final position, the placed between the end of the tee leg and the
designated erectors can then proceed to their inside face of the pocketed spandrel member.
position of erection at each end of the mem- The tee is barred away from the pocketed
ber under the control of the safety monitor. member to reduce the friction and lateral
Crane hooks will be unhooked from double force against the pocketed member. As the
tee members by designated erectors under tee is being lowered, the other erector re-
the direction and supervision of the safety mains on the tee which was previously erect-
monitor. ed to handle the other end. At this point the
Designated erectors, while waiting for the tee is slowly lowered by the crane to a point
next floor or roof member, will be constantly where the tee legs can freely slide into the
343
pockets. The erector working the lowered IV. CONVENTIONAL FALL PROTECTION CONSID-
end of the tee must keep pressure on the bar ERED FOR THE POINT OF ERECTION OR LEAD-
between the tee and the face of the pocketed ING EDGE ERECTION OPERATIONS
spandrel member to very gradually let the
A. Personal Fall Arrest Systems
tee legs slide into the pocket to its proper
bearing dimension. The tee is then slowly In this particular erection sequence and
lowered into its final erected position. procedure, personal fall arrest systems re-
The designated erector should be allowed quiring body belt/harness systems, lifelines
onto the suspended double tee, otherwise and lanyards will not reduce possible hazards
there is no control over the horizontal move- to workers and will create offsetting hazards
ment of the double tee and this movement during their usage at the leading edge of pre-
cast/prestressed concrete construction.
could knock the spandrel off of its bearing or
Leading edge erection and initial connec-
the column out of plumb. The control nections are conducted by employees who are
essary to prevent hitting the spandrel can specifically trained to do this type of work
only be done safely from the top of the dou- and are trained to recognize the fall hazards.
ble tee being erected. The nature of such work normally exposes
Loadbearing Wall Panels: The erection of the employee to the fall hazard for a short
the loadbearing wall panels on the elevated period of time and installation of fall protec-
decks requires the use of a safety monitor tion systems for a short duration is not fea-
and a controlled access zone that is a min- sible because it exposes the installers of the
imum of 25 ft and a maximum of 1⁄2 the system to the same fall hazard, but for a
length of the wall panels away from the un- longer period of time.
protected edge, so that designated erectors 1. It is necessary that the employee be able
can move freely and unencumbered when re- to move freely without encumbrance in order
ceiving the panels. Bracing, if required for to guide the sections of precast concrete into
their final position without having lifelines
stability, will be installed by ladder. After
attached which will restrict the employee’s
the braces are secured, the crane will be dis-
ability to move about at the point of erec-
connected from the wall by using a ladder. tion.
The wall to wall connections will also be per- 2. A typical procedure requires 2 or more
formed from a ladder. workers to maneuver around each other as a
Non-Loadbearing Panels (Cladding): The concrete member is positioned to fit into the
locating of survey lines, panel layout and structure. If they are each attached to a life-
other installation prerequisites (prewelding, line, part of their attention must be diverted
etc.) for non-loadbearing panels (cladding) from their main task of positioning a mem-
will not commence until floor perimeter and ber weighing several tons to the task of
floor openings have been protected. In some avoiding entanglements of their lifelines or
areas, it is necessary because of panel con- avoiding tripping over lanyards. Therefore, if
figuration to remove the perimeter protec- these workers are attached to lanyards,
tion as the cladding is being installed. Re- more fall potential would result than from
moval of perimeter protection will be per- not using such a device.
In this specific erection sequence and pro-
formed on a bay to bay basis, just ahead of
cedure, retractable lifelines do not solve the
cladding erection to minimize temporarily
problem of two workers becoming tangled. In
unprotected floor edges. Those workers with- fact, such a tangle could prevent the lifeline
in 6 ft of the edge, receiving and positioning from retracting as the worker moved, thus
the cladding when the perimeter protection potentially exposing the worker to a fall
is removed shall be tied off. greater than 6 ft. Also, a worker crossing
over the lifeline of another worker can cre-
Detailing ate a hazard because the movement of one
Employees exposed to falls of six (6) feet or person can unbalance the other. In the event
more to lower levels, who are not actively of a fall by one person there is a likelihood
engaged in leading edge work or connecting that the other person will be caused to fall
as well. In addition, if contamination such as
activity, such as welding, bolting, cutting,
grout (during hollow core grouting) enters
bracing, guying, patching, painting or other
the retractable housing it can cause exces-
operations, and who are working less than
sive wear and damage to the device and
six (6) ft from an unprotected edge will be could clog the retracting mechanism as the
tied off at all times or guardrails will be in- lanyard is dragged across the deck. Obstruct-
stalled. Employees engaged in these activi- ing the cable orifice can defeat the device’s
ties but who are more than six (6) ft from an shock absorbing function, produce cable
unprotected edge as defined by the control slack and damage, and adversely affect cable
zone lines, do not require fall protection but
extraction and retraction.

a warning line or control lines must be erect- 3. Employees tied to a lifeline can be
ed to remind employees they are approach- trapped and crushed by moving structural
ing an area where fall protection is required. members if the employee becomes restrained
344
by the lanyard or retractable lifeline and ation of erectors’ position is done before the
cannot get out of the path of the moving members are cast. Any hole or other attach-
load. ment must be approved by the engineer who
The sudden movement of a precast con- designed the member. It is possible that
crete member being raised by a crane can be some design restrictions will not allow a
caused by a number of factors. When this member to be weakened by an additional
happens, a connector may immediately have hole; however, it is anticipated that such sit-
to move a considerable distance to avoid in- uations would be the exception, not the rule.
jury. If a tied off body belt/harness is being Attachment points, other than on the deck
used, the connector could be trapped. There- surface, will require removal and/or
fore, there is a greater risk of injury if the patching. In order to remove and/or patch
connector is tied to the structure for this these points, requires the employee to be ex-
specific erection sequence and procedure. posed to an additional fall hazard at an un-
When necessary to move away from a re- protected perimeter. The fact that attach-
tractable device, the worker cannot move at ment points could be available anywhere on
a rate greater than the device locking speed the structure does not eliminate the hazards
typically 3.5 to 4.5 ft/sec. When moving to- of using these points for tying off as dis-
ward the device it is necessary to move at a cussed above. A logical point for tying off on
rate which does not permit cable slack to double tees would be using the lifting loops,
build up. This slack may cause cable retrac- except that they must be cut off to eliminate
tion acceleration and cause a worker to lose a tripping hazard at an appropriate time.
their balance by applying a higher than nor- 5. Providing attachment at a point above
mal jerking force on the body when the cable the walking/working surface would also cre-
suddenly becomes taut after building up mo- ate fall exposures for employees installing
mentum. This slack can also cause damage their devices. Final positioning of a precast
to the internal spring-loaded drum, uneven concrete member requires it to be moved in
coiling of cable on the drum, and possible such a way that it must pass through the
cable damage. area that would be occupied by the lifeline
The factors causing sudden movements for and the lanyards attached to the point
this location include: above. Resulting entanglements of lifelines
and lanyards on a moving member could pull
(a) Cranes employees from the work surface. Also, the
structure is being created and, in most cases,
(1) Operator error. there is no structure above the members
(2) Site conditions (soft or unstable being placed.
ground). (a) Temporary structural supports, in-
(3) Mechanical failure. stalled to provide attaching points for life-
(4) Structural failure. lines limit the space which is essential for
(5) Rigging failure. orderly positioning, alignment and place-
(6) Crane signal/radio communication fail- ment of the precast concrete members. To
ure. keep the lanyards a reasonable and manage-
(b) Weather Conditions able length, lifeline supports would nec-
essarily need to be in proximity to the posi-
(1) Wind (strong wind/sudden gusting)—par- tioning process. A sudden shift of the precast
ticularly a problem with the large surface concrete member being positioned because of
areas of precast concrete members. wind pressure or crane movement could
(2) Snow/rain (visibility). make it strike the temporary supporting
(3) Fog (visibility). structure, moving it suddenly and causing
(4) Cold—causing slowed reactions or me- tied off employees to fall.
chanical problems. (b) The time in manhours which would be
(c) Structure/Product Conditions. expended in placing and maintaining tem-
(1) Lifting Eye failure. porary structural supports for lifeline at-
(2) Bearing failure or slippage. taching points could exceed the expended
(3) Structure shifting. manhours involved in placing the precast
(4) Bracing failure. concrete members. No protection could be
(5) Product failure. provided for the employees erecting the tem-
(d) Human Error. porary structural supports and these sup-
(1) Incorrect tag line procedure. ports would have to be moved for each suc-
(2) Tag line hang-up. cessive step in the construction process, thus
(3) Incorrect or misunderstood crane sig- greatly increasing the employee’s exposure
nals. to the fall hazard.
(4) Misjudged elevation of member. (c) The use of a cable strung horizontally
(5) Misjudged speed of member. between two columns to provide tie off lines
(6) Misjudged angle of member. for erecting or walking a beam for con-
4. Anchorages or special attachment points necting work is not feasible and creates a
could be cast into the precast concrete mem- greater hazard on this multi-story building
bers if sufficient preplanning and consider- for the following reasons:
345
(1) If a connector is to use such a line, it ty block/retractable lifeline anchored to the
must be installed between the two columns. walking-working surface; and the potential
To perform this installation requires an for swing hazards is increased.
erector to have more fall exposure time at- Manufacturers also require that workers
taching the cable to the columns than would not work at a level where the point of
be spent to make the beam to column con- snaphook attachment to the body harness is
nection itself. above the device because this will increase
(2) If such a line is to be installed so that the free fall distance and the deceleration
an erector can walk along a beam, it must be distance and will cause higher forces on the
overhead or below him. For example, if a body in the event of an accidental fall.
connector must walk along a 24 in. wide Manufacturers recommend an anchorage
beam, the presence of a line next to the con- for the retractable lifeline which is immov-
nector at waist level, attached directly to ably fixed in space and is independent of the
the columns, would prevent the connector user’s support systems. A moveable anchor-
from centering their weight over the beam age is one which can be moved around (such
and balancing themselves. Installing the line as equipment or wheeled vehicles) or which
above the connector might be possible on the can deflect substantially under shock load-
first level of a two-story column; however, ing (such as a horizontal cable or very flexi-
the column may extend only a few feet above ble beam). In the case of a very flexible an-
the floor level at the second level or be flush chorage, a shock load applied to the anchor-
with the floor level. Attaching the line to age during fall arrest can cause oscillation of
the side of the beam could be a solution; the flexible anchorage such that the retract-
however, it would require the connector to
able brake mechanism may undergo one or
attach the lanyard below foot level which
more cycles of locking/unlocking/locking
would most likely extend a fall farther than
(ratchet effect) until the anchorage deflec-
6 ft.
tion is dampened. Therefore, use of a move-
(3) When lines are strung over every beam,
able anchorage involves critical engineering
it becomes more and more difficult for the
and safety factors and should only be consid-
crane operator to lower a precast concrete
ered after fixed anchorage has been deter-
member into position without the member
mined to be not feasible.
becoming fouled. Should the member become
entangled, it could easily dislodge the line Horizontal cables used as an anchorage
from a column. If a worker is tied to it at present an additional hazard due to amplifi-
the time, a fall could be caused. cation of the horizontal component of max-
6. The ANSI A10.14–1991 American National imum arrest force (of a fall) transmitted to
Standard for Construction and Demolition the points where the horizontal cable is at-
Operations—Requirements for Safety Belts, tached to the structure. This amplification
Harnesses, Lanyards and Lifelines for Con- is due to the angle of sag of a horizontal
struction and Demolition Use, states that cable and is most severe for small angles of
the anchor point of a lanyard or deceleration sag. For a cable sag angle of 2 degrees the
device should, if possible, be located above horizontal force on the points of cable at-
the wearer’s belt or harness attachment. tachment can be amplified by a factor of 15.
ANSI A10.14 also states that a suitable an- It is also necessary to install the retract-
chorage point is one which is located as high able device vertically overhead to minimize
as possible to prevent contact with an ob- swing falls. If an object is in the worker’s
struction below should the worker fall. Most swing path (or that of the cable) hazardous
manufacturers also warn in the user’s hand- situations exist: (1) due to the swing, hori-
book that the safety block/retractable life- zontal speed of the user may be high enough
line must be positioned above the D-ring to cause injury when an obstacle in the
(above the work space of the intended user) swing fall path is struck by either the user
and OSHA recommends that fall arrest and or the cable; (2) the total vertical fall dis-
restraint equipment be used in accordance tance of the user may be much greater than
with the manufacturer’s instructions. if the user had fallen only vertically without
Attachment of a retractable device to a a swing fall path.
horizontal cable near floor level or using the With retractable lines, overconfidence may
inserts in the floor or roof members may re- cause the worker to engage in inappropriate
sult in increased free fall due to the dorsal behavior, such as approaching the perimeter
D-ring of the full-body harness riding higher of a floor or roof at a distance appreciably
than the attachment point of the snaphook greater than the shortest distance between
to the cable or insert (e.g., 6 foot tall worker the anchorage point and the leading edge.
with a dorsal D-ring at 5 feet above the floor Though the retractable lifeline may arrest a
or surface, reduces the working length to worker’s fall before he or she has fallen a few
only one foot, by placing the anchorage five feet, the lifeline may drag along the edge of
feet away from the fall hazard). In addition, the floor or beam and swing the worker like
impact loads may exceed maximum fall ar- a pendulum until the line has moved to a po-
rest forces (MAF) because the fall arrest D- sition where the distance between the an-
ring would be 4 to 5 feet higher than the safe- chorage point and floor edge is the shortest
346
distance between those two points. Accom- time necessary to position and secure the
panying this pendulum swing is a lowering of concrete member.
the worker, with the attendant danger that 4. Use of safety nets on exposed perimeter
he or she may violently impact the floor or wall openings and opensided floors, causes
some obstruction below. attachment points to be left in architectural
The risk of a cable breaking is increased if concrete which must be patched and filled
a lifeline is dragged sideways across the with matching material after the net sup-
rough surface or edge of a concrete member porting hardware is removed. In order to
at the same moment that the lifeline is patch these openings, additional numbers of
being subjected to a maximum impact load- employees must be suspended by swing
ing during a fall. The typical 3⁄16 in. cable in stages, boatswain chairs or other devices,
a retractable lifeline has a breaking strength thereby increasing the amount of fall expo-
of from 3000 to 3700 lbs. sure time to employees.
7. The competent person, who can take 5. Installed safety nets pose an additional
into account the specialized operations being hazard at the perimeter of the erected struc-
performed on this project, should determine ture where limited space is available in
when and where a designated erector cannot which members can be turned after being
use a personal fall arrest system. lifted from the ground by the crane. There
B. Safety Net Systems would be a high probability that the member
being lifted could become entangled in net
The nature of this particular precast con- hardware, cables, etc.
crete erection worksite precludes the safe 6. The use of safety nets where structural
use of safety nets where point of erection or wall panels are being erected would prevent
leading edge work must take place. movement of panels to point of installation.
1. To install safety nets in the interior To be effective, nets would necessarily have
high bay of the single story portion of the to provide protection across the area where
building poses rigging attachment problems. structural supporting wall panels would be
Structural members do not exist to which set and plumbed before roof units could be
supporting devices for nets can be attached placed.
in the area where protection is required. As 7. Use of a tower crane for the erection of
the erection operation advances, the loca- the high rise portion of the structure poses a
tion of point of erection or leading edge work particular hazard in that the crane operator
changes constantly as each member is at- cannot see or judge the proximity of the load
tached to the structure. Due to this constant in relation to the structure or nets. If the
change it is not feasible to set net sections signaler is looking through nets and sup-
and build separate structures to support the porting structural devices while giving in-
nets. structions to the crane operator, it is not
2. The nature of the erection process for possible to judge precise relationships be-
the precast concrete members is such that tween the load and the structure itself or to
an installed net would protect workers as nets and supporting structural devices. This
they position and secure only one structural could cause the load to become entangled in
member. After each member is stabilized the the net or hit the structure causing poten-
net would have to be moved to a new loca- tial damage.
tion (this could mean a move of 8 to 10 ft or
the possibility of a move to a different level C. Guardrail Systems
or area of the structure) to protect workers
placing the next piece in the construction se- On this particular worksite, guardrails,
quence. The result would be the installation barricades, ropes, cables or other perimeter
and dismantling of safety nets repeatedly guarding devices or methods on the erection
throughout the normal work day. As the floor will pose problems to safe erection pro-
time necessary to install a net, test, and re- cedures. Typically, a floor or roof is erected
move it is significantly greater than the by placing 4 to 10 ft wide structural members
time necessary to position and secure a pre- next to one another and welding or grouting
cast concrete member, the exposure time for them together. The perimeter of a floor and
the worker installing the safety net would be roof changes each time a new member is
far longer than for the workers whom the net placed into position. It is unreasonable and
is intended to protect. The time exposure re- virtually impossible to erect guardrails and
peats itself each time the nets and sup- toe boards at the ever changing leading edge
porting hardware must be moved laterally or of a floor or roof.
upward to provide protection at the point of 1. To position a member safely it is nec-
erection or leading edge. essary to remove all obstructions extending
3. Strict interpretation of § 1926.502(c) re- above the floor level near the point of erec-
quires that operations shall not be under- tion. Such a procedure allows workers to
taken until the net is in place and has been swing a new member across the erected sur-
tested. With the point of erection constantly face as necessary to position it properly
changing, the time necessary to install and without worrying about knocking material
test a safety net significantly exceeds the off of this surface.
347
Hollow core slab erection on the masonry area that could be erected more safely by the
wall requires installation of the perimeter use of these fall protection measures, the
protection where the masonry wall has to be foreman should be notified.
constructed. This means the guardrail is in- A. Scaffolds are not used because:
stalled then subsequently removed to con- 1. The leading edge of the building is con-
tinue the masonry construction. The erector stantly changing and the scaffolding would
will be exposed to a fall hazard for a longer have to be moved at very frequent intervals.
period of time while installing and removing Employees erecting and dismantling the
perimeter protection than while erecting the scaffolding would be exposed to fall hazards
slabs. for a greater length of time than they would
In hollow core work, as in other precast by merely erecting the precast concrete
concrete erection, others are not typically member.
on the work deck until the precast concrete 2. A scaffold tower could interfere with the
erection is complete. The deck is not com- safe swinging of a load by the crane.
plete until the leveling, aligning, and grout- 3. Power lines, terrain and site do not
ing of the joints is done. It is normal prac- allow for the safe use of scaffolding.
tice to keep others off the deck until at least B. Vehicle mounted platforms are not used
the next day after the installation is com- because:
plete to allow the grout to harden. 1. A vehicle mounted platform will not
2. There is no permanent boundary until reach areas on the deck that are erected over
all structural members have been placed in other levels.
the floor or roof. At the leading edge, work- 2. The leading edge of the building is usu-
ers are operating at the temporary edge of ally over a lower level of the building and
the structure as they work to position the this lower level will not support the weight
next member in the sequence. Compliance of a vehicle mounted platform.
with the standard would require a guardrail 3. A vehicle mounted platform could inter-
and toe board be installed along this edge. fere with the safe swinging of a load by the
However, the presence of such a device would crane, either by the crane swinging the load
prevent a new member from being swung over or into the equipment.
over the erected surface low enough to allow 4. Power lines and surrounding site work
workers to control it safely during the posi- do not allow for the safe use of a vehicle
tioning process. Further, these employees mounted platform.
would have to work through the guardrail to C. Crane suspended personnel platforms are
align the new member and connect it to the not used because:
structure. The guardrail would not protect 1. A second crane close enough to suspend
an employee who must lean through it to do any employee in the working and erecting
the necessary work, rather it would hinder area could interfere with the safe swinging of
the employee to such a degree that a greater a load by the crane hoisting the product to
hazard is created than if the guardrail were be erected.
absent. 2. Power lines and surrounding site work
3. Guardrail requirements pose a hazard at do not allow for the safe use of a second
the leading edge of installed floor or roof crane on the job.
sections by creating the possibility of em-
ployees being caught between guardrails and VI. ENFORCEMENT
suspended loads. The lack of a clear work
area in which to guide the suspended load Constant awareness of and respect for fall
into position for placement and welding of hazards, and compliance with all safety rules
members into the existing structure creates are considered conditions of employment.
still further hazards. The jobsite Superintendent, as well as indi-
4. Where erection processes require precast viduals in the Safety and Personnel Depart-
concrete stairways or openings to be in- ment, reserve the right to issue disciplinary
stalled as an integral part of the overall warnings to employees, up to and including
erection process, it must also be recognized termination, for failure to follow the guide-
that guardrails or handrails must not project lines of this program.
above the surface of the erection floor. Such
guardrails should be terminated at the level VII. ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS
of the erection floor to avoid placing haz- All accidents that result in injury to work-
ardous obstacles in the path of a member ers, regardless of their nature, shall be inves-
being positioned. tigated and reported. It is an integral part of
any safety program that documentation take
V. OTHER FALL PROTECTION MEASURES place as soon as possible so that the cause
CONSIDERED FOR THIS JOB
and means of prevention can be identified to
The following is a list and explanation of prevent a reoccurrence.
other fall protection measures available and In the event that an employee falls or
an explanation of limitations for use on this there is some other related, serious incident
particular jobsite. If during the course of occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to de-
erecting the building the employee sees an termine if additional practices, procedures,
348
or training need to be implemented to pre- In these cases, conventional fall protection
vent similar types of falls or incidents from systems may not be the safest choice for
occurring. builders. This plan is designed to enable em-
ployers and employees to recognize the fall
VIII. CHANGES TO PLAN hazards associated with this job and to es-
Any changes to the plan will be approved tablish the safest procedures that are to be
by (name of the qualified person). This plan followed in order to prevent falls to lower
shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the levels or through holes and openings in walk-
job progresses to determine if additional ing/working surfaces.
practices, procedures or training needs to be Each employee will be trained in these pro-
implemented by the competent person to im- cedures and will strictly adhere to them ex-
prove or provide additional fall protection. cept when doing so would expose the em-
Workers shall be notified and trained, if nec- ployee to a greater hazard. If, in the employ-
essary, in the new procedures. A copy of this ee’s opinion, this is the case, the employee is
plan and all approved changes shall be main- to notify the competent person of their con-
tained at the jobsite. cern and have the concern addressed before
proceeding.
Sample Fall Protection Plan for Residential It is the responsibility of (name of com-
Construction petent person) to implement this Fall Pro-
tection Plan. Continual observational safety
(INSERT COMPANY NAME) checks of work operations and the enforce-
This Fall Protection Plan Is Specific For ment of the safety policy and procedures
The Following Project: shall be regularly enforced. The crew super-
Location of Job lllllllllllllll visor or foreman (insert name) is responsible
Date Plan Prepared or Modified llllll for correcting any unsafe practices or condi-
Plan Prepared By llllllllllllll tions immediately.
Plan Approved By llllllllllllll It is the responsibility of the employer to
Plan Supervised By lllllllllllll ensure that all employees understand and
The following Fall Protection Plan is a adhere to the procedures of this plan and to
sample program prepared for the prevention follow the instructions of the crew super-
of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Pro- visor. It is also the responsibility of the em-
tection Plan must be developed and evalu- ployee to bring to management’s attention
ated on a site by site basis. It is rec- any unsafe or hazardous conditions or prac-
ommended that builders discuss the written tices that may cause injury to either them-
Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area selves or any other employees. Any changes
Office prior to going on a jobsite. to the Fall Protection Plan must be ap-
proved by (name of qualified person).
I. STATEMENT OF COMPANY POLICY
II. FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS TO BE USED ON
(Your company name here) is dedicated to THIS JOB
the protection of its employees from on-the-
job injuries. All employees of (Your company Installation of roof trusses/rafters, exterior
name here) have the responsibility to work wall erection, roof sheathing, floor sheathing
safely on the job. The purpose of the plan is and joist/truss activities will be conducted
to supplement our existing safety and health by employees who are specifically trained to
program and to ensure that every employee do this type of work and are trained to rec-
who works for (Your company name here) ognize the fall hazards. The nature of such
recognizes workplace fall hazards and takes work normally exposes the employee to the
the appropriate measures to address those fall hazard for a short period of time. This
hazards. Plan details how (Your company name here)
This Fall Protection Plan addresses the will minimize these hazards.
use of conventional fall protection at a num-
Controlled Access Zones
ber of areas on the project, as well as identi-
fies specific activities that require non-con- When using the Plan to implement the fall
ventional means of fall protection. During protection options available, workers must
the construction of residential buildings be protected through limited access to high
under 48 feet in height, it is sometimes infea- hazard locations. Before any non-conven-
sible or it creates a greater hazard to use tional fall protection systems are used as
conventional fall protection systems at spe- part of the work plan, a controlled access
cific areas or for specific tasks. The areas or zone (CAZ) shall be clearly defined by the
tasks may include, but are not limited to: competent person as an area where a recog-
a. Setting and bracing of roof trusses and nized hazard exists. The demarcation of the
rafters; CAZ shall be communicated by the com-
b. Installation of floor sheathing and petent person in a recognized manner, either

joists; through signs, wires, tapes, ropes or chains.
c. Roof sheathing operations; and (Your company name here) shall take the
d. Erecting exterior walls. following steps to ensure that the CAZ is
349
clearly marked or controlled by the com- exposed to fall hazards while working from
petent person: the top plate installing trusses/rafters:
• All access to the CAZ must be restricted • Only the following trained workers will
to authorized entrants; be allowed to work on the top plate during
• All workers who are permitted in the roof truss or rafter installation:
CAZ shall be listed in the appropriate sec- llllllllllllllllllllllll
tions of the Plan (or be visibly identifiable llllllllllllllllllllllll
by the competent person) prior to implemen- llllllllllllllllllllllll
tation;
• Workers shall have no other duties to
• The competent person shall ensure that
perform during truss/rafter erection proce-
all protective elements of the CAZ be imple-
dures;
mented prior to the beginning of work.
• All trusses/rafters will be adequately
Installation Procedures for Roof Truss and braced before any worker can use the truss/
Rafter Erection rafter as a support;
• Workers will remain on the top plate
During the erection and bracing of roof using the previously stabilized truss/rafter as
trusses/rafters, conventional fall protection a support while other trusses/rafters are
may present a greater hazard to workers. On being erected;
this job, safety nets, guardrails and personal • Workers will leave the area of the se-
fall arrest systems will not provide adequate cured trusses only when it is necessary to se-
fall protection because the nets will cause cure another truss/rafter;
the walls to collapse, while there are no suit- • The first two trusses/rafters will be set
able attachment or anchorage points for from ladders leaning on side walls at points
guardrails or personal fall arrest systems. where the walls can support the weight of
On this job, requiring workers to use a lad- the ladder; and
der for the entire installation process will • A worker will climb onto the interior top
cause a greater hazard because the worker plate via a ladder to secure the peaks of the
must stand on the ladder with his back or first two trusses/rafters being set.
side to the front of the ladder. While erecting
The workers responsible for detaching
the truss or rafter the worker will need both
trusses from cranes and/or securing trusses
hands to maneuver the truss and therefore
at the peaks traditionally are positioned at
cannot hold onto the ladder. In addition, lad-
the peak of the trusses/rafters. There are
ders cannot be adequately protected from
also situations where workers securing
movement while trusses are being maneu-
rafters to ridge beams will be positioned on
vered into place. Many workers may experi-
top of the ridge beam.
ence additional fatigue because of the in-
(Your company name here) shall take the
crease in overhead work with heavy mate-
following steps to protect workers who are
rials, which can also lead to a greater haz-
exposed to fall hazards while securing truss-
ard.
es/rafters at the peak of the trusses/ridge
Exterior scaffolds cannot be utilized on
beam:
this job because the ground, after recent
• Only the following trained workers will
backfilling, cannot support the scaffolding.
be allowed to work at the peak during roof
In most cases, the erection and dismantling
truss or rafter installation:
of the scaffold would expose workers to a
greater fall hazard than erection of the llllllllllllllllllllllll
trusses/rafters. llllllllllllllllllllllll
On all walls eight feet or less, workers will llllllllllllllllllllllll
install interior scaffolds along the interior • Once truss or rafter installation begins,
wall below the location where the trusses/ workers not involved in that activity shall
rafters will be erected. ‘‘Sawhorse’’ scaffolds not stand or walk below or adjacent to the
constructed of 46 inch sawhorses and 2 × 10 roof opening or exterior walls in any area
planks will often allow workers to be ele- where they could be struck by falling ob-
vated high enough to allow for the erection jects;
of trusses and rafters without working on • Workers shall have no other duties than
the top plate of the wall. securing/bracing the trusses/ridge beam;
In structures that have walls higher than • Workers positioned at the peaks or in the
eight feet and where the use of scaffolds and webs of trusses or on top of the ridge beam
ladders would create a greater hazard, safe shall work from a stable position, either by
working procedures will be utilized when sitting on a ‘‘ridge seat’’ or other equivalent
working on the top plate and will be mon- surface that provides additional stability or
itored by the crew supervisor. During all by positioning themselves in previously sta-
stages of truss/rafter erection the stability of bilized trusses/rafters and leaning into and
reaching through the trusses/rafters;
the trusses/rafters will be ensured at all

times. • Workers shall not remain on or in the
(Your company name here) shall take the peak/ridge any longer than necessary to safe-
following steps to protect workers who are ly complete the task.
350
Roof Sheathing Operations are installed. For roofs with pitches in ex-
cess of 9-in-12, slide guards will be installed
Workers typically install roof sheathing
at four-foot intervals.
after all trusses/rafters and any permanent
truss bracing is in place. Roof structures are • When wet weather (rain, snow, or sleet)
unstable until some sheathing is installed, so are present, roof sheathing operations shall
workers installing roof sheathing cannot be be suspended unless safe footing can be as-
protected from fall hazards by conventional sured for those workers installing sheathing.
fall protection systems until it is determined • When strong winds (above 40 miles per
that the roofing system can be used as an an- hour) are present, roof sheathing operations
chorage point. At that point, employees are to be suspended unless wind breakers are
shall be protected by a personal fall arrest erected.
system.
Trusses/rafters are subject to collapse if a Installation of Floor Joists and Sheathing
worker falls while attached to a single truss During the installation of floor sheathing/
with a belt/harness. Nets could also cause joists (leading edge construction), the fol-
collapse, and there is no place to attach lowing steps shall be taken to protect work-
guardrails. ers:
All workers will ensure that they have se- • Only the following trained workers will
cure footing before they attempt to walk on
be allowed to install floor joists or sheath-
the sheathing, including cleaning shoes/boots
ing:
of mud or other slip hazards.
To minimize the time workers must be ex- llllllllllllllllllllllll
posed to a fall hazard, materials will be llllllllllllllllllllllll
staged to allow for the quickest installation llllllllllllllllllllllll
of sheathing. • Materials for the operations shall be con-
(Your company name here) shall take the veniently staged to allow for easy access to
following steps to protect workers who are workers;
exposed to fall hazards while installing roof • The first floor joists or trusses will be
sheathing: rolled into position and secured either from
• Once roof sheathing installation begins, the ground, ladders or sawhorse scaffolds;
workers not involved in that activity shall • Each successive floor joist or truss will
not stand or walk below or adjacent to the be rolled into place and secured from a plat-
roof opening or exterior walls in any area form created from a sheet of plywood laid
where they could be struck by falling ob- over the previously secured floor joists or
jects; trusses;
• The competent person shall determine
• Except for the first row of sheathing
the limits of this area, which shall be clearly
which will be installed from ladders or the
communicated to workers prior to place-
ground, workers shall work from the estab-
ment of the first piece of roof sheathing;
lished deck; and
• The competent person may order work
on the roof to be suspended for brief periods • Any workers not assisting in the leading
as necessary to allow other workers to pass edge construction while leading edges still
through such areas when this would not cre- exist (e.g. cutting the decking for the install-
ate a greater hazard; ers) shall not be permitted within six feet of
• Only qualified workers shall install roof the leading edge under construction.
sheathing;
Erection of Exterior Walls
• The bottom row of roof sheathing may be
installed by workers standing in truss webs; During the construction and erection of ex-
• After the bottom row of roof sheathing is terior walls, employers shall take the fol-
installed, a slide guard extending the width lowing steps to protect workers:
of the roof shall be securely attached to the • Only the following trained workers will
roof. Slide guards are to be constructed of no be allowed to erect exterior walls:
less than nominal 4’’ height capable of lim-
llllllllllllllllllllllll
iting the uncontrolled slide of workers.
Workers should install the slide guard while llllllllllllllllllllllll
standing in truss webs and leaning over the llllllllllllllllllllllll
sheathing; • A painted line six feet from the perim-
• Additional rows of roof sheathing may be eter will be clearly marked prior to any wall
installed by workers positioned on pre- erection activities to warn of the approach-
viously installed rows of sheathing. A slide ing unprotected edge;
guard can be used to assist workers in re- • Materials for operations shall be conven-
taining their footing during successive iently staged to minimize fall hazards; and
• Workers constructing exterior walls
sheathing operations; and

• Additional slide guards shall be securely shall complete as much cutting of materials
attached to the roof at intervals not to ex- and other preparation as possible away from
ceed 13 feet as successive rows of sheathing the edge of the deck.
351
III. ENFORCEMENT operation for the pilot and ground per-
Constant awareness of and respect for fall sonnel.
hazards, and compliance with all safety rules (c) Slings and tag lines. Load shall be
are considered conditions of employment. properly slung. Tag lines shall be of a
The crew supervisor or foreman, as well as length that will not permit their being
individuals in the Safety and Personnel De- drawn up into rotors. Pressed sleeve,
partment, reserve the right to issue discipli-
swedged eyes, or equivalent means
nary warnings to employees, up to and in-
cluding termination, for failure to follow the shall be used for all freely suspended
guidelines of this program. loads to prevent hand splices from
spinning open or cable clamps from
IV. ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS loosening.
All accidents that result in injury to work- (d) Cargo hooks. All electrically oper-
ers, regardless of their nature, shall be inves- ated cargo hooks shall have the elec-
tigated and reported. It is an integral part of trical activating device so designed and
any safety program that documentation take installed as to prevent inadvertent op-
place as soon as possible so that the cause
eration. In addition, these cargo hooks
and means of prevention can be identified to
prevent a reoccurrence. shall be equipped with an emergency
In the event that an employee falls or mechanical control for releasing the
there is some other related, serious incident load. The hooks shall be tested prior to
occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to de- each day’s operation to determine that
termine if additional practices, procedures, the release functions properly, both
or training need to be implemented to pre- electrically and mechanically.
vent similar types of falls or incidents from
(e) Personal protective equipment. (1)
occurring.
Personal protective equipment for em-
V. CHANGES TO PLAN ployees receiving the load shall consist
Any changes to the plan will be approved of complete eye protection and hard
by (name of the qualified person). This plan hats secured by chinstraps.
shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the (2) Loose-fitting clothing likely to
job progresses to determine if additional flap in the downwash, and thus be
practices, procedures or training needs to be snagged on hoist line, shall not be
implemented by the competent person to im- worn.
prove or provide additional fall protection.
(f) Loose gear and objects. Every prac-
Workers shall be notified and trained, if nec-
essary, in the new procedures. A copy of this tical precaution shall be taken to pro-
plan and all approved changes shall be main- vide for the protection of the employ-
tained at the jobsite. ees from flying objects in the rotor
downwash. All loose gear within 100
[59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994]
feet of the place of lifting the load, de-
positing the load, and all other areas
Subpart N—Helicopters, Hoists, susceptible to rotor downwash shall be
Elevators, and Conveyors secured or removed.
(g) Housekeeping. Good housekeeping
AUTHORITY: Section 3704 of the Contract shall be maintained in all helicopter
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 loading and unloading areas.
U.S.C. 3701); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- (h) Operator responsibility. The heli-
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 copter operator shall be responsible for
Order Nos. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
size, weight, and manner in which
25059), or 9–83 (49 FR 35736), and 5–2007 (72 FR loads are connected to the helicopter.
31159). If, for any reason, the helicopter oper-
ator believes the lift cannot be made
§ 1926.550 [Reserved] safely, the lift shall not be made.
(i) Hooking and unhooking loads. When
§ 1926.551 Helicopters. employees are required to perform
(a) Helicopter regulations. Helicopter work under hovering craft, a safe
cranes shall be expected to comply means of access shall be provided for
with any applicable regulations of the employees to reach the hoist line hook
Federal Aviation Administration. and engage or disengage cargo slings.
(b) Briefing. Prior to each day’s oper- Employees shall not perform work
ation a briefing shall be conducted. under hovering craft except when nec-
This briefing shall set forth the plan of essary to hook or unhook loads.
352
(j) Static charge. Static charge on the structure, or allowed to foul on any
suspended load shall be dissipated with fixed structure.
a grounding device before ground per- (m) Visibility. When visibility is re-
sonnel touch the suspended load, or duced by dust or other conditions,
protective rubber gloves shall be worn ground personnel shall exercise special
by all ground personnel touching the caution to keep clear of main and sta-
suspended load. bilizing rotors. Precautions shall also
(k) Weight limitation. The weight of an be taken by the employer to eliminate
external load shall not exceed the man- as far as practical reduced visibility.
(n) Signal systems. Signal systems be-
ufacturer’s rating.
tween aircrew and ground personnel
(l) Ground lines. Hoist wires or other
shall be understood and checked in ad-
gear, except for pulling lines or con- vance of hoisting the load. This applies
ductors that are allowed to ‘‘pay out’’ to either radio or hand signal systems.
from a container or roll off a reel, shall Hand signals shall be as shown in Fig-
not be attached to any fixed ground ure N–1.
353
(o) Approach distance. No unauthor- (p) Approaching helicopter. Whenever

ized person shall be allowed to ap- approaching or leaving a helicopter
proach within 50 feet of the helicopter with blades rotating, all employees
when the rotor blades are turning. shall remain in full view of the pilot
354
EC30OC91.015</GPH>
and keep in a crouched position. Em- inches; and three thirty-seconds inch
ployees shall avoid the area from the for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches.
cockpit or cabin rearward unless au- (4) Hoisting ropes shall be installed
thorized by the helicopter operator to in accordance with the wire rope manu-
work there. facturers’ recommendations.
(q) Personnel. Sufficient ground per- (5) The installation of live booms on
sonnel shall be provided when required hoists is prohibited.
for safe helicopter loading and unload- (6) The use of endless belt-type
ing operations. manlifts on construction shall be pro-
(r) Communications. There shall be hibited.
constant reliable communication be- (b) Material hoists. (1)(i) Operating
tween the pilot, and a designated em- rules shall be established and posted at
ployee of the ground crew who acts as the operator’s station of the hoist.
a signalman during the period of load- Such rules shall include signal system
ing and unloading. This signalman and allowable line speed for various
shall be distinctly recognizable from loads. Rules and notices shall be posted
other ground personnel. on the car frame or crosshead in a con-
(s) Fires. Open fires shall not be per- spicuous location, including the state-
mitted in an area that could result in ment ‘‘No Riders Allowed.’’
such fires being spread by the rotor (ii) No person shall be allowed to ride
downwash. on material hoists except for the pur-
poses of inspection and maintenance.
§ 1926.552 Material hoists, personnel (2) All entrances of the hoistways
hoists, and elevators.
shall be protected by substantial gates
(a) General requirements. (1) The em- or bars which shall guard the full width
ployer shall comply with the manufac- of the landing entrance. All hoistway
turer’s specifications and limitations entrance bars and gates shall be paint-
applicable to the operation of all hoists ed with diagonal contrasting colors,
and elevators. Where manufacturer’s such as black and yellow stripes.
specifications are not available, the (i) Bars shall be not less than 2- by 4-
limitations assigned to the equipment inch wooden bars or the equivalent, lo-
shall be based on the determinations of cated 2 feet from the hoistway line.
a professional engineer competent in Bars shall be located not less than 36
the field. inches nor more than 42 inches above
(2) Rated load capacities, rec- the floor.
ommended operating speeds, and spe- (ii) Gates or bars protecting the en-
cial hazard warnings or instructions trances to hoistways shall be equipped
shall be posted on cars and platforms. with a latching device.
(3) Wire rope shall be removed from (3) Overhead protective covering of 2-
service when any of the following con- inch planking, 3⁄4-inch plywood, or
ditions exists: other solid material of equivalent
(i) In hoisting ropes, six randomly strength, shall be provided on the top
distributed broken wires in one rope of every material hoist cage or plat-
lay or three broken wires in one strand form.
in one rope lay; (4) The operator’s station of a hoist-
(ii) Abrasion, scrubbing, flattening, ing machine shall be provided with
or peening, causing loss of more than overhead protection equivalent to tight
one-third of the original diameter of planking not less than 2 inches thick.
the outside wires; The support for the overhead protec-
(iii) Evidence of any heat damage re- tion shall be of equal strength.
sulting from a torch or any damage (5) Hoist towers may be used with or
caused by contact with electrical without an enclosure on all sides. How-
wires; ever, whichever alternative is chosen,
(iv) Reduction from nominal diame- the following applicable conditions
ter of more than three sixty-fourths shall be met:
inch for diameters up to and including (i) When a hoist tower is enclosed, it
three-fourths inch; one-sixteenth inch shall be enclosed on all sides for its en-
for diameters seven-eights to 11⁄8 tire height with a screen enclosure of
355
⁄ -inch mesh, No. 18 U.S. gauge wire or

12 (6) A door or gate shall be provided at
equivalent, except for landing access. each entrance to the car which shall
(ii) When a hoist tower is not en- protect the full width and height of the
closed, the hoist platform or car shall car entrance opening.
be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides (7) Overhead protective covering of 2-
for the full height between the floor inch planking, 3⁄4-inch plywood or other
and the overhead protective covering solid material or equivalent strength
with 1⁄2-inch mesh of No. 14 U.S. gauge shall be provided on the top of every
wire or equivalent. The hoist platform personnel hoist.
enclosure shall include the required (8) Doors or gates shall be provided
gates for loading and unloading. A 6- with electric contacts which do not
foot high enclosure shall be provided allow movement of the hoist when door
on the unused sides of the hoist tower or gate is open.
at ground level. (9) Safeties shall be capable of stop-
ping and holding the car and rated load
(6) Car arresting devices shall be in-
when traveling at governor tripping
stalled to function in case of rope fail-
speed.
ure. (10) Cars shall be provided with a ca-
(7) All material hoist towers shall be pacity and data plate secured in a con-
designed by a licensed professional en- spicuous place on the car or crosshead.
gineer. (11) Internal combustion engines
(8) All material hoists shall conform shall not be permitted for direct drive.
to the requirements of ANSI A10.5–1969, (12) Normal and final terminal stop-
Safety Requirements for Material ping devices shall be provided.
Hoists. (13) An emergency stop switch shall
(c) Personnel hoists. (1) Hoist towers be provided in the car and marked
outside the structure shall be enclosed ‘‘Stop.’’
for the full height on the side or sides (14) Ropes: (i) The minimum number
used for entrance and exit to the struc- of hoisting ropes used shall be three for
ture. At the lowest landing, the enclo- traction hoists and two for drum-type
sure on the sides not used for exit or hoists.
entrance to the structure shall be en- (ii) The minimum diameter of hoist-
closed to a height of at least 10 feet. ing and counterweight wire ropes shall
Other sides of the tower adjacent to be 1⁄2-inch.
floors or scaffold platforms shall be en- (iii) Safety factors:
closed to a height of 10 feet above the
level of such floors or scaffolds. MINIMUM FACTORS OF SAFETY FOR SUSPENSION
(2) Towers inside of structures shall WIRE ROPES
be enclosed on all four sides through- Minimum
out the full height. Rope speed in feet per minute factor of
safety
(3) Towers shall be anchored to the
structure at intervals not exceeding 25 50 ......................................................................... 7.60
75 ......................................................................... 7.75
feet. In addition to tie-ins, a series of 100 ....................................................................... 7.95
guys shall be installed. Where tie-ins 125 ....................................................................... 8.10
are not practical the tower shall be an- 150 ....................................................................... 8.25
chored by means of guys made of wire 175 ....................................................................... 8.40
200 ....................................................................... 8.60
rope at least one-half inch in diameter, 225 ....................................................................... 8.75
securely fastened to anchorage to en- 250 ....................................................................... 8.90
sure stability. 300 ....................................................................... 9.20
350 ....................................................................... 9.50
(4) Hoistway doors or gates shall be 400 ....................................................................... 9.75
not less than 6 feet 6 inches high and 450 ....................................................................... 10.00
500 ....................................................................... 10.25
shall be provided with mechanical 550 ....................................................................... 10.45
locks which cannot be operated from 600 ....................................................................... 10.70
the landing side, and shall be acces-
sible only to persons on the car. (15) Following assembly and erection
(5) Cars shall be permanently en- of hoists, and before being put in serv-
closed on all sides and the top, except ice, an inspection and test of all func-
sides used for entrance and exit which tions and safety devices shall be made
have car gates or doors. under the supervision of a competent
356
person. A similar inspection and test is (c) Evidence of any heat damage from
required following major alteration of any cause;
an existing installation. All hoists (d) Reductions from nominal diame-
shall be inspected and tested at not ter of more than three-sixty-fourths
more than 3-month intervals. The em- inch for diameters to and including
ployer shall prepare a certification three-fourths inch, one-sixteenth inch
record which includes the date the infor diameters seven-eights inch to 11⁄8
spection and test of all functions and inches inclusive, three-thirty-seconds
safety devices was performed; the sig- inch for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches in-
nature of the person who performed the clusive;
inspection and test; and a serial num- (e) In standing ropes, more than two
ber, or other identifier, for the hoist broken wires in one lay in sections be-
that was inspected and tested. The yond end connections or more than one
most recent certification record shall broken wire at an end connection.
be maintained on file. (d) Permanent elevators under the
(16) All personnel hoists used by em- care and custody of the employer and
ployees shall be constructed of mate- used by employees for work covered by
rials and components which meet the this Act shall comply with the require-
specifications for materials, construc- ments of American National Standards
tion, safety devices, assembly, and Institute A17.1–1965 with addenda
structural integrity as stated in the A17.1a–1967, A17.1b–1968, A17.1c–1969,
American National Standard A10.4– A17.1d–1970, and inspected in accord-
1963, Safety Requirements for Work- ance with A17.2–1960 with addenda
men’s Hoists. The requirements of this A17.2a–1965, A17.2b–1967.
paragraph (c)(16) do not apply to canti-
lever type personnel hoists. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(17) (i) Personnel hoists used in
1987]
bridge tower construction shall be ap-
proved by a registered professional en- § 1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists.
gineer and erected under the super-
vision of a qualified engineer com- (a) General requirements. (1) Exposed
petent in this field. moving parts such as gears, projecting
(ii) When a hoist tower is not en- screws, setscrews, chain, cables, chain
closed, the hoist platform or car shall sprockets, and reciprocating or rotat-
be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides ing parts, which constitute a hazard,
for the full height between the floor shall be guarded.
and the overhead protective covering (2) All controls used during the nor-
with 3⁄4-inch mesh of No. 14 U.S. gauge mal operation cycle shall be located
wire or equivalent. The hoist platform within easy reach of the operator’s sta-
enclosure shall include the required tion.
gates for loading and unloading. (3) Electric motor operated hoists
(iii) These hoists shall be inspected shall be provided with:
and maintained on a weekly basis. (i) A device to disconnect all motors
Whenever the hoisting equipment is ex- from the line upon power failure and
posed to winds exceeding 35 miles per not permit any motor to be restarted
hour it shall be inspected and put in until the controller handle is brought
operable condition before reuse. to the ‘‘off’’ position;
(iv) Wire rope shall be taken out of (ii) Where applicable, an overspeed
service when any of the following con- preventive device;
ditions exist: (iii) A means whereby remotely oper-
(a) In running ropes, six randomly ated hoists stop when any control is in-
distributed broken wires in one lay or effective.
three broken wires in one strand in one (4) All base-mounted drum hoists in
lay; use shall meet the applicable require-
(b) Wear of one-third the original di- ments for design, construction, instal-
ameter of outside individual wires. lation, testing, inspection, mainte-
Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any nance, and operations, as prescribed by

other damage resulting in distortion of the manufacturer.
the rope structure; (b) Specific requirements. [Reserved]
357
(c) This section does not apply to (5) Where a conveyor passes over
base-mounted drum hoists used in con- work areas, aisles, or thoroughfares,
junction with derricks. Base-mounted suitable guards shall be provided to
drum hoists used in conjunction with protect employees required to work
derricks must conform to § 1926.1436(e). below the conveyors.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, as amended at 75 FR (6) All crossovers, aisles, and passage-
48134, Aug. 9, 2010] ways shall be conspicuously marked by
suitable signs, as required by subpart G
§ 1926.554 Overhead hoists. of this part.
(a) General requirements. (1) The safe (7) Conveyors shall be locked out or
working load of the overhead hoist, as otherwise rendered inoperable, and
determined by the manufacturer, shall tagged out with a ‘‘Do Not Operate’’
be indicated on the hoist, and this safe tag during repairs and when operation
working load shall not be exceeded. is hazardous to employees performing
(2) The supporting structure to which maintenance work.
the hoist is attached shall have a safe (8) All conveyors in use shall meet
working load equal to that of the hoist. the applicable requirements for design,
(3) The support shall be arranged so construction, inspection, testing,
as to provide for free movement of the maintenance, and operation, as pre-
hoist and shall not restrict the hoist scribed in the ANSI B20.1–1957, Safety
from lining itself up with the load. Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and
(4) The hoist shall be installed only Related Equipment.
in locations that will permit the oper-
ator to stand clear of the load at all Subpart O—Motor Vehicles,
times. Mechanized Equipment, and
(5) Air hoists shall be connected to an
air supply of sufficient capacity and
Marine Operations
pressure to safely operate the hoist. All
air hoses supplying air shall be posi- AUTHORITY: Section 107, Construction
tively connected to prevent their be- Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Con-
struction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4,
coming disconnected during use. 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of
(6) All overhead hoists in use shall 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of La-
meet the applicable requirements for bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
construction, design, installation, test- 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
ing, inspection, maintenance, and oper- 96 (62 FR 111), or 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), as ap-
ation, as prescribed by the manufac- plicable. Section 1926.602 also issued under 29
turer. CFR part 1911.
(b) Specific requirements. [Reserved]
§ 1926.600 Equipment.
§ 1926.555 Conveyors. (a) General requirements. (1) All equip-
(a) General requirements. (1) Means for ment left unattended at night, adja-
stopping the motor or engine shall be cent to a highway in normal use, or ad-
provided at the operator’s station. Con- jacent to construction areas where
veyor systems shall be equipped with work is in progress, shall have appro-
an audible warning signal to be sound- priate lights or reflectors, or barri-
ed immediately before starting up the cades equipped with appropriate lights
conveyor. or reflectors, to identify the location of
(2) If the operator’s station is at a re- the equipment.
mote point, similar provisions for stop- (2) A safety tire rack, cage, or equiv-
ping the motor or engine shall be pro- alent protection shall be provided and
vided at the motor or engine location. used when inflating, mounting, or dis-
(3) Emergency stop switches shall be mounting tires installed on split rims,
arranged so that the conveyor cannot or rims equipped with locking rings or
be started again until the actuating similar devices.
stop switch has been reset to running (3)(i) Heavy machinery, equipment,
or ‘‘on’’ position. or parts thereof, which are suspended
(4) Screw conveyors shall be guarded or held aloft by use of slings, hoists, or
to prevent employee contact with turn- jacks shall be substantially blocked or
ing flights. cribbed to prevent falling or shifting
358
before employees are permitted to (v) Cage-type boom guards, insu-

work under or between them. Bulldozer lating links, or proximity warning de-
and scraper blades, end-loader buckets, vices may be used on cranes, but the
dump bodies, and similar equipment, use of such devices shall not alter the
shall be either fully lowered or blocked requirements of any other regulation
when being repaired or when not in of this part even if such device is re-
use. All controls shall be in a neutral quired by law or regulation;
position, with the motors stopped and (vi) Any overhead wire shall be con-
brakes set, unless work being per- sidered to be an energized line unless
formed requires otherwise. and until the person owning such line
(ii) Whenever the equipment is or the electrical utility authorities in-
parked, the parking brake shall be set. dicate that it is not an energized line
Equipment parked on inclines shall and it has been visibly grounded;
have the wheels chocked and the park- (vii) Prior to work near transmitter
ing brake set. towers where an electrical charge can
be induced in the equipment or mate-
(4) The use, care and charging of all
rials being handled, the transmitter
batteries shall conform to the require-
shall be de-energized or tests shall be
ments of subpart K of this part.
made to determine if electrical charge
(5) All cab glass shall be safety glass, is induced on the crane. The following
or equivalent, that introduces no visi- precautions shall be taken when nec-
ble distortion affecting the safe oper- essary to dissipate induced voltages:
ation of any machine covered by this (A) The equipment shall be provided
subpart. with an electrical ground directly to
(6) All equipment covered by this the upper rotating structure sup-
subpart shall comply with the fol- porting the boom; and
lowing requirements when working or (B) Ground jumper cables shall be at-
being moved in the vicinity of power tached to materials being handled by
lines or energized transmitters, except boom equipment when electrical
where electrical distribution and trans- charge is induced while working near
mission lines have been deenergized energized transmitters. Crews shall be
and visibly grounded at point of work provided with nonconductive poles hav-
or where insulating barriers, not a part ing large alligator clips or other simi-
of or an attachment to the equipment lar protection to attach the ground
or machinery, have been erected to pre- cable to the load.
vent physical contact with the lines: (C) Combustible and flammable ma-
(i) For lines rated 50 kV or below, terials shall be removed from the im-
minimum clearance between the lines mediate area prior to operations.
and any part of the crane or load shall (7) Rolling railroad cars. Derail and/or
be 10 feet; bumper blocks shall be provided on
(ii) For lines rated over 50 kV, min- spur railroad tracks where a rolling car
imum clearance between the lines and could contact other cars being worked,
any part of the crane or load shall be 10 enter a building, work or traffic area.
feet plus 0.4 inch for each 1 kV over 50 (b) Specific requirements. [Reserved]
kV, or twice the length of the line in- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
sulator, but never less than 10 feet; 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993;
(iii) In transit with no load and boom 75 FR 48134, Aug. 9, 2010]
lowered, the equipment clearance shall
be a minimum of 4 feet for voltages § 1926.601 Motor vehicles.
less than 50 kV, and 10 feet for voltages (a) Coverage. Motor vehicles as cov-
over 50 kV, up to and including 345 kV, ered by this part are those vehicles
and 16 feet for voltages up to and in- that operate within an off-highway job-
cluding 750 kV; site, not open to public traffic. The re-
(iv) A person shall be designated to quirements of this section do not apply
observe clearance of the equipment and to equipment for which rules are pre-
give timely warning for all operations scribed in § 1926.602.
where it is difficult for the operator to (b) General requirements. (1) All vehi-
maintain the desired clearance by vis- cles shall have a service brake system,
ual means; an emergency brake system, and a
359
parking brake system. These systems while maintenance or inspection work

may use common components, and is being done.
shall be maintained in operable condi- (11) Operating levers controlling
tion. hoisting or dumping devices on haulage
(2)(i) Whenever visibility conditions bodies shall be equipped with a latch or
warrant additional light, all vehicles, other device which will prevent acci-
or combinations of vehicles, in use dental starting or tripping of the mech-
shall be equipped with at least two anism.
headlights and two taillights in oper- (12) Trip handles for tailgates of
able condition. dump trucks shall be so arranged that,
(ii) All vehicles, or combination of in dumping, the operator will be in the
vehicles, shall have brake lights in op- clear.
erable condition regardless of light (13) (i) All rubber-tired motor vehicle
conditions. equipment manufactured on or after
(3) All vehicles shall be equipped with May 1, 1972, shall be equipped with
an adequate audible warning device at fenders. All rubber-tired motor vehicle
the operator’s station and in an oper- equipment manufactured before May 1,
able condition. 1972, shall be equipped with fenders not
(4) No employer shall use any motor later than May 1, 1973.
vehicle equipment having an ob-
(ii) Mud flaps may be used in lieu of
structed view to the rear unless:
fenders whenever motor vehicle equip-
(i) The vehicle has a reverse signal
ment is not designed for fenders.
alarm audible above the surrounding
noise level or: (14) All vehicles in use shall be
(ii) The vehicle is backed up only checked at the beginning of each shift
when an observer signals that it is safe to assure that the following parts,
to do so. equipment, and accessories are in safe
(5) All vehicles with cabs shall be operating condition and free of appar-
equipped with windshields and powered ent damage that could cause failure
wipers. Cracked and broken glass shall while in use: service brakes, including
be replaced. Vehicles operating in trailer brake connections; parking sys-
areas or under conditions that cause tem (hand brake); emergency stopping
fogging or frosting of the windshields system (brakes); tires; horn; steering
shall be equipped with operable mechanism; coupling devices; seat
defogging or defrosting devices. belts; operating controls; and safety
(6) All haulage vehicles, whose pay devices. All defects shall be corrected
load is loaded by means of cranes, before the vehicle is placed in service.
power shovels, loaders, or similar These requirements also apply to
equipment, shall have a cab shield and/ equipment such as lights, reflectors,
or canopy adequate to protect the oper- windshield wipers, defrosters, fire ex-
ator from shifting or falling materials. tinguishers, etc., where such equip-
(7) Tools and material shall be se- ment is necessary.
cured to prevent movement when
transported in the same compartment § 1926.602 Material handling equip-
ment.
with employees.
(8) Vehicles used to transport em- (a) Earthmoving equipment; General. (1)
ployees shall have seats firmly secured These rules apply to the following
and adequate for the number of em- types of earthmoving equipment:
ployees to be carried. scrapers, loaders, crawler or wheel
(9) Seat belts and anchorages meet- tractors, bulldozers, off-highway
ing the requirements of 49 CFR part 571 trucks, graders, agricultural and indus-
(Department of Transportation, Fed- trial tractors, and similar equipment.
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards) The promulgation of specific rules for
shall be installed in all motor vehicles. compactors and rubber-tired ‘‘skid-
(10) Trucks with dump bodies shall be steer’’ equipment is reserved pending
equipped with positive means of sup- consideration of standards currently
port, permanently attached, and capa- being developed.

ble of being locked in position to pre- (2) Seat belts. (i) Seat belts shall be
vent accidental lowering of the body provided on all equipment covered by
360
this section and shall meet the require- present no hazard to personnel from
ments of the Society of Automotive flying materials.
Engineers, J386–1969, Seat Belts for (6) Rollover protective structures
Construction Equipment. Seat belts for (ROPS). See subpart W of this part for
agricultural and light industrial trac- requirements for rollover protective
tors shall meet the seat belt require- structures and overhead protection.
ments of Society of Automotive Engi- (7) Rollover protective structures for off-
neers J333a–1970, Operator Protection highway trucks. The promulgation of
for Agricultural and Light Industrial standards for rollover protective struc-
Tractors. tures for off-highway trucks is reserved
(ii) Seat belts need not be provided pending further study and develop-
for equipment which is designed only ment.
for standup operation. (8) Specific effective dates—brakes and
(iii) Seat belts need not be provided fenders. (i) Equipment mentioned in
for equipment which does not have paragraph (a)(4) and (5) of this section,
roll-over protective structure (ROPS) and manufactured after January 1,
or adequate canopy protection. 1972, which is used by any employer
(3) Access roadways and grades. (i) No after that date, shall comply with the
employer shall move or cause to be applicable rules prescribed therein con-
moved construction equipment or vehi- cerning brakes and fenders. Equipment
cles upon any access roadway or grade mentioned in paragraphs (a) (4) and (5)
unless the access roadway or grade is of this section, and manufactured be-
constructed and maintained to accom- fore January 1, 1972, which is used by
modate safely the movement of the any employer after that date, shall
equipment and vehicles involved. meet the applicable rules prescribed
(ii) Every emergency access ramp herein not later than June 30, 1973. It
and berm used by an employer shall be should be noted that, as permitted
constructed to restrain and control under § 1926.2, employers may request
runaway vehicles. variations from the applicable brakes
(4) Brakes. All earthmoving equip- and fender standards required by this
ment mentioned in this § 1926.602(a) subpart. Employers wishing to seek
shall have a service braking system ca- variations from the applicable brakes
pable of stopping and holding the and fenders rules may submit any re-
equipment fully loaded, as specified in quests for variations after the publica-
Society of Automotive Engineers SAE- tion of this document in the FEDERAL
J237, Loader Dozer–1971, J236, Graders–
REGISTER. Any statements intending to
1971, and J319b, Scrapers–1971. Brake
meet the requirements of § 1926.2(b)(4),
systems for self-propelled rubber-tired
should specify how the variation would
off-highway equipment manufactured
protect the safety of the employees by
after January 1, 1972 shall meet the ap-
providing for any compensating re-
plicable minimum performance criteria
strictions on the operation of equip-
set forth in the following Society of
ment.
Automotive Engineers Recommended
(ii) Notwithstanding the provisions of
Practices:
Self-Propelled Scrapers ................ SAE J319b–1971.
paragraphs (a)(5) and (a)(8)(i) of this
Self-Propelled Graders ................. SAE J236–1971. section, the requirement that fenders
Trucks and Wagons ...................... SAE J166–1971. be installed on pneumatic-tired
Front End Loaders and Dozers .... SAE J237–1971. earthmoving haulage equipment, is
(5) Fenders. Pneumatic-tired earth- suspended pending reconsideration of
moving haulage equipment (trucks, the requirement.
scrapers, tractors, and trailing units) (9) Audible alarms. (i) All
whose maximum speed exceeds 15 miles bidirectional machines, such as rollers,
per hour, shall be equipped with fend- compacters, front-end loaders, bull-
ers on all wheels to meet the require- dozers, and similar equipment, shall be
ments of Society of Automotive Engi- equipped with a horn, distinguishable
neers SAE J321a–1970, Fenders for from the surrounding noise level,
Pneumatic-Tired Earthmoving Haulage which shall be operated as needed when
Equipment. An employer may, of the machine is moving in either direc-

course, at any time seek to show under tion. The horn shall be maintained in
§ 1926.2, that the uncovered wheels an operative condition.
361
(ii) No employer shall permit accordingly. In no case shall the origi-

earthmoving or compacting equipment nal safety factor of the equipment be
which has an obstructed view to the reduced.
rear to be used in reverse gear unless (iii) If a load is lifted by two or more
the equipment has in operation a re- trucks working in unison, the propor-
verse signal alarm distinguishable tion of the total load carried by any
from the surrounding noise level or an one truck shall not exceed its capacity.
employee signals that it is safe to do (iv) Steering or spinner knobs shall
so. not be attached to the steering wheel
(10) Scissor points. Scissor points on
unless the steering mechanism is of a
all front-end loaders, which constitute
type that prevents road reactions from
a hazard to the operator during normal
operation, shall be guarded. causing the steering handwheel to spin.
(b) Excavating and other equipment. (1) The steering knob shall be mounted
Tractors covered in paragraph (a) of within the periphery of the wheel.
this section shall have seat belts as re- (v) All high lift rider industrial
quired for the operators when seated in trucks shall be equipped with overhead
the normal seating arrangement for guards which meet the configuration
tractor operation, even though back- and structural requirements as defined
hoes, breakers, or other similar attach- in paragraph 421 of American National
ments are used on these machines for Standards Institute B56.1–1969, Safety
excavating or other work. Standards for Powered Industrial
(2) For the purposes of this subpart Trucks.
and of subpart N of this part, the no- (vi) All industrial trucks in use shall
menclatures and descriptions for meas- meet the applicable requirements of
urement of dimensions of machinery design, construction, stability, inspec-
and attachments shall be as described tion, testing, maintenance, and oper-
in Society of Automotive Engineers ation, as defined in American National
1970 Handbook, pages 1088 through 1103. Standards Institute B56.1–1969, Safety
(3) The safety requirements, ratios, Standards for Powered Industrial
or limitations applicable to machines
Trucks.
or attachment usage covered in Power
Crane and Shovel Associations Stand- (vii) Unauthorized personnel shall
ards No. 1 and No. 2 of 1968, and No. 3 not be permitted to ride on powered in-
of 1969, shall be complied with, and dustrial trucks. A safe place to ride
shall apply to cranes, machines, and shall be provided where riding of
attachments under this part. trucks is authorized.
(c) Lifting and hauling equipment (viii) Whenever a truck is equipped
(other than equipment covered under sub- with vertical only, or vertical and hori-
part N of this part). (1) Industrial trucks zontal controls elevatable with the lift-
shall meet the requirements of ing carriage or forks for lifting per-
§ 1926.600 and the following: sonnel, the following additional pre-
(i) Lift trucks, stackers, etc., shall cautions shall be taken for the protec-
have the rated capacity clearly posted tion of personnel being elevated.
on the vehicle so as to be clearly visi- (A) Use of a safety platform firmly
ble to the operator. When auxiliary re- secured to the lifting carriage and/or
movable counterweights are provided forks.
by the manufacturer, corresponding al- (B) Means shall be provided whereby
ternate rated capacities also shall be personnel on the platform can shut off
clearly shown on the vehicle. These power to the truck.
ratings shall not be exceeded.
(C) Such protection from falling ob-
(ii) No modifications or additions
which affect the capacity or safe oper- jects as indicated necessary by the op-
ation of the equipment shall be made erating conditions shall be provided.
without the manufacturer’s written ap- (d) Powered industrial truck operator
proval. If such modifications or training.
changes are made, the capacity, oper- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
ation, and maintenance instruction struction work under this paragraph are
plates, tags, or decals shall be changed
362
identical to those set forth at § 1910.178(l) of vided with the same protection as re-
this chapter. quired for steam lines.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (10) Safety chains, or equivalent
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993; means, shall be provided for each hose
63 FR 66274, Dec. 1, 1998] connection to prevent the line from
thrashing around in case the coupling
§ 1926.603 Pile driving equipment. becomes disconnected.
(a) General requirements. (1) Boilers (11) Steam line controls shall consist
and piping systems which are a part of, of two shutoff valves, one of which
or used with, pile driving equipment shall be a quick-acting lever type with-
shall meet the applicable requirements in easy reach of the hammer operator.
of the American Society of Mechanical (12) Guys, outriggers, thrustouts, or
Engineers, Power Boilers (section I). counterbalances shall be provided as
(2) All pressure vessels which are a necessary to maintain stability of pile
part of, or used with, pile driving driver rigs.
equipment shall meet the applicable (b) Pile driving from barges and floats.
requirements of the American Society Barges or floats supporting pile driving
of Mechanical Engineers, Pressure Ves- operations shall meet the applicable
sels (section VIII). requirements of § 1926.605.
(c) Pile driving equipment. (1) Engi-
(3) Overhead protection, which will
neers and winchmen shall accept sig-
not obscure the vision of the operator
nals only from the designated signal-
and which meets the requirements of
men.
subpart N of this part, shall be pro-
(2) All employees shall be kept clear
vided. Protection shall be the equiva-
when piling is being hoisted into the
lent of 2-inch planking or other solid
leads.
material of equivalent strength.
(3) When piles are being driven in an
(4) Stop blocks shall be provided for excavated pit, the walls of the pit shall
the leads to prevent the hammer from be sloped to the angle of repose or
being raised against the head block. sheet-piled and braced.
(5) A blocking device, capable of safe- (4) When steel tube piles are being
ly supporting the weight of the ham- ‘‘blown out’’, employees shall be kept
mer, shall be provided for placement in well beyond the range of falling mate-
the leads under the hammer at all rials.
times while employees are working (5) When it is necessary to cut off the
under the hammer. tops of driven piles, pile driving oper-
(6) Guards shall be provided across ations shall be suspended except where
the top of the head block to prevent the cutting operations are located at
the cable from jumping out of the least twice the length of the longest
sheaves. pile from the driver.
(7) When the leads must be inclined (6) When driving jacked piles, all ac-
in the driving of batter piles, provi- cess pits shall be provided with ladders
sions shall be made to stabilize the and bulkheaded curbs to prevent mate-
leads. rial from falling into the pit.
(8) Fixed leads shall be provided with
ladder, and adequate rings, or similar § 1926.604 Site clearing.
attachment points, so that the loft (a) General requirements. (1) Employ-
worker may engage his safety belt lan- ees engaged in site clearing shall be
yard to the leads. If the leads are pro- protected from hazards of irritant and
vided with loft platforms(s), such plat- toxic plants and suitably instructed in
form(s) shall be protected by standard the first aid treatment available.
guardrails. (2) All equipment used in site clear-
(9) Steam hose leading to a steam ing operations shall be equipped with
hammer or jet pipe shall be securely rollover guards meeting the require-
attached to the hammer with an ade- ments of this subpart. In addition,
quate length of at least 1⁄4-inch diame- rider-operated equipment shall be
ter chain or cable to prevent whipping equipped with an overhead and rear
in the event the joint at the hammer is canopy guard meeting the following re-
broken. Air hammer hoses shall be pro- quirements:
363
(i) The overhead covering on this so located that the load will not pass
canopy structure shall be of not less over employees.
than 1⁄8-inch steel plate or 1⁄4-inch (c) Working surfaces of barges. (1) Em-
woven wire mesh with openings no ployees shall not be permitted to walk
greater than 1 inch, or equivalent. along the sides of covered lighters or
(ii) The opening in the rear of the barges with coamings more than 5 feet
canopy structure shall be covered with high, unless there is a 3-foot clear
not less than 1⁄4-inch woven wire mesh walkway, or a grab rail, or a taut
with openings no greater than 1 inch. handline is provided.
(b) Specific requirements. [Reserved] (2) Decks and other working surfaces
§ 1926.605 Marine operations and shall be maintained in a safe condition.
equipment. (3) Employees shall not be permitted
to pass fore and aft, over, or around
(a) Material handling operations. (1)
deckloads, unless there is a safe pas-
Operations fitting the definition of
sage.
‘‘material handling’’ shall be per-
formed in conformance with applicable (4) Employees shall not be permitted
requirements of part 1918, ‘‘Safety and to walk over deckloads from rail to
Health Regulations for Longshoring’’ coaming unless there is a safe passage.
of this chapter. The term ‘‘longshoring If it is necessary to stand at the out-
operations’’ means the loading, unload- board or inboard edge of the deckload
ing, moving, or handling of construc- where less than 24 inches of bulwark,
tion materials, equipment and supplies, rail, coaming, or other protection ex-
etc. into, in, on, or out of any vessel ists, all employees shall be provided
from a fixed structure or shore-to-ves- with a suitable means of protection
sel, vessel-to-shore or fixed structure against falling from the deckload.
or vessel-to-vessel. (d) First-aid and lifesaving equipment.
(b) Access to barges. (1) Ramps for ac- (1) Provisions for rendering first aid
cess of vehicles to or between barges and medical assistance shall be in ac-
shall be of adequate strength, provided cordance with subpart D of this part.
with side boards, well maintained, and (2) The employer shall ensure that
properly secured. there is in the vicinity of each barge in
(2) Unless employees can step safely use at least one U.S. Coast Guard-ap-
to or from the wharf, float, barge, or proved 30-inch lifering with not less
river towboat, either a ramp, meeting than 90 feet of line attached, and at
the requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of least one portable or permanent ladder
this section, or a safe walkway, shall which will reach the top of the apron
be provided. to the surface of the water. If the above
(3) Jacob’s ladders shall be of the equipment is not available at the pier,
double rung or flat tread type. They the employer shall furnish it during
shall be well maintained and properly the time that he is working the barge.
secured. (3) Employees walking or working on
(4) A Jacob’s ladder shall either hang the unguarded decks of barges shall be
without slack from its lashings or be protected with U.S. Coast Guard-ap-
pulled up entirely. proved work vests or buoyant vests.
(5) When the upper end of the means (e) Commercial diving operations. Com-
of access rests on or is flush with the mercial diving operations shall be sub-
top of the bulwark, substantial steps ject to subpart T of part 1910,
properly secured and equipped with at §§ 1910.401–1910.441, of this chapter.
least one substantial hand rail approxi-
mately 33 inches in height, shall be [39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 42
provided between the top of the bul- FR 37674, July 22, 1977]
wark and the deck.
(6) Obstructions shall not be laid on § 1926.606 Definitions applicable to
this subpart.
or across the gangway.
(7) The means of access shall be ade- (a) Apron—The area along the water-
quately illuminated for its full length. front edge of the pier or wharf.
(8) Unless the structure makes it im- (b) Bulwark—The side of a ship above
possible, the means of access shall be the upper deck.
364
(c) Coaming—The raised frame, as system, and its sudden movement into
around a hatchway in the deck, to keep the excavation, either by falling or
out water. sliding, in sufficient quantity so that it
(d) Jacob’s ladder—A marine ladder of could entrap, bury, or otherwise injure
rope or chain with wooden or metal and immobilize a person.
rungs. Competent person means one who is
(e) Rail, for the purpose of § 1926.605, capable of identifying existing and pre-
means a light structure serving as a dictable hazards in the surroundings,
guard at the outer edge of a ship’s or working conditions which are unsan-
deck. itary, hazardous, or dangerous to em-
ployees, and who has authorization to
Subpart P—Excavations take prompt corrective measures to
eliminate them.
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Worker Cross braces mean the horizontal
Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construc- members of a shoring system installed
tion Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, perpendicular to the sides of the exca-
Occupational Safety and Hea1th Act of 1970 vation, the ends of which bear against
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s either uprights or wales.
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
Excavation means any man-made cut,
25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable, and
29 CFR part 1911. cavity, trench, or depression in an
earth surface, formed by earth re-
SOURCE: 54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, unless moval.
otherwise noted.
Faces or sides means the vertical or
§ 1926.650 Scope, application, and defi- inclined earth surfaces formed as a re-
nitions applicable to this subpart. sult of excavation work.
(a) Scope and application. This sub- Failure means the breakage, displace-
part applies to all open excavations ment, or permanent deformation of a
made in the earth’s surface. Exca- structural member or connection so as
vations are defined to include trenches. to reduce its structural integrity and
(b) Definitions applicable to this sub- its supportive capabilities.
part. Hazardous atmosphere means an at-
Accepted engineering practices means mosphere which by reason of being ex-
those requirements which are compat- plosive, flammable, poisonous, corro-
ible with standards of practice required sive, oxidizing, irritating, oxygen defi-
by a registered professional engineer. cient, toxic, or otherwise harmful, may
Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring means a cause death, illness, or injury.
pre-engineered shoring system com- Kickout means the accidental release
prised of aluminum hydraulic cylinders or failure of a cross brace.
(crossbraces) used in conjunction with Protective system means a method of
vertical rails (uprights) or horizontal protecting employees from cave-ins,
rails (walers). Such system is designed, from material that could fall or roll
specifically to support the sidewalls of from an excavation face or into an ex-
an excavation and prevent cave-ins. cavation, or from the collapse of adja-
Bell-bottom pier hole means a type of cent structures. Protective systems in-
shaft or footing excavation, the bottom clude support systems, sloping and
of which is made larger than the cross benching systems, shield systems, and
section above to form a belled shape. other systems that provide the nec-
Benching (Benching system) means a essary protection.
method of protecting employees from Ramp means an inclined walking or
cave-ins by excavating the sides of an working surface that is used to gain ac-
excavation to form one or a series of cess to one point from another, and is
horizontal levels or steps, usually with constructed from earth or from struc-
vertical or near-vertical surfaces be- tural materials such as steel or wood.
tween levels. Registered Professional Engineer means
Cave-in means the separation of a a person who is registered as a profes-
mass of soil or rock material from the sional engineer in the state where the
side of an excavation, or the loss of soil work is to be performed. However, a
from under a trench shield or support professional engineer, registered in any
365
state is deemed to be a ‘‘registered pro- cent structure, underground installa-

fessional engineer’’ within the meaning tion, or the sides of an excavation.
of this standard when approving de- Tabulated data means tables and
signs for ‘‘manufactured protective charts approved by a registered profes-
systems’’ or ‘‘tabulated data’’ to be sional engineer and used to design and
used in interstate commerce. construct a protective system.
Sheeting means the members of a Trench (Trench excavation) means a
shoring system that retain the earth in narrow excavation (in relation to its
position and in turn are supported by length) made below the surface of the
other members of the shoring system. ground. In general, the depth is greater
Shield (Shield system) means a struc- than the width, but the width of a
ture that is able to withstand the
trench (measured at the bottom) is not
forces imposed on it by a cave-in and
greater than 15 feet (4.6 m). If forms or
thereby protect employees within the
other structures are installed or con-
structure. Shields can be permanent
structed in an excavation so as to re-
structures or can be designed to be
portable and moved along as work produce the dimension measured from the
gresses. Additionally, shields can be ei- forms or structure to the side of the ex-
ther premanufactured or job-built in cavation to 15 feet (4.6 m) or less
accordance with § 1926.652 (c)(3) or (measured at the bottom of the exca-
(c)(4). Shields used in trenches are usu- vation), the excavation is also consid-
ally referred to as ‘‘trench boxes’’ or ered to be a trench.
‘‘trench shields.’’ Trench box. See ‘‘Shield.’’
Shoring (Shoring system) means a Trench shield. See ‘‘Shield.’’
structure such as a metal hydraulic, Uprights means the vertical members
mechanical or timber shoring system of a trench shoring system placed in
that supports the sides of an exca- contact with the earth and usually po-
vation and which is designed to prevent sitioned so that individual members do
cave-ins. not contact each other. Uprights
Sides. See ‘‘Faces.’’ placed so that individual members are
Sloping (Sloping system) means a closely spaced, in contact with or
method of protecting employees from interconnected to each other, are often
cave-ins by excavating to form sides of called ‘‘sheeting.’’
an excavation that are inclined away Wales means horizontal members of a
from the excavation so as to prevent shoring system placed parallel to the
cave-ins. The angle of incline required excavation face whose sides bear
to prevent a cave-in varies with dif- against the vertical members of the
ferences in such factors as the soil shoring system or earth.
type, environmental conditions of ex-
posure, and application of surcharge § 1926.651 Specific excavation require-
loads. ments.
Stable rock means natural solid min-
(a) Surface encumbrances. All surface
eral material that can be excavated
encumbrances that are located so as to
with vertical sides and will remain in-
create a hazard to employees shall be
tact while exposed. Unstable rock is
considered to be stable when the rock removed or supported, as necessary, to
material on the side or sides of the ex- safeguard employees.
cavation is secured against caving-in (b) Underground installations. (1) The
or movement by rock bolts or by an- estimated location of utility installa-
other protective system that has been tions, such as sewer, telephone, fuel,
designed by a registered professional electric, water lines, or any other un-
engineer. derground installations that reason-
Structural ramp means a ramp built of ably may be expected to be encoun-
steel or wood, usually used for vehicle tered during excavation work, shall be
access. Ramps made of soil or rock are determined prior to opening an exca-
not considered structural ramps. vation.
Support system means a structure (2) Utility companies or owners shall

such as underpinning, bracing, or shor- be contacted within established or cus-
ing, which provides support to an adja- tomary local response times, advised of
366
the proposed work, and asked to estab- (d) Exposure to vehicular traffic. Em-
lish the location of the utility under- ployees exposed to public vehicular
ground installations prior to the start traffic shall be provided with, and shall
of actual excavation. When utility wear, warning vests or other suitable
companies or owners cannot respond to garments marked with or made of
a request to locate underground utility reflectorized or high-visibility mate-
installations within 24 hours (unless a rial.
longer period is required by state or (e) Exposure to falling loads. No em-
local law), or cannot establish the ployee shall be permitted underneath
exact location of these installations, loads handled by lifting or digging
the employer may proceed, provided equipment. Employees shall be re-
the employer does so with caution, and quired to stand away from any vehicle
provided detection equipment or other being loaded or unloaded to avoid being
acceptable means to locate utility in- struck by any spillage or falling mate-
stallations are used. rials. Operators may remain in the
(3) When excavation operations ap- cabs of vehicles being loaded or un-
proach the estimated location of under- loaded when the vehicles are equipped,
ground installations, the exact loca- in accordance with § 1926.601(b)(6), to
tion of the installations shall be deter- provide adequate protection for the op-
mined by safe and acceptable means. erator during loading and unloading
(4) While the excavation is open, un- operations.
derground installations shall be pro- (f) Warning system for mobile equip-
tected, supported or removed as nec-
ment. When mobile equipment is oper-
essary to safeguard employees.
ated adjacent to an excavation, or
(c) Access and egress—(1) Structural when such equipment is required to ap-
ramps. (i) Structural ramps that are proach the edge of an excavation, and
used solely by employees as a means of
the operator does not have a clear and
access or egress from excavations shall
direct view of the edge of the exca-
be designed by a competent person.
vation, a warning system shall be uti-
Structural ramps used for access or
lized such as barricades, hand or me-
egress of equipment shall be designed
by a competent person qualified in chanical signals, or stop logs. If pos-
structural design, and shall be con- sible, the grade should be away from
structed in accordance with the design. the excavation.
(ii) Ramps and runways constructed (g) Hazardous atmospheres—(1) Testing
of two or more structural members and controls. In addition to the require-
shall have the structural members con- ments set forth in subparts D and E of
nected together to prevent displace- this part (29 CFR 1926.50–1926.107) to
ment. prevent exposure to harmful levels of
(iii) Structural members used for atmospheric contaminants and to as-
ramps and runways shall be of uniform sure acceptable atmospheric condi-
thickness. tions, the following requirements shall
(iv) Cleats or other appropriate apply:
means used to connect runway struc- (i) Where oxygen deficiency
tural members shall be attached to the (atmospheres containing less than 19.5
bottom of the runway or shall be at- percent oxygen) or a hazardous atmos-
tached in a manner to prevent tripping. phere exists or could reasonably be ex-
(v) Structural ramps used in lieu of pected to exist, such as in excavations
steps shall be provided with cleats or in landfill areas or excavations in areas
other surface treatments on the top where hazardous substances are stored
surface to prevent slipping. nearby, the atmospheres in the exca-
(2) Means of egress from trench excavation shall be tested before employees
vations. A stairway, ladder, ramp or enter excavations greater than 4 feet
other safe means of egress shall be lo- (1.22 m) in depth.
cated in trench excavations that are 4 (ii) Adequate precautions shall be
feet (1.22 m) or more in depth so as to taken to prevent employee exposure to

require no more than 25 feet (7.62 m) of atmospheres containing less than 19.5
lateral travel for employees. percent oxygen and other hazardous
367
atmospheres. These precautions in- (3) If excavation work interrupts the

clude providing proper respiratory pro- natural drainage of surface water (such
tection or ventilation in accordance as streams), diversion ditches, dikes, or
with subparts D and E of this part re- other suitable means shall be used to
spectively. prevent surface water from entering
(iii) Adequate precaution shall be the excavation and to provide adequate
taken such as providing ventilation, to drainage of the area adjacent to the ex-
prevent employee exposure to an at- cavation. Excavations subject to runoff
mosphere containing a concentration from heavy rains will require an in-
of a flammable gas in excess of 20 per- spection by a competent person and
cent of the lower flammable limit of compliance with paragraphs (h)(1) and
the gas. (h)(2) of this section.
(iv) When controls are used that are (i) Stability of adjacent structures. (1)
intended to reduce the level of atmos- Where the stability of adjoining build-
pheric contaminants to acceptable lev- ings, walls, or other structures is en-
els, testing shall be conducted as often dangered by excavation operations,
as necessary to ensure that the atmos- support systems such as shoring, brac-
phere remains safe. ing, or underpinning shall be provided
(2) Emergency rescue equipment. (i) to ensure the stability of such struc-
Emergency rescue equipment, such as tures for the protection of employees.
breathing apparatus, a safety harness (2) Excavation below the level of the
and line, or a basket stretcher, shall be base or footing of any foundation or re-
readily available where hazardous at- taining wall that could be reasonably
mospheric conditions exist or may rea- expected to pose a hazard to employees
sonably be expected to develop during shall not be permitted except when:
work in an excavation. This equipment (i) A support system, such as under-
shall be attended when in use. pinning, is provided to ensure the safe-
(ii) Employees entering bell-bottom ty of employees and the stability of the
pier holes, or other similar deep and structure; or
confined footing excavations, shall (ii) The excavation is in stable rock;
wear a harness with a life-line securely or
attached to it. The lifeline shall be sep- (iii) A registered professional engi-
arate from any line used to handle ma- neer has approved the determination
terials, and shall be individually at- that the structure is sufficently re-
tended at all times while the employee moved from the excavation so as to be
wearing the lifeline is in the exca- unaffected by the excavation activity;
vation. or
(h) Protection from hazards associated (iv) A registered professional engi-
with water accumulation. (1) Employees neer has approved the determination
shall not work in excavations in which that such excavation work will not
there is accumulated water, or in exca- pose a hazard to employees.
vations in which water is accumu- (3) Sidewalks, pavements, and appur-
lating, unless adequate precautions tenant structure shall not be under-
have been taken to protect employees mined unless a support system or an-
against the hazards posed by water ac- other method of protection is provided
cumulation. The precautions necessary to protect employees from the possible
to protect employees adequately vary collapse of such structures.
with each situation, but could include (j) Protection of employees from loose
special support or shield systems to rock or soil. (1) Adequate protection
protect from cave-ins, water removal shall be provided to protect employees
to control the level of accumulating from loose rock or soil that could pose
water, or use of a safety harness and a hazard by falling or rolling from an
lifeline. excavation face. Such protection shall
(2) If water is controlled or prevented consist of scaling to remove loose ma-
from accumulating by the use of water terial; installation of protective barri-
removal equipment, the water removal cades at intervals as necessary on the
equipment and operations shall be face to stop and contain falling mate-
monitored by a competent person to rial; or other means that provide equiv-
ensure proper operation. alent protection.
368
(2) Employees shall be protected from (ii) Excavations are less than 5 feet
excavated or other materials or equip- (1.52m) in depth and examination of the
ment that could pose a hazard by fall- ground by a competent person provides
ing or rolling into excavations. Protec- no indication of a potential cave-in.
tion shall be provided by placing and (2) Protective systems shall have the
keeping such materials or equipment capacity to resist without failure all
at least 2 feet (.61 m) from the edge of loads that are intended or could rea-
excavations, or by the use of retaining sonably be expected to be applied or
devices that are sufficient to prevent transmitted to the system.
materials or equipment from falling or (b) Design of sloping and benching sys-
rolling into excavations, or by a com- tems. The slopes and configurations of
bination of both if necessary. sloping and benching systems shall be
(k) Inspections. (1) Daily inspections selected and constructed by the em-
of excavations, the adjacent areas, and ployer or his designee and shall be in
protective systems shall be made by a accordance with the requirements of
competent person for evidence of a sit- paragraph (b)(1); or, in the alternative,
uation that could result in possible paragraph (b)(2); or, in the alternative,
cave-ins, indications of failure of pro- paragraph (b)(3), or, in the alternative,
tective systems, hazardous paragraph (b)(4), as follows:
atmospheres, or other hazardous condi- (1) Option (1)—Allowable configurations
tions. An inspection shall be conducted and slopes. (i) Excavations shall be
by the competent person prior to the sloped at an angle not steeper than one
start of work and as needed throughout and one-half horizontal to one vertical
the shift. Inspections shall also be (34 degrees measured from the hori-
made after every rainstorm or other zontal), unless the employer uses one
hazard increasing occurrence. These in- of the other options listed below.
spections are only required when em- (ii) Slopes specified in paragraph
ployee exposure can be reasonably an- (b)(1)(i) of this section, shall be exca-
ticipated. vated to form configurations that are
(2) Where the competent person finds in accordance with the slopes shown
evidence of a situation that could re- for Type C soil in appendix B to this
sult in a possible cave-in, indications subpart.
of failure of protective systems, haz- (2) Option (2)—Determination of slopes
ardous atmospheres, or other haz- and configurations using Appendices A
ardous conditions, exposed employees and B. Maximum allowable slopes, and
shall be removed from the hazardous allowable configurations for sloping
area until the necessary precautions and benching systems, shall be deter-
have been taken to ensure their safety. mined in accordance with the condi-
(l) Walkways shall be provided where tions and requirements set forth in ap-
employees or equipment are required pendices A and B to this subpart.
or permitted to cross over excavations. (3) Option (3)—Designs using other tab-
Guardrails which comply with ulated data. (i) Designs of sloping or
§ 1926.502(b) shall be provided where benching systems shall be selected
walkways are 6 feet (1.8 m) or more from and be in accordance with tab-
above lower levels. ulated data, such as tables and charts.
(ii) The tabulated data shall be in
[54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, as amended at 59 written form and shall include all of
FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] the following:
(A) Identification of the parameters
§ 1926.652 Requirements for protective that affect the selection of a sloping or
systems.
benching system drawn from such data;
(a) Protection of employees in exca- (B) Identification of the limits of use
vations. (1) Each employee in an exca- of the data, to include the magnitude
vation shall be protected from cave-ins and configuration of slopes determined
by an adequate protective system de- to be safe;
signed in accordance with paragraph (C) Explanatory information as may
(b) or (c) of this section except when: be necessary to aid the user in making
(i) Excavations are made entirely in a correct selection of a protective sys-
stable rock; or tem from the data.
369
(iii) At least one copy of the tab- protective systems that are drawn
ulated data which identifies the reg- from manufacturer’s tabulated data
istered professional engineer who ap- shall be in accordance with all speci-
proved the data, shall be maintained at fications, recommendations, and limi-
the jobsite during construction of the tations issued or made by the manufac-
protective system. After that time the turer.
data may be stored off the jobsite, but (ii) Deviation from the specifications,
a copy of the data shall be made avail- recommendations, and limitations
able to the Secretary upon request. issued or made by the manufacturer
(4) Option (4)—Design by a registered shall only be allowed after the manu-
professional engineer. (i) Sloping and facturer issues specific written ap-
benching systems not utilizing Option proval.
(1) or Option (2) or Option (3) under (iii) Manufacturer’s specifications,
paragraph (b) of this section shall be recommendations, and limitations, and
approved by a registered professional manufacturer’s approval to deviate
engineer. from the specifications, recommenda-
(ii) Designs shall be in written form tions, and limitations shall be in writ-
and shall include at least the following: ten form at the jobsite during con-
(A) The magnitude of the slopes that struction of the protective system.
were determined to be safe for the par- After that time this data may be
ticular project; stored off the jobsite, but a copy shall
(B) The configurations that were de- be made available to the Secretary
termined to be safe for the particular upon request.
project; and (3) Option (3)—Designs using other tab-
(C) The identity of the registered pro- ulated data. (i) Designs of support sys-
fessional engineer approving the de- tems, shield systems, or other protec-
sign. tive systems shall be selected from and
(iii) At least one copy of the design be in accordance with tabulated data,
shall be maintained at the jobsite such as tables and charts.
while the slope is being constructed. (ii) The tabulated data shall be in
After that time the design need not be written form and include all of the fol-
at the jobsite, but a copy shall be made lowing:
available to the Secretary upon re- (A) Identification of the parameters
quest. that affect the selection of a protective
(c) Design of support systems, shield system drawn from such data;
systems, and other protective systems. De- (B) Identification of the limits of use
signs of support systems shield sys- of the data;
tems, and other protective systems (C) Explanatory information as may
shall be selected and constructed by be necessary to aid the user in making
the employer or his designee and shall a correct selection of a protective sys-
be in accordance with the requirements tem from the data.
of paragraph (c)(1); or, in the alter- (iii) At least one copy of the tab-
native, paragraph (c)(2); or, in the al- ulated data, which identifies the reg-
ternative, paragraph (c)(3); or, in the istered professional engineer who ap-
alternative, paragraph (c)(4) as follows: proved the data, shall be maintained at
(1) Option (1)—Designs using appen- the jobsite during construction of the
dices A, C and D. Designs for timber protective system. After that time the
shoring in trenches shall be determined data may be stored off the jobsite, but
in accordance with the conditions and a copy of the data shall be made avail-
requirements set forth in appendices A able to the Secretary upon request.
and C to this subpart. Designs for alu- (4) Option (4)—Design by a registered
minum hydraulic shoring shall be in professional engineer. (i) Support sys-
accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this tems, shield systems, and other protec-
section, but if manufacturer’s tab- tive systems not utilizing Option 1, Op-
ulated data cannot be utilized, designs tion 2 or Option 3, above, shall be ap-
shall be in accordance with appendix D. proved by a registered professional en-
(2) Option (2)—Designs Using Manufac- gineer.

turer’s Tabulated Data. (i) Design of sup- (ii) Designs shall be in written form
port systems, shield systems, or other and shall include the following:
370
(A) A plan indicating the sizes, types, stalling other structural members to
and configurations of the materials to carry the loads imposed on the support
be used in the protective system; and system.
(B) The identity of the registered (v) Removal shall begin at, and
professional engineer approving the de- progress from, the bottom of the exca-
sign. vation. Members shall be released slow-
(iii) At least one copy of the design ly so as to note any indication of pos-
shall be maintained at the jobsite dur- sible failure of the remaining members
ing construction of the protective sys- of the structure or possible cave-in of
tem. After that time, the design may the sides of the excavation.
be stored off the jobsite, but a copy of (vi) Backfilling shall progress to-
the design shall be made available to gether with the removal of support sys-
the Secretary upon request. tems from excavations.
(d) Materials and equipment. (1) Mate- (2) Additional requirements for support
rials and equipment used for protective systems for trench excavations. (i) Exca-
systems shall be free from damage or vation of material to a level no greater
defects that might impair their proper than 2 feet (.61 m) below the bottom of
function. the members of a support system shall
(2) Manufactured materials and be permitted, but only if the system is
equipment used for protective systems designed to resist the forces calculated
shall be used and maintained in a man- for the full depth of the trench, and
ner that is consistent with the rec- there are no indications while the
ommendations of the manufacturer, trench is open of a possible loss of soil
and in a manner that will prevent em- from behind or below the bottom of the
ployee exposure to hazards. support system.
(3) When material or equipment that (ii) Installation of a support system
is used for protective systems is dam- shall be closely coordinated with the
aged, a competent person shall exam- excavation of trenches.
ine the material or equipment and (f) Sloping and benching systems. Em-
evaluate its suitability for continued ployees shall not be permitted to work
use. If the competent person cannot as- on the faces of sloped or benched exca-
sure the material or equipment is able vations at levels above other employ-
to support the intended loads or is oth- ees except when employees at the lower
erwise suitable for safe use, then such levels are adequately protected from
material or equipment shall be re- the hazard of falling, rolling, or sliding
moved from service, and shall be evalu- material or equipment.
ated and approved by a registered pro- (g) Shield systems—(1) General. (i)
fessional engineer before being re- Shield systems shall not be subjected
turned to service. to loads exceeding those which the sys-
(e) Installation and removal of sup- tem was designed to withstand.
port—(1) General. (i) Members of sup- (ii) Shields shall be installed in a
port systems shall be securely con- manner to restrict lateral or other haz-
nected together to prevent sliding, fall- ardous movement of the shield in the
ing, kickouts, or other predictable fail- event of the application of sudden lat-
ure. eral loads.
(ii) Support systems shall be in- (iii) Employees shall be protected
stalled and removed in a manner that from the hazard of cave-ins when enter-
protects employees from cave-ins, ing or exiting the areas protected by
structural collapses, or from being shields.
struck by members of the support sys- (iv) Employees shall not be allowed
tem. in shields when shields are being in-
(iii) Individual members of support stalled, removed, or moved vertically.
systems shall not be subjected to loads (2) Additional requirement for shield
exceeding those which those members systems used in trench excavations. Exca-
were designed to withstand. vations of earth material to a level not
(iv) Before temporary removal of in- greater than 2 feet (.61 m) below the
dividual members begins, additional bottom of a shield shall be permitted,

precautions shall be taken to ensure but only if the shield is designed to re-
the safety of employees, such as in- sist the forces calculated for the full
371
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
depth of the trench, and there are no strength. Some moist granular soils exhibit
indications while the trench is open of apparent cohesion. Granular soil cannot be
a possible loss of soil from behind or molded when moist and crumbles easily
when dry.
below the bottom of the shield. Layered system means two or more dis-
tinctly different soil or rock types arranged
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART P OF PART in layers. Micaceous seams or weakened
1926—SOIL CLASSIFICATION planes in rock or shale are considered lay-
ered.
(a) Scope and application—(1) Scope. This
Moist soil means a condition in which a soil
appendix describes a method of classifying
looks and feels damp. Moist cohesive soil can
soil and rock deposits based on site and envi-
easily be shaped into a ball and rolled into
ronmental conditions, and on the structure
small diameter threads before crumbling.
and composition of the earth deposits. The
Moist granular soil that contains some cohe-
appendix contains definitions, sets forth re- sive material will exhibit signs of cohesion
quirements, and describes acceptable visual between particles.
and manual tests for use in classifying soils. Plastic means a property of a soil which al-
(2) Application. This appendix applies when lows the soil to be deformed or molded with-
a sloping or benching system is designed in out cracking, or appreciable volume change.
accordance with the requirements set forth Saturated soil means a soil in which the
in § 1926.652(b)(2) as a method of protection voids are filled with water. Saturation does
for employees from cave-ins. This appendix not require flow. Saturation, or near satura-
also applies when timber shoring for exca- tion, is necessary for the proper use of in-
vations is designed as a method of protection struments such as a pocket penetrometer or
from cave-ins in accordance with appendix C sheer vane.
to subpart P of part 1926, and when alu- Soil classification system means, for the pur-
minum hydraulic shoring is designed in ac- pose of this subpart, a method of catego-
cordance with appendix D. This appendix rizing soil and rock deposits in a hierarchy
also applies if other protective systems are of Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, and Type C,
designed and selected for use from data pre- in decreasing order of stability. The cat-
pared in accordance with the requirements egories are determined based on an analysis
set forth in § 1926.652(c), and the use of the of the properties and performance character-
data is predicated on the use of the soil clas- istics of the deposits and the environmental
sification system set forth in this appendix. conditions of exposure.
(b) Definitions. The definitions and exam- Stable rock means natural solid mineral
ples given below are based on, in whole or in matter that can be excavated with vertical
part, the following: American Society for sides and remain intact while exposed.
Testing Materials (ASTM) Standards D653–85 Submerged soil means soil which is under-
and D2488; The Unified Soils Classification water or is free seeping.
System, The U.S. Department of Agriculture Type A means cohesive soils with an
(USDA) Textural Classification Scheme; and unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 ton
The National Bureau of Standards Report per square foot (tsf) (144 kPa) or greater. Ex-
BSS–121. amples of cohesive soils are: clay, silty clay,
Cemented soil means a soil in which the par- sandy clay, clay loam and, in some cases,
ticles are held together by a chemical agent, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. Ce-
such as calcium carbonate, such that a hand- mented soils such as caliche and hardpan are
size sample cannot be crushed into powder or also considered Type A. However, no soil is
individual soil particles by finger pressure. Type A if:
Cohesive soil means clay (fine grained soil), (i) The soil is fissured; or
or soil with a high clay content, which has (ii) The soil is subject to vibration from
cohesive strength. Cohesive soil does not heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar effects;
crumble, can be excavated with vertical or
sideslopes, and is plastic when moist. Cohe- (iii) The soil has been previously disturbed;
sive soil is hard to break up when dry, and or
exhibits significant cohesion when sub- (iv) The soil is part of a sloped, layered
merged. Cohesive soils include clayey silt, system where the layers dip into the exca-
sandy clay, silty clay, clay and organic clay. vation on a slope of four horizontal to one
Dry soil means soil that does not exhibit vertical (4H:1V) or greater; or
visible signs of moisture content. (v) The material is subject to other factors
Fissured means a soil material that has a that would require it to be classified as a less
tendency to break along definite planes of stable material.
fracture with little resistance, or a material Type B means:
that exhibits open cracks, such as tension (i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined com-
cracks, in an exposed surface. pressive strength greater than 0.5 tsf (48
Granular soil means gravel, sand, or silt, kPa) but less than 1.5 tsf (144 kPa); or
(coarse grained soil) with little or no clay (ii) Granular cohesionless soils including:
content. Granular soil has no cohesive angular gravel (similar to crushed rock),
372
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. A
silt, silt loam, sandy loam and, in some (4) Layered systems. In a layered system,
cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. the system shall be classified in accordance
(iii) Previously disturbed soils except those with its weakest layer. However, each layer
which would otherwise be classed as Type C may be classified individually where a more
soil. stable layer lies under a less stable layer.
(iv) Soil that meets the unconfined com- (5) Reclassification. If, after classifying a de-
pressive strength or cementation require- posit, the properties, factors, or conditions
ments for Type A, but is fissured or subject affecting its classification change in any
to vibration; or way, the changes shall be evaluated by a
(v) Dry rock that is not stable; or competent person. The deposit shall be re-
(vi) Material that is part of a sloped, lay- classified as necessary to reflect the changed
ered system where the layers dip into the ex- circumstances.
cavation on a slope less steep than four hori- (d) Acceptable visual and manual tests—(1)
zontal to one vertical (4H:1V), but only if the Visual tests. Visual analysis is conducted to
material would otherwise be classified as determine qualitative information regarding
Type B. the excavation site in general, the soil adja-
Type C means: cent to the excavation, the soil forming the
(i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined com- sides of the open excavation, and the soil
pressive strength of 0.5 tsf (48 kPa) or less; or taken as samples from excavated material.
(ii) Granular soils including gravel, sand, (i) Observe samples of soil that are exca-
and loamy sand; or vated and soil in the sides of the excavation.
(iii) Submerged soil or soil from which Estimate the range of particle sizes and the
water is freely seeping; or relative amounts of the particle sizes. Soil
(iv) Submerged rock that is not stable, or that is primarily composed of fine-grained
(v) Material in a sloped, layered system material is cohesive material. Soil composed
where the layers dip into the excavation or a primarily of coarse-grained sand or gravel is
slope of four horizontal to one vertical granular material.
(4H:1V) or steeper. (ii) Observe soil as it is excavated. Soil
Unconfined compressive strength means the that remains in clumps when excavated is
load per unit area at which a soil will fail in cohesive. Soil that breaks up easily and does
compression. It can be determined by labora- not stay in clumps is granular.
tory testing, or estimated in the field using (iii) Observe the side of the opened exca-
a pocket penetrometer, by thumb penetra- vation and the surface area adjacent to the
tion tests, and other methods. excavation. Crack-like openings such as ten-
Wet soil means soil that contains signifi- sion cracks could indicate fissured material.
cantly more moisture than moist soil, but in If chunks of soil spall off a vertical side, the
such a range of values that cohesive material soil could be fissured. Small spalls are evi-
will slump or begin to flow when vibrated. dence of moving ground and are indications
Granular material that would exhibit cohe- of potentially hazardous situations.
sive properties when moist will lose those co- (iv) Observe the area adjacent to the exca-
hesive properties when wet. vation and the excavation itself for evidence
(c) Requirements—(1) Classification of soil of existing utility and other underground
and rock deposits. Each soil and rock deposit structures, and to identify previously dis-
shall be classified by a competent person as turbed soil.
Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, or Type C in (v) Observe the opened side of the exca-
accordance with the definitions set forth in vation to identify layered systems. Examine
paragraph (b) of this appendix. layered systems to identify if the layers
(2) Basis of classification. The classification slope toward the excavation. Estimate the
of the deposits shall be made based on the re- degree of slope of the layers.
sults of at least one visual and at least one (vi) Observe the area adjacent to the exca-
manual analysis. Such analyses shall be con- vation and the sides of the opened exca-
ducted by a competent person using tests de- vation for evidence of surface water, water
scribed in paragraph (d) below, or in other seeping from the sides of the excavation, or
recognized methods of soil classification and the location of the level of the water table.
testing such as those adopted by the Amer- (vii) Observe the area adjacent to the exca-
ica Society for Testing Materials, or the U.S. vation and the area within the excavation
Department of Agriculture textural classi- for sources of vibration that may affect the
fication system. stability of the excavation face.
(3) Visual and manual analyses. The visual (2) Manual tests. Manual analysis of soil
and manual analyses, such as those noted as samples is conducted to determine quan-
being acceptable in paragraph (d) of this ap- titative as well as qualitative properties of
pendix, shall be designed and conducted to soil and to provide more information in
provide sufficient quantitative and quali- order to classify soil properly.
tative information as may be necessary to (i) Plasticity. Mold a moist or wet sample of
identify properly the properties, factors, and soil into a ball and attempt to roll it into
conditions affecting the classification of the threads as thin as 1⁄8-inch in diameter. Cohe-
deposits. sive material can be successfully rolled into
373
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
threads without crumbling. For example, if the two, pulverize the dried clumps of the
at least a two inch (50 mm) length of 1⁄8-inch sample by hand or by stepping on them. If
thread can be held on one end without tear- the clumps do not pulverize easily, the mate-
ing, the soil is cohesive. rial is cohesive with fissures. If they pul-
(ii) Dry strength. If the soil is dry and verize easily into very small fragments, the
crumbles on its own or with moderate pres- material is granular.
sure into individual grains or fine powder, it
is granular (any combination of gravel, sand, APPENDIX B TO SUBPART P OF PART
or silt). If the soil is dry and falls into 1926—SLOPING AND BENCHING
clumps which break up into smaller clumps,
but the smaller clumps can only be broken (a) Scope and application. This appendix
up with difficulty, it may be clay in any contains specifications for sloping and
combination with gravel, sand or silt. If the benching when used as methods of protecting
dry soil breaks into clumps which do not employees working in excavations from
break up into small clumps and which can cave-ins. The requirements of this appendix
only be broken with difficulty, and there is apply when the design of sloping and bench-
no visual indication the soil is fissured, the ing protective systems is to be performed in
soil may be considered unfissured. accordance with the requirements set forth
(iii) Thumb penetration. The thumb penetra- in § 1926.652(b)(2).
tion test can be used to estimate the (b) Definitions.
unconfined compressive strength of cohesive Actual slope means the slope to which an
soils. (This test is based on the thumb pene- excavation face is excavated.
tration test described in American Society Distress means that the soil is in a condi-
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard tion where a cave-in is imminent or is likely
designation D2488—‘‘Standard Recommended to occur. Distress is evidenced by such phe-
Practice for Description of Soils (Visual— nomena as the development of fissures in the
Manual Procedure).’’) Type A soils with an face of or adjacent to an open excavation;
unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tsf the subsidence of the edge of an excavation;
can be readily indented by the thumb; how- the slumping of material from the face or
ever, they can be penetrated by the thumb the bulging or heaving of material from the
only with very great effort. Type C soils with bottom of an excavation; the spalling of ma-
an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf terial from the face of an excavation; and
can be easily penetrated several inches by ravelling, i.e., small amounts of material
the thumb, and can be molded by light finger such as pebbles or little clumps of material
pressure. This test should be conducted on suddenly separating from the face of an exca-
an undisturbed soil sample, such as a large vation and trickling or rolling down into the
clump of spoil, as soon as practicable after excavation.
excavation to keep to a miminum the effects Maximum allowable slope means the steep-
of exposure to drying influences. If the exca- est incline of an excavation face that is ac-
vation is later exposed to wetting influences ceptable for the most favorable site condi-
(rain, flooding), the classification of the soil tions as protection against cave-ins, and is
must be changed accordingly. expressed as the ratio of horizontal distance
(iv) Other strength tests. Estimates of to vertical rise (H:V).
unconfined compressive strength of soils can Short term exposure means a period of time
also be obtained by use of a pocket pene- less than or equal to 24 hours that an exca-
trometer or by using a hand-operated vation is open.
shearvane. (c) Requirements—(1) Soil classification. Soil
(v) Drying test. The basic purpose of the and rock deposits shall be classified in ac-
drying test is to differentiate between cohe- cordance with appendix A to subpart P of
sive material with fissures, unfissured cohe- part 1926.
sive material, and granular material. The (2) Maximum allowable slope. The maximum
procedure for the drying test involves drying allowable slope for a soil or rock deposit
a sample of soil that is approximately one shall be determined from Table B–1 of this
inch thick (2.54 cm) and six inches (15.24 cm) appendix.
in diameter until it is thoroughly dry: (3) Actual slope. (i) The actual slope shall
(A) If the sample develops cracks as it not be steeper than the maximum allowable
dries, significant fissures are indicated. slope.
(B) Samples that dry without cracking are (ii) The actual slope shall be less steep
to be broken by hand. If considerable force is than the maximum allowable slope, when
necessary to break a sample, the soil has sig- there are signs of distress. If that situation
nificant cohesive material content. The soil occurs, the slope shall be cut back to an ac-
can be classified as a unfissured cohesive ma- tual slope which is at least 1⁄2 horizontal to
terial and the unconfined compressive one vertical (1⁄2H:1V) less steep than the
strength should be determined. maximum allowable slope.

(C) If a sample breaks easily by hand, it is (iii) When surcharge loads from stored ma-
either a fissured cohesive material or a terial or equipment, operating equipment, or
granular material. To distinguish between traffic are present, a competent person shall
374
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B
determine the degree to which the actual adjacent structures shall be evaluated in ac-
slope must be reduced below the maximum cordance with § 1926.651(i).
allowable slope, and shall assure that such (4) Configurations. Configurations of slop-
reduction is achieved. Surcharge loads from ing and benching systems shall be in accord-
ance with Figure B–1.
Figure B–1
Slope Configurations
(All slopes stated below are in the horizontal to vertical ratio)
B–1.1 Excavations made in Type A soil.

1. All simple slope excavation 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope
of 3⁄4:1.
SIMPLE SLOPE—GENERAL
EC30OC91.017</GPH>
Exception: Simple slope excavations which are open 24 hours or less (short term) and which
are 12 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1⁄2:1.
375
EC30OC91.016</GPH>
SIMPLE SLOPE—SHORT TERM

2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope
of 3⁄4 to 1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows:
SIMPLE BENCH
EC30OC91.019</GPH> EC30OC91.020</GPH>
MULTIPLE BENCH
3. All excavations 8 feet or less in depth which have unsupported vertically sided lower por-
tions shall have a maximum vertical side of 31⁄2 feet.
376
EC30OC91.018</GPH>
UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION—MAXIMUM 8 FEET IN DEPTH

All excavations more than 8 feet but not more than 12 feet in depth which unsupported
vertically sided lower portions shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1 and a maximum
vertical side of 31⁄2 feet.
UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION—MAXIMUM 12 FEET IN DEPTH

All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions that are
supported or shielded shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3⁄4:1. The support or shield sys-
tem must extend at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side.
EC30OC91.022</GPH> EC30OC91.023</GPH>
SUPPORTED OR SHIELDED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION

4. All other simple slope, compound slope, and vertically sided lower portion excavations
shall be in accordance with the other options permitted under § 1926.652(b).
377
EC30OC91.021</GPH>
B–1.2 Excavations Made in Type B Soil
1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable
slope of 1:1.
SIMPLE SLOPE
2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope
of 1:1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows:
SINGLE BENCH
EC30OC91.025</GPH> EC30OC91.026</GPH>
MULTIPLE BENCH
3. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall
be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All
such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1.
378
EC30OC91.024</GPH>
VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION

4. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in
§ 1926.652(b).
B–1.3 Excavations Made in Type C Soil

1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable
slope of 11⁄2:1.
SIMPLE SLOPE
2. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall
be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All
such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 11⁄2:1.
EC30OC91.028</GPH> EC30OC91.029</GPH>
VERTICAL SIDED LOWER PORTION

§ 1926.652(b).
379
EC30OC91.027</GPH>
B–1.4 Excavations Made in Layered Soils
1. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth made in layered soils shall have a maximum al-
lowable slope for each layer as set forth below.
380
EC30OC91.030</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C
§ 1926.652(b).
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART P OF PART (b) Soil Classification. In order to use the

1926—TIMBER SHORING FOR TRENCHES data presented in this appendix, the soil type
or types in which the excavation is made
(a) Scope. This appendix contains informa- must first be determined using the soil clas-
tion that can be used timber shoring is pro- sification method set forth in appendix A of
vided as a method of protection from cave- subpart P of this part.
ins in trenches that do not exceed 20 feet (6.1 (c) Presentation of Information. Information
m) in depth. This appendix must be used is presented in several forms as follows:
when design of timber shoring protective (1) Information is presented in tabular
systems is to be performed in accordance form in Tables C–1.1, C–1.2, and C–1.3, and Ta-
with § 1926.652(c)(1). Other timber shoring bles C–2.1, C–2.2 and C–2.3 following para-
configurations; other systems of support graph (g) of the appendix. Each table pre-
such as hydraulic and pneumatic systems; sents the minimum sizes of timber members
and other protective systems such as slop- to use in a shoring system, and each table
ing, benching, shielding, and freezing sys- contains data only for the particular soil
tems must be designed in accordance with type in which the excavation or portion of
the requirements set forth in § 1926.652(b) and
§ 1926.652(c).
381
EC30OC91.031</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
the excavation is made. The data are ar- (B) When vertical loads imposed on cross
ranged to allow the user the flexibility to se- braces exceed a 240-pound gravity load dis-
lect from among several acceptable configu- tributed on a one-foot section of the center
rations of members based on varying the of the crossbrace.
horizontal spacing of the crossbraces. Stable (C) When surcharge loads are present from
rock is exempt from shoring requirements equipment weighing in excess of 20,000
and therefore, no data are presented for this pounds.
condition. (D) When only the lower portion of a
(2) Information concerning the basis of the trench is shored and the remaining portion
tabular data and the limitations of the data of the trench is sloped or benched unless:
is presented in paragraph (d) of this appen- The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less
dix, and on the tables themselves. steep than three horizontal to one vertical;
(3) Information explaining the use of the or the members are selected from the tables
tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of for use at a depth which is determined from
this appendix. the top of the overall trench, and not from
(4) Information illustrating the use of the the toe of the sloped portion.
tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of (e) Use of Tables. The members of the shor-
this appendix.
ing system that are to be selected using this
(5) Miscellaneous notations regarding Ta-
information are the cross braces, the
bles C–1.1 through C–1.3 and Tables C–2.1
uprights, and the wales, where wales are re-
through C–2.3 are presented in paragraph (g)
quired. Minimum sizes of members are speci-
of this Appendix.
fied for use in different types of soil. There
(d) Basis and limitations of the data—(1) Di-
are six tables of information, two for each
mensions of timber members. (i) The sizes of the
soil type. The soil type must first be deter-
timber members listed in Tables C–1.1
through C–1.3 are taken from the National mined in accordance with the soil classifica-
Bureau of Standards (NBS) report, ‘‘Rec- tion system described in appendix A to sub-
ommended Technical Provisions for Con- part P of part 1926. Using the appropriate
struction Practice in Shoring and Sloping of table, the selection of the size and spacing of
Trenches and Excavations.’’ In addition, the members is then made. The selection is
where NBS did not recommend specific sizes based on the depth and width of the trench
of members, member sizes are based on an where the members are to be installed and,
analysis of the sizes required for use by ex- in most instances, the selection is also based
isting codes and on empirical practice. on the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces.
(ii) The required dimensions of the mem- Instances where a choice of horizontal spac-
bers listed in Tables C–1.1 through C–1.3 refer ing of crossbracing is available, the hori-
to actual dimensions and not nominal di- zontal spacing of the crossbraces must be
mensions of the timber. Employers wanting chosen by the user before the size of any
to use nominal size shoring are directed to member can be determined. When the soil
Tables C–2.1 through C–2.3, or have this type, the width and depth of the trench, and
choice under § 1926.652(c)(3), and are referred the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces are
to The Corps of Engineers, The Bureau of known, the size and vertical spacing of the
Reclamation or data from other acceptable crossbraces, the size and vertical spacing of
sources. the wales, and the size and horizontal spac-
(2) Limitation of application. (i) It is not ining of the uprights can be read from the ap-
tended that the timber shoring specification propriate table.
apply to every situation that may be experi- (f) Examples to Illustrate the Use of Tables C–
enced in the field. These data were developed 1.1 through C–1.3.
to apply to the situations that are most (1) Example 1.
commonly experienced in current trenching A trench dug in Type A soil is 13 feet deep
practice. Shoring systems for use in situa- and five feet wide.
tions that are not covered by the data in this From Table C–1.1, for acceptable arrange-
appendix must be designed as specified in ments of timber can be used.
§ 1926.652(c).
(ii) When any of the following conditions Arrangement #B1
are present, the members specified in the ta- Space 4 × 4 crossbraces at six feet hori-
bles are not considered adequate. Either an zontally and four feet vertically.
alternate timber shoring system must be de-
Wales are not required.
signed or another type of protective system
Space 3 × 8 uprights at six feet hori-
designed in accordance with § 1926.652.
(A) When loads imposed by structures or zontally. This arrangement is commonly
by stored material adjacent to the trench called ‘‘skip shoring.’’
weigh in excess of the load imposed by a two- Arrangement #B2
foot soil surcharge. The term ‘‘adjacent’’ as

used here means the area within a horizontal Space 4 × 6 crossbraces at eight feet hori-
distance from the edge of the trench equal to zontally and four feet vertically.
the depth of the trench. Space 8 × 8 wales at four feet vertically.
382
Space 2 × 6 uprights at four feet hori- Space 12 × 12 wales at five feet vertically.
zontally. Position 2 × 6 uprights in a close sheeting
configuration unless water pressure must be
Arrangement #B3 resisted. Tight sheeting must be used where
Space 6 × 6 crossbraces at 10 feet hori- water must be retained.
zontally and four feet vertically. (4) Example 4.
Space 8 × 10 wales at four feet vertically. A trench dug in Type C soil is 20 feet deep
Space 2 × 6 uprights at five feet hori- and 11 feet wide. The size and spacing of
zontally. members for the section of trench that is
over 15 feet in depth is determined using
Arrangement #B4
Table C–1.3. Only one arrangement of mem-
Space 6 × 6 crossbraces at 12 feet hori- bers is provided.
zontally and four feet vertically. Space 8 × 10 crossbraces at six feet hori-
Space 10 × 10 wales at four feet vertically. zontally and five feet vertically.
Spaces 3 × 8 uprights at six feet hori- Space 12 × 12 wales at five feet vertically.
zontally.
Use 3 × 6 tight sheeting.
(2) Example 2.
A trench dug in Type B soil in 13 feet deep Use of Tables C–2.1 through C–2.3 would fol-
and five feet wide. From Table C–1.2 three low the same procedures.
acceptable arrangements of members are (g) Notes for all Tables.
listed. 1. Member sizes at spacings other than in-
dicated are to be determined as specified in
Arrangement #B1 § 1926.652(c), ‘‘Design of Protective Systems.’’
Space 6 × 6 crossbraces at six feet hori- 2. When conditions are saturated or sub-
zontally and five feet vertically. merged use Tight Sheeting. Tight Sheeting
Space 8 × 8 wales at five feet vertically. refers to the use of specially-edged timber
Space 2 × 6 uprights at two feet hori- planks (e.g., tongue and groove) at least
zontally. three inches thick, steel sheet piling, or
similar construction that when driven or
Arrangement #B2 placed in position provide a tight wall to re-
Space 6 × 8 crossbraces at eight feet hori- sist the lateral pressure of water and to pre-
zontally and five feet vertically. vent the loss of backfill material. Close
Space 10 × 10 wales at five feet vertically. Sheeting refers to the placement of planks
Space 2 × 6 uprights at two feet hori- side-by-side allowing as little space as pos-
zontally. sible between them.
3. All spacing indicated is measured center
Arrangement #B3 to center.
Space 8 × 8 crossbraces at 10 feet hori- 4. Wales to be installed with greater di-
zontally and five feet vertically. mension horizontal.
Space 10 × 12 wales at five feet vertically. 5. If the vertical distance from the center
Space 2 × 6 uprights at two feet vertically. of the lowest crossbrace to the bottom of the
(3) Example 3. trench exceeds two and one-half feet,
A trench dug in Type C soil is 13 feet deep uprights shall be firmly embedded or a
and five feet wide. mudsill shall be used. Where uprights are
From Table C–1.3 two acceptable arrange- embedded, the vertical distance from the
ments of members can be used. center of the lowest crossbrace to the bot-
tom of the trench shall not exceed 36 inches.
Arrangement #B1 When mudsills are used, the vertical dis-
Space 8 × 8 crossbraces at six feet hori- tance shall not exceed 42 inches. Mudsills are
zontally and five feet vertically. wales that are installed at the toe of the
Space 10 × 12 wales at five feet vertically. trench side.
Position 2 × 6 uprights as closely together 6. Trench jacks may be used in lieu of or in
as possible. combination with timber crossbraces.
If water must be retained use special 7. Placement cf crossbraces. When the
tongue and groove uprights to form tight vertical spacing of crossbraces is four feet,
sheeting. place the top crossbrace no more than two
feet below the top of the trench. When the
Arrangement #B2
vertical spacing of crossbraces is five feet,
Space 8 × 10 crossbraces at eight feet hori- place the top crossbrace no more than 2.5
zontally and five feet vertically. feet below the top of the trench.
383
384
EC30OC91.032</GPH>
385
EC30OC91.033</GPH>
386
EC30OC91.034</GPH>
387
EC30OC91.035</GPH>
388
EC30OC91.036</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART P OF PART do not exceed 20 feet (6.1m) in depth. This ap-
1926—ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHOR- pendix must be used when design of the alu-
ING FOR TRENCHES minum hydraulic protective system cannot
be performed in accordance with
§ 1926.652(c)(2).
(a) Scope. This appendix contains informa-

tion that can be used when aluminum hy- (b) Soil Classification. In order to use data
draulic shoring is provided as a method of presented in this appendix, the soi1 type or
protection against cave-ins in trenches that types in which the excavation is made must
389
EC30OC91.037</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
first be determined using the soil classifica- bles are not considered adequate. In this
tion method set forth in appendix A of sub- case, an alternative aluminum hydraulic
part P of part 1926. shoring system or other type of protective
(c) Presentation of Information. Information system must be designed in accordance with
is presented in several forms as follows: § 1926.652.
(1) Information is presented in tabular (A) When vertical loads imposed on cross
form in Tables D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3 and E–1.4. braces exceed a 100 Pound gravity load dis-
Each table presents the maximum vertical tributed on a one foot section of the center
and horizontal spacings that may be used of the hydraulic cylinder.
with various aluminum member sizes and (B) When surcharge loads are present from
various hydraulic cylinder sizes. Each table equipment weighing in excess of 20,000
contains data only for the particular soil pounds.
type in which the excavation or portion of (C) When only the lower portion or a
the excavation is made. Tables D–1.1 and D– trench is shored and the remaining portion
1.2 are for vertical shores in Types A and B of the trench is sloped or benched unless:
soil. Tables D–1.3 and D1.4 are for horizontal The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less
waler systems in Types B and C soil. steep than three horizontal to one vertical;
(2) Information concerning the basis of the or the members are selected from the tables
tabular data and the limitations of the data for use at a depth which is determined from
is presented in paragraph (d) of this appen- the top of the overall trench, and not from
dix. the toe of the sloped portion.
(3) Information explaining the use of the (e) Use of Tables D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3 and D–
tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of 1.4. The members of the shoring system that
this appendix. are to be selected using this information are
(4) Information illustrating the use of the the hydraulic cylinders, and either the
tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of vertical shores or the horizontal wales. When
this appendix. a waler system is used the vertical timber
(5) Miscellaneous notations (footnotes) re- sheeting to be used is also selected from
garding Table D–1.1 through D–1.4 are pre- these tables. The Tables D–1.1 and D–1.2 for
sented in paragraph (g) of this appendix. vertical shores are used in Type A and B
(6) Figures, illustrating typical installa- soils that do not require sheeting. Type B
tions of hydraulic shoring, are included just soils that may require sheeting, and Type C
prior to the Tables. The illustrations page is soils that always require sheeting are found
entitled ‘‘Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring; in the horizontal wale Tables D–1.3 and D–1.4.
Typical Installations.’’ The soil type must first be determined in ac-
(d) Basis and limitations of the data. (1) cordance with the soil classification system
Vertical shore rails and horizontal wales are described in appendix A to subpart P of part
those that meet the Section Modulus re- 1926. Using the appropriate table, the selec-
quirements in the D–1 Tables. Aluminum tion of the size and spacing of the members
material is 6061–T6 or material of equivalent is made. The selection is based on the depth
strength and properties. and width of the trench where the members
(2) Hydraulic cylinders specifications. (i) 2- are to be installed. In these tables the
inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2-inch in- vertical spacing is held constant at four feet
side diameter with a minimum safe working on center. The tables show the maximum
capacity of no less than 18,000 pounds axial horizontal spacing of cylinders allowed for
compressive load at maximum extension. each size of wale in the waler system tables,
Maximum extension is to include full range and in the vertical shore tables, the hydrau-
of cylinder extensions as recommended by lic cylinder horizontal spacing is the same as
product manufaturer. the vertical shore spacing.
(ii) 3-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3- (f) Example to Illustrate the Use of the Tables:
inch inside diameter with a safe working ca- (1) Example 1:
pacity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial A trench dug in Type A soil is 6 feet deep
compressive load at extensions as rec- and 3 feet wide. From Table D–1.1: Find
ommended by product manufacturer. vertical shores and 2 inch diameter cylinders
(3) Limitation of application. spaced 8 feet on center (o.c.) horizontally and
(i) It is not intended that the aluminum 4 feet on center (o.c.) vertically. (See Figures
hydraulic specification apply to every situa- 1 & 3 for typical installations.)
tion that may be experienced in the field. (2) Example 2:
These data were developed to apply to the A trench is dug in Type B soil that does
situations that are most commonly experi- not require sheeting, 13 feet deep and 5 feet
enced in current trenching practice. Shoring wide. From Table D–1.2: Find vertical shores
systems for use in situations that are not and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced 6.5 feet
covered by the data in this appendix must be o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically.
otherwise designed as specified in (See Figures 1 & 3 for typical installations.)

§ 1926.652(c). (3) A trench is dug in Type B soil that does
(ii) When any of the following conditions not require sheeting, but does experience
are present, the members specified in the Ta- some minor raveling of the trench face. The
390
trench is 16 feet deep and 9 feet wide. From (2) 2 inch diameter cylinders, at this width,
Table D–1.2: Find vertical shores and 2 inch shall have structural steel tube (3.5 × 3.5 ×
diameter cylinder (with special oversleeves 0.1875) oversleeves, or structural oversleeves
as designated by footnote #B2) spaced 5.5 feet of manufacturer’s specification, extending
o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically, the full, collapsed length.
plywood (per footnote (g)(7) to the D–1 Table) (3) Hydraulic cylinders capacities. (i) 2
should be used behind the shores. (See Fig- inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2-inch in-
ures 2 & 3 for typical installations.) side diameter with a safe working capacity
(4) Example 4: A trench is dug in pre- of not less than 18,000 pounds axial compres-
viously disturbed Type B soil, with charac- sive load at maximum extension. Maximum
teristics of a Type C soil, and will require extension is to include full range of cylinder
sheeting. The trench is 18 feet deep and 12 extensions as recommended by product man-
feet wide. 8 foot horizontal spacing between ufacturer.
cylinders is desired for working space. From (ii) 3-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3-
Table D–1.3: Find horizontal wale with a sec- inch inside diameter with a safe work capac-
tion modulus of 14.0 spaced at 4 feet o.c. ity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial com-
vertically and 3 inch diameter cylinder pressive load at maximum extension. Max-
spaced at 9 feet maximum o.c. horizontally. imum extension is to include full range of
3 × 12 timber sheeting is required at close cylinder extensions as recommended by
spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for typical product manufacturer.
installation.)
(4) All spacing indicated is measured cen-
(5) Example 5: A trench is dug in Type C
ter to center.
soil, 9 feet deep and 4 feet wide. Horizontal
cylinder spacing in excess of 6 feet is desired (5) Vertical shoring rails shall have a min-
for working space. From Table D–1.4: Find imum section modulus of 0.40 inch.
horizontal wale with a section modulus of 7.0 (6) When vertical shores are used, there
and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced at 6.5 must be a minimum of three shores spaced
feet o.c. horizontally. Or, find horizontal equally, horizontally, in a group.
wale with a 14.0 section modulus and 3 inch (7) Plywood shall be 1.125 in. thick
diameter cylinder spaced at 10 feet o.c. hori- softwood or 0.75 inch. thick, 14 ply, arctic
zontally. Both wales are spaced 4 feet o.c. white birch (Finland form). Please note that
vertically. 3 × 12 timber sheeting is required plywood is not intended as a structural
at close spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for member, but only for prevention of local rav-
typical installation.) eling (sloughing of the trench face) between
(g) Footnotes, and general notes, for Tables shores.
D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3, and D–1.4. (8) See appendix C for timber specifica-
(1) For applications other than those listed tions.
in the tables, refer to § 1926.652(c)(2) for use of (9) Wales are calculated for simple span
manufacturer’s tabulated data. For trench conditions.
depths in excess of 20 feet, refer to (10) See appendix D, item (d), for basis and
§ 1926.652(c)(2) and § 1926.652(c)(3). limitations of the data.
391
392
EC30OC91.038</GPH>
393
EC30OC91.039</GPH>
394
EC30OC91.040</GPH>
395
EC30OC91.041</GPH>
396
EC30OC91.042</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. E
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—ALTERNATIVES TO TIMBER SHORING

397
EC30OC91.043</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—SELECTION OF PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS

The following figures are a graphic summary of the requirements contained in subpart P
for excavations 20 feet or less in depth. Protective systems for use in excavations more than
20 feet in depth must be designed by a registered professional engineer in accordance with
§ 1926.652 (b) and (c).
398
EC30OC91.044</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F
399
EC30OC91.045</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
400
EC30OC91.046</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F
401
EC30OC91.047</GPH>
Subpart Q—Concrete and forms and shores are removed, in order

Masonry Construction to support partially cured concrete and
construction loads.
(7) Shore means a supporting member
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours that resists a compressive force im-
and Safety Standards Act (Construction
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6 and 8
posed by a load.
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (8) Vertical slip forms means forms
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of La- which are jacked vertically during the
bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR placement of concrete.
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), (9) Jacking operation means the task
as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. of lifting a slab (or group of slabs)
SOURCE: 53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, unless vertically from one location to another
otherwise noted. (e.g., from the casting location to a
temporary (parked) location, or from a
§ 1926.700 Scope, application, and defi- temporary location to another tem-
nitions applicable to this subpart. porary location, or to its final location
(a) Scope and application. This sub- in the structure), during the construc-
part sets forth requirements to protect tion of a building/structure where the
all construction employees from the lift-slab process is being used.
hazards associated with concrete and [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 55
masonry construction operations per- FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990]
formed in workplaces covered under 29
CFR part 1926. In addition to the re- § 1926.701 General requirements.
quirements in subpart Q, other rel- (a) Construction loads. No construc-
evant provisions in parts 1910 and 1926 tion loads shall be placed on a concrete
apply to concrete and masonry con- structure or portion of a concrete
struction operations. structure unless the employer deter-
(b) Definitions applicable to this sub- mines, based on information received
part. In addition to the definitions set from a person who is qualified in struc-
forth in § 1926.32, the following defini- tural design, that the structure or por-
tions apply to this subpart. tion of the structure is capable of sup-
(1) Bull float means a tool used to porting the loads.
spread out and smooth concrete. (b) Reinforcing steel. All protruding
(2) Formwork means the total system reinforcing steel, onto and into which
of support for freshly placed or par- employees could fall, shall be guarded
tially cured concrete, including the to eliminate the hazard of impalement.
mold or sheeting (form) that is in con- (c) Post-tensioning operations. (1) No
tact with the concrete as well as all employee (except those essential to the
supporting members including shores, post-tensioning operations) shall be
reshores, hardware, braces, and related permitted to be behind the jack during
hardware. tensioning operations.
(3) Lift slab means a method of con- (2) Signs and barriers shall be erected
crete construction in which floor, and to limit employee access to the post-
roof slabs are cast on or at ground level tensioning area during tensioning oper-
and, using jacks, lifted into position. ations.
(4) Limited access zone means an area (d) Riding concrete buckets. No em-
alongside a masonry wall, which is ployee shall be permitted to ride con-
under construction, and which is clear- crete buckets.
ly demarcated to limit access by em- (e) Working under loads. (1) No em-
ployees. ployee shall be permitted to work
(5) Precast concrete means concrete under concrete buckets while buckets
members (such as walls, panels, slabs, are being elevated or lowered into posi-
columns, and beams) which have been tion.
formed, cast, and cured prior to final (2) To the extent practical, elevated
placement in a structure. concrete buckets shall be routed so
(6) Reshoring means the construction that no employee, or the fewest num-
operation in which shoring equipment ber of employees, are exposed to the

(also called reshores or reshoring hazards associated with falling con-
equipment) is placed, as the original crete buckets.
402
(f) Personal protective equipment. No (g) Tremies. Sections of tremies and

employee shall be permitted to apply a similar concrete conveyances shall be
cement, sand, and water mixture secured with wire rope (or equivalent
through a pneumatic hose unless the materials) in addition to the regular
employee is wearing protective head couplings or connections.
and face equipment. (h) Bull floats. Bull float handles,
[53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 59 used where they might contact ener-
FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] gized electrical conductors, shall be
constructed of nonconductive material
§ 1926.702 Requirements for equip- or insulated with a nonconductive
ment and tools. sheath whose electrical and mechan-
(a) Bulk cement storage. (1) Bulk stor- ical characteristics provide the equiva-
age bins, containers, and silos shall be lent protection of a handle constructed
equipped with the following: of nonconductive material.
(i) Conical or tapered bottoms; and (i) Masonry saws. (1) Masonry saws
(ii) Mechanical or pneumatic means shall be guarded with a semicircular
of starting the flow of material. enclosure over the blade.
(2) No employee shall be permitted to (2) A method for retaining blade frag-
enter storage facilities unless the ejec- ments shall be incorporated in the de-
tion system has been shut down, locked sign of the semicircular enclosure.
out, and tagged to indicate that the (j) Lockout/Tagout Procedures. (1) No
ejection system is not to be operated. employee shall be permitted to perform
(b) Concrete mixers. Concrete mixers maintenance or repair activity on
with one cubic yard (.8 m3) or larger equipment (such as compressors, mix-
loading skips shall be equipped with ers, screens or pumps used for concrete
the following: and masonry construction activities)
(1) A mechanical device to clear the where the inadvertent operation of the
skip of materials; and equipment could occur and cause in-
(2) Guardrails installed on each side jury, unless all potentially hazardous
of the skip. energy sources have been locked out
(c) Power concrete trowels. Powered and tagged.
and rotating type concrete troweling
(2) Tags shall read Do Not Start or
machines that are manually guided
similar language to indicate that the
shall be equipped with a control switch
equipment is not to be operated.
that will automatically shut off the
power whenever the hands of the oper- § 1926.703 Requirements for cast-in-
ator are removed from the equipment place concrete.
handles.
(d) Concrete buggies. Concrete buggy (a) General requirements for formwork.
handles shall not extend beyond the (1) Formwork shall be designed, fab-
wheels on either side of the buggy. ricated, erected, supported, braced and
(e) Concrete pumping systems. (1) Con- maintained so that it will be capable of
crete pumping systems using discharge supporting without failure all vertical
pipes shall be provided with pipe sup- and lateral loads that may reasonably
ports designed for 100 percent overload. be anticipated to be applied to the
(2) Compressed air hoses used on con- formwork. Formwork which is de-
crete pumping system shall be provided signed, fabricated, erected, supported,
with positive fail-safe joint connectors braced and maintained in conformance
to prevent separation of sections when with the appendix to this section will
pressurized. be deemed to meet the requirements of
(f) Concrete buckets. (1) Concrete this paragraph.
buckets equipped with hydraulic or (2) Drawings or plans, including all
pneumatic gates shall have positive revisions, for the jack layout,
safety latches or similar safety devices formwork (including shoring equip-
installed to prevent premature or acci- ment), working decks, and scaffolds,
dental dumping. shall be available at the jobsite.
(2) Concrete buckets shall be de- (b) Shoring and reshoring. (1) All shor-
signed to prevent concrete from hanging equipment (including equipment
ing up on top and the sides. used in reshoring operations) shall be
403
inspected prior to erection to deter- (c) Vertical slip forms. (1) The steel
mine that the equipment meets the re- rods or pipes on which jacks climb or
quirements specified in the formwork by which the forms are lifted shall be—
drawings. (i) Specifically designed for that pur-
(2) Shoring equipment found to be pose; and
damaged such that its strength is re- (ii) Adequately braced where not en-
duced to less than that required by cased in concrete.
§ 1926.703(a)(1) shall not be used for (2) Forms shall be designed to pre-
shoring. vent excessive distortion of the struc-
(3) Erected shoring equipment shall ture during the jacking operation.
be inspected immediately prior to, dur- (3) All vertical slip forms shall be
ing, and immediately after concrete provided with scaffolds or work plat-
placement. forms where employees are required to
(4) Shoring equipment that is found work or pass.
to be damaged or weakened after erec- (4) Jacks and vertical supports shall
tion, such that its strength is reduced be positioned in such a manner that
to less than that required by the loads do not exceed the rated ca-
§ 1926.703(a)(1), shall be immediately re- pacity of the jacks.
inforced. (5) The jacks or other lifting devices
(5) The sills for shoring shall be shall be provided with mechanical dogs
sound, rigid, and capable of carrying or other automatic holding devices to
the maximum intended load. support the slip forms whenever failure
(6) All base plates, shore heads, ex- of the power supply or lifting mecha-
tension devices, and adjustment screws nism occurs.
shall be in firm contact, and secured (6) The form structure shall be main-
when necessary, with the foundation tained within all design tolerances
and the form. specified for plumbness during the
jacking operation.
(7) Eccentric loads on shore heads
(7) The predetermined safe rate of lift
and similar members shall be prohib-
shall not be exceeded.
ited unless these members have been
(d) Reinforcing steel. (1) Reinforcing
designed for such loading.
steel for walls, piers, columns, and
(8) Whenever single post shores are
similar vertical structures shall be
used one on top of another (tiered), the
adequately supported to prevent over-
employer shall comply with the fol-
turning and to prevent collapse.
lowing specific requirements in addi-
(2) Employers shall take measures to
tion to the general requirements for
prevent unrolled wire mesh from re-
formwork:
coiling. Such measures may include,
(i) The design of the shoring shall be but are not limited to, securing each
prepared by a qualified designer and end of the roll or turning over the roll.
the erected shoring shall be inspected (e) Removal of formwork. (1) Forms
by an engineer qualified in structural and shores (except those used for slabs
design. on grade and slip forms) shall not be
(ii) The single post shores shall be removed until the employer determines
vertically aligned. that the concrete has gained sufficient
(iii) The single post shores shall be strength to support its weight and su-
spliced to prevent misalignment. perimposed loads. Such determination
(iv) The single post shores shall be shall be based on compliance with one
adequately braced in two mutually per- of the following:
pendicular directions at the splice (i) The plans and specifications stipu-
level. Each tier shall also be diagonally late conditions for removal of forms
braced in the same two directions. and shores, and such conditions have
(9) Adjustment of single post shores been followed, or
to raise formwork shall not be made (ii) The concrete has been properly
after the placement of concrete. tested with an appropriate ASTM
(10) Reshoring shall be erected, as the standard test method designed to indi-
original forms and shores are removed, cate the concrete compressive
whenever the concrete is required to strength, and the test results indicate
support loads in excess of its capacity. that the concrete has gained sufficient
404
strength to support its weight and su- § 1926.705 Requirements for lift-slab
perimposed loads. construction operations.
(2) Reshoring shall not be removed (a) Lift-slab operations shall be de-
until the concrete being supported has signed and planned by a registered pro-
attained adequate strength to support fessional engineer who has experience
its weight and all loads in place upon in lift-slab construction. Such plans
it. and designs shall be implemented by
the employer and shall include detailed
APPENDIX TO § 1926.703(a)(1)
instructions and sketches indicating
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FORMWORK the prescribed method of erection.
These plans and designs shall also in-
(This appendix is non-mandatory.) clude provisions for ensuring lateral
This appendix serves as a non-mandatory stability of the building/structure dur-
guideline to assist employers in complying ing construction.
with the formwork requirements in (b) Jacks/lifting units shall be
§ 1926.703(a)(1). Formwork which has been de- marked to indicate their rated capac-
signed, fabricated, erected, braced, supported ity as established by the manufacturer.
and maintained in accordance with Sections (c) Jacks/lifting units shall not be
6 and 7 of the American National Standard loaded beyond their rated capacity as
for Construction and Demolition Oper- established by the manufacturer.
ations—Concrete and Masonry Work, ANSI
(d) Jacking equipment shall be capa-
A10.9–1983, shall be deemed to be in compli-
ance with the provision of § 1926.703(a)(1).
ble of supporting at least two and one-
half times the load being lifted during
[53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 61 jacking operations and the equipment
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] shall not be overloaded. For the pur-
pose of this provision, jacking equip-
§ 1926.704 Requirements for precast ment includes any load bearing compo-
concrete.
nent which is used to carry out the lift-
(a) Precast concrete wall units, ing operation(s). Such equipment in-
structural framing, and tilt-up wall cludes, but is not limited, to the fol-
panels shall be adequately supported to lowing: threaded rods, lifting attach-
prevent overturning and to prevent col- ments, lifting nuts, hook-up collars, T-
lapse until permanent connections are caps, shearheads, columns, and foot-
completed. ings.
(b) Lifting inserts which are embed- (e) Jacks/lifting units shall be de-
ded or otherwise attached to tilt-up signed and installed so that they will
precast concrete members shall be ca- neither lift nor continue to lift when
pable of supporting at least two times they are loaded in excess of their rated
the maximum intended load applied or capacity.
transmitted to them. (f) Jacks/lifting units shall have a
(c) Lifting inserts which are embed- safety device installed which will cause
ded or otherwise attached to precast the jacks/lifting units to support the
concrete members, other than the tilt- load in any position in the event any
up members, shall be capable of sup- jack/lifting unit malfunctions or loses
porting at least four times the max- its lifting ability.
imum intended load applied or trans- (g) Jacking operations shall be syn-
mitted to them. chronized in such a manner to ensure
(d) Lifting hardware shall be capable even and uniform lifting of the slab.
of supporting at least five times the During lifting, all points at which the
slab is supported shall be kept within
maximum intended load applied or 1⁄2 inch of that needed to maintain the
transmitted to the lifting hardware.
slab in a level position.
(e) No employee shall be permitted (h) If leveling is automatically con-
under precast concrete members being trolled, a device shall be installed that
lifted or tilted into position except will stop the operation when the 1⁄2inch
those employees required for the erec- tolerance set forth in paragraph (g) of
tion of those members. this section is exceeded or where there

[53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 54 is a malfunction in the jacking (lifting)
FR 41088, Oct. 5, 1989] system.
405
(i) If leveling is maintained by man- until the wedges at that column have
ual controls, such controls shall be lo- been secured.
cated in a central location and at- (m) All welding on temporary and
tended by a competent person while permanent connections shall be per-
lifting is in progress. In addition to formed by a certified welder, familiar
meeting the definition in § 1926.32(f), with the welding requirements speci-
the competent person must be experi- fied in the plans and specifications for
enced in the lifting operation and with the lift-slab operation.
the lifting equipment being used. (n) Load transfer from jacks/lifting
(j) The maximum number of manu- units to building columns shall not be
ally controlled jacks/lifting units on executed until the welds on the column
one slab shall be limited to a number shear plates (weld blocks) are cooled to
that will permit the operator to main- air temperature.
tain the slab level within specified tol- (o) Jacks/lifting units shall be posi-
erances of paragraph (g) of this section, tively secured to building columns so
but in no case shall that number ex- that they do not become dislodged or
ceed 14. dislocated.
(k)(1) No employee, except those es- (p) Equipment shall be designed and
sential to the jacking operation, shall installed so that the lifting rods cannot
be permitted in the building/structure slip out of position or the employer
while any jacking operation is taking shall institute other measures, such as
place unless the building/structure has the use of locking or blocking devices,
been reinforced sufficiently to ensure which will provide positive connection
its integrity during erection. The between the lifting rods and attach-
phrase ‘‘reinforced sufficiently to en- ments and will prevent components
from disengaging during lifting oper-
sure its integrity’’ used in this para-
ations.
graph means that a registered profes-
sional engineer, independent of the en- APPENDIX TO § 1926.705—LIFT-SLAB
gineer who designed and planned the OPERATIONS
lifting operation, has determined from
(This appendix is non-mandatory.)
the plans that if there is a loss of sup-
port at any jack location, that loss will In paragraph 1926.705(k), OSHA requires
be confined to that location and the employees to be removed from the building/
structure during jacking operations unless
structure as a whole will remain sta-
an independent registered professional engi-
ble. neer, other than the engineer who designed
(2) Under no circumstances, shall any and planned the lifting operation, has deter-
employee who is not essential to the mined that the building/structure has been
jacking operation be permitted imme- sufficiently reinforced to insure the integ-
diately beneath a slab while it is being rity of the building/structure. One method to
lifted. comply with this provision is for the em-
ployer to ensure that continuous bottom
(3) For the purpose of paragraph (k) steel is provided in every slab and in both di-
of this section, a jacking operation be- rections through every wall or column head
gins when a slab or group of slabs is area. (Column head area means the distance
lifted and ends when such slabs are se- between lines that are one and one half
cured (with either temporary connec- times the thickness of the slab or drop panel.
tions or permanent connections). These lines are located outside opposite
faces of the outer edges of the shearhead sec-
(4) Employers who comply with ap- tions—See Figure 1). The amount of bottom
pendix A to § 1926.705 shall be consid- steel shall be established by assuming loss of
ered to be in compliance with the pro- support at a given lifting jack and then de-
visions of paragraphs (k)(1) through termining the steel necessary to carry, by
(k)(3) of this section. catenary action over the span between sur-
(l) When making temporary connec- rounding supports, the slab service dead load
plus any service dead and live loads likely to
tions to support slabs, wedges shall be
be acting on the slab during jacking. In addi-
secured by tack welding, or an equiva- tion, the surrounding supports must be capa-
lent method of securing the wedges to
ble of resisting any additional load trans-

prevent them from falling out of posi- ferred to them as a result of the loss of sup-
tion. Lifting rods may not be released port at the lifting jack considered.
406
[55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990]
§ 1926.706 Requirements for masonry constructed plus four feet, and shall
construction. run the entire length of the wall.
(a) A limited access zone shall be es- (3) The limited access zone shall be
tablished whenever a masonry wall is established on the side of the wall
being constructed. The limited access which will be unscaffolded.
zone shall conform to the following. (4) The limited access zone shall be
(1) The limited access zone shall be restricted to entry by employees ac-
established prior to the start of con- tively engaged in constructing the
struction of the wall. wall. No other employees shall be per-

(2) The limited access zone shall be mitted to enter the zone.
equal to the height of the wall to be
407
EC30OC91.048</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. Q, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
(5) The limited access zone shall re- Insulating Concrete for Compressive
main in place until the wall is ade- Strength (ASTM C513–86).
quately supported to prevent over- • Test Method for Comprehensive Strength
of Lightweight Insulating Concrete (ASTM
turning and to prevent collapse unless
C495–86).
the height of wall is over eight feet, in • Method of Making, Accelerating Curing,
which case, the limited access zone and Testing of Concrete Compression Test
shall remain in place until the require- Specimens (ASTM C684–81).
ments of paragraph (b) of this section • Test Method for Compressive Strength of
have been met. Concrete Using Portions of Beams Broken in
(b) All masonry walls over eight feet Flexure (ASTM C116–68 (1980)).
in height shall be adequately braced to
prevent overturning and to prevent col- Subpart R—Steel Erection
lapse unless the wall is adequately sup-
ported so that it will not overturn or AUTHORITY: Section 3704 of the Contract
collapse. The bracing shall remain in Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40
place until permanent supporting ele- U.S.C. 3701); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
ments of the structure are in place. pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Q OF PART Order Nos. 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 FR
1926—REFERENCES TO SUBPART Q OF 65008), and 5–2007 (72 FR 31159); and 29 CFR
PART 1926 part 1911.
SOURCE: 66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, unless
(This appendix is non-mandatory.)
otherwise noted.
The following non-mandatory references
provide information which can be helpful in § 1926.750 Scope.
understanding and complying with the re-
quirements contained in subpart Q.
(a) This subpart sets forth require-
• Accident Prevention Manual for Indus- ments to protect employees from the
trial Operations; Eighth Edition; National hazards associated with steel erection
Safety Council. activities involved in the construction,
• Building Code Requirements for Rein- alteration, and/or repair of single and
forced Concrete (ACI 318–83). multi-story buildings, bridges, and
• Formwork for Concrete (ACI SP–4). other structures where steel erection
• Recommended Practice for Concrete
occurs. The requirements of this sub-
Formwork (ACI 347–78).
• Safety Requirements for Concrete and part apply to employers engaged in
Masonry Work (ANSI A10.9–1983). steel erection unless otherwise speci-
• Standard Test Method for Compressive fied. This subpart does not cover elec-
Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens trical transmission towers, commu-
(ASTM C39–86). nication and broadcast towers, or
• Standard Test Method for Making and tanks.
Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
(ASTM C31–85). NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): Examples of struc-
• Standard Test Method for Penetration tures where steel erection may occur include
Resistance of Hardened Concrete (ASTM but are not limited to the following: Single
C803–82). and multi-story buildings; systems-engi-
• Standard Test Method for Compressive neered metal buildings; lift slab/tilt-up
Strength of Concrete Cylinders Cast In-Place structures; energy exploration structures;
in Cylindrical Molds (ASTM C873–85). energy production, transfer and storage
• Standard Method for Developing Early structures and facilities; auditoriums; malls;
Age Compressive Test Values and Projecting amphitheaters; stadiums; power plants;
Later Age Strengths (ASTM C918–80). mills; chemical process structures; bridges;
• Recommended Practice for Inspection trestles; overpasses; underpasses; viaducts;
and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and aqueducts; aerospace facilities and struc-
Bituminous Materials as Used in Construc- tures; radar and communication structures;
tion (ASTM E329–77). light towers; signage; billboards; score-
• Method of Making and Curing Concrete boards; conveyor systems; conveyor supports
Test Specimens in the Laboratory (ASTM and related framing; stairways; stair towers;
C192–88). fire escapes; draft curtains; fire containment
• Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled structures; monorails; aerialways; catwalks;
Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete (ASTM curtain walls; window walls; store fronts; el-
C42–87). evator fronts; entrances; skylights; metal
• Methods of Securing, Preparing and Test- roofs; industrial structures; hi-bay struc-
ing Specimens from Hardened Lightweight tures; rail, marine and other transportation
408
structures; sound barriers; water process and pansion joint assemblies; slide bear-
water containment structures; air and cable ings; hydraulic structures; fascias; sof-
supported structures; space frames; geodesic fit panels; penthouse enclosures; sky-
domes; canopies; racks and rack support
structures and frames; platforms; walkways;
lights; joint fillers; gaskets; sealants
balconies; atriums; penthouses; car dumpers; and seals; doors; windows; hardware;
stackers/reclaimers; cranes and craneways; detention/security equipment and
bins; hoppers; ovens; furnaces; stacks; doors, windows and hardware; con-
amusement park structures and rides; and veying systems; building specialties;
artistic and monumental structures. building equipment; machinery and
(b)(1) Steel erection activities in- plant equipment, furnishings and spe-
clude hoisting, laying out, placing, cial construction.
connecting, welding, burning, guying, (c) The duties of controlling contrac-
bracing, bolting, plumbing and rigging tors under this subpart include, but are
structural steel, steel joists and metal not limited to, the duties specified in
buildings; installing metal decking, §§ 1926.752 (a) and (c), 1926.755(b)(2),
curtain walls, window walls, siding sys- 1926.759(b), and 1926.760(e).
tems, miscellaneous metals, orna-
mental iron and similar materials; and § 1926.751 Definitions.
moving point-to-point while per- Anchored bridging means that the
forming these activities. steel joist bridging is connected to a
(2) The following activities are cov- bridging terminus point.
ered by this subpart when they occur Bolted diagonal bridging means diago-
during and are a part of steel erection nal bridging that is bolted to a steel
activities: rigging, hoisting, laying out, joist or joists.
placing, connecting, guying, bracing,
Bridging clip means a device that is
dismantling, burning, welding, bolting,
attached to the steel joist to allow the
grinding, sealing, caulking, and all re-
bolting of the bridging to the steel
lated activities for construction, alter-
joist.
ation and/or repair of materials and as-
semblies such as structural steel; fer- Bridging terminus point means a wall,
rous metals and alloys; non-ferrous a beam, tandem joists (with all bridg-
metals and alloys; glass; plastics and ing installed and a horizontal truss in
synthetic composite materials; struc- the plane of the top chord) or other ele-
tural metal framing and related brac- ment at an end or intermediate
ing and assemblies; anchoring devices; point(s) of a line of bridging that pro-
structural cabling; cable stays; perma- vides an anchor point for the steel joist
nent and temporary bents and towers; bridging.
falsework for temporary supports of Choker means a wire rope or syn-
permanent steel members; stone and thetic fiber rigging assembly that is
other non-precast concrete architec- used to attach a load to a hoisting de-
tural materials mounted on steel vice.
frames; safety systems for steel erec- Cold forming means the process of
tion; steel and metal joists; metal using press brakes, rolls, or other
decking and raceway systems and ac- methods to shape steel into desired
cessories; metal roofing and acces- cross sections at room temperature.
sories; metal siding; bridge flooring; Column means a load-carrying
cold formed steel framing; elevator vertical member that is part of the pri-
beams; grillage; shelf racks; multi-pur- mary skeletal framing system. Col-
pose supports; crane rails and acces- umns do not include posts.
sories; miscellaneous, architectural Competent person (also defined in
and ornamental metals and metal § 1926.32) means one who is capable of
work; ladders; railings; handrails; identifying existing and predictable
fences and gates; gratings; trench cov- hazards in the surroundings or working
ers; floor plates; castings; sheet metal conditions which are unsanitary, haz-
fabrications; metal panels and panel ardous, or dangerous to employees, and
wall systems; louvers; column covers; who has authorization to take prompt
enclosures and pockets; stairs; per- corrective measures to eliminate them.

forated metals; ornamental iron work, Connector means an employee who,
expansion control including bridge ex- working with hoisting equipment, is
409
placing and connecting structural Double connection seat means a struc-

members and/or components. tural attachment that, during the in-
Constructibility means the ability to stallation of a double connection, sup-
erect structural steel members in ac- ports the first member while the sec-
cordance with subpart R without hav- ond member is connected.
ing to alter the over-all structural de- Erection bridging means the bolted di-
sign. agonal bridging that is required to be
Construction load (for joist erection) installed prior to releasing the hoisting
means any load other than the weight cables from the steel joists.
of the employee(s), the joists and the Fall restraint system means a fall pro-
bridging bundle. tection system that prevents the user
Controlled Decking Zone (CDZ) means from falling any distance. The system
an area in which certain work (for ex- is comprised of either a body belt or
ample, initial installation and place- body harness, along with an anchorage,
ment of metal decking) may take place connectors and other necessary equip-
without the use of guardrail systems, ment. The other components typically
personal fall arrest systems, fall re- include a lanyard, and may also in-
straint systems, or safety net systems clude a lifeline and other devices.
and where access to the zone is con- Final interior perimeter means the pe-
trolled. rimeter of a large permanent open
Controlled load lowering means low- space within a building such as an atri-
ering a load by means of a mechanical um or courtyard. This does not include
hoist drum device that allows a hoisted openings for stairways, elevator shafts,
load to be lowered with maximum con- etc.
trol using the gear train or hydraulic Girt (in systems-engineered metal build-
components of the hoist mechanism. ings) means a ‘‘Z’’ or ‘‘C’’ shaped mem-
Controlled load lowering requires the ber formed from sheet steel spanning
use of the hoist drive motor, rather between primary framing and sup-
than the load hoist brake, to lower the porting wall material.
load. Headache ball means a weighted hook
Controlling contractor means a prime that is used to attach loads to the hoist
contractor, general contractor, con- load line of the crane.
struction manager or any other legal Hoisting equipment means commer-
entity which has the overall responsi- cially manufactured lifting equipment
bility for the construction of the designed to lift and position a load of
project—its planning, quality and com- known weight to a location at some
pletion. known elevation and horizontal dis-
Critical lift means a lift that (1) ex- tance from the equipment’s center of
ceeds 75 percent of the rated capacity rotation. ‘‘Hoisting equipment’’ in-
of the crane or derrick, or (2) requires cludes but is not limited to cranes, der-
the use of more than one crane or derricks, tower cranes, barge-mounted
rick. derricks or cranes, gin poles and gan-
Decking hole means a gap or void try hoist systems. A ‘‘come-a-long’’ (a
more than 2 inches (5.1 cm) in its least mechanical device, usually consisting
dimension and less than 12 inches (30.5 of a chain or cable attached at each
cm) in its greatest dimension in a end, that is used to facilitate move-
floor, roof or other walking/working ment of materials through leverage) is
surface. Pre-engineered holes in cel- not considered ‘‘hoisting equipment.’’
lular decking (for wires, cables, etc.) Leading edge means the unprotected
are not included in this definition. side and edge of a floor, roof, or
Derrick floor means an elevated floor formwork for a floor or other walking/
of a building or structure that has been working surface (such as deck) which
designated to receive hoisted pieces of changes location as additional floor,
steel prior to final placement. roof, decking or formwork sections are
Double connection means an attach- placed, formed or constructed.
ment method where the connection Metal decking means a commercially
point is intended for two pieces of steel manufactured, structural grade, cold
which share common bolts on either rolled metal panel formed into a series
side of a central piece. of parallel ribs; for this subpart, this
410
includes metal floor and roof decks, sional responsible for the design of
standing seam metal roofs, other metal structural steel framing and whose seal
roof systems and other products such appears on the structural contract doc-
as bar gratings, checker plate, ex- uments.
panded metal panels, and similar prod- Purlin (in systems-engineered metal
ucts. After installation and proper fas- buildings) means a ‘‘Z’’ or ‘‘C’’ shaped
tening, these decking materials serve a member formed from sheet steel span-
combination of functions including, ning between primary framing and sup-
but not limited to: a structural ele- porting roof material.
ment designed in combination with the
Qualified person (also defined in
structure to resist, distribute and
§ 1926.32) means one who, by possession
transfer loads, stiffen the structure and
provide a diaphragm action; a walking/ of a recognized degree, certificate, or
working surface; a form for concrete professional standing, or who by exten-
slabs; a support for roofing systems; sive knowledge, training, and experi-
and a finished floor or roof. ence, has successfully demonstrated
Multiple lift rigging means a rigging the ability to solve or resolve problems
assembly manufactured by wire rope relating to the subject matter, the
rigging suppliers that facilitates the work, or the project.
attachment of up to five independent Safety deck attachment means an ini-
loads to the hoist rigging of a crane. tial attachment that is used to secure
Opening means a gap or void 12 an initially placed sheet of decking to
inches (30.5 cm) or more in its least di- keep proper alignment and bearing
mension in a floor, roof or other walk- with structural support members.
ing/working surface. For the purposes Shear connector means headed steel
of this subpart, skylights and smoke studs, steel bars, steel lugs, and similar
domes that do not meet the strength devices which are attached to a struc-
requirements of § 1926.754(e)(3) shall be tural member for the purpose of
regarded as openings. achieving composite action with con-
Permanent floor means a structurally crete.
completed floor at any level or ele-
Steel erection means the construction,
vation (including slab on grade).
Personal fall arrest system means a alteration or repair of steel buildings,
system used to arrest an employee in a bridges and other structures, including
fall from a working level. A personal the installation of metal decking and
fall arrest system consists of an an- all planking used during the process of
chorage, connectors, a body harness erection.
and may include a lanyard, decelera- Steel joist means an open web, sec-
tion device, lifeline, or suitable com- ondary load-carrying member of 144
bination of these. The use of a body feet (43.9 m) or less, designed by the
belt for fall arrest is prohibited. manufacturer, used for the support of
Positioning device system means a body floors and roofs. This does not include
belt or body harness rigged to allow an structural steel trusses or cold-formed
employee to be supported on an ele- joists.
vated, vertical surface, such as a wall Steel joist girder means an open web,
or column and work with both hands primary load-carrying member, de-
free while leaning. signed by the manufacturer, used for
Post means a structural member with the support of floors and roofs. This
a longitudinal axis that is essentially does not include structural steel truss-
vertical, that: (1) weighs 300 pounds or es.
less and is axially loaded (a load press-
Steel truss means an open web mem-
es down on the top end), or (2) is not
ber designed of structural steel compo-
axially loaded, but is laterally re-
strained by the above member. Posts nents by the project structural engi-
typically support stair landings, wall neer of record. For the purposes of this
framing, mezzanines and other sub- subpart, a steel truss is considered
structures. equivalent to a solid web structural

Project structural engineer of record member.
means the registered, licensed profes-
411
Structural steel means a steel member, erect steel unless it has received writ-
or a member made of a substitute ma- ten notification that the concrete in
terial (such as, but not limited to, fi- the footings, piers and walls or the
berglass, aluminum or composite mem- mortar in the masonry piers and walls
bers). These members include, but are has attained, on the basis of an appro-
not limited to, steel joists, joist gird- priate ASTM standard test method of
ers, purlins, columns, beams, trusses, field-cured samples, either 75 percent
splices, seats, metal decking, girts, and of the intended minimum compressive
all bridging, and cold formed metal design strength or sufficient strength
framing which is integrated with the to support the loads imposed during
structural steel framing of a building. steel erection.
Systems-engineered metal building (c) Site layout. The controlling con-
means a metal, field-assembled build- tractor shall ensure that the following
ing system consisting of framing, roof is provided and maintained:
and wall coverings. Typically, many of (1) Adequate access roads into and
these components are cold-formed through the site for the safe delivery
shapes. These individual parts are fab- and movement of derricks, cranes,
ricated in one or more manufacturing trucks, other necessary equipment, and
facilities and shipped to the job site for the material to be erected and means
assembly into the final structure. The and methods for pedestrian and vehic-
engineering design of the system is ular control. Exception: this require-
normally the responsibility of the sys- ment does not apply to roads outside of
tems-engineered metal building manu- the construction site.
facturer. (2) A firm, properly graded, drained
Tank means a container for holding area, readily accessible to the work
gases, liquids or solids. with adequate space for the safe stor-
Unprotected sides and edges means any age of materials and the safe operation
side or edge (except at entrances to of the erector’s equipment.
points of access) of a walking/working (d) Pre-planning of overhead hoisting
surface, for example a, floor, roof, ramp operations. All hoisting operations in
or runway, where there is no wall or steel erection shall be pre-planned to
guardrail system at least 39 inches (1.0 ensure that the requirements of
m) high. § 1926.753(d) are met.
§ 1926.752 Site layout, site-specific (e) Site-specific erection plan. Where
erection plan and construction se- employers elect, due to conditions spe-
quence. cific to the site, to develop alternate
means and methods that provide em-
(a) Approval to begin steel erection. Be-
ployee protection in accordance with
fore authorizing the commencement of
§ 1926.753(c)(5), § 1926.757(a)(4) or
steel erection, the controlling con-
§ 1926.757(e)(4), a site-specific erection
tractor shall ensure that the steel erec-
plan shall be developed by a qualified
tor is provided with the following writ-
person and be available at the work
ten notifications:
site. Guidelines for establishing a site-
(1) The concrete in the footings, piers
specific erection plan are contained in
and walls and the mortar in the ma-
appendix A to this subpart.
sonry piers and walls has attained, on
the basis of an appropriate ASTM § 1926.753 Hoisting and rigging.
standard test method of field-cured
samples, either 75 percent of the in- (a) All the provisions of subpart CC
tended minimum compressive design apply to hoisting and rigging with the
strength or sufficient strength to sup- exception of § 1926.1431(a).
port the loads imposed during steel (b) In addition, paragraphs (c)
erection. through (e) of this section apply re-
(2) Any repairs, replacements and garding the hazards associated with
modifications to the anchor bolts were hoisting and rigging.
conducted in accordance with (c) General. (1) Pre-shift visual in-
§ 1926.755(b). spection of cranes.

(b) Commencement of steel erection. A (i) Cranes being used in steel erection
steel erection contractor shall not activities shall be visually inspected
412
prior to each shift by a competent per- (2) A qualified rigger (a rigger who is
son; the inspection shall include obser- also a qualified person) shall inspect
vation for deficiencies during oper- the rigging prior to each shift in ac-
ation. At a minimum this inspection cordance with § 1926.251.
shall include the following: (3) The headache ball, hook or load
(A) All control mechanisms for mal- shall not be used to transport per-
adjustments; sonnel except as provided in paragraph
(B) Control and drive mechanism for (c)(4) of this section.
excessive wear of components and con- (4) Cranes or derricks may be used to
tamination by lubricants, water or hoist employees on a personnel plat-
other foreign matter; form when work under this subpart is
(C) Safety devices, including but not being conducted, provided that all pro-
limited to boom angle indicators, boom visions of § 1926.1431 (except for
stops, boom kick out devices, anti-two § 1926.1431(a)) are met.
block devices, and load moment indica- (5) Safety latches on hooks shall not
tors where required; be deactivated or made inoperable ex-
(D) Air, hydraulic, and other pressur- cept:
ized lines for deterioration or leakage, (i) When a qualified rigger has deter-
particularly those which flex in normal mined that the hoisting and placing of
operation; purlins and single joists can be per-
(E) Hooks and latches for deforma- formed more safely by doing so; or
tion, chemical damage, cracks, or (ii) When equivalent protection is
wear; provided in a site-specific erection
(F) Wire rope reeving for compliance plan.
with hoisting equipment manufactur- (d) Working under loads. (1) Routes for
er’s specifications; suspended loads shall be pre-planned to
(G) Electrical apparatus for malfunc- ensure that no employee is required to
tioning, signs of excessive deteriora- work directly below a suspended load
tion, dirt, or moisture accumulation; except for:
(H) Hydraulic system for proper fluid (i) Employees engaged in the initial
level; connection of the steel; or
(I) Tires for proper inflation and con- (ii) Employees necessary for the
dition; hooking or unhooking of the load.
(J) Ground conditions around the (2) When working under suspended
hoisting equipment for proper support, loads, the following criteria shall be
including ground settling under and met:
around outriggers, ground water accu- (i) Materials being hoisted shall be
mulation, or similar conditions; rigged to prevent unintentional dis-
(K) The hoisting equipment for level placement;
position; and (ii) Hooks with self-closing safety
(L) The hoisting equipment for level latches or their equivalent shall be
position after each move and setup. used to prevent components from slip-
(ii) If any deficiency is identified, an ping out of the hook; and
immediate determination shall be (iii) All loads shall be rigged by a
made by the competent person as to qualified rigger
whether the deficiency constitutes a (e) Multiple lift rigging procedure. (1) A
hazard. multiple lift shall only be performed if
(iii) If the deficiency is determined to the following criteria are met:
constitute a hazard, the hoisting equip- (i) A multiple lift rigging assembly is
ment shall be removed from service used;
until the deficiency has been corrected. (ii) A maximum of five members are
(iv) The operator shall be responsible hoisted per lift;
for those operations under the opera- (iii) Only beams and similar struc-
tor’s direct control. Whenever there is tural members are lifted; and
any doubt as to safety, the operator (iv) All employees engaged in the
shall have the authority to stop and multiple lift have been trained in these
refuse to handle loads until safety has procedures in accordance with
been assured. § 1926.761(c)(1).
413
(v) No crane is permitted to be used porate by reference. (See http://

for a multiple lift where such use is www.fhwa.dot.gov/bridge/lrfd/index.htm.)
contrary to the manufacturer’s speci- (b) The following additional require-
fications and limitations. ments shall apply for multi-story
(2) Components of the multiple lift structures:
rigging assembly shall be specifically (1) The permanent floors shall be in-
designed and assembled with a max- stalled as the erection of structural
imum capacity for total assembly and members progresses, and there shall be
for each individual attachment point. not more than eight stories between
This capacity, certified by the manu- the erection floor and the upper-most
facturer or a qualified rigger, shall be permanent floor, except where the
based on the manufacturer’s specifica- structural integrity is maintained as a
tions with a 5 to 1 safety factor for all result of the design.
components. (2) At no time shall there be more
(3) The total load shall not exceed: than four floors or 48 feet (14.6 m),
(i) The rated capacity of the hoisting whichever is less, of unfinished bolting
equipment specified in the hoisting or welding above the foundation or up-
equipment load charts; permost permanently secured floor, ex-
(ii) The rigging capacity specified in cept where the structural integrity is
the rigging rating chart. maintained as a result of the design.
(4) The multiple lift rigging assembly (3) A fully planked or decked floor or
shall be rigged with members: nets shall be maintained within two
(i) Attached at their center of grav- stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever is
ity and maintained reasonably level; less, directly under any erection work
(ii) Rigged from top down; and being performed.
(iii) Rigged at least 7 feet (2.1 m) (c) Walking/working surfaces—shear
apart. connectors and other similar devices—(1)
(5) The members on the multiple lift Tripping hazards. Shear connectors
rigging assembly shall be set from the (such as headed steel studs, steel bars
bottom up. or steel lugs), reinforcing bars, de-
(6) Controlled load lowering shall be formed anchors or threaded studs shall
used whenever the load is over the con- not be attached to the top flanges of
nectors. beams, joists or beam attachments so
that they project vertically from or
[66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 75
horizontally across the top flange of
FR 48134, Aug. 9, 2010]
the member until after the metal deck-
§ 1926.754 Structural steel assembly. ing, or other walking/working surface,
has been installed.
(a) Structural stability shall be (2) Installation of shear connectors on
maintained at all times during the composite floors, roofs and bridge decks.
erection process. When shear connectors are used in con-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): Federal Highway struction of composite floors, roofs and
Administration (FHWA) regulations incor- bridge decks, employees shall lay out
porate by reference a number of standards, and install the shear connectors after
policies, and standard specifications pub- the metal decking has been installed,
lished by the American Association of State using the metal decking as a working
Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO) and other organizations. (See 23
platform. Shear connectors shall not be
CFR 625.4). Many of these incorporated pro- installed from within a controlled
visions may be relevant to maintaining decking zone (CDZ), as specified in
structural stability during the erection proc- § 1926.760(c)(8).
ess. For instance, as of May 17, 2010, in many (d) Plumbing-up. (1) When deemed
cases FHWA requires a Registered Engineer necessary by a competent person,
to prepare and seal working drawings for plumbing-up equipment shall be in-
falsework used in highway bridge construc- stalled in conjunction with the steel
tion. (See AASHTO Specifications for High-
way Bridges, Div. II, § 3.2.1, 15th edition, 1992,
erection process to ensure the stability
of the structure.
which FHWA incorporates by reference in 23

CFR 625.4). FHWA also encourages compli- (2) When used, plumbing-up equip-
ance with AASHTO Specifications that the ment shall be in place and properly in-
FHWA regulations do not currently incor- stalled before the structure is loaded
414
with construction material such as (ii) All covers shall be secured when
loads of joists, bundles of decking or installed to prevent accidental dis-
bundles of bridging. placement by the wind, equipment or
(3) Plumbing-up equipment shall be employees.
removed only with the approval of a (iii) All covers shall be painted with
competent person. high-visibility paint or shall be marked
(e) Metal decking—(1) Hoisting, landing with the word ‘‘HOLE’’ or ‘‘COVER’’ to
and placing of metal decking bundles. (i) provide warning of the hazard.
Bundle packaging and strapping shall (iv) Smoke dome or skylight fixtures
not be used for hoisting unless specifi- that have been installed, are not con-
cally designed for that purpose. sidered covers for the purpose of this
(ii) If loose items such as dunnage, section unless they meet the strength
flashing, or other materials are placed requirements of paragraph (e)(3)(i) of
on the top of metal decking bundles to this section.
be hoisted, such items shall be secured (4) Decking gaps around columns. Wire
to the bundles. mesh, exterior plywood, or equivalent,
(iii) Bundles of metal decking on shall be installed around columns
joists shall be landed in accordance where planks or metal decking do not
with § 1926.757(e)(4). fit tightly. The materials used must be
(iv) Metal decking bundles shall be of sufficient strength to provide fall
landed on framing members so that protection for personnel and prevent
enough support is provided to allow the objects from falling through.
bundles to be unbanded without dis- (5) Installation of metal decking. (i) Ex-
lodging the bundles from the supports. cept as provided in § 1926.760(c), metal
(v) At the end of the shift or when en- decking shall be laid tightly and imme-
vironmental or jobsite conditions re- diately secured upon placement to pre-
quire, metal decking shall be secured vent accidental movement or displace-
against displacement. ment.
(2) Roof and floor holes and openings. (ii) During initial placement, metal
Metal decking at roof and floor holes decking panels shall be placed to en-
and openings shall be installed as fol- sure full support by structural mem-
lows: bers.
(i) Framed metal deck openings shall (6) Derrick floors. (i) A derrick floor
have structural members turned down shall be fully decked and/or planked
to allow continuous deck installation and the steel member connections com-
except where not allowed by structural pleted to support the intended floor
design constraints or constructibility. loading.
(ii) Roof and floor holes and openings (ii) Temporary loads placed on a der-
shall be decked over. Where large size, rick floor shall be distributed over the
configuration or other structural de- underlying support members so as to
sign does not allow openings to be prevent local overloading of the deck
decked over (such as elevator shafts, material.
stair wells, etc.) employees shall be
protected in accordance with [66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 71
§ 1926.760(a)(1). FR 2885, Jan. 18, 2006; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3,
(iii) Metal decking holes and open- 2006; 75 FR 27429, May 17, 2010]
ings shall not be cut until immediately
§ 1926.755 Column anchorage.
prior to being permanently filled with
the equipment or structure needed or (a) General requirements for erection
intended to fulfill its specific use and stability. (1) All columns shall be an-
which meets the strength requirements chored by a minimum of 4 anchor rods
of paragraph (e)(3) of this section, or (anchor bolts).
shall be immediately covered. (2) Each column anchor rod (anchor
(3) Covering roof and floor openings. (i) bolt) assembly, including the column-
Covers for roof and floor openings shall to-base plate weld and the column
be capable of supporting, without fail- foundation, shall be designed to resist
ure, twice the weight of the employees, a minimum eccentric gravity load of
equipment and materials that may be 300 pounds (136.2 kg) located 18 inches
imposed on the cover at any one time. (.46m) from the extreme outer face of
415
the column in each direction at the top tached seat or equivalent connection
of the column shaft. device is supplied with the member to
(3) Columns shall be set on level fin- secure the first member and prevent
ished floors, pre-grouted leveling the column from being displaced (See
plates, leveling nuts, or shim packs appendix H to this subpart for exam-
which are adequate to transfer the con- ples of equivalent connection devices).
struction loads. (2) If a seat or equivalent device is
(4) All columns shall be evaluated by used, the seat (or device) shall be de-
a competent person to determine signed to support the load during the
whether guying or bracing is needed; if double connection process. It shall be
guying or bracing is needed, it shall be adequately bolted or welded to both a
installed. supporting member and the first mem-
(b) Repair, replacement or field modi- ber before the nuts on the shared bolts
fication of anchor rods (anchor bolts). (1) are removed to make the double con-
Anchor rods (anchor bolts) shall not be nection.
repaired, replaced or field-modified (d) Column splices. Each column splice
without the approval of the project shall be designed to resist a minimum
structural engineer of record. eccentric gravity load of 300 pounds
(2) Prior to the erection of a column, (136.2 kg) located 18 inches (.46 m) from
the controlling contractor shall pro- the extreme outer face of the column
vide written notification to the steel in each direction at the top of the col-
erector if there has been any repair, re- umn shaft.
placement or modification of the an- (e) Perimeter columns. Perimeter col-
chor rods (anchor bolts) of that columns shall not be erected unless:
umn. (1) The perimeter columns extend a
minimum of 48 inches (1.2 m) above the
§ 1926.756 Beams and columns. finished floor to permit installation of
(a) General. (1) During the final plac- perimeter safety cables prior to erec-
ing of solid web structural members, tion of the next tier, except where
the load shall not be released from the constructibility does not allow (see ap-
hoisting line until the members are se- pendix F to this subpart);
cured with at least two bolts per con- (2) The perimeter columns have holes
nection, of the same size and strength or other devices in or attached to pe-
as shown in the erection drawings, rimeter columns at 42–45 inches (107–114
drawn up wrench-tight or the equiva- cm) above the finished floor and the
lent as specified by the project struc- midpoint between the finished floor
tural engineer of record, except as and the top cable to permit installa-
specified in paragraph (b) of this section of perimeter safety cables required
tion. by § 1926.760(a)(2), except where
(2) A competent person shall deter- constructibility does not allow. (See
mine if more than two bolts are nec- appendix F to this subpart).
essary to ensure the stability of canti-
levered members; if additional bolts § 1926.757 Open web steel joists.
are needed, they shall be installed. (a) General. (1) Except as provided in
(b) Diagonal bracing. Solid web struc- paragraph (a)(2) of this section, where
tural members used as diagonal brac- steel joists are used and columns are
ing shall be secured by at least one bolt not framed in at least two directions
per connection drawn up wrench-tight with solid web structural steel mem-
or the equivalent as specified by the bers, a steel joist shall be field-bolted
project structural engineer of record. at the column to provide lateral sta-
(c)(1) Double connections at columns bility to the column during erection.
and/or at beam webs over a column. When For the installation of this joist:
two structural members on opposite (i) A vertical stabilizer plate shall be
sides of a column web, or a beam web provided on each column for steel
over a column, are connected sharing joists. The plate shall be a minimum of
common connection holes, at least one 6 inch by 6 inch (152 mm by 152 mm)
bolt with its wrench-tight nut shall re- and shall extend at least 3 inches (76
main connected to the first member mm) below the bottom chord of the
unless a shop-attached or field-at- joist with a 13⁄16 inch (21 mm) hole to
416
provide an attachment point for guying fabricated to allow for field bolting
or plumbing cables. during erection.
(ii) The bottom chords of steel joists (ii) These connections shall be field-
at columns shall be stabilized to pre- bolted unless constructibility does not
vent rotation during erection. allow.
(iii) Hoisting cables shall not be re- (9) Steel joists and steel joist girders
leased until the seat at each end of the shall not be used as anchorage points
steel joist is field-bolted, and each end for a fall arrest system unless written
of the bottom chord is restrained by approval to do so is obtained from a
the column stabilizer plate. qualified person.
(2) Where constructibility does not
(10) A bridging terminus point shall
allow a steel joist to be installed at the
be established before bridging is in-
column:
stalled. (See appendix C to this sub-
(i) an alternate means of stabilizing
joists shall be installed on both sides part.)
near the column and shall: (b) Attachment of steel joists and steel
(A) provide stability equivalent to joist girders. (1) Each end of ‘‘K’’ series
paragraph (a)(1) of this section; steel joists shall be attached to the
(B) be designed by a qualified person; support structure with a minimum of
(C) be shop installed; and two 1⁄8-inch (3 mm) fillet welds 1 inch
(D) be included in the erection draw- (25 mm) long or with two 1⁄2-inch (13
ings. mm) bolts, or the equivalent.
(ii) hoisting cables shall not be re- (2) Each end of ‘‘LH’’ and ‘‘DLH’’ se-
leased until the seat at each end of the ries steel joists and steel joist girders
steel joist is field-bolted and the joist shall be attached to the support struc-
is stabilized. ture with a minimum of two 1⁄4-inch (6
(3) Where steel joists at or near col- mm) fillet welds 2 inches (51 mm) long,
umns span 60 feet (18.3 m) or less, the or with two 3⁄4-inch (19 mm) bolts, or
joist shall be designed with sufficient the equivalent.
strength to allow one employee to re- (3) Except as provided in paragraph
lease the hoisting cable without the (b)(4) of this section, each steel joist
need for erection bridging. shall be attached to the support struc-
(4) Where steel joists at or near col- ture, at least at one end on both sides
umns span more than 60 feet (18.3 m), of the seat, immediately upon place-
the joists shall be set in tandem with ment in the final erection position and
all bridging installed unless an alter- before additional joists are placed.
native method of erection, which pro- (4) Panels that have been pre-assem-
vides equivalent stability to the steel bled from steel joists with bridging
joist, is designed by a qualified person shall be attached to the structure at
and is included in the site-specific erec- each corner before the hoisting cables
tion plan. are released.
(5) A steel joist or steel joist girder
(c) Erection of steel joists. (1) Both
shall not be placed on any support
sides of the seat of one end of each
structure unless such structure is sta-
steel joist that requires bridging under
bilized.
(6) When steel joist(s) are landed on a Tables A and B shall be attached to the
structure, they shall be secured to pre- support structure before hoisting ca-
vent unintentional displacement prior bles are released.
to installation. (2) For joists over 60 feet, both ends
(7) No modification that affects the of the joist shall be attached as speci-
strength of a steel joist or steel joist fied in paragraph (b) of this section and
girder shall be made without the ap- the provisions of paragraph (d) of this
proval of the project structural engi- section met before the hoisting cables
neer of record. are released.
(8) Field-bolted joists. (i) Except for (3) On steel joists that do not require
steel joists that have been pre-assem- erection bridging under Tables A and
bled into panels, connections of indi- B, only one employee shall be allowed
vidual steel joists to steel structures in on the joist until all bridging is in-
bays of 40 feet (12.2 m) or more shall be stalled and anchored.
417
TABLE A—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR SHORT TABLE A—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR SHORT
SPAN JOISTS SPAN JOISTS—Continued
Joist Span Joist Span
8L1 ................................................................. NM 14KCS2 ......................................................... NM

10K1 .............................................................. NM 14KCS3 ......................................................... NM
12K1 .............................................................. 23–0 16KCS2 ......................................................... NM
12K3 .............................................................. NM 16KCS3 ......................................................... NM
12K5 .............................................................. NM 16KCS4 ......................................................... NM
14K1 .............................................................. 27–0 16KCS5 ......................................................... NM
14K3 .............................................................. NM 18KCS2 ......................................................... 35–0
14K4 .............................................................. NM 18KCS3 ......................................................... NM
14K6 .............................................................. NM 18KCS4 ......................................................... NM
16K2 .............................................................. 29–0 18KCS5 ......................................................... NM
16K3 .............................................................. 30–0 20KCS2 ......................................................... 36–0
16K4 .............................................................. 32–0 20KCS3 ......................................................... 39–0
16K5 .............................................................. 32–0 20KCS4 ......................................................... NM
16K6 .............................................................. NM 20KCS5 ......................................................... NM
16K7 .............................................................. NM 22KCS2 ......................................................... 36–0
16K9 .............................................................. NM 22KCS3 ......................................................... 40–0
18K3 .............................................................. 31–0 22KCS4 ......................................................... NM
18K4 .............................................................. 32–0 22KCS5 ......................................................... NM
18K5 .............................................................. 33–0 24KCS2 ......................................................... 39–0
18K6 .............................................................. 35–0 24KCS3 ......................................................... 44–0
18K7 .............................................................. NM 24KCS4 ......................................................... NM
18K9 .............................................................. NM 24KCS5 ......................................................... NM
18K10 ............................................................ NM 26KCS2 ......................................................... 39–0
20K3 .............................................................. 32–0 26KCS3 ......................................................... 44–0
20K4 .............................................................. 34–0 26KCS4 ......................................................... NM
20K5 .............................................................. 34–0 26KCS5 ......................................................... NM
20K6 .............................................................. 36–0 28KCS2 ......................................................... 40–0
20K7 .............................................................. 39–0 28KCS3 ......................................................... 45–0
20K9 .............................................................. 39–0 28KCS4 ......................................................... 53–0
20K10 ............................................................ NM 28KCS5 ......................................................... 53–0
22K4 .............................................................. 34–0 30KC53 .......................................................... 45–0
22K5 .............................................................. 35–0 30KCS4 ......................................................... 54–0
22K6 .............................................................. 36–0 30KCS5 ......................................................... 54–0
22K7 .............................................................. 40–0
22K9 .............................................................. 40–0 NM = diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory for joists
under 40 feet.
22K10 ............................................................ 40–0
22K11 ............................................................ 40–0
24K4 .............................................................. 36–0 TABLE B—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR LONG SPAN
24K5 .............................................................. 38–0 JOISTS
24K6 .............................................................. 39–0
24K7 .............................................................. 43–0 Joist Span
24K8 .............................................................. 43–0
24K9 .............................................................. 44–0 18LH02 .................................. 33–0.
24K10 ............................................................ NM 18LH03 .................................. NM.
24K12 ............................................................ NM 18LH04 .................................. NM.
26K5 .............................................................. 38–0 18LH05 .................................. NM.
26K6 .............................................................. 39–0 18LH06 .................................. NM.
26K7 .............................................................. 43–0 18LH07 .................................. NM.
26K8 .............................................................. 44–0 18LH08 .................................. NM.
26K9 .............................................................. 45–0 18LH09 .................................. NM.
26K10 ............................................................ 49–0 20LH02 .................................. 33–0.
26K12 ............................................................ NM 20LH03 .................................. 38–0.
28K6 .............................................................. 40–0 20LH04 .................................. NM.
28K7 .............................................................. 43–0 20LH05 .................................. NM.
28K8 .............................................................. 44–0 20LH06 .................................. NM.
28K9 .............................................................. 45–0 20LH07 .................................. NM.
28K10 ............................................................ 49–0 20LH08 .................................. NM.
28K12 ............................................................ 53–0 20LH09 .................................. NM.
30K7 .............................................................. 44–0 20LH10 .................................. NM.
30K8 .............................................................. 45–0 24LH03 .................................. 35–0.
30K9 .............................................................. 45–0 24LH04 .................................. 39–0.
30K10 ............................................................ 50–0 24LH05 .................................. 40–0.
30K11 ............................................................ 52–0 24LH06 .................................. 45–0.
30K12 ............................................................ 54–0 24LH07 .................................. NM.
10KCS1 ......................................................... NM 24LH08 .................................. NM.
10KCS2 ......................................................... NM 24LH09 .................................. NM.
10KCS3 ......................................................... NM 24LH10 .................................. NM.
12KCS1 ......................................................... NM 24LH11 .................................. NM.

12KCS2 ......................................................... NM 28LH05 .................................. 42–0.
12KCS3 ......................................................... NM 28LH06 .................................. 42–0.
14KCS1 ......................................................... NM 28LH07 .................................. NM.
418
TABLE B—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR LONG SPAN (ii) Two rows of bolted diagonal erec-
JOISTS—Continued tion bridging shall be installed near
the third points of the steel joist;
Joist Span
(iii) Hoisting cables shall not be re-
28LH08 .................................. NM. leased until this bolted diagonal erec-
28LH09 .................................. NM. tion bridging is installed and anchored;
28LH10 .................................. NM. and
28LH11 .................................. NM.
28LH12 .................................. NM. (iv) No more than two employees
28LH13 .................................. NM. shall be allowed on these spans until
32LH06 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0. all other bridging is installed and an-
32LH07 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0. chored.
32LH08 .................................. 55–0 through 60–0.
32LH09 .................................. NM through 60–0.
(3) Where the span of the steel joist is
32LH10 .................................. NM through 60–0. over 100 feet (30.5 m) through 144 feet
32LH11 .................................. NM through 60–0. (43.9 m), the following shall apply:
32LH12 .................................. NM through 60–0. (i) All rows of bridging shall be
32LH13 .................................. NM through 60–0. bolted diagonal bridging;
32LH14 .................................. NM through 60–0.
32LH15 .................................. NM through 60–0. (ii) Hoisting cables shall not be re-
36LH07 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0. leased until all bridging is installed
36LH08 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0. and anchored; and
36LH09 .................................. 57–0 through 60–0. (iii) No more than two employees
36LH10 .................................. NM through 60–0.
36LH11 .................................. NM through 60–0.
shall be allowed on these spans until
36LH12 .................................. NM through 60–0. all bridging is installed and anchored.
36LH13 .................................. NM through 60–0. (4) For steel members spanning over
36LH14 .................................. NM through 60–0. 144 feet (43.9 m), the erection methods
36LH15 .................................. NM through 60–0.
used shall be in accordance with
NM = diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory for joists § 1926.756.
under 40 feet.
(5) Where any steel joist specified in
(4) Employees shall not be allowed on paragraphs (c)(2) and (d)(1), (d)(2), and
steel joists where the span of the steel (d)(3) of this section is a bottom chord
joist is equal to or greater than the bearing joist, a row of bolted diagonal
span shown in Tables A and B except in bridging shall be provided near the sup-
accordance with § 1926.757(d). port(s). This bridging shall be installed
(5) When permanent bridging ter- and anchored before the hoisting
minus points cannot be used during cable(s) is released.
erection, additional temporary bridg- (6) When bolted diagonal erection
ing terminus points are required to bridging is required by this section, the
provide stability. (See appendix C of following shall apply:
this subpart.) (i) The bridging shall be indicated on
(d) Erection bridging. (1) Where the the erection drawing;
span of the steel joist is equal to or (ii) The erection drawing shall be the
greater than the span shown in Tables exclusive indicator of the proper place-
A and B, the following shall apply: ment of this bridging;
(i) A row of bolted diagonal erection (iii) Shop-installed bridging clips, or
bridging shall be installed near the functional equivalents, shall be used
midspan of the steel joist; where the bridging bolts to the steel
(ii) Hoisting cables shall not be re- joists;
leased until this bolted diagonal erec- (iv) When two pieces of bridging are
tion bridging is installed and anchored; attached to the steel joist by a com-
and mon bolt, the nut that secures the first
(iii) No more than one employee shall piece of bridging shall not be removed
be allowed on these spans until all from the bolt for the attachment of the
other bridging is installed and an- second; and
chored. (v) Bridging attachments shall not
(2) Where the span of the steel joist is protrude above the top chord of the
over 60 feet (18.3 m) through 100 feet steel joist.
(30.5 m), the following shall apply: (e) Landing and placing loads. (1) Dur-
(i) All rows of bridging shall be ing the construction period, the em-
bolted diagonal bridging; ployer placing a load on steel joists
419
shall ensure that the load is distrib- each flange before the hoisting equip-
uted so as not to exceed the carrying ment is released.
capacity of any steel joist. (d) Construction loads shall not be
(2) Except for paragraph (e)(4) of this placed on any structural steel frame-
section, no construction loads are al- work unless such framework is safely
lowed on the steel joists until all bridg- bolted, welded or otherwise adequately
ing is installed and anchored and all secured.
joist-bearing ends are attached. (e) In girt and eave strut-to-frame
(3) The weight of a bundle of joist connections, when girts or eave struts
bridging shall not exceed a total of share common connection holes, at
1,000 pounds (454 kg). A bundle of joist least one bolt with its wrench-tight
bridging shall be placed on a minimum nut shall remain connected to the first
of three steel joists that are secured at member unless a manufacturer-sup-
one end. The edge of the bridging bun- plied, field-attached seat or similar
dle shall be positioned within 1 foot (.30 connection device is present to secure
m) of the secured end. the first member so that the girt or
(4) No bundle of decking may be eave strut is always secured against
placed on steel joists until all bridging displacement.
has been installed and anchored and all (f) Both ends of all steel joists or
joist bearing ends attached, unless all cold-formed joists shall be fully bolted
of the following conditions are met: and/or welded to the support structure
(i) The employer has first determined before:
from a qualified person and docu- (1) Releasing the hoisting cables;
mented in a site-specific erection plan (2) Allowing an employee on the
that the structure or portion of the joists; or
structure is capable of supporting the (3) Allowing any construction loads
load; on the joists.
(g) Purlins and girts shall not be used
(ii) The bundle of decking is placed
as an anchorage point for a fall arrest
on a minimum of three steel joists;
system unless written approval is ob-
(iii) The joists supporting the bundle tained from a qualified person.
of decking are attached at both ends; (h) Purlins may only be used as a
(iv) At least one row of bridging is in- walking/working surface when install-
stalled and anchored; ing safety systems, after all permanent
(v) The total weight of the bundle of bridging has been installed and fall
decking does not exceed 4,000 pounds protection is provided.
(1816 kg); and (i) Construction loads may be placed
(vi) Placement of the bundle of deck- only within a zone that is within 8 feet
ing shall be in accordance with para- (2.5 m) of the center-line of the primary
graph (e)(5) of this section. support member.
(5) The edge of the construction load
shall be placed within 1 foot (.30 m) of § 1926.759 Falling object protection.
the bearing surface of the joist end. (a) Securing loose items aloft. All mate-
rials, equipment, and tools, which are
§ 1926.758 Systems-engineered metal not in use while aloft, shall be secured
buildings.
against accidental displacement.
(a) All of the requirements of this (b) Protection from falling objects other
subpart apply to the erection of sys- than materials being hoisted. The con-
tems-engineered metal buildings ex- trolling contractor shall bar other con-
cept §§ 1926.755 (column anchorage) and struction processes below steel erec-
1926.757 (open web steel joists). tion unless overhead protection for the
(b) Each structural column shall be employees below is provided.
anchored by a minimum of four anchor
rods (anchor bolts). § 1926.760 Fall protection.
(c) Rigid frames shall have 50 percent (a) General requirements. (1) Except as
of their bolts or the number of bolts provided by paragraph (a)(3) of this sec-
specified by the manufacturer (which- tion, each employee engaged in a steel

ever is greater) installed and tightened erection activity who is on a walking/
on both sides of the web adjacent to working surface with an unprotected
420
side or edge more than 15 feet (4.6 m) (4) Each employee working in a CDZ
above a lower level shall be protected shall have completed CDZ training in
from fall hazards by guardrail systems, accordance with § 1926.761.
safety net systems, personal fall arrest (5) Unsecured decking in a CDZ shall
systems, positioning device systems or not exceed 3,000 square feet (914.4 m2).
fall restraint systems. (6) Safety deck attachments shall be
(2) Perimeter safety cables. On multi- performed in the CDZ from the leading
story structures, perimeter safety ca- edge back to the control line and shall
bles shall be installed at the final inte- have at least two attachments for each
rior and exterior perimeters of the metal decking panel.
floors as soon as the metal decking has (7) Final deck attachments and in-
been installed. stallation of shear connectors shall not
(3) Connectors and employees work- be performed in the CDZ.
ing in controlled decking zones shall be (d) Criteria for fall protection equip-
protected from fall hazards as provided ment. (1) Guardrail systems, safety net
in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this sec- systems, personal fall arrest systems,
tion, respectively. positioning device systems and their
(b) Connectors. Each connector shall: components shall conform to the cri-
(1) Be protected in accordance with teria in § 1926.502 (see appendix G to
paragraph (a)(1) of this section from this subpart).
fall hazards of more than two stories or (2) Fall arrest system components
30 feet (9.1 m) above a lower level, shall be used in fall restraint systems
whichever is less; and shall conform to the criteria in
(2) Have completed connector train- § 1926.502 (see appendix G). Either body
ing in accordance with § 1926.761; and belts or body harnesses shall be used in
(3) Be provided, at heights over 15 fall restraint systems.
and up to 30 feet above a lower level, (3) Perimeter safety cables shall
with a personal fall arrest system, po- meet the criteria for guardrail systems
sitioning device system or fall rein § 1926.502 (see appendix G).
straint system and wear the equipment
(e) Custody of fall protection. Fall pro-
necessary to be able to be tied off; or be
tection provided by the steel erector
provided with other means of protec-
shall remain in the area where steel
tion from fall hazards in accordance
erection activity has been completed,
with paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
to be used by other trades, only if the
(c) Controlled Decking Zone (CDZ). A
controlling contractor or its author-
controlled decking zone may be estab-
ized representative:
lished in that area of the structure
(1) Has directed the steel erector to
over 15 and up to 30 feet above a lower
leave the fall protection in place; and
level where metal decking is initially
being installed and forms the leading (2) Has inspected and accepted con-
edge of a work area. In each CDZ, the trol and responsibility of the fall pro-
following shall apply: tection prior to authorizing persons
(1) Each employee working at the other than steel erectors to work in
leading edge in a CDZ shall be pro- the area.
tected from fall hazards of more than
§ 1926.761 Training.
two stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever
is less. The following provisions supplement
(2) Access to a CDZ shall be limited the requirements of § 1926.21 regarding
to only those employees engaged in the hazards addressed in this subpart.
leading edge work. (a) Training personnel. Training re-
(3) The boundaries of a CDZ shall be quired by this section shall be provided
designated and clearly marked. The by a qualified person(s).
CDZ shall not be more than 90 feet (27.4 (b) Fall hazard training. The employer
m) wide and 90 (27.4 m) feet deep from shall train each employee exposed to a
any leading edge. The CDZ shall be fall hazard in accordance with the re-
marked by the use of control lines or quirements of this section. The em-
the equivalent. Examples of acceptable ployer shall institute a training pro-

procedures for demarcating CDZ’s can gram and ensure employee participa-
be found in appendix D to this subpart. tion in the program.
421
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
(c) Special training programs. In addi- inspection(s) are held between the erector
tion to the training required in para- and the controlling contractor, and others
graphs (a) and (b) of this section, the such as the project engineer and fabricator
before the start of steel erection. The pur-
employer shall provide special training
pose of such conference(s) is to develop and
to employees engaged in the following review the site-specific erection plan that
activities. will meet the requirements of this section.
(1) Multiple lift rigging procedure. The (c) Components of a site-specific erection
employer shall ensure that each em- plan. In developing a site-specific erection
ployee who performs multiple lift rig- plan, a steel erector considers the following
ging has been provided training in the elements:
following areas: (1) The sequence of erection activity, de-
(i) The nature of the hazards associ- veloped in coordination with the controlling
ated with multiple lifts; and contractor, that includes the following:
(ii) The proper procedures and equip- (i) Material deliveries:
(ii) Material staging and storage; and
ment to perform multiple lifts required
(iii) Coordination with other trades and
by § 1926.753(e). construction activities.
(2) Connector procedures. The em- (2) A description of the crane and derrick
ployer shall ensure that each connector selection and placement procedures, includ-
has been provided training in the fol- ing the following:
lowing areas: (i) Site preparation;
(i) The nature of the hazards associ- (ii) Path for overhead loads; and
ated with connecting; and (iii) Critical lifts, including rigging sup-
(ii) The establishment, access, proper plies and equipment.
connecting techniques and work prac- (3) A description of steel erection activities
tices required by § 1926.756(c) and and procedures, including the following:
(i) Stability considerations requiring tem-
§ 1926.760(b).
porary bracing and guying;
(3) Controlled Decking Zone Procedures. (ii) Erection bridging terminus point;
Where CDZs are being used, the em- (iii) Anchor rod (anchor bolt) notifications
ployer shall assure that each employee regarding repair, replacement and modifica-
has been provided training in the fol- tions;
lowing areas: (iv) Columns and beams (including joists
(i) The nature of the hazards associ- and purlins);
ated with work within a controlled (v) Connections;
decking zone; and (vi) Decking; and
(ii) The establishment, access, proper (vii) Ornamental and miscellaneous iron.
installation techniques and work prac- (4) A description of the fall protection pro-
cedures that will be used to comply with
tices required by § 1926.760(c) and
§ 1926.760.
§ 1926.754(e). (5) A description of the procedures that
[66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 73 will be used to comply with § 1926.759.
FR 75589, Dec. 12, 2008] (6) A description of the special procedures
required for hazardous non-routine tasks.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART R OF PART (7) A certification for each employee who
1926—GUIDELINES FOR ESTABLISHING has received training for performing steel
THE COMPONENTS OF A SITE-SPECIFIC erection operations as required by § 1926.761.
ERECTION PLAN: NON-MANDATORY (8) A list of the qualified and competent
persons.
(9) A description of the procedures that
§ 1926.752(e) will be utilized in the event of rescue or
(a) General. This appendix serves as a emergency response.
guideline to assist employers who elect to (d) Other plan information. The plan:
develop a site-specific erection plan in ac- (1) Includes the identification of the site
cordance with § 1926.752(e) with alternate and project; and
means and methods to provide employee pro- (2) Is signed and dated by the qualified per-
tection in accordance with § 1926.752(e), son(s) responsible for its preparation and
§ 1926.753(c)(5), § 1926.757(a)(4) and modification.
§ 1926.757(e)(4).
(b) Development of a site-specific erection APPENDIX B TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926
plan. Pre-construction conference(s) and site [RESERVED]
422
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. C
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926—ILLUSTRATIONS OF BRIDGING TERMINUS

POINTS: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH §§ 1926.757(a)(10) AND
§ 1926.757(c)(5)
423
ER18JA01.021</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
424
ER18JA01.022</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. D
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART R OF PART metal deck and other operations connected

1926—ILLUSTRATION OF THE USE OF with leading edge work are taking place, the
controlled decking zone (CDZ) is defined by a
CONTROL LINES TO DEMARCATE CON-
control line or by any other means that re-
TROLLED DECKING ZONES (CDZS): stricts access.
NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR (i) A control line for a CDZ is erected not
COMPLYING WITH § 1926.760(c)(3) less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 90 feet
(27.4 m) from the leading edge.

(1) When used to control access to areas (ii) Control lines extend along the entire
where leading edge and initial securement of length of the unprotected or leading edge
425
ER18JA01.023</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
and are approximately parallel to the unpro- NOTE: When employees are using stilts, the
tected or leading edge. top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent
(iii) Control lines are connected on each member, shall be increased an amount equal
side to a guardrail system, wall, stanchion or to the height of the stilts.
other suitable anchorage. (2) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate
(2) Control lines consist of ropes, wires, vertical members, or equivalent inter-
tapes, or equivalent materials, and sup- mediate structural members shall be in-
porting stanchions as follows: stalled between the top edge of the guardrail
(i) Each line is rigged and supported in system and the walking/working surface
such a way that its lowest point (including when there is no wall or parapet wall at least
sag) is not less than 39 inches (1.0 m) from 21 inches (53 cm) high.
the walking/working surface and its highest
(i) Midrails, when used, shall be installed
point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from
at a height midway between the top edge of
the walking/working surface.
the guardrail system and the walking/work-
(ii) Each line has a minimum breaking
ing level.
strength of 200 pounds (90.8 kg).
(ii) Screens and mesh, when used, shall ex-
tend from the top rail to the walking/work-
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART R OF PART
ing level and along the entire opening be-
1926—TRAINING: NON-MANDATORY tween top rail supports.
GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH (iii) Intermediate members (such as balus-
§ 1926.761 ters), when used between posts, shall be not
more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart.
The training requirements of § 1926.761 will
(iv) Other structural members (such as ad-
be deemed to have been met if employees
ditional midrails and architectural panels)
have completed a training course on steel
shall be installed such that there are no
erection, including instruction in the provi-
openings in the guardrail system that are
sions of this standard, that has been ap-
more than 19 inches (.5 m) wide.
proved by the U.S. Department of Labor Bu-
(3) Guardrail systems shall be capable of
reau of Apprenticeship.
withstanding, without failure, a force of at
least 200 pounds (890 N) applied within 2
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART R OF PART inches (5.1 cm) of the top edge, in any out-
1926—PERIMETER COLUMNS: NON- ward or downward direction, at any point
MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR COM- along the top edge.
PLYING WITH § 1926.756(e) TO PRO- (4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test load
TECT THE UNPROTECTED SIDE OR specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section
EDGE OF A WALKING/WORKING SUR- (§ 1926.502) is applied in a downward direc-
FACE tion, the top edge of the guardrail shall not
deflect to a height less than 39 inches (1.0 m)
In multi-story structures, when holes in above the walking/working level. Guardrail
the column web are used for perimeter safety system components selected and constructed
cables, the column splice must be placed suf- in accordance with the appendix B to subpart
ficiently high so as not to interfere with any M of this part will be deemed to meet this re-
attachments to the column necessary for the quirement.
column splice. Column splices are rec- (5) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate
ommended to be placed at every other or vertical members, solid panels, and equiva-
fourth levels as design allows. Column lent structural members shall be capable of
splices at third levels are detrimental to the withstanding, without failure, a force of at
erection process and should be avoided if pos- least 150 pounds (666 N) applied in any down-
sible. ward or outward direction at any point along
the midrail or other member.
APPENDIX G TO SUBPART R OF PART (6) Guardrail systems shall be so surfaced
1926—§ 1926.502 (b)–(e) FALL PROTEC- as to prevent injury to an employee from
TION SYSTEMS CRITERIA AND PRAC- punctures or lacerations, and to prevent
TICES snagging of clothing.
(7) The ends of all top rails and midrails
(b) ‘‘Guardrail systems.’’ Guardrail sys- shall not overhang the terminal posts, ex-
tems and their use shall comply with the fol- cept where such overhang does not con-
lowing provisions: stitute a projection hazard.
(1) Top edge height of top rails, or equiva- (8) Steel banding and plastic banding shall
lent guardrail system members, shall be 42 not be used as top rails or midrails.
inches (1.1 m) plus or minus 3 inches (8 cm) (9) Top rails and midrails shall be at least
above the walking/working level. When con- one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal diameter
ditions warrant, the height of the top edge or thickness to prevent cuts and lacerations.
may exceed the 45-inch height, provided the If wire rope is used for top rails, it shall be
guardrail system meets all other criteria of flagged at not more than 6-foot intervals
this paragraph (§ 1926.502(b)). with high-visibility material.
426
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. G
(10) When guardrail systems are used at (14) Guardrail systems used on ramps and
hoisting areas, a chain, gate or removable runways shall be erected along each unpro-
guardrail section shall be placed across the tected side or edge.
access opening between guardrail sections (15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope being
when hoisting operations are not taking used for top rails or midrails shall be in-
place. spected as frequently as necessary to ensure
(11) When guardrail systems are used at that it continues to meet the strength re-
holes, they shall be erected on all unpro- quirements of paragraph (b)(3) of this section
tected sides or edges of the hole. (§ 1926.502).
(12) When guardrail systems are used
(c) Safety net systems. Safety net systems
around holes used for the passage of mate-
and their use shall comply with the fol-
rials, the hole shall have not more than two
lowing provisions:
sides provided with removable guardrail sec-
tions to allow the passage of materials. (1) Safety nets shall be installed as close as
When the hole is not in use, it shall be closed practicable under the walking/working sur-
over with a cover, or a guardrail system face on which employees are working, but in
shall be provided along all unprotected sides no case more than 30 feet (9.1 m) below such
or edges. level. When nets are used on bridges, the po-
(13) When guardrail systems are used tential fall area from the walking/working
around holes which are used as points of ac- surface to the net shall be unobstructed.
cess (such as ladderways), they shall be pro- (2) Safety nets shall extend outward from
vided with a gate, or be so offset that a per- the outermost projection of the work surface
son cannot walk directly into the hole. as follows:
Minimum required horizontal distance of outer edge of net from

Vertical distance from working level to horizontal plane of net the edge of the working surface
Up to 5 feet .................................................................................. 8 feet

More than 5 feet up to 10 feet .................................................... 10 feet
More than 10 feet ........................................................................ 13 feet
(3) Safety nets shall be installed with suffi- certification record must include an identi-
cient clearance under them to prevent con- fication of the net and net installation for
tact with the surface or structures below which the certification record is being pre-
when subjected to an impact force equal to pared; the date that it was determined that
the drop test specified in paragraph (4) of the identified net and net installation were
this section [§ 1926.502]. in compliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this
(4) Safety nets and their installations shall section (§ 1926.502) and the signature of the
be capable of absorbing an impact force person making the determination and cer-
equal to that produced by the drop test spec- tification. The most recent certification
ified in paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section record for each net and net installation shall
[§ 1926.502]. be available at the jobsite for inspection.
(i) Except as provided in paragraph (5) Defective nets shall not be used. Safety
(c)(4)(ii) of this section (§ 1926.502), safety nets shall be inspected at least once a week
nets and safety net installations shall be for wear, damage, and other deterioration.
drop-tested at the jobsite after initial instal- Defective components shall be removed from
lation and before being used as a fall protec- service. Safety nets shall also be inspected
tion system, whenever relocated, after major after any occurrence which could affect the
repair, and at 6-month intervals if left in one
integrity of the safety net system.
place. The drop-test shall consist of a 400
(6) Materials, scrap pieces, equipment, and
pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30 + or ¥2 inches
(76 + or ¥5 cm) in diameter dropped into the tools which have fallen into the safety net
net from the highest walking/working sur- shall be removed as soon as possible from the
face at which employees are exposed to fall net and at least before the next work shift.
hazards, but not from less than 42 inches (1.1 (7) The maximum size of each safety net
m) above that level. mesh opening shall not exceed 36 square
(ii) When the employer can demonstrate inches (230 cm) nor be longer than 6 inches
that it is unreasonable to perform the drop- (15 cm) on any side, and the opening, meas-
test required by paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this ured center-to-center of mesh ropes or web-
section (§ 1926.502), the employer (or a des- bing, shall not be longer than 6 inches (15
ignated competent person) shall certify that cm). All mesh crossings shall be secured to
the net and net installation is in compliance prevent enlargement of the mesh opening.
(8) Each safety net (or section of it) shall
with the provisions of paragraphs (c)(3) and

(c)(4)(i) of this section (§ 1926.502) by pre- have a border rope for webbing with a min-
paring a certification record prior to the net imum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2
being used as a fall protection system. The kN).
427
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. G 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
(9) Connections between safety net panels (9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines shall
shall be as strong as integral net components have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000
and shall be spaced not more than 6 inches pounds (22.2 kN).
(15 cm) apart. (10)(i) Except as provided in paragraph
(d) ‘‘Personal fall arrest systems.’’ Per- (d)(10)(ii) of this section [§ 1926.502], when
sonal fall arrest systems and their use shall vertical lifelines are used, each employee
comply with the provisions set forth below. shall be attached to a separate lifeline.
Effective January 1, 1998, body belts are not (ii) During the construction of elevator
acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest shafts, two employees may be attached to
system. the same lifeline in the hoistway, provided
both employees are working atop a false car
NOTE: The use of a body belt in a posi- that is equipped with guardrails; the
tioning device system is acceptable and is strength of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000
regulated under paragraph (e) of this section pounds per employee attached] (44.4 kN); and
(§ 1926.502). all other criteria specified in this paragraph
(1) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed for lifelines have been met.
or formed steel, or made of equivalent mate- (11) Lifelines shall be protected against
rials. being cut or abraded.
(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-re- (12) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards
sistant finish, and all surfaces and edges which automatically limit free fall distance
shall be smooth to prevent damage to inter- to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less shall be capable of
facing parts of the system. sustaining a minimum tensile load of 3,000
(3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall have a pounds (13.3 kN) applied to the device with
minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended
(22.2 kN). position.
(13) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards
(4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-
which do not limit free fall distance to 2 feet
tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600
(0.61 m) or less, ripstitch lanyards, and tear-
pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking,
ing and deforming lanyards shall be capable
or taking permanent deformation.
of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 5,000
(5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compat-
pounds (22.2 kN) applied to the device with
ible with the member to which they are con-
the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended
nected to prevent unintentional disengage-
position.
ment of the snaphook by depression of the
(14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lan-
snaphook keeper by the connected member,
yards, lifelines, and strength components of
or shall be a locking type snaphook designed
body belts and body harnesses shall be made
and used to prevent disengagement of the
from synthetic fibers.
snaphook by the contact of the snaphook
(15) Anchorages used for attachment of
keeper by the connected member. Effective
personal fall arrest equipment shall be inde-
January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks
pendent of any anchorage being used to sup-
shall be used.
port or suspend platforms and capable of sup-
(6) Unless the snaphook is a locking type porting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per
and designed for the following connections, employee attached, or shall be designed, in-
snaphooks shall not be engaged: stalled, and used as follows:
(i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope; (i) as part of a complete personal fall ar-
(ii) to each other; rest system which maintains a safety factor
(iii) to a dee-ring to which another of at least two; and
snaphook or other connector is attached; (ii) under the supervision of a qualified
(iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or person.
(v) to any object which is incompatibly (16) Personal fall arrest systems, when
shaped or dimensioned in relation to the stopping a fall, shall:
snaphook such that unintentional disengage- (i) limit maximum arresting force on an
ment could occur by the connected object employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used
being able to depress the snaphook keeper with a body belt;
and release itself. (ii) limit maximum arresting force on an
(7) On suspended scaffolds or similar work employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) when used
platforms with horizontal lifelines which with a body harness;
may become vertical lifelines, the devices (iii) be rigged such that an employee can
used to connect to a horizontal lifeline shall neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.8 m), nor
be capable of locking in both directions on contact any lower level;
the lifeline. (iv) bring an employee to a complete stop
(8) Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, and limit maximum deceleration distance an
installed, and used, under the supervision of employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m); and,
a qualified person, as part of a complete per- (v) have sufficient strength to withstand
sonal fall arrest system, which maintains a twice the potential impact energy of an em-
safety factor of at least two. ployee free falling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 m),
428
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. H
or the free fall distance permitted by the (2) Positioning devices shall be secured to
system, whichever is less. an anchorage capable of supporting at least
twice the potential impact load of an em-
NOTE: If the personal fall arrest system
ployee’s fall or 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN), which-
meets the criteria and protocols contained in
appendix C to subpart M, and if the system ever is greater.
is being used by an employee having a com- (3) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed
bined person and tool weight of less than 310 or formed steel, or made of equivalent mate-
pounds (140 kg), the system will be consid- rials.
ered to be in compliance with the provisions (4) Connectors shall have a corrosion-re-
of paragraph (d)(16) of this section [§ 1926.502]. sistant finish, and all surfaces and edges
If the system is used by an employee having shall be smooth to prevent damage to inter-
a combined tool and body weight of 310 facing parts of this system.
pounds (140 kg) or more, then the employer (5) Connecting assemblies shall have a
must appropriately modify the criteria and minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds
protocols of the appendix to provide proper (22.2 kN)
protection for such heavier weights, or the (6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-
system will not be deemed to be in compli- tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600
ance with the requirements of paragraph pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking,
(d)(16) of this section (§ 1926.502). or taking permanent deformation.
(7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compat-
(17) The attachment point of the body belt
ible with the member to which they are con-
shall be located in the center of the wearer’s
nected to prevent unintentional disengage-
back. The attachment point of the body har-
ment of the snaphook by depression of the
ness shall be located in the center of the
wearer’s back near shoulder level, or above snaphook keeper by the connected member,
the wearer’s head. or shall be a locking type snaphook designed
(18) Body belts, harnesses, and components and used to prevent disengagement of the
shall be used only for employee protection snaphook by the contact of the snaphook
(as part of a personal fall arrest system or keeper by the connected member. As of Jan-
positioning device system) and not to hoist uary 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks
materials. shall be used.
(19) Personal fall arrest systems and com- (8) Unless the snaphook is a locking type
ponents subjected to impact loading shall be and designed for the following connections,
immediately removed from service and shall snaphooks shall not be engaged:
not be used again for employee protection (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope;
until inspected and determined by a com- (ii) to each other;
petent person to be undamaged and suitable (iii) to a dee-ring to which another
for reuse. snaphook or other connector is attached;
(20) The employer shall provide for prompt (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or to depress
rescue of employees in the event of a fall or the snaphook keeper and release itself.
shall assure that employees are able to res- (v) to any object which is incompatibly
cue themselves. shaped or dimensioned in relation to the
(21) Personal fall arrest systems shall be snaphook such that unintentional disengage-
inspected prior to each use for wear, damage ment could occur by the connected object
and other deterioration, and defective com- being able to depress the snaphook keeper
ponents shall be removed from service. and release itself.
(22) Body belts shall be at least one and (9) Positioning device systems shall be in-
five-eighths (15⁄8) inches (4.1 cm) wide. spected prior to each use for wear, damage,
(23) Personal fall arrest systems shall not and other deterioration, and defective com-
be attached to guardrail systems, nor shall ponents shall be removed from service.
they be attached to hoists except as specified (10) Body belts, harnesses, and components
in other subparts of this Part. shall be used only for employee protection
(24) When a personal fall arrest system is (as part of a personal fall arrest system or
used at hoist areas, it shall be rigged to positioning device system) and not to hoist
allow the movement of the employee only as materials.
far as the edge of the walking/working sur-
face. APPENDIX H TO SUBPART R OF PART
(e) Positioning device systems. Positioning
1926—DOUBLE CONNECTIONS: ILLUS-
device systems and their use shall conform
to the following provisions: TRATION OF A CLIPPED END CONNEC-
(1) Positioning devices shall be rigged such TION AND A STAGGERED CONNECTION:
that an employee cannot free fall more than NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR
2 feet (.9 m). COMPLYING WITH § 1926.756(c)(1)
429
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. H 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
Clipped end connections are connection member to remain in place. The notch(es)
material on the end of a structural member fits around the nut or bolt head of the oppos-
which has a notch at the bottom and/or top ing member to allow the second member to
to allow the bolt(s) of the first member be bolted up without removing the bolt(s)
placed on the opposite side of the central holding the first member.
Staggered connections are connection ma- Subpart S—Underground Con-

terial on a structural member in which all of
the bolt holes in the common member web struction, Caissons,
are not shared by the two incoming members Cofferdams and Compressed
in the final connection. The extra hole in the Air
column web allows the erector to maintain
at least a one bolt connection at all times
while making the double connection.
657; and Secretary of Labor’s Orders 12–71 (36

ER18JA01.025</GPH>
FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736),

1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 5–2007 (72
430
ER18JA01.024</GPH>
FR 31159), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applica- when the remaining construction ac-
ble. tivity will not cause any environ-
mental hazard or structural failure
§ 1926.800 Underground construction. within the facilities.
(a) Scope and application. (1) This sec- (d) Safety instruction. All employees
tion applies to the construction of un- shall be instructed in the recognition
derground tunnels, shafts, chambers, and avoidance of hazards associated
and passageways. This section also ap- with underground construction activi-
plies to cut-and-cover excavations ties including, where appropriate, the
which are both physically connected to following subjects:
ongoing underground construction op- (1) Air monitoring;
erations within the scope of this sec- (2) Ventilation;
tion, and covered in such a manner as (3) Illumination;
to create conditions characteristic of (4) Communications;
underground construction. (5) Flood control;
(2) This section does not apply to the (6) Mechanical equipment;
following: (7) Personal protective equipment;
(i) Excavation and trenching oper- (8) Explosives;
ations covered by subpart P of this (9) Fire prevention and protection;
part, such as foundation operations for and
above-ground structures that are not (10) Emergency procedures, including
physically connected to underground evacuation plans and check-in/check-
construction operations, and surface out systems.
excavation; nor (e) Notification. (1) Oncoming shifts
(ii) Underground electrical trans- shall be informed of any hazardous oc-
mission and distribution lines, as ad- currences or conditions that have af-
dressed in subpart V of this part. fected or might affect employee safety,
(b) Access and egress. (1) The employer including liberation of gas, equipment
shall provide and maintain safe means failures, earth or rock slides, cave-ins,
of access and egress to all work sta- floodings, fires or explosions.
tions. (2) The employer shall establish and
(2) The employer shall provide access maintain direct communications for
and egress in such a manner that em- coordination of activities with other
ployees are protected from being employers whose operations at the job-
struck by excavators, haulage ma- site affect or may affect the safety of
chines, trains and other mobile equip- employees underground.
ment. (f) Communications. (1) When natural
(3) The employer shall control access unassisted voice communication is in-
to all openings to prevent unauthorized effective, a power-assisted means of
entry underground. Unused chutes, voice communication shall be used to
manways, or other openings shall be provide communication between the
tightly covered, bulkheaded, or fenced work face, the bottom of the shaft, and
off, and shall be posted with warning the surface.
signs indicating ‘‘Keep Out’’ or similar (2) Two effective means of commu-
language. Completed or unused sec- nication, at least one of which shall be
tions of the underground facility shall voice communication, shall be provided
be barricaded. in all shafts which are being developed
(c) Check-in/check-out. The employer or used either for personnel access or
shall maintain a check-in/check-out for hoisting. Additional requirements
procedure that will ensure that above- for hoist operator communication are
ground personnel can determine an ac- contained in paragraph (t)(3)(xiv) of
curate count of the number of persons this section.
underground in the event of an emer- (3) Powered communication systems
gency. However, this procedure is not shall operate on an independent power
required when the construction of un- supply, and shall be installed so that
derground facilities designed for the use of or disruption of any one
human occupancy has been sufficiently phone or signal location will not dis-
completed so that the permanent envi- rupt the operation of the system from
ronmental controls are effective, and any other location.
431
(4) Communication systems shall be provide (or make arrangements in ad-

tested upon initial entry of each shift vance with locally available rescue
to the underground, and as often as services to provide) at least two 5-per-
necessary at later times, to ensure that son rescue teams, one on the jobsite or
they are in working order. within one-half hour travel time from
(5) Any employee working alone un- the entry point, and the other within 2
derground in a hazardous location, who hours travel time.
is both out of the range of natural un- (ii) On jobsites where less than 25 em-
assisted voice communication and not ployees work underground at one time,
under observation by other persons, the employer shall provide (or make
shall be provided with an effective arrangements in advance with locally
means of obtaining assistance in an available rescue services to provide) at
emergency. least one 5-person rescue team to be ei-
(g) Emergency provisions—(1) Hoisting ther on the jobsite or within one-half
capability. When a shaft is used as a hour travel time from the entry point.
means of egress, the employer shall (iii) Rescue team members shall be
make advance arrangements for power- qualified in rescue procedures, the use
assisted hoisting capability to be read- and limitations of breathing apparatus,
ily available in an emergency, unless and the use of firefighting equipment.
the regular hoisting means can con- Qualifications shall be reviewed not
tinue to function in the event of an less than annually.
electrical power failure at the jobsite. (iv) On jobsites where flammable or
Such hoisting means shall be designed noxious gases are encountered or an-
so that the load hoist drum is powered ticipated in hazardous quantities, res-
in both directions of rotation and so cue team members shall practice don-
that the brake is automatically applied ning and using self-contained breathing
upon power release or failure. apparatus monthly.
(2) Self-rescuers. The employer must (v) The employer shall ensure that
provide self-rescuers approved by the rescue teams are familiar with condi-
National Institute for Occupational tions at the jobsite.
Safety and Health under 42 CFR part (h) Hazardous classifications—(1) Po-
84. The respirators must be imme- tentially gassy operations. Underground
diately available to all employees at construction operations shall be classi-
work stations in underground areas fied as potentially gassy if either:
where employees might be trapped by (i) Air monitoring discloses 10 per-
smoke or gas. The selection, issuance, cent or more of the lower explosive
use, and care of respirators must be in limit for methane or other flammable
accordance with 29 CFR 1926.103. gases measured at 12 inches (304.8 mm)
(3) Designated person. At least one ±0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the roof, face,
designated person shall be on duty floor or walls in any underground work
above ground whenever any employee area for more than a 24-hour period; or
is working underground. This des- (ii) The history of the geographical
ignated person shall be responsible for area or geological formation indicates
securing immediate aid and keeping an that 10 percent or more of the lower ex-
accurate count of employees under- plosive limit for methane or other
ground in case of emergency. The des- flammable gases is likely to be encoun-
ignated person must not be so busy tered in such underground operations.
with other responsibilities that the (2) Gassy operations. Underground
counting function is encumbered. construction operations shall be classi-
(4) Emergency lighting. Each employee fied as gassy if:
underground shall have an acceptable (i) Air monitoring discloses 10 per-
portable hand lamp or cap lamp in his cent or more of the lower explosive
or her work area for emergency use, limit for methane or other flammable
unless natural light or an emergency gases measured at 12 inches (304.8 mm)
lighting system provides adequate illu- ±0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the roof, face,
mination for escape. floor or walls in any underground work
(5) Rescue teams. (i) On jobsites where area for three consecutive days; or
25 or more employees work under- (ii) There has been an ignition of
ground at one time, the employer shall methane or of other flammable gases
432
emanating from the strata that indi- (j) Air quality and monitoring—(1) Gen-
cates the presence of such gases; or eral. Air quality limits and control re-
(iii) The underground construction quirements for construction are found
operation is both connected to an unin § 1926.55, except as modified by this
derground work area which is cur- section.
rently classified as gassy and is also (i)(A) The employer shall assign a
subject to a continuous course of air competent person who shall perform all
containing the flammable gas con- air monitoring required by this sec-
centration. tion.
(3) Declassification to potentially gassy (B) Where this paragraph requires
operations. Underground construction monitoring of airborne contaminants
gassy operations may be declassified to ‘‘as often as necessary,’’ the competent
Potentially Gassy when air monitoring person shall make a reasonable deter-
results remain under 10 percent of the mination as to which substances to
lower explosive limit for methane or monitor and how frequently to mon-
other flammable gases for three con- itor, considering at least the following
secutive days. factors:
(i) Gassy operations-additional require- (1) Location of jobsite: Proximity to
ments. (1) Only acceptable equipment, fuel tanks, sewers, gas lines, old land-
maintained in suitable condition, shall fills, coal deposits, and swamps;
be used in gassy operations.
(2) Geology: Geological studies of the
(2) Mobile diesel-powered equipment
jobsite, particularly involving the soil
used in gassy operations shall be either
type and its permeability;
approved in accordance with the re-
(3) History: Presence of air contami-
quirements of 30 CFR part 36 (formerly
nants in nearby jobsites, changes in
Schedule 31) by MSHA, or shall be dem-
levels of substances monitored on the
onstrated by the employer to be fully
prior shift; and
equivalent to such MSHA-approved
equipment, and shall be operated in ac- (4) Work practices and jobsite condi-
cordance with that part. tions: The use of diesel engines, use of
(3) Each entrance to a gassy oper- explosives, use of fuel gas, volume and
ation shall be prominently posted with flow of ventilation, visible atmospheric
signs notifying all entrants of the conditions, decompression of the at-
gassy classification. mosphere, welding, cutting and hot
(4) Smoking shall be prohibited in all work, and employees’ physical reac-
gassy operations and the employer tions to working underground.
shall be responsible for collecting all (ii)(A) The atmosphere in all under-
personal sources of ignition, such as ground work areas shall be tested as
matches and lighters, from all persons often as necessary to assure that the
entering a gassy operation. atmosphere at normal atmospheric
(5) A fire watch as described in pressure contains at least 19.5 percent
§ 1926.352(e) shall be maintained when oxygen and no more than 22 percent ox-
hot work is performed. ygen.
(6) Once an operation has met the cri- (B) Tests for oxygen content shall be
teria in paragraph (h)(2) warranting made before tests for air contaminants.
classification as gassy, all operations (iii)(A) The atmosphere in all under-
in the affected area, except the fol- ground work areas shall be tested
lowing, shall be discontinued until the quantitatively for carbon monoxide, ni-
operation either is in compliance with trogen dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, and
all of the gassy operation requirements other toxic gases, dusts, vapors, mists,
or has been declassified in accordance and fumes as often as necessary to en-
with paragraph (h)(3) of this section: sure that the permissible exposure lim-
(i) Operations related to the control its prescribed in § 1926.55 are not ex-
of the gas concentration; ceeded.
(ii) Installation of new equipment, or (B) The atmosphere in all under-
conversion of existing equipment, to ground work areas shall be tested
comply with this paragraph (i); and quantitatively for methane and other
(iii) Installation of above-ground con- flammable gases as often as necessary
trols for reversing the air flow. to determine:
433
(1) Whether action is to be taken to inform all entrants of the hazardous

under paragraphs (j)(1)(vii), (viii), and condition; and
(ix), of this section; and (B) Ensure that the necessary pre-
(2) Whether an operation is to be cautions are taken.
classified potentially gassy or gassy (vii) Whenever five percent or more
under paragraph (h) of this section. of the lower explosive limit for meth-
(C) If diesel-engine or gasoline-engine ane or other flammable gases is de-
driven ventilating fans or compressors tected in any underground work area(s)
are used, an initial test shall be made or in the air return, steps shall be
of the inlet air of the fan or com- taken to increase ventilation air vol-
pressor, with the engines operating, to ume or otherwise control the gas con-
ensure that the air supply is not con-
centration, unless the employer is op-
taminated by engine exhaust.
erating in accordance with the poten-
(D) Testing shall be performed as
tially gassy or gassy operation require-
often as necessary to ensure that the
ventilation requirements of paragraph ments. Such additional ventilation
(k) of this section are met. controls may be discontinued when gas
(iv) When rapid excavation machines concentrations are reduced below five
are used, a continuous flammable gas percent of the lower explosive limit,
monitor shall be operated at the face but shall be reinstituted whenever the
with the sensor(s) placed as high and five percent level is exceeded.
close to the front of the machine’s cut- (viii) Whenever 10 percent or more of
ter head as practicable. the lower explosive limit for methane
(v)(A) Whenever air monitoring indi- or other flammable gases is detected in
cates the presence of 5 ppm or more of the vicinity of welding, cutting, or
hydrogen sulfide, a test shall be con- other hot work, such work shall be sus-
ducted in the affected underground pended until the concentration of such
work area(s), at least at the beginning flammable gas is reduced to less than
and midpoint of each shift, until the 10 percent of the lower explosive limit.
concentration of hydrogen sulfide has (ix) Whenever 20 percent or more of
been less than 5 ppm for 3 consecutive the lower explosive limit for methane
days. or other flammable gases is detected in
(B) Whenever hydrogen sulfide is de- any underground work area(s) or in the
tected in an amount exceeding 10 ppm, air return:
a continuous sampling and indicating (A) All employees, except those nec-
hydrogen sulfide monitor shall be used essary to eliminate the hazard, shall be
to monitor the affected work area. immediately withdrawn to a safe loca-
(C) Employees shall be informed tion above ground; and
when a concentration of 10 ppm hydro- (B) Electrical power, except for ac-
gen sulfide is exceeded.
ceptable pumping and ventilation
(D) The continuous sampling and in-
equipment, shall be cut off to the area
dicating hydrogen sulfide monitor shall
endangered by the flammable gas until
be designed, installed, and maintained
the concentration of such gas is re-
to provide a visual and aural alarm
duced to less than 20 percent of the
when the hydrogen sulfide concentra-
tion reaches 20 ppm to signal that addi- lower explosive limit.
tional measures, such as respirator use, (2) Additional monitoring for potentially
increased ventilation, or evacuation, gassy and gassy operations. Operations
might be necessary to maintain hydro- which meet the criteria for potentially
gen sulfide exposure below the permis- gassy and gassy operations set forth in
sible exposure limit. paragraph (h) of this section shall be
(vi) When the competent person de- subject to the additional monitoring
termines, on the basis of air moni- requirements of this paragraph.
toring results or other information, (i) A test for oxygen content shall be
that air contaminants may be present conducted in the affected underground
in sufficient quantity to be dangerous work areas and work areas imme-
to life, the employer shall: diately adjacent to such areas at least

(A) Prominently post a notice at all at the beginning and midpoint of each
entrances to the underground jobsite shift.
434
(ii) When using rapid excavation ma- other underground work areas shall be
chines, continuous automatic flam- at least 30 feet (9.15 m) per minute
mable gas monitoring equipment shall where blasting or rock drilling is con-
be used to monitor the air at the head- ducted, or where other conditions like-
ing, on the rib, and in the return air ly to produce dust, fumes, mists, va-
duct. The continuous monitor shall sig- pors, or gases in harmful or explosive
nal the heading, and shut down electric quantities are present.
power in the affected underground (4) The direction of mechanical air
work area, except for acceptable pump- flow shall be reversible.
ing and ventilation equipment, when 20 (5) Following blasting, ventilation
percent or more of the lower explosive systems shall exhaust smoke and
limit for methane or other flammable fumes to the outside atmosphere before
gases is encountered. work is resumed in affected areas.
(iii) A manual flammable gas mon- (6) Ventilation doors shall be de-
itor shall be used as needed, but at signed and installed so that they re-
least at the beginning and midpoint of main closed when in use, regardless of
each shift, to ensure that the limits the direction of the air flow.
prescribed in paragraphs (h) and (j) are (7) When ventilation has been re-
not exceeded. In addition, a manual duced to the extent that hazardous lev-
electrical shut down control shall be els of methane or flammable gas may
provided near the heading. have accumulated, a competent person
(iv) Local gas tests shall be made shall test all affected areas after ven-
prior to and continuously during any tilation has been restored and shall de-
welding, cutting, or other hot work. termine whether the atmosphere is
(v) In underground operations driven within flammable limits before any
by drill-and-blast methods, the air in power, other than for acceptable equip-
the affected area shall be tested for ment, is restored or work is resumed.
flammable gas prior to re-entry after (8) Whenever the ventilation system
blasting, and continuously when em- has been shut down with all employees
ployees are working underground. out of the underground area, only com-
(3) Recordkeeping. A record of all air petent persons authorized to test for
quality tests shall be maintained above air contaminants shall be allowed un-
ground at the worksite and be made derground until the ventilation has
available to the Secretary of Labor been restored and all affected areas
upon request. The record shall include have been tested for air contaminants
the location, date, time, substance and and declared safe.
amount monitored. Records of expo- (9) When drilling rock or concrete,
sures to toxic substances shall be re- appropriate dust control measures
tained in accordance with § 1910.33 of shall be taken to maintain dust levels
this chapter. All other air quality test within limits set in § 1926.55. Such
records shall be retained until comple- measures may include, but are not lim-
tion of the project. ited to, wet drilling, the use of vacuum
(k) Ventilation. (1)(i) Fresh air shall collectors, and water mix spray sys-
be supplied to all underground work tems.
areas in sufficient quantities to pre- (10)(i) Internal combustion engines,
vent dangerous or harmful accumula- except diesel-powered engines on mo-
tion of dusts, fumes, mists, vapors or bile equipment, are prohibited under-
gases. ground.
(ii) Mechanical ventilation shall be (ii) Mobile diesel-powered equipment
provided in all underground work areas used underground in atmospheres other
except when the employer can dem- than gassy operations shall be either
onstrate that natural ventilation pro- approved by MSHA in accordance with
vides the necessary air quality through the provisions of 30 CFR part 32 (for-
sufficient air volume and air flow. merly Schedule 24), or shall be dem-
(2) A minimum of 200 cubic feet (5.7 onstrated by the employer to be fully
m3) of fresh air per minute shall be sup- equivalent to such MSHA-approved
plied for each employee underground. equipment, and shall be operated in ac-
(3) The linear velocity of air flow in cordance with that part. (Each brake
the tunnel bore, in shafts, and in all horsepower of a diesel engine requires
435
at least 100 cubic feet (28.32 m3) of air (4) The piping of diesel fuel from the
per minute for suitable operation in ad- surface to an underground location is
dition to the air requirements for per- permitted only if:
sonnel. Some engines may require a (i) Diesel fuel is contained at the sur-
greater amount of air to ensure that face in a tank whose maximum capac-
the allowable levels of carbon mon- ity is no more than the amount of fuel
oxide, nitric oxide, and nitrogen diox- required to supply for a 24-hour period
ide are not exceeded.) the equipment serviced by the under-
(11) Potentially gassy or gassy oper- ground fueling station; and
ations shall have ventilation systems (ii) The surface tank is connected to
installed which shall: the underground fueling station by an
(i) Be constructed of fire-resistant acceptable pipe or hose system that is
materials; and controlled at the surface by a valve,
(ii) Have acceptable electrical sys- and at the shaft bottom by a hose noz-
tems, including fan motors. zle; and
(12) Gassy operations shall be pro- (iii) The pipe is empty at all times
vided with controls located above except when transferring diesel fuel
ground for reversing the air flow of from the surface tank to a piece of
ventilation systems. equipment in use underground; and
(13) In potentially gassy or gassy op- (iv) Hoisting operations in the shaft
erations, wherever mine-type ventila- are suspended during refueling oper-
tion systems using an offset main fan ations if the supply piping in the shaft
installed on the surface are used, they is not protected from damage.
shall be equipped with explosion-doors (5)(i) Gasoline shall not be carried,
or a weak-wall having an area at least stored, or used underground.
equivalent to the cross-sectional area (ii) Acetylene, liquefied petroleum
of the airway. gas, and Methylacetylene Propadiene
(l) Illumination. (1) Illumination re- Stabilized gas may be used under-
quirements applicable to underground ground only for welding, cutting and
construction operations are found in other hot work, and only in accordance
Table D–3 of § 1926.56 of this part. with subpart J of this part, and para-
(2) Only acceptable portable lighting graphs (j), (k), (m), and (n) of this sec-
equipment shall be used within 50 feet tion.
(15.24 m) of any underground heading (6) Oil, grease, and diesel fuel stored
during explosives handling. underground shall be kept in tightly
(m) Fire prevention and control. Fire sealed containers in fire-resistant areas
prevention and protection require- at least 300 feet (91.44 m) from under-
ments applicable to underground con- ground explosive magazines, and at
struction operations are found in sub- least 100 feet (30.48 m) from shaft sta-
part F of this part, except as modified tions and steeply inclined passageways.
by the following additional standards. Storage areas shall be positioned or
(1) Open flames and fires are prohib- diked so that the contents of ruptured
ited in all underground construction or overturned containers will not flow
operations except as permitted for from the storage area.
welding, cutting and other hot work (7) Flammable or combustible mate-
operations in paragraph (n) of this sec- rials shall not be stored above ground
tion. within 100 feet (30.48 m) of any access
(2) (i) Smoking may be allowed only opening to any underground operation.
in areas free of fire and explosion haz- Where this is not feasible because of
ards. space limitations at the jobsite, such
(ii) Readily visible signs prohibiting materials may be located within the
smoking and open flames shall be post- 100-foot limit, provided that:
ed in areas having fire or explosion (i) They are located as far as prac-
hazards. ticable from the opening; and
(3) The employer may store under- (ii) Either a fire-resistant barrier of
ground no more than a 24-hour supply not less than one-hour rating is placed
of diesel fuel for the underground between the stored material and the
equipment used at the worksite. opening, or additional precautions are
436
taken which will protect the materials (2) Subsidence areas. The employer
from ignition sources. shall ensure ground stability in haz-
(8) Fire-resistant hydraulic fluids ardous subsidence areas by shoring, by
shall be used in hydraulically-actuated filling in, or by erecting barricades and
underground machinery and equipment posting warning signs to prevent entry.
unless such equipment is protected by (3) Underground areas. (i)(A) A com-
a fire suppression system or by multi- petent person shall inspect the roof,
purpose fire extinguisher(s) rated at of face, and walls of the work area at the
sufficient capacity for the type and size start of each shift and as often as nec-
of hydraulic equipment involved, but essary to determine ground stability.
rated at least 4A:40B:C. (B) Competent persons conducting
(9)(i) Electrical installations in un- such inspections shall be protected
derground areas where oil, grease, or from loose ground by location, ground
diesel fuel are stored shall be used only support or equivalent means.
for lighting fixtures. (ii) Ground conditions along
(ii) Lighting fixtures in storage haulageways and travelways shall be
areas, or within 25 feet (7.62 m) of un- inspected as frequently as necessary to
derground areas where oil, grease, or ensure safe passage.
diesel fuel are stored, shall be approved (iii) Loose ground that might be haz-
for Class I, Division 2 locations, in ac- ardous to employees shall be taken
cordance with subpart K of this part. down, scaled or supported.
(10) Leaks and spills of flammable or (iv) (A) Torque wrenches shall be
combustible fluids shall be cleaned up used wherever bolts that depend on
immediately. torsionally applied force are used for
(11) A fire extinguisher of at least ground support.
4A:40B:C rating or other equivalent ex- (B) A competent person shall deter-
tinguishing means shall be provided at mine whether rock bolts meet the nec-
the head pulley and at the tail pulley essary torque, and shall determine the
of underground belt conveyors. testing frequency in light of the bolt
(12) Any structure located under- system, ground conditions and the dis-
ground or within 100 feet (30.48 m) of an tance from vibration sources.
opening to the underground shall be (v) Suitable protection shall be pro-
constructed of material having a fire- vided for employees exposed to the haz-
resistance rating of at least one hour. ard of loose ground while installing
(n) Welding, cutting, and other hot ground support systems.
work. In addition to the requirements (vi) Support sets shall be installed so
of subpart J of this part, the following that the bottoms have sufficient an-
requirements shall apply to under- chorage to prevent ground pressures
ground welding, cutting, and other hot from dislodging the support base of the
work. sets. Lateral bracing (collar bracing,
(1) No more than the amount of fuel tie rods, or spreaders) shall be provided
gas and oxygen cylinders necessary to between immediately adjacent sets to
perform welding, cutting, or other hot ensure added stability.
work during the next 24-hour period (vii) Damaged or dislodged ground
shall be permitted underground. supports that create a hazardous condi-
(2) Noncombustible barriers shall be tion shall be promptly repaired or re-
installed below welding, cutting, or placed. When replacing supports, the
other hot work being done in or over a new supports shall be installed before
shaft or raise. the damaged supports are removed.
(o) Ground support—(1) Portal areas. (viii) A shield or other type of sup-
Portal openings and access areas shall port shall be used to maintain a safe
be guarded by shoring, fencing, head travelway for employees working in
walls, shotcreting or other equivalent dead-end areas ahead of any support re-
protection to ensure safe access of em- placement operation.
ployees and equipment. Adjacent areas (4) Shafts. (i) Shafts and wells over 5
shall be scaled or otherwise secured to feet (1.53 m) in depth that employees
prevent loose soil, rock, or fractured must enter shall be supported by a

materials from endangering the portal steel casing, concrete pipe, timber,
and access area. solid rock or other suitable material.
437
(ii) (A) The full depth of the shaft (3) Employees shall not be allowed on
shall be supported by casing or bracing a drill mast while the drill bit is in op-
except where the shaft penetrates into eration or the drill machine is being
solid rock having characteristics that moved.
will not change as a result of exposure. (4) When a drill machine is being
Where the shaft passes through earth moved from one drilling area to an-
into solid rock, or through solid rock other, drill steel, tools, and other
into earth, and where there is potential equipment shall be secured and the
for shear, the casing or bracing shall mast shall be placed in a safe position.
extend at least 5 feet (1.53 m) into the (5) Receptacles or racks shall be pro-
solid rock. When the shaft terminates vided for storing drill steel located on
in solid rock, the casing or bracing jumbos.
shall extend to the end of the shaft or (6) Employees working below jumbo
5 feet (1.53 m) into the solid rock, decks shall be warned whenever drill-
whichever is less. ing is about to begin.
(B) The casing or bracing shall ex- (7) Drills on columns shall be an-
tend 42 inches (1.07 m) plus or minus 3 chored firmly before starting drilling,
inches (8 cm) above ground level, ex- and shall be retightened as necessary
cept that the minimum casing height thereafter.
may be reduced to 12 inches (0.3 m), (8) (i) The employer shall provide me-
provided that a standard railing is in- chanical means on the top deck of a
stalled; that the ground adjacent to the jumbo for lifing unwieldy or heavy ma-
top of the shaft is sloped away from the terial.
shaft collar to prevent entry of liquids; (ii) When jumbo decks are over 10
and that effective barriers are used to feet (3.05 m) in height, the employer
prevent mobile equipment operating shall install stairs wide enough for two
near the shaft from jumping over the 12 persons.
inch (0.3 m) barrier. (iii) Jumbo decks more than 10 feet
(iii) After blasting operations in (3.05 m) in height shall be equipped
shafts, a competent person shall deter- with guardrails on all open sides, ex-
mine if the walls, ladders, timbers, cluding access openings of platforms,
blocking, or wedges have loosened. If unless an adjacent surface provides
so, necessary repairs shall be made be- equivalent fall protection.
fore employees other than those as- (iv) (A) Only employees assisting the
signed to make the repairs are allowed operator shall be allowed to ride on
in or below the affected areas. jumbos, unless the jumbo meets the re-
(p) Blasting. This paragraph applies in quirements of paragraph (r)(6)(ii) of
addition to the requirements for blast- this section.
ing and explosives operations, includ- (B) Jumbos shall be chocked to pre-
ing handling of misfires, which are vent movement while employees are
found in subpart U of this part. working on them.
(1) Blasting wires shall be kept clear (v) (A) Walking and working surfaces
of electrical lines, pipes, rails, and of jumbos shall be maintained to pre-
other conductive material, excluding vent the hazards of slipping, tripping
earth, to prevent explosives initiation and falling.
or employee exposure to electric cur- (B) Jumbo decks and stair treads
rent. shall be designed to be slip-resistent
(2) Following blasting, an employee and secured to prevent accidental dis-
shall not enter a work area until the placement.
air quality meets the requirements of (9) Scaling bars shall be available at
paragraph (j) of this section. scaling operations and shall be main-
(q) Drilling. (1) A competent person tained in good condition at all times.
shall inspect all drilling and associated Blunted or severely worn bars shall not
equipment prior to each use. Equip- be used.
ment defects affecting safety shall be (10) (i) Blasting holes shall not be
corrected before the equipment is used. drilled through blasted rock (muck) or
(2) The drilling area shall be in- water.

spected for hazards before the drilling (ii) Employees in a shaft shall be pro-
operation is started. tected either by location or by suitable
438
barrier(s) if powered mechanical load- vehicle transportation of employees

ing equipment is used to remove muck are found in § 1926.601 of this part.
containing unfired explosives. (7) Powered mobile haulage equip-
(11) A caution sign reading ‘‘Buried ment, including trains, shall not be left
Line,’’ or similar wording shall be post- unattended unless the master switch or
ed where air lines are buried or other- motor is turned off; operating controls
wise hidden by water or debris. are in neutral or park position; and the
(r) Haulage. (1)(i) A competent person brakes are set, or equivalent pre-
shall inspect haulage equipment before cautions are taken to prevent rolling.
each shift. (8) Whenever rails serve as a return
(ii) Equipment defects affecting safe- for a trolley circuit, both rails shall be
ty and health shall be corrected before bonded at every joint and crossbonded
the equipment is used. every 200 feet (60.96 m).
(2) Powered mobile haulage equip- (9) When dumping cars by hand, the
ment shall have suitable means of stop- car dumps shall have tiedown chains,
ping. bumper blocks, or other locking or
(3)(i) Power mobile haulage equip- holding devices to prevent the cars
ment, including trains, shall have audi- from overturning.
ble warning devices to warn employees (10) Rocker-bottom or bottom-dump
to stay clear. The operator shall sound cars shall be equipped with positive
the warning device before moving the locking devices to prevent unintended
equipment and whenever necessary dumping.
during travel. (11) Equipment to be hauled shall be
(ii) The operator shall assure that loaded and secured to prevent sliding
lights which are visible to employees or dislodgement.
at both ends of any mobile equipment,
(12)(i) Mobile equipment, including
including a train, are turned on when-
rail-mounted equipment, shall be
ever the equipment is operating.
stopped for manual connecting or serv-
(4) In those cabs where glazing is
ice work.
used, the glass shall be safety glass, or
(ii) Employees shall not reach be-
its equivalent, and shall be maintained
tween moving cars during coupling op-
and cleaned so that vision is not ob-
erations.
structed.
(5) Anti-roll back devices or brakes (iii) Couplings shall not be aligned,
shall be installed on inclined conveyor shifted or cleaned on moving cars or lo-
drive units to prevent conveyors from comotives.
inadvertently running in reverse. (13)(i) Safety chains or other connec-
(6)(i) (A) Employees shall not be per- tions shall be used in addition to cou-
mitted to ride a power-driven chain, plers to connect man cars or powder
belt, or bucket conveyor unless the cars whenever the locomotive is uphill
conveyor is specifically designed for of the cars.
the transportation of persons. (ii) When the grade exceeds one per-
(B) Endless belt-type manlifts are cent and there is a potential for run-
prohibited in underground construc- away cars, safety chains or other con-
tion. nections shall be used in addition to
(C) General requirements also appli- couplers to connect haulage cars or, as
cable to underground construction for an alternative, the locomotive must be
use of conveyors in construction are downhill of the train.
found in § 1926.555 of this part. (iii) Such safety chains or other con-
(ii) No employee shall ride haulage nections shall be capable of maintain-
equipment unless it is equipped with ing connection between cars in the
seating for each passenger and protects event of either coupler disconnect, fail-
passengers from being struck, crushed, ure or breakage.
or caught between other equipment or (14) Parked rail equipment shall be
surfaces. Members of train crews may chocked, blocked, or have brakes set to
ride on a locomotive if it is equipped prevent inadvertent movement.
with handholds and nonslip steps or (15) Berms, bumper blocks, safety
footboards. Requirements applicable to hooks, or equivalent means shall be
Underground Construction for motor provided to prevent overtravel and
439
overturning of haulage equipment at elevator requirements of § 1926.552(a)

dumping locations. and (d) of this part.
(16) Bumper blocks or equivalent (1) General requirements for cranes and
stopping devices shall be provided at hoists. (i) Materials, tools, and supplies
all track dead ends. being raised or lowered, whether within
(17)(i) Only small handtools, lunch a cage or otherwise, shall be secured or
pails or similar small items may be stacked in a manner to prevent the
transported with employees in man- load from shifting, snagging or falling
cars, or on top of a locomotive. into the shaft.
(ii) When small hand tools or other (ii) A warning light suitably located
small items are carried on top of a lo- to warn employees at the shaft bottom
comotive, the top shall be designed or and subsurface shaft entrances shall
modified to retain them while trav- flash whenever a load is above the
eling. shaft bottom or subsurface entrances,
(18)(i) Where switching facilities are or the load is being moved in the shaft.
available, occupied personnel-cars shall This paragraph does not apply to fully
be pulled, not pushed. If personnel-cars enclosed hoistways.
must be pushed and visibility of the (iii) Whenever a hoistway is not fully
track ahead is hampered, then a quali- enclosed and employees are at the
fied person shall be stationed in the shaft bottom, conveyances or equip-
lead car to give signals to the loco- ment shall be stopped at least 15 feet
motive operator. (4.57 m) above the bottom of the shaft
(ii) Crew trips shall consist of per- and held there until the signalman at
sonnel-loads only. the bottom of the shaft directs the op-
(s) Electrical safety. This paragraph erator to continue lowering the load,
applies in addition to the general re- except that the load may be lowered
quirements for electrical safety which without stopping if the load or convey-
are found in subpart K of this part. ance is within full view of a bottom
(1) Electric power lines shall be insu- signalman who is in constant voice
lated or located away from water lines, communication with the operator.
telephone lines, air lines, or other con- (iv)(A) Before maintenance, repairs,
ductive materials so that a damaged or other work is commenced in the
circuit will not energize the other sys- shaft served by a cage, skip, or bucket,
tems. the operator and other employees in
(2) Lighting circuits shall be located the area shall be informed and given
so that movement of personnel or suitable instructions.
equipment will not damage the circuits (B) A sign warning that work is being
or disrupt service. done in the shaft shall be installed at
(3) Oil-filled transformers shall not the shaft collar, at the operator’s sta-
be used underground unless they are lo- tion, and at each underground landing.
cated in a fire-resistant enclosure suit- (v) Any connection between the
ably vented to the outside and sur- hoisting rope and the cage or skip shall
rounded by a dike to retain the con- be compatible with the type of wire
tents of the transformers in the event rope used for hoisting.
of rupture. (vi) Spin-type connections, where
(t) Hoisting unique to underground con- used, shall be maintained in a clean
struction. Except as modified by this condition and protected from foreign
paragraph (t), employers must: Comply matter that could affect their oper-
with the requirements of subpart CC of ation.
this part, except that the limitation in (vii) Cage, skip, and load connections
§ 1926.1431(a) does not apply to the rou- to the hoist rope shall be made so that
tine access of employees to an under- the force of the hoist pull, vibration,
ground worksite via a shaft; ensure misalignment, release of lift force, or
that material hoists comply with impact will not disengage the connec-
§ 1926.552(a) and (b) of this part; and en- tion. Moused or latched openthroat
sure that personnel hoists comply with hooks do not meet this requirement.
the personnel-hoists requirements of (viii) When using wire rope wedge
§ 1926.552(a) and (c) of this part and the sockets, means shall be provided to
440
prevent wedge escapement and to en- (x) A fire extinguisher that is rated
sure that the wedge is properly seated. at least 2A:10B:C (multi-purpose, dry
(2) Additional requirements for cranes. chemical) shall be mounted in each
Cranes shall be equipped with a limit hoist house.
switch to prevent overtravel at the (xi) Hoist controls shall be arranged
boom tip. Limit switches are to be used so that the operator can perform all
only to limit travel of loads when oper- operating cycle functions and reach the
ational controls malfunction and shall emergency power cutoff without hav-
not be used as a substitute for other ing to reach beyond the operator’s nor-
operational controls. mal operating position.
(3) Additional requirements for hoists. (xii) Hoists shall be equipped with
(i) Hoists shall be designed so that the limit switches to prevent overtravel at
load hoist drum is powered in both di- the top and bottom of the hoistway.
rections of rotation, and so that brakes (xiii) Limit switches are to be used
are automatically applied upon power only to limit travel of loads when oper-
release or failure. ational controls malfunction and shall
(ii) Control levers shall be of the not be used as a substitute for other
‘‘deadman type’’ which return auto- operational controls.
matically to their center (neutral) po- (xiv) Hoist operators shall be pro-
sition upon release. vided with a closed-circuit voice com-
(iii) When a hoist is used for both munication system to each landing sta-
personnel hoisting and material hoist- tion, with speaker microphones so lo-
ing, load and speed ratings for per- cated that the operator can commu-
sonnel and for materials shall be as- nicate with individual landing stations
signed to the equipment. during hoist use.
(iv) Material hoisting may be per- (xv) When sinking shafts 75 feet (22.86
formed at speeds higher than the rated m) or less in depth, cages, skips, and
speed for personnel hoisting if the hoist buckets that may swing, bump, or snag
and components have been designed for against shaft sides or other structural
such higher speeds and if shaft condi- protrusions shall be guided by fenders,
tions permit. rails, ropes, or a combination of those
(v) Employees shall not ride on top of means.
any cage, skip or bucket except when (xvi) When sinking shafts more than
necessary to perform inspection or 75 feet (22.86 m) in depth, all cages,
maintenance of the hoisting system, in skips, and buckets shall be rope or rail
which case they shall be protected by a guided to within a rail length from the
body belt/harness system to prevent sinking operation.
falling. (xvii) Cages, skips, and buckets in all
(vi) Personnel and materials (other completed shafts, or in all shafts being
than small tools and supplies secured used as completed shafts, shall be rope
in a manner that will not create a haz- or rail-guided for the full length of
ard to employees) shall not be hoisted their travel.
together in the same conveyance. How- (xviii) Wire rope used in load lines of
ever, if the operator is protected from material hoists shall be capable of sup-
the shifting of materials, then the op- porting, without failure, at least five
erator may ride with materials in times the maximum intended load or
cages or skips which are designed to be the factor recommended by the rope
controlled by an operator within the manufacturer, whichever is greater.
cage or skip. Refer to § 1926.552(c)(14)(iii) of this part
(vii) Line speed shall not exceed the for design factors for wire rope used in
design limitations of the systems. personnel hoists. The design factor
(viii) Hoists shall be equipped with shall be calculated by dividing the
landing level indicators at the opera- breaking strength of wire rope, as re-
tor’s station. Marking the hoist rope ported in the manufacturer’s rating ta-
does not satisfy this requirement. bles, by the total static load, including
(ix) Whenever glazing is used in the the weight of the wire rope in the shaft
hoist house, it shall be safety glass, or when fully extended.

its equivalent, and be free of distor- (xix) A competent person shall vis-
tions and obstructions. ually check all hoisting machinery,
441
equipment, anchorages, and hoisting (iv) All personnel cages shall be pro-
rope at the beginning of each shift and vided with a positive locking door that
during hoist use, as necessary. does not open outward.
(xx) Each safety device shall be (v) All personnel cages shall be pro-
checked by a competent person at least vided with a protective canopy. The
weekly during hoist use to ensure suit- canopy shall be made of steel plate, at
able operation and safe condition. least 3/16-inch (4.763 mm) in thickness,
(xxi) In order to ensure suitable oper- or material of equivalent strength and
ation and safe condition of all func- impact resistance. The canopy shall be
tions and safety devices, each hoist as- sloped to the outside, and so designed
sembly shall be inspected and load- that a section may be readily pushed
tested to 100 percent of its rated capac- upward to afford emergency egress.
ity: at the time of installation; after The canopy shall cover the top in such
any repairs or alterations affecting its a manner as to protect those inside
structural integrity; after the oper- from objects falling in the shaft.
ation of any safety device; and annu- (vi) Personnel platforms operating on
ally when in use. The employer shall
guide rails or guide ropes shall be
prepare a certification record which in-
equipped with broken-rope safety de-
cludes the date each inspection and
vices, safety catches or arrestment de-
load-test was performed; the signature
of the person who performed the in- vices that will stop and hold 150 per-
spection and test; and a serial number cent of the weight of the personnel
or other identifier for the hoist that platform and its maximum rated load.
was inspected and tested. The most re- (vii) During sinking operations in
cent certification record shall be main- shafts where guides and safeties are
tained on file until completion of the not yet used, the travel speed of the
project. personnel platform shall not exceed 200
(xxii) Before hoisting personnel or feet (60.96 m) per minute. Governor
material, the operator shall perform a controls set for 200 feet (60.96 m) per
test run of any cage or skip whenever minute shall be installed in the control
it has been out of service for one com- system and shall be used during per-
plete shift, and whenever the assembly sonnel hoisting.
or components have been repaired or (viii) The personnel platform may
adjusted. travel over the controlled length of the
(xxiii) Unsafe conditions shall be cor- hoistway at rated speeds up to 600 feet
rected before using the equipment. (182.88 m) per minute during sinking
(4) Additional requirements for per- operations in shafts where guides and
sonnel hoists. (i) Hoist drum systems safeties are used.
shall be equipped with at least two (ix) The personnel platform may
means of stopping the load, each of travel at rated speeds greater than 600
which shall be capable of stopping and feet (182.88 m) per minute in completed
holding 150 percent of the hoist’s rated shafts.
line pull. A broken-rope safety, safety (u) Definitions. ‘‘Accept’’—Any de-
catch, or arrestment device is not a vice, equipment, or appliance that is
permissible means of stopping under either approved by MSHA and main-
this paragraph (t). tained in permissible condition, or is
(ii) The operator shall remain within listed or labeled for the class and loca-
sight and sound of the signals at the tion under subpart K of this part.
operator’s station.
‘‘Rapid Excavation Machine’’—Tun-
(iii) All sides of personnel cages shall nel boring machines, shields,
be enclosed by one-half inch (12.70 mm)
roadheaders, or any other similar exca-
wire mesh (not less than No. 14 gauge
vation machine.
or equivalent) to a height of not less
than 6 feet (1.83 m). However, when the [54 FR 23850, June 2, 1989; 58 FR 35311, June
cage or skip is being used as a work 30, 1993, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
platform, its sides may be reduced in 1996; 63 FR 1297, Jan. 8, 1998; 71 FR 16674, Apr.
height to 42 inches (1.07 m) when the 3, 2006; 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010; 77 FR 49728,
conveyance is not in motion. Aug. 17, 2012; 78 FR 23841, Apr. 24, 2013]
442
§ 1926.801 Caissons. § 1926.803 Compressed air.

(a) Wherever, in caisson work in (a) General provisions. (1) There shall
which compressed air is used, and the be present, at all times, at least one
working chamber is less than 11 feet in competent person designated by and
length, and when such caissons are at representing the employer, who shall
any time suspended or hung while work be familiar with this subpart in all re-
is in progress so that the bottom of the spects, and responsible for full compli-
excavation is more than 9 feet below ance with these and other applicable
the deck of the working chamber, a subparts.
shield shall be erected therein for the
(2) Every employee shall be in-
protection of the employees.
structed in the rules and regulations
(b) Shafts shall be subjected to a hy-
which concern his safety or the safety
drostatic or air-pressure test, at which
pressure they shall be tight. The shaft of others.
shall be stamped on the outside shell (b) Medical attendance, examination,
about 12 inches from each flange to and regulations. (1) There shall be re-
show the pressure to which they have tained one or more licensed physicians
been subjected. familiar with and experienced in the
(c) Whenever a shaft is used, it shall physical requirements and the medical
be provided, where space permits, with aspects of compressed air work and the
a safe, proper, and suitable staircase treatment of decompression illness. He
for its entire length, including landing shall be available at all times while
platforms, not more than 20 feet apart. work is in progress in order to provide
Where this is impracticable, suitable medical supervision of employees em-
ladders shall be installed with landing ployed in compressed air work. He
platforms located about 20 feet apart to shall himself be physically qualified
break the climb. and be willing to enter a pressurized
(d) All caissons having a diameter or environment.
side greater than 10 feet shall be pro- (2) No employee shall be permitted to
vided with a man lock and shaft for the enter a compressed air environment
exclusive use of employees. until he has been examined by the phy-
(e) In addition to the gauge in the sician and reported by him to be phys-
locks, an accurate gauge shall be main- ically qualified to engage in such work.
tained on the outer and inner side of
(3) In the event an employee is absent
each bulkhead. These gauges shall be
from work for 10 days, or is absent due
accessible at all times and kept in ac-
to sickness or injury, he shall not re-
curate working order.
sume work until he is reexamined by
(f) In caisson operations where em-
ployees are exposed to compressed air the physician, and his physical condi-
working environments, the require- tion reported, as provided in this para-
ments contained in § 1926.803 shall be graph, to be such as to permit him to
complied with. work in compressed air.
(4) After an employee has been em-
§ 1926.802 Cofferdams. ployed continuously in compressed air
(a) If overtopping of the cofferdam by for a period designated by the physi-
high waters is possible, means shall be cian, but not to exceed 1 year, he shall
provided for controlled flooding of the be reexamined by the physician to de-
work area. termine if he is still physically quali-
(b) Warning signals for evacuation of fied to engage in compressed air work.
employees in case of emergency shall (5) Such physician shall at all times
be developed and posted. keep a complete and full record of ex-
(c) Cofferdam walkways, bridges, or aminations made by him. The physi-
ramps with at least two means of rapid cian shall also keep an accurate record
exit shall be provided with guardrails of any decompression illness or other
as specified in subpart M of this part. illness or injury incapacitating any
(d) Cofferdams located close to navi- employee for work, and of all loss of
gable shipping channels shall be pro- life that occurs in the operation of a
tected from vessels in transit, where tunnel, caisson, or other compartment
possible. in which compressed air is used.
443
(6) Records shall be available for the (xi) Be provided with oxygen lines
inspection of the Secretary or his rep- and fittings leading into external
resentatives, and a copy thereof shall tanks. The lines shall be fitted with
be forwarded to OSHA within 48 hours check valves to prevent reverse flow.
following the occurrence of the acci- The oxygen system inside the chamber
dent, death, injury, or decompression shall be of a closed circuit design and
illness. It shall state as fully as pos- be so designed as to automatically shut
sible the cause of said death or decom- off the oxygen supply whenever the fire
pression illness, and the place where system is activated.
the injured or sick employee was (xii) Be in constant charge of an at-
taken, and such other relative informa- tendant under the direct control of the
tion as may be required by the Sec- retained physician. The attendant shall
retary. be trained in the use of the lock and
(7) A fully equipped first aid station suitably instructed regarding steps to
shall be provided at each tunnel project be taken in the treatment of employee
regardless of the number of persons exhibiting symptoms compatible with
employed. An ambulance or transpor- a diagnosis of decompression illness;
tation suitable for a litter case shall be (xiii) Be adjacent to an adequate
at each project. emergency medical facility;
(8) Where tunnels are being excavated (xiv) The medical facility shall be
from portals more than 5 road miles equipped with demand-type oxygen in-
apart, a first aid station and transpor- halation equipment approved by the
tation facilities shall be provided at U.S. Bureau of Mines;
each portal. (xv) Be capable of being maintained
(9) A medical lock shall be estab- at a temperature, in use, not to exceed
lished and maintained in immediate 90 °F. nor be less than 70 °F.; and
working order whenever air pressure in (xvi) Be provided with sources of air,
the working chamber is increased free of oil and carbon monoxide, for
above the normal atmosphere. normal and emergency use, which are
(10) The medical lock shall: capable of raising the air pressure in
(i) Have at least 6 feet of clear head- the lock from 0 to 75 p.s.i.g. in 5 min-
room at the center, and be subdivided utes.
into not less than two compartments; (11) Identification badges shall be
(ii) Be readily accessible to employ- furnished to all employees, indicating
ees working under compressed air; that the wearer is a compressed air
(iii) Be kept ready for immediate use worker. A permanent record shall be
for at least 5 hours subsequent to the kept of all identification badges issued.
emergence of any employee from the The badge shall give the employee’s
working chamber; name, address of the medical lock, the
(iv) Be properly heated, lighted and telephone number of the licensed phy-
ventilated; sician for the compressed air project,
(v) Be maintained in a sanitary con- and contain instructions that in case of
dition; emergency of unknown or doubtful
(vi) Have a nonshatterable port cause or illness, the wearer shall be
through which the occupant(s) may be rushed to the medical lock. The badge
kept under constant observation; shall be worn at all times—off the job,
(vii) Be designed for a working pres- as well as on the job.
sure of 75 p.s.i.g. (c) Telephone and signal communica-
(viii) Be equipped with internal con- tion. (1) Effective and reliable means of
trols which may be overridden by ex- communication, such as bells, whistles,
ternal controls; or telephones, shall be maintained, at
(ix) Be provided with air pressure all times between all the following lo-
gauges to show the air pressure within cations:
each compartment to observers inside (i) The working chamber face;
and outside the medical lock. (ii) The working chamber side of the
(x) Be equipped with a manual type man lock near the door;
sprinkler system that can be activated (iii) The interior of the man lock;
inside the lock or by the outside lock (iv) Lock attendant’s station;
tender. (v) The compressor plant;
444
(vi) The first-aid station; (5) No employee shall be subjected to

(vii) The emergency lock (if one is re- pressure exceeding 50 pounds per
quired); and square inch except in emergency.
(viii) The special decompression (f) Decompression. (1) Decompression
chamber (if one is required). to normal condition shall be in accord-
(d) Signs and records. (1) The time of ance with the Decompression Tables in
decompression shall be posted in each appendix A of this subpart.
man lock as follows: (2) In the event it is necessary for an
employee to be in compressed air more
TIME OF DECOMPRESSION FOR THIS LOCK than once in a 24-hour period, the ap-
ll pounds to ll pounds in ll minutes.
pointed physician shall be responsible
ll pounds to ll pounds in ll minutes.
for the establishment of methods and
(Signed by) llllll (Superintendent) procedures of decompression applicable
to repetitive exposures.
This form shall be posted in the Man Lock at
(3) If decanting is necessary, the ap-
all times.
pointed physician shall establish proce-
(2) Any code of signals used shall be dures before any employee is permitted
conspicuously posted near workplace to be decompressed by decanting meth-
entrances and such other locations as ods. The period of time that the em-
may be necessary to bring them to the ployees spend at atmospheric pressure
attention of all employees concerned. between the decompression following
(3) For each 8-hour shift, a record of the shift and recompression shall not
employees employed under air pressure exceed 5 minutes.
shall be kept by an employee who shall (g) Man locks and special decompres-
remain outside the lock near the en- sion chambers—(1) Man locks. (i) Except
trance. This record shall show the pe- in emergency, no employees employed
riod each employee spends in the air in compressed air shall be permitted to
chamber and the time taken from de- pass from the working chamber to at-
compression. A copy shall be submitted mospheric pressure until after decom-
to the appointed physician after each pression, in accordance with the proce-
shift. dures in this subpart.
(ii) The lock attendant in charge of a
(e) Compression. (1) Every employee
man lock shall be under the direct su-
going under air pressure for the first
pervision of the appointed physician.
time shall be instructed on how to
He shall be stationed at the lock con-
avoid excessive discomfort.
trols on the free air side during the pe-
(2) During the compression of em- riod of compression and decompression
ployees, the pressure shall not be in- and shall remain at the lock control
creased to more than 3 p.s.i.g. within station whenever there are men in the
the first minute. The pressure shall be working chamber or in the man lock.
held at 3 p.s.i.g. and again at 7 p.s.i.g. (iii) Except where air pressure in the
sufficiently long to determine if any working chamber is below 12 p.s.i.g.,
employees are experiencing discomfort. each man lock shall be equipped with
(3) After the first minute the pres- automatic controls which, through
sure shall be raised uniformly and at a taped programs, cams, or similar appa-
rate not to exceed 10 p.s.i. per minute. ratus, shall automatically regulate de-
(4) If any employee complains of dis- compressions. It shall also be equipped
comfort, the pressure shall be held to with manual controls to permit the
determine if the symptoms are re- lock attendant to override the auto-
lieved. If, after 5 minutes the discom- matic mechanism in the event of an
fort does not disappear, the lock at- emergency, as provided in paragraph
tendant shall gradually reduce the (g)(1)(viii) of this section.
pressure until the employee signals (iv) A manual control, which can be
that the discomfort has ceased. If he used in the event of an emergency,
does not indicate that the discomfort shall be placed inside the man lock.
has disappeared, the lock attendant (v) A clock, thermometer, and con-
shall reduce the pressure to atmos- tinuous recording pressure gauge with
pheric and the employee shall be re- a 4-hour graph shall be installed out-
leased from the lock. side of each man lock and shall be
445
changed prior to each shift’s decom- served from the working chamber and
pression. The chart shall be of suffi- from the free air side of the lock.
cient size to register a legible record of (xiii) Adequate ventilation in the
variations in pressure within the man lock shall be provided.
lock and shall be visible to the lock at- (xiv) Man locks shall be maintained
tendant. A copy of each graph shall be at a minimum temperature of 70 °F.
submitted to the appointed physician (xv) When locks are not in use and
after each shift. In addition, a pressure employees are in the working chamber,
gauge, clock, and thermometer shall lock doors shall be kept open to the
also be installed in each man lock. Ad- working chamber, where practicable.
ditional fittings shall be provided so (xvi) Provision shall be made to
that test gauges may be attached allow for rescue parties to enter the
whenever necessary. tunnel if the working force is disabled.
(vi) Except where air pressure is (xvii) A special decompression cham-
below 12 p.s.i.g. and there is no danger ber of sufficient size to accommodate
of rapid flooding, all caissons having a the entire force of employees being de-
working area greater than 150 square compressed at the end of a shift shall
feet, and each bulkhead in tunnels of 14 be provided whenever the regularly es-
feet or more in diameter, or equivalent tablished working period requires a
area, shall have at least two locks in total time of decompression exceeding
perfect working condition, one of 75 minutes.
which shall be used exclusively as a (2) Special decompression chamber. (i)
man lock, the other, as a materials The headroom in the special decom-
lock. pression chamber shall be not less than
(vii) Where only a combination man- a minimum 7 feet and the cubical con-
and-materials lock is required, this tent shall provide at least 50 cubic feet
single lock shall be of sufficient capac- of airspace for each employee. For each
ity to hold the employees constituting occupant, there shall be provided 4
two successive shifts. square feet of free walking area and 3
(viii) Emergency locks shall be large square feet of seating space, exclusive
enough to hold an entire heading shift of area required for lavatory and toilet
and a limit maintained of 12 p.s.i.g. facilities. The rated capacity shall be
There shall be a chamber available for based on the stated minimum space per
oxygen decompression therapy to 28 employee and shall be posted at the
p.s.i.g. chamber entrance. The posted capacity
(ix) The man lock shall be large shall not be exceeded, except in case of
enough so that those using it are not emergency.
compelled to be in a cramped position, (ii) Each special decompression
and shall not have less than 5 feet clear chamber shall be equipped with the fol-
head room at the center and a min- lowing:
imum of 30 cubic feet of air space per (a) A clock or clocks suitably placed
occupant. so that the attendant and the chamber
(x) Locks on caissons shall be so lo- occupants can readily ascertain the
cated that the bottom door shall be not time;
less than 3 feet above the water level (b) Pressure gauges which will indi-
surrounding the caisson on the outside. cate to the attendants and to the
(The water level, where it is affected by chamber occupants the pressure in the
tides, is construed to mean high tide.) chamber;
(xi) In addition to the pressure gauge (c) Valves to enable the attendant to
in the locks, an accurate pressure control the supply and discharge of
gauge shall be maintained on the outer compressed air into and from the
and inner side of each bulkhead. These chamber;
gauges shall be accessible at all times (d) Valves and pipes, in connection
and shall be kept in accurate working with the air supply and exhaust, ar-
order. ranged so that the chamber pressure
(xii) Man locks shall have an observa- can be controlled from within and
tion port at least 4 inches in diameter without;

located in such a position that all oc- (e) Effective means of oral inter-
cupants of the man lock may be ob- communication between the attendant,
446
occupants of the chamber, and the air pressure in not more than two head-
compressor plant; and ings: Provided, That the gauge and con-
(f) An observation port at the en- trols are all in one location. In caisson
trance to permit observation of the work, there shall be a gauge tender for
chamber occupants. each caisson.
(iii) Seating facilities in special de- (2) The low air compressor plant shall
compression chambers shall be so ar- be of sufficient capacity to not only
ranged as to permit a normal sitting permit the work to be done safely, but
posture without cramping. Seating shall also provide a margin to meet
space, not less than 18 inches by 24 emergencies and repairs.
inches wide, shall be provided per occu- (3) Low air compressor units shall
pant. have at least two independent and sep-
(iv) Adequate toilet and washing fa- arate sources of power supply and each
cilities, in a screened or enclosed re- shall be capable of operating the entire
cess, shall be provided. Toilet bowls low air plant and its accessory sys-
shall have a built-in protector on the tems.
rim so that an air space is created (4) The capacity, arrangement, and
when the seat lid is closed. number of compressors shall be suffi-
(v) Fresh and pure drinking water cient to maintain the necessary pres-
shall be available. This may be accom- sure without overloading the equip-
plished by either piping water into the ment and to assure maintenance of
special decompression chamber and such pressure in the working chamber
providing drinking fountains, or by during periods of breakdown, repair, or
providing individual canteens, or by emergency.
some other sanitary means. Commu- (5) Switching from one independent
nity drinking vessels are prohibited. source of power supply to the other
(vi) No refuse or discarded material shall be done periodically to ensure the
of any kind shall be permitted to accu- workability of the apparatus in an
mulate, and the chamber shall be kept emergency.
clean. (6) Duplicate low-pressure air
(vii) Unless the special decompres- feedlines and regulating valves shall be
sion chamber is serving as the man provided between the source of air sup-
lock to atmospheric pressure, the spe- ply and a point beyond the locks with
cial decompression chamber shall be one of the lines extending to within 100
situated, where practicable, adjacent feet of the working face.
to the man lock on the atmospheric (7) All high- and low-pressure air sup-
pressure side of the bulkhead. A pas- ply lines shall be equipped with check
sageway shall be provided, connecting valves.
the special chamber with the man lock, (8) Low-pressure air shall be regu-
to permit employees in the process of lated automatically. In addition,
decompression to move from the man manually operated valves shall be pro-
lock to the special chamber without a vided for emergency conditions.
reduction in the ambient pressure from (9) The air intakes for all air com-
that designated for the next stage of pressors shall be located at a place
decompression. The passageway shall where fumes, exhaust, gases, and other
be so arranged as to not interfere with air contaminants will be at a min-
the normal operation of the man lock, imum.
nor with the release of the occupants of (10) Gauges indicating the pressure in
the special chamber to atmospheric the working chamber shall be installed
pressure upon the completion of the de- in the compressor building, the lock at-
compression procedure. tendant’s station, and at the employ-
(h) Compressor plant and air supply. (1) er’s field office.
At all times there shall be a thor- (i) Ventilation and air quality. (1) Ex-
oughly experienced, competent, and re- haust valves and exhaust pipes shall be
liable person on duty at the air control provided and operated so that the
valves as a gauge tender who shall reg- working chamber shall be well venti-
ulate the pressure in the working lated, and there shall be no pockets of
areas. During tunneling operations, dead air. Outlets may be required at in-
one gauge tender may regulate the termediate points along the main low-
447
pressure air supply line to the heading constructed of noncombustible, non-

to eliminate such pockets of dead air. absorptive, insulating materials, ex-
Ventilating air shall be not less than 30 cept that metal may be used if it is ef-
cubic feet per minute. fectively grounded.
(2) The air in the workplace shall be (5) Portable lamps shall be equipped
analyzed by the employer not less than with noncombustible, nonabsorptive,
once each shift, and records of such insulating sockets, approved handles,
tests shall be kept on file at the place basket guards, and approved cords.
where the work is in progress. The test (6) The use of worn or defective port-
results shall be within the threshold able and pendant conductors is prohib-
limit values specified in subpart D of ited.
this part, for hazardous gases, and
(k) Sanitation. (1) Sanitary, heated,
within 10 percent of the lower explosive
limit of flammable gases. If these lim- lighted, and ventilated dressing rooms
its are not met, immediate action to and drying rooms shall be provided for
correct the situation shall be taken by all employees engaged in compressed
the employer. air work. Such rooms shall contain
(3) The temperature of all working suitable benches and lockers. Bathing
chambers which are subjected to air accommodations (showers at the ratio
pressure shall, by means of after-cool- of one to 10 employees per shift),
ers or other suitable devices, be main- equipped with running hot and cold
tained at a temperature not to exceed water, and suitable and adequate toilet
85 °F. accommodations, shall be provided.
(4) Forced ventilation shall be pro- One toilet for each 15 employees, or
vided during decompression. During fractional part thereof, shall be pro-
the entire decompression period, forced vided.
ventilation through chemical or me- (2) When the toilet bowl is shut by a
chanical air purifying devices that will cover, there should be an air space so
ensure a source of fresh air shall be that the bowl or bucket does not im-
provided. plode when pressure is increased.
(5) Whenever heat-producing ma- (3) All parts of caissons and other
chines (moles, shields) are used in com- working compartments shall be kept in
pressed air tunnel operations, a posi- a sanitary condition.
tive means of removing the heat build- (l) Fire prevention and protection. (1)
up at the heading shall be provided. Firefighting equipment shall be avail-
(j) Electricity. (1) All lighting in com- able at all times and shall be main-
pressed-air chambers shall be by elec- tained in working condition.
tricity exclusively, and two inde- (2) While welding or flame-cutting is
pendent electric-lighting systems with being done in compressed air, a
independent sources of supply shall be
firewatch with a fire hose or approved
used. The emergency source shall be
extinguisher shall stand by until such
arranged to become automatically op-
operation is completed.
erative in the event of failure of the
regularly used source. (3) Shafts and caissons containing
(2) The minimum intensity of light flammable material of any kind, either
on any walkway, ladder, stairway, or above or below ground, shall be pro-
working level shall be not less than 10 vided with a waterline and a fire hose
foot-candles, and in all workplaces the connected thereto, so arranged that all
lighting shall at all times be such as to points of the shaft or caisson are with-
enable employees to see clearly. in reach of the hose stream.
(3) All electrical equipment and wir- (4) Fire hose shall be at least 11⁄2
ing for light and power circuits shall inches in nominal diameter; the water
comply with the requirements of sub- pressure shall at all times be adequate
part K of this part for use in damp, for efficient operation of the type of
hazardous, high temperature, and com- nozzle used; and the water supply shall
pressed air environments. be such as to ensure an uninterrupted
(4) External parts of lighting fixtures flow. Fire hose, when not in use, shall
and all other electrical equipment, be located or guarded to prevent injury
when within 8 feet of the floor, shall be thereto.
448
(5) The power house, compressor vided inside and outside the man lock.
house, and all buildings housing ven- The portable fire extinguisher shall be
tilating equipment, shall be provided the dry chemical type.
with at least one hose connection in (10) Equipment, fixtures, and fur-
the water line, with a fire hose con- niture in man locks and special decom-
nected thereto. A fire hose shall be pression chambers shall be constructed
maintained within reach of structures of noncombustible materials. Bedding,
of wood over or near shafts. etc., shall be chemically treated so as
(6) Tunnels shall be provided with a to be fire resistant.
2-inch minimum diameter water line
(11) Head frames shall be constructed
extending into the working chamber
of structural steel or open frame-work
and to within 100 feet of the working
face. Such line shall have hose outlets fireproofed timber. Head houses and
with 100 feet of fire hose attached and other temporary surface buildings or
maintained as follows: One at the structures within 100 feet of the shaft,
working face; one immediately inside caisson, or tunnel opening shall be
of the bulkhead of the working cham- built of fire-resistant materials.
ber; and one immediately outside such (12) No oil, gasoline, or other combus-
bulkhead. In addition, hose outlets tible material shall be stored within
shall be provided at 200-foot intervals 100 feet of any shaft, caisson, or tunnel
throughout the length of the tunnel, opening, except that oils may be stored
and 100 feet of fire hose shall be at- in suitable tanks in isolated fireproof
tached to the outlet nearest to any lo- buildings, provided such buildings are
cation where flammable material is not less than 50 feet from any shaft,
being kept or stored or where any caisson, or tunnel opening, or any
flame is being used. building directly connected thereto.
(7) In addition to fire hose protection (13) Positive means shall be taken to
required by this subpart, on every floor prevent leaking flammable liquids
of every building not under compressed from flowing into the areas specifically
air, but used in connection with the mentioned in the preceding paragraph.
compressed air work, there shall be
(14) All explosives used in connection
provided at least one approved fire ex-
tinguisher of the proper type for the with compressed air work shall be se-
hazard involved. At least two approved lected, stored, transported, and used as
fire extinguishers shall be provided in specified in subpart U of this part.
the working chamber as follows: One at (m) Bulkheads and safety screens. (1)
the working face and one immediately Intermediate bulkheads with locks, or
inside the bulkhead (pressure side). Ex- intermediate safety screens or both,
tinguishers in the working chamber are required where there is the danger
shall use water as the primary extin- of rapid flooding.
guishing agent and shall not use any (2) In tunnels 16 feet or more in di-
extinguishing agent which could be ameter, hanging walkways shall be
harmful to the employees in the work- provided from the face to the man lock
ing chamber. The fire extinguisher as high in the tunnel as practicable,
shall be protected from damage. with at least 6 feet of head room. Walk-
(8) Highly combustible materials ways shall be constructed of non-
shall not be used or stored in the work- combustible material. Standard rail-
ing chamber. Wood, paper, and similar ings shall be securely installed
combustible material shall not be used throughout the length of all walkways
in the working chamber in quantities on open sides in accordance with sub-
which could cause a fire hazard. The part M of this part. Where walkways
compressor building shall be con-
are ramped under safety screens, the
structed of non-combustible material.
walkway surface shall be skidproofed
(9) Man locks shall be equipped with
a manual type fire extinguisher system by cleats or by equivalent means.
that can be activated inside the man (3) Bulkheads used to contain com-
lock and also by the outside lock at- pressed air shall be tested, where prac-
tendant. In addition, a fire hose and ticable, to prove their ability to resist
portable fire extinguisher shall be pro-
449
the highest air pressure which may be and a second exposure to compressed
expected to be used. air does not occur until at least 12 con-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
secutive hours of exposure to normal
1979, as amended at 47 FR 14696, 14706, Apr. 6, atmospheric pressure has elapsed since
1982; 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986; 61 FR 5510, the employee has been under pressure.
Feb. 13, 1996] (k) Pressure—A force acting on a unit
area. Usually shown as pounds per
§ 1926.804 Definitions applicable to square inch. (p.s.i.)
this subpart. (l) Absolute pressure (p.s.i.a.)—The
(a) Bulkhead—An airtight structure sum of the atmospheric pressure and
separating the working chamber from gauge pressure (p.s.i.g.).
free air or from another chamber under (m) Atmospheric pressure—The pres-
a lesser pressure than the working sure of air at sea level, usually 14.7
pressure. p.s.i.a. (1 atmosphere), or 0 p.s.i.g.
(b) Caisson—A wood, steel, concrete (n) Gauge pressure (p.s.i.g.)—Pressure
or reinforced concrete, air- and water- measured by a gauge and indicating
tight chamber in which it is possible the pressure exceeding atmospheric.
for men to work under air pressure (o) Safety screen—An air- and water-
greater than atmospheric pressure to tight diaphragm placed across the
excavate material below water level. upper part of a compressed air tunnel
(c) Decanting—A method used for de- between the face and bulkhead, in
compressing under emergency cir- order to prevent flooding the crown of
cumstances. In this procedure, the em- the tunnel between the safety screen
ployees are brought to atmospheric and the bulkhead, thus providing a safe
pressure with a very high gas tension means of refuge and exit from a flood-
in the tissues and then immediately re- ing or flooded tunnel.
compressed in a second and separate (p) Special decompression chamber—A
chamber or lock. chamber to provide greater comfort of
(d) Emergency locks—A lock designed employees when the total decompres-
to hold and permit the quick passage of sion time exceeds 75 minutes.
an entire shift of employees. (q) Working chamber—The space or
(e) High air—Air pressure used to sup- compartment under air pressure in
ply power to pneumatic tools and de- which the work is being done.
vices.
(f) Low air—Air supplied to pressurize APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S OF PART
working chambers and locks. 1926—DECOMPRESSION TABLES
(g) Man lock—A chamber through
1. Explanation. The decompression tables
which men pass from one air pressure
are computed for working chamber pressures
environment into another. from 0 to 14 pounds, and from 14 to 50 pounds
(h) Materials lock—A chamber per square inch gauge inclusive by 2-pound
through which materials and equip- increments and for exposure times for each
ment pass from one air pressure envi- pressure extending from one-half to over 8
ronment into another. hours inclusive. Decompressions will be con-
(i) Medical lock—A special chamber in ducted by two or more stages with a max-
which employees are treated for de- imum of four stages, the latter for a working
chamber pressure of 40 pounds per square
compression illness. It may also be
inch gauge or over.
used in preemployment physical ex- Stage 1 consists of a reduction in ambient
aminations to determine the adapt- pressure ranging from 10 to a maximum of 16
ability of the prospective employee to pounds per square inch, but in no instance
changes in pressure. will the pressure be reduced below 4 pounds
(j) Normal condition—One during at the end of stage 1. This reduction in pres-
which exposure to compressed air is sure in stage 1 will always take place at a
limited to a single continuous working rate not greater than 5 pounds per minute.
period followed by a single decompres- Further reduction in pressure will take
place during stage 2 and subsequent stages as
sion in any given 24-hour period; the required at a slower rate, but in no event at
total time of exposure to compressed
a rate greater than 1 pound per minute.

air during the single continuous work- Decompression Table No. 1 indicates in the
ing period is not interrupted by expo- body of the table the total decompression
sure to normal atmospheric pressure, time in minutes for various combinations of
450
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A
working chamber pressure and exposure Examples Minutes
time.
Decompression Table No. 2 indicates for Stage 2 (final stage): Reduce pressure at a
the same various combinations of working uniform rate from 4 pounds to 0-pound
gage over a period of 40 minutes.
chamber pressure and exposure time the fol-
Rate—0.10 pound per minute or 10 minutes
lowing:
per pound.
a. The number of stages required;
Stage 2 (final) elapsed time ......................... 40
b. The reduction in pressure and the ter-
minal pressure for each required stage; Total time .............................................. 43
c. The time in minutes through which the Example No. 2: 5-hour working period at 24
reduction in pressure is accomplished for pounds gage.
each required stage; Decompression Table No. 1: 24 pounds for 5
d. The pressure reduction rate in minutes hours, total decompression time ...................... 117
per pound for each required stage; Decompression Table No. 2:
IMPORTANT NOTE: The Pressure Reduction Stage 1: Reduce pressure from 24 pounds
in Each Stage is Accomplished at a Uniform to 8 pounds at the uniform rate of 5
pounds per minute.
Rate. Do Not Interpolate Between Values
Elapsed time stage 1: 16/5 ................... 3
Shown on the Tables. Use the Next Higher
Stage 2: Reduce pressure at a uniform rate
Value of Working Chamber Pressure or Expo- from 8 pounds to 4 pounds over a period
sure Time Should the Actual Working Cham- of 4 minutes. Rate, 1 pound per minute
ber Pressure or the Actual Exposure Time, elapsed time, stage 2 ............................... 4
Respectively, Fall Between Those for Which Transfer men to special decompression
Calculated Values Are Shown in the Body of chamber maintaining the 4-pound pres-
the Tables. sure during the transfer operation.
Stage 3 (final stage): In the special decom-
Examples Minutes pression chamber, reduce the pressure at
a uniform rate from 4 pounds to 0-pound
Example No. 1: 4 hours working period at 20 gage over a period of 110 minutes. Rate,
pounds gauge. 0.037 pound per minute or 27.5 minutes
Decompression Table No. 1: 20 pounds for 4 per pound. Stage 3 (final) elapsed time ... 110
hours, total decompression time ...................... 43
Decompression Table No. 2: Total time .............................................. 117
Stage 1: Reduce pressure from 20 pounds
to 4 pounds at the uniform rate of 5
pounds per minute.
Elapsed time stage 1: 16/5 ................... 3
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 1—TOTAL DECOMPRESSION TIME

Working period hours
Work pressure p.s.i.g.
12 Over
⁄ 1 1 ⁄
12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8
9 to 12 ........................................ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
14 ................................................ 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 16 16 33
16 ................................................ 7 7 7 7 7 7 17 33 48 48 62
18 ................................................ 7 7 7 8 11 17 48 63 63 73 87
20 ................................................ 7 7 8 15 15 43 63 73 83 103 113
22 ................................................ 9 9 16 24 38 68 93 103 113 128 133
24 ................................................ 11 12 23 27 52 92 117 122 127 137 151
26 ................................................ 13 14 29 34 69 104 126 141 142 142 163
28 ................................................ 15 23 31 41 98 127 143 153 153 165 183
30 ................................................ 17 28 38 62 105 143 165 168 178 188 204
32 ................................................ 19 35 43 85 126 163 178 193 203 213 226
34 ................................................ 21 39 58 98 151 178 195 218 223 233 248
36 ................................................ 24 44 63 113 170 198 223 233 243 253 273
38 ................................................ 28 49 73 128 178 203 223 238 253 263 278
40 ................................................ 31 49 84 143 183 213 233 248 258 278 288
42 ................................................ 37 56 102 144 189 215 245 260 263 268 293
44 ................................................ 43 64 118 154 199 234 254 264 269 269 293
46 ................................................ 44 74 139 171 214 244 269 274 289 299 318
48 ................................................ 51 89 144 189 229 269 299 309 319 319 ..........
50 ................................................ 58 94 164 209 249 279 309 329 .......... .......... ..........
451
Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2

[Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]
Decompression data
Working
Working chamber pressure Total time
period Pressure reduc. p.s.i.g. Time in Pressure
p.s.i.g. decom-
hours Stage No. stage min- reduc. rate press min-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
14 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
1 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
11⁄2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
3 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
4 1 14 0 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
5 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
6 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
7 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 14 3.50 16
8 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 14 3.50 16
Over 8 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 30 7.50 32
16 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 1 16 4 3 0.20 7
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 ⁄
12 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
2 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
3 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
4 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
5 1 14 4 3 0.20 7
2 4 0 4 3.50 17
6 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 30 7.50 33
7 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 45 11.25 48
8 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 45 11.25 48
Over 8 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
18 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
11⁄2 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
2 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 5 1.25 8
3 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 8 2.00 11
4 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 14 3.50 17
5 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 45 11.25 48
6 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
7 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
8 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 70 17.50 73
Over 8 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 84 21.00 87
452
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—Continued

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
20 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................

2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
11⁄2 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 5 1.25 8
2 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 12 3.00 15
3 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 12 3.00 15
4 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 40 10.00 43
5 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
6 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 70 17.50 73
7 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 80 20.00 83
8 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 100 25.00 103
Over 8 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 110 27.50 113
22 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 6 1.00 9
1 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 6 1.00 9
1 ⁄
12 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 13 2.20 16
2 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 21 3.50 24
3 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 35 5.85 38
4 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 65 10.83 68
5 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 90 15.00 93
6 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 100 16.67 103
7 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 110 18.35 113
8 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 125 20.80 128
Over 8 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 130 21.70 133
24 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 11
1 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 5 1.25 12
11⁄2 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 16 4.00 23
2 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 27
3 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 45 11.25 52
4 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 85 21.25 92
5 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 110 27.50 117
6 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
453

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 115 28.80 122
7 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 127
8 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 137
Over 8 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 8 2.00 ..................
3 4 0 140 35.00 151
26 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 13
1 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 5 1.25 14
11⁄2 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 29
2 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 34
3 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 60 15.00 69
4 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 95 23.75 104
5 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 8 1.33 ..................
3 4 0 115 28.80 126
6 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 8 1.33 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 141
7 1 26 10 3 2.20 ..................
2 10 4 9 1.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 142
8 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 9 1.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 142
Over 8 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 30 5.00 ..................
3 4 0 30 32.50 163
28 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 15
1 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 12 3.00 23
11⁄2 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 31
2 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 30 7.50 41
3 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 10 1.25 ..................
3 4 0 85 21.20 98
4 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 14 1.75 ..................
3 4 0 110 27.50 127
5 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 143
6 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
454

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 153
7 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 120 32.50 153
8 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 32 4.00 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 165
Over 8 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 50 6.25 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 183
30 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 17
1 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 15 3.75 28
11⁄2 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 38
2 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 14 1.40 ..................
3 4 0 45 11.25 62
3 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 17 1.70 ..................
3 4 0 85 21.20 105
4 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 30 3.00 ..................
3 4 0 110 27.50 143
5 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 35 3.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 165
6 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 35 3.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 168
7 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 45 4.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 178
8 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 55 5.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 188
Over 8 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 71 7.10 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 204
32 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 12 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 19
1 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 12 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 35
11⁄2 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 15 1.25 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 43
2 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 22 1.83 ..................
3 4 0 60 15.00 85
3 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 28 2.33 ..................
3 4 0 95 23.75 126
4 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 40 3.33 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 163
5 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 45 3.75 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 178
6 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
455

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 16 4 60 5.00 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 193
7 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 70 5.83 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 203
8 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 80 6.67 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 213
Over 8 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 93 7.75 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 226
34 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 14 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 21
1 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 14 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 22 5.50 39
11⁄2 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 25 1.80 ..................
3 4 0 30 7.50 58
2 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 35 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 60 15.00 98
3 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 43 3.10 ..................
3 4 0 105 26.25 151
4 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 55 3.93 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 178
5 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 62 4.43 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 195
6 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 85 6.07 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 218
7 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 90 6.43 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 223
8 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 100 7.15 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 233
Over 8 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 115 8.23 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 248
36 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 16 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 5 1.25 24
1 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 16 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 44
11⁄2 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 30 1.88 ..................
3 4 0 30 7.50 63
2 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 40 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 70 17.50 113
3 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 52 3.25 ..................
3 4 0 115 28.75 170
4 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 65 4.06 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 198
5 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 90 5.63 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 223
6 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
456

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 20 4 100 6.25 ..................

3 4 0 130 32.50 233
7 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 110 6.88 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 243
8 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 120 7.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 253
Over 8 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 140 8.75 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 273
38 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 16 1.00 ..................
3 6 0 9 1.50 28
1 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 16 1.00 ..................
3 6 0 30 5.00 49
11⁄2 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 20 1.25 ..................
3 6 0 50 8.34 73
2 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 30 1.88 ..................
3 6 0 95 15.83 128
3 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 35 2.19 ..................
3 6 0 140 23.35 178
4 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 50 3.12 ..................
3 6 0 150 25.00 203
5 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 55 3.44 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 223
6 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 70 4.38 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 238
7 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 85 5.32 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 253
8 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 95 5.93 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 263
Over 8 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 110 6.88 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 278
40 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 16 1.00 ..................
3 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 8 2.00 31
1 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 16 1.00 ..................
3 8 4 5 1.25 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 49
11⁄2 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 16 1.00 ..................
3 8 4 20 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 45 11.25 84
2 2 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
1 24 8 25 1.56 ..................
3 8 4 20 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 95 23.75 143
3 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 30 1.88 ..................
3 8 4 30 7.50 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 183
4 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 45 2.81 ..................
457

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
3 8 4 35 8.75 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 213
5 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 47 2.94 ..................
3 8 4 53 13.25 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 233
6 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 55 3.44 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 248
7 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 65 4.06 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 258
8 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 75 4.70 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 268
Over 8 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 95 5.93 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 288
42 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 12 3.00 37
1 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 12 2.00 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 56
11⁄2 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 23 3.83 ..................
4 4 0 60 15.00 102
2 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 30 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 95 23.75 144
3 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 50 8.34 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 189
4 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 17 1.06 ..................
3 10 4 65 10.83 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 215
5 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 27 1.69 ..................
3 10 4 85 14.18 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 245
6 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 27 1.69 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 260
7 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 30 1.88 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 263
8 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 35 2.19 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 268
Over 8 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................

2 26 10 60 3.75 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 293
458

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
44 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................

2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 16 4.00 43
1 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 64
11⁄2 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 27 3.38 ..................
4 4 0 72 18.00 118
2 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 40 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 95 23.75 154
3 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 60 7.50 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 199
4 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 85 10.62 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 234
5 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 105 13.13 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 254
6 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 115 14.38 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 264
7 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 120 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
8 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 120 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
Over 8 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 40 2.50 ..................
3 12 4 120 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 293
46 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 15 3.75 44
1 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 25 2.50 ..................
4 4 0 30 7.50 74
11⁄2 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 35 3.50 ..................
4 4 0 85 21.20 139
2 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 47 4.70 ..................
4 4 0 105 26.25 171
3 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 65 6.50 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 214
4 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
459

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
3 14 4 95 9.50 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 244
5 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 120 12.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
6 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 125 12.50 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 274
7 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 140 14.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 289
8 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 150 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 299
Over 8 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 25 1.56 ..................
3 14 4 160 16.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 318
48 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 12 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 20 5.00 51
1 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 35 2.92 ..................
4 4 0 35 8.75 89
11⁄2 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 45 3.75 ..................
4 4 0 80 20.00 144
2 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 60 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 110 27.50 189
3 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 90 7.50 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 229
4 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 120 10.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
5 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 140 11.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 209
6 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 160 13.33 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 309
7 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 170 14.17 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 ..................
8 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 170 14.17 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 ..................
50 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................

2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 14 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 58
460

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
1 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 40 2.86 ..................
4 4 0 35 8.75 94
11⁄2 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 55 3.93 ..................
4 4 0 90 22.50 164
2 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 70 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 209
3 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 100 7.15 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 249
4 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 130 8.58 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 279
5 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 160 11.42 ..................
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—CONTINUED

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
4 4 0 130 32.50 309

6 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 180 12.85 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 329
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993]
Subpart T—Demolition the structure. Any adjacent structure

where employees may be exposed shall
also be similarly checked. The em-
657; and Secretary of Labor’s Orders 12–71 (36 ployer shall have in writing evidence
FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), that such a survey has been performed.
1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 5–2007 (72 (b) When employees are required to
FR 31159), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applica- work within a structure to be demol-
ble. ished which has been damaged by fire,
flood, explosion, or other cause, the
§ 1926.850 Preparatory operations. walls or floor shall be shored or braced.
(a) Prior to permitting employees to (c) All electric, gas, water, steam,
start demolition operations, an engi- sewer, and other service lines shall be
neering survey shall be made, by a shut off, capped, or otherwise con-
competent person, of the structure to trolled, outside the building line before
determine the condition of the fram- demolition work is started. In each

ing, floors, and walls, and possibility of case, any utility company which is in-
unplanned collapse of any portion of volved shall be notified in advance.
461
(d) If it is necessary to maintain any protection from the face of the build-
power, water or other utilities during ing for a minimum of 8 feet. All such
demolition, such lines shall be tempo- canopies shall be at least 2 feet wider
rarily relocated, as necessary, and pro- than the building entrances or open-
tected. ings (1 foot wider on each side thereof),
(e) It shall also be determined if any and shall be capable of sustaining a
type of hazardous chemicals, gases, ex- load of 150 pounds per square foot.
plosives, flammable materials, or simi-
larly dangerous substances have been § 1926.851 Stairs, passageways, and
used in any pipes, tanks, or other ladders.
equipment on the property. When the (a) Only those stairways, passage-
presence of any such substances is ap- ways, and ladders, designated as means
parent or suspected, testing and purg- of access to the structure of a building,
ing shall be performed and the hazard shall be used. Other access ways shall
eliminated before demolition is start- be entirely closed at all times.
ed. (b) All stairs, passageways, ladders
(f) Where a hazard exists from frag- and incidental equipment thereto,
mentation of glass, such hazards shall which are covered by this section, shall
be removed. be periodically inspected and main-
(g) Where a hazard exists to employ- tained in a clean safe condition.
ees falling through wall openings, the (c) In a multistory building, when a
opening shall be protected to a height stairwell is being used, it shall be prop-
of approximately 42 inches. erly illuminated by either natural or
(h) When debris is dropped through artificial means, and completely and
holes in the floor without the use of substantially covered over at a point
chutes, the area onto which the mate- not less than two floors below the floor
rial is dropped shall be completely en- on which work is being performed, and
closed with barricades not less than 42 access to the floor where the work is in
inches high and not less than 6 feet progress shall be through a properly
back from the projected edge of the lighted, protected, and separate pas-
opening above. Signs, warning of the sageway.
hazard of falling materials, shall be
posted at each level. Removal shall not § 1926.852 Chutes.
be permitted in this lower area until
debris handling ceases above. (a) No material shall be dropped to
(i) All floor openings, not used as ma- any point lying outside the exterior
terial drops, shall be covered over with walls of the structure unless the area is
material substantial enough to support effectively protected.
the weight of any load which may be (b) All materials chutes, or sections
imposed. Such material shall be prop- thereof, at an angle of more than 45°
erly secured to prevent its accidental from the horizontal, shall be entirely
movement. enclosed, except for openings equipped
(j) Except for the cutting of holes in with closures at or about floor level for
floors for chutes, holes through which the insertion of materials. The open-
to drop materials, preparation of stor- ings shall not exceed 48 inches in
age space, and similar necessary pre- height measured along the wall of the
paratory work, the demolition of exte- chute. At all stories below the top
rior walls and floor construction shall floor, such openings shall be kept
begin at the top of the structure and closed when not in use.
proceed downward. Each story of exte- (c) A substantial gate shall be in-
rior wall and floor construction shall stalled in each chute at or near the dis-
be removed and dropped into the stor- charge end. A competent employee
age space before commencing the re- shall be assigned to control the oper-
moval of exterior walls and floors in ation of the gate, and the backing and
the story next below. loading of trucks.
(k) Employee entrances to multi- (d) When operations are not in
story structures being demolished shall progress, the area surrounding the dis-
be completely protected by sidewalk charge end of a chute shall be securely
sheds or canopies, or both, providing closed off.
462
(e) Any chute opening, into which hibit the cutting of floor beams for the
workmen dump debris, shall be pro- disposal of materials or for the instal-
tected by a substantial guardrail ap- lation of equipment, provided that the
proximately 42 inches above the floor requirements of §§ 1926.853 and 1926.855
or other surface on which the men are met.
stand to dump the material. Any space (e) Floor openings within 10 feet of
between the chute and the edge of any wall being demolished shall be
openings in the floors through which it planked solid, except when employees
passes shall be solidly covered over. are kept out of the area below.
(f) Where the material is dumped (f) In buildings of ‘‘skeleton-steel’’
from mechanical equipment or wheel- construction, the steel framing may be
barrows, a securely attached toeboard left in place during the demolition of
or bumper, not less than 4 inches thick masonry. Where this is done, all steel
and 6 inches high, shall be provided at beams, girders, and similar structural
each chute opening. supports shall be cleared of all loose
(g) Chutes shall be designed and con- material as the masonry demolition
structed of such strength as to elimi- progresses downward.
nate failure due to impact of materials (g) Walkways or ladders shall be pro-
or debris loaded therein. vided to enable employees to safely
§ 1926.853 Removal of materials reach or leave any scaffold or wall.
through floor openings. (h) Walls, which serve as retaining
walls to support earth or adjoining
Any openings cut in a floor for the structures, shall not be demolished
disposal of materials shall be no larger until such earth has been properly
in size than 25 percent of the aggregate braced or adjoining structures have
of the total floor area, unless the lat- been properly underpinned.
eral supports of the removed flooring
(i) Walls, which are to serve as re-
remain in place. Floors weakened or
taining walls against which debris will
otherwise made unsafe by demolition
be piled, shall not be so used unless ca-
operations shall be shored to carry
pable of safely supporting the imposed
safely the intended imposed load from
load.
demolition operations.
§ 1926.854 Removal of walls, masonry § 1926.855 Manual removal of floors.

sections, and chimneys. (a) Openings cut in a floor shall ex-
(a) Masonry walls, or other sections tend the full span of the arch between
of masonry, shall not be permitted to supports.
fall upon the floors of the building in (b) Before demolishing any floor
such masses as to exceed the safe car- arch, debris and other material shall be
rying capacities of the floors. removed from such arch and other ad-
(b) No wall section, which is more jacent floor area. Planks not less than
than one story in height, shall be per- 2 inches by 10 inches in cross section,
mitted to stand alone without lateral full size undressed, shall be provided
bracing, unless such wall was origi- for, and shall be used by employees to
nally designed and constructed to stand on while breaking down floor
stand without such lateral support, and arches between beams. Such planks
is in a condition safe enough to be self- shall be so located as to provide a safe
supporting. All walls shall be left in a support for the workmen should the
stable condition at the end of each arch between the beams collapse. The
shift. open space between planks shall not
(c) Employees shall not be permitted exceed 16 inches.
to work on the top of a wall when (c) Safe walkways, not less than 18
weather conditions constitute a haz- inches wide, formed of planks not less
ard. than 2 inches thick if wood, or of equiv-
(d) Structural or load-supporting alent strength if metal, shall be pro-
members on any floor shall not be cut vided and used by workmen when nec-
or removed until all stories above such essary to enable them to reach any
a floor have been demolished and re- point without walking upon exposed
moved. This provision shall not pro- beams.
463
(d) Stringers of ample strength shall (e) Storage space into which material
be installed to support the flooring is dumped shall be blocked off, except
planks, and the ends of such stringers for openings necessary for the removal
shall be supported by floor beams or of material. Such openings shall be
girders, and not by floor arches alone. kept closed at all times when material
(e) Planks shall be laid together over is not being removed.
solid bearings with the ends overlap-
ping at least 1 foot. § 1926.858 Removal of steel construc-
(f) When floor arches are being re- tion.
moved, employees shall not be allowed (a) When floor arches have been re-
in the area directly underneath, and moved, planking in accordance with
such an area shall be barricaded to pre- § 1926.855(b) shall be provided for the
vent access to it. workers engaged in razing the steel
(g) Demolition of floor arches shall framing.
not be started until they, and the sur- (b) Cranes, derricks, and other hoisting
rounding floor area for a distance of 20 equipment. Employers must meet the
feet, have been cleared of debris and requirements specified in subparts N
any other unnecessary materials. and CC of this part.
(c) Steel construction shall be dis-
§ 1926.856 Removal of walls, floors, mantled column length by column
and material with equipment. length, and tier by tier (columns may
(a) Mechanical equipment shall not be in two-story lengths).
be used on floors or working surfaces (d) Any structural member being dis-
unless such floors or surfaces are of membered shall not be overstressed.
sufficient strength to support the im- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979 , 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9,
posed load. 2010; 77 FR 49730, Aug. 17, 2012; 78 FR 23843,
(b) Floor openings shall have curbs or Apr. 23, 2013]
stop-logs to prevent equipment from
running over the edge. § 1926.859 Mechanical demolition.
(c) Cranes, derricks, and other mechan- (a) No workers shall be permitted in
ical equipment. Employers must meet any area, which can be adversely af-
the requirements specified in subparts fected by demolition operations, when
N, O, and CC of this part. balling or clamming is being per-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979 , 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, formed. Only those workers necessary
2010; 77 FR 49730, Aug. 17, 2012; 78 FR 23843, for the performance of the operations
Apr. 23, 2013] shall be permitted in this area at any
other time.
§ 1926.857 Storage. (b) The weight of the demolition ball
(a) The storage of waste material and shall not exceed 50 percent of the
debris on any floor shall not exceed the crane’s rated load, based on the length
allowable floor loads. of the boom and the maximum angle of
(b) In buildings having wooden floor operation at which the demolition ball
construction, the flooring boards may will be used, or it shall not exceed 25
be removed from not more than one percent of the nominal breaking
floor above grade to provide storage strength of the line by which it is sus-
space for debris, provided falling mate- pended, whichever results in a lesser
rial is not permitted to endanger the value.
stability of the structure. (c) The crane boom and loadline shall
(c) When wood floor beams serve to be as short as possible.
brace interior walls or free-standing (d) The ball shall be attached to the
exterior walls, such beams shall be left loadline with a swivel-type connection
in place until other equivalent support to prevent twisting of the loadline, and
can be installed to replace them. shall be attached by positive means in
(d) Floor arches, to an elevation of such manner that the weight cannot
not more than 25 feet above grade, may become accidentally disconnected.
be removed to provide storage area for (e) When pulling over walls or por-
debris: Provided, That such removal tions thereof, all steel members af-
does not endanger the stability of the fected shall have been previously cut
structure. free.
464
(f) All roof cornices or other such or- with explosives. All employees shall be
namental stonework shall be removed removed to a safe area and the fire area
prior to pulling walls over. guarded against intruders.
(g) During demoliton, continuing in- (g) Original containers, or Class II
spections by a competent person shall magazines, shall be used for taking det-
be made as the work progresses to de- onators and other explosives from stor-
tect hazards resulting from weakened age magazines to the blasting area.
or deteriorated floors, or walls, or loos- (h) When blasting is done in con-
ened material. No employee shall be gested areas or in proximity to a struc-
permitted to work where such hazards
ture, railway, or highway, or any other
exist until they are corrected by shor-
installation that may be damaged, the
ing, bracing, or other effective means.
blaster shall take special precautions
§ 1926.860 Selective demolition by ex- in the loading, delaying, initiation, and
plosives. confinement of each blast with mats or
Selective demolition by explosives other methods so as to control the
shall be conducted in accordance with throw of fragments, and thus prevent
the applicable sections of subpart U of bodily injury to employees.
this part. (i) Employees authorized to prepare
explosive charges or conduct blasting
Subpart U—Blasting and the Use operations shall use every reasonable
of Explosives precaution including, but not limited
to, visual and audible warning signals,
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours
flags, or barricades, to ensure employee
and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); safety.
secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health (j) Insofar as possible, blasting oper-
Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary ations above ground shall be conducted
of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 between sunup and sundown.
(41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 6–96 (62 FR
(k) Due precautions shall be taken to
111), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
prevent accidental discharge of electric
§ 1926.900 General provisions. blasting caps from current induced by
(a) The employer shall permit only radar, radio transmitters, lightning,
authorized and qualified persons to adjacent powerlines, dust storms, or
handle and use explosives. other sources of extraneous electricity.
(b) Smoking, firearms, matches, open These precautions shall include:
flame lamps, and other fires, flame or (1) Detonators shall be short-
heat producing devices and sparks shall circuited in holes which have been
be prohibited in or near explosive mag- primed and shunted until wired into
azines or while explosives are being the blasting circuit.
handled, transported or used. (2) The suspension of all blasting op-
(c) No person shall be allowed to han- erations and removal of persons from
dle or use explosives while under the the blasting area during the approach
influence of intoxicating liquors, nar- and progress of an electric storm;
cotics, or other dangerous drugs. (3)(i) The prominent display of ade-
(d) All explosives shall be accounted quate signs, warning against the use of
for at all times. Explosives not being mobile radio transmitters, on all roads
used shall be kept in a locked maga- within 1,000 feet of blasting operations.
zine, unavailable to persons not au- Whenever adherence to the 1,000-foot
thorized to handle them. The employer
distance would create an operational
shall maintain an inventory and use
handicap, a competent person shall be
record of all explosives. Appropriate
consulted to evaluate the particular
authorities shall be notified of any
loss, theft, or unauthorized entry into situation, and alternative provisions
a magazine. may be made which are adequately de-
(e) No explosives or blasting agents signed to prevent any premature firing
shall be abandoned. of electric blasting caps. A description

(f) No fire shall be fought where the of any such alternatives shall be re-
fire is in imminent danger of contact duced to writing and shall be certified
465
as meeting the purposes of this subdivi- (q) All loading and firing shall be di-
sion by the competent person con- rected and supervised by competent
sulted. The description shall be main- persons thoroughly experienced in this
tained at the construction site during field.
the duration of the work, and shall be (r) All blasts shall be fired elec-
available for inspection by representa- trically with an electric blasting ma-
tives of the Secretary of Labor. chine or properly designed electric
(ii) Specimens of signs which would power source, except as provided in
meet the requirements of paragraph § 1926.906 (a) and (r).
(k)(3) of this section are the following: (s) Buildings used for the mixing of
blasting agents shall conform to the re-
quirements of this section.
(1) Buildings shall be of noncombus-
tible construction or sheet metal on
wood studs.
(2) Floors in a mixing plant shall be
of concrete or of other nonabsorbent
materials.
(3) All fuel oil storage facilities shall
be separated from the mixing plant and
located in such a manner that in case
(4) Ensuring that mobile radio trans- of tank rupture, the oil will drain away
mitters which are less than 100 feet from the mixing plant building.
away from electric blasting caps, in (4) The building shall be well venti-
other than original containers, shall be lated.
deenergized and effectively locked; (5) Heating units which do not depend
(5) Compliance with the rec- on combustion processes, when prop-
ommendations of The Institute of the erly designed and located, may be used
Makers of Explosives with regard to in the building. All direct sources of
blasting in the vicinity of radio trans- heat shall be provided exclusively from
mitters as stipulated in Radio Fre- units located outside the mixing build-
quency Energy—A Potential Hazard in ing.
the Use of Electric Blasting Caps, IME (6) All internal-combustion engines
Publication No. 20, March 1971. used for electric power generation shall
(l) Empty boxes and paper and fiber be located outside the mixing plant
packing materials, which have pre- building, or shall be properly venti-
viously contained high explosives, lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex-
shall not be used again for any purpose, haust systems on all such engines shall
but shall be destroyed by burning at an be located so any spark emission can-
approved location. not be a hazard to any materials in or
(m) Explosives, blasting agents, and adjacent to the plant.
blasting supplies that are obviously de- (t) Buildings used for the mixing of
teriorated or damaged shall not be water gels shall conform to the re-
used. quirements of this subdivision.
(n) Delivery and issue of explosives (1) Buildings shall be of noncombus-
shall only be made by and to author- tible construction or sheet metal on
ized persons and into authorized maga- wood studs.
zines or approved temporary storage or (2) Floors in a mixing plant shall be
handling areas. of concrete or of other nonabsorbent
(o) Blasting operations in the prox- materials.
imity of overhead power lines, commu- (3) Where fuel oil is used all fuel oil
nication lines, utility services, or other storage facilities shall be separated
services and structures shall not be from the mixing plant and located in
carried on until the operators and/or such a manner that in case of tank rup-
owners have been notified and meas- ture, the oil will drain away from the
ures for safe control have been taken. mixing plant building.
(p) The use of black powder shall be (4) The building shall be well venti-
prohibited. lated.
466
EC30OC91.049</GPH>
(5) Heating units that do not depend (c) No person shall smoke, or carry
on combustion processes, when prop- matches or any other flame-producing
erly designed and located, may be used device, nor shall firearms or loaded
in the building. All direct sources of cartridges be carried while in or near a
heat shall be provided exclusively from motor vehicle or conveyance trans-
units located outside of the mixing porting explosives.
building. (d) Explosives, blasting agents, and
(6) All internal-combustion engines blasting supplies shall not be trans-
used for electric power generation shall ported with other materials or cargoes.
be located outside the mixing plant
Blasting caps (including electric) shall
building, or shall be properly venti-
not be transported in the same vehicle
lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex-
haust systems on all such engines shall with other explosives.
be located so any spark emission can- (e) Vehicles used for transporting ex-
not be a hazard to any materials in or plosives shall be strong enough to
adjacent to the plant. carry the load without difficulty, and
shall be in good mechanical condition.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993]
(f) When explosives are transported
by a vehicle with an open body, a Class
§ 1926.901 Blaster qualifications. II magazine or original manufacturer’s
(a) A blaster shall be able to under- container shall be securely mounted on
stand and give written and oral orders. the bed to contain the cargo.
(b) A blaster shall be in good physical (g) All vehicles used for the transpor-
condition and not be addicted to nar- tation of explosives shall have tight
cotics, intoxicants, or similar types of floors and any exposed spark-producing
drugs. metal on the inside of the body shall be
(c) A blaster shall be qualified, by covered with wood, or other non-
reason of training, knowledge, or expe- sparking material, to prevent contact
rience, in the field of transporting, with containers of explosives.
storing, handling, and use of explo- (h) Every motor vehicle or convey-
sives, and have a working knowledge of ance used for transporting explosives
State and local laws and regulations shall be marked or placarded on both
which pertain to explosives. sides, the front, and the rear with the
(d) Blasters shall be required to fur- word ‘‘Explosives’’ in red letters, not
nish satisfactory evidence of com- less than 4 inches in height, on white
petency in handling explosives and per- background. In addition to such mark-
forming in a safe manner the type of ing or placarding, the motor vehicle or
blasting that will be required. conveyance may display, in such a
(e) The blaster shall be knowledge- manner that it will be readily visible
able and competent in the use of each from all directions, a red flag 18 inches
type of blasting method used. by 30 inches, with the word ‘‘Explo-
§ 1926.902 Surface transportation of sives’’ painted, stamped, or sewed
explosives. thereon, in white letters, at least 6
inches in height.
(a) Transportation of explosives shall
meet the provisions of Department of (i) Each vehicle used for transpor-
Transportation regulations contained tation of explosives shall be equipped
in 46 CFR parts 146–149, Water Carriers; with a fully charged fire extinguisher,
49 CFR parts 171–179, Highways and in good condition. An Underwriters
Railways; 49 CFR part 195, Pipelines; Laboratory-approved extinguisher of
and 49 CFR parts 390–397, Motor Car- not less than 10-ABC rating will meet
riers. the minimum requirement. The driver
(b) Motor vehicles or conveyances shall be trained in the use of the extin-
transporting explosives shall only be guisher on his vehicle.
driven by, and be in the charge of, a li- (j) Motor vehicles or conveyances
censed driver who is physically fit. He carrying explosives, blasting agents, or
shall be familiar with the local, State, blasting supplies, shall not be taken in-
and Federal regulation governing the side a garage or shop for repairs or
transportation of explosives. servicing.
467
(k) No motor vehicle transporting ex- (k) No explosives or blasting agents

plosives shall be left unattended. shall be transported on a man haul
trip.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(l) The car or conveyance containing
explosives or blasting agents shall be
§ 1926.903 Underground transpor- pulled, not pushed, whenever possible.
tation of explosives. (m) The powder car or conveyance es-
pecially built for the purpose of trans-
(a) All explosives or blasting agents
porting explosives or blasting agents
in transit underground shall be taken
shall bear a reflectorized sign on each
to the place of use or storage without
side with the word ‘‘Explosives’’ in let-
delay.
ters, not less than 4 inches in height;
(b) The quantity of explosives or upon a background of sharply con-
blasting agents taken to an under- trasting color.
ground loading area shall not exceed (n) Compartments for transporting
the amount estimated to be necessary detonators and explosives in the same
for the blast. car or conveyance shall be physically
(c) Explosives in transit shall not be separated by a distance of 24 inches or
left unattended. by a solid partition at least 6 inches
(d) The hoist operator shall be noti- thick.
fied before explosives or blasting (o) Detonators and other explosives
agents are transported in a shaft con- shall not be transported at the same
veyance. time in any shaft conveyance.
(e) Trucks used for the transpor- (p) Explosives, blasting agents, or
tation of explosives underground shall blasting supplies shall not be trans-
have the electrical system checked ported with other materials.
weekly to detect any failures which (q) Explosives or blasting agents, not
may constitute an electrical hazard. A in original containers, shall be placed
certification record which includes the in a suitable container when trans-
date of the inspection; the signature of ported manually.
the person who performed the inspec- (r) Detonators, primers, and other ex-
tion; and a serial number, or other plosives shall be carried in separate
identifier, of the truck inspected shall containers when transported manually.
be prepared and the most recent cer-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
tification record shall be maintained
on file. 1987]
(f) The installation of auxiliary
lights on truck beds, which are pow- § 1926.904 Storage of explosives and
ered by the truck’s electrical system, blasting agents.
shall be prohibited. (a) Explosives and related materials
(g) Explosives and blasting agents shall be stored in approved facilities
shall be hoisted, lowered, or conveyed required under the applicable provi-
in a powder car. No other materials, sions of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco
supplies, or equipment shall be trans- and Firearms regulations contained in
ported in the same conveyance at the 27 CFR part 55, Commerce in Explo-
same time. sives.
(h) No one, except the operator, his (b) Blasting caps, electric blasting
helper, and the powderman, shall be caps, detonating primers, and primed
permitted to ride on a conveyance cartridges shall not be stored in the
transporting explosives and blasting same magazine with other explosives
agents. or blasting agents.
(i) No person shall ride in any shaft (c) Smoking and open flames shall
conveyance transporting explosives not be permitted within 50 feet of ex-
and blasting agents. plosives and detonator storage maga-
(j) No explosives or blasting agents zine.
shall be transported on any loco- (d) No explosives or blasting agents
motive. At least two car lengths shall shall be permanently stored in any un-
separate the locomotive from the pow- derground operation until the oper-
der car. ation has been developed to the point
468
where at least two modes of exit have or blasting agents being loaded into
been provided. drill holes. Cables in the proximity of
(e) Permanent underground storage the blast area shall be deenergized and
magazines shall be at least 300 feet locked out by the blaster.
from any shaft, adit, or active under- (k) Holes shall be checked prior to
ground working area. loading to determine depth and condi-
(f) Permanent underground maga- tions. Where a hole has been loaded
zines containing detonators shall not with explosives but the explosives have
be located closer than 50 feet to any failed to detonate, there shall be no
magazine containing other explosives drilling within 50 feet of the hole.
or blasting agents. (l) When loading a long line of holes
with more than one loading crew, the
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993] crews shall be separated by practical
distance consistent with efficient oper-
§ 1926.905 Loading of explosives or ation and supervision of crews.
blasting agents. (m) No explosive shall be loaded or
(a) Procedures that permit safe and used underground in the presence of
efficient loading shall be established combustible gases or combustible
before loading is started. dusts.
(b) All drill holes shall be sufficiently (n) No explosives other than those in
large to admit freely the insertion of Fume Class 1, as set forth by the Insti-
the cartridges of explosives. tute of Makers of Explosives, shall be
(c) Tamping shall be done only with used; however, explosives complying
wood rods or plastic tamping poles with the requirements of Fume Class 2
without exposed metal parts, but non- and Fume Class 3 may be used if ade-
sparking metal connectors may be used quate ventilation has been provided.
for jointed poles. Violent tamping shall (o) All blast holes in open work shall
be avoided. The primer shall never be be stemmed to the collar or to a point
tamped. which will confine the charge.
(d) No holes shall be loaded except (p) Warning signs, indicating a blast
those to be fired in the next round of area, shall be maintained at all ap-
blasting. After loading, all remaining proaches to the blast area. The warn-
explosives and detonators shall be im- ing sign lettering shall not be less than
mediately returned to an authorized 4 inches in height on a contrasting
magazine. background.
(e) Drilling shall not be started until (q) A bore hole shall never be sprung
all remaining butts of old holes are ex- when it is adjacent to or near a hole
amined for unexploded charges, and if that is loaded. Flashlight batteries
any are found, they shall be refired be- shall not be used for springing holes.
fore work proceeds. (r) Drill holes which have been
(f) No person shall be allowed to sprung or chambered, and which are
deepen drill holes which have con- not water-filled, shall be allowed to
tained explosives or blasting agents. cool before explosives are loaded.
(g) No explosives or blasting agents (s) No loaded holes shall be left unat-
shall be left unattended at the blast tended or unprotected.
site. (t) The blaster shall keep an accu-
(h) Machines and all tools not used rate, up-to-date record of explosives,
for loading explosives into bore holes blasting agents, and blasting supplies
shall be removed from the immediate used in a blast and shall keep an accu-
location of holes before explosives are rate running inventory of all explosives
delivered. Equipment shall not be oper- and blasting agents stored on the oper-
ated within 50 feet of loaded holes. ation.
(i) No activity of any nature other (u) When loading blasting agents
than that which is required for loading pneumatically over electric blasting
holes with explosives shall be per- caps, semiconductive delivery hose
mitted in a blast area. shall be used and the equipment shall
(j) Powerlines and portable electric be bonded and grounded.

cables for equipment being used shall [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
be kept a safe distance from explosives 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993]
469
§ 1926.906 Initiation of explosive This gap shall be bridged by a flexible

charges—electric blasting. jumper cord just before firing the blast.
(a) Electric blasting caps shall not be (l) When firing from a power circuit,
used where sources of extraneous elec- the firing switch shall be locked in the
tricity make the use of electric blast- open or ‘‘Off’’ position at all times, ex-
ing caps dangerous. Blasting cap leg cept when firing. It shall be so designed
wires shall be kept short-circuited that the firing lines to the cap circuit
(shunted) until they are connected into are automatically short-circuited when
the circuit for firing. the switch is in the ‘‘Off’’ position.
(b) Before adopting any system of Keys to this switch shall be entrusted
electrical firing, the blaster shall con- only to the blaster.
duct a thorough survey for extraneous (m) Blasting machines shall be in
currents, and all dangerous currents good condition and the efficiency of
shall be eliminated before any holes the machine shall be tested periodi-
are loaded. cally to make certain that it can de-
(c) In any single blast using electric liver power at its rated capacity.
blasting caps, all caps shall be of the (n) When firing with blasting ma-
same style or function, and of the same chines, the connections shall be made
manufacture. as recommended by the manufacturer
(d) Electric blasting shall be carried of the electric blasting caps used.
out by using blasting circuits or power (o) The number of electric blasting
circuits in accordance with the electric caps connected to a blasting machine
blasting cap manufacturer’s rec- shall not be in excess of its rated ca-
ommendations, or an approved con- pacity. Furthermore, in primary blast-
tractor or his designated representa- ing, a series circuit shall contain no
tive. more caps than the limits rec-
(e) When firing a circuit of electric ommended by the manufacturer of the
blasting caps, care must be exercised to electric blasting caps in use.
ensure that an adequate quantity of de- (p) The blaster shall be in charge of
livered current is available, in accord- the blasting machines, and no other
ance with the manufacturer’s rec- person shall connect the leading wires
ommendations. to the machine.
(f) Connecting wires and lead wires (q) Blasters, when testing circuits to
shall be insulated single solid wires of charged holes, shall use only blasting
sufficient current-carrying capacity. galvanometers or other instruments
(g) Bus wires shall be solid single that are specifically designed for this
wires of sufficient current-carrying ca- purpose.
pacity. (r) Whenever the possibility exists
(h) When firing electrically, the insu- that a leading line or blasting wire
lation on all firing lines shall be ade- might be thrown over a live powerline
quate and in good condition. by the force of an explosion, care shall
(i) A power circuit used for firing be taken to see that the total length of
electric blasting caps shall not be wires are kept too short to hit the
grounded. lines, or that the wires are securely an-
(j) In underground operations when chored to the ground. If neither of
firing from a power circuit, a safety these requirements can be satisfied, a
switch shall be placed in the perma- nonelectric system shall be used.
nent firing line at intervals. This (s) In electrical firing, only the man
switch shall be made so it can be making leading wire connections shall
locked only in the ‘‘Off’’ position and fire the shot. All connections shall be
shall be provided with a short- made from the bore hole back to the
circuiting arrangement of the firing source of firing current, and the lead-
lines to the cap circuit. ing wires shall remain shorted and not
(k) In underground operations there be connected to the blasting machine
shall be a ‘‘lightning’’ gap of at least 5 or other source of current until the
feet in the firing system ahead of the charge is to be fired.

main firing switch; that is, between (t) After firing an electric blast from
this switch and the source of power. a blasting machine, the leading wires
470
shall be immediately disconnected one charge from dislodging other shots

from the machine and short-circuited. in the blast.
(m) When blasting with safety fuses,
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
consideration shall be given to the
length and burning rate of the fuse.
§ 1926.907 Use of safety fuse. Sufficient time, with a margin of safe-
ty, shall always be provided for the
(a) Safety fuse shall only be used blaster to reach a place of safety.
where sources of extraneous electricity
make the use of electric blasting caps § 1926.908 Use of detonating cord.
dangerous. The use of a fuse that has
(a) Care shall be taken to select a
been hammered or injured in any way
detonating cord consistent with the
shall be forbidden.
type and physical condition of the bore
(b) The hanging of a fuse on nails or
hole and stemming and the type of ex-
other projections which will cause a
plosives used.
sharp bend to be formed in the fuse is
(b) Detonating cord shall be handled
prohibited.
and used with the same respect and
(c) Before capping safety fuse, a short care given other explosives.
length shall be cut from the end of the (c) The line of detonating cord ex-
supply reel so as to assure a fresh cut tending out of a bore hole or from a
end in each blasting cap. charge shall be cut from the supply
(d) Only a cap crimper of approved spool before loading the remainder of
design shall be used for attaching the bore hole or placing additional
blasting caps to safety fuse. Crimpers charges.
shall be kept in good repair and acces- (d) Detonating cord shall be handled
sible for use. and used with care to avoid damaging
(e) No unused cap or short capped or severing the cord during and after
fuse shall be placed in any hole to be loading and hooking-up.
blasted; such unused detonators shall (e) Detonating cord connections shall
be removed from the working place and be competent and positive in accord-
destroyed. ance with approved and recommended
(f) No fuse shall be capped, or primers methods. Knot-type or other cord-to-
made up, in any magazine or near any cord connections shall be made only
possible source of ignition. with detonating cord in which the ex-
(g) No one shall be permitted to carry plosive core is dry.
detonators or primers of any kind on (f) All detonating cord trunklines and
his person. branchlines shall be free of loops, sharp
(h) The minimum length of safety kinks, or angles that direct the cord
fuse to be used in blasting shall be as back toward the oncoming line of deto-
required by State law, but shall not be nation.
less than 30 inches. (g) All detonating cord connections
(i) At least two men shall be present shall be inspected before firing the
when multiple cap and fuse blasting is blast.
done by hand lighting methods. (h) When detonating cord milli-
(j) Not more than 12 fuses shall be second-delay connectors or short-inter-
lighted by each blaster when hand val-delay electric blasting caps are
lighting devices are used. However, used with detonating cord, the practice
when two or more safety fuses in a shall conform strictly to the manufac-
group are lighted as one by means of turer’s recommendations.
igniter cord, or other similar fuse- (i) When connecting a blasting cap or
lighting devices, they may be consid- an electric blasting cap to detonating
ered as one fuse. cord, the cap shall be taped or other-
(k) The so-called ‘‘drop fuse’’ method wise attached securely along the side
of dropping or pushing a primer or any or the end of the detonating cord, with
explosive with a lighted fuse attached the end of the cap containing the ex-
is forbidden. plosive charge pointed in the direction
(l) Cap and fuse shall not be used for in which the detonation is to proceed.
firing mudcap charges unless charges (j) Detonators for firing the trunk-
are separated sufficiently to prevent line shall not be brought to the loading
471
area nor attached to the detonating and in tunnels, after the muck pile has
cord until everything else is in readi- been wetted down.
ness for the blast.
§ 1926.911 Misfires.
§ 1926.909 Firing the blast. (a) If a misfire is found, the blaster
(a) A code of blasting signals equiva- shall provide proper safeguards for ex-
lent to Table U–1, shall be posted on cluding all employees from the danger
one or more conspicuous places at the zone.
operation, and all employees shall be (b) No other work shall be done ex-
required to familiarize themselves with cept that necessary to remove the haz-
the code and conform to it. Danger ard of the misfire and only those em-
signs shall be placed at suitable loca- ployees necessary to do the work shall
tions. remain in the danger zone.
(b) Before a blast is fired, a loud (c) No attempt shall be made to ex-
warning signal shall be given by the tract explosives from any charged or
blaster in charge, who has made cer- misfired hole; a new primer shall be
tain that all surplus explosives are in a put in and the hole reblasted. If re-
safe place and all employees, vehicles, firing of the misfired hole presents a
and equipment are at a safe distance, hazard, the explosives may be removed
or under sufficient cover. by washing out with water or, where
(c) Flagmen shall be safely stationed the misfire is under water, blown out
on highways which pass through the with air.
danger zone so as to stop traffic during (d) If there are any misfires while
blasting operations. using cap and fuse, all employees shall
(d) It shall be the duty of the blaster remain away from the charge for at
to fix the time of blasting. least 1 hour. Misfires shall be handled
(e) Before firing an underground under the direction of the person in
blast, warning shall be given, and all charge of the blasting. All wires shall
possible entries into the blasting area, be carefully traced and a search made
and any entrances to any working for unexploded charges.
place where a drift, raise, or other (e) No drilling, digging, or picking
opening is about to hole through, shall shall be permitted until all missed
be carefully guarded. The blaster shall holes have been detonated or the au-
make sure that all employees are out thorized representative has approved
of the blast area before firing a blast. that work can proceed.
TABLE U–1
§ 1926.912 Underwater blasting.
WARNING SIGNAL—A 1-minute series of long
blasts 5 minutes prior to blast signal.
(a) A blaster shall conduct all blast-
BLAST SIGNAL—A series of short blasts 1 ing operations, and no shot shall be
minute prior to the shot. fired without his approval.
ALL CLEAR SIGNAL—A prolonged blast fol- (b) Loading tubes and casings of dis-
lowing the inspection of blast area. similar metals shall not be used be-
cause of possible electric transient cur-
§ 1926.910 Inspection after blasting. rents from galvanic action of the met-
(a) Immediately after the blast has als and water.
been fired, the firing line shall be dis- (c) Only water-resistant blasting caps
connected from the blasting machine, and detonating cords shall be used for
or where power switches are used, they all marine blasting. Loading shall be
shall be locked open or in the off posi- done through a nonsparking metal
tion. loading tube when tube is necessary.
(b) Sufficient time shall be allowed, (d) No blast shall be fired while any
not less than 15 minutes in tunnels, for vessel under way is closer than 1,500
the smoke and fumes to leave the feet to the blasting area. Those on
blasted area before returning to the board vessels or craft moored or an-
shot. An inspection of the area and the chored within 1,500 feet shall be noti-
surrounding rubble shall be made by fied before a blast is fired.
the blaster to determine if all charges (e) No blast shall be fired while any
have been exploded before employees swimming or diving operations are in
are allowed to return to the operation, progress in the vicinity of the blasting
472
area. If such operations are in progress, (g) When tunnel excavation in rock
signals and arrangements shall be face is approaching mixed face, and
agreed upon to assure that no blast when tunnel excavation is in mixed
shall be fired while any person is in the face, blasting shall be performed with
water. light charges and with light burden on
(f) Blasting flags shall be displayed. each hole. Advance drilling shall be
(g) The storage and handling of ex- performed as tunnel excavation in rock
plosives aboard vessels used in under- face approaches mixed face, to deter-
water blasting operations shall be ac- mine the general nature and extent of
cording to provisions outlined herein rock cover and the remaining distance
on handling and storing explosives. ahead to soft ground as excavation ad-
(h) When more than one charge is vances.
placed under water, a float device shall
be attached to an element of each § 1926.914 Definitions applicable to
charge in such manner that it will be this subpart.
released by the firing. Misfires shall be
handled in accordance with the re- (a) American Table of Distances (also
quirements of § 1926.911. known as Quantity Distance Tables)
means American Table of Distances for
§ 1926.913 Blasting in excavation work Storage of Explosives as revised and
under compressed air. approved by the Institute of the Mak-
(a) Detonators and explosives shall ers of Explosives, June 5, 1964.
not be stored or kept in tunnels, shafts, (b) Approved storage facility—A facil-
or caissons. Detonators and explosives ity for the storage of explosive mate-
for each round shall be taken directly rials conforming to the requirements of
from the magazines to the blasting this part and covered by a license or
zone and immediately loaded. Deto- permit issued under authority of the
nators and explosives left over after Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Fire-
loading a round shall be removed from arms. (See 27 CFR part 55)
the working chamber before the con- (c) Blast area—The area in which ex-
necting wires are connected up. plosives loading and blasting oper-
(b) When detonators or explosives are ations are being conducted.
brought into an air lock, no employee (d) Blaster—The person or persons au-
except the powderman, blaster, lock thorized to use explosives for blasting
tender and the employees necessary for purposes and meeting the qualifica-
carrying, shall be permitted to enter tions contained in § 1926.901.
the air lock. No other material, sup-
(e) Blasting agent—A blasting agent is
plies, or equipment shall be locked
any material or mixture consisting of a
through with the explosives.
fuel and oxidizer used for blasting, but
(c) Detonators and explosives shall be
not classified an explosive and in which
taken separately into pressure working
chambers. none of the ingredients is classified as
(d) The blaster or powderman shall be an explosive provided the furnished
responsible for the receipt, unloading, (mixed) product cannot be detonated
storage, and on-site transportation of with a No. 8 test blasting cap when
explosives and detonators. confined. A common blasting agent
(e) All metal pipes, rails, air locks, presently in use is a mixture of ammo-
and steel tunnel lining shall be elec- nium nitrate (NH4 NO3) and carbo-
trically bonded together and grounded naceous combustibles, such as fuel oil
at or near the portal or shaft, and such or coal, and may either be procured,
pipes and rails shall be cross-bonded to- premixed and packaged from explosives
gether at not less than 1,000-foot inter- companies or mixed in the field.
vals throughout the length of the tun- (f) Blasting cap—A metallic tube
nel. In addition, each low air supply closed at one end, containing a charge
pipe shall be grounded at its delivery of one or more detonating compounds,
end. and designed for and capable of detona-
(f) The explosives suitable for use in tion from the sparks or flame from a
wet holes shall be water-resistant and safety fuse inserted and crimped into
shall be Fume Class 1. the open end.
473
(g) Block holing—The breaking of Class A Explosives. Possessing detonating

boulders by firing a charge of explo- hazard, such as dynamite, nitroglycerin, pic-
sives that has been loaded in a drill ric acid, lead azide, fulminate of mercury,
black powder, blasting caps, and detonating
hole.
primers.
(h) Conveyance—Any unit for trans- Class B Explosives. Possessing flammable
porting explosives or blasting agents, hazard, such as propellant explosives, includ-
including but not limited to trucks, ing some smokeless propellants.
trailers, rail cars, barges, and vessels. Class C Explosives. Include certain types of
(i) Detonating cord—A flexible cord manufactured articles which contain Class A
containing a center core of high explo- or Class B explosives, or both, as compo-
sives which when detonated, will have nents, but in restricted quantities.
sufficient strength to detonate other (o) Fuse lighters—Special devices for
cap-sensitive explosives with which it the purpose of igniting safety fuse.
is in contact. (p) Magazine—Any building or struc-
(j) Detonator—Blasting caps, electric ture, other than an explosives manu-
blasting caps, delay electric blasting facturing building, used for the storage
caps, and nonelectric delay blasting of explosives.
caps. (q) Misfire—An explosive charge
(k) Electric blasting cap—A blasting which failed to detonate.
cap designed for and capable of detona- (r) Mud-capping (sometimes known as
tion by means of an electric current. bulldozing, adobe blasting, or dobying).
(l) Electric blasting circuitry— The blasting of boulders by placing a
(1) Bus wire. An expendable wire, quantity of explosives against a rock,
used in parallel or series, in parallel boulder, or other object without con-
circuits, to which are connected the leg fining the explosives in a drill hole.
wires of electric blasting caps. (s) Nonelectric delay blasting cap—A
(2) Connecting wire. An insulated ex- blasting cap with an integral delay ele-
pendable wire used between electric ment in conjunction with and capable
blasting caps and the leading wires or of being detonated by a detonation im-
between the bus wire and the leading pulse or signal from miniaturized deto-
wires. nating cord.
(3) Leading wire. An insulated wire (t) Primary blasting—The blasting op-
used between the electric power source eration by which the original rock for-
and the electric blasting cap circuit. mation is dislodged from its natural lo-
(4) Permanent blasting wire. A per- cation.
manently mounted insulated wire used (u) Primer—A cartridge or container
between the electric power source and of explosives into which a detonator or
the electric blasting cap circuit. detonating cord is inserted or attached.
(m) Electric delay blasting caps—Caps (v) Safety fuse—A flexible cord con-
designed to detonate at a predeter- taining an internal burning medium by
mined period of time after energy is which fire is conveyed at a continuous
applied to the ignition system. and uniform rate for the purpose of fir-
(n) Explosives—(1) Any chemical coming blasting caps.
pound, mixture, or device, the primary (w) Secondary blasting—The reduction
or common purpose of which is to func- of oversize material by the use of ex-
tion by explosion; that is, with sub- plosives to the dimension required for
stantially instantaneous release of gas handling, including mudcapping and
and heat, unless such compound, mix- blockholing.
ture or device is otherwise specifically (x) Stemming—A suitable inert incom-
classified by the U.S. Department of bustible material or device used to con-
Transportation. fine or separate explosives in a drill
(2) All material which is classified as hole, or to cover explosives in mud-cap-
Class A, Class B, and Class C Explo- ping.
sives by the U.S. Department of Trans- (y) Springing—The creation of a pock-
portation. et in the bottom of a drill hole by the
(3) Classification of explosives by the use of a moderate quantity of explo-

U.S. Department of Transportation is sives in order that larger quantities or
as follows: explosives may be inserted therein.
474
(z) Water gels, or slurry explosives—A ance with § 1910.269 of this chapter will not
wide variety of materials used for excuse an employer from compliance obliga-
blasting. They all contain substantial tions under other subparts of this part.
proportions of water and high propor- (ii) Notwithstanding paragraph
tions of ammonium nitrate, some of (a)(1)(i) of this section, this subpart
which is in solution in the water. Two does not apply to electrical safety-re-
broad classes of water gels are: (1) lated work practices for unqualified
Those which are sensitized by a mate- employees.
rial classed as an explosive, such as (2) Other part 1926 standards. This sub-
TNT or smokeless powder, and (2) those part applies in addition to all other ap-
which contain no ingredient classified plicable standards contained in this
as an explosive; these are sensitized part 1926. Employers covered under this
with metals such as aluminum or with subpart are not exempt from com-
other fuels. Water gels may be plying with other applicable provisions
premixed at an explosives plant or in part 1926 by the operation of
mixed at the site immediately before § 1910.5(c) of this chapter. Specific ref-
delivery into the bore hole. erences in this subpart to other sec-
(aa) Semiconductive hose. tions of part 1926 are provided for em-
Semiconductive hose—a hose with an phasis only.
electrical resistance high enough to (3) Applicable part 1910 requirements.
limit flow of stray electric currents to (i) Line-clearance tree trimming per-
safe levels, yet not so high as to pre- formed for the purpose of clearing
vent drainage of static electric charges space around electric power genera-
to ground; hose of not more than 2 tion, transmission, or distribution
megohms resistance over its entire lines or equipment and on behalf of an
length and of not less than 5,000 ohms organization that operates, or that
per foot meets the requirement. controls the operating procedures for,
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
those lines or equipment shall comply
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35184, 35311, June with § 1910.269 of this chapter.
30, 1993] (ii) Work involving electric power
generation installations shall comply
Subpart V—Electric Power with § 1910.269 of this chapter.
(b) Training—(1) All employees. (i)
Transmission and Distribution Each employee shall be trained in, and
familiar with, the safety-related work
SOURCE: 79 FR 20696, Apr. 11, 2014, unless practices, safety procedures, and other
otherwise noted. safety requirements in this subpart
AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; 29 U.S.C. that pertain to his or her job assign-
653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. ments.
1–2012 (77 FR 3912); and 29 CFR Part 1911. (ii) Each employee shall also be
trained in and familiar with any other
§ 1926.950 General. safety practices, including applicable
(a) Application—(1) Scope. (i) This sub- emergency procedures (such as pole-top
part, except for paragraph (a)(3) of this and manhole rescue), that are not spe-
section, covers the construction of cifically addressed by this subpart but
electric power transmission and dis- that are related to his or her work and
tribution lines and equipment. As used are necessary for his or her safety.
in this subpart, the term ‘‘construc- (iii) The degree of training shall be
tion’’ includes the erection of new elec- determined by the risk to the employee
tric transmission and distribution lines for the hazard involved.
and equipment, and the alteration, (2) Qualified employees. Each qualified
conversion, and improvement of exist- employee shall also be trained and
ing electric transmission and distribu- competent in:
tion lines and equipment. (i) The skills and techniques nec-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(1)(i): An employer
essary to distinguish exposed live parts
from other parts of electric equipment,
that complies with § 1910.269 of this chapter

will be considered in compliance with re- (ii) The skills and techniques nec-
quirements in this subpart that do not ref- essary to determine the nominal volt-
erence other subparts of this part. Compli- age of exposed live parts,
475
(iii) The minimum approach dis- (6) Training goals. The training shall
tances specified in this subpart cor- establish employee proficiency in the
responding to the voltages to which the work practices required by this subpart
qualified employee will be exposed and and shall introduce the procedures nec-
the skills and techniques necessary to essary for compliance with this sub-
maintain those distances, part.
(iv) The proper use of the special pre- (7) Demonstration of proficiency. The
cautionary techniques, personal pro- employer shall ensure that each em-
tective equipment, insulating and ployee has demonstrated proficiency in
shielding materials, and insulated tools the work practices involved before that
for working on or near exposed ener- employee is considered as having com-
gized parts of electric equipment, and pleted the training required by para-
(v) The recognition of electrical haz- graph (b) of this section.
ards to which the employee may be ex-
NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (b)(7): Though they
posed and the skills and techniques are not required by this paragraph, employ-
necessary to control or avoid these ment records that indicate that an employee
hazards. has successfully completed the required
training are one way of keeping track of
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2): For the pur-
when an employee has demonstrated pro-
poses of this subpart, a person must have the
ficiency.
training required by paragraph (b)(2) of this
NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (b)(7): For an em-
section to be considered a qualified person.
ployee with previous training, an employer
(3) Supervision and annual inspection. may determine that that employee has dem-
The employer shall determine, through onstrated the proficiency required by this
regular supervision and through in- paragraph using the following process: (1)
Confirm that the employee has the training
spections conducted on at least an an-
required by paragraph (b) of this section, (2)
nual basis, that each employee is com- use an examination or interview to make an
plying with the safety-related work initial determination that the employee un-
practices required by this subpart. derstands the relevant safety-related work
(4) Additional training. An employee practices before he or she performs any work
shall receive additional training (or re- covered by this subpart, and (3) supervise the
training) under any of the following employee closely until that employee has
conditions: demonstrated proficiency as required by this
paragraph.
(i) If the supervision or annual in-
spections required by paragraph (b)(3) (c) Information transfer—(1) Host em-
of this section indicate that the employer responsibilities. Before work be-
ployee is not complying with the safe- gins, the host employer shall inform
ty-related work practices required by contract employers of:
this subpart, or (i) The characteristics of the host
(ii) If new technology, new types of employer’s installation that are re-
equipment, or changes in procedures lated to the safety of the work to be
necessitate the use of safety-related performed and are listed in paragraphs
work practices that are different from (d)(1) through (d)(5) of this section;
those which the employee would nor-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(1)(i): This para-
mally use, or graph requires the host employer to obtain
(iii) If he or she must employ safety- information listed in paragraphs (d)(1)
related work practices that are not through (d)(5) of this section if it does not
normally used during his or her regular have this information in existing records.
job duties.
(ii) Conditions that are related to the
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(4)(iii): The Occupa- safety of the work to be performed,
tional Safety and Health Administration that are listed in paragraphs (d)(6)
considers tasks that are performed less often through (d)(8) of this section, and that
than once per year to necessitate retraining are known to the host employer;
before the performance of the work practices
involved. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(1)(ii): For the pur-
poses of this paragraph, the host employer
(5) Type of training. The training re-
need only provide information to contract

quired by paragraph (b) of this section employers that the host employer can obtain
shall be of the classroom or on-the-job from its existing records through the exer-
type. cise of reasonable diligence. This paragraph
476
does not require the host employer to make each employee of the contract em-
inspections of worksite conditions to obtain ployer and the host employer is pro-
this information.
tected as required by this subpart.
(iii) Information about the design (d) Existing characteristics and condi-
and operation of the host employer’s tions. Existing characteristics and con-
installation that the contract em- ditions of electric lines and equipment
ployer needs to make the assessments that are related to the safety of the
required by this subpart; and work to be performed shall be deter-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(1)(iii): This para- mined before work on or near the lines
graph requires the host employer to obtain or equipment is started. Such charac-
information about the design and operation teristics and conditions include, but
of its installation that contract employers are not limited to:
need to make required assessments if it does
not have this information in existing (1) The nominal voltages of lines and
records. equipment,
(2) The maximum switching-tran-
(iv) Any other information about the
design and operation of the host em- sient voltages,
ployer’s installation that is known by (3) The presence of hazardous induced
the host employer, that the contract voltages,
employer requests, and that is related (4) The presence of protective
to the protection of the contract em- grounds and equipment grounding con-
ployer’s employees. ductors,
(5) The locations of circuits and
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(1)(iv): For the pur-
poses of this paragraph, the host employer equipment, including electric supply
need only provide information to contract lines, communication lines, and fire-
employers that the host employer can obtain protective signaling circuits,
from its existing records through the exer- (6) The condition of protective
cise of reasonable diligence. This paragraph grounds and equipment grounding con-
does not require the host employer to make
inspections of worksite conditions to obtain
ductors,
this information. (7) The condition of poles, and
(8) Environmental conditions relat-
(2) Contract employer responsibilities.
ing to safety.
(i) The contract employer shall ensure
that each of its employees is instructed [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
in the hazardous conditions relevant to 1979, as amended at 80 FR 60040, Oct. 5, 2015]
the employee’s work that the contract
employer is aware of as a result of in- § 1926.951 Medical services and first
formation communicated to the con- aid.
tract employer by the host employer (a) General. The employer shall pro-
under paragraph (c)(1) of this section. vide medical services and first aid as
(ii) Before work begins, the contract required in § 1926.50.
employer shall advise the host em- (b) First-aid training. In addition to
ployer of any unique hazardous condi- the requirements of § 1926.50, when em-
tions presented by the contract employees are performing work on, or as-
ployer’s work. sociated with, exposed lines or equip-
(iii) The contract employer shall ad-
ment energized at 50 volts or more, per-
vise the host employer of any unantici-
sons with first-aid training shall be
pated hazardous conditions found dur-
available as follows:
ing the contract employer’s work that
the host employer did not mention (1) Field work. For field work involv-
under paragraph (c)(1) of this section. ing two or more employees at a work
The contract employer shall provide location, at least two trained persons
this information to the host employer shall be available.
within 2 working days after discovering (2) Fixed work locations. For fixed
the hazardous condition. work locations such as substations, the
(3) Joint host- and contract-employer re- number of trained persons available
sponsibilities. The contract employer shall be sufficient to ensure that each

and the host employer shall coordinate employee exposed to electric shock can
their work rules and procedures so that be reached within 4 minutes by a
477
trained person. However, where the ex- (e) Working alone. An employee work-
isting number of employees is insuffi- ing alone need not conduct a job brief-
cient to meet this requirement (at a re- ing. However, the employer shall en-
mote substation, for example), each sure that the tasks to be performed are
employee at the work location shall be planned as if a briefing were required.
a trained employee.
§ 1926.953 Enclosed spaces.
§ 1926.952 Job briefing.
(a) General. This section covers en-
(a) Before each job—(1) Information closed spaces that may be entered by
provided by the employer. In assigning employees. It does not apply to vented
an employee or a group of employees to vaults if the employer makes a deter-
perform a job, the employer shall pro- mination that the ventilation system
vide the employee in charge of the job is operating to protect employees be-
with all available information that re- fore they enter the space. This section
lates to the determination of existing applies to routine entry into enclosed
characteristics and conditions required spaces. If, after the employer takes the
by § 1926.950(d).
precautions given in this section and in
(2) Briefing by the employee in charge.
§ 1926.965, the hazards remaining in the
The employer shall ensure that the em-
enclosed space endanger the life of an
ployee in charge conducts a job brief-
entrant or could interfere with an en-
ing that meets paragraphs (b), (c), and
trant’s escape from the space, then
(d) of this section with the employees
entry into the enclosed space must
involved before they start each job.
(b) Subjects to be covered. The briefing meet the permit space entry require-
shall cover at least the following sub- ments of subpart AA of this part. For
jects: Hazards associated with the job, routine entries where the hazards re-
work procedures involved, special pre- maining in the enclosed space do not
cautions, energy-source controls, and endanger the life of an entrant or
personal protective equipment require- interfere with an entrant’s escape from
ments. the space, this section applies in lieu of
(c) Number of briefings—(1) At least one the permit-space entry requirements
before each day or shift. If the work or contained in §§ 1926.1204 through
operations to be performed during the 926.1211.
work day or shift are repetitive and (b) Safe work practices. The employer
similar, at least one job briefing shall shall ensure the use of safe work prac-
be conducted before the start of the tices for entry into, and work in, en-
first job of each day or shift. closed spaces and for rescue of employ-
(2) Additional briefings. Additional job ees from such spaces.
briefings shall be held if significant (c) Training. Each employee who en-
changes, which might affect the safety ters an enclosed space or who serves as
of the employees, occur during the an attendant shall be trained in the
course of the work. hazards of enclosed-space entry, in en-
(d) Extent of briefing—(1) Short discus- closed-space entry procedures, and in
sion. A brief discussion is satisfactory enclosed-space rescue procedures.
if the work involved is routine and if (d) Rescue equipment. Employers shall
the employees, by virtue of training provide equipment to ensure the
and experience, can reasonably be ex- prompt and safe rescue of employees
pected to recognize and avoid the haz- from the enclosed space.
ards involved in the job. (e) Evaluating potential hazards. Be-
(2) Detailed discussion. A more exten- fore any entrance cover to an enclosed
sive discussion shall be conducted: space is removed, the employer shall
(i) If the work is complicated or par- determine whether it is safe to do so by
ticularly hazardous, or checking for the presence of any at-
(ii) If the employee cannot be ex- mospheric pressure or temperature dif-
pected to recognize and avoid the haz- ferences and by evaluating whether
ards involved in the job. there might be a hazardous atmosphere
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d): The briefing must in the space. Any conditions making it
address all the subjects listed in paragraph unsafe to remove the cover shall be
(b) of this section. eliminated before the cover is removed.
478
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (e): The determination used ensure that employees are not ex-
called for in this paragraph may consist of a posed to the hazards posed by oxygen
check of the conditions that might deficiency.
foreseeably be in the enclosed space. For ex-
(k) Testing for flammable gases and va-
ample, the cover could be checked to see if it
is hot and, if it is fastened in place, could be
pors. Before an employee enters an en-
loosened gradually to release any residual closed space, the internal atmosphere
pressure. An evaluation also needs to be shall be tested for flammable gases and
made of whether conditions at the site could vapors with a direct-reading meter or
cause a hazardous atmosphere, such as an similar instrument capable of collec-
oxygen-deficient or flammable atmosphere, tion and immediate analysis of data
to develop within the space. samples without the need for off-site
(f) Removing covers. When covers are evaluation. This test shall be per-
removed from enclosed spaces, the formed after the oxygen testing and
opening shall be promptly guarded by a ventilation required by paragraph (j) of
railing, temporary cover, or other bar- this section demonstrate that there is
rier designed to prevent an accidental sufficient oxygen to ensure the accu-
fall through the opening and to protect racy of the test for flammability.
employees working in the space from (l) Ventilation, and monitoring for flam-
objects entering the space. mable gases or vapors. If flammable
(g) Hazardous atmosphere. Employees gases or vapors are detected or if an ox-
ygen deficiency is found, forced-air
may not enter any enclosed space while
ventilation shall be used to maintain
it contains a hazardous atmosphere,
oxygen at a safe level and to prevent a
unless the entry conforms to the con-
hazardous concentration of flammable
fined spaces in construction standard
gases and vapors from accumulating. A
in subpart AA of this part.
continuous monitoring program to en-
(h) Attendants. While work is being
sure that no increase in flammable gas
performed in the enclosed space, an at- or vapor concentration above safe lev-
tendant with first-aid training shall be els occurs may be followed in lieu of
immediately available outside the en- ventilation if flammable gases or va-
closed space to provide assistance if a pors are initially detected at safe lev-
hazard exists because of traffic pat- els.
terns in the area of the opening used
for entry. The attendant is not pre- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (l): See the definition
cluded from performing other duties of ‘‘hazardous atmosphere’’ for guidance in
determining whether a specific concentra-
outside the enclosed space if these du-
tion of a substance is hazardous.
ties do not distract the attendant from:
Monitoring employees within the space (m) Specific ventilation requirements. If
or ensuring that it is safe for employ- continuous forced-air ventilation is
ees to enter and exit the space. used, it shall begin before entry is
made and shall be maintained long
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (h): See § 1926.965 for enough for the employer to be able to
additional requirements on attendants for
work in manholes and vaults.
demonstrate that a safe atmosphere ex-
ists before employees are allowed to
(i) Calibration of test instruments. Test enter the work area. The forced-air
instruments used to monitor ventilation shall be so directed as to
atmospheres in enclosed spaces shall be ventilate the immediate area where
kept in calibration and shall have a employees are present within the en-
minimum accuracy of ±10 percent. closed space and shall continue until
(j) Testing for oxygen deficiency. Be- all employees leave the enclosed space.
fore an employee enters an enclosed (n) Air supply. The air supply for the
space, the atmosphere in the enclosed continuous forced-air ventilation shall
space shall be tested for oxygen defi- be from a clean source and may not in-
ciency with a direct-reading meter or crease the hazards in the enclosed
similar instrument, capable of collec- space.
tion and immediate analysis of data (o) Open flames. If open flames are
samples without the need for off-site used in enclosed spaces, a test for flam-
evaluation. If continuous forced-air mable gases and vapors shall be made

ventilation is provided, testing is not immediately before the open flame de-
required provided that the procedures vice is used and at least once per hour
479
while the device is used in the space. (C) Hardware surfaces shall be
Testing shall be conducted more fre- smooth and free of sharp edges.
quently if conditions present in the en- (ii) Buckles shall be capable of with-
closed space indicate that once per standing an 8.9-kilonewton (2,000-
hour is insufficient to detect hazardous pound-force) tension test with a max-
accumulations of flammable gases or imum permanent deformation no
vapors. greater than 0.4 millimeters (0.0156
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (o): See the definition inches).
of ‘‘hazardous atmosphere’’ for guidance in (iii) D rings shall be capable of with-
determining whether a specific concentra- standing a 22-kilonewton (5,000-pound-
tion of a substance is hazardous. force) tensile test without cracking or
NOTE TO § 1926.953: Entries into enclosed breaking.
spaces conducted in accordance with the per-
mit space entry requirements of subpart AA (iv) Snaphooks shall be capable of
of this part are considered as complying with withstanding a 22-kilonewton (5,000-
this section. pound-force) tension test without fail-
ure.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 80 FR 25518, May 4, 2015] NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2)(iv): Distortion of
the snaphook sufficient to release the keeper
§ 1926.954 Personal protective equip- is considered to be tensile failure of a
ment. snaphook.
(a) General. Personal protective (v) Top grain leather or leather sub-
equipment shall meet the requirements stitute may be used in the manufacture
of subpart E of this part. of body belts and positioning straps;
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): Paragraph (d) of however, leather and leather sub-
§ 1926.95 sets employer payment obligations stitutes may not be used alone as a
for the personal protective equipment re- load-bearing component of the assem-
quired by this subpart, including, but not bly.
limited to, the fall protection equipment re-
quired by paragraph (b) of this section, the (vi) Plied fabric used in positioning
electrical protective equipment required by straps and in load-bearing parts of
§ 1926.960(c), and the flame-resistant and arc- body belts shall be constructed in such
rated clothing and other protective equip- a way that no raw edges are exposed
ment required by § 1926.960(g). and the plies do not separate.
(b) Fall protection—(1) Personal fall ar- (vii) Positioning straps shall be capa-
rest systems. (i) Personal fall arrest sys- ble of withstanding the following tests:
tems shall meet the requirements of (A) A dielectric test of 819.7 volts,
subpart M of this part. AC, per centimeter (25,000 volts per
(ii) Personal fall arrest equipment foot) for 3 minutes without visible de-
used by employees who are exposed to terioration;
hazards from flames or electric arcs, as (B) A leakage test of 98.4 volts, AC,
determined by the employer under per centimeter (3,000 volts per foot)
§ 1926.960(g)(1), shall be capable of pass- with a leakage current of no more than
ing a drop test equivalent to that re- 1 mA;
quired by paragraph (b)(2)(xii) of this
NOTE TO PARAGRAPHS (b)(2)(vii)(A) AND
section after exposure to an electric
(b)(2)(vii)(B): Positioning straps that pass di-
arc with a heat energy of 40±5 cal/cm2. rect-current tests at equivalent voltages are
(2) Work-positioning equipment. Body considered as meeting this requirement.
belts and positioning straps for work-
positioning equipment shall meet the (C) Tension tests of 20 kilonewtons
following requirements: (4,500 pounds-force) for sections free of
(i) Hardware for body belts and posi- buckle holes and of 15 kilonewtons
tioning straps shall meet the following (3,500 pounds-force) for sections with
requirements: buckle holes;
(A) Hardware shall be made of drop- (D) A buckle-tear test with a load of
forged steel, pressed steel, formed 4.4 kilonewtons (1,000 pounds-force);
steel, or equivalent material. and

(B) Hardware shall have a corrosion- (E) A flammability test in accord-
resistant finish. ance with Table V–1.
480
TABLE V–1—FLAMMABILITY TEST the mass of the equipped worker di-

vided by 1.4).
Test method Criteria for passing the test
(B) For body belts, the body belt
Vertically suspend a 500- Any flames on the positioning shall be fitted snugly around the test
mm (19.7-inch) length of strap shall self extinguish. mass and shall be attached to the test-
strapping supporting a
100-kg (220.5-lb) weight.
structure anchorage point by means of
Use a butane or propane The positioning strap shall con- a wire rope.
burner with a 76-mm (3- tinue to support the 100-kg (C) For positioning straps, the strap
inch) flame. (220.5-lb) mass.
shall be adjusted to its shortest length
Direct the flame to an edge
of the strapping at a dis- possible to accommodate the test and
tance of 25 mm (1 inch). connected to the test-structure anchor-
Remove the flame after 5 age point at one end and to the test
seconds.
Wait for any flames on the
mass on the other end.
positioning strap to stop (D) The test mass shall be dropped an
burning. unobstructed distance of 1 meter (39.4
inches) from a supporting structure
(viii) The cushion part of the body that will sustain minimal deflection
belt shall contain no exposed rivets on during the test.
the inside and shall be at least 76 milli- (E) Body belts shall successfully ar-
meters (3 inches) in width. rest the fall of the test mass and shall
(ix) Tool loops shall be situated on be capable of supporting the mass after
the body of a body belt so that the 100 the test.
millimeters (4 inches) of the body belt (F) Positioning straps shall success-
that is in the center of the back, meas- fully arrest the fall of the test mass
uring from D ring to D ring, is free of without breaking, and the arrest force
tool loops and any other attachments. may not exceed 17.8 kilonewtons (4,000
(x) Copper, steel, or equivalent liners pounds-force). Additionally, snaphooks
shall be used around the bars of D rings on positioning straps may not distort
to prevent wear between these mem- to such an extent that the keeper
bers and the leather or fabric enclosing would release.
them.
(xi) Snaphooks shall be of the lock- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2): When used by
ing type meeting the following require- employees weighing no more than 140 kg (310
lbm) fully equipped, body belts and posi-
ments: tioning straps that conform to American So-
(A) The locking mechanism shall ciety of Testing and Materials Standard Spec-
first be released, or a destructive force ifications for Personal Climbing Equipment,
shall be placed on the keeper, before ASTM F887–12e1, are deemed to be in compli-
the keeper will open. ance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
(B) A force in the range of 6.7 N (1.5
(3) Care and use of personal fall protec-
lbf) to 17.8 N (4 lbf) shall be required to
tion equipment. (i) Work-positioning
release the locking mechanism.
equipment shall be inspected before use
(C) With the locking mechanism re-
each day to determine that the equip-
leased and with a force applied on the
ment is in safe working condition.
keeper against the face of the nose, the
Work-positioning equipment that is
keeper may not begin to open with a
not in safe working condition may not
force of 11.2 N (2.5 lbf) or less and shall
be used.
begin to open with a maximum force of
17.8 N (4 lbf). NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(3)(i): Appendix F to
(xii) Body belts and positioning this subpart contains guidelines for inspect-
straps shall be capable of withstanding ing work-positioning equipment.
a drop test as follows: (ii) Personal fall arrest systems shall
(A) The test mass shall be rigidly be used in accordance with § 1926.502(d).
constructed of steel or equivalent ma-
terial with a mass of 100 kg (220.5 lbm). NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(3)(ii): Fall protec-
tion equipment rigged to arrest falls is con-
For work-positioning equipment used
sidered a fall arrest system and must meet
by employees weighing more than 140
the applicable requirements for the design

kg (310 lbm) fully equipped, the test and use of those systems. Fall protection
mass shall be increased proportion- equipment rigged for work positioning is
ately (that is, the test mass must equal considered work-positioning equipment and
481
must meet the applicable requirements for tection any time they are more than 1.2 me-
the design and use of that equipment. ters (4 feet) above the ground.
(iii) The employer shall ensure that (iv) On and after April 1, 2015, work-
employees use fall protection systems positioning systems shall be rigged so
as follows: that an employee can free fall no more
(A) Each employee working from an than 0.6 meters (2 feet).
aerial lift shall use a fall restraint sys- (v) Anchorages for work-positioning
tem or a personal fall arrest system. equipment shall be capable of sup-
Paragraph (b)(2)(v) of § 1926.453 does not porting at least twice the potential im-
apply. pact load of an employee’s fall, or 13.3
(B) Except as provided in paragraph kilonewtons (3,000 pounds-force),
(b)(3)(iii)(C) of this section, each em- whichever is greater.
ployee in elevated locations more than
1.2 meters (4 feet) above the ground on NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(3)(v): Wood-pole
poles, towers, or similar structures fall-restriction devices meeting American
Society of Testing and Materials Standard
shall use a personal fall arrest system,
Specifications for Personal Climbing Equipment,
work-positioning equipment, or fall re- ASTM F887–12e1, are deemed to meet the an-
straint system, as appropriate, if the chorage-strength requirement when they are
employer has not provided other fall used in accordance with manufacturers’ in-
protection meeting subpart M of this structions.
part.
(vi) Unless the snaphook is a locking
(C) Until March 31, 2015, a qualified
type and designed specifically for the
employee climbing or changing loca-
tion on poles, towers, or similar struc- following connections, snaphooks on
tures need not use fall protection work-positioning equipment may not
equipment, unless conditions, such as, be engaged:
but not limited to, ice, high winds, the (A) Directly to webbing, rope, or wire
design of the structure (for example, no rope;
provision for holding on with hands), or (B) To each other;
the presence of contaminants on the (C) To a D ring to which another
structure, could cause the employee to snaphook or other connector is at-
lose his or her grip or footing. On and tached;
after April 1, 2015, each qualified em- (D) To a horizontal lifeline; or
ployee climbing or changing location (E) To any object that is incom-
on poles, towers, or similar structures patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela-
must use fall protection equipment un- tion to the snaphook such that acci-
less the employer can demonstrate dental disengagement could occur
that climbing or changing location should the connected object suffi-
with fall protection is infeasible or cre- ciently depress the snaphook keeper to
ates a greater hazard than climbing or allow release of the object.
changing location without it.
§ 1926.955 Portable ladders and plat-
NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPHS (b)(3)(iii)(B) AND
forms.
(b)(3)(iii)(C): These paragraphs apply to
structures that support overhead electric (a) General. Requirements for port-
power transmission and distribution lines able ladders contained in subpart X of
and equipment. They do not apply to por- this part apply in addition to the re-
tions of buildings, such as loading docks, or
quirements of this section, except as
to electric equipment, such as transformers
and capacitors. Subpart M of this part con- specifically noted in paragraph (b) of
tains the duty to provide fall protection as- this section.
sociated with walking and working surfaces. (b) Special ladders and platforms. Port-
NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPHS (b)(3)(iii)(B) AND able ladders used on structures or con-
(b)(3)(iii)(C): Until the employer ensures that ductors in conjunction with overhead
employees are proficient in climbing and the line work need not meet
use of fall protection under § 1926.950(b)(7),
§ 1926.1053(b)(5)(i) and (b)(12). Portable
the employees are not considered ‘‘qualified
ladders and platforms used on struc-
employees’’ for the purposes of paragraphs

(b)(3)(iii)(B) and (b)(3)(iii)(C) of this section. tures or conductors in conjunction
These paragraphs require unqualified em- with overhead line work shall meet the
ployees (including trainees) to use fall pro- following requirements:
482
(1) Design load. In the configurations generators used to supply cord- and
in which they are used, portable plat- plug-connected equipment covered by
forms shall be capable of supporting paragraph (b) of this section shall meet
without failure at least 2.5 times the the following requirements:
maximum intended load. (1) Equipment to be supplied. The gen-
(2) Maximum load. Portable ladders erator may only supply equipment lo-
and platforms may not be loaded in ex- cated on the generator or the vehicle
cess of the working loads for which and cord- and plug-connected equip-
they are designed. ment through receptacles mounted on
(3) Securing in place. Portable ladders the generator or the vehicle.
and platforms shall be secured to pre- (2) Equipment grounding. The non-cur-
vent them from becoming dislodged. rent-carrying metal parts of equipment
(4) Intended use. Portable ladders and and the equipment grounding con-
platforms may be used only in applica- ductor terminals of the receptacles
tions for which they are designed. shall be bonded to the generator frame.
(c) Conductive ladders. Portable metal (3) Bonding the frame. For vehicle-
ladders and other portable conductive mounted generators, the frame of the
ladders may not be used near exposed generator shall be bonded to the vehi-
energized lines or equipment. However, cle frame.
in specialized high-voltage work, con- (4) Bonding the neutral conductor. Any
ductive ladders shall be used when the neutral conductor shall be bonded to
employer demonstrates that non- the generator frame.
conductive ladders would present a (d) Hydraulic and pneumatic tools—(1)
greater hazard to employees than con- Hydraulic fluid in insulating tools. Para-
ductive ladders. graph (d)(1) of § 1926.302 does not apply
to hydraulic fluid used in insulating
§ 1926.956 Hand and portable power sections of hydraulic tools.
equipment. (2) Operating pressure. Safe operating
(a) General. Paragraph (b) of this sec- pressures for hydraulic and pneumatic
tion applies to electric equipment con- tools, hoses, valves, pipes, filters, and
nected by cord and plug. Paragraph (c) fittings may not be exceeded.
of this section applies to portable and NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d)(2): If any hazardous
vehicle-mounted generators used to defects are present, no operating pressure is
supply cord- and plug-connected equip- safe, and the hydraulic or pneumatic equip-
ment. Paragraph (d) of this section ap- ment involved may not be used. In the ab-
sence of defects, the maximum rated oper-
plies to hydraulic and pneumatic tools. ating pressure is the maximum safe pressure.
(b) Cord- and plug-connected equip-
ment. Cord- and plug-connected equip- (3) Work near energized parts. A hy-
ment not covered by subpart K of this draulic or pneumatic tool used where it
part shall comply with one of the fol- may contact exposed energized parts
lowing instead of § 1926.302(a)(1): shall be designed and maintained for
(1) The equipment shall be equipped such use.
with a cord containing an equipment (4) Protection against vacuum forma-
grounding conductor connected to the tion. The hydraulic system supplying a
equipment frame and to a means for hydraulic tool used where it may con-
grounding the other end of the contact exposed live parts shall provide
ductor (however, this option may not protection against loss of insulating
be used where the introduction of the value, for the voltage involved, due to
ground into the work environment in- the formation of a partial vacuum in
creases the hazard to an employee); or the hydraulic line.
(2) The equipment shall be of the dou- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d)(4): Use of hydraulic
ble-insulated type conforming to sub- lines that do not have check valves and that
part K of this part; or have a separation of more than 10.7 meters
(3) The equipment shall be connected (35 feet) between the oil reservoir and the
to the power supply through an iso- upper end of the hydraulic system promotes
the formation of a partial vacuum.
lating transformer with an ungrounded
secondary of not more than 50 volts. (5) Protection against the accumulation
(c) Portable and vehicle-mounted gen- of moisture. A pneumatic tool used on
erators. Portable and vehicle-mounted energized electric lines or equipment,
483
or used where it may contact exposed (ii) If a defect or contamination that

live parts, shall provide protection could adversely affect the insulating
against the accumulation of moisture qualities or mechanical integrity of
in the air supply. the live-line tool is found, the tool
(6) Breaking connections. Pressure shall be repaired and refinished or shall
shall be released before connections are be permanently removed from service.
broken, unless quick-acting, self-clos- If no such defect or contamination is
ing connectors are used. found, the tool shall be cleaned and
(7) Leaks. Employers must ensure waxed.
that employees do not use any part of (iii) The tool shall be tested in ac-
their bodies to locate, or attempt to cordance with paragraphs (b)(3)(iv) and
stop, a hydraulic leak. (b)(3)(v) of this section under the fol-
(8) Hoses. Hoses may not be kinked. lowing conditions:
(A) After the tool has been repaired
§ 1926.957 Live-line tools. or refinished; and
(a) Design of tools. Live-line tool rods, (B) After the examination if repair or
tubes, and poles shall be designed and refinishing is not performed, unless the
constructed to withstand the following tool is made of FRP rod or foam-filled
minimum tests: FRP tube and the employer can dem-
(1) Fiberglass-reinforced plastic. If the onstrate that the tool has no defects
tool is made of fiberglass-reinforced that could cause it to fail during use.
plastic (FRP), it shall withstand 328,100 (iv) The test method used shall be de-
volts per meter (100,000 volts per foot) signed to verify the tool’s integrity
of length for 5 minutes, or along its entire working length and, if
the tool is made of fiberglass-rein-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(1): Live-line tools
forced plastic, its integrity under wet
using rod and tube that meet ASTM F711–02
(2007), Standard Specification for Fiberglass-Re- conditions.
inforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and Tube Used in (v) The voltage applied during the
Live Line Tools, are deemed to comply with tests shall be as follows:
paragraph (a)(1) of this section. (A) 246,100 volts per meter (75,000
volts per foot) of length for 1 minute if
(2) Wood. If the tool is made of wood,
the tool is made of fiberglass, or
it shall withstand 246,100 volts per
(B) 164,000 volts per meter (50,000
meter (75,000 volts per foot) of length
volts per foot) of length for 1 minute if
for 3 minutes, or the tool is made of wood, or
(3) Equivalent tests. The tool shall (C) Other tests that the employer can
withstand other tests that the em- demonstrate are equivalent.
ployer can demonstrate are equivalent.
(b) Condition of tools—(1) Daily inspec- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): Guidelines for the
tion. Each live-line tool shall be wiped examination, cleaning, repairing, and in-
clean and visually inspected for defects service testing of live-line tools are specified
in the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
before use each day. Engineers’ IEEE Guide for Maintenance Meth-
(2) Defects. If any defect or contami- ods on Energized Power Lines, IEEE Std 516–
nation that could adversely affect the 2009.
insulating qualities or mechanical in-
tegrity of the live-line tool is present § 1926.958 Materials handling and stor-
after wiping, the tool shall be removed age.
from service and examined and tested (a) General. Materials handling and
according to paragraph (b)(3) of this storage shall comply with applicable
section before being returned to serv- material-handling and material-stor-
ice. age requirements in this part, includ-
(3) Biennial inspection and testing. ing those in subparts N and CC of this
Live-line tools used for primary em- part.
ployee protection shall be removed (b) Materials storage near energized
from service every 2 years, and when- lines or equipment—(1) Unrestricted
ever required under paragraph (b)(2) of areas. In areas to which access is not
this section, for examination, cleaning, restricted to qualified persons only,
repair, and testing as follows: materials or equipment may not be

(i) Each tool shall be thoroughly ex- stored closer to energized lines or ex-
amined for defects. posed energized parts of equipment
484
than the following distances, plus a (3) Operation without outriggers. If the
distance that provides for the max- work area or the terrain precludes the
imum sag and side swing of all conduc- use of outriggers, the equipment may
tors and for the height and movement be operated only within its maximum
of material-handling equipment: load ratings specified by the equipment
(i) For lines and equipment energized manufacturer for the particular con-
at 50 kilovolts or less, the distance is figuration of the equipment without
3.05 meters (10 feet). outriggers.
(ii) For lines and equipment ener- (c) Applied loads. Mechanical equip-
gized at more than 50 kilovolts, the dis- ment used to lift or move lines or other
tance is 3.05 meters (10 feet) plus 0.10 material shall be used within its max-
meter (4 inches) for every 10 kilovolts imum load rating and other design lim-
over 50 kilovolts. itations for the conditions under which
(2) Restricted areas. In areas restricted the mechanical equipment is being
to qualified employees, materials may used.
not be stored within the working space (d) Operations near energized lines or
about energized lines or equipment. equipment—(1) Minimum approach dis-
tance. Mechanical equipment shall be
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2): Paragraph (b) of operated so that the minimum ap-
§ 1926.966 specifies the size of the working proach distances, established by the
space. employer under § 1926.960(c)(1)(i), are
maintained from exposed energized
§ 1926.959 Mechanical equipment. lines and equipment. However, the in-
(a) General requirements—(1) Other ap- sulated portion of an aerial lift oper-
plicable requirements. Mechanical equip- ated by a qualified employee in the lift
ment shall be operated in accordance is exempt from this requirement if the
with applicable requirements in this applicable minimum approach distance
part, including subparts N, O, and CC is maintained between the uninsulated
of this part, except that § 1926.600(a)(6) portions of the aerial lift and exposed
does not apply to operations performed objects having a different electrical po-
by qualified employees. tential.
(2) Inspection before use. The critical (2) Observer. A designated employee
safety components of mechanical ele- other than the equipment operator
vating and rotating equipment shall re- shall observe the approach distance to
ceive a thorough visual inspection be- exposed lines and equipment and pro-
fore use on each shift. vide timely warnings before the min-
imum approach distance required by
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(2): Critical safety paragraph (d)(1) of this section is
components of mechanical elevating and ro- reached, unless the employer can dem-
tating equipment are components for which
failure would result in free fall or free rota-
onstrate that the operator can accu-
tion of the boom. rately determine that the minimum
approach distance is being maintained.
(3) Operator. The operator of an elec- (3) Extra precautions. If, during oper-
tric line truck may not leave his or her ation of the mechanical equipment,
position at the controls while a load is that equipment could become ener-
suspended, unless the employer can gized, the operation also shall comply
demonstrate that no employee (includ- with at least one of paragraphs (d)(3)(i)
ing the operator) is endangered. through (d)(3)(iii) of this section.
(b) Outriggers—(1) Extend outriggers. (i) The energized lines or equipment
Mobile equipment, if provided with exposed to contact shall be covered
outriggers, shall be operated with the with insulating protective material
outriggers extended and firmly set, ex- that will withstand the type of contact
cept as provided in paragraph (b)(3) of that could be made during the oper-
this section. ation.
(2) Clear view. Outriggers may not be (ii) The mechanical equipment shall
extended or retracted outside of the be insulated for the voltage involved.
clear view of the operator unless all The mechanical equipment shall be po-
employees are outside the range of pos- sitioned so that its uninsulated por-
sible equipment motion. tions cannot approach the energized
485
lines or equipment any closer than the shall be present while any employees
minimum approach distances, estab- perform the following types of work:
lished by the employer under (A) Installation, removal, or repair of
§ 1926.960(c)(1)(i). lines energized at more than 600 volts,
(iii) Each employee shall be pro- (B) Installation, removal, or repair of
tected from hazards that could arise deenergized lines if an employee is ex-
from mechanical equipment contact posed to contact with other parts ener-
with energized lines or equipment. The gized at more than 600 volts,
measures used shall ensure that em- (C) Installation, removal, or repair of
ployees will not be exposed to haz- equipment, such as transformers, ca-
ardous differences in electric potential. pacitors, and regulators, if an em-
Unless the employer can demonstrate ployee is exposed to contact with parts
that the methods in use protect each energized at more than 600 volts,
employee from the hazards that could (D) Work involving the use of me-
arise if the mechanical equipment con- chanical equipment, other than insu-
tacts the energized line or equipment, lated aerial lifts, near parts energized
the measures used shall include all of at more than 600 volts, and
the following techniques: (E) Other work that exposes an em-
(A) Using the best available ground ployee to electrical hazards greater
to minimize the time the lines or elec- than, or equal to, the electrical hazards
tric equipment remain energized, posed by operations listed specifically
(B) Bonding mechanical equipment in paragraphs (b)(3)(i)(A) through
together to minimize potential dif- (b)(3)(i)(D) of this section.
ferences, (ii) Paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section
(C) Providing ground mats to extend does not apply to the following oper-
areas of equipotential, and ations:
(D) Employing insulating protective (A) Routine circuit switching, when
equipment or barricades to guard the employer can demonstrate that
against any remaining hazardous elec- conditions at the site allow safe per-
trical potential differences. formance of this work,
(B) Work performed with live-line
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d)(3)(iii): Appendix C
to this subpart contains information on haz- tools when the position of the em-
ardous step and touch potentials and on ployee is such that he or she is neither
methods of protecting employees from haz- within reach of, nor otherwise exposed
ards resulting from such potentials. to contact with, energized parts, and
(C) Emergency repairs to the extent
§ 1926.960 Working on or near exposed necessary to safeguard the general pub-
energized parts. lic.
(a) Application. This section applies (c) Live work—(1) Minimum approach
to work on exposed live parts, or near distances. (i) The employer shall estab-
enough to them to expose the employee lish minimum approach distances no
to any hazard they present. less than the distances computed by
(b) General—(1) Qualified employees Table V–2 for ac systems or Table V–7
only. (i) Only qualified employees may for dc systems.
work on or with exposed energized (ii) No later than April 1, 2015, for
lines or parts of equipment. voltages over 72.5 kilovolts, the em-
(ii) Only qualified employees may ployer shall determine the maximum
work in areas containing unguarded, anticipated per-unit transient over-
uninsulated energized lines or parts of voltage, phase-to-ground, through an
equipment operating at 50 volts or engineering analysis or assume a max-
more. imum anticipated per-unit transient
(2) Treat as energized. Electric lines overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in ac-
and equipment shall be considered and cordance with Table V–8. When the em-
treated as energized unless they have ployer uses portable protective gaps to
been deenergized in accordance with control the maximum transient over-
§ 1926.961. voltage, the value of the maximum an-
(3) At least two employees. (i) Except ticipated per-unit transient over-
as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of voltage, phase-to-ground, must provide
this section, at least two employees for five standard deviations between
486
the statistical sparkover voltage of the not expose his or her upper arm to con-
gap and the statistical withstand volt- tact with other energized parts.
age corresponding to the electrical (ii) When an employee uses rubber in-
component of the minimum approach sulating gloves or rubber insulating
distance. The employer shall make any gloves and sleeves as insulation from
engineering analysis conducted to deenergized parts (under paragraph
termine maximum anticipated per-unit (c)(1)(iii)(A) of this section), the em-
transient overvoltage available upon ployer shall ensure that the employee:
request to employees and to the Assist- (A) Puts on the rubber insulating
ant Secretary or designee for examina- gloves and sleeves in a position where
tion and copying. he or she cannot reach into the min-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(1)(ii): See appendix imum approach distance, established
B to this subpart for information on how to by the employer under paragraph (c)(1)
calculate the maximum anticipated per-unit of this section; and
transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, (B) Does not remove the rubber insu-
when the employer uses portable protective lating gloves and sleeves until he or
gaps to reduce maximum transient she is in a position where he or she
overvoltages. cannot reach into the minimum ap-
(iii) The employer shall ensure that proach distance, established by the em-
no employee approaches or takes any ployer under paragraph (c)(1) of this
conductive object closer to exposed en- section.
ergized parts than the employer’s es- (d) Working position—(1) Working from
tablished minimum approach distance, below. The employer shall ensure that
unless: each employee, to the extent that
(A) The employee is insulated from other safety-related conditions at the
the energized part (rubber insulating worksite permit, works in a position
gloves or rubber insulating gloves and from which a slip or shock will not
sleeves worn in accordance with para- bring the employee’s body into contact
graph (c)(2) of this section constitutes with exposed, uninsulated parts ener-
insulation of the employee from the gized at a potential different from the
energized part upon which the em- employee’s.
ployee is working provided that the (2) Requirements for working without
employee has control of the part in a electrical protective equipment. When an
manner sufficient to prevent exposure employee performs work near exposed
to uninsulated portions of the employ- parts energized at more than 600 volts,
ee’s body), or but not more than 72.5 kilovolts, and is
(B) The energized part is insulated not wearing rubber insulating gloves,
from the employee and from any other being protected by insulating equip-
conductive object at a different poten- ment covering the energized parts, per-
tial, or forming work using live-line tools, or
(C) The employee is insulated from performing live-line barehand work
any other exposed conductive object in under § 1926.964(c), the employee shall
accordance with the requirements for work from a position where he or she
live-line barehand work in § 1926.964(c). cannot reach into the minimum ap-
(2) Type of insulation. (i) When an em- proach distance, established by the em-
ployee uses rubber insulating gloves as ployer under paragraph (c)(1) of this
insulation from energized parts (under section.
paragraph (c)(1)(iii)(A) of this section), (e) Making connections. The employer
the employer shall ensure that the em- shall ensure that employees make con-
ployee also uses rubber insulating nections as follows:
sleeves. However, an employee need not (1) Connecting. In connecting deener-
use rubber insulating sleeves if: gized equipment or lines to an ener-
(A) Exposed energized parts on which gized circuit by means of a conducting
the employee is not working are insu- wire or device, an employee shall first
lated from the employee; and attach the wire to the deenergized
(B) When installing insulation for part;
purposes of paragraph (c)(2)(i)(A) of (2) Disconnecting. When disconnecting

this section, the employee installs the equipment or lines from an energized
insulation from a position that does circuit by means of a conducting wire
487
or device, an employee shall remove could ignite and continue to burn when
the source end first; and exposed to flames or the heat energy
(3) Loose conductors. When lines or estimated under paragraph (g)(2) of
equipment are connected to or discon- this section.
nected from energized circuits, an em-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(3): This paragraph
ployee shall keep loose conductors prohibits clothing made from acetate, nylon,
away from exposed energized parts. polyester, rayon and polypropylene, either
(f) Conductive articles. When an em- alone or in blends, unless the employer dem-
ployee performs work within reaching onstrates that the fabric has been treated to
distance of exposed energized parts of withstand the conditions that may be en-
equipment, the employer shall ensure countered by the employee or that the em-
that the employee removes or renders ployee wears the clothing in such a manner
nonconductive all exposed conductive as to eliminate the hazard involved.
articles, such as keychains or watch (4) Flame-resistant clothing. The em-
chains, rings, or wrist watches or ployer shall ensure that the outer layer
bands, unless such articles do not in- of clothing worn by an employee, ex-
crease the hazards associated with concept for clothing not required to be arc
tact with the energized parts. rated under paragraphs (g)(5)(i)
(g) Protection from flames and electric through (g)(5)(v) of this section, is
arcs—(1) Hazard assessment. The em- flame resistant under any of the fol-
ployer shall assess the workplace to lowing conditions:
identify employees exposed to hazards (i) The employee is exposed to con-
from flames or from electric arcs. tact with energized circuit parts oper-
(2) Estimate of available heat energy. ating at more than 600 volts,
For each employee exposed to hazards (ii) An electric arc could ignite flam-
from electric arcs, the employer shall mable material in the work area that,
make a reasonable estimate of the inci- in turn, could ignite the employee’s
dent heat energy to which the em- clothing,
ployee would be exposed. (iii) Molten metal or electric arcs
NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (g)(2): Appendix E to from faulted conductors in the work
this subpart provides guidance on estimating area could ignite the employee’s cloth-
available heat energy. The Occupational ing, or
Safety and Health Administration will deem
employers following the guidance in appen- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(4)(iii): This para-
dix E to this subpart to be in compliance graph does not apply to conductors that are
with paragraph (g)(2) of this section. An em- capable of carrying, without failure, the
ployer may choose a method of calculating maximum available fault current for the
incident heat energy not included in appen- time the circuit protective devices take to
dix E to this subpart if the chosen method interrupt the fault.
reasonably predicts the incident energy to
which the employee would be exposed. (iv) The incident heat energy esti-
NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (g)(2): This para- mated under paragraph (g)(2) of this
graph does not require the employer to esti- section exceeds 2.0 cal/cm2.
mate the incident heat energy exposure for (5) Arc rating. The employer shall en-
every job task performed by each employee. sure that each employee exposed to
The employer may make broad estimates hazards from electric arcs wears pro-
that cover multiple system areas provided tective clothing and other protective
the employer uses reasonable assumptions
about the energy-exposure distribution
equipment with an arc rating greater
throughout the system and provided the esti- than or equal to the heat energy esti-
mates represent the maximum employee ex- mated under paragraph (g)(2) of this
posure for those areas. For example, the em- section whenever that estimate exceeds
ployer could estimate the heat energy just 2.0 cal/cm2. This protective equipment
outside a substation feeding a radial dis- shall cover the employee’s entire body,
tribution system and use that estimate for except as follows:
all jobs performed on that radial system.
(i) Arc-rated protection is not nec-
(3) Prohibited clothing. The employer essary for the employee’s hands when
shall ensure that each employee who is the employee is wearing rubber insu-
exposed to hazards from flames or elec- lating gloves with protectors or, if the
tric arcs does not wear clothing that estimated incident energy is no more
could melt onto his or her skin or that than 14 cal/cm2, heavy-duty leather
488
work gloves with a weight of at least to hazards from electric arcs wears the
407 gm/m2 (12 oz/yd2), required arc-rated protective equip-
(ii) Arc-rated protection is not nec- ment commences April 1, 2015.
essary for the employee’s feet when the (h) Fuse handling. When an employee
employee is wearing heavy-duty work must install or remove fuses with one
shoes or boots, or both terminals energized at more
(iii) Arc-rated protection is not nec- than 300 volts, or with exposed parts
essary for the employee’s head when energized at more than 50 volts, the
the employee is wearing head protec- employer shall ensure that the em-
tion meeting § 1926.100(b)(2) if the esti- ployee uses tools or gloves rated for
mated incident energy is less than 9 the voltage. When an employee installs
cal/cm2 for exposures involving single- or removes expulsion-type fuses with
phase arcs in open air or 5 cal/cm2 for one or both terminals energized at
other exposures, more than 300 volts, the employer shall
(iv) The protection for the employ- ensure that the employee wears eye
ee’s head may consist of head protec- protection meeting the requirements of
tion meeting § 1926.100(b)(2) and a subpart E of this part, uses a tool rated
faceshield with a minimum arc rating for the voltage, and is clear of the ex-
of 8 cal/cm2 if the estimated incident- haust path of the fuse barrel.
energy exposure is less than 13 cal/cm2 (i) Covered (noninsulated) conductors.
for exposures involving single-phase The requirements of this section that
arcs in open air or 9 cal/cm2 for other pertain to the hazards of exposed live
exposures, and parts also apply when an employee per-
(v) For exposures involving single- forms work in proximity to covered
phase arcs in open air, the arc rating (noninsulated) wires.
for the employee’s head and face pro- (j) Non-current-carrying metal parts.
tection may be 4 cal/cm2 less than the Non-current-carrying metal parts of
estimated incident energy. equipment or devices, such as trans-
former cases and circuit-breaker
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g): See appendix E to housings, shall be treated as energized
this subpart for further information on the
at the highest voltage to which these
selection of appropriate protection.
parts are exposed, unless the employer
(6) Dates. (i) The obligation in para- inspects the installation and deter-
graph (g)(2) of this section for the em- mines that these parts are grounded
ployer to make reasonable estimates of before employees begin performing the
incident energy commences January 1, work.
2015. (k) Opening and closing circuits under
(ii) The obligation in paragraph load. (1) The employer shall ensure that
(g)(4)(iv) of this section for the em- devices used by employees to open cir-
ployer to ensure that the outer layer of cuits under load conditions are de-
clothing worn by an employee is flame- signed to interrupt the current in-
resistant when the estimated incident volved.
heat energy exceeds 2.0 cal/cm2 com- (2) The employer shall ensure that
mences April 1, 2015. devices used by employees to close cir-
(iii) The obligation in paragraph cuits under load conditions are de-
(g)(5) of this section for the employer signed to safely carry the current in-
to ensure that each employee exposed volved.
489
490
ER11AP14.034</GPH>
491
ER11AP14.035</GPH>
TABLE V–3—ELECTRICAL COMPONENT OF THE MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCE (D; IN METERS) AT

5.1 TO 72.5 KV
Phase-to-ground Phase-to-phase
exposure exposure
Nominal voltage (kV) phase-to-phase
D (m) D (m)
5.1 to 15.0 ..................................................................................................... 0.04 0.07

15.1 to 36.0 ................................................................................................... 0.16 0.28
36.1 to 46.0 ................................................................................................... 0.23 0.37
46.1 to 72.5 ................................................................................................... 0.39 0.59
TABLE V–4—ALTITUDE CORRECTION FACTOR TABLE V–4—ALTITUDE CORRECTION FACTOR—

Continued
Altitude above sea level (m) A
Altitude above sea level (m) A
0 to 900 ......................................... 1.00
901 to 1,200 .................................. 1.02
3,001 to 3,600 ............................... 1.25
1,201 to 1,500 ............................... 1.05
1,501 to 1,800 ............................... 1.08 3,601 to 4,200 ............................... 1.30
1,801 to 2,100 ............................... 1.11 4,201 to 4,800 ............................... 1.35
2,101 to 2,400 ............................... 1.14 4,801 to 5,400 ............................... 1.39
2,401 to 2,700 ............................... 1.17 5,401 to 6,000 ............................... 1.44
2,701 to 3,000 ............................... 1.20
TABLE V–5—ALTERNATIVE MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES FOR VOLTAGES OF 72.5 KV AND LESS 1
Distance
Nominal voltage (kV) phase-to-phase Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure
m ft m ft
0.050 0.300 2 ......................................................................... Avoid contact Avoid contact
0.301 to 0.750 2 ..................................................................... 0.33 1.09 0.33 1.09

0.751 to 5.0 ........................................................................... 0.63 2.07 0.63 2.07
5.1 to 15.0 ............................................................................. 0.65 2.14 0.68 2.24
15.1 to 36.0 ........................................................................... 0.77 2.53 0.89 2.92
36.1 to 46.0 ........................................................................... 0.84 2.76 0.98 3.22
46.1 to 72.5 ........................................................................... 1.00 3.29 1.20 3.94
1 Employers may use the minimum approach distances in this table provided the worksite is at an elevation of 900 meters
(3,000 feet) or less. If employees will be working at elevations greater than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above mean sea level, the
employer shall determine minimum approach distances by multiplying the distances in this table by the correction factor in Table
V–4 corresponding to the altitude of the work.
2 For single-phase systems, use voltage-to-ground.
TABLE V–6—ALTERNATIVE MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES FOR VOLTAGES OF MORE THAN 72.5
KV 1 2 3
Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure

Voltage range phase to phase (kV)
m ft m ft
72.6 to 121.0 ......................................................................... 1.13 3.71 1.42 4.66

121.1 to 145.0 ....................................................................... 1.30 4.27 1.64 5.38
145.1 to 169.0 ....................................................................... 1.46 4.79 1.94 6.36
169.1 to 242.0 ....................................................................... 2.01 6.59 3.08 10.10
242.1 to 362.0 ....................................................................... 3.41 11.19 5.52 18.11
362.1 to 420.0 ....................................................................... 4.25 13.94 6.81 22.34
420.1 to 550.0 ....................................................................... 5.07 16.63 8.24 27.03
550.1 to 800.0 ....................................................................... 6.88 22.57 11.38 37.34
1 Employers may use the minimum approach distances in this table provided the worksite is at an elevation of 900 meters
(3,000 feet) or less. If employees will be working at elevations greater than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above mean sea level, the
employer shall determine minimum approach distances by multiplying the distances in this table by the correction factor in Table
V–4 corresponding to the altitude of the work.
2 Employers may use the phase-to-phase minimum approach distances in this table provided that no insulated tool spans the
gap and no large conductive object is in the gap.
3 The clear live-line tool distance shall equal or exceed the values for the indicated voltage ranges.
492
TABLE V–7—DC LIVE-LINE MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCE (IN METERS) WITH OVERVOLTAGE
FACTOR 1
distance (m)
Maximum anticipated per-unit maximum line-to-ground voltage (kV)
transient overvoltage
250 400 500 600 750
1.5 or less ................................................. 1.12 1.60 2.06 2.62 3.61

1.6 ............................................................. 1.17 1.69 2.24 2.86 3.98
1.7 ............................................................. 1.23 1.82 2.42 3.12 4.37
1.8 ............................................................. 1.28 1.95 2.62 3.39 4.79
1 The distances specified in this table are for air, bare-hand, and live-line tool conditions. If employees will be working at ele-
vations greater than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above mean sea level, the employer shall determine minimum approach distances
by multiplying the distances in this table by the correction factor in Table V–4 corresponding to the altitude of the work.
TABLE V–8—ASSUMED MAXIMUM PER-UNIT TRANSIENT OVERVOLTAGE

Assumed maximum
Voltage range Type of current per-unit transient
(kV) (ac or dc) overvoltage
72.6 to 420.0 ................................................................................................. ac 3.5

420.1 to 550.0 ............................................................................................... ac 3.0
550.1 to 800.0 ............................................................................................... ac 2.5
250 to 750 ..................................................................................................... dc 1.8
[79 FR 20696, Apr. 11, 2014, as amended at 79 (3) Single crews working with the means
FR 56962, Sept. 24, 2014; 80 FR 60040, Oct. 5, of disconnection under the control of the
2015] employee in charge of the clearance. If
only one crew will be working on the
§ 1926.961 Deenergizing lines and
equipment for employee protection. lines or equipment and if the means of
disconnection is accessible and visible
(a) Application. This section applies to, and under the sole control of, the
to the deenergizing of transmission and employee in charge of the clearance,
distribution lines and equipment for paragraphs (c)(1), (c)(3), and (c)(5) of
the purpose of protecting employees. this section do not apply. Additionally,
Conductors and parts of electric equip- the employer does not need to use the
ment that have been deenergized under tags required by the remaining provi-
procedures other than those required sions of paragraph (c) of this section.
by this section shall be treated as ener-
(4) Multiple crews. If two or more
gized.
crews will be working on the same
(b) General—(1) System operator. If a
lines or equipment, then:
system operator is in charge of the
(i) The crews shall coordinate their
lines or equipment and their means of
disconnection, the employer shall des- activities under this section with a sin-
ignate one employee in the crew to be gle employee in charge of the clearance
in charge of the clearance and shall for all of the crews and follow the re-
comply with all of the requirements of quirements of this section as if all of
paragraph (c) of this section in the the employees formed a single crew, or
order specified. (ii) Each crew shall independently
(2) No system operator. If no system comply with this section and, if there
operator is in charge of the lines or is no system operator in charge of the
equipment and their means of dis- lines or equipment, shall have separate
connection, the employer shall des- tags and coordinate deenergizing and
ignate one employee in the crew to be reenergizing the lines and equipment
in charge of the clearance and to per- with the other crews.
form the functions that the system op- (5) Disconnecting means accessible to
erator would otherwise perform under general public. The employer shall
this section. All of the requirements of render any disconnecting means that
paragraph (c) of this section apply, in are accessible to individuals outside

the order specified, except as provided the employer’s control (for example,
in paragraph (b)(3) of this section. the general public) inoperable while
493
the disconnecting means are open for network protector in a closed position,
the purpose of protecting employees. that: The line connected to the net-
(c) Deenergizing lines and equipment— work protector is not deenergized for
(1) Request to deenergize. The employee the protection of any employee work-
that the employer designates pursuant ing on the line; and (if the line con-
to paragraph (b) of this section as nected to the network protector is not
being in charge of the clearance shall deenergized for the protection of any
make a request of the system operator employee working on the line) the pri-
to deenergize the particular section of mary conductors for the network pro-
line or equipment. The designated em- tector are energized.
ployee becomes the employee in charge (5) Tags. Tags shall prohibit oper-
(as this term is used in paragraph (c) of ation of the disconnecting means and
this section) and is responsible for the shall indicate that employees are at
clearance. work.
(2) Open disconnecting means. The em- (6) Test for energized condition. After
ployer shall ensure that all switches, the applicable requirements in para-
disconnectors, jumpers, taps, and other graphs (c)(1) through (c)(5) of this sec-
means through which known sources of tion have been followed and the system
electric energy may be supplied to the operator gives a clearance to the em-
particular lines and equipment to be ployee in charge, the employer shall
deenergized are open. The employer ensure that the lines and equipment
shall render such means inoperable, un- are deenergized by testing the lines and
less its design does not so permit, and equipment to be worked with a device
then ensure that such means are designed to detect voltage.
tagged to indicate that employees are (7) Install grounds. The employer shall
at work. ensure the installation of protective
(3) Automatically and remotely con- grounds as required by § 1926.962.
trolled switches. The employer shall en- (8) Consider lines and equipment deen-
sure that automatically and remotely ergized. After the applicable require-
controlled switches that could cause ments of paragraphs (c)(1) through
the opened disconnecting means to (c)(7) of this section have been fol-
close are also tagged at the points of lowed, the lines and equipment in-
control. The employer shall render the volved may be considered deenergized.
automatic or remote control feature (9) Transferring clearances. To transfer
inoperable, unless its design does not the clearance, the employee in charge
so permit. (or the employee’s supervisor if the
(4) Network protectors. The employer employee in charge must leave the
need not use the tags mentioned in worksite due to illness or other emer-
paragraphs (c)(2) and (c)(3) of this sec- gency) shall inform the system oper-
tion on a network protector for work ator and employees in the crew; and
on the primary feeder for the network the new employee in charge shall be re-
protector’s associated network trans- sponsible for the clearance.
former when the employer can dem- (10) Releasing clearances. To release a
onstrate all of the following condi- clearance, the employee in charge
tions: shall:
(i) Every network protector is main- (i) Notify each employee under that
tained so that it will immediately trip clearance of the pending release of the
open if closed when a primary con- clearance;
ductor is deenergized; (ii) Ensure that all employees under
(ii) Employees cannot manually that clearance are clear of the lines
place any network protector in a closed and equipment;
position without the use of tools, and (iii) Ensure that all protective
any manual override position is grounds protecting employees under
blocked, locked, or otherwise disabled; that clearance have been removed; and
and (iv) Report this information to the
(iii) The employer has procedures for system operator and then release the
manually overriding any network pro- clearance.

tector that incorporate provisions for (11) Person releasing clearance. Only
determining, before anyone places a the employee in charge who requested
494
the clearance may release the clear- ergized under the provisions of
ance, unless the employer transfers re- § 1926.961.
sponsibility under paragraph (c)(9) of (2) No possibility of contact. There is
this section. no possibility of contact with another
(12) Removal of tags. No one may reenergized source.
move tags without the release of the (3) No induced voltage. The hazard of
associated clearance as specified under induced voltage is not present.
paragraphs (c)(10) and (c)(11) of this (c) Equipotential zone. Temporary pro-
section. tective grounds shall be placed at such
(13) Reenergizing lines and equipment. locations and arranged in such a man-
The employer shall ensure that no one ner that the employer can demonstrate
initiates action to reenergize the lines will prevent each employee from being
or equipment at a point of disconnec- exposed to hazardous differences in
tion until all protective grounds have electric potential.
been removed, all crews working on the
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c): Appendix C to this
lines or equipment release their clear-
subpart contains guidelines for establishing
ances, all employees are clear of the the equipotential zone required by this para-
lines and equipment, and all protective graph. The Occupational Safety and Health
tags are removed from that point of Administration will deem grounding prac-
disconnection. tices meeting these guidelines as complying
with paragraph (c) of this section.
§ 1926.962 Grounding for the protec-
tion of employees. (d) Protective grounding equipment—(1)
Ampacity. (i) Protective grounding
(a) Application. This section applies equipment shall be capable of con-
to grounding of transmission and dis- ducting the maximum fault current
tribution lines and equipment for the that could flow at the point of ground-
purpose of protecting employees. Para- ing for the time necessary to clear the
graph (d) of this section also applies to fault.
protective grounding of other equip- (ii) Protective grounding equipment
ment as required elsewhere in this Sub- shall have an ampacity greater than or
part. equal to that of No. 2 AWG copper.
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): This section cov- (2) Impedance. Protective grounds
ers grounding of transmission and distribu- shall have an impedance low enough so
tion lines and equipment when this subpart that they do not delay the operation of
requires protective grounding and whenever protective devices in case of accidental
the employer chooses to ground such lines
energizing of the lines or equipment.
and equipment for the protection of employ-
ees. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d): American Society
for Testing and Materials Standard Specifica-
(b) General. For any employee to tions for Temporary Protective Grounds to Be
work transmission and distribution Used on De-Energized Electric Power Lines and
lines or equipment as deenergized, the Equipment, ASTM F855–09, contains guide-
employer shall ensure that the lines or lines for protective grounding equipment.
equipment are deenergized under the The Institute of Electrical Engineers Guide
provisions of § 1926.961 and shall ensure for Protective Grounding of Power Lines, IEEE
proper grounding of the lines or equip- Std 1048–2003, contains guidelines for select-
ment as specified in paragraphs (c) ing and installing protective grounding
equipment.
through (h) of this section. However, if
the employer can demonstrate that in- (e) Testing. The employer shall ensure
stallation of a ground is impracticable that, unless a previously installed
or that the conditions resulting from ground is present, employees test lines
the installation of a ground would and equipment and verify the absence
present greater hazards to employees of nominal voltage before employees
than working without grounds, the install any ground on those lines or
lines and equipment may be treated as that equipment.
deenergized provided that the employer (f) Connecting and removing grounds—
establishes that all of the following (1) Order of connection. The employer
conditions apply: shall ensure that, when an employee

(1) Deenergized. The employer ensures attaches a ground to a line or to equip-
that the lines and equipment are deen- ment, the employee attaches the
495
ground-end connection first and then involving interim measurements using

attaches the other end by means of a high voltage, high power, or combina-
live-line tool. For lines or equipment tions of high voltage and high power,
operating at 600 volts or less, the em- and not to testing involving contin-
ployer may permit the employee to use uous measurements as in routine me-
insulating equipment other than a live- tering, relaying, and normal line work.
line tool if the employer ensures that NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): OSHA considers
the line or equipment is not energized routine inspection and maintenance meas-
at the time the ground is connected or urements made by qualified employees to be
if the employer can demonstrate that routine line work not included in the scope
each employee is protected from haz- of this section, provided that the hazards re-
ards that may develop if the line or lated to the use of intrinsic high-voltage or
equipment is energized. high-power sources require only the normal
precautions associated with routine work
(2) Order of removal. The employer specified in the other paragraphs of this sub-
shall ensure that, when an employee part. Two typical examples of such excluded
removes a ground, the employee retest work procedures are ‘‘phasing-out’’ test-
moves the grounding device from the ing and testing for a ‘‘no-voltage’’ condition.
line or equipment using a live-line tool
(b) General requirements—(1) Safe work
before he or she removes the ground-
practices. The employer shall establish
end connection. For lines or equipment and enforce work practices for the pro-
operating at 600 volts or less, the em- tection of each worker from the haz-
ployer may permit the employee to use ards of high-voltage or high-power test-
insulating equipment other than a live- ing at all test areas, temporary and
line tool if the employer ensures that permanent. Such work practices shall
the line or equipment is not energized include, as a minimum, test area safe-
at the time the ground is disconnected guarding, grounding, the safe use of
or if the employer can demonstrate measuring and control circuits, and a
that each employee is protected from means providing for periodic safety
hazards that may develop if the line or checks of field test areas.
equipment is energized. (2) Training. The employer shall en-
(g) Additional precautions. The em- sure that each employee, upon initial
ployer shall ensure that, when an em- assignment to the test area, receives
ployee performs work on a cable at a training in safe work practices, with
location remote from the cable ter- retraining provided as required by
minal, the cable is not grounded at the § 1926.950(b).
cable terminal if there is a possibility (c) Safeguarding of test areas—(1) Safe-
of hazardous transfer of potential guarding. The employer shall provide
should a fault occur. safeguarding within test areas to con-
(h) Removal of grounds for test. The trol access to test equipment or to ap-
employer may permit employees to re- paratus under test that could become
move grounds temporarily during energized as part of the testing by ei-
tests. During the test procedure, the ther direct or inductive coupling and to
employer shall ensure that each em- prevent accidental employee contact
ployee uses insulating equipment, shall with energized parts.
isolate each employee from any haz- (2) Permanent test areas. The employer
ards involved, and shall implement any shall guard permanent test areas with
additional measures necessary to pro- walls, fences, or other barriers designed
tect each exposed employee in case the to keep employees out of the test
previously grounded lines and equip- areas.
ment become energized. (3) Temporary test areas. In field test-
ing, or at a temporary test site not
§ 1926.963 Testing and test facilities. guarded by permanent fences and
(a) Application. This section provides gates, the employer shall ensure the
for safe work practices for high-voltage use of one of the following means to
and high-power testing performed in prevent employees without authoriza-
laboratories, shops, and substations, tion from entering:
and in the field and on electric trans- (i) Distinctively colored safety tape
mission and distribution lines and supported approximately waist high
equipment. It applies only to testing with safety signs attached to it,
496
(ii) A barrier or barricade that limits tentials that may develop during the
access to the test area to a degree test.
equivalent, physically and visually, to
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d)(3)(ii): See appendix
the barricade specified in paragraph C to this subpart for information on meas-
(c)(3)(i) of this section, or ures that employers can take to protect em-
(iii) One or more test observers sta- ployees from hazardous step and touch po-
tioned so that they can monitor the en- tentials.
tire area.
(4) Removal of safeguards. The em- (4) Equipment grounding conductors.
ployer shall ensure the removal of the For tests in which using the equipment
safeguards required by paragraph (c)(3) grounding conductor in the equipment
of this section when employees no power cord to ground the test equip-
longer need the protection afforded by ment would result in greater hazards
the safeguards. to test personnel or prevent the taking
(d) Grounding practices—(1) Establish of satisfactory measurements, the em-
and implement practices. The employer ployer may use a ground clearly indi-
shall establish and implement safe cated in the test set-up if the employer
grounding practices for the test facil- can demonstrate that this ground af-
ity. fords protection for employees equiva-
(i) The employer shall maintain at lent to the protection afforded by an
ground potential all conductive parts equipment grounding conductor in the
accessible to the test operator while power supply cord.
the equipment is operating at high (5) Grounding after tests. The em-
voltage. ployer shall ensure that, when any em-
(ii) Wherever ungrounded terminals ployee enters the test area after equip-
of test equipment or apparatus under ment is deenergized, a ground is placed
test may be present, they shall be on the high-voltage terminal and any
treated as energized until tests dem- other exposed terminals.
onstrate that they are deenergized. (i) Before any employee applies a di-
(2) Installation of grounds. The em- rect ground, the employer shall dis-
ployer shall ensure either that visible charge high capacitance equipment or
grounds are applied automatically, or apparatus through a resistor rated for
that employees using properly insu- the available energy.
lated tools manually apply visible (ii) A direct ground shall be applied
grounds, to the high-voltage circuits to the exposed terminals after the
after they are deenergized and before stored energy drops to a level at which
any employee performs work on the it is safe to do so.
circuit or on the item or apparatus (6) Grounding test vehicles. If the em-
under test. Common ground connec- ployer uses a test trailer or test vehicle
tions shall be solidly connected to the in field testing, its chassis shall be
test equipment and the apparatus grounded. The employer shall protect
under test. each employee against hazardous touch
(3) Isolated ground return. In high- potentials with respect to the vehicle,
power testing, the employer shall pro- instrument panels, and other conduc-
vide an isolated ground-return con- tive parts accessible to employees with
ductor system designed to prevent the bonding, insulation, or isolation.
intentional passage of current, with its (e) Control and measuring circuits—(1)
attendant voltage rise, from occurring Control wiring. The employer may not
in the ground grid or in the earth. How- run control wiring, meter connections,
ever, the employer need not provide an test leads, or cables from a test area
isolated ground-return conductor if the unless contained in a grounded metal-
employer can demonstrate that both of lic sheath and terminated in a ground-
the following conditions exist: ed metallic enclosure or unless the em-
(i) The employer cannot provide an ployer takes other precautions that it
isolated ground-return conductor due can demonstrate will provide employ-
to the distance of the test site from the ees with equivalent safety.
electric energy source, and (2) Instruments. The employer shall

(ii) The employer protects employees isolate meters and other instruments
from any hazardous step and touch po- with accessible terminals or parts from
497
test personnel to protect against haz- head lines and equipment and for live-
ards that could arise should such terline barehand work.
minals and parts become energized dur- (2) Checking structure before climbing.
ing testing. If the employer provides Before allowing employees to subject
this isolation by locating test equip- elevated structures, such as poles or
ment in metal compartments with towers, to such stresses as climbing or
viewing windows, the employer shall the installation or removal of equip-
provide interlocks to interrupt the ment may impose, the employer shall
power supply when someone opens the ascertain that the structures are capa-
compartment cover. ble of sustaining the additional or un-
(3) Routing temporary wiring. The em- balanced stresses. If the pole or other
ployer shall protect temporary wiring structure cannot withstand the ex-
and its connections against damage, pected loads, the employer shall brace
accidental interruptions, and other or otherwise support the pole or struc-
hazards. To the maximum extent posture so as to prevent failure.
sible, the employer shall keep signal, NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(2): Appendix D to
control, ground, and power cables sepa- this subpart contains test methods that em-
rate from each other. ployers can use in ascertaining whether a
(4) Test observer. If any employee will wood pole is capable of sustaining the forces
be present in the test area during test- imposed by an employee climbing the pole.
ing, a test observer shall be present. This paragraph also requires the employer to
ascertain that the pole can sustain all other
The test observer shall be capable of
forces imposed by the work employees will
implementing the immediate deener- perform.
gizing of test circuits for safety pur-
poses. (3) Setting and moving poles. (i) When
(f) Safety check—(1) Before each test. a pole is set, moved, or removed near
Safety practices governing employee an exposed energized overhead con-
work at temporary or field test areas ductor, the pole may not contact the
shall provide, at the beginning of each conductor.
series of tests, for a routine safety (ii) When a pole is set, moved, or re-
check of such test areas. moved near an exposed energized over-
(2) Conditions to be checked. The test head conductor, the employer shall en-
operator in charge shall conduct these sure that each employee wears elec-
routine safety checks before each se- trical protective equipment or uses in-
ries of tests and shall verify at least sulated devices when handling the pole
the following conditions: and that no employee contacts the pole
with uninsulated parts of his or her
(i) Barriers and safeguards are in
body.
workable condition and placed properly
(iii) To protect employees from fall-
to isolate hazardous areas;
ing into holes used for placing poles,
(ii) System test status signals, if
the employer shall physically guard
used, are in operable condition;
the holes, or ensure that employees at-
(iii) Clearly marked test-power dis- tend the holes, whenever anyone is
connects are readily available in an working nearby.
emergency; (b) Installing and removing overhead
(iv) Ground connections are clearly lines. The following provisions apply to
identifiable; the installation and removal of over-
(v) Personal protective equipment is head conductors or cable (overhead
provided and used as required by sub- lines).
part E of this part and by this subpart; (1) Tension stringing method. When
and lines that employees are installing or
(vi) Proper separation between sig- removing can contact energized parts,
nal, ground, and power cables. the employer shall use the tension-
stringing method, barriers, or other
§ 1926.964 Overhead lines and live-line equivalent measures to minimize the
barehand work. possibility that conductors and cables
(a) General—(1) Application. This sec- the employees are installing or remov-
tion provides additional requirements ing will contact energized power lines
for work performed on or near over- or equipment.
498
(2) Conductors, cables, and pulling and sultant current would be more than 6
tensioning equipment. For conductors, milliamperes.
cables, and pulling and tensioning (5) Safe operating condition. Reel-han-
equipment, the employer shall provide dling equipment, including pulling and
the protective measures required by tensioning devices, shall be in safe op-
§ 1926.959(d)(3) when employees are in- erating condition and shall be leveled
stalling or removing a conductor or and aligned.
cable close enough to energized con- (6) Load ratings. The employer shall
ductors that any of the following fail- ensure that employees do not exceed
ures could energize the pulling or ten- load ratings of stringing lines, pulling
sioning equipment or the conductor or lines, conductor grips, load-bearing
cable being installed or removed: hardware and accessories, rigging, and
(i) Failure of the pulling or ten- hoists.
sioning equipment, (7) Defective pulling lines. The em-
(ii) Failure of the conductor or cable ployer shall repair or replace defective
being pulled, or pulling lines and accessories.
(iii) Failure of the previously in- (8) Conductor grips. The employer
stalled lines or equipment. shall ensure that employees do not use
(3) Disable automatic-reclosing feature. conductor grips on wire rope unless the
If the conductors that employees are manufacturer specifically designed the
installing or removing cross over ener- grip for this application.
gized conductors in excess of 600 volts (9) Communications. The employer
and if the design of the circuit-inter- shall ensure that employees maintain
rupting devices protecting the lines so reliable communications, through two-
permits, the employer shall render in- way radios or other equivalent means,
operable the automatic-reclosing fea- between the reel tender and the pull-
ture of these devices. ing-rig operator.
(4) Induced voltage. (i) Before employ- (10) Operation of pulling rig. Employ-
ees install lines parallel to existing en- ees may operate the pulling rig only
ergized lines, the employer shall make when it is safe to do so.
a determination of the approximate
voltage to be induced in the new lines, NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(10): Examples of
or work shall proceed on the assump- unsafe conditions include: employees in loca-
tion that the induced voltage is haz- tions prohibited by paragraph (b)(11) of this
section, conductor and pulling line hang-ups,
ardous.
and slipping of the conductor grip.
(ii) Unless the employer can dem-
onstrate that the lines that employees (11) Working under overhead oper-
are installing are not subject to the in- ations. While a power-driven device is
duction of a hazardous voltage or un- pulling the conductor or pulling line
less the lines are treated as energized, and the conductor or pulling line is in
temporary protective grounds shall be motion, the employer shall ensure that
placed at such locations and arranged employees are not directly under over-
in such a manner that the employer head operations or on the crossarm, ex-
can demonstrate will prevent exposure cept as necessary for the employees to
of each employee to hazardous dif- guide the stringing sock or board over
ferences in electric potential. or through the stringing sheave.
(c) Live-line barehand work. In addi-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(4)(ii): Appendix C
to this subpart contains guidelines for pro- tion to other applicable provisions con-
tecting employees from hazardous dif- tained in this subpart, the following re-
ferences in electric potential as required by quirements apply to live-line barehand
this paragraph. work:
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(4): If the employer (1) Training. Before an employee uses
takes no precautions to protect employees or supervises the use of the live-line
from hazards associated with involuntary re- barehand technique on energized cir-
actions from electric shock, a hazard exists
cuits, the employer shall ensure that
if the induced voltage is sufficient to pass a
the employee completes training con-
current of 1 milliampere through a 500-ohm

resistor. If the employer protects employees forming to § 1926.950(b) in the technique
from injury due to involuntary reactions and in the safety requirements of para-
from electric shock, a hazard exists if the re- graph (c) of this section.
499
(2) Existing conditions. Before any em- aerial device to the energized line or
ployee uses the live-line barehand tech- equipment.
nique on energized high-voltage con- (i) The employee shall be connected
ductors or parts, the employer shall as- to the bucket liner or other conductive
certain the following information in device by the use of conductive shoes,
addition to information about other ex- leg clips, or other means.
isting conditions required by (ii) Where differences in potentials at
§ 1926.950(d): the worksite pose a hazard to employ-
(i) The nominal voltage rating of the ees, the employer shall provide electro-
circuit on which employees will per- static shielding designed for the volt-
form the work, age being worked.
(ii) The clearances to ground of lines (7) Bonding the employee to the ener-
and other energized parts on which em- gized part. The employer shall ensure
ployees will perform the work, and that, before the employee contacts the
(iii) The voltage limitations of equip- energized part, the employee bonds the
ment employees will use. conductive bucket liner or other con-
(3) Insulated tools and equipment. (i) ductive device to the energized con-
The employer shall ensure that the in- ductor by means of a positive connec-
sulated equipment, insulated tools, and tion. This connection shall remain at-
aerial devices and platforms used by tached to the energized conductor until
employees are designed, tested, and the employee completes the work on
made for live-line barehand work. the energized circuit.
(ii) The employer shall ensure that (8) Aerial-lift controls. Aerial lifts used
employees keep tools and equipment for live-line barehand work shall have
clean and dry while they are in use. dual controls (lower and upper) as fol-
lows:
(4) Disable automatic-reclosing feature.
(i) The upper controls shall be within
The employer shall render inoperable
easy reach of the employee in the
the automatic-reclosing feature of cir-
bucket. On a two-bucket-type lift, ac-
cuit-interrupting devices protecting
cess to the controls shall be within
the lines if the design of the devices
easy reach of both buckets.
permits.
(ii) The lower set of controls shall be
(5) Adverse weather conditions. The near the base of the boom and shall be
employer shall ensure that employees designed so that they can override op-
do not perform work when adverse eration of the equipment at any time.
weather conditions would make the (9) Operation of lower controls. Lower
work hazardous even after the em- (ground-level) lift controls may not be
ployer implements the work practices operated with an employee in the lift
required by this subpart. Additionally, except in case of emergency.
employees may not perform work when (10) Check controls. The employer
winds reduce the phase-to-phase or shall ensure that, before employees ele-
phase-to-ground clearances at the work vate an aerial lift into the work posi-
location below the minimum approach tion, the employees check all controls
distances specified in paragraph (c)(13) (ground level and bucket) to determine
of this section, unless insulating that they are in proper working condi-
guards cover the grounded objects and tion.
other lines and equipment. (11) Body of aerial lift truck. The em-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(5): Thunderstorms ployer shall ensure that, before em-
in the vicinity, high winds, snow storms, and ployees elevate the boom of an aerial
ice storms are examples of adverse weather lift, the employees ground the body of
conditions that make live-line barehand the truck or barricade the body of the
work too hazardous to perform safely even truck and treat it as energized.
after the employer implements the work
(12) Boom-current test. The employer
practices required by this subpart.
shall ensure that employees perform a
(6) Bucket liners and electrostatic boom-current test before starting work
shielding. The employer shall provide each day, each time during the day
and ensure that employees use a con- when they encounter a higher voltage,
ductive bucket liner or other conduc- and when changed conditions indicate
tive device for bonding the insulated a need for an additional test.
500
(i) This test shall consist of placing (17) Passing objects to employee. The
the bucket in contact with an ener- employer shall ensure that employees
gized source equal to the voltage to be do not pass uninsulated equipment or
encountered for a minimum of 3 min- material between a pole or structure
utes. and an aerial lift while an employee
(ii) The leakage current may not ex- working from the bucket is bonded to
ceed 1 microampere per kilovolt of an energized part.
nominal phase-to-ground voltage. (18) Nonconductive measuring device. A
(iii) The employer shall immediately nonconductive measuring device shall
suspend work from the aerial lift when be readily accessible to employees per-
there is any indication of a malfunc- forming live-line barehand work to as-
tion in the equipment. sist them in maintaining the required
(13) Minimum approach distance. The minimum approach distance.
employer shall ensure that employees (d) Towers and structures. The fol-
maintain the minimum approach dis- lowing requirements apply to work per-
tances, established by the employer formed on towers or other structures
under § 1926.960(c)(1)(i), from all ground- that support overhead lines.
ed objects and from lines and equip- (1) Working beneath towers and struc-
ment at a potential different from that tures. The employer shall ensure that
to which the live-line barehand equip- no employee is under a tower or struc-
ment is bonded, unless insulating ture while work is in progress, except
guards cover such grounded objects and when the employer can demonstrate
other lines and equipment. that such a working position is nec-
(14) Approaching, leaving, and bonding essary to assist employees working
to energized part. The employer shall above.
ensure that, while an employee is ap- (2) Tag lines. The employer shall en-
proaching, leaving, or bonding to an sure that employees use tag lines or
energized circuit, the employee main- other similar devices to maintain con-
tains the minimum approach distances, trol of tower sections being raised or
established by the employer under positioned, unless the employer can
§ 1926.960(c)(1)(i), between the employee demonstrate that the use of such de-
and any grounded parts, including the vices would create a greater hazard to
lower boom and portions of the truck employees.
and between the employee and conduc- (3) Disconnecting load lines. The em-
tive objects energized at different po- ployer shall ensure that employees do
tentials. not detach the loadline from a member
(15) Positioning bucket near energized or section until they safely secure the
bushing or insulator string. While the load.
bucket is alongside an energized bush- (4) Adverse weather conditions. The
ing or insulator string, the employer employer shall ensure that, except dur-
shall ensure that employees maintain ing emergency restoration procedures,
the phase-to-ground minimum ap- employees discontinue work when ad-
proach distances, established by the verse weather conditions would make
employer under § 1926.960(c)(1)(i), be- the work hazardous in spite of the
tween all parts of the bucket and the work practices required by this sub-
grounded end of the bushing or insu- part.
lator string or any other grounded sur-
face. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d)(4): Thunderstorms
in the vicinity, high winds, snow storms, and
(16) Handlines. The employer shall en- ice storms are examples of adverse weather
sure that employees do not use conditions that make this work too haz-
handlines between the bucket and the ardous to perform even after the employer
boom or between the bucket and the implements the work practices required by
ground. However, employees may use this subpart.
nonconductive-type handlines from
conductor to ground if not supported § 1926.965 Underground electrical in-
from the bucket. The employer shall stallations.
ensure that no one uses ropes used for (a) Application. This section provides
live-line barehand work for other pur- additional requirements for work on
poses. underground electrical installations.
501
(b) Access. The employer shall ensure (e) Duct rods. The employer shall en-
that employees use a ladder or other sure that, if employees use duct rods,
climbing device to enter and exit a the employees install the duct rods in
manhole or subsurface vault exceeding the direction presenting the least haz-
1.22 meters (4 feet) in depth. No em- ard to employees. The employer shall
ployee may climb into or out of a man- station an employee at the far end of
hole or vault by stepping on cables or the duct line being rodded to ensure
hangers. that the employees maintain the re-
(c) Lowering equipment into manholes— quired minimum approach distances.
(1) Hoisting equipment. Equipment used (f) Multiple cables. When multiple ca-
to lower materials and tools into man- bles are present in a work area, the em-
holes or vaults shall be capable of sup- ployer shall identify the cable to be
porting the weight to be lowered and worked by electrical means, unless its
shall be checked for defects before use. identity is obvious by reason of distinc-
(2) Clear the area of employees. Before tive appearance or location or by other
anyone lowers tools or material into readily apparent means of identifica-
the opening for a manhole or vault, tion. The employer shall protect cables
each employee working in the manhole other than the one being worked from
or vault shall be clear of the area di- damage.
rectly under the opening. (g) Moving cables. Except when para-
graph (h)(2) of this section permits em-
(d) Attendants for manholes and
ployees to perform work that could
vaults—(1) When required. While work is
cause a fault in an energized cable in a
being performed in a manhole or vault
manhole or vault, the employer shall
containing energized electric equip-
ensure that employees inspect ener-
ment, an employee with first-aid train-
gized cables to be moved for abnormali-
ing shall be available on the surface in
ties.
the immediate vicinity of the manhole
(h) Protection against faults—(1) Cables
or vault entrance to render emergency
with abnormalities. Where a cable in a
assistance.
manhole or vault has one or more ab-
(2) Brief entries allowed. Occasionally, normalities that could lead to a fault
the employee on the surface may brief- or be an indication of an impending
ly enter a manhole or vault to provide fault, the employer shall deenergize
nonemergency assistance. the cable with the abnormality before
NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (d)(2): Paragraph (h) any employee may work in the man-
of 1926.953 may also require an attendant and hole or vault, except when service-load
does not permit this attendant to enter the conditions and a lack of feasible alter-
manhole or vault. natives require that the cable remain
NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (d)(2): Paragraph energized. In that case, employees may
(b)(1)(ii) of § 1926.960 requires employees en- enter the manhole or vault provided
tering manholes or vaults containing un- the employer protects them from the
guarded, uninsulated energized lines or parts
possible effects of a failure using
of electric equipment operating at 50 volts or
more to be qualified. shields or other devices that are capa-
ble of containing the adverse effects of
(3) Entry without attendant. For the a fault. The employer shall treat the
purpose of inspection, housekeeping, following abnormalities as indications
taking readings, or similar work, an of impending faults unless the em-
employee working alone may enter, for ployer can demonstrate that the condi-
brief periods of time, a manhole or tions could not lead to a fault: Oil or
vault where energized cables or equip- compound leaking from cable or joints,
ment are in service if the employer can broken cable sheaths or joint sleeves,
demonstrate that the employee will be hot localized surface temperatures of
protected from all electrical hazards. cables or joints, or joints swollen be-
(4) Communications. The employer yond normal tolerance.
shall ensure that employees maintain (2) Work-related faults. If the work
reliable communications, through two- employees will perform in a manhole
way radios or other equivalent means, or vault could cause a fault in a cable,
among all employees involved in the the employer shall deenergize that
job. cable before any employee works in the
502
manhole or vault, except when service- render the control circuit inoperable if
load conditions and a lack of feasible the design of the equipment permits.
alternatives require that the cable re- (d) Substation fences. Conductive
main energized. In that case, employ- fences around substations shall be
ees may enter the manhole or vault grounded. When a substation fence is
provided the employer protects them expanded or a section is removed, fence
from the possible effects of a failure sections shall be isolated, grounded, or
using shields or other devices that are bonded as necessary to protect employ-
capable of containing the adverse ef- ees from hazardous differences in elec-
fects of a fault. tric potential.
(i) Sheath continuity. When employees NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d): IEEE Std 80–2000,
perform work on buried cable or on IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation
cable in a manhole or vault, the em- Grounding, contains guidelines for protec-
ployer shall maintain metallic-sheath tion against hazardous differences in
continuity, or the cable sheath shall be electric potential.
treated as energized. (e) Guarding of rooms and other spaces
§ 1926.966 Substations. containing electric supply equipment—(1)
When to guard rooms and other spaces.
(a) Application. This section provides Rooms and other spaces in which elec-
additional requirements for sub- tric supply lines or equipment are in-
stations and for work performed in stalled shall meet the requirements of
them. paragraphs (e)(2) through (e)(5) of this
(b) Access and working space. The em- section under the following conditions:
ployer shall provide and maintain suf- (i) If exposed live parts operating at
ficient access and working space about 50 to 150 volts to ground are within 2.4
electric equipment to permit ready and meters (8 feet) of the ground or other
safe operation and maintenance of such working surface inside the room or
equipment by employees. other space,
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): American Na- (ii) If live parts operating at 151 to
tional Standard National Electrical Safety 600 volts to ground and located within
Code, ANSI/IEEE C2–2012 contains guidelines 2.4 meters (8 feet) of the ground or
for the dimensions of access and working other working surface inside the room
space about electric equipment in sub- or other space are guarded only by lo-
stations. Installations meeting the ANSI cation, as permitted under paragraph
provisions comply with paragraph (b) of this (f)(1) of this section, or
section. The Occupational Safety and Health
Administration will determine whether an
(iii) If live parts operating at more
installation that does not conform to this than 600 volts to ground are within the
ANSI standard complies with paragraph (b) room or other space, unless:
of this section based on the following cri- (A) The live parts are enclosed within
teria: grounded, metal-enclosed equipment
(1) Whether the installation conforms to whose only openings are designed so
the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect that foreign objects inserted in these
when the installation was made; openings will be deflected from ener-
(2) Whether the configuration of the instal- gized parts, or
lation enables employees to maintain the
minimum approach distances, established by (B) The live parts are installed at a
the employer under § 1926.960(c)(1)(i), while height, above ground and any other
the employees are working on exposed, ener- working surface, that provides protec-
gized parts; and tion at the voltage on the live parts
(3) Whether the precautions taken when corresponding to the protection pro-
employees perform work on the installation vided by a 2.4-meter (8-foot) height at
provide protection equivalent to the protec- 50 volts.
tion provided by access and working space (2) Prevent access by unqualified per-
meeting ANSI/IEEE C2–2012.
sons. Fences, screens, partitions, or
(c) Draw-out-type circuit breakers. The walls shall enclose the rooms and other
employer shall ensure that, when em- spaces so as to minimize the possibility
ployees remove or insert draw-out-type that unqualified persons will enter.

circuit breakers, the breaker is in the (3) Restricted entry. Unqualified per-
open position. The employer shall also sons may not enter the rooms or other
503
spaces while the electric supply lines barriers around the work area to pre-
or equipment are energized. vent employees who are not working
(4) Warning signs. The employer shall on the equipment, but who are in the
display signs at entrances to the rooms area, from contacting the exposed live
and other spaces warning unqualified parts.
persons to keep out. (g) Substation entry—(1) Report upon
(5) Entrances to rooms and other. The entering. Upon entering an attended
employer shall keep each entrance to a substation, each employee, other than
room or other space locked, unless the employees regularly working in the
entrance is under the observation of a station, shall report his or her presence
person who is attending the room or to the employee in charge of substation
other space for the purpose of pre- activities to receive information on
venting unqualified employees from en- special system conditions affecting em-
tering. ployee safety.
(f) Guarding of energized parts—(1) (2) Job briefing. The job briefing re-
Type of guarding. The employer shall quired by § 1926.952 shall cover informa-
provide guards around all live parts option on special system conditions af-
erating at more than 150 volts to fecting employee safety, including the
ground without an insulating covering location of energized equipment in or
unless the location of the live parts adjacent to the work area and the lim-
gives sufficient clearance (horizontal, its of any deenergized work area.
vertical, or both) to minimize the pos-
sibility of accidental employee con- § 1926.967 Special conditions.
tact. (a) Capacitors. The following addi-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (f)(1): American Na- tional requirements apply to work on
tional Standard National Electrical Safety capacitors and on lines connected to
Code, ANSI/IEEE C2–2002 contains guidelines capacitors.
for the dimensions of clearance distances
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): See §§ 1926.961 and
about electric equipment in substations. In-
1926.962 for requirements pertaining to the
stallations meeting the ANSI provisions
deenergizing and grounding of capacitor in-
comply with paragraph (f)(1) of this section.
stallations.
The Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
istration will determine whether an installa- (1) Disconnect from energized source.
tion that does not conform to this ANSI Before employees work on capacitors,
standard complies with paragraph (f)(1) of the employer shall disconnect the ca-
this section based on the following criteria: pacitors from energized sources and
(1) Whether the installation conforms to
the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect
short circuit the capacitors. The em-
when the installation was made; ployer shall ensure that the employee
(2) Whether each employee is isolated from short circuiting the capacitors waits at
energized parts at the point of closest ap- least 5 minutes from the time of dis-
proach; and connection before applying the short
(3) Whether the precautions taken when circuit,
employees perform work on the installation (2) Short circuiting units. Before em-
provide protection equivalent to the protec- ployees handle the units, the employer
tion provided by horizontal and vertical
shall short circuit each unit in series-
clearances meeting ANSI/IEEE C2–2002.
parallel capacitor banks between all
(2) Maintaining guards during oper- terminals and the capacitor case or its
ation. Except for fuse replacement and rack. If the cases of capacitors are on
other necessary access by qualified per- ungrounded substation racks, the em-
sons, the employer shall maintain ployer shall bond the racks to ground.
guarding of energized parts within a (3) Short circuiting connected lines. The
compartment during operation and employer shall short circuit any line
maintenance functions to prevent acci- connected to capacitors before the line
dental contact with energized parts is treated as deenergized.
and to prevent dropped tools or other (b) Current transformer secondaries.
equipment from contacting energized The employer shall ensure that em-
parts. ployees do not open the secondary of a
(3) Temporary removal of guards. Be- current transformer while the trans-
fore guards are removed from energized former is energized. If the employer
equipment, the employer shall install cannot deenergize the primary of the
504
current transformer before employees (2) Controlling traffic. Before employ-

perform work on an instrument, a ees begin work in the vicinity of vehic-
relay, or other section of a current ular or pedestrian traffic that may en-
transformer secondary circuit, the em- danger them, the employer shall place
ployer shall bridge the circuit so that warning signs or flags and other traf-
the current transformer secondary does fic-control devices in conspicuous loca-
not experience an open-circuit conditions to alert and channel approaching
tion. traffic.
(c) Series streetlighting—(1) Applicable (3) Barricades. The employer shall use
requirements. If the open-circuit voltage barricades where additional employee
exceeds 600 volts, the employer shall protection is necessary.
ensure that employees work on series
(4) Excavated areas. The employer
streetlighting circuits in accordance
shall protect excavated areas with bar-
with § 1926.964 or § 1926.965, as appro-
ricades.
priate.
(2) Opening a series loop. Before any (5) Warning lights. The employer shall
employee opens a series loop, the em- display warning lights prominently at
ployer shall deenergize the night.
streetlighting transformer and isolate (h) Backfeed. When there is a possi-
it from the source of supply or shall bility of voltage backfeed from sources
bridge the loop to avoid an open-circuit of cogeneration or from the secondary
condition. system (for example, backfeed from
(d) Illumination. The employer shall more than one energized phase feeding
provide sufficient illumination to en- a common load), the requirements of
able the employee to perform the work § 1926.960 apply if employees will work
safely. the lines or equipment as energized,
and the requirements of §§ 1926.961 and
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d): See § 1926.56, which
requires specific levels of illumination. 1926.962 apply if employees will work
the lines or equipment as deenergized.
(e) Protection against drowning—(1) (i) Lasers. The employer shall install,
Personal flotation devices. Whenever an adjust, and operate laser equipment in
employee may be pulled or pushed, or accordance with § 1926.54.
might fall, into water where the danger (j) Hydraulic fluids. Hydraulic fluids
of drowning exists, the employer shall used for the insulated sections of
provide the employee with, and shall
equipment shall provide insulation for
ensure that the employee uses, a per-
the voltage involved.
sonal flotation device meeting
(k) Communication facilities—(1) Micro-
§ 1926.106.
(2) Maintaining flotation devices in safe wave transmission. (i) The employer
condition. The employer shall maintain shall ensure that no employee looks
each personal flotation device in safe into an open waveguide or antenna
condition and shall inspect each per- connected to an energized microwave
sonal flotation device frequently source.
enough to ensure that it does not have (ii) If the electromagnetic-radiation
rot, mildew, water saturation, or any level within an accessible area associ-
other condition that could render the ated with microwave communications
device unsuitable for use. systems exceeds the radiation-protec-
(3) Crossing bodies of water. An em- tion guide specified by § 1910.97(a)(2) of
ployee may cross streams or other bod- this chapter, the employer shall post
ies of water only if a safe means of pas- the area with warning signs containing
sage, such as a bridge, is available. the warning symbol described in
(f) Excavations. Excavation oper- § 1910.97(a)(3) of this chapter. The lower
ations shall comply with subpart P of half of the warning symbol shall in-
this part. clude the following statements, or ones
(g) Employee protection in public work that the employer can demonstrate are
areas—(1) Traffic control devices. Traffic- equivalent: ‘‘Radiation in this area
control signs and traffic-control de- may exceed hazard limitations and spe-
vices used for the protection of em- cial precautions are required. Obtain
ployees shall meet § 1926.200(g)(2). specific instruction before entering.’’
505
(iii) When an employee works in an of conductors insulated from one an-

area where the electromagnetic radi- other (multiple-conductor cable).
ation could exceed the radiation-pro- Cable sheath. A conductive protective
tection guide, the employer shall insti- covering applied to cables.
tute measures that ensure that the em-
NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘CABLE
ployee’s exposure is not greater than SHEATH’’: A cable sheath may consist of mul-
that permitted by that guide. Such tiple layers one or more of which is conduc-
measures may include administrative tive.
and engineering controls and personal
protective equipment. Circuit. A conductor or system of con-
(2) Power-line carrier. The employer ductors through which an electric cur-
shall ensure that employees perform rent is intended to flow.
power-line carrier work, including Clearance (between objects). The clear
work on equipment used for coupling distance between two objects measured
carrier current to power line conduc- surface to surface.
tors, in accordance with the require- Clearance (for work). Authorization to
ments of this subpart pertaining to perform specified work or permission
work on energized lines. to enter a restricted area.
Communication lines. (See Lines; (1)
§ 1926.968 Definitions. Communication lines.)
Attendant. An employee assigned to Conductor. A material, usually in the
remain immediately outside the en- form of a wire, cable, or bus bar, used
trance to an enclosed or other space to for carrying an electric current.
render assistance as needed to employ- Contract employer. An employer, other
ees inside the space. than a host employer, that performs
Automatic circuit recloser. A self-con- work covered by subpart V of this part
trolled device for automatically inter- under contract.
rupting and reclosing an alternating- Covered conductor. A conductor cov-
current circuit, with a predetermined ered with a dielectric having no rated
sequence of opening and reclosing fol- insulating strength or having a rated
lowed by resetting, hold closed, or insulating strength less than the volt-
lockout. age of the circuit in which the con-
Barricade. A physical obstruction ductor is used.
such as tapes, cones, or A-frame type Current-carrying part. A conducting
wood or metal structures that provides part intended to be connected in an
a warning about, and limits access to, electric circuit to a source of voltage.
a hazardous area. Non-current-carrying parts are those
Barrier. A physical obstruction that not intended to be so connected.
prevents contact with energized lines Deenergized. Free from any electrical
or equipment or prevents unauthorized connection to a source of potential dif-
access to a work area. ference and from electric charge; not
Bond. The electrical interconnection having a potential that is different
of conductive parts designed to main- from the potential of the earth.
tain a common electric potential.
Bus. A conductor or a group of con- NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘DEENERGIZED’’:
The term applies only to current-carrying
ductors that serve as a common con- parts, which are sometimes energized (alive).
nection for two or more circuits.
Bushing. An insulating structure that Designated employee (designated per-
includes a through conductor or that son). An employee (or person) who is
provides a passageway for such a con- assigned by the employer to perform
ductor, and that, when mounted on a specific duties under the terms of this
barrier, insulates the conductor from subpart and who has sufficient knowl-
the barrier for the purpose of con- edge of the construction and operation
ducting current from one side of the of the equipment, and the hazards in-
barrier to the other. volved, to perform his or her duties
Cable. A conductor with insulation, safely.
or a stranded conductor with or with- Electric line truck. A truck used to

out insulation and other coverings (sin- transport personnel, tools, and mate-
gle-conductor cable), or a combination rial for electric supply line work.
506
Electric supply equipment. Equipment Exposed, Exposed to contact (as applied

that produces, modifies, regulates, con- to energized parts). Not isolated or
trols, or safeguards a supply of electric guarded.
energy. Fall restraint system. A fall protection
Electric supply lines. (See ‘‘Lines; (2) system that prevents the user from
Electric supply lines.’’) falling any distance.
Electric utility. An organization re- First-aid training. Training in the ini-
sponsible for the installation, oper- tial care, including cardiopulmonary
ation, or maintenance of an electric resuscitation (which includes chest
supply system. compressions, rescue breathing, and, as
Enclosed space. A working space, such appropriate, other heart and lung re-
as a manhole, vault, tunnel, or shaft, suscitation techniques), performed by a
that has a limited means of egress or person who is not a medical practi-
entry, that is designed for periodic em- tioner, of a sick or injured person until
ployee entry under normal operating definitive medical treatment can be ad-
conditions, and that, under normal ministered.
conditions, does not contain a haz- Ground. A conducting connection,
ardous atmosphere, but may contain a whether planned or unplanned, between
hazardous atmosphere under abnormal an electric circuit or equipment and
conditions. the earth, or to some conducting body
that serves in place of the earth.
NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘ENCLOSED
SPACE’’. The Occupational Safety and Health Grounded. Connected to earth or to
Administration does not consider spaces that some conducting body that serves in
are enclosed but not designed for employee place of the earth.
entry under normal operating conditions to Guarded. Covered, fenced, enclosed,
be enclosed spaces for the purposes of this or otherwise protected, by means of
subpart. Similarly, the Occupational Safety suitable covers or casings, barrier rails
and Health Administration does not consider
or screens, mats, or platforms, de-
spaces that are enclosed and that are ex-
pected to contain a hazardous atmosphere to
signed to minimize the possibility,
be enclosed spaces for the purposes of this under normal conditions, of dangerous
subpart. Such spaces meet the definition of approach or inadvertent contact by
permit spaces in subpart AA of this part, and persons or objects.
entry into them must conform to that stand-
ard. NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘GUARDED’’:
Wires that are insulated, but not otherwise
Energized (alive, live). Electrically protected, are not guarded.
connected to a source of potential dif- Hazardous atmosphere. An atmosphere
ference, or electrically charged so as to that may expose employees to the risk
have a potential significantly different of death, incapacitation, impairment of
from that of earth in the vicinity. ability to self-rescue (that is, escape
Energy source. Any electrical, me- unaided from an enclosed space), in-
chanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, chem- jury, or acute illness from one or more
ical, nuclear, thermal, or other energy of the following causes:
source that could cause injury to em- (1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in
ployees.
excess of 10 percent of its lower flam-
Entry (as used in § 1926.953). The ac- mable limit (LFL);
tion by which a person passes through
(2) Airborne combustible dust at a
an opening into an enclosed space.
concentration that meets or exceeds its
Entry includes ensuing work activities
LFL;
in that space and is considered to have
occurred as soon as any part of the en- NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘HAZARDOUS AT-
trant’s body breaks the plane of an MOSPHERE’’ (2): This concentration may be
opening into the space. approximated as a condition in which the
dust obscures vision at a distance of 1.52 me-
Equipment (electric). A general term
ters (5 feet) or less.
including material, fittings, devices,
appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the (3) Atmospheric oxygen concentra-

like used as part of or in connection tion below 19.5 percent or above 23.5
with an electrical installation. percent;
507
(4) Atmospheric concentration of any takes precautions to protect employees from

substance for which a dose or a permis- the hazardous effects of the wind.
sible exposure limit is published in Host employer. An employer that op-
Subpart D, Occupational Health and En- erates, or that controls the operating
vironmental Controls, or in Subpart Z, procedures for, an electric power gen-
Toxic and Hazardous Substances, of this eration, transmission, or distribution
part and which could result in em- installation on which a contract em-
ployee exposure in excess of its dose or ployer is performing work covered by
permissible exposure limit; subpart V of this part.
NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘HAZARDOUS AT- NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘HOST EM-
MOSPHERE’’ (4): An atmospheric concentra- PLOYER’’: The Occupational Safety and
tion of any substance that is not capable of Health Administration will treat the electric
causing death, incapacitation, impairment of utility or the owner of the installation as
ability to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness the host employer if it operates or controls
due to its health effects is not covered by operating procedures for the installation. If
this provision. the electric utility or installation owner nei-
ther operates nor controls operating proce-
(5) Any other atmospheric condition dures for the installation, the Occupational
that is immediately dangerous to life Safety and Health Administration will treat
or health. the employer that the utility or owner has
contracted with to operate or control the op-
NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘HAZARDOUS AT- erating procedures for the installation as the
MOSPHERE’’ (5): For air contaminants for
host employer. In no case will there be more
which the Occupational Safety and Health than one host employer.
Administration has not determined a dose or
permissible exposure limit, other sources of Immediately dangerous to life or health
information, such as Material Safety Data (IDLH). Any condition that poses an
Sheets that comply with the Hazard Commu- immediate or delayed threat to life or
nication Standard, § 1926.59, published infor- that would cause irreversible adverse
mation, and internal documents can provide health effects or that would interfere
guidance in establishing acceptable atmos-
pheric conditions.
with an individual’s ability to escape
unaided from a permit space.
High-power tests. Tests in which the
NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘IMMEDIATELY
employer uses fault currents, load cur- DANGEROUS TO LIFE OR HEALTH’’: Some mate-
rents, magnetizing currents, and line- rials—hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium
dropping currents to test equipment, vapor, for example—may produce immediate
either at the equipment’s rated voltage transient effects that, even if severe, may
or at lower voltages. pass without medical attention, but are fol-
High-voltage tests. Tests in which the lowed by sudden, possibly fatal collapse 12–72
employer uses voltages of approxi- hours after exposure. The victim ‘‘feels nor-
mal’’ from recovery from transient effects
mately 1,000 volts as a practical min- until collapse. Such materials in hazardous
imum and in which the voltage source quantities are considered to be ‘‘imme-
has sufficient energy to cause injury. diately’’ dangerous to life or health.
High wind. A wind of such velocity
that one or more of the following haz- Insulated. Separated from other con-
ards would be present: ducting surfaces by a dielectric (in-
(1) The wind could blow an employee cluding air space) offering a high re-
from an elevated location, sistance to the passage of current.
(2) The wind could cause an employee NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘INSULATED’’:
or equipment handling material to lose When any object is said to be insulated, it is
control of the material, or understood to be insulated for the conditions
(3) The wind would expose an em- to which it normally is subjected. Otherwise,
it is, for the purpose of this subpart,
ployee to other hazards not controlled uninsulated.
by the standard involved.
Insulation (cable). Material relied
NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘HIGH WIND’’: upon to insulate the conductor from
The Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
istration normally considers winds exceeding
other conductors or conducting parts
or from ground.
64.4 kilometers per hour (40 miles per hour),

or 48.3 kilometers per hour (30 miles per Isolated. Not readily accessible to
hour) if the work involves material handling, persons unless special means for access
as meeting this criteria, unless the employer are used.
508
Line-clearance tree trimming. The Personal fall arrest system. A system

pruning, trimming, repairing, main- used to arrest an employee in a fall
taining, removing, or clearing of trees, from a working level.
or the cutting of brush, that is within Qualified employee (qualified person).
the following distance of electric sup- An employee (person) knowledgeable in
ply lines and equipment: the construction and operation of the
(1) For voltages to ground of 50 kilo- electric power generation, trans-
volts or less—3.05 meters (10 feet); mission, and distribution equipment
(2) For voltages to ground of more involved, along with the associated
than 50 kilovolts—3.05 meters (10 feet) hazards.
plus 0.10 meters (4 inches) for every 10
NOTE 1 TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘QUALIFIED
kilovolts over 50 kilovolts. EMPLOYEE (QUALIFIED PERSON)’’: An employee
Lines—(1) Communication lines. The must have the training required by
conductors and their supporting or § 1926.950(b)(2) to be a qualified employee.
containing structures which are used
NOTE 2 TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘QUALIFIED
for public or private signal or commu- EMPLOYEE (QUALIFIED PERSON)’’: Except under
nication service, and which operate at § 1926.954(b)(3)(iii), an employee who is under-
potentials not exceeding 400 volts to going on-the-job training and who has dem-
ground or 750 volts between any two onstrated, in the course of such training, an
points of the circuit, and the trans- ability to perform duties safely at his or her
mitted power of which does not exceed level of training and who is under the direct
150 watts. If the lines are operating at supervision of a qualified person is a quali-
less than 150 volts, no limit is placed fied person for the performance of those du-
ties.
on the transmitted power of the sys-
tem. Under certain conditions, commu- Statistical sparkover voltage. A tran-
nication cables may include commu- sient overvoltage level that produces a
nication circuits exceeding these limi- 97.72-percent probability of sparkover
tations where such circuits are also (that is, two standard deviations above
used to supply power solely to commu- the voltage at which there is a 50-per-
nication equipment. cent probability of sparkover).
NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘COMMUNICA- Statistical withstand voltage. A tran-
TION LINES’’: Telephone, telegraph, railroad sient overvoltage level that produces a
signal, data, clock, fire, police alarm, cable 0.14-percent probability of sparkover
television, and other systems conforming to (that is, three standard deviations
this definition are included. Lines used for below the voltage at which there is a
signaling purposes, but not included under 50-percent probability of sparkover).
this definition, are considered as electric
Switch. A device for opening and clos-
supply lines of the same voltage.
ing or for changing the connection of a
(2) Electric supply lines. Conductors circuit. In this subpart, a switch is
used to transmit electric energy and manually operable, unless otherwise
their necessary supporting or con- stated.
taining structures. Signal lines of more System operator. A qualified person
than 400 volts are always supply lines designated to operate the system or its
within this subpart, and those of less parts.
than 400 volts are considered as supply Vault. An enclosure, above or below
lines, if so run and operated through- ground, that personnel may enter and
out. that is used for installing, operating,
Manhole. A subsurface enclosure that or maintaining equipment or cable.
personnel may enter and that is used Vented vault. A vault that has provi-
for installing, operating, and maintain- sion for air changes using exhaust-flue
ing submersible equipment or cable. stacks and low-level air intakes oper-
Minimum approach distance. The clos- ating on pressure and temperature dif-
est distance an employee may approach ferentials that provide for airflow that
an energized or a grounded object. precludes a hazardous atmosphere from
developing.
NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘MINIMUM AP-

PROACH DISTANCE’’: Paragraph (c)(1)(i) of Voltage. The effective (root mean
§ 1926.960 requires employers to establish square, or rms) potential difference be-
minimum approach distances. tween any two conductors or between a
509
Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–17 Edition)
conductor and ground. This subpart ex- accordance with § 1926.960(c)(1)(i) and Table
presses voltages in nominal values, un- V–2 and Table V–7. This appendix provides
less otherwise indicated. The nominal essential background information and tech-
nical criteria for the calculation of the re-
voltage of a system or circuit is the quired minimum approach distances for live-
value assigned to a system or circuit of line work on electric power generation,
a given voltage class for the purpose of transmission, and distribution installations.
convenient designation. The operating Unless an employer is using the maximum
voltage of the system may vary above transient overvoltages specified in Table V–
or below this value. 8 for voltages over 72.5 kilovolts, the em-
Work-positioning equipment. A body ployer must use persons knowledgeable in
the techniques discussed in this appendix,
belt or body harness system rigged to
and competent in the field of electric trans-
allow an employee to be supported on mission and distribution system design, to
an elevated vertical surface, such as a determine the maximum transient over-
utility pole or tower leg, and work voltage.
with both hands free while leaning.
II. GENERAL
[79 FR 20696, Apr. 11, 2014, as amended at 79
A. Definitions. The following definitions
FR 56962, Sept. 24, 2014; 80 FR 25518, May 4,
from § 1926.968 relate to work on or near elec-
2015]
tric power generation, transmission, and dis-
tribution lines and equipment and the elec-
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926
trical hazards they present.
[RESERVED] Exposed. . . . Not isolated or guarded.
Guarded. Covered, fenced, enclosed, or oth-
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART V OF PART erwise protected, by means of suitable covers
1926—WORKING ON EXPOSED ENER- or casings, barrier rails or screens, mats, or
GIZED PARTS platforms, designed to minimize the possi-
bility, under normal conditions, of dangerous
I. INTRODUCTION approach or inadvertent contact by persons
Electric utilities design electric power gen- or objects.
eration, transmission, and distribution in- NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘GUARDED’’:
stallations to meet National Electrical Safe- Wires that are insulated, but not otherwise
ty Code (NESC), ANSI C2, requirements. protected, are not guarded.
Electric utilities also design transmission
and distribution lines to limit line outages Insulated. Separated from other conducting
as required by system reliability criteria 1 surfaces by a dielectric (including air space)
and to withstand the maximum overvoltages offering a high resistance to the passage of
impressed on the system. Conditions such as current.
switching surges, faults, and lightning can NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘INSULATED’’:
cause overvoltages. Electric utilities gen- When any object is said to be insulated, it is
erally select insulator design and lengths understood to be insulated for the conditions
and the clearances to structural parts so as to which it normally is subjected. Otherwise,
to prevent outages from contaminated line it is, for the purpose of this subpart,
insulation and during storms. Line insulator uninsulated.
lengths and structural clearances have, over
the years, come closer to the minimum ap- Isolated. Not readily accessible to persons
proach distances used by workers. As min- unless special means for access are used.
imum approach distances and structural Statistical sparkover voltage. A transient
clearances converge, it is increasingly im- overvoltage level that produces a 97.72-per-
portant that system designers and system cent probability of sparkover (that is, two
standard deviations above the voltage at
operating and maintenance personnel under-
which there is a 50-percent probability of
stand the concepts underlying minimum ap-
sparkover).
proach distances.
Statistical withstand voltage. A transient
The information in this appendix will as-
overvoltage level that produces a 0.14-per-
sist employers in complying with the min-
cent probability of sparkover (that is, three
imum approach-distance requirements con-
standard deviations below the voltage at
tained in §§ 1926.960(c)(1) and 1926.964(c). Em-
which there is a 50-percent probability of
ployers must use the technical criteria and
sparkover).
methodology presented in this appendix in
B. Installations energized at 50 to 300 volts.
establishing minimum approach distances in The hazards posed by installations energized
at 50 to 300 volts are the same as those found
1 Federal, State, and local regulatory bod- in many other workplaces. That is not to say
ies and electric utilities set reliability re- that there is no hazard, but the complexity
quirements that limit the number and dura- of electrical protection required does not
tion of system outages. compare to that required for high-voltage
510
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B
systems. The employee must avoid contact III. DETERMINATION OF MINIMUM APPROACH
with the exposed parts, and the protective DISTANCES FOR AC VOLTAGES GREATER
equipment used (such as rubber insulating THAN 300 VOLTS
gloves) must provide insulation for the
A. Voltages of 301 to 5,000 volts. Test data
voltages involved.
generally forms the basis of minimum air in-
C. Exposed energized parts over 300 volts AC.
sulation distances. The lowest voltage for
Paragraph (c)(1)(i) of § 1926.960 requires the
which sufficient test data exists is 5,000
employer to establish minimum approach
volts, and these data indicate that the min-
distances no less than the distances com-
imum air insulation distance at that voltage
puted by Table V–2 for ac systems so that
is 20 millimeters (1 inch). Because the min-
employees can work safely without risk of
imum air insulation distance increases with
sparkover.2
increasing voltage, and, conversely, de-
Unless the employee is using electrical
creases with decreasing voltage, an assumed
protective equipment, air is the insulating
minimum air insulation distance of 20 milli-
medium between the employee and energized
meters will protect against sparkover at
parts. The distance between the employee
voltages of 301 to 5,000 volts. Thus, 20 milli-
and an energized part must be sufficient for
meters is the electrical component of the
the air to withstand the maximum transient
minimum approach distance for these
overvoltage that can reach the worksite
voltages.
under the working conditions and practices
the employee is using. This distance is the B. Voltages of 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts. For
minimum air insulation distance, and it is voltages from 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts, the Occu-
equal to the electrical component of the pational Safety and Health Administration
minimum approach distance. bases the methodology for calculating the
Normal system design may provide or in- electrical component of the minimum ap-
clude a means (such as lightning arrestors) proach distance on Institute of Electrical
to control maximum anticipated transient and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 4–
overvoltages, or the employer may use tem- 1995, Standard Techniques for High-Voltage
porary devices (portable protective gaps) or Testing. Table 1 lists the critical sparkover
measures (such as preventing automatic cir- distances from that standard as listed in
cuit breaker reclosing) to achieve the same IEEE Std 516–2009, IEEE Guide for Mainte-
result. Paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of § 1926.960 re- nance Methods on Energized Power Lines.
quires the employer to determine the max-
imum anticipated per-unit transient over- TABLE 1—SPARKOVER DISTANCE FOR ROD-TO-
voltage, phase-to-ground, through an engi- ROD GAP
neering analysis or assume a maximum an-
Gap spacing from IEEE Std
ticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, 60 Hz rod-to-rod sparkover 4–1995
phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table (kV peak) (cm)
V–8, which specifies the following maximums
for ac systems: 25 2
36 3
72.6 to 420.0 kilovolts ............. 3.5 per unit. 46 4
420.1 to 550.0 kilovolts ........... 3.0 per unit. 53 5
550.1 to 800.0 kilovolts ........... 2.5 per unit. 60 6
See paragraph IV.A.2, later in this appen- 70 8
79 10
dix, for additional discussion of maximum
86 12
transient overvoltages. 95 14
D. Types of exposures. Employees working 104 16
on or near energized electric power genera- 112 18
tion, transmission, and distribution systems 120 20
face two kinds of exposures: Phase-to-ground 143 25
and phase-to-phase. The exposure is phase- 167 30
to-ground: (1) With respect to an energized 192 35
part, when the employee is at ground poten- 218 40
tial or (2) with respect to ground, when an 243 45
employee is at the potential of the energized 270 50
322 60
part during live-line barehand work. The ex-
posure is phase-to-phase, with respect to an Source: IEEE Std 516–2009.
energized part, when an employee is at the
potential of another energized part (at a dif- To use this table to determine the elec-
ferent potential) during live-line barehand trical component of the minimum approach
work. distance, the employer must determine the
peak phase-to-ground transient overvoltage
and select a gap from the table that cor-
2 Sparkover is a disruptive electric dis- responds to that voltage as a withstand volt-

charge in which an electric arc forms and age rather than a critical sparkover voltage.
electric current passes through air. To calculate the electrical component of the
511
minimum approach distance for voltages be- overvoltage, which corresponds to the with-
tween 5 and 72.5 kilovolts, use the following stand voltage for the relevant exposure.3
procedure: 4. Divide the maximum phase-to-ground
1. Divide the phase-to-phase voltage by the transient overvoltage by 0.85 to determine
square root of 3 to convert it to a phase-to- the corresponding critical sparkover voltage.
ground voltage. (The critical sparkover voltage is 3 standard
2. Multiply the phase-to-ground voltage by deviations (or 15 percent) greater than the
withstand voltage.)
the square root of 2 to convert the rms value
5. Determine the electrical component of
of the voltage to the peak phase-to-ground
the minimum approach distance from Table
voltage.
1 through interpolation.
3. Multiply the peak phase-to-ground volt- Table 2 illustrates how to derive the elec-
age by the maximum per-unit transient over- trical component of the minimum approach
voltage, which, for this voltage range, is 3.0, distance for voltages from 5.1 to 72.5 kilo-
as discussed later in this appendix. This is volts, before the application of any altitude
the maximum phase-to-ground transient correction factor, as explained later.
TABLE 2—CALCULATING THE ELECTRICAL COMPONENT OF MAD—751 V TO 72.5 KV
Maximum system phase-to-phase voltage (kV)
Step
15 36 46 72.5
1. Divide by √3 ...................................................................... 8.7 20.8 26.6 41.9

2. Multiply by √2 .................................................................... 12.2 29.4 37.6 59.2
3. Multiply by 3.0 ................................................................... 36.7 88.2 112.7 177.6
4. Divide by 0.85 ................................................................... 43.2 103.7 132.6 208.9
5. Interpolate from Table 1 ................................................... 3 + (7.2/10)*1 14 + (8.7/9)*2 20 + (12.6/ 35 + (16.9/
23)*5 26)*5
Electrical component of MAD (cm) ....................................... 3.72 15.93 22.74 38.25
C. Voltages of 72.6 to 800 kilovolts. For In Equation 1, C is 0.01: (1) For phase-to-
voltages of 72.6 kilovolts to 800 kilovolts, ground exposures that the employer can
this subpart bases the electrical component demonstrate consist only of air across the
of minimum approach distances, before the approach distance (gap) and (2) for phase-to-
application of any altitude correction factor, phase exposures if the employer can dem-
on the following formula: onstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap
EQUATION 1—FOR VOLTAGES OF 72.6 KV TO 800 and that no large conductive object is in the
KV gap. Otherwise, C is 0.011.
In Equation 1, the term a varies depending
D = 0.3048(C + a)VL-GT on whether the employee’s exposure is phase-
Where: to-ground or phase-to-phase and on whether
D = Electrical component of the minimum objects are in the gap. The employer must
approach distance in air in meters; use the equations in Table 3 to calculate a.
C = a correction factor associated with the Sparkover test data with insulation span-
variation of gap sparkover with voltage; ning the gap form the basis for the equations
a = A factor relating to the saturation of for phase-to-ground exposures, and sparkover
air at system voltages of 345 kilovolts or test data with only air in the gap form the
higher; 4 basis for the equations for phase-to-phase ex-
VL-G = Maximum system line-to-ground
posures. The phase-to-ground equations re-
rms voltage in kilovolts—it should be the
‘‘actual’’ maximum, or the normal highest sult in slightly higher values of a, and, con-
voltage for the range (for example, 10 percent sequently, produce larger minimum ap-
above the nominal voltage); and proach distances, than the phase-to-phase
T = Maximum transient overvoltage factor equations for the same value of VPeak.
in per unit.
3 The withstand voltage is the voltage at of about 630 kilovolts. Systems operating at
which sparkover is not likely to occur across 345 kilovolts (or maximum system voltages
a specified distance. It is the voltage taken of 362 kilovolts) can have peak maximum
at the 3s point below the sparkover voltage, transient overvoltages exceeding 630 kilo-
assuming that the sparkover curve follows a volts. Table V–2 sets equations for calcu-
normal distribution. lating a based on peak voltage.
4 Test data demonstrates that the satura-
tion factor is greater than 0 at peak voltages
512
In Equation 1, T is the maximum transient mine the total safe minimum approach dis-
overvoltage factor in per unit. As noted ear- tances used in live-line work.
lier, § 1926.960(c)(1)(ii) requires the employer The Occupational Safety and Health Ad-
to determine the maximum anticipated per- ministration based the ergonomic compo-
unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, nent of the minimum approach distance on
through an engineering analysis or assume a response time-distance analysis. This tech-
maximum anticipated per-unit transient nique uses an estimate of the total response
overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance
time to a hazardous incident and converts
with Table V–8. For phase-to-ground expo-
sures, the employer uses this value, called that time to the distance traveled. For ex-
TL-G, as T in Equation 1. IEEE Std 516–2009 ample, the driver of a car takes a given
provides the following formula to calculate amount of time to respond to a ‘‘stimulus’’
the phase-to-phase maximum transient over- and stop the vehicle. The elapsed time in-
voltage, TL-L, from TL-G: volved results in the car’s traveling some
TL-L = 1.35TL-G + 0.45. distance before coming to a complete stop.
This distance depends on the speed of the car
For phase-to-phase exposures, the employer
at the time the stimulus appears and the re-
uses this value as T in Equation 1.
D. Provisions for inadvertent movement. The action time of the driver.
minimum approach distance must include an In the case of live-line work, the employee
‘‘adder’’ to compensate for the inadvertent must first perceive that he or she is ap-
movement of the worker relative to an ener- proaching the danger zone. Then, the worker
gized part or the movement of the part rel- responds to the danger and must decelerate
ative to the worker. This ‘‘adder’’ must ac- and stop all motion toward the energized
count for this possible inadvertent move- part. During the time it takes to stop, the
ment and provide the worker with a com- employee will travel some distance. This is
fortable and safe zone in which to work. Em- the distance the employer must add to the
ployers must add the distance for inad- electrical component of the minimum ap-
vertent movement (called the ‘‘ergonomic proach distance to obtain the total safe min-
component of the minimum approach dis- imum approach distance.
tance’’) to the electrical component to deter-
513
ER11AP14.036</GPH>
At voltages from 751 volts to 72.5 kilo- constant distance from the employee and,
volts,5 the electrical component of the min- thus, maintain the appropriate minimum ap-
imum approach distance is smaller than the proach distance automatically.
ergonomic component. At 72.5 kilovolts, the The location of the worker and the type of
electrical component is only a little more work methods the worker is using also influ-
than 0.3 meters (1 foot). An ergonomic com- ence the length of the ergonomic component
ponent of the minimum approach distance of the minimum approach distance. In this
must provide for all the worker’s unantici- higher voltage range, the employees use
pated movements. At these voltages, work-
work methods that more tightly control
ers generally use rubber insulating gloves;
their movements than when the workers per-
however, these gloves protect only a work-
er’s hands and arms. Therefore, the energized form work using rubber insulating gloves.
object must be at a safe approach distance to The worker, therefore, is farther from the
protect the worker’s face. In this case, 0.61 energized line or equipment and must be
meters (2 feet) is a sufficient and practical more precise in his or her movements just to
ergonomic component of the minimum ap- perform the work. For these reasons, this
proach distance. subpart adopts an ergonomic component of
For voltages between 72.6 and 800 kilovolts, the minimum approach distance of 0.31 m (1
employees must use different work practices foot) for voltages between 72.6 and 800 kilo-
during energized line work. Generally, em- volts.
ployees use live-line tools (hot sticks) to per- Table 4 summarizes the ergonomic compo-
form work on energized equipment. These nent of the minimum approach distance for
tools, by design, keep the energized part at a various voltage ranges.
TABLE 4—ERGONOMIC COMPONENT OF MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCE
Distance
Voltage range (kV)
m ft
0.301 to 0.750 ....................................................................................................................... 0.31 1.0

0.751 to 72.5 ......................................................................................................................... 0.61 2.0
72.6 to 800 ............................................................................................................................ 0.31 1.0
Note: The employer must add this distance to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance to obtain the full
minimum approach distance.
The ergonomic component of the minimum the work. For example, the employee should
approach distance accounts for errors in be able to perform all of the following ac-
maintaining the minimum approach distance tions without straying into the minimum ap-
(which might occur, for example, if an em- proach distance:
ployee misjudges the length of a conductive • Adjust his or her hardhat,
object he or she is holding), and for errors in • maneuver a tool onto an energized part
judging the minimum approach distance. with a reasonable amount of overreaching or
The ergonomic component also accounts for
underreaching,
inadvertent movements by the employee,
such as slipping. In contrast, the working po- • reach for and handle tools, material, and
sition selected to properly maintain the min- equipment passed to him or her, and
imum approach distance must account for • adjust tools, and replace components on
all of an employee’s reasonably likely move- them, when necessary during the work pro-
ments and still permit the employee to ad- cedure.
here to the applicable minimum approach The training of qualified employees re-
distance. (See Figure 1.) Reasonably likely quired under § 1926.950, and the job planning
movements include an employee’s adjust- and briefing required under § 1926.952, must
ments to tools, equipment, and working posi- address selection of a proper working posi-
tions and all movements needed to perform tion.
5 For voltages of 50 to 300 volts, Table V–2 distance for this voltage range contains nei-
specifies a minimum approach distance of ther an electrical component nor an ergo-
‘‘avoid contact.’’ The minimum approach nomic component.
514
E. Miscellaneous correction factors. Changes 1. Dielectric strength of air. The dielectric

in the air medium that forms the insulation strength of air in a uniform electric field at
influences the strength of an air gap. A brief
discussion of each factor follows.
515
ER11AP14.037</GPH>
standard atmospheric conditions is approxi- overvoltage has an associated transient volt-
mately 3 kilovolts per millimeter.6 The pres- age wave shape. The wave shape arriving at
sure, temperature, and humidity of the air, the site and its magnitude vary consider-
the shape, dimensions, and separation of the ably.
electrodes, and the characteristics of the ap- In developing requirements for minimum
plied voltage (wave shape) affect the disrup- approach distances, the Occupational Safety
tive gradient. and Health Administration considered the
2. Atmospheric effect. The empirically deter- most common wave shapes and the mag-
mined electrical strength of a given gap is nitude of transient overvoltages found on
normally applicable at standard atmospheric electric power generation, transmission, and
conditions (20 °C, 101.3 kilopascals, 11 grams/ distribution systems. The equations in Table
cubic centimeter humidity). An increase in V–2 for minimum approach distances use per-
the density (humidity) of the air inhibits unit maximum transient overvoltages, which
sparkover for a given air gap. The combina- are relative to the nominal maximum volt-
tion of temperature and air pressure that re- age of the system. For example, a maximum
sults in the lowest gap sparkover voltage is transient overvoltage value of 3.0 per unit in-
high temperature and low pressure. This dicates that the highest transient over-
combination of conditions is not likely to voltage is 3.0 times the nominal maximum
occur. Low air pressure, generally associated system voltage.
with high humidity, causes increased elec- 3. Typical magnitude of overvoltages. Table 5
trical strength. An average air pressure gen- lists the magnitude of typical transient
erally correlates with low humidity. Hot and overvoltages.
dry working conditions normally result in
reduced electrical strength. The equations TABLE 5—MAGNITUDE OF TYPICAL TRANSIENT
for minimum approach distances in Table V– OVERVOLTAGES
2 assume standard atmospheric conditions.
3. Altitude. The reduced air pressure at high Magnitude
Cause
altitudes causes a reduction in the electrical (per unit)
strength of an air gap. An employer must in- Energized 200-mile line without closing resistors 3.5
crease the minimum approach distance by Energized 200-mile line with one-step closing
about 3 percent per 300 meters (1,000 feet) of resistor ............................................................. 2.1
increased altitude for altitudes above 900 me- Energized 200-mile line with multistep resistor ... 2.5
ters (3,000 feet). Table V–4 specifies the alti- Reclosing with trapped charge one-step resistor 2.2
tude correction factor that the employer Opening surge with single restrike ...................... 3.0
Fault initiation unfaulted phase ........................... 2.1
must use in calculating minimum approach Fault initiation adjacent circuit ............................. 2.5
distances. Fault clearing ....................................................... 1.7 to 1.9
IV. DETERMINING MINIMUM APPROACH
DISTANCES 4. Standard deviation—air-gap withstand.
For each air gap length under the same at-
A. Factors Affecting Voltage Stress at the mospheric conditions, there is a statistical
Worksite variation in the breakdown voltage. The
probability of breakdown against voltage has
1. System voltage (nominal). The nominal a normal (Gaussian) distribution. The stand-
system voltage range determines the voltage ard deviation of this distribution varies with
for purposes of calculating minimum ap- the wave shape, gap geometry, and atmos-
proach distances. The employer selects the pheric conditions. The withstand voltage of
range in which the nominal system voltage the air gap is three standard deviations (3s)
falls, as given in the relevant table, and uses below the critical sparkover voltage. (The
the highest value within that range in per- critical sparkover voltage is the crest value
unit calculations. of the impulse wave that, under specified
2. Transient overvoltages. Operation of conditions, causes sparkover 50 percent of
switches or circuit breakers, a fault on a line the time. An impulse wave of three standard
or circuit or on an adjacent circuit, and deviations below this value, that is, the
similar activities may generate transient withstand voltage, has a probability of
overvoltages on an electrical system. Each sparkover of approximately 1 in 1,000.)
5. Broken Insulators. Tests show reductions
6 For the purposes of estimating arc length, in the insulation strength of insulator
Subpart V generally assumes a more con- strings with broken skirts. Broken units
servative dielectric strength of 10 kilovolts may lose up to 70 percent of their withstand
per 25.4 millimeters, consistent with assump- capacity. Because an employer cannot deter-
tions made in consensus standards such as mine the insulating capability of a broken
the National Electrical Safety Code (IEEE unit without testing it, the employer must
consider damaged units in an insulator to
C2–2012). The more conservative value ac-

counts for variables such as electrode shape, have no insulating value. Additionally, the
wave shape, and a certain amount of over- presence of a live-line tool alongside an insu-
voltage. lator string with broken units may further
516
reduce the overall insulating strength. The ing transient overvoltages. Alternatively,
number of good units that must be present in the employer can hold the overvoltage to an
a string for it to be ‘‘insulated’’ as defined by acceptable level by installing surge arresters
§ 1926.968 depends on the maximum over- or portable protective gaps on the system. In
voltage possible at the worksite. addition, the employer can change the trans-
mission system to minimize the effect of
B. Minimum Approach Distances Based on
Known, Maximum-Anticipated Per-Unit switching operations. Section 4.8 of IEEE
Transient Overvoltages Std 516–2009 describes various ways of con-
trolling, and thereby reducing, maximum
1. Determining the minimum approach dis- transient overvoltages.
tance for AC systems. Under § 1926.960(c)(1)(ii), 2. Operation of circuit breakers.7 The max-
the employer must determine the maximum imum transient overvoltage that can reach
anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, the worksite is often the result of switching
phase-to-ground, through an engineering
on the line on which employees are working.
analysis or must assume a maximum antici-
Disabling automatic reclosing during ener-
pated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-
to-ground, in accordance with Table V–8. gized line work, so that the line will not be
When the employer conducts an engineering reenergized after being opened for any rea-
analysis of the system and determines that son, limits the maximum switching surge
the maximum transient overvoltage is lower overvoltage to the larger of the opening
than specified by Table V–8, the employer surge or the greatest possible fault-gen-
must ensure that any conditions assumed in erated surge, provided that the devices (for
the analysis, for example, that employees example, insertion resistors) are operable
block reclosing on a circuit or install port- and will function to limit the transient over-
able protective gaps, are present during ener- voltage and that circuit breaker restrikes do
gized work. To ensure that these conditions not occur. The employer must ensure the
are present, the employer may need to insti- proper functioning of insertion resistors and
tute new live-work procedures reflecting the other overvoltage-limiting devices when the
conditions and limitations set by the engi- employer’s engineering analysis assumes
neering analysis. their proper operation to limit the over-
2. Calculation of reduced approach distance voltage level. If the employer cannot disable
values. An employer may take the following the reclosing feature (because of system op-
steps to reduce minimum approach distances erating conditions), other methods of con-
when the maximum transient overvoltage on
trolling the switching surge level may be
the system (that is, the maximum transient
necessary.
overvoltage without additional steps to con-
trol overvoltages) produces unacceptably Transient surges on an adjacent line, par-
large minimum approach distances: ticularly for double circuit construction,
Step 1. Determine the maximum voltage may cause a significant overvoltage on the
(with respect to a given nominal voltage line on which employees are working. The
range) for the energized part. employer’s engineering analysis must ac-
Step 2. Determine the technique to use to count for coupling to adjacent lines.
control the maximum transient overvoltage. 3. Surge arresters. The use of modern surge
(See paragraphs IV.C and IV.D of this appen- arresters allows a reduction in the basic im-
dix.) Determine the maximum transient pulse-insulation levels of much transmission
overvoltage that can exist at the worksite system equipment. The primary function of
with that form of control in place and with early arresters was to protect the system in-
a confidence level of 3s . This voltage is the sulation from the effects of lightning. Mod-
withstand voltage for the purpose of calcu- ern arresters not only dissipate lightning-
lating the appropriate minimum approach caused transients, but may also control
distance. many other system transients caused by
Step 3. Direct employees to implement pro- switching or faults.
cedures to ensure that the control technique
The employer may use properly designed
is in effect during the course of the work.
arresters to control transient overvoltages
Step 4. Using the new value of transient
along a transmission line and thereby reduce
overvoltage in per unit, calculate the re-
quired minimum approach distance from the requisite length of the insulator string
Table V–2.
7 The detailed design of a circuit inter-
C. Methods of Controlling Possible Transient
rupter, such as the design of the contacts, re-
Overvoltage Stress Found on a System
sistor insertion, and breaker timing control,
1. Introduction. There are several means of are beyond the scope of this appendix. The
controlling overvoltages that occur on trans- design of the system generally accounts for
mission systems. For example, the employer these features. This appendix only discusses
can modify the operation of circuit breakers features that can limit the maximum switch-
or other switching devices to reduce switching transient overvoltage on a system.
517
and possibly the maximum transient over- site by installing portable protective gaps,
voltage on the line.8 the employer may calculate the minimum
4. Switching Restrictions. Another form of approach distance as follows:
overvoltage control involves establishing Step 1. Select the appropriate withstand
switching restrictions, whereby the em- voltage for the protective gap based on sys-
ployer prohibits the operation of circuit tem requirements and an acceptable prob-
breakers until certain system conditions are
ability of gap sparkover.9
present. The employer restricts switching by
Step 2. Determine a gap distance that pro-
using a tagging system, similar to that used
for a permit, except that the common term vides a withstand voltage 10 greater than or
used for this activity is a ‘‘hold-off’’ or ‘‘re- equal to the one selected in the first step.11
striction.’’ These terms indicate that the re- Step 3. Use 110 percent of the gap’s critical
striction does not prevent operation, but sparkover voltage to determine the phase-to-
only modifies the operation during the live- ground peak voltage at gap sparkover (VPPG
work activity. Peak).
Step 4. Determine the maximum transient
D. Minimum Approach Distance Based on Con- overvoltage, phase-to-ground, at the work-
trol of Maximum Transient Overvoltage at the site from the following formula:
Worksite
When the employer institutes control of
maximum transient overvoltage at the work-
Step 5. Use this value of T 12 in the equation Problem: Employees are to perform work on
in Table V–2 to obtain the minimum ap- a 500-kilovolt transmission line at sea level
proach distance. If the worksite is no more that is subject to transient overvoltages of
than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above sea level, 2.4 p.u. The maximum operating voltage of
the employer may use this value of T to de- the line is 550 kilovolts. Determine the
termine the minimum approach distance length of the protective gap that will provide
from Table 7 through Table 14. the minimum practical safe approach dis-
tance. Also, determine what that minimum
NOTE: All rounding must be to the next approach distance is.
higher value (that is, always round up). Step 1. Calculate the smallest practical
maximum transient overvoltage (1.25 times
Sample protective gap calculations.
the crest phase-to-ground voltage): 13
8 Surge arrester application is beyond the voltage for each gap spacing (for example, a
scope of this appendix. However, if the em- critical sparkover voltage of 665 kilovolts for
ployer installs the arrester near the work a gap spacing of 1.2 meters). The withstand
site, the application would be similar to the voltage for the gap is equal to 85 percent of
protective gaps discussed in paragraph IV.D its critical sparkover voltage.
of this appendix. 11 Switch steps 1 and 2 if the length of the
9 The employer should check the withstand
protective gap is known.
voltage to ensure that it results in a prob- 12 IEEE Std 516–2009 states that most em-
ability of gap flashover that is acceptable
from a system outage perspective. (In other ployers add 0.2 to the calculated value of T
words, a gap sparkover will produce a system as an additional safety factor.
13 To eliminate sparkovers due to minor
outage. The employer should determine
whether such an outage will impact overall system disturbances, the employer should
system performance to an acceptable de- use a withstand voltage no lower than 1.25
gree.) In general, the withstand voltage p.u. Note that this is a practical, or oper-
should be at least 1.25 times the maximum ational, consideration only. It may be fea-
crest operating voltage. sible for the employer to use lower values of
10 The manufacturer of the gap provides,
withstand voltage.
based on test data, the critical sparkover
518
ER11AP14.038</GPH>
This value equals the withstand voltage of Step 3. The phase-to-ground peak voltage
the protective gap. at gap sparkover (VPPG Peak) is 110 percent of
Step 2. Using test data for a particular pro- the value from the previous step:
tective gap, select a gap that has a critical
665kV × 1.10 = 732kV
sparkover voltage greater than or equal to:
561kV ÷ 0.85 = 660kV This value corresponds to the withstand
voltage of the electrical component of the
For example, if a protective gap with a 1.22-
minimum approach distance.
m (4.0-foot) spacing tested to a critical
Step 4. Use this voltage to determine the
sparkover voltage of 665 kilovolts (crest), se-
lect this gap spacing. worksite value of T:
Step 5. Use this value of T in the equation 3. Worksite. If the employer installs protec-
in Table V–2 to obtain the minimum ap- tive gaps at the worksite, the gap setting es-
proach distance, or look up the minimum ap- tablishes the worksite impulse insulation
proach distance in Table 7 through Table 14: strength. Lightning strikes as far as 6 miles
MAD = 2.29m(7.6ft) from the worksite can cause a voltage surge
greater than the gap withstand voltage, and
E. Location of Protective Gaps a gap sparkover can occur. In addition, the
1. Adjacent structures. The employer may gap can sparkover from overvoltages on the
install the protective gap on a structure ad- line that exceed the withstand voltage of the
jacent to the worksite, as this practice does gap. Consequently, the employer must pro-
not significantly reduce the protection af- tect employees from hazards resulting from
forded by the gap. any sparkover that could occur.
2. Terminal stations. Gaps installed at ter- F. Disabling automatic reclosing. There are
minal stations of lines or circuits provide a two reasons to disable the automatic-re-
level of protection; however, that level of
closing feature of circuit-interrupting de-
protection may not extend throughout the
vices while employees are performing live-
length of the line to the worksite. The use of
substation terminal gaps raises the possi- line work:
bility that separate surges could enter the • To prevent reenergization of a circuit
line at opposite ends, each with low enough faulted during the work, which could create
magnitude to pass the terminal gaps without a hazard or result in more serious injuries or
sparkover. When voltage surges occur simul- damage than the injuries or damage pro-
taneously at each end of a line and travel to- duced by the original fault;
ward each other, the total voltage on the • To prevent any transient overvoltage
line at the point where they meet is the caused by the switching surge that would re-
arithmetic sum of the two surges. A gap in- sult if the circuit were reenergized.
stalled within 0.8 km (0.5 mile) of the work- However, due to system stability consider-
site will protect against such intersecting ations, it may not always be feasible to dis-
waves. Engineering studies of a particular able the automatic-reclosing feature.
line or system may indicate that employers
can adequately protect employees by install- V. MINIMUM APPROACH-DISTANCE TABLES
ing gaps at even more distant locations. In
any event, unless using the default values for A. Legacy tables. Employers may use the
T from Table V–8, the employer must deter- minimum approach distances in Table 6 until
mine T at the worksite. March 31, 2015.
ER11AP14.040</GPH>
519
ER11AP14.039</GPH>
TABLE 6—MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES UNTIL MARCH 31, 2015

Voltage range
phase to phase (kV) m ft m ft
2.1 to 15.0 ............................................................................. 0.64 2.1 0.61 2.0

15.1 to 35.0 ........................................................................... 0.71 2.3 0.71 2.3
35.1 to 46.0 ........................................................................... 0.76 2.5 0.76 2.5
46.1 to 72.5 ........................................................................... 0.91 3.0 0.91 3.0
72.6 to 121 ............................................................................ 1.02 3.3 1.37 4.5
138 to 145 ............................................................................. 1.07 3.5 1.52 5.0
161 to 169 ............................................................................. 1.12 3.7 1.68 5.5
230 to 242 ............................................................................. 1.52 5.0 2.54 8.3
345 to 362 * ........................................................................... 2.13 7.0 4.06 13.3
500 to 552 * ........................................................................... 3.35 11.0 6.10 20.0
700 to 765 * ........................................................................... 4.57 15.0 9.45 31.0
* The minimum approach distance may be the shortest distance between the energized part and the grounded surface.
B. Alternative minimum approach distances. vided that the employer follows the notes to
Employers may use the minimum approach those tables.
distances in Table 7 through Table 14 pro-
TABLE 7—AC MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES—72.6 TO 121.0 KV
T (p.u.)
m ft m ft
1.5 ......................................................................................... 0.67 2.2 0.84 2.8

1.6 ......................................................................................... 0.69 2.3 0.87 2.9
1.7 ......................................................................................... 0.71 2.3 0.90 3.0
1.8 ......................................................................................... 0.74 2.4 0.93 3.1
1.9 ......................................................................................... 0.76 2.5 0.96 3.1
2.0 ......................................................................................... 0.78 2.6 0.99 3.2
2.1 ......................................................................................... 0.81 2.7 1.01 3.3
2.2 ......................................................................................... 0.83 2.7 1.04 3.4
2.3 ......................................................................................... 0.85 2.8 1.07 3.5
2.4 ......................................................................................... 0.88 2.9 1.10 3.6
2.5 ......................................................................................... 0.90 3.0 1.13 3.7
2.6 ......................................................................................... 0.92 3.0 1.16 3.8
2.7 ......................................................................................... 0.95 3.1 1.19 3.9
2.8 ......................................................................................... 0.97 3.2 1.22 4.0
2.9 ......................................................................................... 0.99 3.2 1.24 4.1
3.0 ......................................................................................... 1.02 3.3 1.27 4.2
3.1 ......................................................................................... 1.04 3.4 1.30 4.3
3.2 ......................................................................................... 1.06 3.5 1.33 4.4
3.3 ......................................................................................... 1.09 3.6 1.36 4.5
3.4 ......................................................................................... 1.11 3.6 1.39 4.6
3.5 ......................................................................................... 1.13 3.7 1.42 4.7

Phase-to-ground rxposure Phase-to-phase rxposure
T (p.u.)
m ft m ft
1.5 ......................................................................................... 0.74 2.4 0.95 3.1

1.6 ......................................................................................... 0.76 2.5 0.98 3.2
1.7 ......................................................................................... 0.79 2.6 1.02 3.3
1.8 ......................................................................................... 0.82 2.7 1.05 3.4
1.9 ......................................................................................... 0.85 2.8 1.08 3.5
2.0 ......................................................................................... 0.88 2.9 1.12 3.7
2.1 ......................................................................................... 0.90 3.0 1.15 3.8
2.2 ......................................................................................... 0.93 3.1 1.19 3.9
2.3 ......................................................................................... 0.96 3.1 1.22 4.0
2.4 ......................................................................................... 0.99 3.2 1.26 4.1
2.5 ......................................................................................... 1.02 3.3 1.29 4.2
2.6 ......................................................................................... 1.04 3.4 1.33 4.4
2.7 ......................................................................................... 1.07 3.5 1.36 4.5
2.8 ......................................................................................... 1.10 3.6 1.39 4.6

2.9 ......................................................................................... 1.13 3.7 1.43 4.7
3.0 ......................................................................................... 1.16 3.8 1.46 4.8
3.1 ......................................................................................... 1.19 3.9 1.50 4.9
520
TABLE 8—AC MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES—121.1 TO 145.0 KV—Continued

Phase-to-ground rxposure Phase-to-phase rxposure
T (p.u.)
m ft m ft
3.2 ......................................................................................... 1.21 4.0 1.53 5.0

3.3 ......................................................................................... 1.24 4.1 1.57 5.2
3.4 ......................................................................................... 1.27 4.2 1.60 5.2
3.5 ......................................................................................... 1.30 4.3 1.64 5.4

T (p.u.)
m ft m ft
1.5 ......................................................................................... 0.81 2.7 1.05 3.4

1.6 ......................................................................................... 0.84 2.8 1.09 3.6
1.7 ......................................................................................... 0.87 2.9 1.13 3.7
1.8 ......................................................................................... 0.90 3.0 1.17 3.8
1.9 ......................................................................................... 0.94 3.1 1.21 4.0
2.0 ......................................................................................... 0.97 3.2 1.25 4.1
2.1 ......................................................................................... 1.00 3.3 1.29 4.2
2.2 ......................................................................................... 1.03 3.4 1.33 4.4
2.3 ......................................................................................... 1.07 3.5 1.37 4.5
2.4

29 CFR

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

29 CFR

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

29 CFR

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Title 29

Revised as of July 1, 2017

Containing a codification of documents

Published by the Office of the Federal Register

Legal Status and Use of Seals and Logos

Use of ISBN Prefix

U.S. GOVERNMENT PUBLISHING OFFICE

U.S. Superintendent of Documents • Washington, DC 20402–0001

Phone: toll-free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800

SUBTITLE B—REGULATIONS RELATING TO LABOR (CONTINUED)

Chapter XVII—Occupational Safety and Health Administration,

Table of CFR Titles and Chapters ....................................................... 791

Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR ......................... 811

List of CFR Sections Affected ............................................................. 821

To cite the regulations in

SUBTITLE B—REGULATIONS RELATING TO LABOR (CONTINUED)

CHAPTER XVII—Occupational Safety and Health Administra-

Subpart J—Welding and Cutting APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926—

Subpart L—Scaffolds Subpart P—Excavations

TERIA FOR DETERMINING THE FEASIBILITY TIMBER SHORING FOR TRENCHES

Subpart R—Steel Erection Subpart T—Demolition

1926.750 Scope. 1926.850 Preparatory operations.

GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH

Subpart V—Electric Power Transmission Subpart X—Stairways and Ladders

Table A zone. applicable to construction work. This repub-

Subpart A—General § 1926.3 Inspections—right of entry.

opportunity to be heard upon the re- 29 CFR citation OMB con-

1926.1111 ............................................................ 1218–0090 (i.e., provisions containing the word

http://www.acgih.org: (14) ANSI B7.1–1970, Safety Code for

§§ 1926.57(g), 1926.303(b), 1926.303(c), and (i) American National Standards In-

September 15, 2011; IBR approved for chase from the:

NW., Washington DC 20240; telephone: http://www.ime.org/:

Jun. 5, 1964, IBR approved for waukee, WI 53214; telephone: 1–800–369–

These descriptions are general in na- equipment.

single family or multifamily housing roads, streets, curbs, gutters, side-

buildings. following purposes:

779e(b)). This Act authorizes financial bilitation, alteration, conversion or

velopment of land or improvements for pled, or other health impaired children

for construction of residential schools road Passenger Corporation may con-

formance of the contract to work in types of performance.

in any amount exceeding $10,000 must under the contract.

Health and sanitation requirements § 1926.32 Definitions.

other types of pressure vessels and or condition which tends to weaken or

(r) Should means recommended. plan:

(2) Procedures to be followed by em- Subpart D—Occupational Health

[58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993]

(2) Portable containers used to dis- (iv) Combustion toilets.

showers shall be provided in accord- ment as required in subpart E, shall be

Where: § 1926.54 Nonionizing radiation.

APPENDIX A TO § 1926.55—1970 AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION

Abate; see Temephos.

Acrolein ................................................. 107–02–8 0.1 0.25 —

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Aldrin ..................................................... 309–00–2 — 0.25 X

Butanethiol; see Butyl mercaptan.

n-Butyl alcohol ....................................... 71–36–3 100 300 —

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

tert-Butyl chromate (as CrO3); see

Chromium metal and insol. salts (as